•'!M
ity
^gias
, *^
ttlKt
'1
THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES
w^
:tf:
"Mi
sr
s'iSisf"
fN /
'i^mim
ix>i
A
NEW METHOD
OP LEARNING WITH FACILITY THE
LATIN TONGUE,
Containing the Rules of
Genders,
Declensions,
Preterites,
Syntax,
Quantity, and
Latin Accents,
Digested in the clearest and concisest Order.
Enlarged with a variety of solid Remarks, necessary not only
for a perfect Knowledge of the Latin Tongue, but
likewise for understanding the best Authors : extracted
from the ablest Writers on this Language. — With
A TREATISE ON LATIN POETRY.
TRANSLATED, AND IMPROVED, FROM THE FRENCH OF THE
MESSIEURS DE PORT-ROYAL,
By T. NUGENT, LL. D.
A NEW EDITION, carefully Revised and Cm-rected.
TO WHICH ARE ADDED,
AN INDEX OF WORDS and a TABLE of MATTERS.
IN TWO VOLUMES.
VOL. II.
LONDON:
PRINTED FOR F. WINGRAVE, & J. COLLINGWOOD, STRAND.
1816.
1
'•I.e. HANSARD, rrinlrr, POtrborougli-court, FIcet- Mree.l , L ondon.
r
BOOK V.
SYNTAX.
General distrihulion of the whole Syntax,
CONSTRUCTION, by the Greeks called Syntax, is
nothing more than a fit composition and arrangement of the
parts of speech.
It is divided into simple or regular, and figurative or irregular.
The regular is that which follows the natural order, and resem-
bles greatly the manner of speaking in vulgar languages.
The irregular or figurative is that which recedes from this com-
mon usage, in order to follow some particular turns and forms of
speakings, which have been studied by authors, for the sake of
conciseness and elegance.
Construction is divided into two sorts, one of concord, and the
other of government.
The syntax of concord is when the parts agree among them-
selves in some thing, and is of four sorts.
1. That of the substantive with the adjective ; deus sanctus. ■
2. That of the relative with the antecedent; deus qui est,
3. That of the nominative with the verb ; ego amo.
And these concords ought to be attentively considered in dis-
course ; for there is no adjective that hath not its substantive, nor
relative that hath not its antecedent, nor verb that hath not it*
nominative, either expressed or understood.
4. To these three concords we add another, which is that of
the accusative with the infinitive ; me arnare : supplicem esse victori.
But in Greekish phrases, the nominative is frequently joined to
the infinitive.
The syntax of government is when one part of speech governs
another : which is done, either according to the force of some
preposition expressed or understood, or according to the property
and nature of each case.
1. The genitive of itself always denotes the possessor, or that one
thing is said of another, as liber Petri, Peter's book : vidnus Achillis,
the wound of Achilles, whether it be taken actively for the wound
which he made, or passively for that which he received. Where-
fore this case is always governed by another substantive, though
frequently understood ; which has occasioned a multitude of false or
useless rules, as hereafter we shall make appear. We are only to
Vol. II. B observe
2067107 .
2 NEW METHOD. Book V.
observe tliat In Greekish plirases, this case ma)' be governed also
by the preposition Ik. Plcnus vini (subaud. In) as in French we
say, p/ein dc via.
2. Tlic (hitive ahvays denotes that to which the thing or action
refers. For wliicli reason there is neither noun nor verb to which
it may not be joined in this sense. AJfinis regi ; communis omnibus;
est mild ; peto tibi, sibi snpit. Sometimes there are even two da-
tives ; do tibi j}ig)iori, &c.
3. The accusative either denotes the subject into wliich the
action of the verb passeth, amat patrem ; or agrees with the infi-
nitive, as above, No. 4-. or is governed by some preposition ex-
pressed or understood, as after the verbs of teaching, moving, in
the questions of time and measure, and others. Neither is there
ever an accusative which does not depend on one of these three
things.
4. The al)lative, according to Sanctius, ought rather to be
called the case of the preposition, because it is ahvays governed by
a preposition expressed or understood, as we shall demonstrate in
the questions uui, qua, and unde, in the comparatives, in the
verbs passive and others, and also in the ablatives which are called
absolute.
5. As to the vocative, it is never governed by any thing, but
only signifies the person to whom we speak, or with whom we
converse ; for which reason it agrees sometimes with the verb in
the second person, as Domine, miserere mei.
These fundamental rules, being short and easy, may without
any difficulty be retained, and give us a general idea of the whole
syntax, which may likewise serve for all languages, in which the
distinction of these six cases is in some measure necessary. And.
this alone is almost sufficient for an introduction to those who
begin with the reading of Latin books, or with a translation, pro-
vided care be taken to ground them thoroughly therein, accord-
ing to the explication we propose to give in the particular rules,
wherein we shall conform as much as possible to the order above-
mentioned.
/ ouli/ beg of the reader to remember •what has been often mentioned^
that the smaller type is not intended for children ; and therefore this
stpitax may be considered as very short in regard to them, since it
contains ordi/ 3G rtdcs that are easy to retain : and as very copious in
regard to persons of riper age, because it points out not only the things
t/iemselvoKy but IJiexme the reasons on xvhich each is founded^
* V -
THE
RULES
OF
SYNTAX.
Rule I.
Of the Adjective and Substantive.
The adjective must always be made to agree in
gender, number, and case, with its substantive.
Examples.
'T^HE Adjective, whether noun, pronoun, or
participle, hath always its substantive expressed
or understood, with which it agrees in gender, num-
ber and case, as vir bonus, a good man. lile philoso-
phus, that philosopher. Parva scEpe scintilla contemta
magnum Lvcitat incendium, ?u small spark neglected
oftentimes stirs up a great fire. Amicus certus in re
incertd cernitiir, a true friend is known in adversity.
Stdlce inerrhiteSj the fixed stars.
ANNOTATION.
Sometimes the substantive is understood. Faucis tevolo (supple
verbis) I want to speak a word to you. Brevi veniet (supple tem-
pore,) he'll come quickly. Triste lupus stabzilis, Virg. Eel. 3.
(supple negotium, thing,) the wolf is a vexatious thing to the sheep-
folds. For the word negotium was antiently taken for res. See the
figure of Ellipsis at the end of the remarks after syntax.
When the adjective is put with two substantives, it should natu-
rally agree with that which is the principal : as Semiramis puer ere-
dila est. Just. Puteoli DiccearcJiia dicti. Porous Jcemina natus.
And yet the adjective frequently agrees with the latter. Gens
tmiversa Veneti appellati, Liv. Non omnis error stidtitia dicenda est,
Cic.
B 2 .. . ^Nuni'
4 NEW METHOD. Book V
Numquam a-que ac viodo paupertas mihi onus visum est et misc'
rum et grave, Ter. Ludi Jucre Alegulesin a ppel/al a, l^'iv.
The same substantive may admit of different adjectives; Ut
ncque privalam rem maritimam, tieque puhlicnm gcrere possimuSf Cic.
Ad mnlnm domeslicam dhciplinam accesscrunt etiam poctce. Id. (Se-
quitur ut de una rcliquii parte hoiiestatis dicendum sit.
As for the adjectives, qualis, quantus, and such like, sec the
annotation to the next rule.
Rule II.
Of the Relative and Antecedent.
The relative qui, qua% quod, generallif agrees in
gender and number with the antecedent.
Examples.
The relative qiu, qiue, quod, ought generally to be
considered as between two cases of the same substan-
tive expressed or understood. And then it agrees
with the antecedent in gender and number, and with
the word thatfollows also in case, as with its substantive
by the preceding rule. Bellum tantum, quo bello omnes
premebautur, Pompeius corifecit, Cic. Pompey put aa
end to this war, which was burdensome to the several
nations. Ultra eum locum, quo in loco Germani conse-
derant, Caesar; beyond that place where the Germans
were encamped. Non dejeci te ea' loco, quern in locum
prohihui ne venires, Cic. 1 did not turn you out of a
place, which I hindered you from coming into. Diem
instare, quo die frumentum miliiibus mctiri oporteret,
Caes. that the day was drawing near, on which the
corn was to be measured out to the soldiers.
ANNOTATION.
Cscsar seems to have particularly affected this manner of express-
ing himself, because he watL fond of perspicuity ; and we ought
always to imitate him when there is any danger of ambiguity.
Leodamanlem Cleophili discipulum, qui Clcophilus, &c. Apul. If he
had not repeated qui Cleophiius^ the qui might have referred to
t,eodamas as well as to Cleophilus.
The followitig case understood.
Except on this account we generally leave out the following
case, because it is sufficiently expressed by the relative itself,
which always supplies its place and represents it, as: cognosces
ex its litteris, quas libertn tuo dcdi, Cic. instead of ex litteris, quas
litkrast you will know by the letters which I gave your freed-
nian.
Of Syntax. S
man. Odi. sapientem qui sibi non sapit ; as if it were qui sapiens.,
&c. I hate the wise man who is not wise for himself; and a great
many others.
The precedhig case understood.
Sometimes we understand the antecedent likewise, and this in a
twofold marmer.
Either by putting the substantive after the relative, and
of course in the same case as this relative, according to what we
have above observed, as itemini a-edo, qui dives blanditur paupcri,
instead of nemini diviti, qui dives, &c.
And thus we account for these elegant turns of expression ; popido
nt placerent, quasfccisset Jhbulas, Ter. for ut fahula; quas fabutas
Jecisset, &c. Quibus de rebus ad me scripsisti, quoniam ipse venio, co-
ram videbimus, Cic. lUi scripta quibus comcedia prisca viris est,
Hor. Qicas credis esse has, non sunt vercs nuptice. Ter. for hce nupfice
non sunt verce ; quas has nuptias credis esse viras, says Sanctius.
Qnam ille triplicem putavit esse rationem, in quin que partes distribui
debere reperitur, Cic. And such like forms of speaking, which
become still more clear and mOre elegant, by adding a demonstra-
tive pronoun to the second member ; as Quam quisque norit artem,
in hoc se exerceat, Cic. Ad Ccesarem quam misi epistolnm, ejus exem-
plumjiigit me turn tihi mittere, Id.
Or by putting the substantive before the relative, but in such
a manner as it shall supply only the place of the following word, on
which account it agrees therewith in case ; but this is seldom used
except by poets, as Urbem quam statuo vestra est, Virg. for ea urhs,
quam urbem statuo, &c. Eunuchum quern dcdisti nobis, quas turbas
dedit, Ter. for ille eunuchus, quern eunuchum dedisti nobis, &c. Nau-
createm qtiem cotivenire volui, in navi non erat, Plaut. Which has
puzzled a great many commentators.
And it is by this rule we are to explain a great many difficult
passages, as that of the Adelphi. Si id te mordet, sumtumjilii queni
Jaciunt. For id supposeth negotium, and is there for sumtus : that
is, Si id negotium te mordet, nempe sumtus, quern sumtumJiUi Jaciunt.
Where we see likewise that there is an apposition understood of
id negotiuyn with sumtus.
The preceding and the following case both wide rst cod.
It oftentimes happens that there is no substantive put either be-
fore or after the relative; though it must always be understood,
both as antecedent and subsequent. Est qui nee spernit : sunt quos
juvat collegisse, Hor. instead of saying homo est, qui homo non spernit:
sunt homines, quos homines Juvat, &c. Sunt quibus in satyra videor
nimis acer. Id. for sunt homines, quibus hominibus, Szc.
' — — En dextrajidesque,
Quem seciim patrios aiunt portare penates, ^n. 4.
that is to say, En dextrajidesque hominis, quem hominem aiunt, &c.
Scribo ad vos cum habeo quijerat, &c. Cic. Qjualis e&set nattcra
montis, qui cognoscerent misit, Cses. and the like.
'^ "= ^ The
KEW METHOD. Book V
T/ie relative betwivt two nouns of difftj^ent getiders.
When we said that the relative was considered as betwixt two
cases of the same noun, this is to be understood in the natural con-
struction, for in the figurative the contrary sometimes happeneth.
Thus because when the relative is followed by a substantive dif-
fering in gender or number from the antecedent, the relative may
agree with either the one or the other, whctlier one of them be a
proper name or not ; if it agrees with the former, it shall follow
the analogy of the Latin construction, and be placed as it were
between the two cases of the same noun ; as Propius a terra Jovis
Stella Jhtiir, quce (Jovis stella) Pha'cthoii dicitur, Cic. and in like
manner, Nacti portum qui appellatur Ntjmphccum^ Ca;s. Hercidi
sac rijicium fecit in loco, quern Pyram appellmity Liv. Darius ad
eum locunif qiicm Amanicas Pylas vocaiU, pervenif. Curt. Twn
ctiam eloquentem constat Juisse Bcijiioiiem Nasicam, qui est Corculum
appellatus, Cic.
But if it agrees with the latter, which seems more elegant and
more usual, it shall follow the Greek construction, and then it will
not be placed between the two cases of the same noun ; as Animal
frovidiim et sagax qucm vocamus hominem, Cic. Pompeius, quod im-
perii Romani decus ct ornamentumj'uit, Id. Qiiamobrem, hoc qiiidem
constat ut opinorj bonis inter bonos quasi necessariam benevolentiam
esse, qui est amicitice fons h naturci constitutus. Id. Ad eum locum
guce appellatur Pharsalia, applicuit, Caes. Globus quern in templo
hoc medium vides, quce terra dicitur, Cic. Concilia ccetmque homi-
num jure sociali, quce civitates appelluntur. Id. Career ille qui est ^
Dionijsio Jactus Syracusis, quce Lalumia vocantur, Id. Gladiatores,
quam sibi ille maximam manum J'ore putaxnt, in potestate vestrd con-
tinebuntur, Id. Which should be considered as an Hellenism,
whereof we shall treat at the end of the figures.
The relative agreeing with a gender or number un-
derstood.
Sometimes we make the relative agree with a gender or a num-
ber understood, and not with the antecedent expressed. Daret ut
calenis J'atcde monstrum, quce generosius perire qncerens, kc. Hor.
Where the relative quce is in the feminine, because it refers to
Cleopatra of whom he is speaking, and not to the gender of
monstrum, which is neuter. Si tempus est ullum jure hominis necandi,
quce multa sunt, Cic. where he makes the reference to tempora. Soli
virtute prcediti, quod est proprium divitiarum, contenti sunt, Cic.
And sometimes it agrees even with the substantive derived from
the sense of the preceding period, Inter alia prodigia etiam came
ptuit, quern imbrem, &c. Liv. See the figure Syllepsis in the re-
marks.
Of
O F S Y N T A X. 7
Of those Nouns which are called relatives of quantity or
quality.
Tantus, quantus ; talis, qualis ; tot, guot, have only a relation
in the sense, the same as patei- and Jilius ; and therefore are mere
adjectives, which belong rather to the preceding rule than to this.
Yet these nouns sometimes follow the nature of the relative,
and therefore conform likewise to the construction thereof. As,
In hoc autem rnaximo criidelisumoque bello, quale bellum nulla un-
quam barbaria cum sua genie gessit, quo hi bello lex Itcec Juit a Len-
tulo constituta, Cic. Catil. 3. where quale bellum is the same as if he
had said quod tale bellum; and is the same construction as if he had
afterwards said quo in bello, repeating the antecedent in both places,
according to what hath been already observed.
Except in this case, these nouns follow simply the nature of the
other adjectives, agreeing with their substantive, which is generally
that which followeth, as Dixi de te quce fotui tantd contentione,
.quantum est Jorum, tanto clamore consensuque jwpuli ut. Sec.
Though Horace sometimes, in imitation of the Greeks, makes it
agree with the antecedent :
Sed incitat me pectus, et mammce putrcs
Equina quales ubeia, Epod. Od. 8.
Instead of qualia sunt ubera equina. And there is no doubt, adds
yossius, but he might have also said with propriety, Mamma: quanta
ubera equina. However this is not to be imitated.
Rule III.
Of the Case which the Verb requires before it.
1. Every va^h hath a nominative case before it,
2. Except it he of the infinitive mood, and then
it is preceded by an accusative.
Examples.
1. Every verb of a finite mood, requireth before it
a nominative of the same number as itself, either ex-
pressed or understood. Petrus fiet, Peter weepeth.
Tu doces, nos discimus, thou teachest, we learn. Ob-
sequium amicos, Veritas odium parit, Ter. compliance
begets friends, and truth enemies. Non te hoc pudet?
are not you ashamed of this ? and in all these examples
the nominative is expressed.
But when we say : legit, he reads : audimus, we
liear ; aiunt^ ferunt, it is said, or they say : pluit, it
rains :
8 NEW METHOD. Book V.
rains : the nominative is understood ; namely, illc,
nos, homines^ and pliivia, or ccelian, or Dens.
Oftentimes an infinitive or a whole period sup-
pHeth the place of the nominative. Scire tuum mliil
est, your knowledge is nothing'. I)igenuas didicisse
arles emollit mores, Ovid, to learn the liberal arts,
polishes the manners. Deprchendi miseruni est, it is
a sad thing* to be caught, Docto et erudtto huniini
vivere est cogitdre, Cic. to think is the life of a man
of learning.
ANNOTATION.
In the first and second person they do not generally express the
nominative, except it be to denote some dift'erence of action or
aft'ection. Tii ludis, ego siiideo. Tu viihim servas, ego Inudo ruris
amceni rivos, Hor. Or to signify some emphasis or particular force.
Tu audes ista loqui? Cantaudo tu illmn? supple, vicisti, Virg.
Because it is always easy to understand it, as there can be no other
than ego and tu.
Of the Infinitive.
2. The infinitive requirethbefore it an accusative,
which is resolved by (/iwd, ut, ne, or qidn, and generally
rendered by the particle that. Sc'io Petrurnjlerc, id est,
quod Fetrus flet, I know that Peter weeps. Volo vos
bene sperdre et confidere, i.e. ut bene spcretis and coiijl-
ddlis, 1 am willing that you should hope and confide.
Proliibuerunt eum e.vire, i. e. ne ediret, they hindered
him from going out. A'Ofi duhitat Cln^istum id diAsse^
i. e. quin diserit : he does not doubt that (Jhrist
said this.
ANNOTATION.
1. When a verb is in the infinitive after another verb, it is gene-
rally the same construction as this here, because \vc must under-
stand its accusative, and particularly one or other of these pronouns,
one, se, iltitm : stniui pr<)ficisci, for me proficisci : vegat velte, for se
velle : which appears plainly from the antients having often used it
thus. Hic vocem loquentis me audit e visus stun, Plant. Qiue sese
optavit par ere hic divitias, Ter. Omnes Iiomincs qui sese j^rcestarc
student cateris animantibus, Sal.
2. In Greek the infinitive may agree with the nominative,
which the Latins have sometimes imitated, as Ovid, Heu pius Apneas
erijmisse J'enint, for ^;j«h? JEneam. And the lik'C.
3. There are some who "ntirely reject the quM by which we
resolve the accusative befoie the infinitive, insisting that it ought
never
Of Syntax. q
never to be put for the Greek on. But we shall take farther notice
of this, in the remarks, and in the chapter of adverbs.
4. The particle ut is used only after verbs of asking, fearing,
commanding, or those which express desire and alfection : as
jiibeOi volo, euro, laboro ; or which signify some event, aSj/iV, cvenity
contingitf &c.
.< pBSERVATION,S IN REGARD TO THE NEXT RuLE.
We see naturally enough that two singulars are
equivalent to a plural, and therefore that two substan-
tives in the singular require the adjective, or the noun
which is joined to them by apposition, in the plural ;
as Julius (5' Octdvius imperatores fortissimi, Julius and
Octavius, most valiant emperors. Remus et Romulus
fratres, Remus and Ronmlus, brothers. Hence the
verb must be put in the plural after two nominatives
singular. KcclesicE duo sy'dera Augustinus S^ Hierony-
mus hcE'reses debelldrunt, St. Austin and St. Jerome,
two stars of the Church, overthrew heresies.
But if the two singulars are of different genders, or
of different person, then you are to observe the fol-
lowing rule.
Rule IV.
Of the difference of Genders and Persons.
1. When substantives of different genders or
persons are joined^ the noblest is to be pre-
ferred to that which is least so.
2. But the reference is often made to the latter
substantive ; or things without life have
the adjective in the neuter.
Examples.
1. When two substantives of different genders or
different persons meet, then the adjective or the re-
lative being in the plural, agrees with the noblest
gender, and the verb (being also in the, plural) agrees
with the noblest person.
The first person is more noble than the second, and
the second than the third. Ego tuque sumus Chris-
tiani, you and I are Christians. Tu paterque vullis,
you and your father are willing.
The
10 NEW METHOD. Book V.
The masculine is more noble than the other two
genders. Tu, sorbrqut honi estis, (speaking of a boy)
you and your sister are good. Pater ^ mater mortui^
Tcr. my Father and motlier are dead. Decern ingenui
decemque I'/rg'uies ad id sacrijicium adhibiti ; Liv. they
pitched upon ten free-born youths, and on ten young
maids to perform this sacrifice.
But if there happens to be'ti difference in tlie sub-
stantives, in regard to the number, still the adjective
must be made to agree with the noblest gender, put-
ting it always in the plural ; as Siiscepisti omis grave
Atlienarum 8^ Cratippij ad quos cum projectus sis-, &c.
Cic. you undertook great matters in gomg to Athens,
and under the care of the philosopher Cratippus.
2. Oftentimes the reference is made to the latter
substantive, either in regard to the verb, or to the ad-
jective, or to the gender, or to the number, or even
to the person; as Ego ^' Cicero meusjhgitabit, Cic.
my son Cicero and 1 will ask. SenatusS^et C. Fabricius
perfugam Pyrrho dedit, Cic. The senate and Fabri-
cius delivered up the traitor into the hands of Pyr-
rhus. Utrum vos an Cartliaginhises principes orbis ter~
varum videantur, Liv. whether you or the Carthagi-
nians appear masters of the world. Legates, wrtesque
e.vpectandas, Liv. that it was proper to wait for the
return of the ambassadors, and the answer of the
oracle. Toti sit prov'incia' cognitum, tibi omnium quibus
pncsis, saliitem^ liberos,J'amam,Jortimas esse cliarissimaSy
Cic. let it be known over the whole province that the
liveS; the children, the honour, and property of those
over whom you preside, are most dear to you. Suciis
g. j,^gQ rccepto, Virg. having recovered our comrades
and our king.
When the substantives are things without life, the
adjective is frequently put in the neuter, unless we
chuse to make it agree with the latter, in the manner
as above ; as Divitice, dec us, ^^ gloria in oculis sit a
sunt ; Sal. riches, honour, and glory, are things ex-
posed to public view.
Sometimes, however, inanimate things conform to
the
O F S Y N T A X. ] 1
the general rule, of referring to the noblest gender.
Agros villasque intactos sinebat, Tac. he spared the
lands and houses.
ANNOTATION.
JVIietherthefennnine ought to be prefer red to the neuter.
Here a question arises, whether the feminine, supposing it be not
the last, ought to be preferred to the neuter gender, just as the
mascuUne is generally preferred to the other two. Grammarians
are divided upon this point. Linacer and Alvarez say not, and
that we ought to prefer the neater to the feminine. Vossius is of
the same way of thinking in his lesser grammar, though he has
established the contrary in his larger work de Arte Grammatical
when he treats of construction.
The surest way of proceeding in this matter, is to distinguish
betwixt things animate and inanimate. For in things animate,
one would think that we ought rather to follow the feminine, and
to say for instance. Uxor 3f mancipium salvcB : anciUa et jumenta
rejjertcB, according to the opinion of Vossius. Though as Linacer
and Alvarez observe, it is oftentimes more proper to make use of
a periphrasis, and to say for example, Lucretia castissima Jicit, qua
virtute ejus etiam mancipium fioruit, and not Lucretia 8^- ejus iuaiici-
piumjiierunt castce.
In regard to things inanimate, generally speaking, the adjective
ought either to agree with the latter substantive, or to be put
in the neuter gender. Yet it would not be an error to do other-
wise, and to prefer the feminine to the neuter, since in Lucretius
we find, Leges et plebis-scita coactcc, as Priscian himself acknow-
ledges. Cicero likewise at the end of his 2d book de Nat. Quid
de vitibus olivetisque dicam, quarum uberrimifructus, &c.
Of the reason of these governments, with some particular
remarks o)i the construction of inanimate things.
The reason of these governments depends on the knowledge of
the figures, of which we shall treat hereafter.
When the verb or the adjective is put in the plural, it is com-
monly a Syllepsis, where the construction is regulated by the sen^e,
and not by the words. If we refer to the latter only, it is a
Zeugma. But if we put it in the neuter, it is an Ellipsis, because
we understand Negotia, things. Thus, Deciis S; gloria in ocidis
sita sunt, Sal. that is, sunt tiegotia sita, are things exposed to pub-
lic view.
And this figure may also take place, when only one of the things
is inanimate. Deledabatur cereo Junali ^' tibicine, quce frivatus
sibi sumpserat, Cic. Though we, may express it otherwise, by re-
ferring it to the noblest gender. As
Jane-tfac ccternos phcem., pacisque miyiistros.
Propter summam <^- doctoris autoritatem 4' urbis, quorum alter tc
jscientia augere potest, altera ejccjnjjlis. Cic.
But they used this construction also, in speaking of the passions
^nd movements of the soul ; as Labor et voluptas dissimiliima, Liv.
X
12 N E W M E T II O D. Book V.
I)-a et avar'Uia imperlo potcntiora, Id. Huic ah adolescenlia bclla in-
testinUf cccdes, rapiiice, discordiu civilis, grata fuere., Sal. in Catil.
And sometimes in the construction of animate things, as in So-
linus, Puli/pus 4' chamcclcon glabra sunt. In Lucrct. book 3. Sic
anima at que animus, qiiamvis Integra, recens in corpus cunt. And in
Livy, Gens cui natura corpora animosque magis magna quhn Jirma
dedil. And sometimes even in referring to a thing that includes a
masculine and a neuter, they are made to agree with the neuter,
as Ibi capta armatorum duo miUia quadringenti, Liv. And what is
most extraordinary, is their doing it even when the masculine is
nearest, as Tria millia quadringenti casa, Liv.
IVhether we ought alzvays to name oursekes the first in
Latin, and in zvhat manner we ought to do it in French.
In Latin we ought always to follow the order and dignity of the
persons in speaking, so that we should say ego et iu, and not tu
S)' ego. Yet there are examples of the contrary, for Livy hath,
pater 8^ ego fr aire sque r)iei, pro vobis arma tidimus, lib. 7. Dec. 4.
vVhich shews that Nebrissensis had not such mighty reason for
finding fault with this phrase of Scripture, Pater tints 4" ^go dolentes
qucerebamus le, Luc. 2.
But in French it would be uncivil to do so, or to say moi Sf
vons, I and you; for we ought always to say voics S^ moi,
ou and I ; lui S^- moi, he and I ; the natural modesty of this
anguage not permitting the French to name themselves the
first, Hence nobody will do it even in Latin, or say for instance,
ego tuque, for fear of appearing uncivil. And it is true that in
prudence we ought to avoid it, if we foresee that persons de-
serving of respect are likely to be offended at it, though there is no
reason.
This should be extended even to the titles and superscriptions of
letters, where the custom of the Romans was, that he who spoke,
always placed himself the first, though he was equal or even infe-
rior in station. Curius Ciceroni, S. D. Cicero Cwsari iwperatori,
S. D. &c. Which Budeus, Erasmus, and other literati ot the last
.century were not afraid to imitate, in writing even to princes,
sovereigns, and crowned heads.
Rule V.
Of Verbs that have the same case after as before them.
1. Everij verb that denotes the union or con-
nexion of words., hath the same case before
as after it, as Deus est asternus.
2. Scit nos esse nialos.
3. Licet esse bonis, licet esse bonos.
E X A M P L E S.
Verbs that denote only the union and connexion of
words,
i
Of Syntax. 13
words, or the relation of terms to each other, make
no alteration in the government; for which reason
they require the same case after as before them, as in
the.preceding rules. De.us est (zUrnuSy God is eternal.
Amantium irce amor'is redintegrat'io est. The faUingout
of lovers is the renewal of love. O'bviiisjit ei Clodius,
Clodius went out to meet him. Septem dicuniur fiiisse
uno thnpor^e. qui sapientes &; haherentiir 8^ mcarentur,
Cic. it is said that there were seven men at one time,
who were entitled and esteemed as wise men. Ut hoc
latrocinium potius quam bellum iiominaretur, Cic. that
it should be called rather a pyratical depredation
than a war. Cur ergo poHa salutor ? Hor. why then
am I called a poet ?
Verbs neuter have sometimes the same force : Terra
manet immobilis, the earth remains immoveable. Pe~
trus rediit h-'atus, Peter returned in a passion. Vhiio in
SenatumfrequenSj 1 go often to the senate house. And
the like.
If after these verbs there comes a genitive, still there
is the same case after as before them, but the same
noun is also understood. Hie liber est Petri, this is
Peter's book ; that is, Hie liber, est liber Petri,
^, The infinitives of all these verbs require likewise
an accusative after them, when there is one before
them. Deus scit nos esse malos, God knows that we
are wicked, because fnalos refers to nos. Cupio me esse
dementem, I desire to be merciful. But in this there
is no manner of difficulty.
3. The difficulty is, when these infinitives, such as,
esse, dici, haberi,fieri, and the like, have not their na-
tural accusative before them. Because if, for ex-
ample, there is a dative before, either expressed or
understood, we may put one also after. Licet esse
bonis, or licet nobis esse bonis, it is lawful for us to be
good. And if we understand an accusative before, as
the analogy of the Latin tongue requireth, we may
say likewise, licet esse bonos, that is, nos esse bonos ; just
as Cicero said, Quibus abunddntem licet esse mistrrimum^
amidst the plenty of which one may be very miserable.
Medios esse jam non licebit, it will be no longer allowed
us to remain neuter. But
U NEW METHOD. Book V.
J3ut if you say, licet nobis esse honos ; the strength of
tlie phrase will be still, licet nobis nos esse bo)ius. In like
manner, Cf'.pio did doctum, that is, me did doctum. And
Ciipio did doclus, that is, ego doctiis; I am desirous of
being called a learned man.
ANNOTATION.
Hence we may here take notice of three very different forms of
speaking: Licet esse bonis, licet esse bonos, (or else licet nobis esse
Svfiis, ami licet nos esse bonos, which are the same as the foregoing)
and licet nobis esse bonos. In like manner Cupio did doctus, and C7<-
pio did doctum, where we see that in the former government the
noun following the infinitive refers to the case of the first verb,
and agrees with it, as here, doctus with ego. Non tibi vacat esse
guieto : quieto with tibi, &c. which ii quite a Greek plirase, be-
cause the Greek language hath this in particular, that having
made a case go before, it generally draws what follows after it :
hence in Horace we find, Patiens vocari Cccsaris tdtor, instead of
pattens te vocari ultorem, and in another place, Uxor invicti Joris
esse nescis, instead oi te esse uxorem ; and Lucan, Tutumque putaxit
jam bonus esse Socer. And Ovid, Acceptum rcfcro xersibus esse no-
cens ; and Vi/gil, even \vithout expressing the infinitive, seyisit me-
dios dclapsiis in ]io.;tes, instead of se esse delapsnm.
Whereas in these other phrases, in which an accusative is made
to follow ; Licet esse beatos. Expedit vobis esse bonos. Utor amico
citpienti Jieii j)roburd. Si civi Romano licet esse Gaditanum, Cic.
Quibiis liccl esse fortunatissiynos, Cacs. ; this accusative refers to the
infinitive, and to the accusative which is understood before it
(though it is not always neccssar}'^ to express it, as Valla pretends)
and not to the other verb. And this last expression would be more
natural to the Latin tongue, if custom had not introduced the
other, perliaps to avoid obscurity, as when I say, Cnpio fieri doctus,
there can be no ambiguity; but when I say Cujno fieri doctum, it is
dubious whether I mean me or nliam ; unless 1 expressly mark the
accusative before, as Me fieri doctum, and then this whole phrase
me fieri ductum, supplies the case or the government of the pre-
ceding verb : Cupio hoc, ncmpe me fieri doctum. And as often as
there are two different meanings in u sentence, that is, two diffe-
rent members, the second of which is put by one of these infini-
tives, there can never be more than one accusative along with it.
Fuit magni animi, non esse supplicem victori, Cic. Quo libi Tulle,
fieri tribunum, Hor. Mild vidctur, ad beate vivendmn satis posse
virtutem. Which ought always to be resolved by the article /loc,
as Scaliger observeth ; Hoc f ncmpe, non esse supplicem victori J Jicit
viagni animi. And in like manner the rest.
Rule VI.
Of Two Substantives of the same or of different sense.
1 . When trio substantives arc joined, and signify
ihe
O F S YN TA X. 15
the same things they are put in the same
case, as urbs Roma.
2. But if they have a different meaning, as
amor virtutis, then the second is put in
the genitive.
Examples.
When there are two substantives that refer to the
same thing, they are put in the same case, u?'bs Roma,
the city of" Rome ; as much as to say Rome the city,
and this is what they call apposition.
Sometimes the gender and number are different,
though the case be ahke. Tidliola delicice nostrce,
TulHola my whole delight. Urhs AthencE, the city of
Athens. Q. Hortensius, lumen &; ornamentum reipuhlicce.^
Cic. Hortensius, the glory and ornament of the re-
public.
ANNOTATION.
if in the apposition, the substantive, which is the first and chief
in the order of nature, signifies an animate thing, the adjective or
verb will agree with it. Cum duojidmina nostri imperii Cn.Sf Pub.
Scipiunes extincti occidissent, Cic. Tidlia delicice nostra timm munus-
culu77ijlagitat, Cic. Passer delicicc mecc piiellcc, qincum ludere^ quern
siiiu tenere solet, Catul. Primum sio-num aries Marti assi<rnatns est.
But if the first substantive signifies an inanimate thing, the ad-
jective or substantive will agree with the latter. Tungri civiias
GaUieBjbntem habet insignem. Flumen Rhenus, qui agrum Helve-
tium a Germanis dividit.
If the verb hath two substantives, one before and another after
it, generally speaking it will agree with the principal. Omnia
Ccesar erat, Luc. Sanguis erat lacrymce, Id. Gaudia principium
nostri sunt doloris, Ovid. Yet it is not always so : Vestes quas ge-
ritis sordida lanajidt, Ovid. Qucb loca, Numidia appellatur, Sail.
Tui Considatusjiut initium ludi Compitalitii, Cic. There are even
some passages in which it would be an error to follow this 3d rule,
as Magnce divitice sunt lege natzircB composita paupertas, Sen. We
should not say est. Contentuni suis rebus esse, magntB sunt certissi-
mccque divitice, Cic. For \vhich reason we must be directed by the
use of authors.
Government of the Genitive.
2. When there are two substantives that signify
different things, that is, one of which is said of the
other, the second must be put in the genitive, Amor
virtutis, the love of virtue. Splendor lucis, the bright-
ness of the light ; and this case is never governed but
by
}6 NEW METHOD. Book V.
by another noun substantive, thougli the noun that
governs it is very often understood, as we shall shew
liereatter.
Now this genitive may still govern another tliat
signifies a different thing. Magnam partem laudisliU'
jus rei ad Libunem esse ^centuram^ Cic. that a great
share of the glory of this enterprise would f^ill to J^ibo.
Sometimes a single noun governs two different geni-
tives. Quai sit humlnum querela j'rontis tuce.y Cic. how
greatly people complain of your iojpudence.
ANNOTATION.
Of the different senses in rvhich the genitive is taken
Even when the substantives belong to the same thing, the seconti
is fVequentl}' put in the genitive; Regmtm Gallicc, the kingdom of
France. Ees cibi for cibuSy Phaedr. meat. Oppidum yliUioc/iicef
Cic. The town of Antioch. Arl)or Jici, Cic. Viiitim ircp, Hor.
Nomc7i Mercurii est milii. Plaut. "Which is an imitation of the
Greeks, and ver}^ common in the French language.
We might also mark down here tlie diiTcrent senses in which the
genitive is taken, in order to shew the great extent of this govern-
ment. For beside the examples above given, where it denotes the
relation of the proper name to the common, or of the individual to
the species, it further denotes the relations
Of the whole to its part, as caput hominis ; vortex montis.
Of the part to the whole, as homo crassi capitis.
Of the subject to the accident, or to the attribute ; Jacundia
XJlijssis ; Jelicitas reruin ; color rosa.
Of the accident to the subject ; pucr optima; indolis.
Of the efficient cause to the effect ; Venus l*raxitelis ; oratio Ci^
ceronis.
Of the effect to the cause ; Creator 7mindi.
Of the final cause to the effect ; irAio soporis ; apparatas triumph} ,•
Cic.
Of the matter to the compound ; ras auri.
Of the object to the acts of the mind : cogitatio belli: officii de-
liberation contemtiis mortis.
Of one of the things which has a relation to the other; mater
Socrat/s.
Of the possessor to the thing possessed ; pecus Mclibcei : divilia
Crassi.
Of time ; spatium horcc ; iter hidni ; tempvs spatii.
Of what is done in time ; tcnipus belli ; liora ccence.
Of place; incohe hujus urbis ; vinum majoris cadi.
Of that which is contained; cadusrini: navis auri ant paleo", Cic.
In all these governments if some action be marked, the geni-
tive may bo taken, either actively or passively, or in both senses
together. Actively, provideniia Deiy the providence of God by
which
Op Syntax. 17
vthlch he conducts us. Passively, timor Dei\ the f.-ar of God, by
which we fear him. Prcestantia animantium, Cic. the advantage
which we have over brute beasts. Fatris pudor, Ter. the respect
I have for my father; the shame I should have to offend him. In
both senses, amor Dei, the love of God, whether it be that by
which he loves us, or that by which we love him. Victoria Ger-
ntanorum, the German victory, whether it be that which they
obtained, or that which was obtained over them.
But in all these examples we see the substantive, by which the
genitive is governed. There are other occasions where it is un-
derstood, as we shall make appear in each rule, and in the remarks
when we come to the figure of Ellipsis.
Further, the adjectives and pronouns, especially if they be of
the neuter gender, oftentimes supply the place of the substantive,
and elegantly govern a genitive. Ad id loci. Quid rei est ? Abs
te nihil literarum, Cic. instead of nidla; litterce. Dedit in sitmptum
dimidium mince, Ter. Tantum habetfidei, Juv. &c. Though we are
always to understand negoiium, as we shall observe hereafter.
That the same noun agreeing with the possessive, go-
t'Crns also a genitive.
Sometimes it is an elegance for the same noun agreeing with
the possessive, to govern also a genitive, either of a proper name, or
of any other, whether this refers to the same person, or to another,
as Imperium tuiim ApoUinis, Plaut.
HerilemJUium ejtis duxisse audio uxorem, Ter.
Dico mea unius opera rempublicam esse Liberatum, Cic. Soliiis enint
meiim peccatum corrigi non potest, Cic. Noster duoruni eventus ostendet
zdra gens bello sit melior, Livy.
In like manner, Tuum hominis shnplicis pectus vidimus, Cic. Li-
teris tuis jjnmorum metisium nihil commovebar. Id. Quantum meiim
studium extiterit dignitatis tuce, Id. Nostra propugnatio ac defensio
dignitatis tuce, Id.
Et 'pater ipse sua super iim jam signat hoiiore, Mo. 6.
That is, suo superwn honore.
Postquam arma Dei ad Vidcania ventum est, JEn. 12.
< Nocturndque orgia Bacc/ii, JEn. 4.
Paternum amicicm me assimilabo virginis, Ter. Phorm.
And an infinite number of other examples are to be found,
all contrary to the rule of L. Valla, and which shews the little foun-
dation he had to censure the ancient interpreter, in the epistle to
the Corinthians, for using this Greekish expression, Salutatio med
manu Pauli.
These nouns joined to possessives, may likewise govern the geni-
tive of the participle itself, especially in poetry.
Cum mea nemo
Scripta legat vulgo recitare timentis, Hor.
But in prose, Vossius thinks that the expression, by the relative,
is better on these occasions ; as in Cicero, Sed omnia sunt mea cidpa
commissa, qui ab its me aniari 'putabam, qui invidebant. Vcstra, qui
Vol. II. C dixistis.
18 NEW METHOD. Book V.
dixistisy hoc tnaxime interest. Anil this turn of expression may be
used even when there is no participle, as Id mcu minime refeii, qui
sum nntu niaxmus, Ter. Vehcmcntcr inteiest vcxtra, (jiii pntres cstis,
I'Jin. lib. t. epist. Which is sometimes more clear and elegant.
See the advertisement to the 11th rule.
Allx'crJ^al ?wuns heretoj ore governed the case of their verb.
It is further to be observed that the verbal noun may likewise
govern the case of its verb instead of the genitive ; for as we still
say reditio domum, CiES. like rcdeo domum. Tradiiio nlten, Cic.
like tradere alteri : and as Cicero also saith Scientiam quid agatur^
memoriamque quid h quoque dictum sit : so heretofore they said Spec-
iatio rem, or spectatio rei. Curatio rem, or cvralio rei. Quid tibi
hanc curatio est rem ? Plaut. Qidd tibi ludos spcclntio est ? Id. And
hence it is that the gerunds and supines, which are only nouns
sub.>tantivc, govern also the case of their verb, as we shall shew in
the remarks.
Rule VII.
Of some Particles that require a genitive.
Tunc, ubi, sat, instar, ec^, postridic, ergo, and
pridie, require a genitive.
Examples.
Several adverbs govern a genitive.
Those of time. Tunc temporis, at that time,
Posti^idie absolutionis, the day after absolution. Pridie
hujus diei, the day before. But observe that we say
also pridie nonas, the day before the nones : and such
like, where the accusative is governed by anle, un-
derstood,
Tiiose of place. Ubi terr arum, in what part of the
earth. Unde gentium, from what nation. Nusquani
gentium, no where. Longe gentium, far from hence,
Ed co?isuetudinis adducia res esty the thing becan.e so
customary. Hue malbrum centum est, they came to
such a pitch of misery.
Those of quantity. Satfautorum, partisans enough.
A'ffatim materice, plenty of matter. A'mpliiis liber b-
rum, more children.
We say also Instar moniis, like a mountain. I'Uius
ergo, for his sake. And such like.
ANNOTATION.
The reason why the genitive is put after these particles, is because
they are taken as nouns substantive : for instar is a noun which
signifies resemblance ; as exemplar* Quautum instar in illo est, Virg.
Farvunt
&
OfSyntax. 19
Parvum instar, Liv. See the HeterocHtes, p. 167. Ergo comes
from the Greek ablative i^y(a. Pridie and pustridie come from the
ablative die : and the others are also taken as substantives. Tunc
temporis : just as in French we should say, tors du siege de la Rochelle,
And the like.
In regard to adverbs of quantity, It may be said that if they
come from a noun adjective, they always retain its nature, and
suppose negotium for ther substantive, multum cibi, that is, midtum
7iegotium cibi. And then negotium cibi will be put only for cibus :
just as Phaedrus has made use of res cibi, merely to signify yboc?.
Otherwise it will be an imitation of the Greeks, by understanding
their preposition, jMrum vini, that is, Ik vini, as in French we say,
un peu de vin. But we shall examine this more particularly in the
remarks, where we treat of the Adverbs.
Rule VIII.
Of Nouns of Property, Blame, or Praise.
Noims signifying property, blame, or praise, are
put either in the ablative or in the genitive^
Examples.
The noun implying property, blame or shame, as
well as praise, is put in the genitive or in the ablative.
Puer ingeiiui vultus, a boy of a comely countenance.
Vir nidximi duimi, a man of very great courage. Homo
prcestdnti prude ntid, a man of excellent wisdom. Eu-
nuchus tiomine Photinus, Hir. an eunuch named Pho-
tinus. Mulier atate mtegrd, Ter. a woman in the
flower of life.
ANNOTATION.
When there is a genitive, it is no more than the construction of
two substantives : for Vir maximi aninii, is vir governing animu
When there is an ablative, it is governed by a preposition under-
stood : for Mulier cetate infdgra, implies in estate integrd. Photinus
nomine, implies ex nomine. For which reason the ancients made
. use of the preposition also ; for as in Terence we read, Homo anti'
qua virtiite acjide : so in Plautus we find, AmicusJiduSy and cum an'
tiqua fide : and in another place, Microtrogus nomine ex vero vocor.
And in almost all the modern languages the preposition is added;
thus in French, Un homme de grande sagesse, a man of great wisdom^
as much as to say, De prcestanti prude ntid : where it is observable
that the French prepositions inform us almost in every govern-
ment where they are to be understood in Latin.
Cicero has sometimes joined these two governments of the geni-
tive and the ablative. Lentulum eximid spe, summcB virtutis adoles-
centem. And we shall hereafter see, that whatever governs one of
these cases, generally speaking governs also the other.
c 2 Rule
^20 NEW M E T H O D. Book V.
Rule IX.
Of Nouns Adjectives derived from Verbs.
1. The adjectives called verbal, govern a geni-
tive, as tenax ira;.
2. To which we must join those iMch signify an
affection of the mind, as conscius sceleris :
3. And some others which govern a genitive
in imitation of the Greek.
Examples.
A great many adjectives require a genitive after them.
1. Those derived from verbs, as tejia.v ircc, whose
anger is lasting. Amans virtutis, a lover of virtue.
Fuga.v vitii, who shuns vice. P aliens laboris, who
endures labour. A'vidus novitatis, greed}^ of novel-
ty. • A'ppetens aluni, covetous of what belongs to
others. Religidmim cokntes^ who have a regard for
religion.
2. Those which denote some care, affection, desire,
knowledge, ignorance, guilt, or such like tilings which
relate to the mind or to consciousness : as Conscius
^ceteris, Cic. conscious of guilt. A'mvius gloria', Liv.
anxious after glory. Stcurus damni, who fears no hurt.
Timidus procellct, afraid of a storm. Peritiis luusiccBy
skilled in music. Alusicoruni pcrstudiosus, Cic. who is
very fond of music. Rudis omnium rcrum^ Cic. igno-
rant in every thing. Mihi verb fatigalibnis hesterncs
etimnnuncsauciodaveniam, Apul. excuse a person who
is still fatigued after yesterday's labour. Tnsolens in-
f amice, Cic. unaccustomed to receive affronts.
3. There are many others which in imitation of the
Greek govern a genitive, especially in poetry. Lassus
viarum, tired of the journey. Felix ac libera leguniy
Luc. happy and exempt from laws. Vini somnique
benignus, who has drunk heartily and slept soundly.
Miror te purgatum illius morbi, Hor. I am surprised at
3'our being cured of that distemper. Pauper argentic
Hor. poor in cash, and the like, which must be learnt
by the use of authors. But you should take care not
to employ any of these phrases, till you have seen
them in pure authors. For there are a multitude of
Of Syntax. gl
them not only in Tacitus (without mentioning the
poets), but hkewise in Sallust and Livy, which ought
not to be imitated.
ANNOTATION.
, Difference hetxveen the participle and the rerbal noun.
The participle always denotes some time ; but the noun verbal
denotes no time. Thus Amans virtutem, a man who actually
loves virtue ; and amans virtutis, he who is a lover of virtue ;
that is who habitually loves it, so that amans is then the same as
amator. Thus the participle generally becomes a noun by taking
the genitive, when the verb hath no supine from whence may be
formed another noun in OR, as indigens jjecunicF, and the like,
though it may also become a noun without that, and even in the
preter tense, as in Sallust, Alieni appetens, prqfusus sui, for prqfusory
&c. Hence we frequently say studentes for studiosi or scholastici :
medeiites for medici :
Nihil artes posse medentum.
And the like.
Cause of the goxernment of these verbal nouns.
And hereby the cause of this government is obvious, since it
is nothing more than the government of two substantives, for
Amans virtutis^ is put instead of Amator virtutis : which happens
also to other adjectives ; Amicus 2^o-tris. Veritatis amicissimus.
Cic. Affinis regis. Domini similis es, Ter. Catilince similes, Cic.
JEqualis, par, ajffinis, cognatuSf propinquus ejus, just as we say
Frater ejus.
As to the others which we have here hinted at, they take the
genitive rather in imitation of the Greeks, who in putting this
case here understand Itc, of: inax, causa, or xiqiy, gratia; for
timidus procellcB, is as much as to say, causa procellce j and the rest
in the like manner.
Of the active verbals in Bundus.
The verbal nouns in Bundus govern an accusative, as well as
the verb from which they are derived; hence we say, Populahun-
dus agros, vitabundus castra ; just as we say populari agros, vitare
castra, and the rest in the same manner. For which reason Scioppius
will have it that they are participles, though with very little foun-
dation, since they do not follow the analogy of the others : and
the reason of participles bearing that name, is not because they
govern the case of the verb, for this is common also to the verbal
substantives; but because being nouns, they include sometime in
their signification, as the verb does.
Rule X.
Of affective Verbs.
1. Affective verbs require a genitive after them,
as miserere fratris ; hie dnimi pendet.
2. But
£2 NEW METHOD. Book V.
2. But miscror takes an accusative,
3. And some others have moreover an ablative.
Examples.
"We place this rule here, because of the relation
which these verbs have to the nouns of the preceding
rule.
1. The pathetic or affective verbs, that is, which
express souie passion or affection of the soul, some care
or disposition of the mind, or some such thing, re-
quire after them a genitive. Miserere J'ratris, have
pity on m}^ brother. Hie ('mimi pemkt, this man is in
doubt, or suspense. Salage rerum iuarum, mind your
own aff^'airs. Vereri alicujus, Ter. to stand in awe of
some person. Lcetari' malurum^ Virg. to rejoice at
misfortunes.
2. Nevertheless miseror, aris, governs an accusa-
tive. Miserarifortunaju alicujus, to pity a person's
misery.
3. There are also some more verbs of this sort,
which take after them not only a genitive, but like-
wise an ablative. Tiiscrucior animi or animo, I am trou-
bled in mind. Animi se angebat, Ter. he tormented
himself inwardly, /higor animo, I am troubled in
mind, Cic. A'nimi pendeo, Cic. A'nimis pcndemus, Id.
we are in doubt. Desipcre mentis, Plant. Desipere
animo, (more usual) to doat. Fall\ animi, Lucr. Falli
animo, (more usual) to be mistaken, to be deceived.
Heretofore they used also to say Fastidire alicujus,
Plant, to slight a person ; but now it more frequently
governs an accusative.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we may refer the verbs of desire, of admiration, of re-
pelling, taking care, neglecting, ceasing, delivering, partaking,
and others which we meet with in the genitive, from an imitation
of the (ireeks, who use this government on a thousand occasions,
because of their prepositions which govern this case, and which
they frequently suppose without expressing them.
But since we have no such prepositions in Latin, to account for
this government : if there he a genitive, wc may understand ano-
ther general noun that governs it. Discrucior animi, supple, do-
lorc.
Of Syntax. - 23
lore^ cura, or cogitatione, mente, &c. as Plautus has expressed it,
Nullum mentem animihaheo. If there be an ablative, we understand
in, de, ah : as much as to say, Discrucior in animo j pendemiis ab
animis, &c.
As to the others, Miserere fratris, we may understand yycfm
causa : have pity and compassion for my brother.
Rule XI.
O^ sum, refert, and interest.
1. Sum, refert, and interest, signifying posses-
sio?i, property, or duty, require a genitive.
2. l^ut retert ^?irf interest, instead of the geni-
tive of the pronoun possessive, have mea,
tua, sua, cuja, nostra, vestra.
S. On the contrary EST takes the nominative
jieuter of those very pronouns, as meum
est, tuum est, &c.
Examples.
1. The verb sum, with these two refe)^t a.ndinfe7^esf ,
signifying duty, possession, or property, require a ge-
nitive, Su7?i ejus opiiiiSnis, 1 am of that opinion. Nul-
lius sum consilii, Ter. I am at a loss what to determine.
Tu non es Christi, you are not a disciple of Christ. Est
*vei^i Christidni coniempsisse divitias, it is^the duty of a
true Christian to despise riches. Tantce molis erat Ro-
manam condere gentem, Virg. of such importance was
it to lay the foundation of the Roman nation. O'mnium
refert, it is every body's concern. Tnterest reipubliccSf
it concerns the commonwealth.
2. Refert and mtei^est, besides the genitive of the
pronouns possessive, take these cases. Nostra refert,
it behoves us. Et tud ^ med maxlme interest te recle
'vaUre, Cic. your health is of great consequence both _
to yourself and to me. Hoc illorum magis quamsudre-
tulisse mdttur, Sal. this seems to have concerned them
more than him. Cujd interest, Cic. who is chiefly
concerned in it.
3. Est on the contrary, instead of the genitive, takes
the nominative neuter of those very pronouns. Meum
est hocfacere: it is my business to do this. Nostrum
est pati, it belongs to us to suffer. Si membria forte
defe-
24 N E W M E T H O D. Book V.
dcfccerif, iuum est ut snggcras, if my mcniory slioulrl
fail me, it is your business to put me in mind. Cujum
peciis (sup. est) an JMtlibcti? Virg. whose flock is
this ? is it Mcithaiis's?
ANNOTATION.
The two goveroraents of the genitive and the pronoun are
sometimes elegantly used, in nouns of price. lUiid mca mogni
interest. And in proper names, non meri Cccsaris interest. But in
regard to the rest, though we may say likewise, Interest tua orato-
ris, refert mca inilitis ; yet it is better to make use of the relative,
as in Terence, Id meA minima refert qui snm naiu maxivius. See
above, p. 17.
Now when we put a genitive here, , another noun is always un-
derstood. Sum ejus oplnionis, sup. vir, philosop/nts, doctor. Non
est regis, sup. ofjlcium : and the like.
As to rejert and interest, Sanctius and Scioppius, after Scaliger
and Donatus, will Iiave it that these cases, mea., Inn, sua, are neu-
ter accusatives, and therefore that men inter est, ha?, much, as to say,
est inter men negotia. And in regard to Refeut, they pretend that
to say mea refert, is much the same as when we say, hoc rem twnn
minimt' rejert, where it intirely retains the force of the verb active.
On the contrary Vossius, after L. Valla, Saturnius, and Priscian,
says that these are feminine ablatives, which Priscian resolves by
in ; interest or refert mea for in re mea : just as we say in re mi a est
in the same sense ; that concerns me. For Sanctius's assertion, that
it is not good Latin to say, hoc est in re mea, has more boldness than
truth, since beside the passage of Plautus, Ufrumre veniat, nee ne,
nihil in re est mca, Terence has, Si in re est utrique ut Jiant, arcessi
jube, in Andr. Act 3. Sc. 3. It is true others read in rem : but
thus it is quoted by Linacer, and marked in the manuscripts which
Rivius and Vossius made use of.
But one would think that this question may be solved by these
words, which we find in tlie ablative in the following verses:
J\js me iiidotatis modo
Putr()cinarifi)rtnssc arbitramini :
Etiam dotatis saleo. C. Quid nostra? Ph. Nihil.
Tcr. in Phor.
where the verse would be good for nothing, unless nostra was in
the ablative. Which is further illustrated l)y this verse of Plautus,
who wilh mea understands vrafia.
Alea isiuc nihil rejert, tua refert gratia.
And therefore vwa refert, mea interest, is, properly speaking, mea
causa, or mca gratia, lor mea dc causa, mea de gratia.
Prom whence It is easy to collect the reason of the government
of the genitive : for when we say, Refert ■naturcc hominum, &c.
Interest Ciceronis, civium, reip. &c. we have only to understand
causa or gratia; just as the Greeks frequently understand %apiy or
tKKx. And then it will be the same as, Interest Ciceronis grcUi(%
He/ert civium. causa ; and in like manner the rest.
IF As
Of Syntax. 25
As for meum, tutim, suum, and the others, it is obvious that
these are adjectives, to which we must suppose a substantive, as
qfficiumf negotium, &c.
Rule XII.
Natural signification of the Dative.
1. The dative always signifies acqtdsitioji, or ref-
lation. Hence it is put after the following verbs,
2. Sum, 3. and its compounds :
4. Medeor, occurro, f4veo, studeo, gratulor,
5. Also after verbs of excelling ;
6. Of assisting, except iuvo,
7. And of commanding, except jiiheo.
Examples.
1. The dative, as the very name sheweth, which
comes from dare to give, always signifies something
acquired or attributed, either to advantage or disad-
vantage ; or else it implies some relation, either in the
objects, or in the intention, being the end as it were
to which a thing is referred. Hence there is scarce a
passage in which it does not bear this sense, as well
after nouns as after verbs, to express not only the
person, but likewise the thing to which this relation
or attribution is made.
After nouns. Tu illi amicus, you are his friend.
Affinis regi, related to the king. Conterminus GalUcE,
bordering \ipon France. Par "virtuti or alio, Cic. a
speech equal to virtue. Similia prodigiis, Virg. like
to prodigies. Alitor consUiis, one who gives the first
counsel, Conscius facinori, Cic. an accomplice. Su-
perstes dignitdti, who survived his dignity. And the
rest in the same manner, especially those which signify
conveniency, inconveniency, favour, pleasure, trust,
and the like.
After verbs : Tibi soli amas, you love for yourself
only. Hoc mihi non sapit, this does not please me.
libi peto, I ask for you. Non omnibus dormio, I do
not sleep for all, or in regard for all. Metuo exeixitui,
I am afraid for the army. Assuescere labori, to be in-
ured to toil. Mihi ptccat, si quid peccat, Ter. if he
commits any faults, it is for me he commits them.
Neque istic, neque alibi tibi usquam erit in me mora, Ter.
2(5 NEW METHOD. Book V.
you will always find me ready to obey you, both in
this, and in every thing else. Huk cervLvque coma! que
trahiintiir per terrain, W\^. his neck and hair drag
along the ground. Pennaspavoni quce dtciderant sus-
iidit. Pha^dr. took up tlie feathers which fell from
the peacock. The same with verbs of
Obeying. Obcdire, par ere, morem gerere alicui, to
obey a person. AuscuUare parenti, to listen to the
commands of his father. Non paribo dolori meo, noii
iracund'i(E serviam, Cic. 1 will not indulge my grief,
I will not be a slave to my passion.
Resisting. OOslat, rcpiignat voluptas sanitati: plea-
sure is prejudicial to health.
Profiting. Providere rebus suis, to take care of his
affairs. Cunsulite vobis, prospicite patri(€, Cic. take
care of yourselves, consider your country.
Hurting. Nocet mihi cibus, food disagrees wfth me.
Metitis quasi luminibus ofjicit altitudo JortimcB, Cic. ex-
cess of good fortune darkens the understanding. In-
*videre alicui, Cic. to envy a person.
It is the same in regard to impersonals. MihiUbet^
placet, it pleases me. Tibi licet, it is lawful for you.
Nobis decet, Ter. it becomes us. Qiuid refert intra
naturae fines I'ivenfi, Hor. what does it signify to a
person that lives within the bounds prescribed by na-
ture ; and in like manner the rest. But all this is
easily understood.
There are some other verbs which might occasion
greaterdilhculty to beginners, for which reason I have
made particular mention of them, though they might
be comprehended in the general rule.
2. Sum. Est mihi liber, 1 have a book ; as much
as to say, a book belongs to me. Est niihi iter in
Lemnum. I am going to Lemnos. Causa J uit pater
his, Hor. my father was the cause of all this.
To this may be referred such expressions as these.
Madix xescendo est dccucta. Pi in. this root is good to
eat, when it is boiled. Qme restuiguendo igm Jorent,
Liv. which might serve for extinguishing the fire.
But then the dative seems to be governed by some
adjective understood, as aptus, idbneus, par, or such
like, since they are often expressed.
O F S Y N T A X. 27
3. The compounds of Sum. Adesse patri, to assist
liis father. Adesse sacro, to\\e2C[ m^iss. Dee sse officio ^
to be deficient in his duty. Frceisse e.verciiui, to
command an army.
4. Some particular verbs. Medetur ammo virtus,
virtue cures the mind. Occurrere alicui, to go to meet
a person. Favere nohilitati, to favour the nobility.
Velle aut cupere alicui, Cic. to wish well to a person,
to have his interest at heart. Studere kctioni, to study
his lesson. Studere eloquentice, to study eloquence.
Though we say likewise, Studere aliquid, meaning to
desire, Ter. Cic. Hor. Gratulor iibi, I congratulate
you, I rejoice at your success.
5. Verbs of excelling, Prcestat, exceUit virtus divitiis,
virtue is preferable to riches. Antejerre paceni bello,
to prefer peace to war. Antecellit sensibus gloria cce-
lestis, the glory of heaven is beyond all perception of
the senses. PrcEsidere populis, to preside over the people.
6. Those of helping. Opitulari, aiLviliari, subve-
nh^e alicui, to help or to assist a person. Succurrere
miseris, to relieve the miserable.
Except Juvo, which takes an accusative by the
general rule. Juxare aligueni, to help a person.
7. Those of commanding. Prcecipio, ij?2pe?'o, prcz-
scribo tibi, I command you.
But JuBEO is never put with a dative in Cicero,
nor in any other author of pure latinity. The natural
and usual construction of this verb, is to join it with
an infinitive, either single, or preceded by its accusa-
tive. LitercE tu(E recte sperarejubent, Cic. your letters
command us to have good hopes. Jubeo te bejie spe-
rare, Cic. I desire you to have good hopes. As for
juvat, see rule 15th.
ANNOTATION.
We must therefore take notice that it would by no means be
good Latin to say, Jubeo te ut bene spcres, or ut hocfaciaa. For if
jubeo occurs sometimes with the acusative of the person only, this
accusative is constantly governed by an infinitive understood as ia
Cic. Kt herde, ut me jubet Acastus, conjido te jam ut volumus valerCy
where we are to understand ut me jubet Jacere. Litcrce nan quce te
aliquidjubereiit, Cic. swp. Jacere. Excepere patres ne postea eosdent
tribunosjuberent, Liv. sup. esse. Jubeo Chremetem, Tev. sup. salver-e.
But
28 NEW METHOD. Book V.
But though jwiro docs not take the accusative of the person, )'c*;
it receives some particular accusatives of" the thing, as quid, hoc,
illud, id, a/i(juid, nihi/, pai/ca, mulln, uinnn, dun, taiitum, quantuvt ;
and the hkc. Lexjubel en qua; facicnda sunt, Cic. Rcniiis in quod
jiihcl alter, Ilor.
We are also to observe that authors of less purity have put this
verb with the dative. Vbi Britannicojussit exurgerc, Tacit. His-
panis Gal/isquejubet, Claud.
Some eMraordinary constructions zvitlt the dative.
To this rule we must refer a multitude of nouns, whicli of their
own nature should seem rather to require a genitive, as in Plautus,
Vino modo aipidcc estis ; in Ovid, participem sludiis : or an ablative
with the preposition ; as in Cic. a/iejiufs causcc ; in Quiiitil. diverstcs
hide ; though we say rather, alienus a causa, diverms ah tioc. Sic.
It is likewise by this rule that par and similis govern a dative,
not only when they make a comparison between persons, as when
Horace says, Ti/didem superis parem ; or between things, one of
which may be referred to the other, as par virttdi nratio, Cic. :
but likewise between a thing and a person, or another thing to
which it cannot be referred, as in the civil law, in pari causa cccte-
ris servis habendus est. And Horace hath likewise, Qutitn magnis
parva niineris -ifalce recisurum simili ie, lib. 1. Stat. 3. since you
threaten to punish small faults with the same punishment as great
ones ; that is, with a punishment like that which great faults de-
serve. And this is very usual in Greek :
Oi) yiq ix(\uj(ts Ta; "aas TiX-nyais lixoi. Aristoph.
Non enim participasti pares jilagas mihi.
To this we must refer a great many verbs, which seem rather to
require an accusative ; as ccctera quce huic vita; comitantur, Cic.
Fergiti' j)recari pessimo, Plaut. Curare rebus alienis. Id. Volitptati
mceror sequitnr, Plaut. Homini servos suos Domitos oportet ha-
bere ocidos, Plaut. for hominem servum habere oportet, &c. Si Iioc
J'ratri cedefur, Plaut. Ut messem hanc nobis adjuvent, Id.
There are likewise a great many which usually require rather an
accubative or an ablative with the preposition, that occur also with
a dative ; as in Livy, incidere poriis, for in portas. Kt mngno bel-
lare parenti, Stat, for cum mngno parente. Longe w?e« discrcpat istisy
' et vox et ratio, Hor. for ahistis discrepnt. Nee sic cnitar Iragico
tiSfferre colori. Id. And an infinite number of others which are
rwre common in Greek than in Latin.
It is by the same rule that we put this case likewise after verbs
passive, Neque cernitur nlli, Virg. for ab idlo. Cui non dictus llylas
puer? Id. By whom has not he been praised ? Ego audita tibiputa-
bam, Cic. Honesln bonis viris, non occulta quccruntur, Cic. Nun-
quam enim prccstantibus in Rep. gubernandci viris laudata est in una
senteniia pcrpetua permansio, Cic. and such like. See the annota-
tion to the 30th rule.
To this likewise we must refer the prayer of the liturgy, miserere
nobis. But in order to know whether in the purest language, mi-
seroTy or miseresco, have been joined with a dative, as well asjhciof
allatrO)
O F S Y N T A X. 29
allatroy interest, and some others ; see lower down the list of difFe-
rent governments.
We must likewise take notice, that Non esse sohendo, is a dative
in which ceri alieno is understood ; hence according to Budeus, it
is a mistake of the transcriber in Livy to say, Nee sulvendo cere alieno
Resp. erat, where we should read ceri alieno, just as this author says
in another place, Q.ui onerijerendo essent : and the like.
Rule XIII.
Of Verbs which take Two Datives.
You must join two datives to sum, habeo, do,
verto, and some others.
Examples.
There are some verbs, which require two datives,
one of the person to whom the thing happens ; and
the other of the end, or the intention to which the
thing refers. Such are sum, habeo, do, verto, tribuo^
duco, relinquo, puto, and some others. jE*^ illi lucre,
voluptati, ho7i6ri, inf amice, &c. This is a pleasure, an
advantage, an honour, a disgrace to him, and the like.
Do, relinquo tibi pignori, I give, or I leave this in
pledge with you. Utrum studio id sibi habet, an laudi
putat, Ter. does he take a pleasure in this, or does he
think it an honour that, &c.
Jam sibi tum curvis male temper at unda car mis, Virg.
The sea begins to rage against the ships.
ANNOTATION.
We frequently omit the dative of the person after those verbs,
and there remains only the dative of the thing. Exemplo est Regtdus,
Cic. Ea res questioni diu fuit, Cic.
To this we may likewise refer the following examples. Est mihi
nomen Petro. Cui nunc cognomen lido. Though we say also by ap-
position, cui cognomen liUus ; or with the genitive, cognomen Ivlif
zsjlumcn Rhetii. And according to sojue, cognomen lilluni, taking
it as an adjective, otherwise it would be a mistake to say for ex-
ample, est mihi nomen Petriim.
Rule XIV.
Of the Accusative which the Verb governs after it.
1. Verbs active always govern an accusative
of the thing after them.
2. And sometimes verbs neuter govern this ac-
cusative likewise.
Exam-
so NEW METHOD. Book V.
Examples.
1. Verbs active, and such as are of an active signifi-
cation, always have after tliem, eitlier expressed or un-
derstood, an accusative of the thing, or more properly
speaking, of the subject to which their action passeth.
Virtus sibi glu7'iamparit, virtue begets glory. Venerari
dliqucm Hi Deian, to worship a person as a God.^ -£V
7?ie destinat arcc, Virg. he designs to sacrifice me upon
the altar.
2. Verbsneuter have oftentimes this accusative. For
in the first place they may always govern the accusa-
tive of the name of their original, as Vivere 'vitam,
gaudere gaudium, Ter. to live, to rejoice. Ludere lu-
dum, to play. Servire servitiUem, Cic. to be reduced
to slavery. E'adem peccare sempa\ sup. pcccata, al-
ways to commit the same faults.
Secondly, they may govern the accusative of nouns,
whose signification borders upon their own. Ire "ciam,
to walk. Sitire humanum sdngtnnan, to thirst after
human blood. Olet imguenta^ Ter. he smells of per-
fumes. Sonat horrendiim, Virg. he makes a terrible
noise. Mult a cavere alicui, sup. 7?ia/(i, to preserve a
person from a great many misfortunes.
Thirdly, they may govern all sorts of accusatives^
when they are taken in a metaphorical sense. Ambu-
tare maria, c^- terras navigare, Cic. to walk upon the
sea, and to sail upon land. Ardebat Alexin, he was
passionately fond of Alexis. Viuetacrepatmera, Hor.
he talks of nothing but vineyards.
ANNOTATION.
The reason why these verbs, called neuter, govern thus the ac-
cusative, is because properly speaking they are then verbs active.
Now this case of" the accusative is almost the only government
that belongs to the verb itself, all the rest cTepend on something
understood : hence it ought to be generally supposed after all verbs,
though it be not expressed, as it particularly happens to those whose
action is confined uitliin themselves; as terra movit. Turn prura
avertit^ Virg. Nox calo prcccipitat : vohieniibns amiis, where we
are to understand se, which is suppressed merely because the sense
is sufficiently determined by the verb onl}'.
The lil<e also happens to some other verbs, which in common
use are understood by ever}' body ; as nuhere alicui, sup. se, or vul'
turn i for m<6ere properly signifies t!C'/«;t, being taken from viibeSf
t . because
Of Syntax. 31
because the new-married women used to veil themselves and to
cover their faces. And it is in this same signification that Virgil
says, Arsurasque comas obnubit amictii. See the Hst of the Verbs
and of the Elhpses.
Even the ii)finitive sometimes supplies the place of the accusative.
Odituumvociferarifov clamorem tuum. Amat ccenare,^ox ccenam : or
even an in tire period, Ciipio videri doctum, where videri doctum sup-
plies the place of the accusative. Quod te purges, hujus nonJaciam,&c.
But we must likewise take notice, that there are a great many
verbs which receive an accusative after them, which accusative is
governed rather by a preposition understood, as in Ter. Hcec dam
dubitas. And in Cic. Illud nan dubito : that is properly circa illud.
In the same manner verbs of motion compounded with In : Nea-at
uUam pestem majorem, viiam homimim tnvasisse, quam eoriim opimoiiem
qui ista didraxerint, Cic. Off. 3. That is to say, vivasisse in vitanif
as he has said in another place, in multas pecicnias invasii.
Rule XV.
Of Verbs that govern the person in the Accusative.
In these verbs, decet, delectat, fugit, fallit,
pudet, prae'terit, cwc? javat, the thing is
governed in the nominatite case, and the
perso7i in the accusative.
Examples.
This rule is only an explanation of the foregoing,
v/hich shews us that in these seven verbs the thing is
put in the nominative, and the person in the accusative.
Hcec res me clecet, this thing becomes me. Pietaspium
delectat, piety entertains the religious man. Istud me
prcEteriit,fugit, that escaped me, I did not know it.
No7i te fallit, you are not ignorant. Id me jwcat, I
take pleasure in that. Non te hac pudent ? Ter. are
not you ashamed of these things ?
ANNOTATION.
In order thoroughly to understand in what manner this rule is
only an appendix to that of the verbs active, we must observe that
the verb active, making its action pass into a thing, or person, as
to its subject, always takes it in the accusative. Hence we may
find several other verbs, which have the person also iu the accu-
sative, as nox eum deficit, Cic. his voice failed him.
But Latet, though generally joined to these, has only the dative
in Cicero. Nihil moliris quod mihi latere valeat. Ubi nobis hcec au-
toritas tamdiu tanta laluit. And if we read in the oration pro Sylla,
Lex poputum Rom. latuit, this must be a mistake of the transcriber,
who seeing Fop, Rom. put the accusative for the dative. It is true
that
32 NEW METHOD. Rook V.
that in other authors we find it with an accusative. Sed res Annihalem
non dialaluit, Just. Nee Intiioe doli fratrem ,/tinonis,Wrg. Though
this is ratlier a Greek than a Latin phrase, owin^' to this, that
Aa»6«ya), as an active, governs an accusative : whereas in Latin
iateo, signifying a pennaiiciit action, it would be no more permitted
to say latet me, than patet me, if the custom had not been borrowed
of the Greeks.
On the contrary decet sometimes governs the dative. Locum di-
tiorem qiiiiin victorihus decebat, Sal. Decet principi terranim populo,
Liv. Imu Herclc ita nobis decet, Ter. It even seems that this man-
ner of speaking should be more natural, as it is more conformable
to modern languages; and that the other, though more usual in
Latin, is only an ellipsis of the infinitive understood. For the
ancients, says Donatus, adding the infinitive /</cer^, used to say nos
decet Jacere ; but omitting the infinitive, they said nobis decet. Yet
Cicero never uses it but with the accusative. For in regard to the
passage which Linacer quotes from him, in his fourth book, and
Kobert Stephen in his Thesaurus, viz. Qiiandoque id decent pruden-
tice tiice, de Orat. it is very probably a mistake, because we find
in the third de Oratore, Scire quid quandoque deceat, prudentice ;
but prudentice is there a genitive, and signifies, est prudentice^ or
est proprium prudentice.
Rule XVI.
Of Five Verbs that take the person in the Accusative, and the thing
in the Genitive.
These Jive verbs miseret, poe'nitet, pudet, piget,
taedetj govern the person in the accusative^
and the thing in the genitive, «sliujasirie
piget ; tai non te pudet.
E X A ]M P L E s.
This rule has a great relation to the foregoing, since
these verbs likewise govern the person in the accusa-
tive the same as the precedent. But there is this fur-
ther to observe, that they govern the thing in the ge-
nitive; as Miseret me hominis, I have pity on the man.
Pce'nitet 7nejrat7is, I am sorry for my brother. Tui
non te pudet? are not you ashamed of yourself ? Hujus
Jacti me piget, I am sorry for having done this. Piget
me talium, I am tired of such doings. Tcedet me harum
ineptiarum, I am tired of these foHies. And in like
manner their derivatives, as miseresco ; Arcadii quceso
miserescite regis, Virg. have pity, I pray you, on this
poor Arcadian king.
ANNOTATION.
Those verbs which are called impersonals, have nevertheless
their
OfSyntax. 33
their nominative. Non te hcec pudent ? Ter. Queni neqiie p?tdct
gtdcguam, Id. and the like. Hence in the examples above given,
the nominative is always understood, and ought to be taken from
the verb itself. For, according to Priscian, pcenitet me Jratris,
is the same as, pcenafratria habtt me, or pcenitet me. Where it ap-
pears that the genitiveyrflfm is governed by pcena, as the French
say J^ai honte de monjrere, which is the same signification, as if we
were to say word for word from the Latin, la honte de monfrere me
Jait peine.
Rule XVII.
Of Verbs of remembering and forgetting.
Verbs of remembering and for getting govern either
a genitive or an accusative.
Examples.
Verbs of rememberino; and forofettins: orovern either
a genitiv^e or an accusative. Memmi malorum meoram^
or else mala mea, I remember my misfortunes. Oblitus
generis sui, or genus suu??i, who has forgot his birth.
Venit enim mihi PlatSnis in mc7item, Cic. I remember
Plato. Memineram Paidum, Cic. I remembered Paul.
Nee me meminissepigebit EliscE, nor sliali I be displeased
to remember Dido.
ANNOTATION.
1. Vossius in his lesser grammar, says that verbs of memory and
oblivion do indeed govern the genitive, either of things, or of
persons : but as for the accusative, they take it only in regard to
things, and not to persons; and therefore we cannot say Memini
Ciceronem, but only, as he adds, Ciceronis, I remember Cicero.
Nevertheless it is easy to prove the contrary by Cicero himself,
Memineram Paiilum,videram Caium, lib. de Amicit. Memini Cinnam,
vidi Syllam, modo Ccesarem,V\\i\.5. Quern hominem prode commeminisse
aiebnt, 1. de Orat. BcdbjisJ'uit Lmmvius, quern meminisse tu rion po'
ies ; de Fin. Antipnter ille, quern tu probe meministi, 3. de Orat.
Rupilius quern ego memini, Off. 1. And in his book of Old Age,
speaking of Ennius, Quem quidem probe meminisse potestis, annoenirtf
undevigesimo post ejus mortem, hi Coss.Jacti sunt.
Numeros memini, si verba tenerem, Virg. Eel. ult.
And when we say Memini de Cicerone, it is in a different sense:
for Meminisse alicujus, is to retain the remembrance of a person ;
whereas Meminisse de aliquo, is to make mention of him.
2. Nouns of remembering and forgetting govern only a geni-
tive. They may be referred to the ninth rule, of adjectives which
signify things belonging to the mind. Immemor injuria. Memor
accepti benejicii, &c.
3. Now in the government of this genitive, another noun,
which governs it, is still understood. Vcnit in mentem illius diei,
■ Vol. II. D sup.
34 NEW METHOD. Book V.
sup. recordath). Memini malorum, sup. memoriam. But when we say
wala mea, it is in the simple government of verbs active, and there-
fore belongs properly to this place. Thus when Terence says,
satagit renun suartmi, Ileaut. he thinks of his affairs, the meaning
is, agit sat rerum snarum. Just as Plautus in his Bacch. says, Nunc
agitas tide sat iuannn rerum. Where sat supplies the place of an
accusative derived by syncope from satis, which is an old noun,
like magis and potis, as we shall observe in the remarks on the
Adverbs, n. 2.
Rule XVIII.
Of two Verbs coming together.
TVhen two verbs come together, without tit or ne,
the second must be put in the iujinitive.
Examples.
When two verbs follow one another, without one
of these conjunctions ut or ?2e expressed or understood,
the second is always put in the infinitive. Nescis ines-
care homifies, Ter. you don't know how to intice men.
Docemur disputdre, non "viverCy we are taught to dis-
pute, but not to live. Cernere eraty Virg. for licebat^
one might see. Cupit ambularey he desires to walk.
If the conjunction ut or 7ie is understood, the verb
must be in the subjunctive. Fac sciam, sup. z//, act
so that I may know. Cave sentiant, sup. we, for ut
nCf take care that they do not hear of it.
ANNOTATION.
1. We likewise place this rule here, because in this construction
the infinitive oftentimes supplies the place of the accusative. For,
amat luclcre, for example, is the same as amat lusum. Nescis in-
escare, the same as Nescis hoc, or ilbid, as we have above observed,
rule l^.
2. Nouns adjective which retaia the signification of the verbs,
retain likewise this government. For as we say Cupio discere, we
say also Cupidus discere. Nescis inescare ; nescius inescare : and even
with the infinitive passive. Dig7ius amari. Apia regi. But then
the infinitive passive supplies the place of the dative or the abla-
tive : so that apta regi, is the same as apta regimini : dignus amari,
as dignus amove ; and the infinitive active supplies the place of the
genitive, as Cupidus discere, for discendi or disciplince ; whereby we
see likewise that the infinitive must be considered as a noun verbal
and indeclinable.
Sometimes we likewise understand the former verb, by putting
only the infinitive, Maie inccej)to desistere victam ? Virg. sup. oportet
or decet : and sometimes we understand the infinitive itself. Scit
Latine, sup. logui, JDiicitJidikis, sup. camre. And especially we
must
Of Syntax. 95
must often vinclerstapd the substantive verb*- l^pero mc ixitegritatis
laudcm consecutuvi, Cic. that is, me esse consecutiinu
After verbs of motion we generally put the supine in UM, in-
stead of the infinitive, Mea Glyccrium, cur te is perdittim? Ter. Ut
cubitum discessmuSf Cic. as we went to bed.
Rule XIX.
Of Prepositions which govern the Accusative.
Thefollowingprepositiojis govern the accusative:
ad, apud, contra, adversum, adversus,
per, circum, circa, erga^ extra, juxta, cis,
citra, pone, penes, inter, intra, propter,
ob, post, ante, prae ter, supra, secus, se-
cundum, trans, ultra, infra. .
Examples.
We make mention here of the prepositions, because
most of the following governments are either mixed
with or depend on them. Those which govern an
accusative we reduce to five and twenty.
1. Ad; near to, upon, towards, to, before, until,
as far as, according to. Habet hortos ad Tiberim, he
has gardens upon the river Tiber. Ad urbem venit, he
came to town. Adjudicem dicere, to speak before the
judge. Ad decern aimos^ ten years hence. Ad usum
hominum, for the use of man. Ad prcBseriptum omnia
gerere, to do every thing according to orders.
2. Adve'rsum or Adve'rsus, against, opposite
to, towards. Adversus cikum, Plin. against the hill.
Adversum patrem, against my father. Fktas adversus
deos, Cic. reverence of the gods. De ilia adversus
hunc loqui, Ter. to speak to him of her.
3. Ante, before. Aritepedes, before the feet. Ante
horam octdvam, before eight o'clock.
4. Apud, with, at, before, near. Apud pat rem,
at my father's. Apud judicem dicere^ to plead before
the judge. Apud te plurimujn valet ista ratio, this
reason weighs very much with you.
5. Circa, near, about. Circa forum, near the
forum. Circa eum mensem, about that month.
6. CiKCUM, about, near. Circum littora, near the
shore. ^
po 7. Cis.
56 NEW METHOD. Book V.
7. Cis and Citra, on this side. Citrajlumen, on
this side the river. Cis EupIn\Uem, on this side the
Euphrates.
S. CoNTUA, against, contrary to, opposite. Con-
Ira autor'Uatcm, against authority. Contra spem, con-
trary to liope. Carthago Ithllam contra^ Virg. Car-
thage over against Italy.
9. Ekga, towards. Charitas erga proxhnum, clia-
rity towards our neighbour.
10. Extra, without, besides, except. Extra ur-
bem, without the city. E.vtj^a modum, beyond mea-
sure. Extra famulos, except the servants.
11. Infra, under, below, beneath. Infra se, be-
neath himself.
12. Inter, among. Infer ca:'ieros, among the
rest. Inter arenam, among the sand.
13. Intra, within. Inti^a p/irietes, whhin the \vn\\s.
14. Juxta, near, over against. Juxta riam, near
the road. Juxta ripam, near the bank.
15. Ob, for, before. Ob cjnolumentiim, for profit.
Ob amorem, for love. Ob oculos^ before his eyes.
: \6. Penp:s, in the power, in the disposal, in pos-
session. Isthcsc penes vos psaitria est, Ter. that singer
is at your house. Omnia adsunt bona, quern penes est
rirtus, Plant, he that is possessed of virtue, possesseth
all that is good. Penes te es ? Hor. are you in your
senses ?
17. Per, by, during, thro'. Per diem, during day
time. Per ancillam, by my servant. Per campos,
through the fields.
18. Pone; behind. Po/i'^rt'^ew, behind the temple.
1.9. Post; after, since, within, behind. Post f-
nem, after the end. Post legem hanc constitutam, since
this law has been enacted. Post sexennium, within
six years. Post tergum, behind the back.
20. Pr^eter ; except, besides, near, before. Om-
Ties prceter eum, all except him. Procter mmniajiiiere,
to run near the walls: Procter oculos, before his eyes.
21. Propter; for, because of, in consideration of,
for the sake of, near. Propter honestatem, for honour
or reputation. Propter wSj for your sake, on your
O F S Y N T A X. 57
account. Propter patrem cuhantes^ Cic. lying near
their father.
22. Secus, or Secundum; near, along side. St-
cusjlumos, Plin. (or as others read secundum) near the
rivers. Conductus est ccscus secus 'viam stdre^ Quintil.
a blind man was hired to stand near the river side.
Secundum phllosophos, according to the philosophers.
Secundum f rat rem ill'is plurimum tribuebat, next to his
brother, he paid the greatest deference to them. Se-
cundum ripam, along the bank side.
23. Supra, above. Supra leges, above the laws.
54. Trans, over, on the other side. Trans maria,
over the s^as.
25. Ultra, beyond. Ultra Tiberim, beyond the
Tiber, on the other side the Tiber.
ANNOTATION.
We generally join the accusative to these prepositions, prope,
circiter, usque, versus : yet Sanctius sheweth that these are only
adverbs.
For when we say, Prope mums ; prope sediiionem ventum est, and
such like, we understand ud, which forms the government. Other-
wise we should say that propior and propius ; proximus and jjroxime
are likewise prepositions, since we find proximus te, Plaut. Propius
urbem, projnor montem, Sal. Rex proxime formam latrocinii, Liv.
The same must be said of pridie and postridie, since we say pridie
nonas ; postridie calendas, where' we understand post and ante. The
same must also be said of procul, since we say Frocul urbem : procul
muros, where we understand ad, a% procul mariyoceano, prociddubio,
where we understand ab, and Cicero most frequently expresses it,
procul a nobis. And prope in the like manner is joined with the
ablative by putting A or ab, prope a Sicilia, Cic. Prope a muris ha-
bemus hostem. Prope ab origine, &c. Which shews that it is not
prope which governs either case, so much as the preposition ex-
pressed or understood.
It is the same in regard to circiter : for though we say, Circiter
calendas, Cicero also hath, Circiter ad calendas. In like manner
we say, Dies circiter quindecim (sup. per) iterjtcerunt, Caes. Decern
circiter millia (sup. adj Liv. Loca hcec circiter (sup. ad) Plin. Thus
wfi see that this adverb always supposeth a preposition, whether
it be taken for place, for number, or for time. And then in this
last sense it may be referred to Rule 26. lower down.
Usque is as often joined with another preposition, as without.
For as we say usque Romam ; usque sudoreiitj we say likewise usque
ante calendas, usque extra solitudinem. Ab ovo usque ad mala ; usque
injlumen ; usque ad summam senectutem. Trans Alpes usque. Usque
38 N E W M E T H O D. Book V
•
sul> osculum noctis ; and the like, or even with an ablative, Siculo
ab usque Pachino, Virg. Usque /i puerititi, Ter. Usque ab avo, atquc
atavu progeniem vestram rejerens, Ter. Ex JEthiopia est usque ha-c,
Id. Hence, as Silvius observeth, all these phrases include the
same sij^nification, usque palutium, ad palulium, usque ad palatium,
ad pnlatium usque, ad usque pa!atiu7n ; and all the lollowing include
another, a palatio, usque a palatio, ab usque pal alio.
Now usque, when by itself, properly signifieth no more than still,
or till now. Usque laborat, she is still in labour. Usquene valuisti?
Animus usque antehac attentus, Ter, and such like.
Veusus or Versum are no more than adverbs, which plainly
appears even from adversus and adversum : and though we find
in Cicero Brundusium versus, we find also Ad Alpes versus, injbrum
versus ; sursum versus, and the like.
Sanctius rejects secus also, and says that this phrase of Scripture,
Secus decursus aquartim, is not Latin: and Charisias, lib. 1. title of
analogy, having mentioned that secus is an adverb which signifies
aliter, from whence comes secius a.'KXotole^us, he adds, Cccterum id
gicod vulgus usurpat ; secus ilium sedijiocest secundum ilium ; S^ novum
Sf sordidum est. Nevertheless Vossius acknowledges this preposi-
tion, and says that secundum and secus seem even to be derived from
the same root, namely sccundus ; shewing that it has been not only
adopted by Pliny and Quintilian, whom we have quoted, but
likewise by Sempronius Asellio in his history, Non possent stationcs
foccre secus hoc. But he grants that those who study the purity of
the language, do not make use of it. For which reason Scioppius
censures Maffei for using it so frequently in his history of the In-
dies, as he observes some other mistakes in this agreeable author,
contrary to the purity of the language. From whence appearcth,
continues the same Scioppius, the error of those, who having been
accustomed to authors of the latter ages, undertake to write iri
Latin, without taking sufficient care to acquire an exact know-
ledge of the laws of grammar.
Rule XX.
Of Prepositions which govern the Ablative.
These prepositions^ coram, a, ab, abs, cum, abs-
que, de, ex, e, pro, pra3, clam, palam,
tenus, sine, govern the ablative.
Examples.
The prepositions governing the ablative are reduced
to twelve.
1. A, Ab, Abs (which are the same), since, after,
by, because of, in the behalf. A J route, before. Apue-
ritid, from one's childhood. A morte Ca'saris, since
the death of Ca^saf. A civibus, in the behalf of the
citizens. A Jr'igore, because of the cold, against the
fcold. Ah aUguo pei'ire, to be killed by some body.
t "2. Abs-
Of Syntax. 59
2. Absque ; without. Absque te, without thee.
3. Clam Prceceptore, unknown to tlie master. For-
merly it governed the accusative. Clam patrem, Ter.
unknown to my father. And in the same manner
clanculum.
4. CouAM ipso^ before him, in his presence.
5. Cum cup'iditate, with desire, with passion.
6. De, of, for, because of, concerning. De ho-
minibus, of men. De quorum mhiwro, of whose num-
ber. Multis de causis, for many reasons. De raudus-
culo Numeridno, multum te amo, Cic. 1 am very much
obHged to you for that httle money. A'dii te her) de
filid, Ter. I called on you yesterday to talk about your
daughter. De lanificio, neminem t'wieo, as to the spin-
ning, I am afraid of nobody. Nan est bonum somnus
de prdndio, Plaut. it is not good to sleep after dinner.
7. E or Ex, out of, from. EJiammd, out of the
fire. E.v Deo, from God, according to God.
8. Palam omnibus, before all the world.
9. PRiE^ in comparison, because of, before. Prce
nobis, in comparison to us. Ptce multitudine, because
of the multitude. Pr(i^ oculis, before his eyes.
10. Pro, for, according, instead of, by, because
of, in consideration, for the sake. Pro cdpite, for his
life. Pro mirito, according to his merit. Pro illo,
instead of him, in his place. ProfSribus, before the
door. Pro nostra amicitid te rogo, I beseech you for
friendship sake, out of regard or consideration to our
friendship.
11. Sine pondere, without weight. Sine amorCy
without affection.
12. Ten us, as far as, up to. Cdpulo ienus, up to
the hilt.
This preposition is always put after the case it go-
verns. And if the noun be in the plural, it is gene-
rally put in the genitive. Lumborum Ienus, Cic. up to
the loins. Cumarum tenus illi rumores caluerunt. Ccel.
ad Cic. these reports were spread as far as Cuma. Au-
rium tenus, Quintil. up to the ears. Though Ovid
hath also in the ablative, pectoribus tenus, up to the
stomach, anno-
40 NEW METHOD. Book V.
ANNOTATION.
Between these three prepositions a, nb, or aba, there is only tliis
difference, that a is put belore words beginning witli a consonant,
A Pompeio, d milile : and ab or abs before a vowel, or before a
consonant difiicult to pronounce, n?. ab an cilia ; ab rege ; ab Jove ;
ab lege ; ab Si/lla ; abs TulUo ; ubs quohbct.
Absque, in conuc poets, is taken for .s;»e. Absque eojnret. Ter.
But in prose vve do not find it in that signification. Hence it is
better Latin to say &ine dubio, without doubt, than Absque dubio.
Rule XXI.
Of Prepositions which govern the Accusative and the Ablative.
Sub, super, in, subtcr, govern two cases, but with
different signijications.
Examples.
The above four prepositions generally require
1. The ablative, when there is no motion signified
from one place to another. 2. The accusative, when
a motion is signified. 3. They also govern very fre-
quently the case of the preposition for which they are
put, and into which they may be resolved.
Sub.
1. Siih jwmijic pacis belhim hUef, under tlie name of
peace, war is concealed. Quo deiude sub ipso, ecce vo*
lat calcemque tcrit, Virg. upon which he runs, and
treads close to his heels. Where sub governs the ab-
lative, because this motion does not signify a change
from one place to another.
2. Postcsque sub ipsos nituntur gradibus, Virg. they
mount by steps up to the door. Where sub governs
the accusative, because it signifies a change from one
place to another.
3. Sub horam pugnce, instead of circa, about the
hour of battle. Sub ncctemcura recurrit, Virg. anxiety
returns towards niffht.
o
Super.
1. Super fronde viridi, upon the green leaf
2. Super GcuYwiantas c^' Indos, proferet imperiuiu,
Virg. he will extend his empire beyond theinhabrtants
of the interior Libya and the Indians.
3. Super hac re, instead of de, concerning this mat-
ter. Super ripasfliminis effYisus^ Liv. instead ofsecun-
durrij
Of Syntax. 41
ff«W2, stretched along the banks of the river. Super ccenam
occisus, instead of inter, killed while he was at supper.
In.
1. Deambulareinforo, to vv^alk in the market. Fando
*volvuntur in imo, they go to the bottom. With the
ablative, because the motion is not made from one
place to another, but in the same place.
S. Evolvere posset — In mare se Xanthus, Virg.
might discharge itself into the sea. Where the accu-
sative is put, because it signifies a change of place.
3. Eusiiithius in Homerum, instead of super, Eusta-
thius in his comment upon Homer. In hanc sententiam
multa dixit, he said many things to this purpose. In
horam, instead of ad, for an hour. Amor iji patriam,
instead of eroY/, the love of one's country. Inpraesens
^ in futurum, Liv. for ad or quoad, for the present
and the future.
SUBTER.
1. Ferre libet subter densd testudine casus, Virg. they
are pleased to withstand all the efforts of the enemy
under a thick penthouse. Campi qui subter mot'nia,SiSit.
the fields under the ramparts.
2. Augusti subter fastigia tecti, jEnea??i du.vit, Virg.
she conducted iEneas into a magnificent palace.
ANNOTATION.
We find likewise that IN hath an accusative where there is no
motion, as Manutius, Sanctius, and Vossius, have observed after
Gellius, Priscian, and others : numero mihi in mentem Jiiit, Plaut.
Esse in magnum hunorem, Ter. to be greatly honoured. Esse in ami-
citiam ditioiiemque populi Romani, Cic. Cum vestros partus in prce-
donumj'uisse potestatem sciatis, Cic. Res esse in vadimonium ccepit, Id.
Jn potestatem habere, Caes. and Sal. In tabulas perscribere, Cic.
Lignece solecB in pedes indutce. Id.
It is also found with an ablative, where motion is signified, Venit
in senatii, Cic. Cum divertissem a Cumis in Vestiano, Cic. In con-
spectu ineo audet venire, Phaedr. Venit in regione, Manil. apud Scalig.
Qua in Ccelio monte itur, Varro.
And hence it is w ithout doubt that we find several verbs which
govern both the accusative and the ablative with ^?^ ; incidere in
<Bs, Liv. incidere in cere, Cic. Plin. & others, contrary to Valla's opi-
nion. Abdere sc in tenebris, Cic. z« domum, Cic. ih occultum, Caes,
in prcesentia omittere, Cic. in prcesens tempus Sf in aliud omittere,
Hor. in equum Trojamim includere, Cic. in Jabulas incltfsa. Id. in
dialogos includere. Id. in tectorio arioli includam, Id. imaginem in-
dudit in clypeo^ Id. Sub-
42 NEW METHOD. Book V.
SuBTF.R governs either the accusative or the ablative in the same
signification ; Plato iram in pectore, cupiditatem suhter prcrcordia
locavit, Cic. Plato placed anger in the breast, and voluptuous
desires in the entrails ; Subter pineta Galesi. Et subter captos arma
sederc duces. This shews that there was hardly any certain rule
for the government of those four prepositions among the ancients.
The reader may consult Linacer upon this article, of which he
treats at large.
It is also to be observed that we meet with super, as well as in
and ex, with the genitive in some authors, whicii is only an imi-
tation of the Greeks, super peciinice, tutekcque siicc, Paul. Jurisc.
Descriptio ex duodccim ccelestium signorum, ^'^itruv.
Clam, as we have observed, heretofore governed likewise an
accusative, Clam patrem, dam uxorem ; but now it hath only an
ablative. Plautus has used it also with the dative, where it serves
as an adverb. Hocjieri qucim magni rcjeral mlhi clam est ; that is,
viihi occidtum est.
That almost every government may be resolved hy the
prepositions.
We may further observe in this place, that the use of prepo-
sitions is so generally diffused through all languages, that there is
scarce a government, phrase, or expression, but depends upon,
or may be reduced to them, as may be easily shewn in every part
of s)'ntax.
In partitives ; Pauci de nostris cadunt, Cajs.
In verbs of accusing ; Accusare de negligcntia, Cic.
In every other government of the genitive; Fulgor ah auro, Lucr.
for aiiri. Crepuit a Glt/cerio ostium, Ter. for Qlt/cerii ostium.
In the government of the dative ; Bonus ad ccetera, Liv. Homo
ad nullum partem uiilis, Cic. Which likewise shews very plainly
that the dative denotes no moi'e than the relation of attribution,
since utilis alicui rei, is the same as idilis ad aliqtiam rem.
In the comparative ; Immanior ante alios omnes, Virg.
In the superlative ; Acerrimum autein ex omnibus sensibus^ esse
sensu7n videndi, Cic. Ante alios pnlchcrrimus omneS, Virg.
In nouns of plenty or want ; Liber ^ deliciis, Cic.
• In several particular verbs ; Celarc de aliquo. Commoncjacere de
tiliqua re. Ad properationem ?neam quiddam interest, Cic. In id so-
lum student, Quint.
In questions of place, even in names of cities; Navis in Caieta,
pnrata est nobi's, Cic. See lower down, rule 25.
In questions of time; In tempore ad eum veni ; de noctevigitare :
regnare j)er trcs annos. See rule 2{).
In nouns of price ; Si mercains esset ad earn suynmnm quam vo-
tueram, Cic.
With gcHlrtds ; Inji'dicnndo; pro vapidando ; ah absnlvendum.
■ With participles; Pro derclicto habere, Cic, and others in the
aarae manner.
Rule
Of Syntax. , 43
RULF, XXII.
Of Verbs compounded with a Preposition.
1. A verb compounded with a preposition hath
the ease belonging tn the preposition.
2. And oftentimes the preposition is repeated.
Exam p l l s.
1. The preposition preserves its force even in compo-
sition, so that the verbs with which it is compounded,
take the case whicli belongs to the preposition, as Adire
oppida, to go to the cities. Abire oppido, to go out of
town. Circumequithre jiicd'niay to ride round the town
walls. Amovire animum studio pueriii, to divert his
mind from puerile amusements. Ejcpellerepectore, to
banish from the heart. Excedere muros, to go out of
the walls, as coming from extra: or excedere terrd, to
go out of the country, as coming from ex.
2. But frequently the preposition is repeated ; as
Nihil no7i cojisiderdtiim exibat ex ore, Cic. he said not
one word but what was maturely considered. Qui ad
nos intempestive ddeunt, molesti scepe sunt, those who
come to us at an unseasonable time, are frequently
troublesome. A sole absis, Cic. don't keep the sua
from me.
Rule XXIII.
Of Verbs that govern the Accusative with ad.
A'ttinet, spectat, and pertinet, require an accusa-
tive with the preposition ad.
Examples.
These three impersonal verbs take an accusative
with the preposition ad ; as A'ttinet ad dignitdtem, this
concerns your dignity. Id ad te pertinet, this belongs
to you. Hoc ad illwH spectat, this belongs to him.
Quid ad nos dttinetP what is this to us? Totum ejus
consilium ad bellum mild spectdre videti{r, it seems that
his whole thought is turned towards war.
Rule XXIV.
Of Verbs which take two Accusatives, or that have different gd-
^. vernments.
1. Vcrhs of warning, ^.Asking, 5. And
cloath"
44 NEW METHOD. Book V.
cloathing, 4. With cclo, 5. Ajid doceo,
oftentimes govern the thing and the person
in the accusative ; or in some other man-
ner depend on the preposition.
6. Interdico governs the thing in the ablative^
Examples.
We include in this rule the verbs of different go-
vernmentSj and particularly those which take two
accusatives, or which in some other manner depend
on the preposition.
1. Verbs of warning; with two accusatives. Moneo
te hanc rem, I give you notice of this affair. Istud me
admonhites, Cic. giving me notice of that.
The thing in the ablative with the preposition.
Moneo te de liac re, I give you notice of that. Oro te
ut Terentiam moneatis detestamento, Cic. I beg you will
inform Terentia of the will.
The thing in the genitive. Commonerc aliquem mise-
riarum suarum, to remind a person of his miseries.
Grammaticos sid officii commonemus, Plin, we put the
grammarians in mind of their duty.
2. Verbs of asking, with two accusatives. Tehocbe-
neficium rogo, I beg this favour of you. Pacem iepos-
cimus omnes, Virg. we all sue for peace. Poposci ali-
quem ebrum qui ader ant causamdisserhidi, Cic. 1 begged
that some members of the company would propose
the subject of debate.
The person in the ablative with the preposition.
Hoc a me poscit,Jlagitat, he asks, or begs that of me.
Sciscitari, percontari ab aliquo, to ask a person.
Peto is more usual in the latter form, and is seldom
found with two accusatives. Peto a te vejiiam, I ask
your pardon. We say also peto tibi, I ask for you.
Missionem jnilitibus petere, to ask a discharge for sol-
diers. But then it is the dative of acquiring, or of
the person.
3. Verbs of cloathing with two accusatives. In the
Vulgate Bible, I'nduit eum stolam glorice, he clad him
in a robe of glory. Quidlibet indutus, Hor. dressed
any how. The
Of Syntax. 45
The person in the accusative, and the thing in the
ablative, I'nduo te 'veste^ I put this garment on you.
The person in the dative, and the thing in the accu-
sative, rnduo tibi "cestem^ I put this garment on you.
E.vmre vest em alicui, to undress a person.
4. Celo with two accusatives. Celo te hanc rem, I
jConceal this thing from you. Ea ne me celet consuefed
Jil'mm^ Ter. I have accustomed my son to conceal no-
ihinor of all this from me.
'*'' The thing in the ablative with the preposition. Celo
te de hac re, I will not tell you that.
The person in the dative. Celare dliquid alicui, to
conceal a thing from a person.
5. Verbs of teaching, with two accusatives. DSceo
te grammaticam, I teach you grammar. Q_u(E te leges
prceceptaquefortia belli — Erudiit, Stat, who taught you
the laws and generous maxims of war.
The thing in the ablative with the preposition. Qui
de suo adventu nos doceant^ Cic. who may let us know
of their coming.
6. Interdico governs the thing in the ablative. In-
ter dico tibi domo med, I forbid you my house. Interdico
tibi aqudS^^ ig7ii, I forbid you the use of fire and water.
ANNOTATION.
Sanctius maintains that no verb can of itself govern two accusa-
tives of different things at the same time-, and that what we see
here is only an imitation of the Greeks, who put this case almost
every where, by supposing their prepositions x«l«, or in^h as we
should say, circa, per, ob, secundum, propter, ad or quod ad. For
doceo te grammaticam, implies secundum, or quad ad grammaticam^
and in the same manner the rest. Hence the passive of these verbs
always retains the accusative which depends on the preposition.
Doceor gramm.aticam ; eruditits GrcEcas literas, Cic. Galeam iuduitur,
Virg. Inutile Jerrum cingitur. Id. Rogari sententiam, Cic.
In like manner we must explain the following passages by the
preposition. Magnampartem in his occupati sunt, Cic. Nostram vi'
cem ultus est ipse sese, Cic. Multn gemens ignominiamptagasque superbi
victoris, Virg. Quod te per genitorcm oro. Id. Quipurgor bilem, Hor.
Nunc id prodeo, Ter. that is to say, ob id, or propter id, according
to Donatus.
To this we must also refer what the grammarians have distin-
guished by the name of synecdoche, and may be called the accusa-
tive governed by a preposition understood. Omnia Mercurio similis
•iocemque, &c. Virg. Expleri ment^m nequit, Id. Nodoque sinus coU
lectg,
4(3 NEW METHOD. Cook V.
ledajluentes, Id. Which is the same as, Oculos snffusa nitentes, says
Servius. Cressa genus Pholo'^, Wrg. Clarige?n(s, Tac. Micat anri'
bus 6^- tremit arlus, Virg. Flares mscripti nomina rcgiim, Id. Eludo
te annulum, Plaut. Which occqrs mucii oftener among tlie poets,
^hough witli the word avterk this figure has been used upon all oc-
casions. Ccetera prudcns 8^ atteutiis, Cic. Veriim ccctera egregimny
Liv. LcEtuni c^icraf Hoi*. Ar'gentum quod hubcs condonnnnts /r, Ter.
in Phorm. Habeo alia multa qncc mine cundonahiiur, Id. in EunucliQ.
according as Donatus, PoIiManus, Sanctius, Vossius, Heinsius, and
others read it, and as we find it in tJie MSS. so that we must,
understand, secimdilm qua;, ille condonabihir. This seems to havp
escaped Julius Scaliger, wlien he finds fault with Erasmus for read-
ing it thus, pretending that it should be eojidouabnnliir, contrary
to the measure of the verse, and the authority of all copies what-
ever ; and alledging for reason that condonare aliqtiem argcntum is not
Latin, whereas it is the very example of the Phormio, wlu'cli Do-
natus expressly produces, to authorise this passage of the Eunuch.
It is also to be observed that we are not allowed to use indis-
criminately the different governments above mentioned. For it
would not be right to say, Consido te hccreditatemy for de hareditaic.
Cicero says, Amicitice vcteris commonefacere, but never amicitiam.
Though with the word res we say admoneo, common ejacio te hujus
rei, or /tanc rem, or de hac re. Therefore we must always abide by
the practice of the purest authors.
Rule XXV.
Of the Four Questions of Place.
1. The question UBI takes the ablative with in,
Oi^ without in ; aiidjruts the names of towns of
thefirst andsecond declension, in the genitive.
2. The question QUO takes in with the accu-
sative., and puts the names of towns in the
accusative without in.
3. The question QUA takes the accusative with
per, or an ablative without a preposition.
3. The question UNDE takes an ablative, with
the prepositions a, or ex ; and puts thejiames of
towns in the ablative without the preposition.
4. Rus a7id domus are governed in the same
manner as the names of towns.
Example s.
We have liere four questions of place under our
consideration.
1. Ubi, wliich denotes the place where one is.
Ubi est? where is he? 2. Quo,
OfSyntax. 47
2. Quo, which denotes the place whither one goes.
Qud vadit ? where is he going to ?
3. Qua, which signifies the place through which a
person passeth. Qua transiit? which way did he go?
4. Unde, which denotes the place from whence a
person comes. Unde venit ? from whence comes he ?
In all these questions we must first of all consider the
preposition that belongs to them, and the case it governs.
Secondly, we ai^e to take notice that small places,
that is the proper names of towns and villages, and
sometimes of islands, are generally put in the case of
the preposition, without expressing it, though it be
always understood. And the other nouns, whether
they signify large places, that is, provinces or king-
doms, or whether they be appellatives, are generally
put with the preposition, though the contrary some-
times happeneth.
Thirdly, we must observe that in all questions,
these two nouns rus and domus, are always governed
in the same manner, as if they were the proper names
of towns.
Fourthly, when we are mentioning these questions,
it is not necessary that the question ubi,qud, or any other
should be expressed, but only that it be understood.
This being premised, it is easy to retain the rules of
these four questions.
1. Ubi takes the ablative with in. A'mhidat in
JiortOj he walks in the garden. Vivit in Gallia, in urbe,
he lives in France, in the city.
Or the ablative only, in being understood, especi-
ally if they be names of small places. Philippus Neapoli
est,S^ Lenttilus Puteolis, Philip is at Naples, and Lentu-
lus at Pozzuolo. Degit Carthagine, Parisiis, Athenis, he
lives at Carthage, at Paris, at Athens. Sum nm,Cic.
Swn rure, Hor. I am in the country. For heretofore they
said rure vel ruri in the ablative according to Charisius.
We must except those nouns which have the genitive
in N. or in I, that is, of the first or second declension,
as Romce natus, Sicilice sepultics, born at Rome, buried
in Sicily. 3I(mere Lugdmi, to stay at Lyons. Esse
domi, to be at home. Quant as ille res domi t?uliti(eque
48 NEW MET 11 D. Rook V.
gesserit, Cic. what great matters he performed both at
home and in the field.
2. Quo takes in with tlie accusative, because it sig-
nifies motion, as Quo proper as r* where are you going
so fast? In (I'deni B. Virginis, to St. Mary's church. In
A'frkani, to Africa.
In small places it is more usual to put the accusative
alone, in being understood ; as Ire Parisios, to go to
Paris. Proficisci Rojuam, to go to Rome. Ire rus, to
go to the country.
3. Qua likewise takes the accusative with per ; Qua
iterfecisti ? which way did you travel? Per A'ngUanif
through England.
Or it will have the ablative only without the pre-
position, especially if they be names of small places;
liomd Iransiit, he passed through Ptome.
4. Unde, joins the prepositions e.v or e, or even a
or ab to this same case : as Reversus e.v ag?'o, e cubiculo,
being returned from the fields, from the chamber. Re-
eleo ex Italia^ e.v Sicilia, I come back from Italy, from
Sicily. Venio ajudice, I come from the judge's.
Or it takes an ablative only, if they be names of
small places, the preposition being understood ; as Fe-
nit Roma, rwre, domo, Lugdimo, Athenis, he is returned
from Rome, from the fields, from home, from Lyons,
from Athens.
ANNOTATION.
Most grammarians observe this difference betwixt the names of
towns and those of provinces, that the names of towns are put
without the preposition in all questions, and the names of provinces
with the preposition. Yet this is what the learned are not agreed
upon, as may be seen in Sanctius, Scioppius, Vossius, and others ;
because, say they, the ancients have not always conformed to this
practice, and grammarians are indeed the depositaries, but not the
supreme lords or sovereigns of language.
Hence it is not only certain that the preposition is the real cause
of the government, whether it be expressed or understood ; but it
is even frequently expressed in the names of small places, as on the
contrary it is sometimes understood in fthe names of provinces, in
all questions, as we shall make appear under the following heads.
The (jueation Ubi.
We find the names of towns and small places with the preposi-
tion : as Naves longas in Hispalijaciendas ciiravit, Cscs. hi Alexan-
dria, Cic. In domo mea, Plin. Hor. In domo Ccesaris umis vixfuity
'Cic.
Of Syntax. r49
Cic. Meretrix S^ mater Jamilias in una domo, Ter. Navis in Caieta
est pa rata nobis S)- Brundusii, Cic. where he joins the two govern-
ments. Fur turn factum in domo ah eo qui dumifail, Quintil.
On the contrary, we find the names of •provinces in the geni-
tive, hke those of small places. Siciiice ciim essem, .Cic. Duos filios
suus JEgypti occisos cognovit, Val. Max. Romce Numidicequefacinora
ejus commemorat, Sail. Where he makes no difference between the
name of the city and that of the province.
We find likewise the ablative without a preposition, Nattis re-
gione urbis sexta, Saet. Domo me contineo, Cic. Nee densa nascittir
humo, Col. Sustinet invidia, tristia signa domo, Ovid. Hunc ubi
deficit abde domo, Virg.
The question Unde.
^ We meet with provinces in the ablative without the preposi-
tion. JEgypto remeuTis, Tacit. Judaea prqfecti, Suet, Si Pom-
peius Italia cedit, Cic. Non rediit Caria, Plant.
But the names of towns with the preposition, are still more com-
mon. A Brtindusio, Cic. Ab Alexandria, Cic. Ab Athenis in
Bceotiam ire, Serv. Sulp. Where he makes no distinction betwixt
the name of a town and that of a province, no more than Cicero,
when he said, Ab Ephcso in Syriam jyrojectus, Livy hardly ever puts
the names of towns in any question without the preposition. Ab
Roma legio7ies venisse nuntiatum est. Ab Antio legiones prqjectce . And
an infinite number of others, which occur in every page of this au-
thor. It appears also from Suetonius, which Linacer and Sanctius
have not neglected to observe, that the emperor Augustus, in or-
der to render his style more perspicuous and intelligible, never
mentioned a place without making use of the prepositions.
The question Qua.
In regard to this question, we are to consider that qua is de-
rived from the ablative feminine, just as quare is said for qua de
re, according to Vossius ; therefore when we say, qua transiit? we
understand j^arte, urbe, regione, provincia, or the like. So that no
wonder if we answer indifferently by the same case in all sorts of
nouns. Ibamforte via sacra, Hor. Totd ambidat Roma, Cic. Totd
Asia vagatur, Cic. Midtcc insidice mihi terra martque Jactca sunt,
Cic. and in all these ablatives iji is understood.
But if we answer with per, it is no extraordinary thing, since
we have shewn that there is no government which may not be
^•esolved by the prepositions.
The question Quo.
It is particularly in this question that authors indifferently use or
omit the prepositions with all sorts of nouns.
Without the preposition they say, Sardiniam venit, Cic. Cum
se Italiam venturum promisisset, Caes. JEgyptum induxit exercitumy
Liv. Biisphorum conjiigere, Cic. Epirum piortanda dedit, Val. Proxi-
mum civitatem deducere, Appul. But we must not be surprised at
this ; for since quo, according to Sanctius and Scioppius, is an
ancient accusative plural in o, the same as ambo and duo, which is
still continued in quocirca, quoiisgue, and quoad, as when we say.
Vol. II. E q'ni
.50 NEW METHOD. Book V.
qub xmdis, we understand 2n or ad ; so we may answer by the ac-
cusative only, the preposition being understood.
They likewise use the names of towns with the preposition,
Consilium in Lutetiam Parisiornm frnns/ert, Cscs. In Sicijonemafferrc
peciiniam, Cic. Tliongh a little before that he saiti, Prujectus
Argis Sicyonem, 2. Off. Cursusad Brundiisium, Id. In Messanuw ve-
vire. Id. In Arpinum sc abdcre. Id. also, ubi voa delapsi domos, ^- in
riira ve&lrnfnerilis, Liv. Ad ductus prq/icisci Jihenas, Propert. <S:c.
Now in regard to what is said, that ad signifies no more than
near, and in within ; and in like manner that a signifies near or
hard by, and ex from within ; this is generally true, when wc
would signify that something is situated, or done near or in a par-
ticular place, habet exercitum ad urbem ; habet hortos ad Tiberinu
But it is not generally true, when we are speaking of the question
ywo; and we shall find that Livy, and several others, have indif-
ferently used both ways of expressing. And so has Cicero too,
when he says, Te vera nolo, nisi ipse rumor jam raucus erit factuSy
ad Baias venire ; erit enim nobis lionestius videri venisse in ilia locct
ploratum potius giiam natatum, lib. 9. epist. 2.
The amount of what may be said in regard to this distinction of
the names of towns and provinces, is this, that in all probability
those who studied the exact purity of the Latin, while it was a
living language, would fain establish it as a rule. Hence it is that
upon Atticus's censuring Cicero for saying, in tirceum, Cicero
alledgcs in his excuse that he had spoken of it, non ut tie oppidop
sed ut de loco (lib. ?• ep. 3.) Whereby it appears that this rule
began to obtain, and that Cicero himself paid a regard to it, (let
Scioppius say what he will) as to a thing that might contribute
to the perspicuity of the language, by this distinction of the
names of towns and provinces, though he has not always con-
formed to it. And we see something like this in the French
tongue, in which the particle A denotes the small places, and
EN the provinces, as a Rome, and en Italic ; h Paris and en France,
&c. For which reason it is always better to stick to this rule,
though we cannot condemn a person that would swerve from it,
and Quintilian's censure, who calls this a solecism, Veni de Susis
in Alexandriam, lib. 1. c. 5. has very little foundation:
Therefore Servius on this passage of Virgil :
Italiamjato prqfugus, Lavinaque venit
Littora, Mn. 1.
having taken notice that the rules of grammar required preposi-
tions to be joined to tlie names of provinces, but none to the
names of towns, he adds. Sciendum tamen usurpalum abautorilms ut
'vet addant,vel detrahant prcepositiones. Where it appears that he
does not particularly mention the poets, but all authors in general.
PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS
on the question UBI.
Of the Nouns which are put in the gcnit I've i7i this question.
The reason why some particular names of towns are put in the
genitive
Of Syntax. 51
genitive in this question, is because with the proper name we al-
ways understand the general noun in the ablative with its preposi-
tion, and therefore this genitive is governed by the noun under-
stood ; as Ed Romce, sup. in urbe. Est Lugduni, sup. in oppido.
Est do»n, sup. in It^co, or in horto, or in cedibus j for domus signified
the whole house, whereas (zdes was in some measure an apartment
or part of the house; hence Plautus, to express the whole at
length, says, Insectatur omnes per cedes dovii. Terence has put it
also in the ablative ; Si quid opus/uerit, hem, domo me ; sup. coil'
tinebo, I shall be at home, Phorm. Act. 2. sc. 2.
Now domi was not the only word they put in the genitive ; for
Cicero says, Quantas ille res domi militicEque terra marique gesserit,
Quibuscunque rebus vel belli, vet domi poterunt : and the like. And
Virgil, Penitus terree defigitur arbor, for in terra. And Ovid, terrcc
procumbere, where we must understand another noun which governs
this genitive, as In solo terrce, in tempore belli, and therefore the
latter relates rather to questions of time.
Of Noims of the first declension in E.
Here a question may arise, whether these nouns ought to be put
in the genitive like the rest of this declension. Neque enim dicitur,
negotiatur Mitylenes, sed Mitylence, says Vossius in his grammar,
where he seems to reject the genitive in es in this question. And
Sanctius, whom we have followed, admits of this case only for
nouns that make iE or I in the genitive ; and perhaps we shall
find very few authorities of those other nouns, because generally
speaking the ancients change them into A, in order to decline
them according to the Latin termination. Nevertheless we find in
Valerius Maximus, book 1. chap. 6. where he speaks of prodigies,
CcBrites aquas sanguiyie mistasjluxisse, that at CaBrite there was a
stream of water mixed with blood. Which makes Gronovius in
his notes on Livy say, that in the 22d book, chap. 1. we should
read, Cceretes aquas sanguine mistas Jiuxisse, where the other edi-
tions have Cerete nevertheless in the ablative. From whence one
would think that both expressions might be admitted. Though
the best way is to put them in the ablative, or to change those
nouns into A, and put them in the genitive in M^ Mitylence ra-
ther than Mitylenes or Mitylene, &c.
Concerning apposition.
Another question is, whether we ought to say, Antiochies nalus
sum urbis Celebris, by apposition, or AntiochicB natus sum urbe cele-
hri; but the former would be a solecism, says Vossius, whereas
the latter may be said, and this phrase may be varied three dif-
ferent ways.
The first, by joining the preposition to the appellative, and
putting the proper name in the genitive, as AlbcB constiterunt in
xirbe opportuna, Cic. In oppido AniiochicBy Cic. In Amstelodami
celebri empnrio, Vossius.
The second, by letting the proper name and the appellative
be governed in the same case by the preposition ; In Amstelodami
tielebri emporio, Voss. Neapoli in celeberrimo oppido, Cic.
i2 The
'o2 NEW METHOD. Book V.
The tliird, by understanding the preposition, Antiochice loco nd'
hili, Cic. Amsldndami celebri ewporio, Voss.
And if you would know the reason why the apposition is not ad-
mitted herein the genitive, for instance, Amslelodami Celebris empo-
rii, it is because the genitive being never governed but by another
noun substantive, when we say Est Ronue, vivlt Amstclodamiy we
understtind in urbc, in eniporio, or oppido, as hath been already ob-
served ; but if you put urbis, empurii, or oppidi in the genitive,
you have nothing else to suppose that can govern it. And
hence it is that with an adjective you never put the proper name
in the genitive, Est magiue Romce, but in the ablative, in magna
Ronuiy sup. urbcy in the great city of Rome. Because a thing be-
ing called great or small only comparatively to another, we can-
not refer o^/ra^ to Rome, but to the word city; for otherwise it
would seem to imply that there were two Romes, one great, the
other little.
Now that this genitive is governed by a noun understood, and
that this construction is right, Scaliger sheweth, because if we can
nay oppidicm I'arentinum, surely wcmay alsosay, oppidttm Tarenti ; the
possessive having always the same force as the genitive from which
it is taken ; hence in French it is generally rendered by the geni-
tive, Doinus paterna, la maisoii de mon pcrc ; my father's house.
Concerning Nouns of the third declension.
It is arguing very wrong, as Sanctius, Scioppius, and Vossius
observe, to say that nouns of the third declension, and those of
the plural number are put in the dative or in the ablative. For
what relation is there between the government of place, which al-
ways depends on a preposition, and the dative, which is never go-
verned by it, and which, as we have already made appear, de-
notes only the end, or the person, or the thing, to which another
thing is referred and attributed ? and though we find Est Cartha-
gini, Neapoli, ruri, and the like, these are only old ablatives, which,
as hath been already mentioned, were heretofore every one of
them terminated in e or in i in this declension. Therefore those
who are more accustomed to the ablative in e, ought always to
put it here, as Cicero does, Est Sici/one, sepultns Lacedcvtnone ; Car'
thagiiie natus, and the like. There is only the word rus, whose
ablative in i custom has rendered familiar in this question. And
if any one should doubt whether ruri be an ablative, he may see in
Charisius, lib. 1. that r»s makes in the ablative ?Hre or ruri ; and
that Ruri acrerc vitam in Ter. is an ablative and not a dative.
Plautus has used it even in the other questions ; Vcniunt ruri ruslici,
in Mostel. Act. 5. sc. 1. the peasants come from the country.
Obsehvations on Compound Nouns.
Compound nouns entirely conform to the rule of the other pro-
per names, though some grammarians have made a doubt of it.
Thus we say, Novum Comum diiccre Colonos, Suet. Conventusagere
Carthagine 7wva. Quo die 'J'heano Sidicino est prf^cctus, Cic. &c.
And therefore we are to say, Ire Montempessulanum, rortumpetert
Calatensem, and the like.
* Rule
. Of Syntax. SS
Rule XXVI.
Of the Questions of Time, Measure, and Distance.
Time, distance, and measure, may he put either
in the accusative, or in the ablative ; hut the
precise term of time is put in the ablative only.
Exam ples.
We may here include five things. 1. The space of
time: 2. The space of place, or distance: 3. The pre-
cise term of time : 4. The precise or exact place :
S. The noun of measure : each of wliich may be put
either in the accusative or the ablative, which are al-
ways governed by a preposition expressed or under-
stood, and the preposition is more usually expressed
with the accusative. But the precise term of time,
namely that which answers the question guando, is put
oftener in the ablative only.
1. The space or the duration of time, which an-
swers to the question guamdiUy ov (]uamdudum,how long.
Vixit per ires annos, or tres annos, or viTit tr'ihus annis^
sup. in, he has lived three years. Qiieiii ego fwdie toto non
vidi die, Ter. whom I have not seen to-day. Te an-
tiumjam audietitem Cratippum, Cic. sup. per, you that
have attended Cratippuss lectures a whole year. In-
tra annas quatuordecim tectum non subierunt, Cajs. they
have been without any cover these fourteen years.
Nonaginta annas natus, sup. ante, he is ninety years
old ; he has been ninety years in this world.
Hereto we may refer those phrases where they use
ad or in, but it is in a particular sense : Si ad centesi-
mum annum 'oi.visset, Cic. if he had lived to be a
hundred years old. In diem tivere, Cic. to live from
hand to mouth.
2. The space or distance of place is more usual in
the accusative, as Locus ab urbe dissitus quatuor mil-
liaria, a place distant four miles from the town; Her-
cy'nicE sylvcE latitudo novem dierum iter e.vpedito patet,
Caes. the breadth of the Hercynian forest is a nine days'
journey ; where we must understand «6?, or j&er, though
the preposition is seldom used. But sometimes they
put the ablative ; as bidui spatio abest ab eo, he is at tlie
distance of two days' journey from him.
54 NEW METHOD. Book V.
3. The precise term of time, tliat is, when we an-
swer the (jucstion qmnido, is generally put in the abla-
tive; Superidribus diebus "veiii in Cwucunim, Cic. a few
days ago I came to Cuma. Quicrjuid est biduo sciemus,
Cic. sup. in. Whatever it is, we shall know it in two
clays.
And in the same manner with atite, or post; as, Fit
pnucis post cnuiis, Cic. it happened a few years after.
Dedtram papaucis ante diebus, I had given to him a
few days before.
Sometimes the accusative is used with ante or post ;
Paucos ante menses, Suet, a few months before. Ali-
quot post anyios, Cic. some years after. Which hap-
pens even with some other prepositions. Adocthvum
caUndas in Cumampn veni, Cic. I arrived at Cuma the
eighth day before the calends.
Likewise with the adverb circiter. Nos circiter ca-
Undas (sup. ad) in Formiano erimus, Cic. we shall be
at Formia towards the calends. But with ab/iinc wc
join indifferently the accusative or the ablative, Abfiinc
annos quingentos, Cic. sup. ante, five hundred years
ago. Abhinc annis quindecim, Cic. sup. in, fifteen
years ago. And this adverb in pure authors, always
denotes the time past ; whereas for the future they
make use of post or ad : Post se.venniwn, or ad sexen-
mum, six years hence.
4. The precise place. Ad tertium lapidem, Liv.
three miles off. Ad quint um mi llidre, C\c. five miles
off. Sometimes they put the ablative only, and sup-
pose in. Cecidit tertio ab urbe lapide, he fell tliree miles
out of town.
6. The measure. Muri BabyUnis erant alti pedes
ducentos, lali quinquaginta, sup. ad : The walls of Ba-
bylon were tM^o hundred feet high, and fifty broad.
JJic qui bus in icrris — Trespattat cctli spatium non amplius '
ulnas, Virg. tell me in what part of the world it is, that
the sky is not above the l)readth of three yards. But
measure may be referred to the distance, of which above.
ANNOTATION.
A particular measure may be put sometimes also in the genitive,
but this by supposing a general noun by which the other is govern-
Ot'SyNTAX. S5
e<3, as Areol<s long^e •pedum denum, Col. sup. mensurS, spatio, or lon^
gitiidine. Fyramides latcB pedum septuaginta quinum, sup. latittidine,
Pliii. ' Altce centum quhiquagenum, sup. nltitudme, Piin.
Rule XXVII.
Of the Comparative and of Partitives.
1. Comparative nniins require the ablative case,
2. And partitives the genitive :
S. Hence the superlative degree governs a geni^
live likewise.
Examples.
1. The comparative ought always to have the abla-
tive of tiie noun, with which it forms the comparison,
whether it be expressed or understood ; as Fortior est
patrej ilius, the son is stronger than the father. Firtus
opihus meliorj virtue is better than riches.
But sometimes this case is not expressed, as when
we say tristior (sup. soiito) somewhat sorrowful, that
is a little more sorrowful than usual.
2. All partitive nouns, that is, which signify part
of a greater number, govern the genitive ; Octdvus sa'
pienium, the eighth of the sages. Unus Gallonmi^ one
of the French. Dexter oculorum, the right eye. And
in the same manner, alius, dliquis, alter, nemo, nullus,
quis, and thelike. Quisomnium? which of them all? &c.
S. Hence the superlative governs a genitive like-
wise, because it is a partitive, as Philosophorum mdd'i-
mus, the greatest of philosophers. Virginum sapien-
tissima, the wisest of virgins, or among virgins.
In this sense the comparative also governs this same
case ; as Fortior manuum, the strongest of the two
hands : and in hke manner the positive, as Sequimur
ie sancte deoruniy we follow you, who are the holiest of
the gods.
ANNOTATION.
This rule includes two parts, one of the comparative, and the
©ther of the partitive, under which the superlative is compre-
hended.
Of the Comparative.
in order to understand the government of the comparative, we
have only to consider what Sanctius hath observed ; that in all
languages, the force of the coBiparigon is gejaerally included in a
particle. ' Thu«
S6 NEW METHOD. Book V.
• Th VIS we shall see that as inFrench the particle Que, if/iaH, performs
this offic«s Plus saint Que, holier than; Plus grand Que, greater
than; so the Hebrews (who have no comparative degree)- make
use ofjD min. 'J'he Greeks tVcquently of li, the Spaniards of Mas,
and the Latins of Quam, prtv or pro, as we shall shew hereafter.
Thereby we see that the comparative of itself governs no case,
and ought to be considered merely as a noun, which adding some
force to the signification of the positive, may be resolved by tlie tame
positive and by the adverb maf^^is. Doctio?-, that is nwgis cloctus, &c.
And this is what has given occasion to those elegant plirases,
which the grammarians are at a loss to account for; Litteris quam
nioribna instructinr. Similinr prtfri quam matri. Fortinr est quam
sapientior ; he has more courage than learning. And in Cic. Per
illam, inquain, dexteram non in bcllis et in prceliis, quam in j)ro-
viissis et fide firmiorem, pro Dejot.
.But if there be an ablative of comparison, it is always governed
by the preposition pnc or pro understood. This preposition is even
sometimes expressed, not only after the comparative, as when Ap-
puleius says, Sed units pro; cceteris et animojortior et cetalc juvenior
et corpore validior exurgit alacer : and in another place, Unus e
curia senior pr<v cceteris : and Q. Curtius, Majorem quam pro flatii
sonum edehat : And Pliny, Me winoris J'actum prce ilia : but more-
over after other nouns, or even after verbs, as /V<^ nobis beatus.,
Cic. Hic (go ilium contemsi prcc mc, Ter. Cunctane prcB campo Tibe-
rino sordoit, Hor. Lndum et jocumjiiisse dices prceut liiijus rubies quee
dabit, Ter. in Eun. and such like. Where it is obvious that the
wliole force of the comparison is included in those particles.
Hence as it is only the effect of custom, that they are generally
suppressed after the comparative, it happens also that they are
sometimes suppressed after the other nouns, where they are under-
stood nevertheless ; which evidentl)' shews that it is not a thing
quite particular to the comparative, as NuUus est hoc mrticulosus
£eque, Plaut. for prce hoc. Alius Lysippo,Viov. that is, proe Lysippo,
for quam Lysippus, according to Sanctius. And the same may be
said of the rest, concerning which the reader may see what we shall
say further in the remarks, chapter of Conjunctions,
s It is by this principle we ought also to resolve all those compa-
risons, which by grammarians are called oblique or improper,
when they are between things of a different nature ; Ditior opi'
nione ; cogitatione citius, &c. always understanding the preposition
pro, as Cicero, and others sometimes express it : Plus etiam quam
j)ro virili jyarte obligatum jndo, Cic. Major quam pro numcro homi-
rnim cditur pugna, Liv.
It is likewise by this principle that we ought to answer those
who fancy the comparative is sometimes put for the positive, as
when Me say, tristior, sollicitior, audacior, somewhat sorrowful,
somewhat solicitous, somewhat bold. For even in these examples,
the comparative hath its natural signification, and supposctli the.
ablative after it, as tristior, sup. solito. Sollicitior, sup. ccquo, &c.
And if then it seems rather to import diminution than augmenta-
tion, this is an effect, not of the comparative, but of the ablative,
under-
OfSyntax, 57
understood, because if it were joined to another noun, it would
have quite a different force, though it continued always the same ;
as tristior jjerditis, solUcitior miseris, &c.
Difficulties in regard to the Comparative.
When the reason of these governments is once understood, it is
easy to solve all the little difficulties of grammarians upon this
article. As when they say, that the comparative is not put with the
ablative, but with the genitive, when the comparison is between
two things only. For since the comparative of itself governs
neither tlie genitive nor the ablative, doubtless it is indifferent to
either case on these occasions. Thus Caesar says ; Ex propositis
diiobus consUiisy explicaiius vidcbatur, uf, &c.
It is also an error to say that the comparative never institutes
a comparison but between two things only, when it governs the
genitive. For notwithstanding that this is perhaps the most usual
practice, yet tiiere are a hundred examples to the contrary : as
when Cicero says, Cceterarum rerum prtJEstantior erat, as quoted by
Saturnius ; and Horace, O major juvenum, in Arte : and Pliny,
Aiiimaiiuvi furtiora quibus crassior eat sanguis. And Q. Curtius,
lib. 9. In ocufis diu majora omnium navigia submersa sunt : and in
the sixth book, CLeander priores eorum intromitti jubet : and Plaut.
in Capt. Non ego nunc parasitus sum, sed regum rex regalior. And
Pliny, Adolescentiores apum. Which is only a partition that may
be made between two, or an infinite number of things, if you
please.
Therefore Valla, and those who have followed him, are in the
wrong to object against these expressions of Scripture. Major horunt
est charitas. ^linorjratrum, &c. Eo quod esset honorabiiior omniuniy
which comes from St. Jerome himself in his translation of Daniel.
For these phrases are not only very good Latin, but moreover have
the advantage of coming nearer to the Greek, which makes use of
a genitive after the comparative.
But it is a different thing, when we find in Pliny, for example ;
Omnium triumphorum lauream adepte majoreni : and in an epistle of
Lentulus's among those of Cicero ; Naves onerarias, quorum minor
nidla erat duum millium amphorarum. For laurea can make no part
with triumph?, no more than navis with duo millia : for which rea-
son it cannot be resolved by inter. But it is an ellipsis that sup-
poSeth the same word, on which the comparison falls, repeated in
the ablative ; as Lauream majorem laurea omnium triumphorum ;
naves quarum nulla minor erat navi duum millium amphorarum. And
there are likewise examples hereof in the Greek, as 'Eyw Se 'ix'^ t^"
l^x^rv^ixv (/.si'l^u tS 'la;avv«. Joan. 5. 36. Ego autem habeo testimo-
nium majus Joannis ; that is, majus testimonio Joannis. And in
like manner the rest.
It is no less a mistake in the grammarians to pretend that quisqne
is never put but with the superlative, and in L. Valla to assert that
we ought to say, Imbecillima quoeque animalia, or that Lactantius
did wrong in saying, Imbecilliora ef timidiora quceque animalia ;
«ince Cicero himself h^th, Quisqice gravior homo atque honestior. And
Quintilian,
5S NEW METHOD. Book V.
Quintilian, Pedes qiiiqne tanporibus validiores. We likewise find
ijuisqtce with the positive, Livalidus quisgue, Tac. Bonus quisque
liber, Plin.
It is also a mistaken notion that the particle quam, always re-
quireth the same case before as after it : for we s-nould not chuse to
say, Vtor Ctvsare ccquiorc qncim Fompein, but quam est Pompeiiis, as
in Cic. Dixit sc aperte imuHtiorem aacustodicndam vitmn suamjore^
(juani Africanus J'uissct. True it is that when a nominative pre-
ccdeth, another nominative ought to follow, Cicero est ductior quam
Sallnstius ; and that if there be an accusative before, you may put
an-accusative after, Vt libi multo majori quam Jfi icanusj'uit , me ?ion
multo minorem quam Lcclium adjanctum esse patiare, Cic. Ego caL-
lidiorem hominevi quam Phormioncm vidineminem, Ter. because then
the verb is understood twice, as if it were, Ego vemincm xidi calli"
diorem, quam vidi Phormionein. But with another verb we may
likewise say, Ego calUdiorem vidi neminem, quam PJiormio est.
The Comparative also occurs sometimes with the adverb
vnagis ; Mngis hoc certo certius, Plaut. Hoc magis est dulcius, Id.
Magis invidia quciin pecunia locnp/etior, Val. Max. Qui ynagis optato
ijucat esse beatior ccvo ? Virg. in Culice. Which is become a kind
of plconasmus, as will appear hereafter, when we come to speak of
figures. But we do not find it with per, except it is derived from
a verb, and taken in the same sense as its verb. Thus we shall say
with Cicero, Perquisitiiis, pervngaiior : with Hor. Perlucidior, and
the like : because we say, Perquiro, pervagor, pcrluceo ; but we
should not say, Pcnirbanior, perdifficilior, permelior, though we say
Perurbanus, perbonus, perdificilis ; and even in the superlative,
Peruptimus, perdijjicillimus, &c.
Of Prior mid Primus.
We must not mind what Donatus, Priscian, Diomedes, L. Valla,
Agroetius, and others assert, that prior is said only of two, and
primus of many. Cunctis prior Cadmeius Heros, Stat. Prior omnibus
Idas prosi lit, Id. Qui prior aliis est, Varro apud Aul. Gel. and the
like. And the true reason of this is what Julius Scalijrer has
observed, that on those occasions, the whole multitude is consi-
dered as in two divisions, of which the former only makes one
part, and the latter another.
Of Plus.
Plus is also a comparative, as we have observed in the declen-
sions, p. lOG. and there can be no doubt of it, since it institutes
a comparison between things. But in regard to its government
there are some who pretend to say that it governs four cases, the
nominative, the genitive, the accusative, and the ablative.
And yet if it be joined with the nominative it is no mark of
government, but of concord, because it is an adjective. As when
I'liny says. Nee plus tertia pars eximatur mellis. And Cicero, Ut
hoc nostrum dcsiderium ne plus sit annuum. And Sanctius, Nemo
7tno plus pra'mium expectato : which he maintains is good Latin,
against the opinion of those who found fault with him for it, and
pretended that he should have said plus uno prcumio.
And
OfSyntax. S9
And if it be joined with the ablative, as in Cicero, Quum plus
lino verum esse non possit : and in another place, Alteruvi certe non.
potest y ut plus una vera sit (opinio.) In Val. Max. Uiioplus Hetriisci
cadiint. In Cicero, hoc plus ne rogum fncito. In Livy, Ab ulrdque
parte sexcentis -plus equitibus cecidit, &c. Then this ablative is
governed in the same manner as the other comparatives, by the
preposition understood.
Every where else it has no government, no more than mimis
and amplius. I nter valla fir e paulo plus aid minus pedum tricenum, ad
Heren. where the genitive is governed by the name of distance irt"
tervalla. Plus virium habet alius alio, Ter. where the genitive
virium is governed by negotium understood. Plus negotium virium
habet ; and the ablative alio, by the comparative plus, prce being
understood, k'lus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi, Ter. where the
accusative is governed by the verb iti/regit. In the same manner
in Caesar, Quum ipsi non amplius quingentos equites haberent.
And then they are taken as adverbs, though to say the truth
they are real nouns tliat are put in the accusative, by virtue of a
preposition understood, Secundum plus aut minus, or ad plus aut mi-
nus, &c. the latter coming from the comparative iuinor Sf hoc minus,
in the same manner as amplius, from amplior et hoc amplius. Plus
annum obtinere provinciam, Cic. that is ad plus tempus quam ad aU'
num, &c. Hence they are joined extremely well with the nomi-
native and the verb in the plural. Romani non plus sexcenti cecide-
runt, Liv. that is, sexcenti, non ad plus negotium. And thus in
Cfesar, Eo die milites sunt mintis sepitingenti desiderati, 7. B. Gal.
Naves amplius ociingentde uno erant vises tempore, Id. lib. 5. See
the remarks, chap, of Adverbs and Conjunctions.
Of the Partitive in general.
In every partition, the genitive is governed by what we com-
monly understand ex numero, or by the noun substantive a second
time, whether this partition be made with the positive or the com-
parative, of which we have given examples above, or with the
superlative. For Virginum sapientissima implies, Virgo virginum
sapient issinia, or Sapientissima ex numero virginum : you have ex-
amples of both in this passage of Pliny ; Caprece S^ Coturnices,
animalia ex numero animalium placidissima.
For which reason when the substantive is of another gender
than the genitive plural, we may make the adjective agree with
either, Leo est animalium fortissimum, or firtissimus (though the latter
is more usual) for in the former we understand animal, with which
firtissimum agrees ; and in the latter we understand ex numero, as
if one was to sa/, Leofi>rtissimus ex numero animalium. Thus Ci-
cero has expressed himself, Iridus qui est Jluviorum maximus. And
Pliny, Boves animalium soli et retro ambulaides pascuntur : and in
another place, Hordeumfirugum omnium mollissimum est. See what
16 said lower down about syllepsis, when we treat of figures.
Of the Superlative in general.
The superlative, as Sanctius sheweth extremely well, does not
properly form a comparison, this being proper only to the com-
parative :
(70. NEW METHOD. Book V.
parative: and therefore since they resolved to distinguish tlirce
degrees in the nouns, it would liave been much better to call them
degrees of signification than of comparison. As when I say, Grata:
viilii Jucriint litterce iiuc, and Grutissimce mihi Juerunt, there is no
more comparison in one than the other, but only an increase of
signification in the latter : which does not hinder us from putting
the superlative indifferently in the first place, when the subject
deserves it. As, for instance, speaking of the mouths of the Nile,
it may be very well to say, Primum ostium magnum, or 1 may say,
'primum maximum, secundum majus, tertiu7n ndliuc ma jus, &c. \\'liere
it is obvious that the comparative sometimes signifies more than
the superlative, because it establishes a comparison with the super-
lative itself.
In this manner Cicero has expressed himself, Ego auiem hoc sum
miserior quam tu qua: es miserrima, ad Terent. And in another
place, Persuade lihi te mihi esse charissimtnn , sed multo fore chariorem,
si, &c. So that though we may say that the superlative signifies
the same thing as increase or excess, yet it is a mistake to think
that it always expresseth the supreme degree. Thus when Virgil
saith :
JDanaum fortissime gentis Tijdide ;
he did not mean that Diomedes was more brave than Achilles,
or the bravest of his countrymen, but only very brave amongst
his countrymen. This is extremely well expressed by the French
particle tres which comes from trois, and has the same effect as if
one was to sa}' ter fortis, just as Virgil says,
O terque quaterque beati.
And the Greeks t^ktoxQios for oxSiulaclos, very happy.
And if we put le plus, the most, le plus genereux dcs Grecs, the
most brave of all the Greeks ; le plus savant des Romains, the most
learned of the Romans, though this may seem to import some sort
of comparison, yet it is rather a partition than a real comparison.
Difficulties in regard to the Superlative.
Hereby it appears that nothing hinders the superlative from
being very properly joined with a noun universal (though some
grammarians affirm the contrary) either out of partition, as Omni
gradu amplissimo dignissimus, or even in partition, as Dii isti Segu-
lio male jfaciant homini nequissimo omnium qui sunt, qui Juerunt ^ qui
J'nturi sunt, Cic. And in Catullus speaking of Cicero :
Discrtissime Romuli ncpotum
Quot sunt quotque J'uere, Marce Tulli, &c.
The superlative may be likewise put with the exclusive particles,
which seem to require a comparative ; JEgyptus aliarum regionum
calidissima est, Macrob. Ca:tcrorum fougacissimi, Tac. It is put
with omnis : as Omnes tenuissimas particidas atque omnia minima^
Cic. Homini nequissimo omnium, Cic.
It is also joined with other particles, which likewise augment
their signification, as we have already shewn in regard to per^
peroptimus. Sec. It is even joined with perqiiam ; Perquam maxiino
excrcitu, Curt. We say also, Dolorcm tarn maximum, Cic. Rei turn
maxime
Of Syntax. ' 61
anaxime necessaria tanta injuria. Id. Longe improbissimus, Id. Multo
mihi jucundissimus. Id. Oratio satis pidcherrima quce inscribiturpro
Q. Ligario, Pompon. J. C. Id apprime rectissime dicitnr, Cic. de Fin.
as Saturnius reads it, as well as Robert Stephen in his Thesaurus,
Malaspina, and Gruterus's edition : though others read rede in-
stead 0^ rectissime. Maxime pessiina, Colum. Maxime humanissimi,
A. Gel. Ante alios pidcherrimuSy Virg. Sive hanc aberrationem k
dolore delegerim quce maxime liberatissima^doctoquehominedignissima,
Cic. and the like. ,
It is used in comparisons or partitions of opposite things, as
Homo nan bipedum modb, sed quadrupedum impunssimus, Cic. VVhicli
shews with how little reason L. Valla has censured Macrobius
for saying, Age, Servi, non solum adolescentum qui tibi cequcBvi sunt,
sed senum quoque dociissime.
I It is also made use of in speaking of two things only, Nii-
mitori qui erat stirpemaximus regnum legal, says Livy, though there
were only two sons, he and Amulius. Utri potissimhn considen-
dum, Cic. and others of the like sort.
In short we shall find that most of Valla's and Despauter's ob-
servations on tliis subject are false, and owing only to their not
having sufficiently considered the nature of things, nor dived into
the real causes of the Latin tongue.
Rule XXVIII.
Of the Verbs and Nouns which govern an Ablative, or a Genitive,
the Ablative being understood.
1. Verbs of accusing, absolving, and condemning,
require an ablative or a genitive.
2. Verbs or nouns that signify plenty or want,
govern these same cases :
3. As do also several adjectives.
Examples.
All these nouns and verbs take an ablative of the
most general words ; as Re, actiSne, poena, causa, cul-
pa, crimine, and the like, which is always governed
by a preposition understood: or supposing some of
the ablativ^es, they take another noun in the geni-
tive, which is governed thereby.
1. Those of accusing : Accusari cnminibus, to bp
accused of crimes. Arcessere majestatis, to impeach
of high treason.
Those of absolvingor acquitting: Absolvere crimine,
to acquit of a crime. Absolvere improbitdtis, to acquit
of dishonesty. Liberal us culpa, discharged from a fault.
Those
62 NEW METHOD. Book V.
Those of condemning: Condemnat capitis, he con-
demns him to death. Damnari eodem crimine, to be
condemned for tiie same crime. Teneri repetunddncm,
sup. pccu/zidruni, to be convicted of extortion. Dam-
iidri am'icuui scekris, sup. 7-e, or actione, to cliarge a
friend with a crime. And the rest in the same manner.
ANNOTATION.
Sometimes the preposition may be expressed ; as Damnntn<i de vi,
tlemajestate, Cic. Accumrc de cpistolarumnegligentia, Cic. Wlierein
WG must be entirely determined by custom : for we sliould not say,
Accusatiis de scelere or de crimine ; hut sceleris., or scelere, criminis, or
crimine : Neither are we indifferently to put all sorts of nouns in
the genitive or the ablative, with all sorts of verbs, but we are to
consider how the ancients spoke.
Plenty or want.
Q. Nouns of plenty take tlie same cases as the pre-
ceding verbs, Locuplespec/inid', rich in money. Fotcunda
virtutumpaupertas, poverty is fruitful in virtue. Cumu-
latiis omni laude, extolled to the sky. Prodigus ccris,
lavish of money. Compos voti,who has obtained his wish.
Likewise thoseof wantor privation; Omnium eginus^
destitute of every thing. Inanis omni re util'i, void of
every thing that is good. Ratione dcstitutus, void of
reason, f^cicuus virtiHe dnimus, a mind devoid of
virtue. Cassiis lumi?ns, te/ /iwiwe, deprived of light.
Liber religione animus, a mind free from all scruple,
Captus oculis, ?n€?ife, auribus. Sec. who has lost his sight,
liis understanchng, his hearing, &c. Confectus cEtdte,
v/orn out with age. Soldefectus lumine, the sun being
eclipsed. Prcc'ditus singulari 'virtute, adorned with
singular virtue. Where it is to be observed that all
the latter choose rather to have the ablative, because
it is their natural construction.
Verbs of plenty or want prefer likewise most gene-
rally the ablative.
Those of plenty, as Abunddre ingenio, to abound in
wit. Affluere omnibus bonis, to abound with all sorts
of blessings. D/Jftuere olio, to be lost in idleness. Sa-
tiari panibus, to have his belly full of bread. Onerdre
probris, to load with abuse.
Those of want, as Vacdrc pudore, to be without
t shame»
OfSyntax. 63
shame. Nudare prcesidio, to deprive of the defence
of. Vidiiare urbein civibus, to unpeople a town, E.v-
haurire aquis, to draw oif the water.
There are some however that indifferently admit
of either the genitive or the ablative, as Complereerro-
ris, to fill with error. CompUre luce, to fill with light.
Indigere consilii, et consilio, to want advice.
Some other Adjectives.
S. Some other adjectives also assume the same go-
vernment, as AlienuSf e:cpers, immunise contentus, dig-
nus, indignus, &c.
Alihmm dignitatis or dignitate, or even a dignitate :
Cic. (the two last are most usual) repugnant to digni-
ty. Contentus libertatis, Liv. satified with his liberty.
Parvo contenta natura, Cic. nature is satisfied with
little. And here the ablative is most usual.
Dignus laudis, or laude, most usual ; worthy of
praise. Suscipe curam ^ cogitationemdignissimam tuct
*virtutis^ Balbus ad Cic. form a plan to yourself be-
coming your dignity. In like manner, Indignus wvo-
rum, unworthy of those ancestors.
E.vpers metus or metu (the former most usual) void
of fear.
Immunis belli, Virg. Immunis militidj Li v. exempt
from military service, and the like.
ANNOTATION.
Here the Latins have borrowed the genitive of the Greeks, who
understand their preposition h, of. Hence almost all vulgar lan-
guages, which generally follow the simplest and most natural con-
struction, use a preposition on this occasion ; thus the Italians say
Pleno di vino, as the French say, Plein de vin, full of wine. But
in order to account for this government in Latin, we may under-
stand a general noun, copia, ncgotium, res, &c. which governs the
other in the genitive, so that Vacuus curarum, is the same as vacuus
re curaruni, for vacuus curis : dignus laudis, is for re taudis, and the;
rest in the same manner, just as Phaedrus hath res cibi, for cibus;
and Plautus, res voluptatum, for voluptates.
And then this ablative must likewise be governed by a preposi-
tion understood, for vacuus curis, is the same as a curis. Laiide
dignus, for de laude, worthy of praise, &c. Therefore the purest
authors frequently use the preposition : Hcec a custodibus viilitum
vacabant loca, Caes. Locus afrumento copiosus, Cic. De nugis referti
libri, Cic. Liber a delictis. Id. Liops a verbis, ab amicis, Id. Hence
Egeo pecuniis, is just a» if you said, Egeo de pecuniis, I have need of.
64 NEW METHOD. Book V.
Of the Noun Opus.
l?y tliis it appears that tlic noun optis, for which so many rules
and ditVorcnt observations have been made, may be very well re-
duced to this rule, it" it be the same thing to say, Egeo niimmis, 8j
opus est milii immmis, where we constantly suppose the dc.
But upon a nearer enquiry into the matter, we shall Hnd that this
noun is never any thing else but the substantive opus, operis, work,
alJair, business; just as the (/reeks say itlh i^yot eV'v, «///// opus est.
So that this noun docs not properly import an absolute neces^sity,
but some sort ofconveniency, or what one has business with. Even
Cicero makes a distinction between opus and necesse ; le^em ciirialam
consuUJerri opus esse, necesse nun esse, lib. 2. ep. 9. lUud tertiuni etiani
si opus est, tamen minus est necessarium, 2. de Orat. Therefore this
noun is no more an adjective than usiis, which is frequently taken
in the same sense, and in the same government, as when Virgil
says, Nunc viribus usus, for opus. And it is just as if wc were to say.
In viribus opus est, or de viribus, there is need of strength ; that is,
our whole business consists in strength. Cicero has made use of it
in this sense and in this very government, Pergratum mihij'eccris,
si eu7ii, si qua in re opus eij}ierit,juveris, where he might have put,
■si qua re (or aiiqua) ei opusjiicrit, d'C.
It is in this same meaning that we join opus with an adjective.
Sunt quibus unum opus est celebrare urbem carmine, Hor. Or that we
- put it with another substantive by apposition ; Dux 7iobis opus est,
which is the same sense as if it were, Dux nobis opera est, our whole
affair, or that we have to do, is to look out for a chief leader.
But if it be put in the genitive, then there is nothing extraor-
dinary in it, and this is still a stronger proof of its being a real
substantive, Opus est centum nummorum, it is a work of a hundred
crowns : Magni laboris &; muUce impenscE opusjuit. Plane, ad Sen.
lib. 10. ep. 8. And in tliis sense Virgil says, Famam extender e
foctis, hoc virlutis opus : and Martial, Non fmt hoc artis, scd pie-
tatis opus.
It is also as a substantive, that it frequently serves for a second
nominative after the verb : Si quid opus est, impera, Plant. Ita opus
est ; just as we say, Ita negotium est, Plant. Ita reserat.fociendum
fuit. Tor. And moreover, that it serves for a second accusativie
after the infinitive, Dices mimmos mihi opus esse, Cic. Sidpicii tibi
operam iiitclligo ex tuis Uteris non multum opus esse, Cic. and if an in-
finitive be put after the verb, it is still the same sense, Quid opris
est affirmare'^ Cic. Nunc per opus est loqui, Ter. Where the infini-
tive supplies the place of a nominative, as it will supply that of an
accusative, if I say, NegatJ'uisse opus ajffirmare,puto peropus esse loqui.
And if we say, Opus est constdto, instead of consu/ere, and the
like, we are to understand in consulto, where the government must
also depend on the preposition. Thus we see that opus, in what-
ever sense it be taken, is never any other than a noun substantive,
which conies within the general rules.
It is also observable that we meet with opus habeo in Columella,
who is a very pure author, just as the Greeks say %fE/«y t'^w. Which
is so uncommon in Latin, that Diomedes believed it was wrong to
say it. In
O F S Y N T A X. 65
In regard to usus, we might further add, tliat as the verbal
nouns heretofore governed the case of their verb, this here has
taken the ablative like utor of which it is formed : Usus inribuSy
as utor viribus. Which is the more probable, as heretofore it go-
verned the accusative, because utor governed it, Ad cam rem urns
est hominem astutinn, doctum, Plaut.
Diomedes takes notice that the ancients said likewise. Opus est
mini hnnc rem, but he gives no authority for it. And then we
must needs suppose an infinitive, as habere, Jhcere, dicere, or the
like.
Rule XXIX.
Of Nouns of Price, and Verbs of Valuing.
1. The price of a thing is governed in the ahlatim,
2. Except these genitives, minoris, tanti,
quaiiti, pliiris.
3 . Verbs of valuing also govern these same ge-
nitives.
4. To which we may add, parvi, nauei, flocci,
nihili, minimi, sequi^ boui, magni, multi,
and plurimi.
Example s.
1. The price of a thing is governed in the ablative,
Locavit domumsuam ceutum iiummis, he let his house for
a hundred crowns. Licere prcesenii pecfm'ui, to be va-
lued for ready money. Midtarwn sanguine ac vulneri-
hus ea Pc^nis %'ict6ria atetit, that victory was purchased
by the blood of many Carthaginians. Pretio magno
stare, Hor. to cost very dear.
^. The following nouns are governed in the geni-
tive, when they are put v/ithout substantives ; tanti^
guanti, pluris, mAvimi, minoris, tantidtm, quanticunqiie,
&c. Tanti nulla res est, there is nothing so dear. Emit
tanti, quanti voluit, he bought it for what he pleased.
Non pluris vendo quam cct'teri, etiam minoris, 1 do not
sell dearer than others, but perhaps cheaper.
3. Verbs of valuing govern also the said genitives,
Maximijacere, to value greatly. Pluris habere, to
value more. Tanti ducitur, he is so much esteemed.
4. But they govern likewise the following ; parvi,
nihdi, plurhni, hujus, magni, midti, minimi, nauci,
Jlocci, pill, assis, terunc'd, aqui, honi. Nonfaccrejlocci,
or flocci habere, not to value a straw. Nauci habere,
Vol, II. F the
66 NEW lAIETHOD. Book V.
the same. Pili non ducere, not to value a rusli. Hujus
7ion ccstimare, not to value this much (pointing to some
trifling thing). Terimcii nonjacere, not to value it a
farthing, ^qui, boni j'acere, to take in good part.
ANNOTATION.
These very nouns, when joined to a substantive, arc put in the
ablative ; Rcdinicrc minori 2)rctio ; mngno prelio cestimari ; parvi
merccde docc7-e.
Some are likewise put in the ablative without a substantive,
parvo, vcinihilo consequi ; ma^rno cestimare ; but then we understand
cere, or nrelio. And when they are in the genitive, we must un-
derstancl one of these nouns, by which they are governed in that
case; for Minoris emi, is the same as, miiioris aris prctio cmi. Tanii
dttco, that is to say, tajiti cerispretio, imless we choose rather to say
with Henry Stephen, that it is a Greek expression, Trtf* 77oXX5 wo/S-
f/,a/, magiiijacio.
But with the ablative we understand the preposition also ; for
nihilo consequi, is the same construction as when Cicero says, Pra
jiihilo ptdare, pro nihilo ducere, and so of the rest, Dum pro argentcis
decern^ aureus unus valebat, Liv. Aliquando una res pro duabns valetf
Sen. <S:c. But when we say, JEqui bonifocio, or consulv, it means,
JEqui boni animi, or hominis officium duco,J'acio, &c.
Vossius observes that we cannot say, Parvi euro, as we say,
parvi focio ; and that the passage of Terence, produced on thif
occasion, Q_uid me Jiat^ parvi curns, is corrupted, since the best
copies have parvi j^endas. Neither do we find, Majoris ccstimo
(instead of which we make use of plurisj though we read in Ci-
cero, Magni pidare honores. And in Terence, Te semper viaximi
feci. Nor can we say, Piurimi interest, minimi refert, hui pliirimum
interest, minime rejert.
Rule XXX.
Of Verbs passive, and othe:s which require the Ablative with the
Preposition A or Ab.
1. Verbs j)assivc frequently require the ablative
with the preposition a or ab, as Amor a
reginti.
2, Verbs of waiting, separating^ distance, ask-
ing, receiving, delivering, and nouns of dif-
ference, have also the satne government.
Examples.
All the above verbs frequently require an ablative,
which is governed by the preposition a or ab.
1. The passives, as Jhnor aregind, I am beloved by
the queen. Teneri, regi ab aliquo, to be possessed, to
be governed by a person, ProvUum est nobis optinie a
Deo,
OfSyntax. 67
Deo, God has provided extremely well for us. Op-
piignari ab aliquo, to be attacked by a person.
2. Verbs of waiting, O'mnia a te cvpSctat, he expects
every thing of you. Sperat a rege^ he hopes from
the king.
Those of separating, and of distance, Distal a Lu"
t'tid vicus ilk, that village is distant from Paris. Distal
ars^umentatio a veritate, vour artjument is wide from
truth. Diyungei^e, stgrcgare sea bonis, to separate from,
to quit tlie acquaintance of virtuous people. Distrd-
here &^' divellert aliqaem ab aliquo, to part and to tear
away one person from anotlier.
Those of asking, Hoc a te petit, pbstulat,flagitat, he
asks tliis of you, he begs, he prays you.
Those of receiving, Acdpere ab aliquo, to receive of
a person. Mutuari ab aliquo, to borrow of somebody.
Discere ab aliquo, to learn of somebody.
Those of delivering, Liberdre a periculo, to free from
danger. Redimcr^e a morte, to redeem from death.
Kximere d malis, to exempt from misfortune.
Nouns of difference, A'liud a libtrtdte, a different
thing from liberty. Res diverse a propositd ratioue,
things quite different from the subject proposed.
ANNOTATION.
That the "verb passive properly speaking governs nothing
of itself .
There are a great many other verbs, which have the ablative
with the preposition, as Ordiri aprincij)io ;<^nie}-ca}'i a mercaioribus ;
h se nliqnid facer e, Cic. Sicejie a majoribus natu andivi. Id. A me
hoc iiii dabis. Id. Jl one argentum sum i to, Ter. Otiiim a senibiis ad
pntnndum ut habeam. Id,. And a multitude of others which may-
be seen in Sanctius, I. 3. c. 4.
There are likewise several, to which a or ah is understood, as
Cavcre mulo, for a malo. Cibo pruhibere Sf tecto, Cic. Liberarc
euro, in/amia, Id. &c.
Hence it appears that this case is not properly governed by the
verb passive, nor by the other verbs which have it after them, but
only by the prepoi^ition: for as Sanctius says, the passive wants
nothing but its nominative to make its construction and speech
complete. Amantur boni, honest people are beloved. If I add
ab onmibus, it is ab that governs this case, to denote from whence
conies this love. For a, generally speaking, signifies only d parte,
and may be put every where in this sense, and after all sorts of
Terbs; while the passives of themselves are indifferent to this go-
r 2 vernment.
68 NEW METHOD. Book V.
vernment. For which reason Metellus writing to Cicero has
made use oP per. N'on cxistimarnmj'ratrem incum per le oppuo-uatian
iri, in tlic same sense as ab ; as we see by Cicero's answer, who
says to lu'm, Quod scrihis non oportuisse fratreni tuxim h me op-
pugnari, Ac. And in the oration pro domo sini, he has indifferently
made use of both particles, a and per : Nisi nb improbis exptdsus
esseWf et per bonos restitutus. In the same manner as in the 11th
epist. of the 3d book, De mcrceuariis, ni^i jam aliquid Jadum est
per Flaccnm, fict h me.
Besides there are many occasions on which this h or ab can nei-
ther be put nor understood, Animus in curas diducittir omnes, Virg.
And sometimes it is even more elegant to give it a dative, as Sylvius
observes ; Paciftcatio qucc nequc scnaftd, neqzie j)<^pulo, veque cin-
quam bono probatnr, Cic. Nidla tunrum audita milii neque visa
sororum, Virg. Dilecti tibi pocta, lior. Formidntnm Parthis te
principe Romam, Hor. Cui Iccta poienter erit res, Ilor. Which
is still more common among the Greeks, T&lw £//,o« •jii'n^xfixivuv,
Demosth. the feats pei'formed by me. And an infinite number of
others of the like Sort. See the 12th rule of the datives.
Of the verbs called neuter passives, veneo, vapulo, S^x,
We have already made mention of these verbs at the end of the
preterites, vol. i. p. 305. where we have shewn that they are real
actives. Hence Sanctius observes that it is bad Latin to say Servi
veneunt a mangone, are sold by liim. And the grammarians can
give no other authority for it but the answer of Fabricius, who,
as Quintilian saith, having publicly given his vote for raising a
bad man to the consulate, made answer to those who expressed
their surprise, A cive se spoliari malle quarn ab hostc venire, Quintil.
lib. 2. cap. 1. AA'liich hath the less weight on this occasion, as
Cicero quoting tliis very expression of Fabricius in his second book
de Orat. gives it differently, Main, says lie, compilari quhm venire ;
than to be carried to be sold. For veneo comes only from venuvi
and eo. And therefore it is no more Latin to say venire ab aliquo,
than ire ab aliquo. However, if we should take it in a different
sense from the passive, we may say for instance, Servi vencunt a
Cicerone, that is, are carried to be sold in the behalf or by the
order and command of Cicero : and as Plsutus saith, JJbi sunt qui
amant a Loionc?
Neither is Vapularc ab aliquo Latin, according to the same Sanc-
tius, though it has also the authority of Quintilian, who, speaking
of a particular witness, says, Testis in renin rno;atus, an ab reo fus-
iibusviipidassct ; et innocens inqnit. ButTullusRufianus, an ancient
professor of eloquence, mentioning this same passage concerning
this witness, says : Et testis inlerrogatus ab reo num J'ustibus vapu-
tassel? innocens inqnil. Which gives room to suspect, that those
passages of Quintilian were corrupted. For vapulo properly sig-
nifies no more than ploro, as we have already observed, vol. i.
p. 307. So that this would be said by an ellipsis; num fustibus
cxceptus ejidasset.
Rule
OfSyntax. 69
Rule XXXI.
Of the matter of which any thing is composed.
Tlie matte?' of which any thing is composed, is
put in the ablative with the preposition
,e^ or e, as Vas h gemmis.
Examples.
The matter of which any thing is composed, is put
-in the ablative with the preposition e.v or ^, as Vas e
getnmis, a vessel made of diamonds. Imago e.v cEre^
a brazen imaire. Si2:mwi e.v mdrmorej a marble statue.
Pocula e.v auro, golden cups.
ANNOTATION.
f Sometimes we meet with the matter in the genitive, as Nummus
argenti ; crateres argenti, Fers. Which seems to agree perfectly
with the French, luw tasse cV argent, and is only an imitation of the
•Gre^s, who use this case, with the preposition In understood.
"Which we might resolve in Latin by a general noun, ex re, or ex
materia argenti, pursuant to what we have observed, v. 2. p. 63.
Rule XXXII.
Of those Nouns that are put in the Ablative with a Preposition.
Nouns signifying punishment, part, cause, in-
strument, manner, or reason of a thing,
are put in the ablative.
Examples.
All the following nouns are put in the ablative
after most verbs.
1. The punishment, pkcti capite, Cic. to be pu-
nished with death. Pumre suppUcio, Cic. to put to
death. Pcendaffici, Cic. to be punished. Vitia homi-
num, damnis, igmminiis, 'vmcidis, "vtrheribus, e.vUiis,
morte multantur, Cic. human vices are punished with
fines, ignominy, imprisonment, whipping, exile, an4
death.
2. A part, Ut totd metite at que omnibus artubuscon-
tremUcam, Cic. that I be chilled with fear, and tremble
every joint of me. Naso plus mdere, quam Sculis, to
distinguish better by his smell than by his sight.
3. The cdiXiSQ, Ardet dolore Ss ird, he is inflamed
with grief and anger : that is, grief and anger are the
cause of his being inflamed. Dubitatione ce'siuat, he
is in a quandary. Culpa pallescit, he is pale through
guilt
70 NEW METHOD. Book V.
guilt. Licaitid ckteriorfu, he grows worse by being
indulged.
4. Tlie instrument, Pcvfodet^e sagittis, to pierce with
arrows. Lapidthus obrucre, to overpower with stones.
Liidere pild, iS; ducdccim scrnpisy to play at tennis and
at (haughts.
5. 'riie manner or the reason, Aiictus prceda, loaded
Avith booty. Florere laiuk, to be greatly praised.
j4ffiiri sitperbd i-oce, to speak haughtily. Lt7ito gradtc
procedure, to walk slowly, llegio appardtu e.vceptus,
received with regal magnificence.
A N N 6 r A T I O N.
In till these nouns we understand the preposition governing the
ablative, as sufficiently appears from the vulgar languages in
which it is always expressed.
Tiiis is manifest even in regard to the instrument : Percutere
hacidn, to strike luih a stick. And the Greeks likewise do fre-
quently use the preposition.
But tlie reason why it is not generally put in Latin, says Sanctins,
is because it might occasion ambiguity. For when you say, for
example, tetigi ilium cum liasl<i, one might doubt your meaning,
whether you touched him and his spear, or wliethor you only
touched him with a spear. Hence the cum is generally omitted,
and the cxamj)les which Sanctius brings to piove the contrary,
are suspicious, or imply a different sense, as may be seen in Vossius,
lib. (Ic construct.
True it is that sometimes we use other prepositions on this occa-
sion, as Exercere solvm sub vomere, Virg. Castor trajectus ab ense,
Ovid. Hempc' que de maun cibos Sf iKjtiam jircehere, Cckim. And in
the V'ulgate Bible we frequently find the proposition jii, agreeably
to the Hebrew phrase ; lieges eos in virgcijerrea. Prtvraluit David
injundii S^' lapide. Domiuc, si perculimus ui gladin? and the like.
Jn regard to the father nouns of the cause and the manner, they
are sometimes used with a preposition also; for as Ovid says, Felix
nato ^ coiijuge, Cicero says, Ah omni Inude Jelicinr. And in like
.manner witen we say, Jcve vatus ; gencre AJet ; domo S/culus, we
must ahvays understand «, or ab. Elisa mulier domo Phcexix, in
Solinus, that is, A domo Phoenix. Just as Cicero has expressed
himself with the preposition, Ab his rebus vacua atque nuda est ;
lahorat ex reuibiis. And Terence, E dolo>e,prcE dolore,pr(£ gaudioy
qua de causa, and the like.
Rule XXXIII.
Of particular Verbs that govern the Ablative, some of which have
likewise the Accusative.
1. Pollco, aftlcior, dono, sterno, dignor, go-
vern an ablative.
2. Vcscor, fungor, fiuor, utor, and potior,
Of Syntax. 71
govern also an ablative, and sometimes an
accusative.
Examples.
1. This rule is only an appendix to the foregoing,
where we have seen that several verbs govern an,
ablative, which might be included in the cause or the
manner : Follere opibus, to have great credit, power,
or wealth. J' ffici gauclio, to rejoice. Donare civitatey
to grant the freedom of the city. Slerntre fiorihus^
to strew with flowers. Dignari al'iquem amore, to
esteem a person worthy of his affection. Qui apud
710S hoc nomine dignantur, Cic. who amongst us are
honoured with this name. Cultu S^ honore dignari,
Cic. in a passive sense ; to be esteemed worthy of
honour and respect.
2. The following govern also the ablative, and
sometimes the accusative, being considered as verbs
active : Vesci came, and carnes, to eat flesh. Fungi
dlicjuo munere, Cass, to discharge an office. Functus
officio, and officium, Ter. who has done his duty. Fungi
vice, Hor. vicem^ Li v. to do his duty. Vi?' bonus utitur
mundo, nonfruitur, a good man makes use of the things
of this world, but does not set his heart upon them.
Ad agrum fruendum allectat senectus, old age invites us
to enjoy the pleasure of the country. Uti dliquo fami-
lidriter, Cic. to be very intimate with a person. U'tere
ut "Coles Speram meam, Plant, make what use of me
you please. Mea bona utdntur sine, Ter. let them en-
joy my estate. And in like manner abutor. Operam
abutitur, Ttr. he loses his labour. Potiri imperio, to
enjoy the supreme command, Fotiri gaudio, Ter. to
be extremely merry. Urbem potiturus, Cic. about to
become master of the city. P atria potitur commoda,
he enjoys all paternal advantages.
A N N.O T A T I O N.
1. We say also potiri rerum^ voluptatum, urbis, regni, Cic. and
other genitives, which are always governed by an ablative under-
stood, asjacultate, potentta, and the like.
■ 2. There are a great many more verbs which govern the abla-
tive, as Lector, gaudeo, gestio novis rebus. Delector, oblecto, and
ebiectorj tristor, nitor, Jraudo, fraiidam ie victti ; vivere lactuds,
«[ victitare
72 NE^y METHOD. Book V.
viclilare tcguminilius ; parietem cruore Unire ; gloriari victoria, Cass,
and an infinite number of others. Rut we may refer them to the
precedent rule of tlie maimer and the cause, or we may say in ge-
neral that there is a preposition under-itood ; as appears by Cicero's
expressing it, In hoc ddcctor ; de hicm xivcrc ; gloriari de divitiis ;
In luiJHS vita uitilnr scihis civitatis ; and the like. Thus when Lu-
cilius, Tcr. Appul. Plaut. say. Quid me fief? And Cic. Qxdd TuU
lia mea sit factum? cTcn according to (iruterus's edition, we are
to understand de, as he expresses it in another place, Q.uid de
P, Clodiofiat ? And Ter. Scd de fratrc meo quidfiel ? &c.
Rule XXXIV.
Of the Ablative Absolute.
The ablative absolute is put every where by itself ^
as me consule feci, regina vcntura.
Examples.
We give the name of ablative absolute to that which
standsalone, and as it were independent in a sentence.
i\nd this ablativ^e is put every where, whether in speak-
ing of two different things or persons, or whether in
speaking of one only ; as Me consule id feci, I did that
when 1 was consul, liegind Tenturd, magnum erat in
urbe gaudiuniy the queen being expected, there was
great joy in the city. Mc ducc adhuncxotifinem veni,
Ovid, 1 compassed this design myself, by my own
conduct. Brevitatem seciUus sum te magistrOj Cic. I
liave been more concise after your example.
ANNOTATION.
This same ablative which they call absolute, and scorns indcpen»
dent, is governed nevertheless by a preposition understood, for me
constde, implies sub me consule. Regina ventura, means, de rcgina
Ventura, and the rest in the same manner, just as Horace says. Sub
duce quiiemplis Farthoriwi signa rrfixit : Pyrrhus in Cic. Do volcn-
tibus, cum magnis diis, OfKc. 1 . and T. Liv. Ctim diis bene juvanti-
bus : which v/e should express by this ablative absolute.
Sometimes the preposition in is understood, as in Martial.
2'emporibus(juc malis, nusus es esse bcnus.
That is, in temporihus. And in Cicero, Quod mc in forum vncaSf
eo vocas nude ctiam bonis meis rebus fugiebam, ad Att. that is, in bonis
rebus. Ovid has even expressed it,
JSIcns antiqna tumcnfracta quoqiie mnnsit in itrna.
V>\xt to denote what has haj)pcned in the course of time, we
ought rather to understand a or ab, with this ablative, Oppressa
libertalc patricBy nihil est qttnd speremm- amplius, Cic. that is, ab op-
pressd iiberinte, in the same sense as we say accvna, h prandio, after
supper, after dinner, and the like ; just as Cicero has expressed
himself writing to Dolabeila, Non licet tibi jam a laniis rebus gestis,
von lui similcm esse, after such great exploits.
O F S Y X T A X. 73
Hereby it appears tl:at it is not true, absolutely speaking, that
this ablative cannot be used in a sentence, except when there are
two thino-s or two different persons. For if this depends intirely
on the preposition, this difference of person has nothing to do
with the subject, at least in regard to grammar. Hence it is
right to say ; Me duce ad hunc votifinem, me miiite veni, Ovid. Et
Icetosfecit se consuiefactns, Luc. And Cicero abounds in such ex-
,amples. Non potes effngere hvjus culpce pcenam tepatt ono. Teneham
\nenioria, nobis considihus. Mcmineram nobis frrivatis ccstcra. Ojice
ornamenta in Sexto Claudio esse voluisti te consuls. MUii quidem neque
pueris nobis M. Scaunis C. Mario cedere videbatur. And Caesar
speaks thus of himself; Didatore habente comiiia Ccesare, consides
creanttir J. Ccesar S,- P. Serviliics.
But this way of speaking is common enough, when this abla-
tive denotes a diversity of time and condition, though in the same
person. Hereof we shall give more particular examples. Te vi-
dente vides, Plaut. Qui se vidente anncnm pntiaUir suam, &c. Ter.
Hibericas herbns se solo neqidcqunm inteUigente dicebat, Quin. lib. 8.
Te volente misisti, Idem decJam. 4. Quibus occidtatis (Tyriis) Si-
dona devecti sunt, Curt. lib. 4. c. 4. Iterum censente in Trebianis le-
gatam pecimiam transferre concederetur, obtinere non potuit, Suet, in
Tiber. Absjimiqne etiam se inspcctante patitur, Plin. Prodente se
antor est M. Varro, Id. Horum supra centum viginti mUliafidsse, se
prodente Ctesias scribit. Id. Se audieyite locuples audor scribit Thucij-
didcs, Cic. Nobis vigilantibiis, S)- multum iii posterum provident ibus^
Pop. Romano co?isentiente, eriymis prnfedo liberi, brevi tempore. Id.
Moderante Tiberio ne plures quam qualuor candidatos commcndaret,
Tac. Tiberius directing affairs in such a manner, that he pro-
mised not to name more than four candidates. And others of the
like sort, which may be seen in Sanctius and elsewhere.
This shews that Despauter had no great reason to find fliult with
this phrase, which Priscian maintains to be good Latin, Me legente
projicio ; and as he believed that no Latin author ever expressed
himself in that manner, it proves that he was less versed in the
writings of the ancients, than those who came after him.
Rule XXXV.
Of some Particles which govern different cases.
Ecce, and en, govern a nominative or an accu-
sative.
O, heu, proh, govern a nominative, accusative^
or vocative.
Hei, and vae, Jiave only a dative.
Examples.
These two adverbs ecce, en, govern either a nomi-
native, or an accusative ; as En Friamiis, Virg. be-
hold Priamus. En tectum^ m tegulas, Plaut, behold
the roof, behold the tiles. Ecce
74 NEW METHOD. Book V.
Ecce ilia tempestas, behold that storm. Ecce rniserum
hSmiucm, behold that wretclied man.
Tlic interjections, O! heu! proli! govern either
the nominative, accusative, or vocative.
O qualis domiis ! O what a house ! O me ptrditum!
wretched me ! O Dave, itane conltmnor abs te ? O
Davus, (lost thou despise me tlius ? •
Heu nimiumjeliv I O too happy! Heu p'letas, hen
prisca Jides ! alas, where is the rehgion and iidehty of
former days! Heu slirpem invisam ! Virg. O unhappy
race !
Proh dolor ! O lamentable! Pro dethn, atque hbrni-
7iumjidem! Ter. Cic. ye gods! ye men ! Fi^u sanctc
Jupiter ! Cic. O sacred Jupiter !
Hei! and vce! are always joined to a dative; Hei
mihi ! ah me! Vcc tibi! wo to you!
ANNOTATION.
Ecce, and en, more usually govern an accusative, when they de-
note any kind of reproach. En aniwuvi &^ mentevi, there's a bright
genius i'ojr you. In sudden things, Cicero irequently useth the da-
tive with ecce. Epistolam cum a te avide expectnrem, ecce ii/n )iu?t-
cius venit. But considering it strictly, this tibi is only a relative
dative, and the meaning is:, behold a mcsioiger H'/io is come to tell
me this of you, or conceniing you.
Therefore it is observable, that properly speaking, these ad-
verbs and interjections govern no case. For which reason we have
placed tliis rule after the rest, as a thing that may be omitted,
since the following noun constantly depends on the verb which is
understood. Thus when Cicero says, En crimen, en causa, that is,
e}i est crimen, en est causa. When we say, Ecce ilhan, we under-
stand vide or rcspice, and the like. Just as in Greek, 't%, JSi,
though taken adverbially for en and ecce, arc real imperatives of
the 2. aor. of i'vJw, and ii^oi/.xi, to see, to know.
It is the same in regard to 0, when we say, prccclarum cusfo-
dem ! we understand habemus. O mc miserum ! sup. sentio. For
that the particle O does not govern th.is case, appears from its
being frequently omitted. Me miserum, Ter. as likewise from
several passages, where it cannot be even understood, as Jlccccine
flagitia ! jocidarem dudaciam ! Ter. w here according to Donatus,
we must understand only audio, or dicis.
In regard to the interjections hei and vcc, so far are they from
being capable of governing any cases, that they are. not so much
as significative words, but serve only to express the emotions of
the mind, Hei mihi ! vcc tibi ! where we always understand est,
as if tvr:' were a noun. .Just as in the Vulgate we read, Vcc unum
mbiit : vctnunt duo va' post hccc, &c.
Rule
OfSyntax, 75
Rule XXXVI.
Of the reciprocal Pronouns sui and stius.
To avoid ambiguity, let the reciprocal pronoun
refer to the principal iioiui only.
Examples.
We have placed this rule the last, because it ap-
pears somewhat more diflficult, and supposeth aknow-
Jedge of the others. But there is nothing more na-
tural, when once it is rightly considered.
These two pronouns relative sui & suns, are called
reciprocals, because they refer the third person back
to itself As when I say, Cato se interjecit, Cato has
killed himself; this pronoun ^t', refers Cato to Cato
himself. And in Hke manner, Ipse ae diliglt, he loves
himself. Loquitur secum, he talks to himself. Sui
semper shnilis, always like hiniself, &c.
Therefore if we want to refer to the case immedi-
atel}' preceding the verb in the natural order, we make
use of the reciprocal to avoid ambiguity ; Ccesar ririo-
'Visfo dint, non sese Gallis, seel G alios sibi btllum intu-
lisse, Caesar told Ariovistus, that it was not he who
had declared war against th.e Gauls, but the Gauls
against him : where it appears that sese and sibi refer
to Cffisar, as to the nominative, which immediately
precedes the verb in the natural order of construction.
But if there is no danger of ambiguity, we may put
indifferently, either a reciprocal, or one of these rela-
tives, ille, ipse, hie, is, in the same place, and in the
same sense ; as Est 'verdfortunatus ille, cujus e.v salute
non minor pene adomnes, quam ad ilium 'Centura sit. Ice-
titia perventrit, Cic. Marcellus is happy to find that
his preservation is as dear to the whole community, as
to himself: where it is obvious that he might have
said ad se. And in like manner, Omnes boni, quantum
in ipsisfuit, Ca^'sareminterjecerunt ; all the honest par-
ty, as much as in them lay, had a share in Cesar's
death : where he might have said, quaatum in sefuit.
On the contrary, authors put the reciprocal also,
where they might have used the relative, Medeamprce'-
dieant injugd, fratris sui membra in iis locis qua sepaixns
persequeretur dissipavissCf Cic. Medea in her flight is
76 NEW METHOD. Book V.
said to have scattered her brother's limbs wherever
her father was in pursuit of her : wliere he might liave
said, f/ud cam pcrscijuci^etur. Orare jussit, ai se ames,
hcra, jam \U ad sese venias, Ter. slie bid mc tell you,
that slie begs, if you have any love for her, you will
come and see her : where he might have said, Si earn
amcs, ut ad earn venias. Hwc propterca de me d'ii%
tit mihi Tiibero, cum de se eadem dicerem, igrmccrefy Cic.
I have said this coucernins; mvself to the end that
Tubcro might excuse nie, if I said the same of him :
Ciim de ipso eadem dicerem, would have done as well.
ANNOTATION.
It is therefore evident that all the rule we have to observe on
tills occasion, is to avoid obscurity.
Now in the first and second person there can never be any am-
biguity, and therefore we may say in the above-mentioned exam-
ple : Ut mihi 2ubero, cum de se, or ciim de illo, eadem dicerem,
ignosceret. We may say, Cepi culumbam in nido suo, or in nido ejus,
or in nido ipsius. Just as Terence hath. Timet nc desercts sc for
earn, in Andr. she is afraid lest you forsake her; and further on,
Moiiam esse tit memor esses sin for ejus. And Cicero, Alihi gratias
agunt guod se reges men sententid appellaverim, Siiis enm certis
j)ropriisque criminibus acai&abo. Non emit a tc enim, sed priusguam
tu swim sibi vender es, ipse possedit. And the like.
It is the same upon pthcr occasions, where the only rule is to
avoid ambiguity. Vix tamen sibi de mea voluntatc concessum est, Cic.
AVhere sibi stands expressly for lUi, as Manutius observeth. Thus
we may say, SiippUcium sumpsit dc J'amoso J'ure cum sociis suis, or
sociis ejus, because the sense is clear : but with the copulative con-
junction we should not say, Sumpsit suppiicium de J'ure ct sociis suis,
but only ejus ; because as suis then refers to the nominative of the
verb, it would look as if this were said of the companions of the
person that punishes. Just as when Cicero saith, Cerercm esse sub-
latnm a Verre ex templis suis ; suis refers to Cereremy as to the case
which immediately precedes the verb esse. Which might be ex-
plained otherwise, Quod Cere:i a Vcrrc sublata sit ex templis suis i
because suis would always refer to Ceres, the nonnnative of the
verb. But we should not say, Verres .tustulit Cererem ex templis
suis ; because suis wculd then refer to Verres, as now the nonnna-
tive of the verb, so that to remove all ambiguity, we should say, ex
templis ejus.
And so true is this rule, that except in this case we frequently
find both the relative and the reciprocal referring to the same per-
son. Abisari Alexander nuntinre jussit, si gravaretur ad se venire,
ipsnm ad eum esse venturum, Curt, where se and ipsum both refer to
Alexander, In provincin pncalissimd ita se gessit, ut ci paccm esse
expedirei, Cic. where se and ci both refer to Ligarius, in favour of
whom he is sneaking.
What
O F S Y N T A X. 77
What wonder then is it, if they put the reciprocal, though with-
out any relation to the nominative of. the verb, when it can occa-
sion no ambiguity, as Virgil speaking of Dido's nurse, Nnmque
suam patria antiqua cinis ater kabebat, where suam refers to Dido,
though cinis be the nominative of the verb. Valerius Maximus
speaking of Metellus, Tectum continiw in statuni suum resiituitf
where suum refers to tectum, and not to Metellus.
Cicero in his second book of Offices says of Dionysius the tyrant,
Candente cnrhone sibi adurebat capilium, where sibi refers to Diony-
sius, because it is the nominative of the verb adurebat. And in
the fifth book of his Tusculan Questions, mentioning the same
subject, he says, Dionysius Jilias suas tondere docuit, institiutque ut
candentibus juglandium putaminibus barbam sibi et capillum adure-
rent ; wdiere sibi is no longer referred to the nominative of the
verb adurerent, which are his daughters, but to Dionysius himself,
because the sense sheweth there can be no ambiguity, since his
daughters have no beard. But if it was only, Dionysius instifuit ut
Jilice Slice caniUum sibi adurerent, this might be understood of his
daughters' hair, because he has expressed them by the reciprocal
siue ; and to remove all ambiguity we should sa}^, Ut capillum ipsi
(Dionysio) adurerent.
But take notice that the ambiguity arises chiefly on these occa-
sions, where there are two third persons, and especially where there
happen to be two different verbs, as Pater jussit jilio id iret in cubi-
culum suum. Verres rogat Doiabellam ut de sua provincia decedat.
For then we must distinguish by the sense, and consider which is the
principal person in the sentence, in order generally to refer the
reciprocal to its nominative. Thus when Cicero saith. Turn Py-
thius piscatores ad se vocavit, et ab his peiivit ut ante suos Jiortos
poster a die jnscarentur, OtEc. 1. He ought not to have expressed
himself otherwise, because the verb petivit has Pythius before it for
its nominative, to whom these gardens belong, and who is the
principal nominative. But if he had meant the fishermen's gardens,
he should have said hortos ipsorum, to prevent ambiguity : as he
said of ISIilo, Obviam Jit Clodio ante fundum ejus, nempe Clodii.
Irf the same manner we say, Regis est gubernarc suos. Himc sui
cives ejecerunt, because though one would think that this reciprocal
does not refer to the nominative of the verb, yet it certainly
amounts to this sense, as appears by altering it thus; Regis officium
est ut gubernet cives suos. Hie ejectus est a suis civibus. For the same
reason we say, Trahit sua quemqne vohcptas, Virg. Justitia reddit
suum cuique. Siio gladio hunc jugulo. Negligere quid de se quisque
sentiat est disso/uti, Cic. Because the meaning is, Dissolutus neg-
ligit quid de se a quoqne dicatur. Suo gladio hicjugulatur. Quisque
a voUptate sua trahitur. Quisque a justitia accipit suum.
Therefore whenever there is a periphrasis, or a perplexed meaning
with the reciprocal, it ought always to be reduced to its natural
order, to see which is the nominative of the verb that it refers to,
as in Cicero's Offices, Ex qu.o, quia suum cujusque Jit quod cuique oh-
tigity id quisque teneat. We must reduce this, and say, Quia ex eotem-
porepr(xdium cujiisquejit ^immpr^dipujid qidsqw teneat, Sec. Where
78 N E W M E T H O D. Book V.
we see, that simm constantly refers to the nominative of the verb,
which is teneat. And the rest in the same manner.
Tlie reciprocal <:ener;illy goes before quixquc : as may be seen
in the preceding examples, and in this : Num ista sncirlas talis est,
ut 7tikil sunm cujtt.squc. sit, Cic. Though Virgil lias expressed it
Otherwise : Quisgue suo- patimnr manes. Which is rare.
With inter we t>ay ; Contenduni docti inter se, and coyiteidio est
doctorum inter se, or inter ipsos. Dmnoiiem S^ i'ljtliiuDi fcruut hoc
anivio inter se fuisse. Inter se omnes partes corporis quodam Icpore
consentiunt. Una spes est salutis, istorum inter istos disicnsiu, Cic.
and the like.
( 79 )
BOOK VI.
PARTICULAR REMARKS
on all the Parts of Speech.
AFTER having exhibited a general idea of construction
in the introduction to the syntax, and shewn the appHca-
tion thereof in the particular rules, - I propose giving some
other remarks on the several words of which speech is composed ;
and I flatter myself that even such as have made some progress in
the Latin tongue, will meet here with a variety of agreeable and
useful observations, as well for discovering the real foundation of
the language, as for understanding the different authors, and Avrit-
ing with elegance and purity. I shall only advise those who are
desirous of attaining the real principles of language in a higher
degree of perfection, to see what has been said on this subject in
the general and rational grammar,* where, if I am not mistaken,
even the most curious will find abundant matter of entertainment.
Section I.
REMARKS ON THE NOUNS.
, Chapter I.
Of Nouns Common, Doubtful, and Epicene.
1, Of Common Nouns.
THERE are a great many nouns, whose signification
agreeth with both sexes, though they never occur in con-
struction with an adjective feminine. Such is homo ; for we should
not say, hominem malam, as Charisius observes ; and it is a mis-
take, according to Vossius, in the transcriber of Plautus, to read
Hominis misercs misereri, where the best manuscripts have Hominis
miser e miseri. r«
* This work was translated a few years ago by the same hand as the rest of
the grammatical pieces of Messieurs de Port Royal, and printed for J. Noursb
(ngw F, Wincrave) in the Strand.
And
80
Section I. Chap. I.
Eook VI.
And if Sulpicius in his letter to Cicero, says of his daughter
Tullia, Homo nata est, this does not prove tliat it is of the femi-
nine gender, since in Terence a woman says, Virion me natam vel'
Icm : and it is in tlie same signification that Plautus likewise says,
Fures estis amhcr, that is, vos umbce Jemince Jures estis. Yov J'ur of
itself is never joined with an adjective feminine.
But we sIkiII divide these nouns into two classes, first those
which Vossias believes to be common in their signification only,
and next those which are common likewise in their construction.
II. Nmiiis common in their signification only.
Advena always roafeculine in construe- because this noiin is become in some
tion. And in like manna-, munsiire an adjective, and frequently
Transvkna and Contena (frnm taken for «7///«i, as in Cicero,Fncjof /(/i «r
whence cometh ConWTKr, the iniia- omnium homnvHi ntnincm. Tlie differ-
bitants of Con>ir>g:es in Gasconj') for ence is, that rii'mo is properly said only
as the iUolios tertninated in A, the of men, whereas nultus in said of every
masculines of the fir^t declension in thin;^. "Where we are to observe iie-
»a, as Iv^ioita ZeI? for Iu^u5r>;;, the vertheloss, that not only Virgil has
Latins, ever fond of im'rtattnj: them, Raid, Divum nemn, but even Cicero
have frequently giren the same
gender to this same tcrtnination ;
and hence it is that we have sucU a
number of nouns masculine in A.
AcfeicoLA, likewise C.tLicoLA and Ro-
ll rcoi.A.
AnENiGENA, in the same manner Isdi-
GENA, and such like.
AssECLA, a follower, or atlendant ; and
in like manner several nouns which
of their nature are adjectives.
AuilIGA.
Camtlds; though the Greeks say h
iNtn^elf, Ariau n'C homo, ntc Deus.
Ixi>£K, though its si^iiiljcation is femi-
niine, Orationis indicrm tuccrn, Cic.
JuvENis indeed is common in its sig-
nification, Cornelia juvcnis est, ft" nd-
hiic iiari'.re potest, Plin. but it is al-
WTij-s masc. in its construtn.ion.
Tiiercfore in this verse of Catullus
we should read betwixt two com-
mas Cernilis, innupla:, jiivcncs, that
is, vos inmiptiv, ccniit's juvenes, as
Vossius observes, contrary to the
opinion of Alvarez.
iii.fjLn>.o;, whicii has led several into a Hospes, common in its signification.
mistake. Seethe genders, vol.i. i>. 57.
Cliens, masc. we say Clienta in
the femininej Jam. clienlas reperi,
Plaut.
HcnesltP purpuras clienta, Hor.
Coci.es, Eques.
Exur. ; therefore we sh(>uld not saj-
vuga exul, but ■uafia 6f exul; nor
Jlospile cymbd, Stat, but masc. in
construction. In the feminine we
say kospila. ScrviHa Dicnis fmspita,
Cic.
Interpres. Jnlcrjirete linguii, Hor.
I.4NISTA. LiXA. Latro.
Obses. Henlcvliam vbsidcm perpetue in
Hemp. Voliin talis, Cic.
ejeclftm eoBul&m reduoere, hut ejeotam Opi*bx. ^Apes oit\fices,\vfxo.
in exdium reftucere.
Fur. See the beginning of this chap.
HoMiciDA, and th- like.
PAnniciDA, and the like.
Homo. See the beglnnini; of this chap ,
-But nemo is sometimes feminine,
Vicinnm nemiium amo m<t<'is. Plaut.
Pedes. Pincerna. Pu.tsul.
I'rincets. Priiichtes f amino!, Plin.
I'UGtL. Si qua est habitior pauii, pugi-
lern eise aiuut, Ter.
Rabula.
Se!*bk. Tua arnica scnex, Varro in
Priscian.
And if any one should pretend to say that these nouns are com-
mon in construction, because they eomttimee denote two sexes, or
two kinds, and arc joined to » substantive feminine ; the same
reason would prove that testis is likewise of the neuter gender,
because Horace says, Tcdis iMefaunimJhimcii; and that pecus, pe-
fom, is of the feminine, since it denotes both kinds, though it is
not Latin to say of a sheep, Lanigera ptaoris.
Remarks on the Nouns Common. 81
III. Nouns Common that are put in both Genders,
There are other nouns that are put in both genders, the
greatest part of which are as follow.
CoNJOx. Anl'iquusconjux, Virg. Re-
gia cnnjux, [d.
CoNvivA. Convent omnes convivas
meas. Pompon.
CusTos. Cuslos ves'ra. Plant.
Dvx. Slid fidunt duce nnctumd Pha-
nies in alto, Cic. Acad. 2.
H/EREs. Si sua hceres abstineat se boms^
Tryphon.
HosTis. Sludiorum pernicioiissima hostis,
Ouintil.
Infans, Infanlem suam reporfavil.
Quint.
Judex. Sumus lam savd jtidice sontes,
Luc. But it is more usual in the
maso.
Miles. Nova miles eram, Ovid. But
more frequently in the maso.
MuNicEPS. Municipem suam, Plin.
Pakens. Alma parens, Whg. Though
Charisius takes notice that anci-
• entiy it was only masc. and that
Medea, in Pacuvius, looking for
her mother, said, Ut mild poteslatem
duis inquiiendi mei parenlis.
Patruelis. Si mild palruelis nulla
manet, Pers.
Sus, jimica lutu sus, Hor. Immundi
sues, Virg.
Testis, Indttctd leste in senatum, Sue-
ton. Butoftener in the maso.
Vates. Tuque, 6 sanctissima nates,
Virg.
ViNDEX. Tu saltem debita vindex hue
ades, Stat. But more usual in the
masculine;
Adolescens. Optima: adolescenli fa-
cere injuriam, Ter.
Affinis. Afflnis lua, Cic.
Antistes. Pifrita anthtes, Val. Max.
Though we read also a/itistita, Plaut.
Cic.
AuTOR. Autor optima, Ovid. It is
more usual in the masc. And Ter-
tullian has made use of auctrix, for
the fem. But Servius obser\'etii that
the nouns in TOR, form their femi-
nine in TRIX, only when they are
derived from a verb, as from Ifgo,
Cometh Ifclor , which makes lectrit ;
whereas the others under a single
termination, are generally com-
mon, senator, balneator, &c. To
which he adds, that autor, coming
from autoritas, is common, but when
coming from augeo, we say aucior
dioitiarum, and auctiix patrimonii.
Augur. Augur cassafuturi. Slat. But
more usually in the masc.
Bos. Abstractceque hoves, Virg. It is
even more usually in the fem. ex-
cept when we intend to express
particularly the males.
Canis. Visteque canes ululare per um-
bram, Virg. as quoted by Seneca,
though others read vni cnnes. But
this noun is more usual in the femi-
nine, when it denotes the rage and
fury of this animal, because it more
properly belongs to the female.
Civis. Civis Romana, Cic.
Comes. Comilem suam desiituit, Ovid.
But it is more usual in the masc.
But we are to observe that some of the above nouns seem to
be rather adjectives, as adolescens, qffinis ; with which, strictly
speaking, homo and midier are understood ; though this makes no
difference in regard to practice, since it is sufficient to know that
they have been used by the ancients in both genders.
We must also take notice that there are some particular words
in ecclesiastic writers, in the use of which these writers are to be
our guides, because in this respect we cannot build upon profane
authority. Such is the word martyr, which is frequently fem. in
the Fathers, though in profane authors it is only masc.
IV. Of Doubtful Nouns.
We must likewise recall to mind what has been said in the intro-
duction to genders, vol. i. p. 1, concerning the difference between the
Common and the Doubtful ; and that a doubtful noun having in
Vol. II. G . one
85 Section I. Chap. L Book VI.
one part of the sentence been put in one gentler, may in another
part be put in another. Thus we find in Ovid :
Est specus exesi strudura pumicis asper,
Non liomiiii facilis, non adciuida J'ercc.
Where we see that specus is joined with aspcr in the first verse,
as mascuHne ; and with adeunda in the second, as feminine. Yet
this seems to be a kind of licence, more excusable in poets thau
in orators.
V. Of Epicenes.
We have already mentioned these nouns in the first rule of gen-
ders, vol. i. p. 5, and in the last, p. 55. The word Epicene is of
Greek derivation, and cannot be rendered by a single term in
Latin ; so that it is speaking with impropriety to call these nouns,
either communia, or promiscua. For as the ancients called xo/vo»,
commune, that noun which includes within itself the two genders;
so they have given the name of ett/xo/vov, that is supercommune., to
that noun which had something more than the common in this
respect, that it included both kinds under one gender.
And at first they made use of this term only to express the names
either of such animals as were least known to them, or whose males
were not so easy to distinguish from the females. Hence Varro
takes notice, that anciently columba was epicene, and included the
male as well as the female ; but when pigeons were grown more
tame, the male was called columbus, and the female columba. Festus
observes that Numa's laws had agnum feminam, for agtiam. And
this confusion of genders has still continued in a great many nouns,
though their kind is sufficiently distinguished, as vidpes and Jelesy
feminine ; elephas, masculine, &c.
But what is still more remarkable, that which the ancients
distinguished, as p?<erM,y, and jjz^era, has sometimes reverted to the
same gender ; the word pueVf a child, agreeing as well with girls
as boys, and having been heretofore common, as Charisius takes
notice, and likewise Priscian, book 6, and 9. Sancta puer Sa-
turnifdia rcgina, lAv. in Odys. Prime incedit Cereris Proserpina,
jnier, Naev. 2 bell. Pun. So that this noun being at length be-
come epicene, a father might call his daughters pueros meos, my
children (if custom had so determined), as well as liberos, which
occurs in this sense in the civil law, and of which Gellius has ex-
pressly treated in the 12th chapter of his 2d book, where he says
moreover, that the ancients used the word liberos in the plural,
when speaking of a man vvho had only one so7i, or one daughter.
In like manner to express a female we may very well say egregium
catulum, a fine kitten, without there being any necessity to put
egregiam, unless we want to express particularly its sex ,- the epi-
cene noun generally following the gender of its termination, and
including indeterminately both kinds under this gender, and this
termination.
But when they wanted to express the particular sex, they added
masculus or Jc7ni7ia, as appears from Columella, and others, Pavo
masculus, pavo Jemina, &c. ; or else they understood them, as
when Plautus said, Elephas gravidUf that is, gravida femina, it
being
Remarks on some particular Cases. 83
being impossible that gravida should refer to elcphas masculine, but
by understanding some other word between them.
It is by this rule, according to Sanctius, and even to Quintilian,
that we ought to explain these passages of Virgil, Timidi damcey
talpcs oculis capli, where in all probability the reason of his depart-
ing from the gender of the termination, was that he supposed the
word masculi, to refer to the most worthy : concerning which the
reader may likewise see what hath been said in the list of the
Epicenes, vol. i. p. 56 and 57.
Sometimes they referred to the masculine according to the ter-
mination, though speaking of females, as we read in Pliny, Fo-
lypi pariunt ova tanta/cecunditate, ut multitndinem ovortim occisi non
recipiaut cavo capitis, quo prcsgnantes iulercy where occisi refers to
Polypi, though it is understood of females. Which is still more
extraordinary among the Greeks, who do not mind the termina-
tion, as when Aristotle saith, hi o^v/^sy rly^ova-t, hi aves pariunt^
and as he said in another place o Xscov to signify a lioness, and Ho-
mer Tov xJyx for a she-goat, tsj oixs for sheep, and the like. This
may be referred to the figure of Syllepsis, of which hereafter.
Now it is very ridiculous, says Sanctius, to imagine that the
word epicene belongs only to birds or quadrupeds. It is applica-
ble also to insects and fishes, and even to man, as we have shown
in the word puer, and is further proved by all those nouns which
are common in their signification only. And this is sufficiently
expressed by the explication of the word, and the above given
etymology of it. •
Chapter II.
Remarks on some particular Cases.
I. 0/ the Vocative,
THE vocative, among the Attics, was always the same as
the nominative. Hence these two cases are almost alwa^^s
the same in Latin, and for this same reason they are frequently
joined in a sentence, as Nate meee vires, viea magna pot^ntia solus.
Virg. Salve primus omnium parens patrice appellate, primus in togi
triumphum, Unguceque lauream merite. Pliny speaking of Cicero.
And hereby we see, says Sanctius, that we may express ourselves
these ways, Dejende me amice mi, or defende me amicus mens. See
the declensions, vol. i. p. 65, and the remarks on the pronouns
which are to follow, chap. i. n. 5.
11. Of the Dative and the Ablative.
In Greek the ablative is the same as the dative, hence they
have always a great affinity even in Latin. Therefore as the
Greeks say rto 'Amta.^ aad the Dorians also, rZ 'Ay%/aar, rS. Itri'
To(*^, r£ (A.8a-a, or MOT'SAI, the Latins first made huic Ancliisaif
huic epitomai, huic musai (which is the same as musec) and only
dropping the i, hoc Anchisa, hac musa, hoc epiloma, &c. Just as the
G 2 iEolians
84 Section I. Chap. III. Book VI.
iEoHans say ru 'A/vw*, rx fxia-x, tu xiyuj, S:c. without i. Con-
cerning which you may see what hath been said in the Declen-
sions, Vol. i. p. 100, V22, 12.5.
But what is more remarkable, tlie Latins have been such imi-
tators of the yEolics, that heretofore they dropped even this i or
this e in the dative as well as in the ablative, in the first declen-
sion, and in the others they made these two cases always alike.
Hence it is, says Scioppius, that we find in Propertius,
Si placet insultet Lijgdame mortc mea,
for mo) I i mecc. Likewise, I-'ilaqiie J'eniinea turpiter apta manu for
vianui., Id. Hence also it is, that taking me for mi, formed by
contraction from mihi, and likewise tc for tibi, according to the
remark of Donatus and Festus, we find that Terence says, Nimis
me indulgeo. Te indidgebant, &:c. Hence it is, in fine, that we meet
with. In colli Uindentes pabula Icela, Lucr. Seria procul capili tan-
tuni delnpsa jaccbant, Virg. for tantiim capite, or a capitc. Scriberis
•aario Mceonii carminis alite, Hor. for alili. For Servius saith it is
the same expression as cernitur uUi. Cum tcrnere nnguineo creditur
ore maiius, Propcit. for ori. Cum capite hoc Stygice jam peterentur
aqucB, Id. for capiti hide. Ut mihi non uUo pondere terrajoret^ Id.
for uUi 2Jonderi : in the same sense as Lucretius says,
IJt sua cuique homini nuUo sunt pondere membra^
Nee caput est oneri collo :
where it is obvious that sunt pondere and est oneriy are in the same
construction.
Acic'sque Latince
Concurruntf liceret pede pes, dcnsusque viro vir, Virg.
Vfhere j)ede stands for pedi, even according to Linacer. Quod hand
scio an timens sua corpore posse accidere, Cicero. And we meet with
a great many more, which show, in my opinion, that this prin-
ciple cannot easily be doubted of. But this remark extends a
great deal further, as we shall make appear hereafter, when we
come to speak of the pronouns.
Chapter III.
Remarks on Numeral Nouns.
I. Of Am BO atid Duo.
AMBO and duo are used in the accusative masculine as well as
ambus and duos, according to Charisius. Which is an imita-
tion of the Greeks, who say, t«s Sm: ths a.i/.(pu.
Si duo prccterea tales Idcea tulisset
Terra viros. Virg.
Veriim ubi ductores acie revocaveris ambn. Id.
according to the reading not only of Charisius, but also of Servius,
who produces several other authorities besides : and this accusative
was in the ancient copies of Cicero, as Vossius observeth, who at-
tributes the change to the ignorance of the correctors.
The
Remarks on Nui\ieral Nouns. 85
The neuter is in Cicero quoted by Accius, Video sepidchra duo
duorum corporum, in Oratore : where Scioppius, Gruterus, and
others, read dua. And indeed Quintilian observeth, that they
used to say, dua pondo, and trepondo, and that Messala maintained
it was right.
We meet also with duo in the accusative feminine, as Scipio Gen-
tih's quotes it, Tritavia similiter mimeratafacit personas triginta duoy
Fauli I. C. And Contius cites it from Scevola in the genitive,
Duo millium aureorum, for duorum. But tliis is rare, whereas the
accusative is very common ; but we shall show hereafter, that there
were a great many more plural nouns of this termination in o.
II. Of the other Numeral Nouns.
It is to be observed that though we say, quiudecim, sedecim and
the like numbers lower than these, yet in the writings of the an-
cients we meet more usually with decern Sf septem, decern 4" octOy
decern S^ novem, than septemdecim, octodecim, novemdecim, which are
almost the only ones in modern use.
Priscian tells us that we should say, decimus S)- tertius, with the
conjunction, putting the greater number the first, or tertius deci-
mus, without the conjunction, putting the greater number the
last ; decimus &; quartus, or quartus- decimus, and the rest in the
like manner as far as twenty, though we find also decimus-tertiuSy
decimus- quartus, &c. in very good authors. But as this might
have been owing to the mistakes of transcribers who expressed ac-
cording to their own fancy what they found written in ciphers, it
seems to be the safest way to adhere to Priscian's doctrine. Sen-
tentia septima-decima, is in Cicero. Nono-decimo anno, in Ter. and
the like in others. We say likewise, duodevigintiy for 18, undevi-
ginii, for 19. And according to Linacer we may say likewise,
duodetriginta, for 28, undequadraginta, for 39, undequinquagessimo
die, as in Cicero, and such like.
From twenty to one hundred, if you put a conjunction between
the two numbers, the smallest must be placed first, unus 8^ vigintiy
duo ^ triginta, &c. If you do not use the conjunction, you say,
viginti unus, viginti duo, &c. Above a hundred, you always fol-
low the natural order, either without or with the conjunction,
centum unusy or centum S^ unus, mille unus, or mille Sj unus, &c.
But to reckon a thousand, you are to follow the rule of numbers
under a hundred. Sex Sf viginti miUia, or viginti sex millia.
And this rule is observed in the ordinal number; vicesimus
primus, or primus et vicesimus : in the distributive, viceni singidi,
or singidi et viceni : in numeral adverbs, vicies semel, or semel et
vicies, &c.
Milte is indeclinable in the singular, though according to Ma-
crobius, formerly they said mille, millis. In the plural it is de-
clined, millia, ium, (bus. We say indifferently in the singular,
mille hompies, or mille hovnnum : but in the plural we prefer millia
hominum with the genitive, though it is not true that the other
expression was erroneous, as Valla and Linacer imagined.
Tot viillia gentes- Armajerunt Jtalce, Virg.
Duodecim
86 Section I. Chap. IV. Book VI.
Duodccim ivillia pediles, Liv. Tritid modins quinq^ie millia, Cic.
'I'rccoilis inillibus mulicribus, Ju^t. For millia is also an adjective,
as ive shall shmv hereafter in tlie chapter of Sesterces ; which seenis
to have escaped those grammarians.
Chapteu IV.
Of the Motion, or Variation of Adjectives.
THE motion or variation of adjectives may be considered two
different ways, either according to the genders, or accortl-
ing to comparison.
I. Of the Variatio7i occordbig to the Genders,
Some adjectives have only one termination for the three gen-
ders, as par, coiicors. And in this number we ought to include
iii/ujis, since we read in Horace, Infantes sintiins ; in Ovid, Injantia
guttural and in Valerius Maximus, Infannpuer.
The others have t>vo terminations, IS and E for the positive
degree : OR and US for the comparative. But anciently the ter-
mination Oil served in this degree for the three genders. BeUurn
Punicum poster iir, Piaut.
Wc find likewise pntis and pote, in all genders.
Qui potis at ? iiiquis : quod nmantcm injuria talis
Coiiit amare rnagis, scd dene vellc minus, Catul.
Where it is" obvious that he \)ut potis for pote, ^vxxliv: as on the
contrary he has put pote for potis in this other verse:
. ^ Quantum qui pote phirimuni perire.
And for want of knowing this remark, a great many passages of
the ancients have been corrupted ; though we do not deny but
pote is more usual in the neuter. See the 3d chapter of Irregular
Verbs, and the first chapter of Adveibs, which are to follow.
There are likewise some that have two different terminations;
as Hie acer, hccc ncris, hoc acre ; or else hie et licec acris, et hoc
acre ; and the same you may say of saluber, alacer, and others :
alacris, says Asconius, sivc alacer, ntrumque enim dicimus. From
thence comes pauper, in the feminine in Terence, as Donatus
reads it.
Potius qunm in pntria honeste pauper vivere, in Andr.
Thoujih in Flautus we find, pauprra ticrc res est.
Celer hath for the feminine ceteris, in Ovid, and for the neuter
celere, in Ter. hi i'horm. But ceteris is also masc. in Cato. Hence
as from celer comes ceterrimus, in the superlative, so from ceteris
came cclerissimus, in Ennius.
Under the adjectives of a single termination we ought likewise
to comprcliend Dives, hebes, sospes, teres, memor, iiber, and some
others, though they are not so usual in the neuter. But in Ovid
we find, divitis ingenii; in Virgil, feres Jtageltum, mcmoris avi,
pauperis ingenii, and the like.
The names of countries in AS heretofore were terminated in is,
so
Remarks on the Comparison of Nouns. 87
80 that they said, according to Priscian, Hie et hcec Arpiimtis, et
hoc Arpinate. But because they have changed their termination,
they have Hkewise changed their gender: the termination AS
being as well for the neuter as for the other two. Ad iter Arpinas
^flexas, Cic. Bellum Privernas, Liv. Bellum Capenas, Id. and it
would be a mistake, if we believe Vossius, to say, bellum CapC'
note; though Priscian was of opinion that they said, Hie et hcec
Arpinas et hoc Arpinate ; and though Donatus laid it down as a
rule that we should say, Cujate, tiostrate, vesirate maneipium, in-
stead of cujas, nostras, &c.
Substantives sometimes become adjectives, and then they re-
ceive the variation of the adjectives, as in Virg. Arcadium ma'
gistrum, Laticemque Lyceum, for Arcadicum, Lijceium : populum late
regent, for regnantem, and the like. It is false reasoning, to con-
clude with Sanctius that it is as impossible a substantive should
become an adjective, or an adjective become a substantive, as that
a substance should be changed into accident. As if we did not
see examples to the contrary in all languages, in French, for in-
stance, chagrin, colere ; the names of colours, hlanc, rouge, and
others, which are sonietimes adjectives, and sometimes substan-
tives : and as if it were not a thing merely accidental and in-
different to all sorts of nouns, their being taken to express an ac-
cident or a substance.
Even the substantives continuing substantives, have sometimes
their variation, as rex, regina ; tibicen,tibicina; coluber j colubr a, &c.
II. Of the Comparison of Nouns.
We have already spoken of the comparatives in the abridg-
ment of this new method, and in the Syntax, rule 27, p. 55, and
following.
As the comparative particularly expresseth the quality of the
thing, it is plain it cannot agree with nouns substantive. But if
we say, Neronior, then it is to denote cruelty, and it is an ad-
jective; just as Plautus saith, Pcenior, to signify great subtlety
and cunning.
Therefore when we read in the aforesaid Plautus, Meritissimo
ejus quce volet Jhciemus ; and in Varro, Villce pessimo publico cedifi'
catce : and in Livy, pessimo publico aliquid Jacere, these are only
adjectives, which suppose their substantive by an ellipsis, two or
more adjectives agreeing extremely well with the same substan-
tive, as we have shown in the Syntax, rule 1.
It does not agree even with every adjective that expresseth
quality, and therefore much less does it agree with others which
express none. Thus we see that Opimus, claudus, canorus, egerncs,
balbus, almus^ and others, have no degrees of comparison, because
custom has settled it otherwise.
To the superlatives in Limus, by us mentioned, some add,
agillimus, gracillimus ; and Valla joins also, docillimus. But Vossius
rejects it, as not founded on authority. Charisius on the contrary,
in the chapter of adverbs, says, that of agilis and docilis, are
formed agilissimus and docilissimiiSf from whence come agilissime and
docilissime. As
88 Section- I. CiiAr. IV. Book VI.
As to imhccUlimus, it is true we find it in Seneca, not in the
book of coni^olation to Marcia, where the best copies have corpus
imlncilttun, but in the 85th letter. QitanluUun aiilnn sapienti damns
si imbcciUunusJortior est i' But imbeciUissimns occurs also in Celsus,
who is a very pure author.
111. OJ' Dcjtcthes, or those xvh'ich are deprived of some
degree of comparison.
Of adjectives, some are
Without the positive, as prior andi primus. To these arc added,
deterior (/elerrimus, and potior potissimus. But one cometh from
deter, and tlie other from potis. Ulterior and utlimus, may come
from idler. Ocior and ucissimiis, come from the Greek, ixv?,
winch makes ix/fc-v, in the comparative : and hence it appeareth
that ticior oujijht to be written with an i, and not with a y.
Without the comparative, nupcr and nuperrimus ; noviis, novissi-
mus ; the last. ISaccr and saccrruvns ; invitits and iuvitissimus. And
in like manner, Diversus,Jalsus,Jidus, persuasns, invisus, coiuultus,
■vieritus, apricus, bellus, iitviclus, iiiclijlusy and some others perhaps^
though not so many as people imagine.
Without the superlative, adolesccns, adolescent ior ; J uvenis, ior ;
senex, ior. Likewise, higens, faiur, dexter, sinister. For dextimus
and sinistimus arc no more than simple positives. Supinus forms
also supinior, in Mart. We meet with i/ijinitior and divitior, in
Cicero, Plautus, and Ovid.
Anterior, hath neither positive nor superlative, no more than
licentior. But habitior, which we read in Terence hath both ;
Eqnum strigosnm et male habitum ; sed equitcm ejus ubenimum et
habitissinmm vidernnt. Cell.
IV. Superlatives that are compared.
From the superlative are likewise formed other degrees of com-
parison ; Cnm adolescentulis postreviissivii^, Apul. Pt-oximus for
vicinus, forms proximior, Seneca ; and some others in the same
manner.
V. Adjectives that are not compared.
Those of countries, as liomanus, Spartiata. Possessive?, Pa-
trius, Evntidriits. Numerals, ?;;7»^^^?, dccimits. Those of matter,
aureus. Of time, hesternus. Those in DU8, amandus, errabundus.
In PLEX, duplex; except simplex, and vndtiplex. In IMUS,
legiliinus : IYtlS,fugilivus. Those from gero and Jero, armigevy
Jrvgifer. Likewise alvms, balbus, canorus, cnnus, cicur, claudus,
degener, dispar, egenus, magnanimus, mediocris, memor, mirus, veitc-
lus, unions, and perhaps a few others. Ikit crispus, ojnmus, and
Silvester, which Vossius ranks in this number, have their compara-
tive. The first we find more than once in Pliny ; Crispiores jubce
leonwv, lib. 8. c. 16. Crispioris elegaulicc maleries, 1. 13. c. 9. The
second is in Gellius, Membra apimiora, fatter, 1. 5. c. 14. And
the third also in Pliny, Si/lvestriura ojnnia, lib. 16. c. 27. But in
regard to those that have none, we make use of magis, to supply
the comparative, and of maxima for the superlative.
Remarks on the Diminutives. 89
To these the grammarians add all the nouns in US, that have a
vowel before US : and indeed it happens that they form neither
comparative nor superlative, lest they should occasion too »reat a
concurrence of vowels : yet there are several that are compared, of
which we take the following list.
List of Nouns that are compared, though they have a
"vowel bijoix \JS.
Arduius and arduissimus, Calo, Marcion. This author has vs'd the
Assidnioves. Van. Assiduissimus, Cic. some fxpre^s'i 'ti in othe> places. Saint
Egregiis^imiis, Pacuv. Ambrose ai/d others hav als'^ s "ike thus.
Egregius, is even ]iut for egvegiius in ^nd in the Vn'gafe, Qi'ae vulentur
Juvenal, as Priician observes, membra corpo^ s inSrmiora esse
Egregius coDnrt, melm^que miserri- nere-sariira sunt, *'. P«'//.' 1 C^r. 12.
mus liorum. Piis^iinus, is in S'-neco, 3, Curl 3uin-
Exiguiiis, U/pian. tiliun, Livy, Flmy, Jpuleins, St. Je-
Exiguissimus, Ovid, Plin. rome, an:/ others; thnugh Cice/o con-
Idone'ius, is in Tertull, Id neior, in d^mns it ii his 13. Phil. Tu »er6
Petrus Damianus, and in, all the says he, np pios qnidem, sed piissi-
writers of the latliT ages. mos quae' is j & quod verbuta om-
Industrior, P'autns. nino iiuilum in Iingui Latiii.i est,
Injurius, Plautus. Nihil amore inju- id pr'-pter tuain diviiiam pietatem
rius est, as Do>/za reads it, that is, novum inducis.
itijuriius, or injuriosius. Perpetui'or and perpetuissimus, j*risc.
Innoxius, or innoxiius, Calo. ex Cat"»e.
Necessarius, is also a comparaliv in the Strenuior, Plant. Lncil.
writers of the taller a^es. Quibus Strpnui«simiis, Sallust.
utique necessarius qua Deus, & qui- Ti-nnior, Cic.
dem melior, quo necessarior, latere Teuuisjimus, Id.
non debuit, Te-tull. lib. 1. contra Vacuissimus, Ovid.
We might mention others in Plautus, but it is to be observed
that this autlior hath frequently affected to coin a number of these
words according to his tancy, which by no means are to be ad-
mitted, as verberahiUssimiis, to signify one that very richly de-
serves to be beaten: Farissinius, very equal: spissigradissimust ex-
clusissimiis, &c.
He dots the same with the comparatives. Co)ifessior, tncithis :
with the pronouns, 2p5«smH5 : with the substantives, mentissimu^it
for maximuyn meritum, and the like. Which is not to be imitated
but with great care and judgment.
Chapter V.
Of Diminutives.
AFTER having treated of nouns which augment the sig-
nification, we must mention a word or two about those
which diminish it, and are therefore called diminutives.
Diminutives are generally terminated in lus, la, lum ; as
^Holies, adolescentulus, page/la, osciUum, a little mouth, or little
image which the ancients hung up in honour of Saturn for their
sins, or a kind of play amongst them. Sigillum, pullus, jlosculusy
homimculus, &c.
There
^0 Section II. Chat. I. Book VI.
There arc moreover some that terminate in lo, as senex, senccio ;
pusiis, pusio. Others in els ; rijuus, eqaulus, ecjntdcus.
Greek nouns are also terminated in iscus, Sj/rus, Syriscus ;*niaSf
mariscus, &c.
ASTER. This termination is hkewise diminutive according
to Scaliger. Sanctius on the contrary maintains that it augments
the signiftcation, but in derision ; iheologaster, a great theologian,
a great doctor, said ironically. And if we find in Terence, para-
sitaster parvulus, in Adelph. : he says that parvulus only denotes
the age, and makes nothing against his assertion. Vossius says,
that of these nouns some mark diminution, as siirdaster, recalv/ister,
and in like manner philosophastery poetaster, &c. Others denote
imitation, as Antoninster ; and others signify neither, as apiaster^
or apiastrum, taken from apes, a kind of herb of which bees are
fonu.
The diminutives form also other diminutives of themselves ; as
piter, puerulus, or puelhis, and from thence puellulns. Cistula, a
little basket, cistella, and from thence cistdlida, in Plautus.
Hence it appears Iiow greatly Valla was mistaken in asserting
that no diminution could be added to diminutives, as if we dia
not find in Terence, ^;wcicM/y5 miniitos ; in Cicero, minutis interro-
gatiiinculis; and in another place, ^;wczc?(/i^«m; in Caesar, wat/-
culani parvam ; in Valerius Maximus, cum parvulis Jiliolis, and
others of the same sort.
Section II.
REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS.
Chapter I.
Of the Number of Pronouns, and the Signification
and Declension of some in particular.
I. The nature of a Pronoun.
'HE Pronouns are no more than real nouns, says Sanctius,
T
that have nothing in particular but their manner of de-
clining. For to say that they are substituted in the room of the
nouns, there is nothing particular in that, since even one noun may
be taken for another.
Be that as it may, grammarians are very much divided about
the number of pronouns. Some reckon titer, quatis, quantus, &c.
others, alius, omnis, totus, and the like, and others also include
arnbo, duo; and others add some more. For the sake of ease and
brevity, I thought it sufficient to mark eight with the relative, iu
the abridgment of this new method.
II. Difference in the signification of Pronowis,
We have already taken notice of some difference between Illb
and IsTE in the abridgment of this book. Cornelius Fronto also
teacheth.
Remarks on the Pronouns. 91
teacheth, that Hic and Iste, are said of a person who is near us ;
Ille of one who is at a distance, but not out of sight ; and Is of
one who is absent. And it amounts almost to the same, when Sa-
turnius asserts that hie is for the first person, islic for the second,
and illic for the third. We have thought proper to mention
these differences, though they have not been ahvays observed by
authors.
Hic and Ille differ also in general, inasmuch as hic refers to
the nearest, and iUe to the remotest ; which ought always to be
observed, wiien there is any danger of ambiguity. But except on
such occasion, authors have slighted tliis difference.
Qnocuiu/ue aspicio, nihil est niid pontus et (sther^
Ftuctibus hic tumidus, nuhibus Ule niinax, Ovid.
And Cicero, Quid est quo I negligenter scribamus adversaria? quid
est quod ddigenter scribamus tabutnn? qua de causa'? Quia hcec sunt
menstrua, ilia ceternce ; hcec dtlentur siatim, illce servaniur sancte;
hcec parvi temporis memorinm, illce perpetuce exiitimationis Jideni et
religionem amplectuntur ; hcec sunt dejecta, illce in ordinem conjectce.
Tiie difference they make between Qui and Quis, is of no ser-
vice. For Pierius observeth that in ancient copies we find indiffe-
rently, Nee quis sim quceris Alexi, or }iec qui sim, Virg. Eclog. 2.
That which they make betwixt Omnis or QuisauE and
Uterque, is not always true, no more than that which they
suppose between Alter and Alius. For omnis and quisque are
said likewise of two.
Ecce autem similia omnia, omnes congruunt ;
Unum cognoris, omnes noris, Ter. in Phorm.
where he is speaking of Antipho and Phaedria. And Quintilian,
An ciirn duo fures pecuniam abstulcrunt, separatim quadruplum
quisque in duplum debeat.
We meet also with Alius, where mention is made only of two :
Duas leges promidgavit ; unam quce mercedes habitationum annuas
conductoribus donavit ; alinm tabularum novarum, Caes. 3. bel. civil.
And on the contrary we find Alter, for alms, in Phaedrus and
others.
What they say likewise of Uter and Quis, that the former is
applicable to two only, and the latter to many, and therefore that
one is joined to the comparative, and the other to the superlative;
is not general. Quanquam prcestat hnnestas incolumitati ; tamen
Utri potissimum consulendum sit deliberelur, Cic. He does not
say utri potiiis, but ntri potissimum. Quis may also be used, when
speaking of two only. Duo celeberrimi duces, quis eorum prior vi-
cisset, Liv.
Uter is never said but of two ; but its adverb Utrum is used
interrogatively in regard to divers things : Utriim impudentius d
sociis abstulit, an turpiiis meretrici dedit, an improbms populo Rom,
ademit, an audncius tabulas publicas commutavit? Cic. in Verr.
Aliquis and Quidam are frequently put for one another;
though speaking with propriety, quiddam implies a determinate
thing, whereas diquid \& said iadeterminately, as much as to say
atiud quid.
III. Co«.
9^ Section II. Chap. I. Book VI.
III. Co7iccrmngtheCases,andthcDedensionofPro7io2ins.
Pronouns, as we have shewn in the abridgment of tliis gram-
mar, have their vocative. But since the contrary is maintained
by many, we must produce on this occasion some ekamples.
Esto nunc sol testis, S)- H7t:c rdUii terra, prccanti, Virg.
Ipse aieas ccther, accipe sumnie preces, Ovid.
nox Illa, qncc penc ceternns hide urbi tcncbras attulisli, Cic.
There is only Ec.o that has none, because as this case particularly
expresses the person to whom wc speak, the first person cannot
speak to himself: and Sui, by reason it hath no nominative, on
which the vocative always dependeth.
Mis and tis are ancient genitives for mei and tni, though
Alvarez would fain have it that they are datives plural. Proofs
thereof may be seen in Voss. lib. 4. de Anal. cap. 4.
Illf. Anciently they said ollus or olle, for illc, whence also
cometh olli for iUi in Virgil and others.
Ipse. They used likewise to say ipsus for ipse, though the neu-
ter ipsud is condemned as a barbarous term by Diomedes. H^
was heretofore said in the neuter as well as in the feminine, just as
qncc is used for both genders in the plural. But of Iicc they made
nacce, just as we say hicce in the singular ; and afterwards by apo-
cope they said h(Tc, which we find even in the feminine, Periere
hcec oppido cedes, Plant. Hccc ilia;' erant itiones, Ter. in Phorra. as
quoted by Donatus, or haccine, according as Heinsius reads it.
IS formerly made im in the accusative (as Charisius has ob-
served) like sitis, sitim.
Boni im miserantur ; illiinc irrident mali. Plant.
They used also ibus instead of iis in the dative and ablative plural.
Ibiis dinumerem stipcndium, Plaut.
Ea made ece in the genitive for ejus : and cabiis in the dative and
ablative plural for iis.
IV. Of the nature of the Relative.
The pronoun relative, qui, qua:, quod, has this in common with
all the rest, that it is put in the place of a noun. But it hath this
in particular to itself, that it should always be considered as be-
twixt two cases of the noun substantive which it represents, as we
have shewn in the Syntax, rule 2. And that it serves as a con-
nexion to make an incidental proposition form part of another
which may be called the principal. In regard to which we refer
the reader to what hath been said in the General and Rational
Grammar, part 2. c. 9.
V. 0/QuiorQuis.
Qui we find in Plautus, even in an interrogative sense. Qui
ccena poscit ? Ecqui poscit prandio ^ qui me alter est audacior homo? In
Amphit. Qua is acknowledged in the fem. even by Donatus;
and Scioppius proves it from Propertius, Forlunata mco si qua est
celeb) ata libello, though it seems to be put for aliqua, and therefore
it is rejected by Vossiue. But qua in its natural -signification, may
likewise
II EM ARKS ON QtU AND QuiS. f)3
iikewise bear this meaning; si qua est, if there is any, &c. The
jieuter quid OGours in Plautus, quid tibi nomen est ? In Ainph.
Quis was heretofore of all genders : Quis il/ccc est miditr quce
ipsa se misereatur, Plaut. Quisquam illarum, nostrarum quisqnayn,
PJaut. Scortum exoletum ne quis in proscccnio sedeat, Id. And it is
the same as poiis, magis, satis, nimis, which of tlieir nature are ad-
jectives and of all genders, though custom has made them pass
for adverbs.
The ancients declined qui and quis without changing the q, either
in the genitive or the dative. Hence in order to distinguish
them the more easily, they said quoius and quoi, because qui would
have been the same as the nominative : and we find a great many
more examples of it in the ancient copies of Virgil and Cicero:
Quoi 7ion dictus Hilaspuer? 3. Georg.
as Pierius observes : Quoi tu (video enim quid sentias) me comi-
tern putas debere esse., ad Att. lib. 8. ep. 8. Quoi tali in re libenter
tne ad pedes abjecissem, ep. 9.
Hence it cometh that dropping the i, as we have already ob-
served in the second chap, of the Remarks on the Nouns, they said
quo in the dative as well as in the ablative, according to Scioppius,
SI quo usui esse exercitui possit , Liv. Ut idagam quo missus hicsum^
Plaut. for quoi negotio. Est certus locus, certa lex, certum tribunal,
quo hce reserventur, Cic. Quo mihijbrttmas, si 7ion conceditur uti?
Hor. for cui usui. And the like.
The accusative was quern, quoin, or quum, of which at length
they made cum, taking the C for Q. as well as in the genitive and
dative. Which is for all genders, as coming from quis, of all gen-
ders.
And this has produced those elegant phrases, wherein Tully
useth this cum as a connexion, after all nouns and words expressive
of time. Ex eo tempore cum me pro vestra incolumitate devovi, for
ad quom, or cum tempus, instead of ad quod tempus. In like manner
tempus cum ; hie dies sextus cum ; jam multos annos est cum ; jam ab
illo tempore cum ; paucis j)ost diebus cum; mult i anni sunt cum ; nunc
tempus est cum ; dies nondum decern intercesseraut cum ; ilia tempera
cum ; nuper cum ; friginta dies erant ipsi cum, Sac.Juit tempus cum,
or J^uit cum ; prope adest cum ; nunc illud est cum ; nondum cum ;
tantum veneram cum, &c.
Qui in the ablative is of all genders, and comes fx-om their
having heretofore been used to say in the dative qui (or quoi J for
cui. Patera qut rex putitare solitus, Plaut. for in qua. Restem volo
emere qui mejaciam pensilem, Id. Qui cum partiri euros, &c.
Abs quivis homine, cum est opus, beneficium accipere gaudeas,
Terence. And in another place
Nam in prologis scribundis operam abutitur :
Non qui argumentum narret, sed qui malevoli
Veteris poetce jnaledictis respondeat.
For qui is not a nominative in this passage, since Donatus thought
it stood for ut : but it would have been better to say it stood for
quo or quo negotio, and that it is an ablative signifying the manner.
Just as Terence has again expressed himself in another place :
Hanc
94 Section IL Chap. I. Book VI.
Hancfidem sihi me obsecrnvit, qui se scirct non desertiirum , ut darem^
Id. Where qid stands for quo modo. She begged I would give her
my word, whereby j>he might be sure thut I would not forsake her.
It is hkewise by tliis principle that we so frequently repeat,
qiii igitur conveuit, Cic. Qui fieri potest for quomodo. Sec. This qui
occurs even in the ablative plural, ut anales, nut oiuniices dmilur
qui cum lusilent, Plaut. Cap. A. 5. so. 4. And Duza believes it is
a barbarism to say qiiihusaim, though we meet with it frequently in
Cicero, and in other writers. Quibus ortus sis, non quibuscum vivas
considera, Philip. 2. Ad eoruvi approbationem quibuscum vivimus.
Oft: 1.
The plural of quis was heretofore Ques, according to Festus
and Charis. from whence also cometh the dative and ablative
quibus, just as puppes makes puppibus, whereas of qui is formed
queis or quis, as from illi cometh il/is.
The accusative plural neuter was not only qua, but likewise qua
and quo. Qua has still continued in quapropter, that is, propter
qua, or qu{B, sup. tempora vel fiegolia.
Quo was therefore an accusative plural, the same as atnbo and
duo, of Wr'hich mention has been m:ide in the chapter of numeral
nouns; and it has continued still in quocirca, quousquc, &c. that is,
circa quo, or usque quo. for ad quo, or ad quce, sup. tempora vel ne-
fotia, or the like. Prope arcam facinnda umbraada, quo succedant
omiues in cestu, tempore meridiauo, Varr. for ad quce. Dolia quo
vinaceas condat decent, Cato, for in quce.
They used also to say eo in the accusative plural. Eo redactus
sum, that is, ad eo (for eaj negotia. Ad eo res rediit, Ter. for ad
ea /oca, the affair is brought to that pitch.
Ido was likewise used in the same sense ; Nam ubi illo adveni,
Plaut. that is, ad illo, for ad ilia loca.
But quo was put for all genders, just as we have above observed
of duo-^Dignissimi quo cruciatus conjluant, Plaut. for ad quos.
Sidcant Jbssas quo aqua pluvia dclabaiur, Varr. for per quas. It
even seemeth that as the ablative qui served for all genders and
numbers, so quo has been used for the singular and the plural :
Providendum quo se recipiant, nejrigidus locus sit, Varr. for ad quern
locum. Me ad eam partem esse venturum, quo te maxinie vdle arbi-
trabar, Cic. for i7i qvam. Nosti hunc Jundum, quo id venimus, Cic.
Nullum portum, quo classes decurrerent, Hirt. Hnminem beatum, quo
illee perveniant divitice, Pompon. Unless we choose lo say with
Scioppius, that it cometh then from the dative, quoij for cwi, in-
stead of ad quern ; as Jt clamor ccelo, for ad ccelum.
VI. Of Mens and Suus.
The vocative sint^ular, mi, is an apocope for viie (the sani6 as
Virgin for Virgilie ; see the Declensions, vdI, I. p. 65.) which
came from the old nominative wius, according to Caper and
Diomedes.
The writers of the latter apes have used mcus also in the vocative,
not only as an H^Hericm. when the nominative is taken for the
vocative,
Remarks on Mens and Suus. 95
▼ocative, according to what we have already mentioned, chap. 2,
as Deus mens, ut quid dereliquisti me ? but moreover by joining it
with a real vocative distinct from the nominative, as in Sidonius,
Salvianus, Victor Uticensis, and others, domine mens, and the like :
which is not to be imitated. For it is true we find that the nomi-
native may be put for the vocative, as Livy has said in the voca-
tive Populus Albanus ; Horace, PopUius sanguis ; Persius, Patricius
sanguis ; and Virgil also,
Projice tela manUf sanguis mens, Mn. 6.
But it will not be an easy matter to find, that when the adjective
and the substantive have each its particular terminations for these
two cases, they ever took, while the purity of the language sub-
sisted, the termination peculiar to one case, to join it with the
proper and specific termination of the other. Otherwise, how
came they to invent different terminations ? Thus Plautus says
in the vocative in the very same verse, mens ocellus, and anime mi.
Da mens ocellus, da mea rosa, da a^iime mi, Asin. act. 3. sc. 3.
But he no where says mi ocellus, nor anime mens. And it is thus
likewise that Augustus writing to his nephew, as quoted by Gel-
lius, says, Ave mi Cat, yneus ocellus jucundissimus. ^Vhere we find
that in the second member he did not choose to say mi ocellus, but
vieus ocellus, like Plautus. And when we find in Pliny, Salve pri'
mus Imiream merite ; and in Virgil, Nate mea magna potenfia solus,
it is because pritnus and solus have no other vocative than that ia
US. ,
Mi was frequent in all genders. Mi sidus, Apul. Mi conjux, Id.
And S. Jerome, Testor, mi Paulla, Jesum.
Ml is sometimes also a vocative plural formed by contraction
for tnei. Mi homines, Plant. 6 mi hospites, Petron.
This contraction is likewise usual in Suus, as sis for seis, sos for
suos, sas for suas, &c. In regard to which we are however to ob-
serve that the ancient passages are sometimes corrupted, and that
we should understand sam for earn, and sos for eos. And this mis-
take has proceeded from their having taken F for E in the capital
letters, and afterwards s fory in the small ones.
VII. Pronouns in C, or those compounded of En and
Ecce.
The pronouns ending in C are not declined but in those cases
where they keep the C : as istic, istcec, or istuc. Istunc, istanc, &c.
Those that are compounded of eii or ecce, are very usual in the
accusative. Eccum, eccam, eccos, eccas ; elliim, eUam, ellos, ellas.
And in like manner, eccillum, eccistam, which we find in Plautus.
Their nominative also occurs sometimes, though more rarelyi
" '■' Hercle ab se ecca exit, Plautus.
Chap-
w
96 Section II. Chap. II. Book VI.
Chapter II.
Remarks on the Construction of Pronouns.
I. Of llie Cofist ruction of Ipse.
E liavc already spoken of the construction of reciprocals
in the Syntax, rule 36, for which reason we shall only
touch on vvliat is most remarkable in regard to the rest.
The pronoun ipse, ipsa, ipsum, is of all persons, and generally
joined with the primitives, Ego ipse, tu ipse, itle ipse.
But whereas the Latin writers of modern date generally put both
these pronouns in the same case, saying, for example, Mihi ipsi
placeu ; te ipstim laudas ; sibi ipsi nocuit ; on the contrary, in the
purity of the language, ipse is always the nominative of the verb.
Jet the other pronoun be in whatever case it will ; Milii ipse
placeo ; te ipse laudas ; sibi ipse nocuit ; me ipse consoler, Cic. Resp,
per eos regebatur quihus se ipsa commiserat. Id.
True it is that in the 1st ep. of the 7th book we find in almost
all the printed editions, Reliquas partes diei tu consumebas lis delecta-
tionibns, quas tibi ipsi ad arbitrium tuum comparciras. Which Ma-
nutius does not altogether condemn. But in this very passage
Lambinus and Gruterus read tibi ipse, and this last reading, as
Manutius confesseth, is confirmed by the MSS.
Ipse by another peculiar elegance expresseth likewise the pre-
cise thing or time. I'riginta dies erant ipsi, cum dabam has litteras,
Cic. Ciim ibi decern ipsosdiesjidssem. Id. Quin nunc ipsum nondti-
bilo rem tantam abjicere, Id. Nunc ipsum ca lego, en scribo, ut ii qui
mecum sunt, difficiliiis otium ferant, qucim ego laborem. Id. And
hence it is that Plautus was not afraid to make a superlative of it.
Ergo ne ipsus ne es ? Jpsissimus, abi Idnc ab oculis, in Trinum.
II. Of the Construction of luEU.
Vossius and Tursellin before him, have observed that this
phrase. Idem cum illo, is not Latin, though Erasmus, Joseph Sca-
liger, and some other able writers have made use of it.
The ancients used to say, Idem qui, idem ac, alque, et, ut. Peri'
patetici iidem erant qui Academici. Cic. Animus erga te idem acjidt,
Ter. XJnum &; idem videtur esse atque id quod, &c. Cic. Eadem sit
utilitas uniiisciij usque tV univernoruniy Id. In cadem sunt iiijustitid, ut
si in suani rem aliena convertniit. It is true that Gellius hath,
Ejusdem cum eo musce vir ; of the same profession as himself; but
in this he is singular, and should not be imitated ; besides we
may say that he speaks of two different persons. So that even
if it was right to say, Virgilius e.st ejusdem muscc cum Homero, this
would be no proof, continues Vossius, that we might say. Fates
A7idinns (Andes was the village where Virgil was born) idem
cum Virgilio.
Idem, in imitation of the Greeks, is put likewise with the dative.
Invilum qui servat, idetn tacit uccidenti. Hor.
III.
Remarks on- the Constr. of the Prox. 97
III. Of theC(mstruction of the Possessives meus, tuus,
&c. and of the Genitives mei, tui, &c.
The possessive, generally speaking, signifies the same thing as the
genitive of the noun from whence it is formed ; thus domus paterna
is the same as domus patris. On some occasions the genitive is
more usual than the adjective, Hominum moresy rather than hiimani;
Hominum genus, rather than liumaniim, &c.
Now the genitive in itself may be taken either actively or pas-
sively, pursuant to what we have already observed, p. 16. and
consequently so may the possessive : therefore metis, tuus, suus,
noster, vester, shall of their own nature have the same sense and
force as the genitives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, of which they are
formed. But one thing we are to observe, that those genitives are
never put with other substantives, not even understood, whea
there is the least danger of ambiguity : so that if you say. Est jiiei
prceceptoris, then mei is an adjective coming from meus, and not
from ego ; genit. mei. It belongs to my master, and not to me
who am a master.
This does not hinder however but these genitives may be takea
both actively and passively, contrary to the general rule laid dowa
by grammarians, who pretend that jnei, tui, &c. are always, taken
in the passive sense ; and the possessives, meus, tuus, always in the
active sense; for instance, they say thnt amor meus, is always taken
actively, that is, for the love which I bear towards another person ;
and mnor mei passively, for the love which another bears towards
me, and whereby 1 am beloved.
But not to mention that these terms active and passive are insuffi-
cient to determine these expressions, since there are several of them,
in which we can hardly conceive either action or passion, as we
shall see in the following examples ; it is beyond all doubt that
Latin authors have frequently made use of these genitives or these
adjectives, indifferently one for the other ; as we find even in
Cicero, who has put the genitive where he might have used the
adjective, when he says, Utergue pro sui dignitate et pro reriim
magnitudine. Ut sui et Metrudori memoria colatur, nihil malo
quam me mei similem esse, illos sui. Quis non inteUigat tud salute
contineri suam, et ex unins tui vitam pendere omnium ? Ita se ipse
consumptione et senio altevat sui. Imitantes effecturem et genitorem
sui. Qidntus misit Jiliicm non solum sui drprecatorem , sed etiam accu-
satorem mei. And Terence, Tctigine tid quicquam ? oLc.
On the contrary we find that authors have put the possessive
Tneus, tuus, suus, where they might have used the genitive mei, tui,
sui, as Ego quce tun causa feci, Cic. where he might have said, tui
causa. Fro araicitia tua jure doleo, Phil. 10. For the friendship I
have for you. lavidia; mecc levandce causa, Cic. The envy which
others bear towards me. Utilitatibus tids possum carere : te valere
tud causa primum volo, turn mea mi Tiro : where he might have
put, Tid causa et mei causa. Nam neque negligentid tud, neque
odio idjecit tuo, Ter. He did not do it either out of any slight, or
hatred towards you ; where tud and tup are in the active senSe.
Vql. II. H And
98 Section III. Chap. I. Book VI.
And therefore the true reason why we arc not allowed to sa)',
Hie liber est viei, or met interest, but liher est mens, and mcii interesty
(sup. causa) is not because one is more passive than the other, but
to avoid ambiguity, for we could not tell whether it is viei patris,
or ^filii, or another, or whether it be mei ipsiur. Which rock has
been always avoided, by making it a rule never to put the primi-
tive genitives, where we must understand a substantive that may
occasion the least ambiguity. But when there is no such danger,
it may be used indifferently. Therefore since there is another
noun, there is no longer any danger of being mistaken, Hie liber
est mei solius. Tui luiitis, or tua unius interest. Ex tuo ipsius nnimo
conjectiiram Jeceris de meo, Cic. Inopis te jiunc miserescat mei, Ter.
Miserere mei peccatoris, &c. In regard to which we refer to what
has been further said in the Annotation to the 11th rule, p. 24.
Section III.
REMARKS ON THE VERBS.
Chap. I.
Of the nature and signification of Verbs.
SCALIGER dividing all things in general, in permanentes et
fliientes, into that which is permanent, and that which is tran-
sient ; and affirming that the nature of the noun is to signify that
which is permanent, and the nature of the verb to denote that
which is transient, he allows but of two sorts of verbs, active and
passive, which are both reduced to the verb substantive, Sum, es,
jest; quod est, says he, utriusqiie radix et J'lindamentum. Sanctius
maintains the same thing, which he proves by this argument, that
between action and passion there can be no medium. Omnis motus
cut actio aut passio est, say the philosophers.
The reasoning of these authors, as we have made appear in the
general and rational grammar, c. 12. proceeds from their not
having sufficiently comprehended the true nature of the verb,
which consists in denoting an affirmation. For there are words that
are not verbs, which denote actions and passions, and even things
that are transient, as curs7ts,Jtuens : and there are verbs that signify
neither actions nor passions, nor things that are transient, as exisiit,
quiescit,J'riget, albet, clarcl, &:c.
Therefore, pursuing a more natural and easier method, we may
divide the verbs into substantives and adjectives. Verbs substan-
tive are those which barely denote the affirmation, as sum, Jlo.
Verbs adjective are those which besides the affirmation common to
all verbs include also a peculiar signification of their own ; as a?wo,
which is tlic same as sum amans ; curro, sum currens, &c.
Verbs adjective are, either active, or passive, or neuter ; con-
cerning which we refer the reader to the general and rational
grammar,
Remarks on the Verbs Active.
99
grammar, c. 17. But one thing we are particularly to observe, that
there are two sorts of verbs neuter : one which signify no sort of
action, as albet, seclet, viret, ndest, quiescit, &c. And the others
which signify actions, but such as, generally speaking, do not pass
from the agent to any other thing, as prandere, ccenare, amimldre :
for which reason the grammarians call them intransitive. Yet the
latter sometimes become transitive, and then they are not distin-
guished from actives, and they govern the subject or object to
which their action passeth in the accusative, as we have observed
in the Hth rule. And of these we shall give several examples in
the following list :
I. List of Verbs Absolute mid Active.
or Intransitive, and Transitive.
aboleverat, Abolere nomina, S^iet. to efface ihcm.
Memoria cladis nondum
Uiv, xoai nut yet effaced.
Abstiiiere maledictis, Cic.
Abhorrere ab re aliqua, Cic,
Assuescere labori, Cic.
Cachinnare risu tremulo, Lucr,
Celerare, alisolutely, Cic.
Likewise Accelerare, Cic.
Clamaie ccepit, Cic.
Ut si inclamaro, advoles, Cic.
Coire in unum, Virg.
Copcionari de re aliqua, Cic,
Constitit Romne, Cic.
Delirare, ahsolutely, Cic.
Desperare ab aliquo, Cic.
Desinas, Tcr.
Differre nominibus, Cic.
Disputare de re aliqua, Cic.
Dubitare de fide, Cic.
Durare in asdibus, Plaut.
Ejulo, absolvtely, Cic.
Emergere regno, Cic,
Eructare, simply, Colum.
Erumpebat vis, Cic.
Exire domo, Cic.
Exhalant vapore altaria, Lucr.
Festina lent4, Adagium.
Flere de morte alicujus, Ovid.
Garrire alicui in aurem, Mart,
Genoit turtur, Virg.
Hyemat mare, Hor. rages.
Illucescet ilia dies, Cic
Incipit ver, Cic.
Inolescit arbor, Virg.
Insanire et furere, Cic.
Instant operi, Virg.
Insuescere alicui rei, Tac.
Jurare in verba, Cic, Cas.
Laetaris et triumphas, Cic.
Latrare et mordere possunt, Cic,
Luna luce lucet aliena, Cic.
Manere in officio, Cic,
Abstinere manus, Id.
Abhorrere aliquem, Id,
Assuescere bella aniaiis, Virg.
Cachinnat exltium meum, Appul,
Celerare fiigam, gradum, Virg.
Accelerare iter, Cmsar.
Morientem nomine clamat, Virg: -
Comitem suum inclamare, Cic,
Coire societatem, Cic.
Concionari aliquid, Liv.
Consistere vitam, Luc. for constituere.
Quicquid delirant reges, Hor.
Desperare vitam, salutem, Cic,
Desinere artem, Cic.
DifFerre tern pus, Cic, Hot:
Disputare aliquid, Id.
Dubitare aliquid, Cic, Virg.
Durare imperiosius aequor, Hor.
Ejulabam fortunas meas, Appul.
Serpens se emergit, Cic,
Eructare caedem bonorum, Cic.
Erumpere stomachum in aliquem, Cii.
Exire tela, vim, Virg. for vilare.
Exhalare crapulam, Cic
Feslinare iras, Hor. Fugam, Virg,
Funera alicujus flere, Ovid.
Garrire libellos, Hor.
Gemere plagam acceptam, Cic.
Hyemare aquas, Plin, to cool them.
Dii illuxere diem. Plant.
Incipere facinus, Plaut.
Natura inolevit nobis amorem nostri,
Gell.
Insanire errorem, //or. Insaniam, P/aw^.
Instare currum, Plaut,
Insuevit pater optimus hoc me,
Jurare morbum, Jovem, Cic.
Hot,
Maria,
Virg.
Utrumque lastor, Cic.
Latrare aliquem, Hot.
Lucere facem alicui, Plaut,. '
Manere aliquem, Hor. Virg, io wait for
Him.
H "2 Morari
100
Section III. Chap. I.
Book VI.
Morari sub dio, fJor.
Mussit.ire, absolulelij, I.h.
Nocet enita dolore voluptas, Ilor.
Offcn^lcre in arro^antiam, Cic.
I'ascontes agni, V'trg.
Penetrat ad auips, (Jvid.
Porgere, simvly, Cic. Ter.
Pcrseverare in errore, Cic,
Plauilere sibi, Hor. Cic.
Pcrgere et propcrare, Cic. y
Qiierebatur cum Deo qubd parum longi
viveret, Cic.
Remisit pestilentia, Lit.
Requiescere in sella, Cic.
Resultant colics, Virg.
Ridere intempestiv^. Quint.
Ruit urbs, nox, dies, Virg.
Rutilant arma, l^irg. do shine.
Sapit ei palatus, Cic.
Spirant aura;, Virg.
Sistere, simjly, Cic.
Jn the same manner Subsistere,
Sonat graviter, Virs.
Sufficit animus malls, Ovid,
Superabat pecunia, Cic.
Supersedeas hoc labore, Cic.
Suppeditaut ad victum, Cic.
Transmittere, in an absolute sense. Suet.
Tardare et commorari, Cic.
Tinniunt aures sonitu, Calul.
Trepidat corde, Cic.
"Variat fortuna, Liv.
Nihil purpuiam moror. Plant.
Mussit<ibit timorem, ylppnl.
Nocere aliquein, Plant. Nihil nocere,
Cic.
Offendere aliquid, Cic. to hit against.
Pascere capt-llas, Virg.
Penotrare Allanti in, Plin.
Pergere rcliqua, Cic.
Perseverare alifjuid, Cte,
Plaudere aliqueni, Slat.
Hoc opus, hoc studiiiin parvi propere-
mus et ampli, Ilnr.
Queritur cnidclitatpm regis, Justin,
Suum factum, Ctis.
Remittere animum, Cic.
Requiescunt sues cursus, Virg.
Resultant sonum, ^Ippul.
Ridere risum, honiinem, &c. Cic. Hor.
Virg.
Ruerem caeteros, Tet.
Rutilant capillos ciuere, Val. Max.
Si recta saperet Antoniiis, Cic.
Spirant nanbus ignem, Virg.
Sistere gradum, Virg.
Romanum iubsi^tere non poterant, Lt*.
Nee vox hominem sonat, Virg.
Sufficere animos, Virg.
Superare aliquem, Cic.
Aliqua supersedenda, Auctor ad Her,
Suppeditare cibos, Cic.
Transmltteie maria, Cic.
Tardare imperiiim, Ctcs. Negotium, CiCa
Ecquid Dolabella tinniat, Cic.
Mirantur ac trepidant prEesagia, App,
Variare vicem, Cic.
Ventnum vergi-re, Lucr. Verser.
Vergebat locus ab oppido, Ces.
And in like manner its compounds, Rivulos evergunt, inverguiit vina, Virg,
Jlenre vie say likevcise in ike passive, Vergimur in senium, Sti.t.
Vertat bene, res, Plant. Virg. Vertere terram aratro, Hor.
Winitari et vociferari palkm, Cic, Vociferans talia, Virg. aliquid, Cic.
TIrit calore, Cic. Urere aliquem and aliquid, Cic.
II. List of Verbs Active which are taken i?i an absolutt
sense.
There are also a great many verbs active that are taken as it
were intransitively, and passively, or rather which reflect their
action back upon themselves, the reciprocal pronoun sc being
understood; as
AvERTO. V. Verto.
AucEO. Auxerat potentia, Tac. Auxit
morbus, is increased.
Capeuo. Quid est quod illi caperat
frons severitudine ? Plant, for cape-
ratur et rugis contrahitur.
CoNVEKTo. V. Verto.
Crucio. Ut niiserse sunt matres, cru.
ciantque. Plant.
Decohuo. Quibus (Pop. Rom.) iner-
tii Cxsarum quasi cgaseuuit atque
(iecoxit; Florut,
ExpEDio. Nequiter expedivit Parasi-
tatio, Plant.
ExuDO. Exudat inutilis humor, Virg.
for exudat se, says Servius.
Gesto. Aretinum Clementem in ei»
dem vel etiam in majore gratia ha-
buit, quoad novissim^ simul gestanti,
conspecto delatore ejus : vis. inquit,
hunc nequissimimi servum cr-s audi-
amus i* Suet.inDum. fV lie > c s'xmal
gestanti, imports, Being carried in the
fame iiUer,
Habeo.
Remarks on the Verbs Active.
101
Habeo. Quis hie habet ? Plant, for
se habet, or habitat. Video jam
quo itividia trauseat, ubi sit habi-
tura, Cic. Where it will fix its resi-
dence, Man.
Ingemino. Ingeminant curae : clamor
ingemiiiat. Vug.
Iksin'uo. Insinuat pavor, Virg. Pru-
dentia est ut penitus in^inutt in cau-
sam, ut sit cura et cogitaiione iaten-
tus, Cic.
Lavo. Lavanti regi nunciatum est,
Liv, Lavamus et tosidemus ex con-
suetudine, SuintU.
Lenio. Dum hae consilescunt turbae,
atque irae leniunt, Ter.
lHovEO. Terra movit, Suet. And in
like manner Promoveo, Macrob.
MuTO. Mortis metu mutabunt, Sal,
for mutabuatur. Which has puzzled
several, ^ho not understanding this
passage, would fain alter the reading.
But Tacitus has expressed himself in
the same sense, Vannius diuturnitate
in superbiam mutans. And Tertul-
lian frequently useth the word in the
same signification. It is the same in
regard to Demuto. Aqua paululum
demutavit liber, Appul.
Pasco. We say, Juventa pascit, S^
pascitur, in the same meaning, says
Conseniius,
Prscipito. Fibrenus statim praeci-
pitat in Lirim. Cic.
QuAsso. Laetum siliqua quassante le-
gumen, Virg. Vox activa ac signifi-
catio pa-siva est, says Ramus. Sub-
ducunt lembum capitibus quassaiiti-
bus, Plant.
RuGO. Vide palliolum ut nigat, Plant.
Sedo. Pi.tquam tempestas sedavit,
Cn. Velleius, cpud Gell.
ToNDEO. Candidior postquam tondenti
barba cadebat, Virg. Incanaque
menta Cinyphii tondent hirci, Virg.
i. e. tondentur.
Turbo. Et septemgeajini turbant Ire-
pida ostia Nili, Firg.
Vario. Variant undtC, Prop, for va-
riantur.
Veho. Adolescentia per medias landes
quasi quadrigis vehens, Cic. Triton
uatantibus inrehens beiluis ; Cic.
i. e. qui invehitur.
Verto. Libertatem aliorum in suam
vertisse ser^•itutem conquerebantur,
Liv. Vertens annus, Cic. in somnio,
for conversus. 2und turn in morem.
verteral. Tacit. Which was become
an established custom.
And in like manner Averto. Turn
prora avertit et undis dat latus, Virg.
Converto. Regium imperium in
superbiam, dominationemque coa-
vertit, Sail, in Cutil.
Vestio. Sic et in proximo sorer ciri-
tas vestiebat, Terlull. dressed herself
in the same manner. Parcius pasco,
levius vestio, App.
Volvo. Olim volventibus annis,
Virg.
VoLUTO. Genibu?que volutans, Id.
What evinceth that we ought to understand the accusative me^
se, or such hke after these verbs, is their being sometimes ex-
pressed. Callidus assentator ne se insinuet cavendum est, Cic. And
if any one should insist that they are then intirely passive, I desire
to know of him, says Vossius, hove those verbs can be called pas-
sive, which cannot admit of a passive construction, since we are not
permittedtosay, atleast in a passive sense, Ingeminat ab lis clamor.
Terra a ventis movet, &c.
Now tliis remark, as well as most of those here touched upon,
is as necessary for understanding Greek as Latin, which we have
sufficiently shewn in the New Method of learning the Greek tongue.
III. List of Verbs Passive taken actively.
There are likewise a great many verbs passive, which are some-
times taken in an active sense, being invested with the nature of
verbs common, or deponent.
AFFECTOR,/or Affecto. Affectatus est
regnum, Var.
Avertor, for Averto. Quam surda
miseros avertitur aure, Boiet.
Bellor, fur Beli-o. Pictis beljantur
Amazones armis, Virg.
Censeor, for Censeo. Martia censa
est banc inter comites suas, Ovid.
Voluisti macrnum agri modum cen-
seri, Cic. pro Flacc. Census est man-
cjpia Amynts, Ibid,
Com-
102
Section III. Chap. I,
Book VI.
CoMML'NicoR, for CoMMUNico. Cum
quibus spcin integrum communicati
noil sint, Liv.
CoMHERIOIlj/or COMPERIO, Hal.
CoNsiLioR, for CoNSiLio, as. Consi-
lietur atnicis, //or. Lei him adiise
his friends.
CoPULOR, for Coi'ULO, according to Prls-
cinn and \oni:js. Adeunt, consistunt,
copulantur dextras, Pla'tt.
Erumpi R, for Erump >. Cum vis Exa-
gitata forjis erumpilur, Lucr. And
in like munntr Perrumi'or.
Fabiucor, fur Fabrico. Capitolii fas-
tigiiim necessitas fabricata est, Cic.
TLVCTVOR.fvr Fll'ctuo. Utrius populi
victoriam mallet, iluctuatus animo
fuerat, LiV'
JURATUS SUM,/0'- JUKAVI, CtC,
MvnoR, fur Multo. Rebellaiites mul-
tatus est pcEua. Suel.
MuNEROR, for MuNERo. Alcxjo me
opiparfe imuicratus est, Cic. See
Gellius and Dvim.
In like manner, Remuneror, for Re-
MUNERO.
MURMUROR,/(.r MURMURO, Appul. .
NUTRICOR, for NUTRICO, or NUTRIO.
Munilus omnia nutricatur etcontinet,
Cic.
pERAGRon, for Peracro. Peragratus
est regionem, Vel'eius.
Peru NOR, /or Per lino. Ab imis nngui-
bus sese totam ad usque summus
capilios perlila, Appul.
PiGNEROR,/or PicNERO, Ceil. Non.
Pn.EVERTOR, for Pr.bverto, Plant. Liv.
Cur. Tac. But in the preterite we say
only Pr.TiVerti.
PuNioR, for PuNio, Cic. Punilus es
inimicum, pro Mil.
QuiRiTOR, /or QuiRiTO, Varr.
RuMisoR,/yr RuMiNO, Varr.
Sacrificor, for Sacrifico, Gell. Varr,
Nun.
Saturor, for Saturo. Nee dum anti-
quum saturata dolorem, Virg. for
cum nondum saturavisset.
SpEcroR, for Specto. Spectatus est
suem, Varr.
SuppEDiTOR, /or SuppEDiTO. Qnod mihi
suppeditatus es, gratissimum est,
Cic.
UsL'RPOR,/or UsuRPO. Mulier usurpata
duplex cubile, Cic.
The reader may see several others in Vossius, and still more in
Nonius, but which are very little, if at all in use.
IV. List of Deponents, which are taken passively.
On tlie other hand there are a great many deponents, which
are taken passively, and then if they occur in a passive sense in
Cicero, or in some considerable autlior, they may be called com-
mon, since they have both significations. But if they are not to
be found except in very ancient authors, they ought rather to bear
the name of deponents, since in the most frequent use they have
lost one of their significations.
AsoMrNOR. Ante omnia abominari
semimares, Liv. speaking of monsters.
Sa;viti;'ique eorum abomiuaretur ab
omnibus. Verrius hlaccus apud Prise.
Adipiscor. Amitti magis quani adi-
pisci, h'ab. Max. Non ajtate, veriim
ingeiilo adipiscitur sapientia, Plant.
Admiror. Turpe est piopter venusta-
tem vestimeutorum admirari, Canu-
tius ad Prise.
AnoRioR. Ab his Gallos adortos, Aurel.
apud Prise.
Adulor. Adujati erant ab amicis, et
adhortati, Cass, apud Prise.
Ne adulari nos sinamus, Cie. Bulxee
say also adulo. See the next List,
Agcredior. Ut a te fictis aggrederer
donis, Cic.
Aggressus labor, Terent. Maur.
Amplector. Ego me non sinam am-
plectier, Lucil.
Animam nostro amplexam in pectore,
Petron.
Antestor. Impubes non potest ante-
stari, Liv. teste Prisciano.
ARBns;OR. Arbitrata quaestio, Gell.
Ex scriptis eorum qui veri arbitran-
tur, Ceelius apud Prise.
AsPERNOR. Qui est pauper, aspernatur,
Cic. ad Nepot.
AssEcroR. Asjicctari se omnes cupiunt,
ASSCQV^K.
Remarks on the Verbs Deponent.
103
AssEQUOR. Nihil horutn investigari,
nihil assequi poterit, Cic.
AucuROR. Certaque res augurantur,
L. Ctzs.
Tlrgil has liJceivise made use of the
active. Si quid veri mens avigurat.
Blandior. Branditus labor, Verrius.
Cavillor. Lepido sermone cavillatus,
passively, Appul.
CoiiORTOR. See HOUTOR.
CoMiTOR. Uiio comitatus Achate,
Vng. Jam salutantur, jam comitan-
tur, Just,
CoMPLECTOR. Quo uno maledicto scelera
omnia complexa esse videantur, Cic.
Cupio eum tarn invidiosi fortuna
compleoti, Cic. for comprehendi. ac^
cording to Priscian.
CoNSEQUoR and Consector. Quae vix
ab omnibus consequi possunt, Orbii.
a'jtid Priic,
A populo lapidibus consectarl, haver.
apud eundem. See sector, lower down.
Consolor, Cum animum vestrum
erga me video, vehemeuter consolor,
2. Metell. apud Gell.
Consolabar ob ea quas timui, ./Isin.
Pol', apud Prise.
CoNSPicoR. Paupertas base non ita
nutricata ut nunc conspicatur, Varr.
apud Prise.
Patrem non vult prius conspicari,
Plnut.
Criminor. Criminor defendere res
Syllauas, Cic. They charge me with.
Criminatus Asinus, Appul.
Demolior and Immolior. Nusquam
demolitur, iiusquara exoueratur pe-
cunia, Cur. apud Prise.
Immolitum & inaedificatum est in
loca publica, Liv.
Detestor. Bellaque matribus detes-
tata, Hor.
In honestissimo ccetu detestari, .^pp.
DiGNOR, Cuitu quodam & honore dig-
nari, Cic, Virg, to be thought voorihy
of.
BoMiNOR. O domus antiqua ! Heu
quara dispari dominare domino ! Cic-.
1. Offic. But it bears an active sense
in this passage of Virgil. Urbs anti-
qua ruit multos dominata per annos,
as Vossius observelh, though R. Stephen
and Alvarez were of a contrary opi-
nion.
Enitor. Enixus piier, Sev. Sulp. just
born.
Experior. Virtus experta atque per-
specta, Cic.
Experienda ratio, P. Nigid.
Pari. Fasti dies sunt in quibus jus
fatur, i. e, dicitur, Suet.
Fateor. Hunc excipere qui publicus
esse fnteatur, Cic.
Frustror. Frustratus a spe & devic-
tus, Fenest.
Frustramur, irridemur, Laver. apud
Prise.
Gi-ORiOR. Beata vita glorianda &
praedicanda est, Cic.
HoRTOR. Hortatus est in convivio i
scorto, Cic. -.chere others read exora-
tus. But in Ausonius tve find, Ex-
hortatoque somno, ut eum mitteret
soporem, iSfc. And Gellius informs us
that they said, hortor te, & hortor
abs te, lib. 15. cap. 13. Consulem
indicunt uententiam expromere, qui
hortaretur Clodius despondere Domi-
tio, Tacit.
Imitor. Si natura non feret ut quae-
dam imitari possint, Cic.
Imitata & efficta simulacra, Cic.
Immolior. See Molior.
iNsmioR. In legatis insidiandis, vel
in servis soUicitandis, Cic.
Interpretok. In testanientis vo-
luntates testantium interpretantur,
Paul, Jurisc. S. Austin and S. Je^
rome often take it in this sense. Ita
illud somnium interpretatum est, Cic.
for which reason Gell. lib. \5, c. 13.
looks upon it as common.
Machinor. Machinata fames, Sail,
apud Prise.
Meditor. Meditata sunt mihi omnia
incommoda, Ter.
Et quae meuitata & prasparata infe-
runtur, Cic.
Tractantur lenocinia, adulteria me-
ditantur, Minut. Felix.
Metior. Orbe si sol amplior, an pe-
dis unius latitudine metiatur, Arnob.
Moderor. Omnes virtutes mediocri-
tate esse moderatas, Cic.
MoDULOR. Lingua modesta & modu-
lata, Gell.
MoLioR. Pompa moliebatur. App.
Immolitum & inaedificatum est in
loca publica, Liv.
Nan'ciscor. Nacta libertate, App.
Obliviscor. Nunc oblita mihi tot car-
mina, Virg.
Consuetudo scribendi quae oblivisci
non potest, Schol. Juven. in Sat, T.
Ordiob. Ordita lectio, Diom. Cum
fuerint orsa fundamenta, Colum. Bo-
nae res a raro initio exorsae, Vxsel.
apud Prise. But
OscuLOR. Which most grammariant
give as an example of the verb com-
mon, is not perhaps to be found in good
authors, except in the active sense, as,
Vossius obseivtifl. Thost who use it
, ClhtT'
10-i
Section III. Chap. I.
Book VI.
olhe'tKise, may hnwevr defend ihem-
selves by the testimony <,J Viclorinin,
Prisiiifi, Cle.lonnis, atid other ancient
granituar^ans, wkn tcuul'l liu'dly have
ranked itin th'n number, unlea llicii had
found ^ome aiii/i(iritt/ JVr it, tliongh as
they have not jiruduccd any, the l>est -jcay
is to a'<.oid it. Yet they used to say
ancienliy, oscul'>, as we skill see m
the nert I si, f'Om wk nee mi^hl cme
the pu^si:e (.sculor.
PACitcon. Filia pacta alicui, Tac,
Plin. Liv, promised in marriage.
Percontor. Percaiitatucn pretium,
Appul.
!Pericmtor. Periclltari omnium juia,
si siniilitudiiiL-s accipiuntur, Cic.toere
in danger.
N'ln est saepiiis in iino homine salus
pei'iclitanda Reip. In Culil.
Por-ncEOR. Ut aliis statute pollicean-
tur, M'-tell. Sumid.
PopuLOR. Qui nunc populati atque
vexati, Cic. But ne sny likewise po-
pulo. See the next ii>t.
Potior. Ne potiretur mall, Tir. in
Pii-<r. instead of Ne a malo oppri-
inerctnr, uccnrdinn to Gudlem. lest
sortie disaster should befal her,
Potiri hostium, Plant, la be taken by
the tnemy.
Potiri heroum. Id, to be subject lo them,
according to Pulmeritis.
PRaSDOR.
Prbcou. Dcus precandas est mihi,
^uson.
Sector. Qui vellet se a cane sectari,
Varr. In the sime manner Consec-
TOR. See CoNSF.QUoR above.
Sriri;r.c>R. Accvrdin^ to Priscian is
taken i'l an active and passive signiji-
caiiun, and is even jolnedin both senses
tcith an adjective fioverned by the pre-
position, for Stipulur a tc, is taken for
intfiTogo te, and inteirogor a te : just
as u-e say, Quxro a te in an activs
sense ; I ask you. Minae quas a le est
stipulatus Pseudolus, Plaul. in an
active sense. Ni dolo stipulatus sis.
Plant, in a passive sense, Cicero hat/i
likevi ise, stipulata pecunia, in a passive
sense,
Testor. Ha;c quae testata sunt &. il-
Instria, Cic,
Tueor. Quod a rusticis Romani alcv
bantur &i tuebantur, Vurro.
Tlor. Tutus ab hostibus, Cic.
Tutus a calure & frigore, Cic.
Tuendam babere sedem, Cic.
Veneror. Cursusque dabit venerata
secundos, Virg.
Vereor. This is among the verbs com-
monin Getlius, lib, 15. c. 13. where
he says that both vereor te, and ve-
reor abs te are used,
Ulciscor. Quidquid ulcisci nequitur.
Sail,
Utor. Supellex qua; non utitur, Gell.
Ilia aslas magis ad baec utenda est
idonea, Ter.
In like manner, Abutor. Abusia
jam omnibus locii, 3. Hurt,
Several other verbs of the like nature may be seen in Priscian
and Vi)S?-ius, whereby it appeareth, says he, that there are more
verbs common than one would imagine ; though we ought not to
make a separate class of the\n distinct from the deponents, because
in common practice most of them have dropped one of their signi*
fications ; and even among the deponents themselves we do not
make two different classes, one for those that have an active signi-
fication, as pr^cor, I pray,y«/eor, I confess ; the other for those
which are pa-sive, as pascor, I am fed, nascor, I am born.
But what \h most remarkable in these verbs deponent or com-
mon, is thi'ir |)articiple of the preterite tense, which generally
occurs in both significations, whereas the tenses of the verb are
less ustial.
Examples hereof may be seen in this very chapter, and we shall
give some more in the remarks on the participles.
V. List of Delwyients that are terminated in O and in
OR.
There are likewise a great many deponents, which in the
same signification, are terminated in O. But most of them
-}• occur
Remarks on the Verbs Deponent. 105
occur only in very ancient authors. There are some few indeed
that have been adopted b}"^ other writers, as the following list will
shew.
Adulo, Cii. Ex veleri poeld, VaL
Max. Adulor, Ck. b\ alii, more
u<:nal.
Alterco, for Alter COR. Scio cum
patre altercasti dudum, Ter.
AssESTio, and Assentior, 'xere in use,
according to Gellius, Nonius, and
Diomedrs. The former occurs the
of/enest in MSS. and the latter in
printed editions, saijs Vossius.
Amplecto, for Amflector. Like-
wise Amplexo, and Amplexor, ac-
cording to Pr/scian. ylnd in Cic. Au-
toritatem censorum amplexato. Pro
Clu.
Aucupo, for Accupor. Aucupare ex
insidlis quid agatur. Plant. Aucu-
pans, is in Cic,
AuGURO, for AuGUROR. Praescntit ani-
mus & augurat, Cic.
Auspico, for AuspicoR, Prise. Non.
Fest,
Cachinno, Lucr. for Cachinnou,
Cic.
CoMiTo, for CoMiTOR. Stygias comi-
tavit ad undas, Ovid,
CUNCTO, Plaut. CUNCTOR, Cic.
Depasco. Si hodie roscidas herbas de-
paverint, PUn.
Depascor. Belluaj depascuntur sata.
Id. Febris depascitur artus, Virg,
Frondes depastus amaras, Claud.
DicNO, /:>»■ DiGNOR, Prise. Uiom.
EjVLO,for Ejulor, Piisc.
Elucubro, and Ei.ucubror. Epistola
quam eram elucubratus, Cic. Quic-
quid istud est quod elucubravimus,
Colum.
ExPERGisco, for Expurgiscor. Phi-
loxeniis, Hyginus, Dodtlieus, Isaac
Vossius.
Fabrico, oKri Fabricor, Cic.
FnusTRo, /or Frustror. Nod frustrabo
vos milites, Cffi.
Frutico, Colum. Plin. for Fruticor,
which Ciceio makes use of.
Imito, /or Imitor, Varr. apudNon.
Impertio, and Impertior, Cic.
Insidio, fm- Insidior, in the Civil
Law.
JuRGO, /or JoRGOR, Cic. apud Non. ex
xii. Ta/ml.
Lacrvmo, Ter. Ovid, for Lacrymor,
Cic.
hx.TO,for LiETOR, Piisc.
Larcio, far Largiob, Prise, ex Sal,
Non.
EuDiFico^/or LuDiFicoR, Plaut.
LuxuRio, Non. ex Virg. LuxoRios,
Colum. Plin.
Medico. Medicare semiiia, F/r^. But
Medicor is taken Ixrth actively and
passively: medicatoe fruges, P'irg.
Mereo, /or Mereor, Cic.
Quid enim mereas, Cic.
Merui, Virg. Cic,
Meto, as, Virg. in. Culice.
Metor, aris, more usual.
Metari castra, Liv. Sallvsl. to set out
a camp, to encamp. But we find
also, castra melata, Liv. in a passive
sense.
Misero, and Miseror. And in the
same manner Misereo, and Mise-
REOR, /ro>« whence Cometh,
Miseret, and Miseretur, mth Mi-
SEREsco, and Commiseresco, Mise-
rescimus ultro, Virg.
Per fidem Myrmidonum, commise-
rescite, Non. ex Enn.
MoDERO, for MoDEROR, Non. Docet
moderare animo, Plaut.
MoLio, for MoLiOR, Piisc. mid in the
same manner Demolio, Demolivit
tectum, Varr.
MuNERO, /or MuNEROR, Non.
Opino, for Opinor, Prise, and Non,
ex Plaut. £^ deed,
Opitulo, /or Opitulor, Non.
OscuLO, for OscuLDR. Laudor quod
oscuiavi privignas caput, Titin. apud
Non.
Palfo, /or Palpor, Juv,
Partio, for Partior, Non. ex Plaui.
£f aliis.
Patio, /or Patior, Nrev,
PoLLicEO, for PoLLiCEOR. Ne dares,
ne polliceres, Varr. apud Non.
PopuLO, for PoPULOR. Forruicas farris
acervum cum po|)u!ant, l^i g.
PR«r,io,/or Pn.T.i.ion, Enn.
Reciproco, Lit". Reciprocor, Cic.
Reminisco, for Reminiscor, S.
Ansl,
Reverto, for Revertor, Si Romam
rerertisset, Cic. who uses it ordy in the
tenses of the preterite.
Rixo, /or RixoR, Varr.
RuMiNO. Kuminat berbas, Ttrg^.
RuMiNOR, Colum.
Stipijlo is not to be found in ancient
writers; bid only Stipulor, Voss.
See the preceding list.
Vago, fur Vagor. Lib. vagat per
auras, Pntd,
VfitlFICO,
lOG Section III. Chap. II. Book VI.
Vkmfico, Plin. Hence cometh, vcli- Vocirnno. Si hoc vociferare vrlini
ficatus Athos ; hut Cicero always puis quam dignum sit, &,c. Cic. in V'err. .
\eli(icor in Ihe active sense, Vociferor. Quid vociferabare (Jo-
tin ISO, and on, Plin. lo dive. cem millia taleiita babinio es^e pro-
VENEno, /6>; Veneror, Plant. Ut ve- missa ? Cic,
nerem Luciiiam.
We might collect some more from the ancient grammarians ;
but in regard to practice, care must be taken to imitate the best
authors.
Chapter 11.
Of the difference of Tenses and Moods.
I. Of Tenses.
IT will be of use to observe the different force, and natural sfg"
nification of each tense. For besides that considerable difti"
culties may sometimes arise in regard to this article, and that
even the most learned among the Romans, as Gellius calls them,
were heretofore divided in opinion whether surreptum crit, was to
be understood of the time past or to come, since we find in the same
author, that one of the questions proposed, was whether scrinserm^
legerim, venerim, were of the preterite or future tense, or ot both ;
it is beyond all doubt that on many occasions, we do not sufficient-
ly understand the force of the expression, nor can we tell why we
rise particular modes of speaking, nor the method of explaining
them, miless we are thoroughly acquainted with the nature of
these things.
But in order to do this with perspicuity, we cannot, I think,
follow a more natural division of the tenses of verbs, than that
which we have given in the rudiments. For in the nature of things
there are only three tenses, the present, the jiast, and the J'nture ;
but the inflexion of a verb may, either simply express one of these
three tenses, or mark two of tliem together in regard to two diffe-
rent things; and thus the tenses of the verbs may be called,
either Simple or CoMrouxDED in the sense : concerning which
the reader may see the general and rational grammar, ch. 14.
We are further to observe for the Latin termination, that here-
tofore the futures of the two last conjugations were terminated also
in BO ; as cxpcclibo, in Plautus, Aperibo, dormibo^ repelibitur : red-r
dibitiir, for rcddctur, and others. But Scioppius maintains that
the third terminated in ebo, and not in ibo, like the fourth, and
that we ought to read, reddebo, reddebiiicr, asjtigcbo for Jhgiani,
Jidebo for fidam, &c.
II. Of Moods.
In the rudiments I reduced the moods to four, for the reasons*
expressed in that place, and in the advertisement to the reader ;
in regard to which you may see the General and Rational Grammar,
ch. 15. and 16. I shall only add that this ghould not be esteemed
a no-
Remarks on the Tenses and INIoods. 107
a novelty, since Palemon, a more ancient writer than Quintilian,
admits of no more.
Sanctius and after him Scioppius, go a great deal further ; for
they cut them off' intirely, as well as Ramus, and allow of no other
moods or manners of the verb than those which are derived from
adverbs, whose chief office is to determine the signification of the
verb, as bene, male, midtum,fortiter, parum, &c.
This is what induced them to make another distinction of the
tenses, dividing every one of them into j^rima Sf sectinda, and say-
ing for example, Pr^sens primum Amo; Prcesens secundum Amem:
Imperfectum primum Amabam : Imperfectum secundum Amarem,&c.
And as for the future they put three, making the imperative pass
for the third. This is not without foundation, because, as we shall
see hereafter, the tenses of the subjunctive and of the indicative
are oftentimes indiscriminately taken for one another. Yet as
this disposition does not make the matter at all shorter, and one
way or other, we must still be acquainted with so many different
tenses, I have thought proper to conform as much as possible to
the ordinary method, because in regard to matters once established,
we should make no alteration without great reason and necessity.
III. Of the 'Subjunctive.
The subjunctive always expresseth a signification dependent on
and as it were connected with something; hence in every tense it
partaketh in some measure of the future.
In the present ; as Si ceqiie in posterum me ames. De qua utinam
aViqunndo tecum loquar, Cic. And Quintilian has taken notice,
that when Virgil saith, Hoc Ithacus velit, this velit denoted the
time future. Hence it is frequently the same thing to say, Si amemy
■ or si amabo ; si legas, or si leges. And perhaps it is in consequence
hereof tJhat some ecclesiastic authors have now and then put one
for the other, taceam for tacebo ; indnlgeam for indulgebo. Sidon.
Adihipleam for adimplebo ; mandem for mandabo, Greg. Tur. unless
we have a mind to say that then the futures of the two first conju-
gations have made an exchange, and form their termination in
am, as the others in bo ; but we meet with no examples hereof
among the ancients.
But the imperfect of this mood, over and above its proper sig-
nification, sometimes denotes also the present and future, and
therefore it hath three different significations. That of the time
present. Ctim Titius studia midtum amaret, since he loved. That
of the time past, Cum studia 7uagis amaret qiu)m nuncjacit. That of
the future, Op)eram dedisses quam debebas, rnagis te ama)-em posthac.
The perfect in RIM is also taken for the future. Ne mora sit si
inniierim quin pugnus continuo in mala, hccreat, Ter. Jv^su tuo, im-
peratory extra ordinem nunquam pugnaverim, non si certam victoriam
videam, Liv. Aiifugerim potius qumn redeam, Ter. Videor sperare
posse si te viderim, 8^ ea quce pretnant S)- ea quce impendeant me facile
transiturum, Cic. if I can see you, or when I shall be able to see
you, the same as si te videro. And therefore we may say, Romcc
«i crasjiierim, forjicero, tlie same as Romce si heri/uerim. But the
future,
108
Section III. Chap. II. Book VI,
future in RO is ahvays compounded (as we have already observed)
of the past and the future ; so that we cannot say, Romcr si hcrifuero.
To these Sanctius further addeth the plu-perfcct, pretending
that it partaketh likewise of the future : as NonuuUi etinm Cti'saH
otuntiabant, qinim castru viuveri, aut sig/ui Jbti jussisscl , itoii Jure dido
audientesj 1. 15. Gail. Juravit se ilium st atim interject urum,ni!>ijus-
Juraitdum sibi dedisset sc pat rem misstim esse Jhctur urn, Cic.
Vcrum (iHccps fuerat belli fortiuia ; fuisset^ ^^^t^-
Besides the usual terminations, the subjunctive had hereto-
fore another in IM. Aiisini, Jaxim^ as we likewise meet with
Duiiv, ^;crf/»2»i, crcdutm, in comic writers. Others add more-
over the termination in XO, as Ja.co, nxo, and the like. But of
these we shall take proper notice hereafter in the chapter of Defec-
tive Verbs.
IV. That zve may oftentimes put the Indicative or the
Subjunctive indifferently one for the other.
The best authors have very indifferently made use of the indi-
cative o the subjunctive, one for the other. We shall give here
the following examples taken mostly from Budeus and Scioppius,
•who can supply the reader with a great many more.
Chrysalus tnilii nee recte loquitnr quia
tibi aurum reddidi, & quia te non
defraudaverim, Id,
Me habere honorem ejus ingenio dicet,
<'uin me adiit. Id. fur adierit.
Tu humaiiissiiDe ftcisti, qui me certio-
rem fecens, Cx.
Stult^ fe<;i. qui huncamisi, Plant.
Abi, atque ilia si jam laverit, mihi re-
iiuntia, Ter. for iavit.
Non potest dici, qiiim indignum faci-
niis fecisti, Plant. J'nr feceris.
Quern eiiiin rectptum in gratiam sum-
mo studio defondetim, hunc afflictum
violare non dcbi n, Cic.for defendi.
I'or the iilii-pfrftct.
F-xportationcm uon parvam attuleras
cum scrip-eras, /o> scripsisses, /(/.
Castera qua; ad le Vibullius scripsisset,
erant in his litteris quas tu ad Lentu-
!uni misisses, O'c. /or miseras.'
Qui fui>set e°rentissimus in re sui, erat
ul 111 insolens in alien^, Cic. fnr fue-
rat. Verinn anceps pugnec fuerat
fortuna; fuisspt. Vug. perhaps it uM
be said that ilf issve of Ihf engogrment
had bern douhlftilf bf it so. Where
furrnt implies the same as fuisset
which followeth.
For llie future.
Venerem veneremur, ut nos adjuverit
hodie, Plant, for adjuvct.
llluc sursum ascendero, inde optimfe
dispellam virum, Id. for ascen-
daiu.
Ne
For the present.
Quin ta agis ut velis ? Plant, for ut
vis.
Loquere quid tibi est ? & quid nostram
velis operam ? Id.
Nunc dicam cujus jussu venio, & quam-
cbrem venerim, Id. he might have
said, et qu.itnobrem veni, or cujus
ju-su veniam, ^l'f.
Pebetis velle qua; velimus, Plaul. for
volumu-s.
Quid est quod tu sris ? Id.
j4nd in another place, quid est id quod
sciiis ? Video quam rem agis, Id,
Seio quam rem a^at, Id.
Quid est nejiotii tjuod tu tam subit6
ah' as ? for abi', Id.
Si est helium civile, quid nobis facien-
dum sit igtioro, Cic. for si sit.
lor I he 'mpetffct,
Non dici pote-i qniiui cupida eram hue
redeundi, Ter fi'i essem.
Autoritas tanta pian& me movebat, nisi
tu nppi suis-sps non minorem tuam,
Cic.for moveif-t.
jKum P. Drcius ciim «c drvoveret, &
equo admii'O in mcdiam aciem ir-
ruebat ; aliqtiid de voiuptatibus co-
gi'abat ; Id. for irruf rft.
Bcae^nla qu<.ii.i(iie snnuiatqne luceret,
f»c.-bat omnibus sui conveniendi po-
testatem, Cir.fn lucubat.
For the perfect.
Obsecro te ut mibi ignosoas, quod ani-
mi impos, vini vitio fecerim, Plaut.
for feci.
Remarks on the Tenses and Moods. 109
Ne tu linguam coinprimes posthac, e- Te rogo ut advoles, reepir&ro si te vi-
tiam illud quod scies, nesciveris. Id. dero, Cic.foT respirabo.
for nescies.
This seems to favour the opinion of Ramus and Sanctius, who
would not admit of the diversity of moods, though with the con-
junctions there are certain differences to observe, as we shall she^r
hereafter.
V. Of the Imperative,
The imperative, as we have above observed, is often taken for
a third future ; which is undoubtedly owing to an imitation of the
Hebrews, who call it the first future, and the common future they
call the second. And indeed we can command only in regard to
the time to come, as the grammarian AppoUonius observeth, lib.
de Sijnt. cap. 30. Hence it is that the author of the rules by ques-
tions attributed to S. Basil, establishes this as a principle for the
right understanding of the sacred Scripture, as when the Vulgate
says, FiantJUii ejus orphani, Ps. 108. for Jient.
We find also that the future is frequently used for the impera-
tive, not only in the case of divine precepts, No7i occidcs, non Jii-
raberisf &c. but likewise in profane authors, Tu hcec silebis, Cic.
Ciceronem pucrum curabis Sf amabis. Id. for cura 8^ ama. Sed va-
lebis, nieaque negotia videbis, meqiie ante brumam expectabis^ Id. ad
Trebat. for vale ; cura ; expecta : and the like.
Hence also it comes tliat Sanctius laughs at those who distin-
guish betwixt ama and amato, as if one related to the time present,
and the other to the future, and as if they were not often joined
in the same sense and in the same passages :
Aut si es dura, nega : si)i es non dura, venito, Propert.
Et potuni pastas age Tityre, ^ inter agendum
Occtirsare capro (cornuferit illej caveto, Virg.
And in the Georgics, after saying, Nudus am, sere nudus^ he
adds, Primus humumjbdita, &c.
The plural persons in nto, are scarce ever used except in the
enacting of laws, Sunto, cavento, &c. Ad divos adeunto castCy Cic.
3. de Leg.
And those in minor which I have entirely left out, are not per-
haps to be found in any good author.
But if any one should ask how there can be an imperative in
the verb passive, since what comes to us from others does not seem
to depend upon us, so as to be an object of our command ; we
answer that undoubtedly it is because the disposition and cause
thereof is frequently in our power : thus we say, Amator ah hero ;
docetor a prceceptore ; that is, act so as to make your master love
you : suffer yourself to be taught something. And in like manner
the rest.
VI. Of the Infinitive.
The infinitive, as we shall shew hereafter in the chapter of
jmpersonals, n. 1. is properly that which ought to be called
impersonal, because it hath neither number nor person. But
Sanctius, after Consentius, pretends that it is also indefinite in
regard
J 10 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI.
regard to tenses ; and A. Gellius seems to be of the same way of
tliinkiiig, because, said he, as we say volo legcre, we say likewise
volui iegere. For wliich reason Saactius would not even have it to
be made a distinct mood, and we may say that it is not one in fact,
but only virtually and in power, inasmuch as it may be resolved
by all tlie other moods.
This may serve to explain several passages whose construction
seemeth extraordinary, and is therefore referred to an enallage,
which is not at all necessary among the figures, as hereafter we shall
shew. Therefore when we read in Terence, Cras mihi argenlum
dare se dixit : Sanctius saith that dare is not there for dahirum, and"
that it only supposeth for itself, because dare may be a future, be-
ing undetermined and of itself indifferent to all tenses. And it is
the same as when Virgil says :
Progeniem scd enim Trojajio ^ sanguine duci
Audierat, Tyrias olim quce verteret arces.
^Vliere duci denotes a real future, because of itself it is indiffe-
rent to all the tenses. In like manner in Cic. Qui brevi tempore
sibi succedi putarent. Who believed that they %vere to be soon suc-
ceeded : where he means the future. And according to this au-
thor it is thus we ought to explain an infinite number of passages,
where we see the infinitive put sometimes for one tense, sometimes
for another ; as Eo die midta verbafecimus, mnximeque visi sumiis
senatum conunovere, Cic. where commovere signifieth the time past.
Sed ego idem qui in illo sermone nostra, qui est expositus in Bruto, mul-
tum tribuerim Latinis, recordor longe omnibus unum antejerrc De-
onosthenem, Cic. where anteferre is the same as antetuUsse. Hoc
me memini dicere, Cic. that I did say. Ego illam vir-ginem forma
hon& memini me videre, Ter. for 77ie vidisse, I remember to have
seen.
Dictus et Amphion Thebance conditor nrcis
Saxa movere sono testudinis, S^ prece blandd
Ducere quo vellet Hor. movere for movisse.
Ccelera spero prolixa esse, Cic. where esse signifies the future.
Again, Spe7-o amicitiam nostram non egere iestibus, Id. I hope our
friendship will not have occasion for witnesses. Nee ille intermisit
affirmare sine mora venire, Id. Magna me spes tenet, judices, bene mihi
evenirc, quod miliar ad mortem, Id. And the like. For though
we do not deny but in joining different verbs together, there may
be an assemblage and comparison of different tenses, and of one
action in regard to another ; yet it seems to be often the case that
this distinction of tenses is not sufficiently clear, and that the two
verbs mark but one precisely, to which of course we ought to
attribute the action expressed by the infinitive. At least this is
Sanctius's opinion, which seems to be authorised by the preceding
examples, and those which we shall further add. For
Thereby we see likewise what error it is to believe with Agroe-
cius and L. Valla, that we cannot join memini with the preterite
of the infinitive, and that we ought to say, memini me facere, and
notfocisse, for this reason, they say, that as memini sufficiently in-
cludeth the sigoification of the preterite, it is superfluous to join
•I another
Remarks on the Tenses and Moods. Ill
another preterite to it ; because fecisse supposeth all the tenses, as
well as facere ; and we find that Cicero and others have frequently-
used the like expressions. Meministi me ita distribrnsse causam,
Cic. Tihi me pertnisisse memini. Id. Memini me non sumpsisse
quem accusarem, sed recepisse quern defenderem, 3. in Verr. Memini
summos Juisse in nostra civitate viros, 1. de leg. and an infinite
number of others.
But this does not happen only to memini i it seems on several
other occasions that this tense in isse is put indeterminately for all
the rest. As when Virgil says :
Magnum si pectore possit
Exciississe Deum. Where Servius observeth that it stands
for excutere. And Horace :
Fratresque tendentes opaco
Pelion imposuisse Olympo.
And Val. Max. Sed abiinde erit ex iis duo exempla retulisse. It will
be sufficient to give two examples thereof; which imports the
future. And Seneca, Intra coloniam meam me continui, alioquin
potuissem cum audisse in illo atriolo, in quo duos grandes pra^textatos
ait secum declamare solitos. In Praef. Controv. and Gellius, Vel>
u)tus, hercle, hie versus, Plauti esse hanc Jabidam, satis potest Jidei
Jecisse. And in another place, Caleni, ubi id audiverwit, edixerimt^
7ie quis in balneis lavisse vellet, cum magistratus Romanus ibi esset.
And the like.
However, this is no reason why in common use we should not
rather make use of amare, for example, for the present, and ama-
visse for the preterite, as we have given it in the rudiments.
Vossius pretends further that amare will not stand for the imper-
fect, as hath been the general opinion of grammarians, because,
according to him, when 1 say, for instanccj Gaudeo quod anias, it
may be explained by gaudeo te amare : whereas when I say, gaudeo
quod jam turn amabas, it is not explained by te jam turn amare, but
amavisse : and therefore the latter expresseth the three differences
of the preterite. But Vossius's principle is false, and the example
he produces, does not prove that the thing is general. For when
Cicero in his letter to Varro, said, for instance, Vidi enim (nam tu
aberasj nostras inimicns cupere bellumy Szc. it is obvious that cupere
is there an imperfect, and that it should be resolved by quod turn
cupiebant, since it denotes the same difference of time as aberas
which he has expressed. In like manner in Virgil,
Sape ego longos
Cantando puerum memiiii me condere soles.
If we should want to resolve it, we must say ; memini quod ciim
puer eram, condebam longos soles cantando. And therefore, quod
amabas, may be explained by te amare, as in the examples taken
from Cicero and Virgil ; or by ie amavisse, as in that of Vossius.
Which shews still further that all the tenses of the infinitive are
frequently very indeterminate.
VII. 0/FORE.
Grammarians say very right that the infinitive hath no future ;
but they e^tcept sum, whicU they think hs^s Jbre.
' Yet
Ili3 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI.
Yet sum, properly speaking, has no more future than the rest.
Tor fore does not come from sum, but from /«y, which in the in-
finitive made /6?e or fare by syncope for fuere : so that it may be
taken indifferently for all tenses, as well as esse, amare, les;ere, and
the other infinitives, as we have been just now mentioning. Com"
missum cum eqnitntu prcsimm fore videbat, Caes. Ex qua conjicitur
ut certns aniiiio res tciicat auditor, quibus dictis perorntiim fore intel-
ligat, Cic. Quanto robare animi is semper extitit, qui vitam sibi inte-
grani fore difficile dictu est. Id.
Hence we find with how little foundation Valla said, that /ore
could not be joined with another future, vi?, fore venturum, Jhcic/i-
dumi fore, &c. since /ore is no more a real future than esse. And
indeed we very often meet with the contrary in authors. Deindc
addis, si quid seciis, te ad me fore venturum, Cic. Deorum immorta-
liicm causa libcnter fact aros fore, Liv. Nihil horum vos visurosfore,
Cic. Lepide dissimidat /ore hoc futurum, Plaut. and in the passive,
Credite universam vim juventntis, hodierno Catilina' supplicio conji-
ciendam fore, Cic. Ant sub pelt ibus hnbendos miliies Jore, Liv.
We have already given instances of the preterite above; and
therefore /ore may be joined to all tenses.
But we are carefully to observC; that this verb always includes
.something of the future, the same as /^t'xxw in Greek, so that as
they have not a sufficient number of tenses for the infinitive in
Latin, they frequently make use of this verb to mark the future,
when they are obliged to distinguish different tenses ; as Scripsit ad
me Ccesar perhumaidter, nondinn te sibi satis esse familiar em, sed certe
fore, Cic. Sequitur iltud, vt te exidimare velim, mihi magnce curtc
fore, atque esse jam. And therefore I did not think proper to strike
it out of the rudiments designed for children, being willing to
conform as much as possible to the established custom.
VIII. Manner of expressing the Future of the Infinit'vce
in the oilier Verbs.
The participles in rus serve likewise to express the future of the
infinitive, whether they be joined with esse or \v\t\\ fuisse, as Ama-
iurum esse, to be about to love ; Amaturum fuisse, to have been
about to love. But the latter tense seems to partake of the prete-
rite and future both together. And the same is done in regard to
the passive, Amandum esse, or amandum fuisse.
These futures are declined, and agree like adjectives with their
substantive ; Verc mihi lioc videor esse diclurus, Cic. Ut pcrspicuum sif
omnibus nunquam Lampsacenos in eiim locum progressurosjuisse, Cic.
But anciently they were not declined, as may be seen in A,
Gellius, lib. 1. c. 7. For they said, for instance, Credo inimicos
meos hoc dicturum, C. Gracch. Hanc sibi rem prccsidio sperant
futurum, Cic. act. 5. in Verrem : according to the reading which
A. Gellius maintaineth by the authority of Tiro, Cicero's freed-
man. lloslium copias ibi occupatas futurum, Quadrig. Est quod
speremus deos bonis bene fact ur am. Id. Si res divi/ice riiefnctcv esstnt,
omnia ex sentQiUia processi^i'um, Valerius Antias. Illi polliciti sese
facturum
Remarks on the Future, 113
Jiictnnim omnia, Cato. Ad sum-mam perniciem rempuMicam perven-
iurum esse., Silla. Non putavi hoc eamjactiirum, Laber.
Etiamne habet Casina gladium i habet, sed duos,
Quibus, altera te occisuriim ait, altera villicinn, Plaut.
And such like passages, which those Qui vialant bonas libros,
says A. Gelhus, would fain correct, while others, superficially ac-
quainted with the grounds of the Latin tongue, have attributed to
the figure of syllepsis, but without any i-eason. For it is owing
only to the antiquity of the language, which considered these
words, not as nouns, but as verbs, and as tenses of the infinitive,
which has neither gender nor number ; and this they did in imi-
tation of the Greeks, with Avhom the infinitive hath all the dif-
ferent tenses, and the future among the rest, nroi'na-eiv, sma-Gxi, &c.
And we must not mind whether this hath the termination of a
noun or any other, since it depends intirely upon use. So that we
must resolve Juturum like^re, and dicturtim like dicere ; Credo ifii-
viicos meos hoc dicere, I believe that my enemies do say this ; Credo
eos hoc dicturum, I believe they will say this. Hanc sibi rem sperant
prcesidiojuturum, as if it were, sperant prcesidiofore, &c.
IX. Another manner of supplying the Future of the In-
Jinitwe, especially when the Verbs have no Supine.
But if the verb hath no supine from whence a participle can be
formed, we may with great elegance make use oi Jore, or of the
■^zxtidi^XeJidurum, by adding nt to it ; which happens particularly
after the verbs spero, jmto, suspicor, dico, offirmo, and such like.
Sperojbre ut caniingat id nobis, Cic.
But when io futurum we join the preterite /wiwe, this is likewise
one of those phrases which partake of the time past and the fu-
ture, and contribute not a little to embellish the sentence. Vi-
demtir enim quietijiiisse nisi essemus lacessiti, Cic.
And both these turns of expression are so elegant, that they are
frequently used in verbs, even when the other future might be
formed by the participle. Nisieo ipso tempore guidam nuncii de Cce-
saris victoria essent ailati, existimabant jileriqueJ'HhirwnJ'Hisse ut op-
pidnm caperetur^ Caes. instead of existimabant oppidum capiendum
Jore. Valde suspicor fore ut infringatur hominum improbitas, Cic.
X. That the Injinitive hath frequently the force of a
Noun Substantive.
The infinitive by the ancients was called nomen verbi ; and
whensoever it drops the affirmation peculiar to the verb, it be-
comes a noun, as we have observed in the General and Rational
Grammar. This noun being indeclinable, is always of the neuter
gender, but it stands for different cases.
For the nominative. Vivere ipsum, turpe est nobis, Cic.
Nam ambos curare, propemodum
Reposcere ilium est quern dedisti, Ter.
That is, TO curare est rejjoscere.
For the vocative. O vivere nostrum !
' Vol. II. I For
1 14 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI.
For the genitive. Tempus est nobis de ilia vita agere, for agendi
Tempusjam abhinc abire ; Cic. Consiliuvi capit omnem a se equitatum
dimiitere, or dimittendi, or di7)iissionis.
For the dative. /Etas mollis c*!j- apta regi, for apta regimini, or
rectioni, taken passively.
For the accusative. Scripsit se ciiperc, for suam cupiditatem. Da
mild bibere, for da potum. Habco diccre, for dicendum. Amat lu-
dere, for liidum.
For the ahhitive. Digitus amari, jnmiri, for amove, j}ce)ia.
The infmitive is moreover frequently governed by a preposition
understood, which may be resolved even by the conjunction quod
or quia, as
Gratidor ingenium non Icdidsse tnum, Ovid.
Instead of 06 non latuisse, that is, qida non latuerit. And in like
manner in Terence.
Qiii>d plerique omnesjvciunt adolescentidi,
Ut animum ad aliqiiod studiuvi adjungant, aut equos
Alere, aut canes ad venandiim, aut ad ])/dlosophos.
That is, ad alere ; just as he says, ad aliquod studium, aut ad philo»
sophos. And Cic. Si equites deducios molcslejeret, accipiam equidem
dulorem, mihi ilium irasci : sed multo mnjorcm, non esse talem qualem
putassem ; that is, Ob ilium irasci, ob non esse talem.
But this happeneth particularly when the infinitive is joined to
an adjective after the manner of the Greeks, which is a common
thing in Horace ; either in the active or passive ; Durus componere
versus, for ad componendum. Celer irasci, for ad irascendum. In*
docilis pauperiem pati, for ad patiendum, and the like : though the
infinitive happening also to come after some adjectives, supplieth
the place of another government. See the annotation to rule 18«
p. 34.
It is likewise to this government of the preposition that we
must refer the infinitive, when it happens to come after verbs of
motion, as in the Vulgate ; Non veid solvere legem, sed adimplere ;
that is, 710)1 ad solvere, or ad sohdionem, &c. And though some
have pretended to find fault with this scriptural expression, yet
it is very common in Latin authors. As
It visere earn, Ter.
Non ego tejrangcre persequar, Hor.
Non nos autjerro Libycos popidare penates
Venimus, aut raptas ad littora vertere prcedas, Virg.
But they who have condemned these expressions did not know
perhaps that even when the supine is put, as eo visum, the force of
the government is in the preposition, eo ad visum, as we shall shew
iiereafter ; and therefore that it is the same as ad vidcre ; videre
and vixum, being then only nouns substantives, and synonymous
terms. This shews what it is rightly to understand the real foua-
dation and principles of construction and government.
Remarks on the Iuuegular Verbs. 115
Chapter III.
Of Irregular Verbs.
WE have already touched upon this subject in the Rudiments;
but here we intend to treat of it more at large, and to shew
from whence this irregularit}' arises, and wherein it consists, by
which means we shall find that it is not so great as people imagine.
I. Of SUM and its Compounds.
The ancients, says Varro, 8. de L. L. used to conjugate Esunif
€S, est; esicmus, cstis, esunl, in the same manner as eram, as, at ;
ero, is, it, &c. Hence it is that Cicero in his third book of laws
hath put esunto for sunto. Ast quando diiellum gravius, discordicB
civium, esT.nto ne ampliiis sex menses, si senalus creverit. For thus
Vossius insists upon reading this passage, which has puzzled such a
number of learned men.
For according to him, esum comes from the Greek future tVo-
jxai, from whence, rejecting the diphthong, they formed at first
esom, then esum, and at length sum. But Julius Scaliger and Ca-
ninius derive it from hyi't. Which will not appear so extraordinary
to those who have attended to the changing of letters, of which
we intend to subjoin a particular treatise ; though some have at-
tempted to ridicule the opinion of those two learned men on this
subject. For it is easy to shew that I final is sometimes lost, as
from /xt'Xf, is formed mel. 2. That the diphthong n frequently
loseth its subjunctive, as A(V£/a?, ^neas. 3. That the s is some-
times added not only for the rough breathing, as sttw, sequor ;
-n/Aiav, semi ; but likewise for the smooth, as h, si; e'/^w, se^-o ; IfvM^
servo. 4. That the e is oftentimes changed into u, as Bpeviria-iotf
Bnmdusiinn, from whence we may conclude, that of hi/.) they formed
at first £;/A, afterwards J/x, o-t/x, and at length sum. Neither can it
be said that this conjecture is ill founded, since we give authority
for the change of these several letters ; and since this analogy oc-
curreth also in the other persons. For es comes from tls, in the
second person, which we meet with above fifteen times in Homer,
as est Cometh from iW, and sunt from hr), according to the Dorians,
for IktL
Be that as it will, it may be likewise formed of t3-efj.xi, since it
is not at all extraordinary to see the futures form other verbs of
themselves, as from ayu-, fut. «|<y. is formed u^u, I do, from whence
Cometh «|«, oc^sTui, /(ic. From o't'u, fut. cia-u, is also formed o/Vw,
J^ero, whence also comes the imperfect ola-ov, the imperative ofa-e, <S:c,
For there is no more absurdity to see the present formed of this
Greek future, than the imperfect eram, which is manifestly de-
rived from thence as well as the future ero, by changing S into R,
which is very common, as hereafter we shall shew.
But heretofore it was usual for them to say likewise escit for erif,
from whence cojneth c&cimt, in a passage of the twelve tables
1 2 quoted
11(> Section III. Chap. III. Book VI.
quoted by Cicero in his second book of laws. Quoi auko
DENTES viNCTi ESCUNT. And in Gcllius, who quotes it from
the same place; Si morkus /icvitasve vitium escit, lib. 20.
cap. 1. as Vossius and H. Stephen read it, though others read esit.
But escit occurrcth also in Lucrct. lib. 1.
Ergo rerum inter sunwiam, miuimamquef quid escit.
Where the verse would be faulty were we to read esit, which has
the first short, as well as erit.
The preteritey?« and the participle y«i<?«M5, come from the old
verb fno, taken from the Greek (pLu. Even Virgil himself has
made use of it, Tros Rutulusvefuat, Sec. From thence also cometh
forem for essem, formed o(fuerem or furem, as likewiseyorefor/wre,
oryTcere, as we have already observed, chap. 2. num. 7.-
The subjunctive, Sim, is, it, is a syncope for Siem, esy et, which
followed the analogy of the other subjunctives in em, as Amevi, es^
et. Which Cicero confirmeth in his book de Oratore, Siet, says
he, plenum est : sit, imminutum. And this old subjunctive is also
very common in Terence, and in the other comic writers.
This verb hath neither gerund nor supine. The participle pre-
sent ought to be ens, which we find in some manuscript copies of
Appuleius, and which Cassar had inserted in his books of Analogy,
according to Priscian. But now it is hardly ever used except by
philosophers, though from thence are formed Absens, prccsens, -po-
iens, which are rather nouns adjectives than participles, because
in their signification they express no time.
These nouns come from Adsum, pr<Tsum, possum, which are con-
jugated like their simple, as are all the other compounds. But
Prosum takes a D, when it follows a vowel, for the conveniency
of the sound. Prodes,prodest, &c.
And Possum, coming from /joiw or ^;o/e, and from sum, as ap-
peareth in Plautus.
Animadvertitc, si potis sum hoc inter vos compnnere, m Curcul.
Tute homo, &; aileri sapienter potis es considerc S; tibi, in Milite.
Jt retaineth the T wherever it followeth a vowel : and to soften the
sound it changeth this T into S, when another S followeth. For
the ancients used to say, potessem, potesse, where wc say, possem, posse.
But potis as well as pote, occur in all genders. Ergone sine Dei vo-
luntate quicquam potis est fieri ? Arnob. Sed quantum fieri potest ^ Id.
Old fieri potis est id? Id. In regard to which the reader may see
what we have already observed, chap. tth. no. 1 .
Poteslur, occurreth in Plautus, Lucretius, Pacuvius, Ennius, and
others. But there is no ground for attributing it to Virgil lEn. 8.
where we ought to read
Liquidove potest electro.
and not potestur, because the first syllable is long in electro, ^ as it
comes from n; which is confirmed by Vossius and Politianus,
from the authority of excellent MSS. as may be seen in Vossius,
book 3. of Analogy, chap. 36.
II. Of Edo, Queo, atid Fio.
What hath been said in the lludiments, is almost sufficient for
the
RfiMAilKS ON THE IrREGULAR VeRBS. J If
the other irregulars. I shall only add a word or two in regard to
some of them.
Edo formeth in the infinitive esse or edere. The former is in
Cicero, Claudius vicryl pullos in aquam jussit, ut biberent, quia esse
noUent. 2. de Nat. Quid attinuit rdinquere hnnc urbem, quasi bona
comesse Romce non liceret ? Orat. pro Flacco.
0£ est is formed esttir, just as of potest, potestur. And this word
we find not only in Plautus, but also in Ovid.
Estur, tit occultci vitiata teredine navis,
jEquoreos scopulos ut cavat unda salis, 1. de Ponto El. 1.
Edim, was heretofore said for edam, whicli Nonius proves from se-
veral passages. Just as we find also duint for dent, and perduint
for perdaiit, in comic writers.
Hence Horace says in his 3 Epode.
Edit cicutis allium nocentius.
And Plautus in Aulul.
Quid tu, multicm curas^
Utrum crudmn, an coctum edim, nisi tu mild es tutor ?
QuEO, follows the fourth conjugation. Si non Quibo impetrare,
Plaut. Licere ut Quiret cofivenire amanlibus, Id. Trahere, exhau-
rire me, quod Quireivi ab se domo, Id.
^ It occurreth also in the passive, as quitus and queuntur, in At- ,
tius; queatur, in Lucr. Quitus is in Appul. And in Ter.
Forma in tencbris nosci non quita est, in Hecyr.
We likewise make use ofnequeor. Nequeor comprehendi ; cognosci,
&c. as Festus proveth. Ut nequitur comprimi ! Plaut. Reddi ne-
quitur, Appul.
Fio, heretofore madej??, in the preterite, according to Priscian.
And in the imperative it made^ and j?^<?, Plaut. in Curcul.
PH. Sequere hac, PaUnure, me ad fores, ji mi obsequens.
PA. Ita Jaciam. PH. Agile, bibite, festivce fores, potate, fie
mihi volentes propria.
The former is also in Horace, hb. 2. Sat. 5. where we must read,
according to Vossius, Fi cognitor ipse, though others read,
sis cognitor. And this perfectly sheweth, what we have already
observed when speaking of the preterites, that fo is a substantive
verb, as well as Sum.
The infinitive was ^n, just as from audio cometh audiri : but
because the ancients marked the i long by ei,feiri, or feirei, they
have transposed it to feri ; in like manner ferem for feirem^ or
frem, as audirem, &c.
III. OJ'Fevo, (md Eo, mih their Compounds.
Fero, is irregular only as it drops the vowel after the R in some
particular tenses, as in the presenter.?, /^r^, instead of feris, ferity
&c. which Priscian believes to have been designed to distinguish it
froraferio,feris,ferit.
In the imperative it hath also^r instead of fere. In the sub-
^nnciivQ ferrem, for fererem, &c. In the other tenses it is regular :
the imperfect, ferebanif as, like legebam ; fut. feram, es, like legam,
Jcges, 8ic.
It
118 Section III. Chap. IV. Book VI.
It borrows its preterite of tollo, or tolo, letuU ; (a<ifnllo, fefelli,)
from whence is formed tuli. IJat tollo seems to come from the old
verb ri\bj,ferOy or nXxu, from whence also cometli the supine /afMJH
for fclatum, unless we cim-e simply to say, th it tolo made telii/i, to-
latum, or tidatnm, i'rom whence afterwards hath been formed latum.
Vossius.
Eo, ought to make eu, ctt, &c. and in the infinitive, etre. But
first of all they contracted it into els, ett, then diopping the prepo-
sitive e, they made it is, it ; the t long and the diphthong ei iiaving
been generally put one for the other, as we. have often observed.
Its compounds have most commonly ibo in the future like it-
self; transibi), prcEtcribo ; but some of them have it in iam (like
audiam) transiam, prcEtcriam : iiiiefur ratio, Cic. &c.
Of those compounds i-ome have their passive, though the simple
verb hath none, except it be in the third person plural. For we
find adeor, aiubior, incor, ubeur, subeor, &c. And in like manner,
Itur ad me, Ter.
Ambio, is regularly conjugated like audio, but we sometimes
meet also with ambibam, in Livy and elsewhere, just as heretofore
they said audibam for audiebam, as wo have elsewhere observed.
Circiime'), sometimes drops the wi ; so that we say, circumis or
circuis, ciicumire or ciratire, &c.
IV. Oj Volo, and its Compounds.
' Volo ought to make volis, volit, &c. like lego, legis, it, but
first of all they have syncopated it into vis, volt, voltis, &c. (which
we still find in ancient writers) and afterwards into vult and
vultis, by changing o into u, which is very common.
Its subjunctive takes an E in the first syllable velim, instead of
volim, as well as the infinitive velle ; which they retain throughout
all their tenses, except such as are formed of the preterite, which
retain the u of the indicative, vohii, voluisscm, voluisse, &c.
Nolo, comes from 7ie for non, and from volo : hence we still meet
with 7ievis, ncvuU, for vouvis, vonvult. The imperative noli, we
find in Cicero ; and nolito in Lucilius.
Malo comes from niagis, and volo ; hence they used heretofore
to say mavclim and mavellem, of which hath been formed malim
and mallem.
Chatteu IV.
Of Defective Verbs.
WE have likewise made mention of these verbs in the Rudi-
ments, where we gave only those tenses which are most
generally received. But as they occur likewise in other tenses
besides those usually marked by grammarians, I have determined
here to enter into a more particular account of them, by reason
that divers passages have been corrupted, lor want of observing
what tenses of these verbs were current among the best writers.
1. Of
t
Remarks on the Defective Verbs. \]g
I. Of Odi, Mem in I, ajid ot Iters which are thought to
have only the Pixterite, ami the tenses depending thereon.
Odi. Heretofore odio was also used ; hence we find in Appul.
Orationis varice species sunt ; imperandi, narrandi, niunendi, irasceiidi,
odiendi. And in Petronius, according to Vossius and others, we
should read odieiites, wliere the usual reading is audicntcs, which is
nonsense. Tlie ancient interpreter useth tliis verb very frequently,
both in the Old and in the New Testament, as odkt, odient, od/vi,
odivit, odife, odienles, &c. In the Vulgate, Prov. c. 1. we find
Usquequo imprudentes odibunt scientiam f
The passive occurreth also in some authors, as odittir, in Tertull.
odiaris, in Seneca, as hath been observed by Grutcrus, H. Stephen,
and Vossius. Necesse est ant imiteris, aid odiaris.
The preterite was odi and osus, just as soleo made soVui, and solitus
su7n.
Inimicos semper osa sum obtuerier. Plant.
Hunc non probabat^ osusque etun jnorum causa Juit^ Gell.
Whence we have still remaining the compounds exosns, perosus.
CcEPi, as we have observed in the Preterites, vol. 1. p. 210.
comes from the old verb ccepio.
Neque ego insanio, neque pugnas, nequ^ lites ccepio, Plaut.
From thence Cometh ccepiam, in the same author, and in Cato,
according to Festus. Cceperet is in Terence.
Nonne sex totis mensibus
Prills olfecissem quani ille quicqiiam cceperet ?
Vossius insists that it makes Cceptus also in the preterite. But
CcEPTUS is passive, as may be seen in TuUy, Celeriter ad tnajores
caitsas adhiberi cceptus est, de Clar. Orat. Minor haberi est cceptus
postea, Ibid. And there can be no manner of doubt of this, for
otherwise, as we say, hoc ccepisti, we might also say, hoc cceptus es,
i/otc have begun this, which every bod}' knows to be wrong.
Mem INI comes from metio, as ccepi from ccepio. And this pre-
terite is formed by reduplication, as Jefelli i'romjcdlo, pcjngi from
pago, &c.
From this meno cometh also mcntio, formed of the supine mentumf
which the ancients made use of instead of commentum, according
to Festus.
Thence also came meniscor, from whence we have still remaining
comminisco and reminiscor. And Vossius from thence also deriveth
moneo, changing the o into e, as in bonus instead of benus : forceps
instead oiforriceps, and others of which we shall take notice in the
Treatise of Letters.
Now meno properly signifieth to have something in one's mind,
from the Greek /lAf'i/oy : but Vossius thinks that they likewise said
memino, whence comes memiitens in Priscian, Donatus, Plautus,
Ausonius, and frequently in Sidonius Apollinaris.
Hereto we may add novi, which cometh from Nosco, and is
thought to have the signification of the present for no other reason
than as we often make use of the present in narrations, it is gene-
rally rendered in the eignification of this teA$e>
II. Of
ISO Section III. Chap. IV. Book VI.
II. Of Faki, and other Defectite Verbs of the same
signijicat'wn.
Hereto we may add four or five defective verbs of the same
signification, /(7W, inqudm, oio, in/if, redo.
Foil is scarcely used, saith Diomedes, thouf^h we meet with
effor; but we say /ai-is emdjatur, in the same manner as daris and
datiir, though there is no such word as (/or, and yet addor and red"
dor arc in use.
Fans occurretli in Plautus :
Cunt intemn in meum ingenium fans non didicisti atqne infans.
Inquio is obsolete, according to Diomedes and other ancients.
But Priscian pretends it is used, tliough the passage he produces
out of Cicero is corrupted. Aucupari verba oportebit, inquio, 2.
de Orat. where according to Lambinus, Vossius, and others, we
should read in quo.
It may be defended by the following passage of Catul. Epig.
10. as Muretus reads it :
■ Volo ad Serapin
Ferri mane : mane inquio puellec.
Inquam seems to be only a prcterimperfect for inquieham :
Inquimus is in Horace ;
Communi sensu plane carets inquimus, lib. 1. Sat. 3.
Jnquitis is in Arnobius. Inqniebant and inquisti occur frequently
in Cic. as likewise inqnies and inquiet. Inque is in Plautus and Te-
rence ; inqiiito, in Plautus.
The tenses belonging to Aio maybe seen in the Rudiments.
The imperative, of which some have doubted, as Diomedes ob-
serveth, is proved by Nevius, vel a'i, vel nega.
Aibant is in Attius for aicbant, just as we say in the second per-
son ais for n'iis.
Priscian says it hath not the first person of the preterite, and
him we have followed in the 69th rule, vol. i. p, 291. Yet Probus
gives us ai, aisti, ait, Sec. Tcrtullian makes use of the plural.
Atqne ita omnes aicrunt,jiet voluntas domini, lib. de Fuga. Aiat is
in Cic. Quasi ego curem, quid ille aiat aut neget, 2. do Fin. A«d the
participle aiens : Negnvtia aientibus contraria, in Top.
Infix cometh from injio, which Varro made use of, accord-
ing to Priscian. And therefore as from capit is formed incipit, in
like manner from Jit is derived injit, which signifieth the same
as incipit. We say likewise dcfit, from whence comes dejiety dejiat^
defieri.
Lifit is usually rendered by he saith, like ait. But as we have
just now shewn, and as Festus also explains this word, it signifies
the same as incipit.
Homo ad pra^torem plo7-abundus devenit,
InJlt ihi postulare, plorans, ejulans, Plaut.
llafarier injit, Virg.
But this mistake was doubtless occasioned by the infinitive of the
other verb being frequently understood ; Ihi injit, annum se tertium
Sf nona~
Remarks on the Defective Veres, 121
if nonagesiynum ngere, sup. logui or fan. Which i.s further con-
firmed by the gUjssaries of Philoxenus, iitjit, oi^v^i i^Lyuv.
Cedo properly signifietli no more than to give way or to per-
mit. But it often liappencth that by process of time words are
diverted into a dilF_-rent sense from their original meaning, as
Agricola in his notes on Seneca hath learnedly observed. This
appears further in prcesto, in amabo, in Liceo, vapulo, and vencu, of
which we took notice when speaking of the Preterites, vol. 1. p.
305. and in others. For as when a person was called, he answered
prasfo, or sto prcr, here I am ; so when they intended to signify that
a thing was at hand and quite ready, they said prccstu est, taking this
word as an advfrb. Again, because when a person offered to do
a thing, or asked leave of another, the answer was always, cedo,
that is, I give jjou leave, I jjennit j/ou, either to do, to say, or to
give, &c. therefore they begin likewise to say, Cedo manum, give
me the hand ; Cedo cantcrium, lend me your horse, or barely cedo,
give me, fell me.
Of cedo they have formed by syncope cette for cedite.
Cette manus vestras, measque accipite : Enn. apud Non.
III. 0/ Faxo, Ausim, Forem, and Q,\]jfL.?,o.
We must also mention a word or two in regard to these four
other defective verbs.
Faxo seemeth to come from facio. For as the Greeks said clyu^
a|w : t/x?w, or tLku, ri^co : so the Latins s,Q.idJacio, facto, Jaxu. Ago,
acto,axo. From whence comes udaxint, in Plautus; and axitiosi,
that kfactiosi, according to Festus, several met together in order
to perform or undertake a thing.
They used also to say jacio, jacto, from whence came jctjo .• and
iyijicio, injccto, from whence was formed injexo.
Ubi qundruplator qicempiam vtjexit manum,
Taididem ille iiH rursus injiciat manum. Plant.
Others nevertheless are of opinion that faxo, axo, injexo, &c. are
tenses of the future perfect, that is of the subjunctive, i'ov fccero,
egero, injecero. And this verb w^e find also in Virgil,
Ego feeder a Jaxo Firma manu, lEn. 12.
Faxim in like manner seems to have been used for facerim (for
the preterites heretofore retained the vowel of the present tense)
or fecerim. And indeed, the sense agrees therewith : tibi lubens
hene faxim, Ter. ; so of egerim they made assim, or axim, which is
in Attius. And in Plautus we find
Utinam me Divi adaxint ad suspendium, In Aulul.
Faximus occurreth also in Plautus, as Vikewise faxem iox fecissem.
^nt faxint \s frequently met with in Cic. Dii faxint : and the
like. And faxit is iu his 2. book of laws, qui servusfaxit, &c.
Now as we say faxim for fecerim, so we say Ausim for aitserim,^
that is, aiisusfuerim.
De grege non ausim quicquam deponere tecum, Virg.
I dare not wager any part of the flock.
Ausim. vel ienui vitem committere nulco, Id.
FOBEM
/
1522 • Section III. Chap. V. Book VI.
FoiiEM is only a syncope for yiicre???, and fure for J' uerc, from
the old verb Jiio, as hath been also observed, p. 116.
Qu/E.so, according to Vossius, is only an ancient word for
qiucro, just as tlicy used to say asa for ara, the s being frequently
put for r, as we shall shew in the Treatise of Letters. Hence it is
thatEnnius saith, quccsentibits, quccsendnm, for queer eniibus, qnceren-
dum. And indeed, to ask or to beg a thing, is properly to look Jar
it, both being expressive of desire : so tl)at the preterite qucesivi
properly cometh froVn this old verb, pursuant to the analogy
above observed, p. 11 G.
Ch APT Ell V.
Of Verbs called Impersonal, and of their nature.
VERBS impersonal are ranked in the number of defectives
by Phocas, Donatus, and Sergius, which obliges us to say
something of them on this occasion. We shall therefore examine
two points, 1. What is meant by a verb impersonal. 2. Whether
these verbs have not more tenses than they arc allowed by gram-
marians.
I. JVhat is meant by a Verb Impersonal, and that in
reality there is no other but the Injinitive.
Julius Scaliger, and Sanctius, allowed of no other impersonals
but the infinitive, and Consentius Romanus was long before of
the same opinion. Their reason is because in all verbs whatsoever
the infinitive is always without number and person ; whereas the
other verbs called impersonals, are not without persons, having at
least the third always, and frequently being susceptible of others.
This opinion is founded on reason itself, by which we are de-
barred from pronouncing any sentence, or forming any kind of
speech that is not compounded of a noun and a verb.
The better to understand this, and to show more distinctly the
nature of those verbs called impersonals, we are to remember what
hath been said above, chap. 1. That there are three sorts of verbs
adjectives, namely actives or transitives ; neuters, or intransitives ;
and passives.
Therefore if these verbs are transitives, and signify an action
which passeth into a subject, they have generally their nominative
taken from without themselves, which nominative formeth this
action : as hoc me juvat, this pleaseth me ; illud te decet, that be-
conieth thee.
If they are absolute and intransitives, then their nominative must
be either included within themselves ; for lihet mihi hoc facer e, licet
iibi tacere, oportet ilhtd agere, is the same as if you were to say,
libido est mihi hocfncere, licentia or Ucitum est tibi tacere, opus est
illud agere : or the infinitive which follows this verb, will be, as it
were, its nominative ; so that licet tibi tacere, is the same as, to
tacere licet tibiy or est res licita tibi : libet mihi hocjacere, that is,
TO
Remarks on the Impersonal Verbs. 123
rofacere hanc rem libet mihi, that is, the doing of this action pleaseth
me: oportct illud a(rere, that is, the doing of this action is ne-
cessary. Nor docs it signify at all, though we sometimes are in
want of Latin nouns to resolve these phrases, for the thing is
ahvays in the sense, and subsists of itself.
liut if these verbs are passives, as statur, curritur, concurritur, sic
vivitur, regnatunt est, amatuin est ; they ought then to l)e resolved
by tlie verb substantive, est or Jit, and the verbal noun derived
from themselves : Jit stntio, cursus or concur aus Jit, sic vita est, or sic
vita fit. regiium fuit, amorjuit, &c.
Hereby «'e see, properly speaking, that these verbs are no
more impersonals than the otiiers, but only defectives, and de-
prived (at least generally speaking) of the two first persons.
Tiierefore what we ought most to observe in this sort of verbs,
is that when I say amo, I include an intire proposition in a single
word, making the verb comprize the subject, the affirmation, and
the attribute, so that this word amo is equivalent to ego mm amajis :
just as when we say, piidet, oportet, itur, statur, &c. we include in
those words an intire proposition, the verb containing in itself
the subject, the affirmation, and the attribute, which ought to be
resolved, as we have shown above. Concerning which the reader
may likewise see what has been said in the General Grammar,
c. 18.
Thus we see that what even in French we call impersonal, is
not such. For when we say, on court, on warche, on parte, &c. ;
this on, as Mons. de Vaugelas judiciously observeth in his Remarks
on the French Tongue, comes from the word homtne : which ap-
peareth from the Italian poets, who say huom teme, for hwnno, peo-
ple fear ; and from the Germans and other northern nations, who
render the French particle on by the word man, whicli in their
language signifies the same as Jionime. And even from the Greek
language, which frequently useth rU in the same sense ; as tSto In
rts a.'noy.^'nxir^ olti vl, y.a.\a. yt iWorus. We might make this answer
veryjustLy. So that it is the same thing to say in French, on dit
or 'I'on dit, as homme dit, or Vhomme dit, by an indefinite terra,
which may indifferently agree with either.
And we may further remark in regard to those expressions, that
the Latin is passive, dicitur, where we must understand hoc or itlud;
and the French active, I'on dit, which implies I' homme dit. The
reason hereof, and which few have ever observed, is because as
the Latin always affects to use passive expressions, the French
tongue on the contrary chuseth to render them by active ones.
Now these passive impersonals are not always taken in a general
and indeterminate signification, as Diomedes imagined (which is
pecuhar only to the infinitive), since Cicero saith : Nunciatum est
nobis a Varrone eum Roma venisse, Varro has told us, &c. And
Seneca, Insanitiir a patre. And others in the same manner.
But we must observe, that though these verbs be deprived of
some persons, this is not so much owing to the verb, as to the de-
fect in the thing, which may be applied to it, according as Scaliger
hath remarked. Hence if we more frequently say decet, pudet, &c.
it
124 Section III. Chap. V. Book VI.
it is because the things joined in this sense are always put in the
third person ; which does not however hinder Statius from saying.
Si non dedecid tua jussa. And Plautus, Jta 7iunc piideo, atque ita
paveo. vVnd Ennius, Miserete met anuis. And Plautus again, Ado-
iescens loquere nisi piges, &c. Which was heretofore more frequent
than at present : for it seemeth that they said also pceniteo, instead
oi pcenitet me, since we find in Justin, Primi pcenitere cceperunt, in-
stead of prinios pcenitere ccepit : and in Apuleius, Q,uum ccej^eiis serb
pcenitere, instead of cum cceperit te sero pcenitere.
II. Tliat the Verbs called Impersonah are not deprived
of all the Persons zve imagine, even in the most ele-
gant languages.
The first mistake on this head is of those who fancy these verbs
have not the third person plural, whereas it is otherwise, Parvum
parva decent, Hor. Qucv adsolent, quccgue oportC7tt signa,Ter. Non
te hcec piident ? Id. Quam se aliena deccant, Cic. Hcec facta ah
illo oportebant, Ter. Semper metuet gitem sava pudebunt, Luc.
The same we observe in the passives. Quo in genere multa pec-
cantur, Cic. Nodes vigihmtur amarce, Ovid. In cceteris gcntibus
mice regnantur, Tacit. Sacris piscibus hce nalantur undce, Mart.
It is moreover false that impersonals are to be found only in the
indicative, as Diomedes and some other ancients imagined. For
not to mention that Varro gives them all the moods, we find a
sufficient number of authorities: oporteto was in Numa's laws,
according to Scaliger : oportiierit is from Caecilius in Priscian. Ci-
cero says, Nee velte expexiri gtiam se aliena deceant, Offic. 1 . And
Aul. Gell. Verbisgue ejus de/atigari poio'dmssent.
And in like manner in the passive. Cum male pugnatum esset,
Cic. Cum jam horis amplius sex continenter pugnarelur ; Caes.
Ponitejam gladios hebetes, pugnetur acutis, Ovid.
The infinitive is in Terence, in Hec. act. 3. sc. 1.
Trepidari sentio, cursari sursum prorsum.
And in Cicero, Hic maneri diutius non potest.
In regard to licet, piget, placet, and others which have a double
preterite, we have made mention of them in the Rules of the Pre-
terites, vol. i. p. 306.
ANNOTATION.
We might also take occasion here to speak of derivative and compound verbs ;
but as this seemed more particularly to relate to the conjugations, we placed them
at the end of the Rules of Preterites, vol. i. p. 309, and the following.
Remarks on the Gerunds. 125
Section IV.
Remarks on the Gerunds, Supines, and Parti-
ciples.
Chapter I.
Remarks on the Gerunds.
I. What the ancient and modern grammarians thought
of Gerunds.
THERE is no one article, on which the grammarians have
started more questions, and have been puzzled to answer
them, than the gerunds. Sanctius, Scioppius, and Vossius, will
have it that they are verbal nouns adjectives, or even participles.
Certain it is that they are not verbs, and that they do not make
a mood apart, as some grammarians have fancied. In the first
place because they do not mark a judgment of the mind, nor aa
affirmation, which is the property of the verb. And in the second
place, because they have cases, and verbs have not. Thus we
say for example, in the nominative, dicendum est ; in the genitive,
dicendi causa ; in the dative, dicendo apta ; in the accusative, ad
dicendum ; the ablative, dicendo'conseqid.
They are therefore verbal nouns, and generally retain the go-
vernment of their verbs ; causa videndi Romam ; Virg. Utenduni
est cetate ; Ovid. Canes paucos et acres habendum ; Varro. But
we must inquire what sort of verbal nouns they are, and what is the
cause of this government.
They who pretend that these nouns are adjectives, and consider
that as such they must needs have their substantives, are obliged
to say, that as we see many verbs govern their original noun, as
>vMfere vitajn, pugnare pugnam ; so those gerunds being in the
neuter, suppose for a substantive the infinitive of their verb itself,
which is then taken as a noun verbal. For the infinitive was called
by the ancients, nomen verbi. So that when we say for in-
stance, j)ugnandum est, they would have us understand rl pugnare ,
and that pugnandum est pugnare is the same construction as pugnan-
da est jntgna. But if we say, pugnandum est pugnam, they still would
have us understand pugnare, and that its construction is double,
namely that of the substantive and of the adjective, pugnandum est
pugnare : and that of the verbal noun governing the case of its
verh, pugjiare (for pugnatio J pugnam, like tactio hanc rem.
And it is by this means they account for these expressions
which seem so extraordinary, tempus videndi lunce, tempus legendi
librorum, and the like ; for, say they, videndi will always suppose
TO videre, as if it were tempus visionis : and videre as substantive
will govern lunce, as if it were tempus videndcc visionis lunce. And
this is the opinion I had followed after Sanctius, Scioppius, and
Vossius, in the preceding editions.
But
\Q6 Section IV. Chap. I. Book VI.
But all things considered, this turn of expression and this sup-
position do not seem to be necessary, as we have already observed
in the General Grammar. For in the first place what they say, that
the infinitive is understood as a verbal noun which governeth the
genitive, or even the accusative, is without probabilit3% since
there is no fijundation to say that a word is understood when we
have never seen it expressed, and when we even cannot express
it without an absurdity, as it would be to say, legendum est legere,
tempus est videndi videre, piigyinndiim est pugnare, S;c.
1. Were the jjerund legendum a noun adjective, it would not be
different from the participle legendus, a, um ; and there would not
have been sufficient reason to invent this new sort of words.
3. Since they say that this infinitive, in the quality of a verbal
noun, governs the case that followeth, it is as easy for us to say
that legendtim being only a noun substantive derived from the verb,
shall produce this same effect by itself, without there being occa-
sion to understand any thing.
II. That the Gerunds are Nouns Suhstami'ce, and what
is the real cause of their Government.
Therefore I say, that the gerund is a verbal noun substantive,
derived from the adjective or participle of tlie same termination,
but which frequently addeth, to the signification of the action of
the verb, a kind of necessity and duty, as if one were to say the
action that is to be done, which the word gerund taken from gerere,
to do, seems to have been intended to signify ; hence pngnandvm
est, is the same as pngnare oportet, we must fight, it is time to fight.
Nevertheless as words do not always preserve the full strength
which they had at their first invention, so this gerund frequently
loseth that of diifi/, and preserves only that of the action of its verb,
as cantando riinipitur angiiis.
Now this assertion, tliat the gerund is a substantive, ought not
lo appear strange, since nothing is more common in all languages,
than to see the neuter of the adjectives changed into a substantive,
Tvhen it is taken absolutely ; as to ayx^h, boniim, goodness, and
the like.
This being premi?ed, it is a very easy matter to account for all
those expressions that are formed by the gerund, for when we say,
for instance, pngnandum e\t, legendiim est, it is as if it were piigna
est, lectio est : with this addition of duty or necessity, or proximity
of action, which we said was properly and peculiarly included in
the gerund.
And if we say legendum est Ubros, it is the same government as
lectio libros, just as Plautus sailh, tactio hanc rem. And Caesar re-
ditio domnm, &c. See above, p. 80.
And if we say tempvs est videndi luna;, it is the same as tempus
visionis Innce, nothing being more common than to see a noun go-
verned in the genitive, and governing another in the same case;
as Consides designatos maxima orbitate reipiiblicce virorum tedium, Cic.
ad Plane. Hujits rei magnam partem Inudis atgue cxistimationis ad
Libonemperventuram, Cses. And this is the way of accounting for
all
Remarks on the Gerunds. 127
all these phrases. Fuit exemplorum legendi potestas, Cic. Antonio
JacuUas detur agrorum suis latronibus condonandi. Id. Dulehis tandem
Sloicos nostras Epicureis irridendi sui Jacultatem dedisse, Id. Reli-'
quorum sideruni qnce causa coilocandij'uerit. Id. Omnium rerum una
est definitio comprchendendi. Id. Aut eorum qiue secundum naturam
sunt adipiscendi. Id. Nominandi tibi istorum niagis erit quhm adeundi
copia, PJaut. Venerunt purgandi sui causa, Caes. and the like.
Hereby Hkewise it appeareth why, speaking of a woman as well
as of a man, we say, cupidus sum videndi tui, and not videndce, be-
cause as we have already mentioned in the remark on the pro-
nouns, these geniti/es, mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, not admitting of
adjectives, it is as if it were cupidus sumvisionis tui ipsius ; and it is
the same* construction as tempus videndi lunce. Thus Terence,
speaking of a young girl, hath these words : Ego ejus videndi cupi-
dus, recta sequor. And in another passage, ut neque ejus sit amit»
tendi, neque retinendi copia.
And Ovid, Et spem placandi dantque adimuntque tui.
Again, Otim pilacandi spem mihi tolle tui.
So that It is a mistake, when in Acontius's letter to Cydippe,
this same poet is made to say,
Sit modo placanda; copia magna tui,
whereas we should read placandi.
We see further why it is better Latin to say with the participle
amandi sunt boni, and the like, than amandum est bonos : because
the verbal nouns substantives have rarely preserved the govern-
ment of their verbs in the purity of the language ; though there
are some instances of it.
Hence also it appeareth, why it is frequently indifferent, to put
the supine or the infinitive, or even the verbal noun in ib, (not-
withstanding that Valla is of a different opinion) in the place of
the gerund, agreeably to what we shall observe in the next chap-
ter, as audiendo jucunda, aiiditu jucunda, audirejucunda, auditionc
jucunda. Because it is very natural to put a substantive of the same
signification for another derived from the same verb. And thus
Cicero hath made use of it, when he says, &i qui ineunte cetate,
venandi aut pilce studiosijiierint, &c. if 'there shotdd be any one that
had a passion, tvhcn they tvere young, either Jor hunting, orjbr tennis;
where we see that venandi, being in the same government as piUa;*
nothing is more natural than to take it for a noun substantive, like
pila, and to say it is there instead of venationis ; and in all pro^
bability Cicero would not have used it thus, unless he had this no-
tion of it. '
This is likewise the reason why interpreters frequently render
into one language by the gerund, that which in the other is ex-
pressed in the verbal noun or by the infinitive, as in St, Paul hs
Ittot.TLOYiv •ct/Vew;, where the ancient interpreter has put ad obedienduni
Jidn,Jor the obedience qfj'aith, that is, to preach obedience v/hich
comes from faith. Again, h Kyt^va-a-uv (/.ri y.xiTiistv, qui prcudicas non
furandum, thou who preachest, that we must not steal, that it is a
crime to steal.
And thus we ought to explain jseveral turns of expression which
seem '
128 Section- IV. Chap. I. Book VI.
seem very intricate in Latin authors, as when Livy saith : Negue
immemur ejus quod initio consulatus imbiberat, reconciliandi nninios
plebis. Not having forgot the vigorous resolution he had taken
at the beginning ol his consulate, of reconciling the senate to the
people : lor immemor ejus reconciliandi., is there for ejus reconcilia-
tionis. And reconciliationis animos, is like tactio hanc rem.
III. JFIiether the Gerunds are taken actively or pas-
sively.
But it is further easy to answer this way the question which is
put, whether those gerunds are taken actively or passively. For
V lien they sup[)ly the place of the infinitive of the verb or of an-
other verbal substantive, if this infinitive or other verbal noun,
by which they may be resolved, is active, they will be likewise
actives : and if it be passive, they will be passives. Thus when
Virgil saith : Quis taiia Jando temperet ^ lacrymis : Jhndo, being
there iov Jan, in fando, or injhri talia, it must be active. Whereas
when he says, Fando aliquid sijbrte tuus pervenit ad aures, there it
is for dnm dicitur, and consequently passive.
And when we read in Cicero, Hie locus ad agendum amplissimuSy
ad dicendum ornatissimvs. Agendum and dicendum, being there for
actio, and dictio, that is, ut actio habeatur, they seem passive. But
sometimes there is so very little difference between the action and
the p ission, tliat one need only to look at them with very little
obli()iiily, to tcike them in either sense, which is of no sort of
consequence, and does not deserve to be a matter of dispute.
The principle we have here established, contributes also to the
easy clearing up of several difficult passages, as — Uritque •videndo
J'cemiua, Virg. tliat is, in videri or in visu ipsiiiSy for dum videtur.
Just as in Lucretius,
Ahtinlus in digito subter tenuatiir habendot
for dum hancn'r.
Thus when we find in Sallust, where he spealcs of Jugurtha;
cum ipse ad impc/andiim 7 '.^idiuni vocaretur, which hath puzzled a
great manv learned men ; that is, ad imprrnri, or ut el imperareiur,
as Seiviii--, and after him M:inutius, Alciatus, Gentilis, and Sanc-
tius explain it. And it is witliout foun(httion that some have at-
tempted to amend (lie text, and to read ad imperatorem. Even
Cicero him>elf h.-. made use of this expression, and explained it
in his letter to Petus, Nunc ades adiniperandiim, vel parendum potius^
8IC ENIM A.vTiQUi LoQUEBANTiJR. For this nieaneth, «</ MH^jemn,
01, ut tibi impcretur S)^ tu pnreas. Where Cicero adding that this
is an ancient phrase, sheweth plainly that the use of the gerunds
■was i)eretotore different from what it has been since, and that their
nature is not what we imagine it to be.
Kkmakks on Till: Supines. 129
Chapteu II.
Remarks on the Supines.
I. That the Supines are likewise Nouns Substantive.
THE supines as well as the gerunds, are likewise verbal nouns
substantive. And Priscian himself" acknowledges it; though
other grammarians, of a more ancient date, were so greatly puzzled
about this matter, that some of them, as we find in Charisias, in-
sisted that they were adverbs.
As we h?.ve demonstrated in the foregoing chapter, that the ge-
rund is a noun substantive taken from the neuter of the participle
in dus : so the supine is another substantive, which may be like-
wise formed from the neuter of the participle in us. Veniendum
est, gerund; you must come. Ventumfidt, supine; they came.
^ The difference is that the gerund is more regular in its declen-
sion, having a genitive, amaiidi, of loving, and constantly following
the second declension: whereas the supine is more" irregular,
having no genitive, and being referable to the second declension
for the nominative in um, audit wn ; and to the fourth for the other
cases, auditiu, audiiu, &c.
Nor ought we to be surprised at this, since it hath been shewn,
when treating of the heteroclites, that the same noun happens
frequently to change termination and declension : and further,
that the greatest part of the nouns in us were likewise changed
into jun. Thus they said, Fan}nim,pnnni, ^nA pannus, Non. Prce-
textum, i ; and pr(etextus, us. Sen. Suet. Portim, i, Plin. and par-
tus, us, Hon Currum, i, Liv. and currus, us, Cic. Effectum, i, PJaut.
and effectus, us, Cic. Eventum, i, Lncret. and evcntus, us, Cic. who
likewise makes frequent use of the plural eventa.
But what is more deserving, I think, of our observation, the
supines have been thus called, because they are words that have
waxed old, or turns of expression that have been neglected
during the purity of the language. Therefore when they began
to distinguish in the elegant custom of speaking, the supines from
the other verbal nouns, the termination UM was left in the for-
mer, and that of US was given to the latter. Hence it is that
miditum, {'or exairiple, is taken for the supine of the verb audire,
and auditus for its verbal noun, though properly speaking, it is
but the same thing. In like manner they have laid aside the
ancient termination of .the dative in U in the oldest word, that
IS in this supine, and they have given the other more modern,
and elegant, to the verbal noun; though in the main it is the
same word and the same case, when we say for instance auditu
Jucunda, agreeable to the ear ; and Auditui meo dabis gaudium 8^
tcetitiam, fire.
Others would have it, that when the termination UM is in the
nominative, it is not then a supine, but a neuter participle, which
they derive from a verb impersonal, as ainatum est taken from
Vol. II. K atvatur
ISO Section IV. Chap. II. Book VI.
amatur. But this is of very little signification, since it is not at all
extraordinary that the same word sliould come from many different
quarters; as amare infinitive active, amare imperative passive, and
amare the second person of the present indicative passive : and the
like.
Besides, Priscian and Diomedes allow that ledum est, for exam-
ple, is a real supine : and there are a great many passages much
easier to resolve by taking these words for supines, than for parti-
ciples; as in Livy. Diii non perlitatum tetiuer at dictator em, ne,&c. as
if it were Diu non facta •penitatio^ because it had been a long time
since they offered up sacrifice. And in another place, Tentatum
domi per dictatorem ut umbo consules crearentur, rem ad interregnum
perduxit ; that is, Tentatio facta domi, rem perduxit, &c. Where it
is plain that tentatum est is a real noun or supine, which is the no-
minative of perduxit. And in like manner in Plautus ; Justam
rem Sf Jacilem a vobis oratum volo. Where the word oratum ought
to be taken substantively, as if it were orationem, that governed
justam rem, like taclio hanc rem, in the same author.
Now this last example makes me imagine that all those nouns
by the ancients called indifferently either gerunds, or supines, or
participial words, parficipalia verba, had only one gender at first ;
whence it is that they said also, Credo inimicos meos hoc dicturvmf
and the like, of which we have made mention here above, sect. 3.
chap, 2. n. 8. So that we may say with the same appearance of
probability, that the participles were formed of these gerunds and
supines, as that the latter were derived from the former: not only
because this is the common idea which all grammarians, both
ancient and modern, give us, always to form the participle in US
from the supine ; but moreover because it appears that they began
with putting these nouns in the neutei", and that afterwards, when
the language came to be improved, they gave them all the three
genders.
We see something of this kind in French, where the participles
very often are not declined : for we say, for instance, J\ii trouve
cettejcmme lisant I'ecriture sainte, and not fai trouvee, nor lisante.
We say likewise, La peine que m'a donne cette affaire, and not donnSe,
&c. For which reason we call these participles also gerunds.
Concerning which we refer the reader to the General Grammar,
chap. 22. But whatever rules may have been given, still on many
occasions we are at a stand, where custom has not determined the
expression. Just so was it at first in the Latin tongue.
1 say therefore that supines are nothing else but verbal nouns
substantive, seldom used except in certain cases. Nevertheless we
may give them.
The nominative. Amatum est, venitimfuit, puditum erat.
The dative. Horrendum auditu, for auditui. Mirabile visu, for
visui, Virg. Just as he says elsewhere, Oculis mirabile monstrwn.
Quod auditu novum est, Val. Max. Ista lepida sunt memoratuy where
Others say memoratui, Plaut. coUocare nuptui, Colum. &c.
The accusative. Amatum esse. Ventum fuisse. Eo spectatum.
Venirnus hiic, lapsis quasituni oracula rebuSf Virg.
The
Remarks on the Supines. 131
The ablative. Dictu opus est, Ter. Migratu dificilia, Liv. Se-
natusfrequens vocatu D?-icsi, Cic. Parvnm dictu, sed immenswn cesti-
matione, Plin. Where it is of no sort of use to Scioppius to say,
after Sanctius ; Si dictu supinum est, etiam cestitnalione siipinum erit :
Since I have shewn that supines are old nouns ; so that one might
answer those authors with a great deal more reason, Si cestimatione
nomen est, etiam dictu nomen erity but a noun that has waxed old,
and for that reason is called a supine; custom requiring that
we should say rather dictum, i, o, than dictus, us, ui ; whereas ex-
pectatio has always maintained its ground during the purity of the
language. And indeed when Cato saith, Postreinus cubitum eat,
primus cubitu surgat, there is nobody but will allow that cubitum
ire is a real supine ; since the idea all grammarians give us of the
supine, is its being put after the verbs of motion; consequently,
\i cubitum est be a supine in this expression, cubitu must be one like-
wise, since these are two cases of the same noun ; which is a
proof for all the rest.
These supines or old nouns have likewise their plurals some-
times, according to Vossius, as Supini cubitus oculis conducunt, Plin.
O nunquamj'rustrata vocatus hasta meos, Virg. To which we may
also refer the plural eventa in Cic. since it comes from the neuter
eventinn. But whether we call this a supine or a verbal noun, is of
very little consequence, since we ought never to dispute about words.
What we think more necessary to observe, js that as the su-
pines are substantives, they do not change gender : Vitam ire per-
ditiim, and not perditam, Liv* Latrocinia sublatum iri, and not sub'
lata, Idem. Nutriceyn accersitum Hi, Ter. Audierat non datum iri
Jilio tixorem suo. Id. Vaticinatus est madefactum iri Grceciam sanguiiie,
Cic. and the like. And these are what Sanctius and Scioppius
call properly supines, not chusing to acknowledge any other.
But it is also as substantives, that these supines admit of an ad-
jective in the ablative case ; as Magno natu, Liv. very old. Ijiso
olfactu, Plin. Dictu, prqfaluque ipso, A. Gell. &c.
Those in the accusative ever include some kind of motion,
though it be sometimes concealed, as Dare nuptam Jiliam, to marry
his daughter; which denotes a change of family. But if no mo-
tion be understood, then it will be rather the accusative of the
participle, as Inventum S^ adductum curabo, Ter. For which reason,
speaking of a young woman, we ought to change the gender, and
say : Inventam 8f adductam, &c.
II. Whether the Supines are active or passive, and what
time is expressed by their circumlocution in ire or iri.
The supines in UM are generally active, though there are some
of them passive, as Midier guce ante diem quartitm usurpatum isset^
Gell. that is, ad usurpatum, or ad usurpari, for usurpatajidsset.
On the contrary ^ those in U are generally passive, though we
find some of them also active, as Forenses uvce celeres proventu, Plaut.
The circumlocution in ire, of itself expresseth no time, but may
be joined with any, Gaudes ccenatum ire ; gaudebis ccenatum ire ;
eavisafuit ccenatum ire.
k2 The
152 Section IV. Chap. IL Book VI.
That which is made by the infinitive iri, frequently includes
fomcthing of the future, Bnituni tU scriOis visum iri a me puto,
Cic. Dcderam cquidem Saiijeio litems, seel has tibi redditum iriputa-
bnm priiis, Cic. Et sine opera tua illam deduclum iri domum, Ter.
But we are not allowed to use the circumlocution by the infinitive
ire, says Vossiu?, unless it be also allowed in the indicative.
Hence we ought not to say, Puto te eum locum intellectum ire, be-
cause we should not say eo intellectum : which docs not hinder us
from saying in tlie passive, Puto emu locum intellectum iri, just as
Coesar saith, Jpsi nihil nocitum iri rcspondit, whereby it appears that
the passive phrase may be more usual than the active.
III. IVliai case the Accusative oj the Supines govemeth,
what this Accusative itself is governed by, and of
some expressions of this sort difficult to account for.
The supines, as verbal nouns, govern the case of their verb,
Me ultra accusalum advenit, Ter. Scitatum orncida Phcebi miltimiiSy
\irg. Grajis servitum inalribus ibo, Id. Which we have already
shewn to have been heretofore common to all the nouns, even
substantives, derived from verbs : Quid tibi curatio est hanc rem'^
Plant. Q^uid tibi hanc aditio est ? Plaut. Quid tibi hanc notio est ? Id.
Just as we still say, Reditio domum^ Caes. Traditio alteri, Cic. and
the like.
But when these supines are also in the accusative, then thej
themselves are governed by a preposition understood : for as we
say ; Eo Romam, for co nd Romam, in like manner we say, Dncitiir
immolatum, for ad immolatum, or ad immulationem. Eo perditum, for
eo ad perditum, or ad perditionem. But if we add the case of the
verb after perditum, Vitam tuam perditum ire properat, Liv. then it
will be perditum that governs vitam ; just as perditio, tactio, cura-
tio, and others above mentioned, heretofore governed the accusa-
tive of their verb. And in like manner, Justam rem d vobis oralum
volo, of which we have been just now speaking.
Yet it is observable that we meet with some expressions in au-
thors, which seem to disagree with this principle, as that of Cato
authorised by A. Gellius ; Cotdumelia quce mihifaclum iiur ; that of
Quintilian, Reus damnntum iri videbatur ; that of Plautus, Mihi
prada videbatur perditum iri, and the like, which Scioppius and
Mariangel think to have been corrupted, contrary to the autho-
rity of all MSS. and even of Gellius himself; pretending that
since the government depends on the preposition, an'd the supine
governs the case of its verb, we ought to read, Cuntumeliatn quam
mild Jactum itur ; Reum damnatum iri videbatur; as if it were, say
they, itur ad factum (orj~actio)iemj contumeliam, and in like manner
the rest. To which Vossius makes answer, that then the periphrasis
coincides with the meaning of the simple expression, and that
Coufumelia quce mihi Jactum itur, is no more than quce mihi Jit, and
the others in the same manner, because indeed the verb eo does not
express a local motion in that passage.
But it is not diflicult to account for these phrases, without de-
parting from our principle. For when we say, for iDStance, Reus
damnatnm
Remarks on the Supines. 133
damnatum in i-idebafur, there is nothing easier than to express it
thus ; Reus videbatiir iri ad damnatuiriy ibr ud damnationevi. Iri
then will make the same construction as duci, there being no dif-
ficult}' to shew tliat eo may be active, and consequently that, on
certain occasions, it may have its passive, as Uui\, iri, &c. Which
is so much the stronger against Scioppius, as he himself proves
that we may very well say ear, in the first person. Thus when we
say, Co)iiitmeUa qncc mihi factum itur, it is obvious that contumelia
is the nominative of itur, and therefore that we may resolve this
expression thus, Contumelia quce itur adfactujUy (as ad J'actionem)
se or sui : since it is not more strange to say Jactio se or siii, than
curatio hanc rem, or hujus rei.
And it is by this very principle we are to account for an ex-
pression of Poiiipey writing to Domitius ; Cuhortcs quce ex Piceno
venerunt ad me missum facias. That is, facias missum or missionem
coliortes, in the same construction as tactio hanc rem. And in like
manner the rest.
IV. Of the Supines m U, what they are goTeriicd hy,
and kow they may be rendered by the Tnjiniiive, by the
Gerund, or by the verbal Nouns in 'io.
The supines in U are either in the dative, as audit u jucun da for
auditui : or in the ablative, and then they are governed by a prepo-
sition ; as pulchnnn visii, for in visu, or i?i videndn, fine to the
eye. Sometimes they are also governed by the preposition A, as
in Cato, Primus cubitu surgat, postremus cubitum eat, de R. R. cap.
5. that is, primus a cubitu surgat, postremus ad cubitum eat.
Sometimes instead of this supine in 17, they put the infinitive
only, or the gerund with the preposition, as
— : Fessis leviora tolli
Pergama Graiis Hor.
That is, sublatu. Cibus ad coquendumfacillimus, Cic. that is, coctu.
And this supine is also expressed by the verbal noun in io, con-
trary to the opinion of L. Valla. For as we find in Quintil. Lyri-
corum Horatius fere solus legi dignus, for lectu : so in Gellius we
read, Dignus sane Seneca videatur lectione. And Cicero has ex-
pressed himself in the same manner, in rebus cognitione dignis, Gra-
tiuncidam inopem nee scriptione magnopere dignam.
We likewise use the gerund in Jo, instead of this supine, or of
a verbal noun in lo, contrary to the opinion of the same L. Valla,
iidem traducli a disputando ad dicendum inopes reperiantur, Cic. for
a disputatu, or disputatione, &c. The reason is, as we have al-
ready observed, the gerunds, the supines, and sometimes even the
infinitive, being verbal nouns substantive, there can be nothing
more natural than to put one noun for another derived from the
same original. And hereby we see of what importance it is to
understand the real nature of things, in order to prevent mistakes,
into which L. Valla hath often fallen.
134 Section IV. Chap. III. Book VI.
Chapteii III.
Remarks on the Participles.
I. Dijfei^ence betneen a Participle mid a Noun Adjective.
ALL participles are adjccMves derived from a verb, and ex-
press some time. I-lenccJ}-etus,pra'ditus,prceg)ians, galeatjis,
'pileatus, and the like, are not participles, because they are not de-
rived from verbs; as on the contrary salens, in Plautus, cometh
from soteo, and iiatus from irascor, mcestus from 7)icereo ; and yet
they cannot be looked upon as participles, because they do not
express any time. For
When the participle ccaseth to express time, it becometh a mere
noun adjective, which happens, 1. When it is taken purely as a
substantive, as sapiens, serpens, sponsa, 5rc.
2. When it changeth the government of its verb, as amans pe-
cnnicT, and the like, as we have already observed, p. 2L
Sanctius hereto adds tliat the participle becometh also a noun
by composition, as rfoc^//i, /«f/oc/wi .- and by comparison, as doctuSf
docfior, &c. But Vossius on the contrary maintains, that in Te-
rence, Jnspirante Patnphilo j in Cicero, Inscientibus nobis; these
and the liKe compounds arc participles, just as when I say. Me
sperante, me sciente. It is the same in regard to the participle pre-
terite, as when Horace saith, Dicam indicium ore aliejw. And as
for the comparison, we find in Cicero, Habeas eos a me commen-
datissimos ; and in another place, lii sic habeto me a causis mmquam
districtioremfuisse, and a multitude of others, which Vossius main-
tains to be participles, since they mark time as much as their
positive.
II. IVhether e'very Participle may eapress every difference
of time : aiid first of the Participle in NS.
Though the participles seem to be particularly tied down to
a certain difl'ercnce of time according to their termination ; yet
Sanctius maintaincth that they may be all taken for every differ-
ence of time. So that when I say, Pompeius discedens erat suos ad-
hortatus, it means, cum discederet, in the present : but when I say
veniesjudicnns, it is the future, for it means venies etjudicabis : and
the others in the same manner.
Hence it is that in the Vulgate the Greek participles of the pre-
terite and the aorist, are oftentimes rendered into Latin by the
participle present, as in St. Luke : Sunt aliqui Mc stantes, for I/a/
T/vfy rcov (T-ny-orwy : and in another place, Posttdans pugillarem
scripsit, for atrrtaas, cum poshdusset. And in St. Mark, Et cruci-
jigentes eum, dixnserunt vestimenta ejus, for ravpua-ao/Tes ivrov, or as
we read it in St. John ore Is-xv^ua-av, ciim crucijixissent. This is
an expression, which some have attempted to find fault with in
this ancient interpreter, though without foundation, since the
very
Remarks on the Participles. 135
very best Latin authors have used it in the same manner ; Offendi
adveniens ut volebam coUocatam Jiliam, Ter. for cum advenissem.
Credo hercle adveniens^ nomen commutabit mikij Plaut. for cum adve-
nerit. Hoc ipso Pansa mihi nuntium perferente, concessosjasces laurea-
tos tenui quoad tenendos putavi, Cic. Pansa having brought me
tidings of it. Apri inter se dimicant, indurautes attritu arborum
castas, Plin. that is, postquam induravere.
Fracti bellofatisque repulsi
Ductores Danaum tot jam labentibus annis, Mn. 2.
After such a long space of time; during so long a space of time.
But this participle also denoteth a future just at hand, like the
(A.(\Km of the Greeks Et terruit auster euntes, Virg. that is, ire
conantes, being ready to go. Nee nos via Jail et euntes, Id. for
ire conantes, or ciim ibimus. So in Horace :
Formidare malosjures ; incendia, servos,
Ne te coinpilentj'ugientes. Sat. 1.
That is, lest they rob you, and afterwards run away. And in the
Greek the first future participle is oftentimes rendered by this pre-
sent in Latin, as in St. Matth. 27. 49. "A<pej "^w/xe* £»' t^xj^lxt
'HXixi, a-b)cru¥ ocvrnv. Sine videamus an veniat Elias liberatis eum.
• And it often happens that the Latins being without the present
of the participle passive, express it by the active. Thus in Virgil,
Genibusque volutans, hccrebam, that is, Kv^io^t^vos, says Diomedes,
volutans me ; and in another place, Prcecipitans traxi mecum, that
is, x.x\xK^fiyLvt}^o^yos, prcBcipitans me. Just as he had made use of vol-
ventibus annis ; whereas Homer hath, •jre^tTrXo/jLeYuv hiavruv.
So much for what they call the participle present, that is,
which terminates in NS. We must now examine this principle in
regard to the rest.
II. Of the Participle i?i US.
No doubt but the participle in US is likewise expressive of every
difference. For as Aime' in French is of every time, so that all
the tenses of the passive voice are formed from thence by circum-
locution, je suis Aime', j'etois Aime', je serai Aime', j'avois ete
Aime', &c. ; so in Latin we may say, Amatus sum, eram,Jui,
era, &c. using it thus in all times. Examples hereof are frequent.
Ego si cum Antonio locutusjuero, Cic. Paratosjore, Liv. Utinam aitt
hie surdus, aut hcEc muta facta sit, Ter. that \s,Jiat, in the present.
Quam quibus in patriam ventosa per cequora vectis
Pontus Sf ostriferijauces tentantur Abydi, 1 Georg.
"Where vectis \& said of those who were actually at sea. Victis
bona spes partibus esto, Luc. for vincendis.
Hence it is that what the Greeks express by the present of the
participle passive, is oftentimes rendered into Latin by this parti-
ciple in US, as in St. Paul, Omnes sunt administrate; ii spiritus missi,
&c. for «9roj-fXXoft£y« iTviviMtTx, qui mittuntur, and the rest in tl^e
same manner.
To this same cause it is owing that this participle in US ought
oftentimes to be rendered by the present or the future in dits. Ci-
cero says of the duty of an orator : Hujus est in dando consilio de
Tnaximis
136 Section IV. Chap. III. Book VI.
maxinns rebus expHcata sententta, 2. de Orat. it is his business to
give his opinion upon affairs of great importance : where it is
plain that cxplicata signifies the same thing as explicanda. So in
Virgil, -[. JEn.
Sabmersas obrue piippes, that is, submergendas, overwhelm them
in order lo sink them. And Mn. 3.
JDiversn exilia 5)- desertas qnccrerc terras
Ausuriia aaimur Divum :
that IS, descrciidnsy according to Sanctiiis, transient retreats, which
we soon must quit, without knowing as yet where we shall be able
to settle. Again J^n. 1. speaking of those swans that wanted
to swim to land, aid capeie, aut captas jam de^pectare vide ntur : that
is, capiendas, as in Luean.
Cccsosque duces £)• Jkincra regum ; for ccsdendos j and
the like.
But the reason why this participle in US seemeth rather to
mark the time past than the present, is probably because as in nar-
ratives one generally is apt to use the present to express things
past, in order to represent them in a more lively manner, as when
Terence saith : Ubi te non invenio, ibi asccndo in quondam excelsum
locum, circumspicio nusquani, in Andr. Hence it has been imagined
that as this participle is often used on those occasions, it was in the
time past, as well as the thing it signified ; whereas the present of
the other verbs with which it is commonly joined, plainly declare
that it is also in the present, as Funus interim procedit, sequimur, ad
sepidcrum venimus, in ignemimpositacst,Jictur, Ter. in Andr. And
therefore when this same poet says in another place, Concessum est,
taciturn est, creditum est, in Adelph. it is also the present (whether
we take it as a supine, or as a participle), though for the reason
I have mentioned, this participle, even in the times of the Romans,
seems to have been oftener considered as of the time past.
Hence it is that Cicero in the oration pronounced before the
pontiffs for the recovery of his house, treats his enemies as igno-
rant fellows, who, endeavouring to obtain sentence of exile against
him, had put in the declaration of their request : Velitis Ju-
BEATis L'T INI. TuLLio Aqua et Ioni interdictum SIT, in-
stead of interdicatur, in the present. Whence one would imagine
that the latter was more usual. Though we may likewise infer
from thence, that the other was not quite contrary to practice :
since it is not at all probable that persons of their rank, and whom
we cannot suppose to have been strangers to their own language,
would ever have made use of it, had it been a thing as ex-
ceptionable as Cicero, hurried by Iiis passion, which appears from
a torrent of injurious language, endeavours to make it. And it
is obvious tluvt velitis vt interdictum sit, may as well mark the pre-
sent, as this phrase of Terence, Utiriam aut hie surdus aut hcec
mutajucta sit, for fiat, and others which I have quoted. But we
must take notice that Cicero's opinion ought not always to pass
as an oracle with us, when he undertakes to criticise on the Roman
language ; no more than the frequent censures he passeth on the
Greeks ; as 2. Tusc. Quaest. where he pretends to shew that
they
Remarks on the Participles. 137
they confounded laborem and dohrem, wliich were very properly
distinguished by the Latins. Whereas the Greeks have not onh'
different words to answer each of those terras ; but Cicero himself
frequently confounds them in his works, as Budeus jiroveth in his
Commentaries, p. 750. of Robert Stephen's edition. Which
makes him saj', that even on those occasions Cicero does not al-
ways speak according to his mind : Hnjusmodi autem interpreta'
tiones interdumcalumniosasj'uisse magis quam ex sententia mtimidictaSf
ex eo coiijicere licet, quod Cicero easipse nan obscrvavit, Id. pag. 751.
III. Of t/ie Participle hi DVS.
As for the participle in bus, there is no difficulty at all about
it, for so seldom does it denote the future, that Alvarez and Sa-
turnius were of opinion it was rather a simple noun than a parti-
ciple, since it hardly expresseth any time. And though it were
not to be excluded from this rank, it is certain nevertlieless that
oftentimes it only signifieth duty, or vvhat one ought to do : Gra-
tiam nos quaque inire ab eo def'endenda pace arbilrabarymr. Valla
seenas to have been sensible of this, since he says that the gerund in
BUS ought to be taken as a participle present. Linacer is of the
same opinion, and Donatus saith that Miranda tarn repentino bonOy
is the present for cum miror.
Thus it is that authors have used it on a thousand occasions. His
enim legendis redeo in memoriam mortuorum, Cic. in reading these
things. Excitanda est memoria ediscendis quamplurimis, Id. Volven.'
da dies en attidit ultro, instead of qua volvitur, Virg. Quod in opere
Jaciundo opera consumis tuce, Ter. Neque verb superstitione tollenda
religio toUitur, Cic. &c.
IV. Of the Participle in RUS.
The greatest difficulty is therefore about the participle in rus ;
for though Scioppius, after Sanctius, says the same of this as of
the rest, it is nevertheless certain that it particularly denotes the
future: which Sanctius does not deny, when it happens to be
joined to a present or to a future, asjactiirus sum, or facturiis era.
For it is a mistake to believe with Valla, that it cannot be joined
with the latter, since there is nothing that agreeth better with the
future than the future itself. Demomtraturi erimus, Cic. Erit acta-
rus. Id. Quo die ad sicam venturus ero, Id.
Mergite me fiuctus cum rediturus ero, Mart.
Tu procul absenti curafuturus eris, Ovid.
And the like.
But since it is true, according to Sanctius, that it also denotes
the future along with the present, we must conclude that it like-
wise denotes the future with the preterite ; and that at the most, it
can be considered there only as a comparison, or an assemblage of
different tenses, one of which marks a thing as future in regard
to another, which is considered as past; just as in Q. Curtius,
Mazeus, si trmiseuntibus Jiumen supervenisset, haud dubie oppressurus
Juit incompositos in ripa. He would have destroyed them: for
if the assemblage of different tenses changeth their nature, there
will
13S Section IV. Chap. III. Book VI.
will be as much reason to conclude against Sanctius, thai fuit
there denotes the future, being joined with oppressnrus, as that
oppressiirns denotes the preterite, because it is joined with fuit.
Add to this, we find in Gellius, tliat Nigidius, whom he stiles the
viost learned in Rome, whom Cicero calls the most learned and the
honestest man of his time, and who was a thorough master of his
own language, Nigidius, I say, testifieth, that the verb sum, rather
takes the tenses of the participles to which it is joined, than the
participle takes the tense of the verb sum.
But this is only a comparison of different tenses, by which we
must explain all such like phrases. Vos visurosj'uissej Cic. Eum
tnagis communem ccnsemus in victoria J'uturum Juisse, guam incertis
in rebus ^uisset, Id. Scd id erit brer}, iiec diihito quin te Icgente has
litter as cotifecta jam resJtUurasit, Id. &c. Otherwise we should be
obliged to say, that Ventura Ccesare Roma trepidabit, is the same
thing as Veniente Ccesare Roma trepidabit. Which is not abso-
lutely true, since the latter signifies Caesar's arrival as present,
whereas the other signifies it only as future.
V. Significatmi of the Participle in Verbs Comjiwn
and Depo7ients.
The participles of the verbs common in NS and in R US, follow
the active signification, as tuens and tuiturus. Those in D US fol-
low the passive, as tuendus ; Ctijus possessio quo major est, eo plus
requiritad setuendam, Cic. And those in US have both, as tuitus,
who looks at, or who is looked at.
As to the deponents, properly speaking, none but those in DUS
have the passive signification ; sequendus, who ought to be followed.
HcBC ego mercanda vita puto, Cic. I think these ought to be pur-
chased even at so dear a price as life. Their preterites, as well as
their futures in RUS, have generally the active; secutus, who fol-
loweth ; secutnrus, who is about to follow.
And yet the participles in US have very often both significa-
tions, as coming from verbs that were heretofore common : this
may be seen in the following list, which is only an appendix to
that above given, when we were speaking of verbs deponents taken
passively, p. 102.
Deponents wJiose Participle in US is sometimes taken
passively.
Adkptus. Seneotutem iit adipiscan- Aggressus. Facillimis quibiisque ag-
tiir omncs optant, eanrlfim accusant gn'ssis, Jnsl.
a<!eptam, Cic. ns ue read ii in Fowiwi' Antegressos. IVe find in Cicero, Cau-
and in all the ancient copies, whereas sas antepressas, ^" cansis antegressis,
the lale ones have a<\epti. Which Ilertrtj lib. defatn.
Stephen in the preface to his book cle Arbithatus, arbitrata qiia!stio, Gell.
Latinit. falso snspccta, cone^emn^af an Assensus. Sapiens nitilta scquitiir
isnorant mistake. probabilia, noii comprehensa, non
Ne cadat, et multas palmas inho- percepta, neque assensa, sed sfmilia
nestet adeptas, Ovid. veri, Cic.
Adortus. Ab his Gallos adortos, De religione Bibulo assensiim est,
Axirel. apud Prist. Cic.
Auxi-
Remarks on the Participles.
139
luxiLiATUS. A me auxiliatus si est,
Lticil. apud Prise.
Blanditus. Blanditus la4)or, Verr. ac-
cording to Piisc.
CoMiTATUs. Uno comitatus Achate,
Fi's.
Qabd ex urbe parilm comitatus exi-
erit, Ctc. '
CoMMENTATUs. Diu & mullis lucu-
bratiunculis commentala oratione,
3u. Cic.
CoMPLExus. Quo uno maledicto sce-
lera omnia complexa esse videantur,
Cic.
CoNATus. Ne literae interceptSB co-
nata palam facerent. Liv.
CoNFESsus. Confessa res & manifesta,
Ctc.
CoKsor.ATUs. Sic consolatis militibus,
&c. Just.
CoNSECWTus. Cansecuta ansa, Varr.
CuNCTATUS. Fides cunctata est. Slat.
Tliey suspended their belief.
Depastus. Depastam arborem relin-
quunt, Plin. Depasta altaria liquit,
Virg.
Deprecatus. Deprecati belli promis-
sio, Just.
Despicatus. Quae nos nostramque ado-
lescentiam habent despicatam, Ter.
Detestatus. Bella matribus detestata,
Hor.
Dicnatus. Tali honore dignati sunt,
Cic, Conjugio dignate superbo, Virg.
Dilargitus. Dilargitis proseriptorum
bonis, Sail.
Dimensus. See Mensus.
Eblanditus. EblandiUfi preces, Plin.
Eblandita sufFragia, Cic.
Effatus. Interpretati Vatum effata
incognita, Cic.
Agros & templa eflfata habeuto. Id.
Ementitus. See Mentitus.
Execratus. Eamus omnis execrata
civitas, Hut. Epod. 1 6.
ExEcuTUS. Executo regis imperio,
Just.
ExoRSUs. Sua cuique exorsa laborem,
Fortunamque ferent, Virg.
ExPERTUS. Multa inventa expertaque
in hoc sunt bona, Alt.
It is also observable, that the simple being sometimes taken ac-
tively, the compound foUoweth the passive signification : f()r ultus
and ausus are actives ; whereas inultus and inausus are passives.
We may likewise take notice on this occasion of a Lqtiii ele-
gance, which is by putting the participle in us oftentimes after the
verbs, euro, cupio, volo, oportet, habeo, and the like, instead of the
infinitive ; Sed est quod vos monitos voluerim, Plaut. Adolescenti
morem gestum oportuit, Ter. Adversarias servafos magis cupiunt
qu^i perditos : And the like. ^^'
Fortunam soepins clade Romana ex-
pertam, Tacit.
Fadricatus. Manibus fabricata Cy-
clopum, Ovid.
Imitatus. See Imitor.
Inopinatus. See OpfNATUs.
Interpretatos, Interpretatum nomen
Grsecum tenemus, Cic.
Intutus. Intutam urbem, Liv. ill for-
tified.
Lamentat«s. Fata per orbem lamen»
lata diu, Sil. Ilal.
Machinatus. Priscian quotes from Sal-
lust. Et Lucullum Regis cura ma-
chinata fames fatigabat j zchick shews
that formerly it was passive.
Mensus. Spatia mensa, quia confi-
ciunt cursus Lunae, menses vocantur,
Cic. Dimensus in the same manner.
Mirari se diligentiam ejus a quo es-
sent ista dimensa, Cic.
Mentitus. Mentita & falsa pleniqr.e
erroris, Cic. also Ementitis auspiciis.
Id.
Mercatus. TruHam unam mercatam
k matrefamilias, Plin.
Meritus. Quas Cannis corona merita,
Piin.
Metatus. Metato in agello, Hor. also
immetata jugera. Id.
Moratus. Saepe simultates ira morata
facit, Ovid.
Oblitus. Nunc oblita mihi tot car-
mina, Virg.
Opinatus. Improvisa nee opinata no-
bis, Cic. Likewise i/s compound, In-
opinatus is never taken in another
sense.
Pactus. Ex quo destituit Decs, mer-
cede pacta Laomedon, Hor. Thus we
find pacta conventa without a con-
junction in Cic. 2. de Oral. Et pacti
& conventi formula, pro Cecil.
Partitus. Partitis copiis, C(bs.
PoLLiciTus. PoUicitis dives quilibet
esse potest, Ovid.
Professus. Solaque deformem culpa
professa facit, Ovid.
Stipulatus. Stipulata pecunia, Cic.
Testatus. Res ita notas, ita testatas,
Cic.
140 Section IV. Chap. III. Book VI.
VI. Some particular remarks on the Participle in DUS.
We have already observed, that the participle in dus hath al-
ways the passive signification, whether it comes from a verb com-
mon or deponent, or from a verb passive : yet some pretend to
say, that the civilians use it almost in an active signification ; Di-
riiinutio ex bonis Jieri debet vescendi pupilli causa, for nleiidi, Ulpian.
But one would think it may rather be inferred from thence, that
vescor hath changed signification, and that, upon the decline of the
Latin tongue, it was taken for alo ; just as in very old authors it is
taken for utor^ as Nonius observeth.
We have also shewn, that the participle agreeth more elegantly
with a substantive expressed, than to put it as a gerund with a sub-
stantive after it. Thus we say, Discenda est lectio, rather than dis-
cenduri est lectionem. Princeps vestrce libertatis defendendcefui, Cic.
rather than dejendendi veslrnm Ubertatem. And the like.
But it is particularly to be observed, that this is elegant only
for those verbs which generally govern an accusative after them.
For in regard to the rest, as Vivez observeth, it is always better
to continue in the construction of the gerund : for example, we
should not say, Veni hue tui servieudi causa ; or ad carendam volup-
tntem ; hut tui obscrvandi, or tibi servieudi causa ; ad carendum vo-
luptate, and the like. And if we do say, Justitice fruendcB causa,
Cic. Beata vita glorianda Sf prcedicanda est, Id. and the like : this
is because /rwor, glorior, and the rest, used to govern an accusa-
tive. And there is no doubt but as formerly most verbs, not only
deponents, but moreover neuters or absolutes, did govern this case,
as we have above demonstrated ; one might use these expressions
oftener than we do at present, and without committing a mistake ;
as when Celsus saith, Abstinendus est ceger. But we ought ever
to conform to the practice of good writers, and not to make use of
these uncommon expressions but with great caution and good
authority.
Now it is proper to take notice, that instead of joining the ab-
lative to the preposition a or ab after these participles, it is much
more elegant to use the dative. 'Non paranda nobis solum, sedjru-
enda etiam sapientia est, Cic. and not a nobis. Tibi ipsi pro te erit
causa dicenda, Id. not a te ipso : Though we find some with the ab-
lative, quid tandem a Socrate Sj IHatoneJ'aciendum pules ? Cic. Negue
enim hcec a te non ulciscenda sunt ; etiam si non sint dolenda, Cic.
We have still one elegance more to remark, which is frequently
used by Cicero. This is putting the participle in dus in the ab-
lative absolute, instead of the gerund with the accusative. His
enim legendis rcdeo in memoriam mortuorum, instead of hac legendo»
Exercenda est etiam memoria ediscendis ad verbum quamplurimis Sf
nostris scriptis S^ alienis, 1. de Orat. Hcec vel sunima laus est verbis
iransferendis, ut sensuni feriat id quod translatum est, 3. de Orat. Hoc
eo seepius testificor, ut autoribus laudandis ineptiarum crimen effugiam.
Ibid. In the same manner in Livy, Prolatnndis igitur comitiis, guum
dictator magistratu abiissei, res ad interregnum rcdiit. And the like.
VII.
'Remarks ON the Participles. 141
VII. Of the Participle of the Verbs called Impersonals.
The impersonals, as grammarians call them, have also their
participles sometimes
In Ns, as ofpcenitei is formed pcenitens, very usual. Of pudet,
pudens, in Hor. Ter.
In RUM, Cic. lib. 2. ad Alt. ep. 1. Nihilo magis ei liciturum esse
phbeio qu^m, &c. Plin. 1. 36. c. 15. Cum piideret vivos, tanquum
pud'Uuriim asset extindos. Quintil. 1. 9. c. 3. seems as if he wanted
to shew that Sallust had said, non posniturum for 7ton pcenitenliant
actiirum, whereas according to analogy, he should have said, po^ii-
titurum, as Vossius thinks that Sallust and Quintilian intended to
write it.
In UM, which may be often referred to the supines above men-
tioned, ch. 2. and these may either come from the actives, as mi-
sertum, pertcvsum, libitum, licitum, &c. or from the passive, as from
pugnatiir, pugnntum est, from curritury cnrsiimest, &c. and these are
much more usual: or, from the deponents, Q,uos non est veritum in
voluptate summum bonum ptonerey Cic. which is very rare.
In Dus, as Haiid pcenitendus labor. Induci ad pudeudum Sf pi'
gendum, Cic. as likewise dormicndus from dormitur ; regnandus from
regnatur, Regnanda Alba, Virg. Jurandiis from juratur ; rigilandus
from vigilatur. And the like.
There are even a great many participles supposed to come from
verbs personal, though in reality they come only from these im-
personals, that is from verbs that are not used in all persons ; such
as cessatus, erratus, couspiratus, which cannot be derived from
ussor, erroTy conspiror, since these are not used ; but from cessaluvy
erratur, conspiratur : for which reason the circumlocution of the
preterite is always formed by the neuter, cessatum esty erratumjuit,
tonsjnratumfuei-at, &c. '
Sometimes we form participles whose verbs are never used : thus,
though we do not say obsolescor, nor obsolescitur, yet we find obso-
lettts. In like manner we meet with occasus, though we neither
say occidor nor occiditury taking it from cado.
We may subjoin a list of them, where it is to be observed, that
these participles frequently become nouns, because they no longer
are expressive of time : and they are sometimes taken in a signifi-
cation bordering upon the active.
Nouns or Participles in US, whose Verbs are either
rare or unusual, i
Adultus. Apud pastores adultus, Just, Nunc de Republ. consuli coepti su-
Adulta virgo, Cic. Hor. mus, Cic.
Antecessus. In antecessum dabo, Sen. Ccepta est oratio fieri, Cic,
befure-hand. Ante pelitam pecuniam, quam esset
Cessatus. Cessatis in arvis, Ovid. ccepta deberi, Cic.
CiRcuiTus. Circuitis bostiutn castris, Commentatus. Commentate oratione^
C£S. 2u. Cic.
CtENATUs. Sfe the next tille, Cokcretus. Cujus ex sanguine con-
C«PTU3. Coeptum igitur per eos, de- cretus home & coalitus sit, Geil.
situm est per hunc, Gic, Com-
142
Section IV. Chap. III. Book VI.
CoNSPiRATts. Assidentetn conspirati
specie officii circnmsteterunt, Suet.
Decessus. Custodibus decessis niuiti
inteificiuntur, Ccecil. or ralhcr Caj-
I ins, in Prise.
Decretus. In the same manner as
CoNCRETUs. Nocte dii^que decre-
tum et auctum, Livius, or rather
Lajvius, in P/iic. Whereby it ap-
pears that he ivould haie made no dif-
Jiadty to say, adds Vcssius, Lund de-
cretd, ostreis decretis, hut this is very
rare, as we have already observed,
when speaking of Cresco, vol. J. p.
225.
Decursus. Decurso spatio a calce ad
carceres revocari, Cic. Decurso lu-
mine vitae, Lucr.
Jam Leone decurso, Solin.
Deflaguatus. Fana flannnd deflagrata,
Emiius apud Cicer.
Desitus. Desitum est, C'c.
Papiriiis est vocari desitus, Cic.
Emeritus. Emeritus miles, Luc.
Enierltam puppim, Mart, an old ship
that has icrved its time.
Emersus. E coeno etnersus, Cic.
Ekratus. Pererratis finibus, Virg.
EvAsts. Exercitum cffisum, evasuno-
que se esse, Liv.
£xcRETt;s. Excretos prohibent it ma-
tribus hoedos, FirVg.
Nomen vel participium absque verbi
origine, (says Calepin) neque enim
dicitur excrescor.
ExoLETUs. Exoleta annalium vetustate
exempla, Liv.
Festinatus. Mors festinata. Tacit.
Festinatis honoribus, Plin.
iNSERvnos. Nihil est i me in-
servitum temporis caus4, Cic. I
have not oirdttcd to seive you, not-
withstanding the bad situation of af-
fairs.
Insessus. Saltus ab hoste insessus, Liv.
surrounded by enemies.
Ikterritus. Interritis multis, 2ua-
drifiar. apud Prise.
Inveteratus. Inveterata querela, Cic.
Inveterata amicitia, id.
Juhatus. Quid mihi juratus est ar-
gentum dare, Plant. Non sum ju-
rata, Turp. apud Di'im. Male ei
jurato suo, quam injurato aliorum
tabellas comuiittere, Cic. But this
here ought not to appear strange, since
they also said juror, from whence
Cometh juratur, in Lucan. And ju-
rabere, in Slalius.
Labokatus. Arte laboratae ve»tes,
Virg.
NuPTus. Nova nupta, Tcr.
Novus nuptus. Plant.
Obitus. Morte obita virgo, Cic, Virg.
Tac.
Obsoletcs. Obsoletum amicum, in
2u, Cult, that is, whose services we
have long made use of: which seems
to prove, that this verb, and such like,
come rather fioru soleo, than from
oieo, as tue have already observed,
voL 1. p. 194.
OccAsus. Ka-af. Ante solem oc-
casum, Plant, for tchich reason
Gellius saiih, Sole occaso, non in-
suavi venustale est, si quis autem
habeat non sordidam, nee proculca-
tam.
Pererratus. SeeERHATUs,
Placitus. Ubi sunt cognitae, placitae
sunt, Ter.
Placita disciplina, Colum.
Pransus, Potus. See the next title.
Pr.'ebitus. Ubi quoque Romae ingeiis
praebitus error, Liv.
Proper a Tus. Carmina properata,
Ovid. But Pliny liaih also, Delubia
occulta celeritate properantur. We
likeiuise meet with the other participle
properandus, Virg. Vul. Flac.
Redundatls. Redundatas fluinine co-
git aquas, Ovid.
Regnatus. Regnata per arva, Virg.
But Tacitus hath also. In cae-teris gen-
tibus quae regnantur.
Requietus. Requietum volunt arvum,
Colum.
Animi meliores requieti surgent, Sen.
Senectijs. yn^aa-ai;. Senecto cor-
pore. Sail.
SuccEsst;s. Cum omnia mea causi
mihi veiled successa, turn etiam tua,
Cic. Fil. ad Tyr. Lambinus has left
out milii successa ; hence Vossius com-
plains of his often acting thus. Bonis
successis. Plant, in Prol. Pseud,
TiTUBATUS. Vesligia titubata solo.
Triumphatus. Triumphatis Medis,
Hor.
Triumpbata Corinthus, Virg.
Vigilatijs. Vigilatae noctes, Ovid.
We meet also with Vigilandae noctes,
Suintil. And in like manner with
Evigilo. Evigilata consilia, Cic.
VIII. O/'Coenatus, Pransus, ^zw^ Per us.
Ramus and most of the grammarians insist, that ccenatusy pran
sttSj and potus, are active preterites of caeno, prandeo, and potOy in
the
Remarks om the Participles. 143
the same manner as ccenavi, prandi, and potavi. A great many
use them now in this sense ; Varro in Gell. lib. 2. c. 25. seems to
be of the same opinion, as well as Quintil. lib. 1. c. 4. On the
contrary, Vossius pretends, that pransus, ccenatus, and potuSy are
only simple nouns adjectives, and that we cannot say, pransus or
ccenatiis sum apud te, instead of prandi or ccenavi apud te ; though
we may very well say, addeth he, pransus or ccenatus te accedam.
Concerning which we have two things to examine: the first, whe-
ther jjransics and ccenatus are active preterites of prandeo, &c. ; the
second, whether they are participles and passive preterites, or
merely nouns adjectives ; and whether we must intirely reject this
Latin expression, condemned by Vossius, Ccenatus sum apud te.
1. In regard to the first point, it is evident, that pransus and
the others are not active preterites of prandeo, cceno, and poto.
Priscian gives them no other preterite than ccenavi, praiidi, potavi ;
and speaking of verbs which form their preterite by the participle,
he reckons ovXy gaudeOy audeo, soleo,Jido, and^o; sunt autem hccc
-SOLA, says he.
2. As to the second, it seems that Vossius ought not to have ab-
solutely condemned this expression, Ccenatus sum apud te, since we
meet with it still in Livy, Cum ccenali apud Vitellios essent, L. 2.
c. 4. Having supped with the Vitellii. And though other edi-
tions have, chn ccenatum esset, this does not hinder but ccenatum
may still be a participle, since it marks its time, and but it may
come from ccenatus, a, uniy as well as in that passage which Vossius
himself quotes from Cornelius Nepos, Nunquam sine aliqua lectione
aptid cum ccenatum est ; where, according to him, along with ccenu'
turn est we must necessarily understand to ccenare for its substantive.
But what led him into a mistake, was doubtless his not having suf-
ficiently considered, that strictly speaking, there are no verbs im-
personal. And therefore, if ccenatum est cometh from ccenatur, as
he imagines, ccenatus must come from ccenor, though this present
is not perhaps to be found. And Cicero has manifestly used it as
a passive participle, where he saith, Ccenato mihi etjam dormienti^
reddita est ilia epistola, ad Att. lib. 2. ep. 16. where ccenato signi-
fies the time past, as dormienti the present.
What we may therefore consider on this head, is, that ccenatus ,
pransus, and potus, not being active preterites, it would be a mis-
take to say, ccenatus stem hanc rem ; but being passive preterites,
we may say, ccenatus sum apud te, which does not hinder us from
saying also, ccenavi apud te, though in different senses of active and
passive, the latter being always better Latin, and more generally
used. But what causeth mistakes on this occasion, is the small dif-
ference there is sometimes between an active and a passive sense,
and our being accustomed to render one by the other. This made
Vossius believe that cceptus sum was active ; as when Cicero saith,
Oratio ccepta est fieri, for ccepit, in the preceding list : whereas
it would have been better if he had said, that cceptus sum is thea
put where ccepi might have been, though in a different sense, no-
thing being more easy than to change a passive into an active sense;
which has been the foundation, perhaps, of so many verbs com-
mon
144 Section V. Chap. I. Book VI.
mon in both significations, as may be seen above, p. 101. and
following ; as it has often given occasion to take the verbs put in an
absolute sense, for passives, as may be seen, p. 100.
X. IVheth&r Adventus viai/ be sometimes also an
Adjective.
This is Palmerius's opinion, which he hath endeavoured to de-
fend by some mistaken passages, as that from Terence's Phormio;
fntreni cxtimescam 7ibi in mentem ejiia adventi venit'^
Where every body may see that adventi is the substantive, o/his
eoynins. The reader will find this error refuted in Vossius, lih. 4-.
de Anal, who proves extremely well, that adventus is never other
than a substantive.
Section V.
Remarks on the indeclinable Particles.
Chapter I.
Remarks on the Adverbs.
I. That the Adverbs admit of comparison ; but 7iot of
number.
WE find some Adverbs that are compared ; as aatis, satius ;
secus, secius ; diu, diiiiius, diutissime ; and some others;
tliough there are very iew of these, as Probus hath observed. For
most of them, as melius^ doctiusy and the othere, are real nouns, as
we shall make appear hereafter.
But adverbs never admit of number, though Priscian was of a
different opinion. For properly speaking, age and agite are real
imperatives, like lege, legite. Age porrb, Cic. Ergo agite ojuvenes,
Virg. But what leads people into an error, as well on this as on
many other occasions, is their being translated by an adverb, Age,
ista omittamus, Cic. Well, let us lay those things aside. Age, dicat,
sino, Ter. Well, let him tell it. And for this reason we have left
them among the adverbs in the rudiments.
II. That what is taken for an Adverb is frequently
another part of speech.
But there are a great many more occasions, where grammarians
insist on a word's being an adverb, when it is another part of
speech ; as when we say, tanii, qtianti, magni; or when we answer
to local questions, est Roma;, abit Romam, venit Roma. And in
like manner, domi, militice, belti, which are real nouns; though
they have taken them for adverbs, because in Greek these ques-
tions are answered by adverbs.
This mistake is still more common, though perhaps it is more
excusable, in nouns that are used only in the ablative: for by
reason
Remarks on the Adverbs. 14J
reason that tliis case frequently expresseth the manner as well as
the adverb, thence it proceeds that they are oftentimes taken one
for the other. Such is sponte : for, according to Priscian, we find
it is a noun because of the adjective which is often joined to it,
sponte sua. Such are forte and fortuito. Forte fortuna, Ter. Cic.
Fors is even in the nominative in Hor. And with fortuito we are
to understand casu.
The same may be said in regard to alternis, which Priscian ranks
nevertheless among the adverbs ; as
Alternis dicetis, amant alterna CamcencB, Virg.
For alternis in this passage is no more an adverb than alterna ; but
it is an adjective, with which we are to understand vicibiis.
The same we may say of repente, the ablative of repensy which
Cicero has made use of; Hostium repens adventiis. For as we say,
libens for libenter ; recens for recenter ; so we say repens for repente^
as if we were to say repenter, though this word be not used. Re-
pente ought therefore to be taken as if it were rejyentino, sup. teni'
pore.
The same again may be said of eb, quo, primb, secundb, postremb ;
as we shall observe also hereafter in treating of the figure of Ellipsis.
The same also of amabo, which is never an adverb. Amabo,
quern peciis grammaticorum inter adverbia reponit, purum Sf putum
verbum est, says Scioppius. And there can be no doubt of this,
because, even where they pretend it is an adverb, it governs an
accusative. Amabo te, I pray you.
But when we say, Commigravit hue vicinice, Ter. Hue dementia;
pervenit, and the like, we take hue for hoc, and we understand ^chm.?,
negotium, or locum ; that is to say, Ad hoc genus demeyitice ; Ad hoc
locum vicinicB, &c. For heretofore they said hoc locum, just as we
say hccc loca.
Id eo are two words, though custom has made them but one,
taking it as an adverb. The same may be said of quomodo, postea,
inter ea, siquidem.
Magis, nimis, satis, or sat, are old nouns : for heretofore they
used to say, magis & mage, satis & sate, like potis & pote, for all
genders and numbers. See the remarks on the nouns, ch. 4. n. 1.
p. 86. and remarks on the verbs, ch. 3. n. 1. p. 115- Hence it is
that they govern likewise the genitive, nitnis insidiarum, Cic. and
the Hke. See the Syntax, rule 7. p. 18.
But sometimes these nouns are governed by a preposition under-
stood, as we have said of plus, in the Syntax, p. 58. As also of
nimium, plunmum, multum, moreover of tantum, quantum, Avhich
have been contracted into tarn, quam. So that if they be in the
accusative, we understand KATA, ad, per, &c. Ibi plurimum est,
Ter. that is, per plurimum, sup. tempus. Nimium vixit, that is, per
nimium tempus. But if they be in the ablative, we understand in.
Vixisse nimio satius est quam vivo'e. Plant, for in iiimio tempore.
Hence in St. John, Vulg. ed. chap. 8. Tu quis es? Principiwn
qui et loquor vobis. It is the same as if it were a principio ; t^v i^x^^'
says the Greek, sup. x«t«. And thus it is that Airanius in Cha-
nsius saith, Principium hoc oro, in animo ut sic statuas tuo, &c.
Vol. II. L Scioppius
146 , Section V. Chap. I. Book VI.
Scioppius hereby sheweth that we may indifferently say, terttum
consul, and tertio consul ; thougli the Romans formerly were so much
in doubt about it, that A. Gel), lib. 10. c. 1. takes notice, that
Pompey consulted the most learned men in the city, to know how
he should put it in dedicating the temple of Victory, and that the
opinions were divided ; Cicero, not caring to disoblige one party
naore than another, advised him to leave it abridged, TERT.
Varro likewise made some difference between these two modes of
expression, thinking that quarto, for instance, signified rather order
and place, and quartum time; of which St. Austin also takes notice
in his grammar, though in practice they are frequently con-
founded.
But the reason of the government cannot be at all contested,
since we find that some of them have even the preposition ex-
pressed. Solutua columharum volatus, est in multiim velocior, Plaut.
where he might have said multum alone for in midttcm, which sup-
poseth also negotium.
Nee puer Iliaca quisquam de gente Latinos
In tantum spe toilet avos, nee Romida q7iondain
Ullo so tantum tellus jactabit alumno, Virg.
Where we see that he has indifferently made use oftaniian, and in
iajitum, just as Juvenal hath :
In quantum silis at que fames S^ frigora poscunt.
And Livy, in tantum suam virtutem enituisse. And in another place,
quantum magis palres plebi se insinuabant, eo acriiis Tribuni contra
fendebant. And the like.
In a word, we may say with Linacer, that all words whatever
which preserve the form or appearance of a noun are not adverbs,
or at least they are such only by abuse and custom: and in order
thoroughly to understand their force and government, together
with the different connexions and transitions wherewith they are
used in discourse, we should ever consider them in their natural
and original signification. Which we shall now make appear in
the word quod, and in a list of some particular words that follow.
III. That Quod is neve?' any thing else but a Pro7ioun
Relative.
The word quod, which is often taken for an adverb, or for a
conjunction, is properly no more than the neuter of the relative
qui, qucc, quod. Which we muy consider here on two particular
occasions : one, where quod commonly includes the reason of the
thing ; and the other, where it is put after the verb, instead of the
ififinitive.
1. The causal quod, or which includes the reason of the thing,
is a pronoun relative, governed by a preposition understood. Thus
when Horace saith, for example, Incolumis Icetor quodvivit in urbcy
that is, lector ob id, or propter id negotium, quod est ; vivit in urbCj
taking it in an absolute sense ; or quod est to vivere in urbe. In
like manner in Terence, Sane quod tibi mine vir videatur esse hie,
nebnlo magnus est. Where quod is put for ad id quod, in regard to
•which, as to "what relates, &c. So true is this, that sometimes we
^ find
Remarks on the Adverbs. 147
find id and quod together. Lceta cxclamant ; venit, id quod me repente
aspexerant, Ter. where, according to Donatus, he means propter
id quod, &c. And Cicero has used it in the same manner, Teneo
ab acciisando vix me herade : aed tamen teneo : vel id quod nolo cum
Pompeio pugnare, vel quodjudices Jiullos habemus. Ad Q. Fr. lib. 3.
ep. 2. where having put id quod in the first member, and only
fjuod in the second, he plainly intimates, tliat when this id is not
expressed, it ought to be understood. True it is that Lambinus
has struck out this zV/, like a great many other things, which he
did not rightly understand; but it is in the ancient copies, as
Vossius witnesseth.
And INIanutius, in his commmentary on this epistle, observes the
same thing, adding, that this sort of expunctions, which have been
made in ancient authors, are entirely owing to the rashness of those,
quorum aures imperitce antiquum, non tamen satis usu pervulgatam lo-
quendi rationem, nonferrent. Which he further corroborates by this
other example from Terence, Id quod est consimilis moribus, convincet
Jacile ex te esse natum : and by this from Livy, Id quod erat vetusta
conjunctio cum Macedonibus : complaining afterwards, that the per-
sons employed on the Great Thesaurus of the Latin tongue, have
inserted a multitude of things of this sort, which are • often apt to
puzzle us in the perusal of authors.
2. The word quod, which is put after a verb instead of the infi-
nitive, is also a relative. But it is frequently deprived of its pro-
nominal use, and scarce retains any other than that of uniting the
preposition where it is, to another ; as we have shewn in the Gene-
ral Grammar, chap. 9. Though this does not hinder it even then
from having its antecedent expressed or understood. For example,
when Cicero saith. Cum scripsisset quod me cuperet ad urbem venire :
And Plautus, Sciojavi Jilius quod amet mens, instead of scio Jilium
amare meum ; it is plain that quod then refers to the thing known,
and to the verb scio ; and that it is just as if we were to say, Hoc or
illud scio, nempe quod, &c. where quod would evidently refer to this
hoc (sup. negotiumj as to its antecedent: thus Martial,
Hoc scio quod scribit nidla puclla tibi.
Where he might have put, Scio quod nulla scribit tibi, for nullam
scribere tibi, though the word quod would not then have changed its
nature. In regard to which we might produce an infinite number
of the like examples ; as when Seneca says,
Probo quod non sit pudica.
And Horace,
Quod qtianto plura parhti,
Tanto plura cupis, mdlinefaterier audcs ?
And the declaimer against Sallust, Credo quod omnec tui similes inco*
lumes in hac urbe vixissent. And Claudian,
Non credit quod bruma rosas innoxia servet.
And Ulpian, Sufficit mulieri notumfacere quod sit prcegnans. And
Cicero, Illud extremum est, quod recte vivendi ratio meliures efficit ;
where quod is constantly a relative ; though these are modes of
speaking that might all be rendered by the infinitive.
l2 1^-
148
Section V. Chap. I.
Book VI.
IV. Jllicthcr Quod may be put like the Greek "Ot»,
after the Verbs.
What wc have been saying, is almost sufficient to decide this
question, though Sanctius has pretended absolutely to deny it; and
the whole reason lie produces, which he attempts to prove by a vast
number of examples, is, that quod is never any thing more than a
relative. But since we have made appear above, that even when
it comes after the verb instead of the infinitive, where it undoubt-
edly stands for the bV/, it is then as a relative; Sanctius's argument
can give no room to doubt of this use of the word. We shall
inquire more particularly elsewhere into the nature of ot<, and
we shall demonstrate that it is oftener a pronoun than the Latin quod,
though this does not hinder them from being easily put one for the
other. Hence Linacer censures those translators, who, to avoid
rendering this ort by qtiod, have recourse to uncouth circumlocu-
tions. And Vossius, in his book de constructioi^e, observes, that
Cicero, Plin}', Ovid, Plautus, Seneca, Horace, and the other pure
authors, have not scrupled to make use of this quod; though in
his smaller grammar he says it is not very good Latin, nor fit to be
imitated. But Manutius, in sundry places, and particularly on the
last epistle of the ninth book to Atticus, and on the 28th of the
7th book ad Jiamiiiares, establishes this use of quod, as a thing be-
yond all manner of doubt. And though Henry Stephen, in his
Thesaurus on the particle wf, has called it in question, yet we find
that in his book de Latin, fatso stcspecta, which he wrote afterwards,
and where he treats the point expressly, he has established it by a
multitude of authorities. So that it would be quite unreasonable
to make any doubt of the latinity of this expression ; though we
may grant that it would be oftentimes more elegant to render it
by the infinitive ; since Cicero, translating divers passages of Plato,
where or; was expressed, has oftener made use of the latter than ol"
the former.
Now the reason why these expressions of the infinitive, or of the
word quod, are equivalent in sense, and a reason which no one that
I know of hath hitherto observed, is because the infinitive is among
the moods, what the 'elative is among the pronouns, and their
proper office is to join the proposition to which they belong, to
some other; as may be seen more particularly in the General Gram-
mar, part 2. chap. 9 and 11.
V. Rejiiarkable significations of some Adverbs, whei^e
the origin of several words is pointed out.
the verb to which it was joined.
And it is true that we find in Pacu-
vius, (In armor. Jud.J Segue ad
Itidos jam inde ahh'inc exerceant.
But every where else we find it
only for the time past. And Passerat's
Calepin is mistaken in saying that
Sosipater approves of it for both
tenses, for he does not mention a
word about it, (though he quotes
the
Abhinc, properly signifieth ab hac
die, so that it only denotes the
term ; and the time is afterwards
put in the accusative or the alila-
tive. Abhinc annis, or annot (juinde-
cim, iic.
This induced Erasmus and Sciop-
pius to believe that it might refer
to the time past and to the future,
and that t])is depended iotirely on
Remarks on the Adverbs.
Ug
the above-given authority of Pacu-
vius) but speaks only of two cases
which it may govern.
True it is that hinc refers to two
tenses, but not abhinc. Me nihilo
magis conspiciet, qudm si hinc ducentos
annos fuerim mnriuus. Plant,
Aliqvid convasussem, alque hinc
me conjecissem protinus in pedes.
Ten
Adamussim. See lower down, Par-
ti m.
Adhuc. See lower down, Hactenus.
Admodum. As the Latin word mo-
dus may be taken either for the
quantity or the quality, so the ad-
verb admodum, which is derived from
thence, signifies sometimes a great
deal, and sometimes almost or abovt.
Non admodum grandis natu, Cic. not
very old. Curio nihil admodum scie-
bat literarum. Id. scarce knew any
thing. Exacto admodum mense Fe-
bruario, Liv. being almost expired.
Sex millia hostium ca:sa, quinque ad-
modum Romanorum, only five thou-
sand Romans.
Antehac. Heretofore, that is, ante htEC
tempora : for the ancients used to say
hac for htec.
CoMiNus, is not only taken for the
place, but also for the time. So
that, as Servius observeth, it not
only signifies ex propinquo, near j but
likewise slatim, immediately, in-
stantly.
-jaclo qui semine cominus ana
Insequilur, Virg. 1. Georg.
Some have questioned whether it did
not govern a case, and therefore might
not pass for a preposition, as when
Propertius saith,
Aut celer agrestes cominus ire sitos.
And in another place,
Flumindque /Emonio cominus isse
viro.
But we may safely affirm it does not,
because in the first example it is an
ellipsis of the preposition ad, just as
when Virgil saith,
Sitietiles ibimus Afros, for ad Afros.
And in the second, it is only a rela-
tive dative, which comes in every
where, just as
It clamor ccelo, and the like.
Cum or Quum, is an old accusative of
3ui, qua, quod. See above, p. 92.
Cur, is an abbreviation of Cure : and
cure, of cui rei. Plautus has put it
at full length,
— ^— Vitcum legioni dedi,
Funddsque eo prasternebant folia
' furfuri:
Cui rei f Ne ad fundas viseus ad-
hcpresceret.
But as we have shewn when treating
of the declensions, and here above,
p. 83, that heretofore the dative
being always like the ablative, they
afterwards struck out the ?, musa
for musai : in the same manner they
said cur, or rather quor, according to
the ancients, for cure or quare ; there-
fore cur or quare are originally and in
their signification the same thing.
Now when we say quare, it is gene-
rally an ablative, and we are to un-
derstand the preposition de or in,
which is sometimes expressed. Sua
de re obsccro ? Plautus. In ed re
marimas Diis gratias agere, Corn.
Nepos. Which does not hinder but
cur may be also taken for the dative
cui rei, as we have seen in the above-
quoted passage of Plautus.
Hence it appears why it is the same
thing to say, for instance, Mirabar
quid esset cur mild nihil scriberes, or
quare nihil scriberes, or even quod tu
nihil scriberes, Cic. The two former
modes of expression coinciding with
the construction of the ablative, and
the latter with that of the accusa-
tive, quod standing there for propter
quod.
Dein cometh from Deinde. Now
inde, as well as hinc, is said of time
as well as place; and therefore dei7i,
or deinde, is taken for postea, when it
refers to time, signifying either the
preterite or the future ; or for conse-
quenter, when it refers to place. Acce-
pil conditionem ; dein quastum occipit,
Ter. Factum esse non negat, <SC deinde
facturum autumat. Id.
Hactentjs, is said in regard to place,
being formed of hac (sup. fine) and
tenus. Hac Trojana tenusfueritfor-
iuna secula, Virg. hitherto. Hactenus
fuit quod a me scribi posset, Cic. hi-
therto. Sed hccc hactenus. Id. but we
have said enough of that.
Adhuc, on the contrary, signi-
fies time, because it is taken for
nd hoc, sup. tempus ; or in the plural,
ad hac, as we find it in many edi-
tions of Cicero, sup. tempora. And
this adverb is said as well of the
time present as past. £j7 adhuc non
Verres, sed Mutius, C'lC. Adhvc hoc
erant, C\c. Adhuc non feci, \d. Ad-
huc unafU &xte epistolam acceperam, Id.
&c.
Deinceps cometh from dein and capio,
and signifieth the succession and se-
ries of things. DUDUM
150
Section V. Chap. I.
Book VI.
DuuuM comes from diu dum, long since ;
nevertheless it sometimes expressetli
a thing lately past, as Incertiui tnullo
sum quum dudiim, Ter. 1 am now
more dubious thaii before.
Edepol, or Kfoi,. See lower down the
figure of Ellipsis, list '2.
Etiam is a word compounded of et
jam, and has oftentimes nearly the
same signification as the two sepa-
rate parts. Like Quoniam for quo
jam, where the n has been added to
prevent a kind of Itiatus, the i con-
sonant having had a softer sound
with the ancients than with us. So
that quo, properly speaking, is tlie
ablative of the manner or cause.
ExAMUSsiM. See Parlim lower down.
ExTKMPLO, as Eloco, signifies imme-
diately, uj.on tk'e spot. For ternplum
was taken for all sorts of places un-
covered. Alii exlemplo agendum: alii
differendum in veris principium cense-
banl, Liv. But of eloco they have
formed il'ico or illicu. Though we
likewise meet with it disjoined, ex
loco, or ex hoc loco, in Plautus.
Jamdudum signifies a larger space of
time than cudum; as jamprid£m
than pridem; as jamdiu than diu ;
and they are used in regard to
time present as well as past. Jam-
dudum expectant, Cic. Ka, quam
jamdudnm traclabamus stabiliias. Id.
iJut Seneca has put it for jam jam in
the present ; monslrum jamdudum a-
vehe, in Med. Take away this mon-
ster quickly. And Virgil, Jamdudum
sumile pamas, Miu 2. Punish me
this in^itant.
Wagnop£RE is a word compounded of
two ablatives, magna and opere.
Mane is an old ablative, like sero, tern-
fori, ice. For they used to say ma-
nis, kind and favourable, the con-
trary of which was immanis, cruel
and wicked, which is still preserved ;
and so they said Dii manes. In this
manner that time which succeeds the
night they called mane, as being more
agreeable than darkness. Hence we
likewise find multo nione, Cic. bene
mane, Ibid, very early. See Vol. 1.
p. 1C7.
MeCASTOR, MEIIF.RCULES, MEDIUS FIDIUS.
See the figure of Ellipsis, list 2.
NiMiRUM is composed of ne and mirum ;
as much as to say non mirum.
Glim is taken for ;^1J .^vts of time.
For the past indefinitely; loqueian-
tur olim sic, Cic. For a long while
siace; Olim non stilun sumsi, Plin.
Jun. // is a long lime since I wrote.
For a little while ago ; Alium esse
censes nunc me al(jue olim ciim dabam,
Ter. Different f I om what 1 was late-
ly. For the present ; Ul tandemper-
cipias gaudium quod ego olim pro le
non lemere prxsum", Plin. Jun. that
is, now, according to Robert Stephen.
lor the future ; Forsan ei hizc olim
meminisse juvabit, Virg. For an un-
determinate time ; Ut pueris olim
dant crustula blandi doctures. Hot.
do sometimes giie. For always ;
//oc tibi priTvalidas olim, multoque
JJuenlfs sufficiet Bacclio vites, Virg.
always.
Partim is ail old accusative, like
navim, puppim, which must be go-
verned by Kara. Heoce we say par-
tim eorum, the same as pars eorum,
Cic. Sed eorum partim in pompa,
partim m acie illustres esse voluerunt,
2. de Orat. speaking of the disci-
ples of Isocrates. But some of them,
says he, wanted to make a figure in
the schools, (in pompcij and others at
the bar {in acie).
The same must be said of ada-
mussim, which we read in Varro, 1.
de R. R. and of examussim, which is
in Plautus.
Parum is also a noun as well as pau«
LUM, which supposeth ad or xara.
They come from vaZ^oq, paucus, or
7rai/|ov, from whence striking out the
letter v, they made parum, and
changing the f into X, paulum. Par-
turn comes also from thence, by
transposing the letter r.
These nouns also are to be found
ill dift'errnt cases. In the noniin.
Parum est quod homines fffelUsti. Cic.
sup. negotium. Parum meministi quid
concesseris, Id. for ad parum. Like-
wise, J arum muUi, to signify few.
Parum scepe, seldom. Paulum hu-
manmr, &c.
Peuetentim comes from pede tendendo,
little by little, insensibly.
PtREGRE is taken for different places;
where we are, peregre ahsxim ; where
we are going to, peregre aheo ; where
we come from, peregre domumredeo.
Perendie, after to-morrow, is used
for perempld die, as Cliarisius ob-
serveth.
Ferinde denotes resemblance, Omnes
res perinde sunt, ut agas, ut eas magni
facias, Plant. Things are just ac-
cording to the opinion we have of
them. Mit/tridates corpore ingens per-
inde armatus, Sal.
Pessum
Remarks on the Adverbs.
151
PjESsuM is used for pensum. See the
Preterites, vol. 1 . p. 287.
Pr^quam. Pr^eot.
Proquam. Pbqut.
See the chapter of Conjunctions,
lower down.
Protinus is as if it were porro ienits,
and therefore denotes continuity of
I place or time. Protinus aerii mellis
c(flestia dona exequar, Virg. immedi-
ately. En ipse capellas' prolinus o'ger
ago. Id. I drive them far from
hence. Ciim protinus ulraque tellus
una foret, Virg. signifying that Si-
cily was formerly joined to Italy.
QuAM. See the chapter of Conjunctions
hereafter.
QuANDOQUE is an abbreviation for
quandocunque. Ind/gnur quandoque
bonus dormitat Homerus, Hor. that
is, quandocunque. Suandoque ara-
bituT, Colum. As often as they shall
plow. And it generally bears this
signification, as Sanctius observeth,
unless it be resolved into two words,
O rus quando ego te aspiciam, quan-
doque licebit, &c. Hor, for &! quando
licebit.
QoiN serves sometimes to interrogate,
sometimes to increase and extend
the sense, and sometimes to excite.
On all these occasions it is put for
qui, and ne, or non. And then qui
is the ablative of the relative, for
quo sup, modo.
3uin vocSsli hominem ad canam,
Plaut. that is, qui non, or quomodo
?ion, Why did not you call him ?
how comes it that you did not call
him ? 2uid stas lapis ? quin accipis f
Ter. 2ziin tu hoc audis ? Id. Quin
morere 9 Virg. &c.
Sometimes we meet with it at
full length. Effice qui uxor detur
tihi ; ego idefficiam mild qui ne detur.
Ter. where even according to Dona-
tus, qui stands for quemadmodum,
and ne for non. Suid nunc agimus,
quin redeamus. Id. that is immo redea-
mus, i5C quid ni.
Hie non est locus,
Quin tu alium quaras, cut, &c.
Plant, and the like.
Quo is ever a relative, and may be
taken either for the dative, or abla-
tive singular, or for the accusative
plural. Se the chapter of Pronouns,
p. 94.
Quoad. Tursellinus saith that quoad
hoc, or quoad illud, is not Latin ;
but that we should say quod ad hoc
Rectal, or quod ad illud perdnet, O-
thers nevertheless admit of this word
quoad for quantum ad, which they
prove by a passage of the civil Law,
book 41. tit.- 1. § 3. Nee interest
(quoad feras, bestius dT volucres) m-
trum in suo quisque (undo capiat an in
alieno. The great Thesaurus of the
Latin tongue, printed at Lyons in
1573, which is the best edition ;
and all Stephen's dictionaries, even
the last, that of HoDorat, make
particular mention of quoad in this
sense, which they support by this
law of Caius ; and it is true that it
occurs in some editions of the body
of civil law, as in that of the widow
Cbevalon, in 1552.
But in all probability that is a
mistake, so that we ought to read
quod ad, as we find it in the Flo-
rentine Pandects printed from the
famous original of Florence, which,
is perhaps the best and the oldest
manuscript in Europe, where we
find this law thus worded, 2uod
ad feras, vestias, &c. In like man-
ner we read it in the edition of
Christopher Plantin in 1567, and
iu all the best printed copies, as
those of Contius or Le Conte, Mer-
linus, Nivellus, Dionysius Godofre-
dus, and others; except that they
put bestias, where the former have
vestias, with a v, concerning which
see the Treatise of Letters, book 9.
However, should we be inclined
to approve of the word quoad, which
some able moderns have made use of
instead of qi.antum ad, as Scioppius,
Sanctius, and others ; we might do
it even by the authority of Cicero
himself, who frequently makes use
of quoad ejus facere poteris ; quoad
ejus fieri possit, &c. where quoad
stands for quantum ad, and facere or
fieri for a noun governed by ad in
the accusative, which afterwards
governeth ejus in the genitive, sup.
rei or negotii. So that quoad ejus
factre potero, for example, is as
much as to say, quantum ad factum
ejus rei potero ; and in like manner
the rest.
Thus in the second epistle of the
third book, writing to Appius, he
saith, Vides ex S, C. provinciam esse
habendam : si earn, quoad ejus facere
poteris, quam expeditissimam miki tra-
dideris, facilior erit mihi qiiasi decur-
sus mei temporis. And in another
place, Ut quoad ejus fieri possit, pre^-
sentia tux desiderium mco laboremi-
nuatur.
152 Section V. Chap, II. Book VI.
nualur. Id. Nee inlermillas, quoad ejus power. Which is sufficient to shew
reifricerepoleris, (so far as you are that we ought not easily to censure
able) scnbere ad me, Id. This ex- guoad hoc or illud, 'tnste&d of quantum.
pression being the same as if it were ad, though the safest way is to make
i7i quantum ad : and the same may be use of quod ad.
said of the rest. For that quoad of Quod is always a relative. See the
itself may have the same force as third article, p. 146,
quantum ad, there is hardly any pos- Quum. See Cum.
sibiiity of doubting: for as quantum Scilicet, is said for scire licet, in the
is an accusative governed by xara, same manner as videlicet for videre
or in understood, according to what /ice<, and i licet for eoi /»«/.
hath been already said, n. '2. so }uo is Venum, which is taken for an adverb,
an old accusative plural, like ambn, or for the supine of veneo, is only a
governed also by xari, as it likewise noun substantive. See the Preterites,
is in this passage of Cicero, quoad po- vol. 1. 286.
iuil resiUil, i<f>' 'da-m, to the best of bis
Chapter II.
Remarks on the Prepositions.
THE prepositions that have no case are not adverbs, says
Sanctius, because they have always their case understood ;
as, Lorigo post tempore venit, that is, Lungo tempore post id tempus.
But we have shewn in the nineteenth rule, that there are a great
many words supposed to be prepositions, which are otherwise, S^c.
A preposition, as the very name implies, ought always to pre-
cede its case in the natural order of construction. If it followeth,
this is by means of a figure called Anastrophe, as Glandem atque
cuhiiia propter pncrnabant, Hor. Thus qnamobrem is for ob quant
rem ; qunpropter for propter qnce or qua ; quocirca for circa quod, &c.
Prepositions of both cases may be joined in composition, not
only to the other parts of speech, but moreover to themselves ; as,
Inante diem quintiun Cat. Novemb. Cic. Exante diem Nan. Jun. Cic.
Insuper his, Virg. Insuper nlienos rogos, Lucr. We meet even
with postavite in Varro ; circiimsecus in Appul. incircum in Macer.
Jurisc. And these compounded prepositions may be likewise
joined to a verb, as insuperhahcre in Gellius, Appul. and Papi-
nian, for to despise, or to set slight on a thing. Now in regard to
the regimen of these prepositions, we must say either that they
govern the same case as the simple, which is last in composition, as
Exante diem quintum idus Oct. Liv. or that there are, in such case,
two sentences included in one, so that this signifieth, ex die ante
diem qui>dum, &c.
Prepositions are sometimes derived from a noun ; as circum from
circus, secundum from secundus ; for whatever is next a thing, comes
after it. Hence some are of opinion, that when we find p)rcesente
testibus, absente nobis, and the like, absentc and prcrsente are become
prepositions, and have the same force as clam nobis, coram testibus,
&c. And Vossius seems to favour this notion ; though we may also
explain these phrases by a Syllepsis, as we shall further observe
when we come to treat of the figures of construction.
Remarks on the Conjunctions. 153
Chapter III.
Remarks on the Conjunctions.
I. That the Conjunctions have not alzvays the ^ame thing
before as after them.
IN figurative syntax the conjunctions do not connect the words
so much as the sense ; and therefore they have not always the
same case after as before ; yet if we resolve the phrase by the sim-
ple construction, we shall find they have always like cases : for emi
centum aureis ^ pluris, implies emi centum aureis, Sf pretio pluris
teris. Est domusjratris ^ mea, that is to say, Est domusjratris Sf
domus men. So when we say, Malo esse Roma quam Athenis, it
means, Malo esse in urbe RomcB quhm in Athenis. But when Boe-
tius saith, Mulier reverendi admodum vultus, Sf ocidis ardentibus ;
we are to understand cmw?, that is, Etjnulier cum oculis ardentibus.
And in like manner the rest.
It is the same in regard to the interrogation : for if I answer in
the same case, it is because I understand the same verb : but if I
suppose another, I shall answer in another case ; and even sup-
posing the same verb, if the government be changed : Quanti emis-
ti ? Grandi pectin ia : and the like.
Conjuncti-ons have not always the same degree of comparison
after as before : Homo Sf mei observantissimus, Sf sui juris dignita-
tisque reiinens, Cic. nor the same tense and moods ; Nisi me lactdsses
amantem, Sf Jalsa spe producer es, Ter. Conjidebam ac mihi per-
suaseramjore, &c.
II. Which Conjunctions require rather the Indicative,
and which the Subjunctive.
We have already seen, p. 108. that these two modes are com-
monly taken for one another. Nevertheless they are sometimes
determined by the conjunctions.
Quanquam, etsi, fametsi, are more commonly joined with the in-
dicative, though they are sometimes found with the subjunctive.
Quanquam Volcatio assentirentm; Cic. Etsi illis plane orbatus essem,
Cic. Etsi pars aliqua ceciderit, Caes.
Quamvis, licet, etiamsi: Quajido, or ciim (for since) quandoquidem,
are generally joined with the subjunctive ; yet we sometimes find
them with the indicative ; Me quamvis pietas Sf cura moratur, Hor.
tvhich occurs frequently in this poet's writings. Nam ista Veritas
etiamsi jucunda nan est, mihi tamen grata est, Cic. Quando te id video
desiderare, Cic. Since I see that, Sfc. Quandoquidem tu mihi affuisti,
&c. Id.
■ Quandoquidem est ingenio bono.
Cumque huic veritus est optima adolescenti facer e injuriam, Ter.
Quod, whether it be used m giving reason, as we have already
observed on the chapter of Adverbs, n. 3. p. HG. or whether
it
,W
154 Section V. Chap. III. Book VI.
it be put after the verb instead of the infinitive, as in the following
n. is joined both with the subjunctive and the indicative, because
on all those occasions it is a relative. See the places here quoted.
Ut for that, commonly takes the present subjunctive, if it has
a verb of the present or future tense before it : In eo vis maxima est
tit simus ii qui haberi voiumtis, Cic. Ut i}i perpetua jjace essepossilis,
providebo, Cic.
If it be a preter tense, we put the imperfect subjunctive after ut :
Tantum cepi dolorem, jit consolatione egerem, Cic.
Nevertheless if the action signified by the preter tense still con-
tinueth, wc may put the present after ul : Ornre jnssit ad se ut xe-
rtias, Ter. Because she has desired it, and desires it still.
Ut tor post quam requires the indicative.
Ut siomis in Ponto, terj'rigore constitit Ister, Ovid.
Since we have been.
In like manner Donec for qunmdiu :
Do7iec erisjcelix, midtos mimerabis amicos, Ovid.
DuM likewise denoting the present, Dum apparatur virgo, Ter.
"While they are dressing her.
But Dum, signifying, provided, or until, requires the subjunc-
tive. Dam prosim tibi, Ter.
Tertia dum Lntio regnantem viderit castas, Virg.
Jamdudum and Jampridem are more elegantly joined with
tlie indicative, when an action is implied, which still continueth.
Jamdudum animus est in patinis, Ter.
In like manner Jam oliim. Olim jam, imperator, inter virtutes
tuas, livor locum qucerit. Quint.
Quasi and ceu vero for quasi vero, are put with the subjunc-
tive, Quasi nan norimus nos inter nos, Ter. Ceu vero nesciam, Plin.
As if I did not know, S)-c.
In the same manner Tanquam for quasi. Tanquam Jiesciamus,
Phn. Likewise tanquam si. Suadco videos tanquam si tua res agalur,
Cic. But tanquam for sicut governs the indicative. Tanquam
Philosophorum hnbent disciplince ex ipsis vocabula, Ter.
Perinde by itself frequently assumes the indicative, Hac ipsa
omnia perinde sunt, tit aguntur, Cic. But perinde ac si is ever joined
to the subjunctive. Perinde ac si virtute xncissent, Caes.
Ne, when used for a prohibition, is joined either to the impera-
tive, or the subjunctive. Ne crucia ie, Ter. Don't torment youi'-
self. Ne post cotrferus cidpam in me. Id.
If it be used in interrogating, the same as an and num, it chuses
tlie indicative.
Quid puer Ascanius? Superaine <^' vescitur aura? JEn. 3.
If it serves only to express some doubt, it requires the subjunc-
tive. Honestumnefactu sit an turpe dubitant, Cic.
Hereto we might also add ne for ttt ne, which always requires the
subjunctive, in favour of id, which is understood. We shall see
examples hereof in the next chapter.
The other conjunctions generally follow the nature of the dis-
course, sometimes admitting one mood, sometimes another, ac-
cording as the context and the several particles seem to require ;
which
Remarks on the Conjuncttons. 155
wliich is easier learnt by the use of authors, than by any instructions
we are capable of giving.
III. Of Negatke Conjunctions.
Nobody can be ignorant that where there are two negatives in
the Latin language, they frequently destroy each other, and there-
fore are equivalent to an affirmation : yet we must here observe,
that the contrary oftentimes happeueth. Hence we see that
Plautus hath, Neque nescio, for nescio ; and Terence, nee nemo for
et nemo : And in another place, Ne temere facias, neque tu hand
dicas tibi non prcedicium. And Virgil,
At non infelix animi Fhcenissa, nee unquam
Solvitur in so77inos, oculisve aut pectore noctem
Accipit Mn. 4.
And Cic. Negabunt id nisi sapienti non posse concedi. And in another
place, Neminem unquam non re, 7ion verbo, non vultu denique offendi.
And Livy, Ut nemo non lingua, non manu promtior in civitate habe-
retur.
But this is still more usual as well as more elegant, when the
negative is put for the disjunctive "je/; Nidlam esse art em nee di-
cendi, nee differ endi putant, Cic. Non me earminibus vineet, nee Or-
pheus, nee Linus, Virg. Nulla neque turpi, neqiiejlagitioso qucestu, Cic.
Qiianquam negent, nee virtutes, nee vitia crescere, Cic. And this
remark is still more considerable in the Greek language, where
we sometimes meet with three negatives successively, which only
strengthen the negation, as we have shewn in the New Method of
learning that tongue.
The conjunction Nec is taken for Sj non. But sometimes it
joins a thing, and makes the signification thereof fall upon another
in the same tense, as in Virgil, speaking of an old horse that
ought to be discharged from labour, Hunc abde domo, nec turpi
i^nosce senectcc ; that is, Huyic abde domo, S) puree senectce non turpi.
Which some not rightly understanding, imagined it implied a con-
tradiction.
After 7i.on modo, we sometimes understand also a non. See the
figure of Elhpsis, in the next book, n. 11.
IV. Some other remarks concerning particular Con-
junctions.
Licet is properly never any thing but a verb, as per me licet,
sup. tibi, ox Vobis, &c. and it is also made use of in compliances,
as if one should say, veniam ad te? the other would answer, licet,
you may, I agree, I permit you. See the Preterites, vol. 1. p. 306.
Therefore we may make use of this verb in all these tenses,
Licet facias : Licebit repotia celebret, Hor. Licebit curras, Hor. Li-
cuitfaceres, &c. where we see that the reason why licet governs the
subjunctive, is because ut is understood. And indeed we never
find any other than the subjunctive mood in classic authors ; which
made Sanctius and Alvarez believe that the rule was without ex-
ception ; though in civilians we read, Licet svbjecta transactio est,
IJlp. Licet non fuit damnatio secuta. Mod.
^ -^ . Nisi
}56 Section V. Chap. III. Book V^I.
Nisi is oftentimes taken for xed, as IVIanutius and Stevech have
observed, Eodem modo, nnseres alito, nisi priiis data biberc, Cato, for
sedprius. Nisi utperiadumjiat, visam quid velity Plaut. Ei liberorum
nisi divitifV, nihil erat, Id. Qimmobrcm -^ P. nescioy nisi mild Deos
satis ncsciofuissc irntos, qui aiiscultaverim, Tcr. Nisi Poljiliimmeum
multis modisjam expecto, ut redent domum, Id. Nihil mihi gratius fa-
cere potcs, 7iisi tamen id erit gratissimum, si qucc tibi mandant confe-
ceris, Cic. Tuas litems expcctabam : nisi illud qiiidem mutari, si ali-
ier est, ut oportet, non video posse, Id. Omnino hoc eodem modo ex hac
parte Jiunt, nisi illud erat infinitum, Id. Nee cur ilk tantopere con-
iendat video, nee cur tu repugnes : nisi tamen multuminus tibi concedi
potest quam illi ; laborare sine causa. Id. Cohortibus armatis septus se-
natus, nihil aliudvere potest decernere, nisitimere. Id. Ep. ad Octav.
Quod qucB cccteri miserias vocnnt,voluptati habuisset : nisi tamen Re-
pub, bene atque decore gesta, Sail. And in Spanish nothing so com-
mon as to see their sino (which properly answers to nisi) put for
sed.
Now this remark helps to explain several obscure passages not
only in profane, but in ecclesiastic authors. As in this celebrated
expression of Pope Stephen to S. Cyprian, Nihil innovetur, nisi
quod traditum est, which some of the learned moderns pretend to
be corrupted, and that we ought to read in id quod traditum est.
But nothing can be clearer or better expressed, if we consider that
nisi is there for sed. Nihil innovetur ; sed quod traditum est ; Let
there be no innovation, but abide by tradition.
In like manner in the Old Testament of the Vulgate edition ; when
Naaman, after his cure, saith to the prophet ; Non enim faciei ul-
tra servus tuus holocaustum nut victimam diis alienis, nisi Domino soli ^
for sed Domino soli. And in the New Testament also of the Vulgate
edit, quos dcdisti mihi, custodivi : ^ nemo ex iis periit, nisijilius per-
ditionis, John 17. that is, sedfliusperdilionis. For Christ is speak-
ing of his elect, to whom this son of perdition did not belong.
And in St. Paul. Miror quod sic tam cito transferimini ab eo qui vos
vocavit in graiiam Christi, in aliud evangelium, quod non est aliud :
nisi sunt aliqui qui vosconturbant. Gal. 1. that is, sed sunt aliqui, &c,
Scientes quod non justificatur homo ex operibus legis ; nisi per fdem
Jesu Christi, Ibid, that is, sed per Jidem J. C. Again, Fanes
propositionis comedit, quos non licebat ei edere, nequeiisquicum eo erant:
. nisi soils sacerdotibus. Matt. 12. Et pnvceptum est iUis nelcederent
fcenum terrfP, neque omne viride, neque omnem arborem : nisi tanttim
homines qui non habent signum Dei infrontibussuis, Apocal.9. Non
intrabit in earn ali quod coin quinatum, aut abominationem facie^is &;
mendacium ; nisi qui scripti sunt in libro vitcc agni, lb. 21 . Unde emm
scismidier, si virum salvum fades ; <Sr nnde scis vir, si mulierem sal-
vanifacies? Nisi unicuique divisit Dominus, ila nmbulet, 1 Cor. 17.
for sed umisqnisque ita ambulet, sicut illi divisit Dominus : But let
every man behave according to the gift he has received of the
Lord.
Now these turns of expression will not surprise us, if we con-
Bider the great relation between these two particles, sed &; nisi.
Hence
Remarks on the Conjunctions. 157
Hence it is that the Hebrews express them by the same word o
OX chi irn, or kV dX im lo, which is sometimes rendered by lav /xyj,
nisi ; as in Gen. c. 22. v. 26. sometimes by aXKa., sed, as in the
same book, c. 24. v. 28. and sometimes by a^x' ii, as in the 2d
book of Kings, chap. 5. v. 17. Saint Paul hath also said, T/? an \^l
natX©', rts Je 'ATToXXftif, aW' ig ^/axovo/ Vt uv iTris-sva-oilc ; 1 Cor. 3. 5.
^?</5 igittir est Paulus, quis vera Apollo, nisi ministri per quos credi-
distis ? And the rest in the same manner.
QuAMVis, says Sanctius, cometh from quantumvis ; whereby
we may judge, continues he, on what occasion we ought to make
use of this particle, because it always includes a mode of com-
plying or granting, and it can never be used, but where you may
also make use of quantumvis. Quamvis multa meis exiret victima
septisy Virg. that is, quantumvis midta. Quamvis parvis Italics
latebris contentus essem^ Cic. Se beneficium dedisse arbitrantur, cum
ipsi quamvis magnum acceperinty Cic. Quamvis sublimes debent
humiles metucre, Piiaedr. Men, though never so great, ought to be
afraid of little people.
We frequently meet with these two conjunctions joined toge-
ther. And thus it is very common to find two particles that have
the same force, or a similar signification ; as ergo igitur, post hoc
deiUf Dein postea, Tandem denique,quiae7iim, quidem certef JExtemplo
simul, En ecce, quippe quia, Olim quondam^ Tandem itaque, quia nam^
Nam cur. Max deinde, &c. Examples hereof are common in Plau-
tus, Terence, Lucan, and even in Cicero, and Caesar. Itaqzie ergo
amantur. Ten and the like, which we may always refer to the
figure of pleonasm, as well as when there are two negatives instead
of one, as Nemo nullus, neque nescio, nulla nequcy and others, of
which we have already made mention.
But when we say, Etsi quamvis, quamvis licet, it is not pro-
perly a pleonasm, since t'lese words have a different signification :
as appears by putting quantumvis instead of quamvis ; besides, as
we have already observed, licet is never any thing but a verb.
Thus we find it in Cicero, Etsi quamvis rionfueris suasor, approba-
tor certejuisli. And in another place, quamvis licet excellas ; quam-
vis enumeres jnultos licet, and the like, which are no more pleo-
nasms, than when he says against Verres, quamvis callide, quamvis
audacter, quamvis impudenter facer e.
The conjunction Quam, comes also from quantum : and quan-
quam, as Sanctius observeth, is an accusative for quantum quan-
tum, as likewise tanquam, for tantum quantum : Thus tarn deest
avaro quod habet, quhm quod non habet, Hor. that is, Tantum deest,
quantiim non habet, for in tantum, &c. pursuant to what has been
already said, p. 146. Thus Livy says, quam non suarum virium ea
dimicatio esset cernebant. How greatly it was above their strength.
Hence it is that quam is oftentimes put in one member of a
period, and tantum in the other. Quam magis intendas (vincula)
tanto adstringas arctiiis, Plaut.
Quam is oftentimes understood with plus and amplius. Hominum.
eo die ccesa sunt plus duo millia. Sail. Plus quingentos colaphos irifregit
mihi, Ter. Amplius quadraginta diebus hie mansit, Cic. Plus millies
audivi, Ter. Jam caksces plus satis, Id. But the reason of the
government
158 Section V. Chap. III. Book VI.
government is in the preposition ; for these are two nouns, ad phis
calesces quam ad satis. See what hath been said concerning the rule
of comparatives, p. 58.
Per, Y'erquam, and imprimis, are oftentimes joined to the
comparative, and sometimes also to the superlative, though Henry
Stephen thinks otherwise in his Thesaurus, upon the particle w?.
Perpaucissimi agricoloc, Colum. Herba imprimis calidissima, Plin.
Perquam viaximo exercitu. Curt. See the rule of Superlatives, n. 7.
p. 60.
Perquam is joined also to verbs, Perquam vetim scire, Plin. ad
Suran. And in like manner, sanequam, admodiimquam, valdequam^
oppidoquam and oppidoperquam, are joined also to verbs and to ad-
jectives in the positive degree, and sometimes, though more rarely,
in the superlative. Sanequam refrixit, Cic. Sanequam graviter
ttdi, Id. Valdequam paiicos, Brut, ad eund. Oppidoquam parva,
Liv. Oppidoperquam pauci, Caes.
Qu^m IS likewise inserted elegantly between two comparatives.
Pestilentia minacior quam perniciusior, Liv. Salubrior studiis qucim
dtdcior. See the rule of comparatives, p. 55.
Now as in every comparison we ought to understand prcc, ac-
cording to what has been demonstrated in the 26th rule, so that
Doctior Cicerone, implies, prcB Cicerone ; in the same manner it
ought to be understood with quam ; so that when we say, Limatior
quhm Salkistius, it means prcequam, or pra eo quantum, as Plautus
expresseth himself. Thus when we say. Bona est mulier tacens, quam
loquens, it signifies prcvquam loquens, according to Scioppius ; or
else we are to understand the word magis, as shall be shewn here-
after.
Hereby it appears tl^at Prj*:quam always forms a comparison.
Jam tninoris omnia facto, prcvquam quibusmodis me liidificatus est,
Plaut. I mind every thing else very little in comparison to this.
Hoc jyulchrum est prcequam ubi sumtus est, Plaut. This is handsomer
than what costs very dear. Nemo sine grandi malo, prcequam res pa'
iitur, studuit elegantice, Plaut. No man ever attempted to be ele-
gant above his circumstances, without suffering greatly thereby.
Proquam serves to express the relation of one thing to an-
other, Igitur parvissima corpora proquam Sf levissima sunt, ita mobili-
tateforuntur, Lucr. in proportion to their smallness and lightness.
PRiEUT oftentimes signifies the same as PrjEQuam. Nihil hoc
quidem est prceut alia dicam, Plaut. This is nothing to what I am
going to say. Motestior est, prceut dudumjiiit, Id. He is more
troublesome than he has been this long time.
Prout is likewise the same thing almost. Tuas literas prout
res postulubat expecto, Cic. Prout JacuUates ejusferebant, Id. accord-
ing as.
Copulative conjunctions are also used to form comparison. Ami-
dor nidlus mihi vivit atque is, Plaut. for quiim is, or prcequam is*
Non Apollinis magis verum atque hoc responsum est^ Ter. for prce at-
que. In like manner, Nescio quidtibi sum oblitus ho die ha c volui di-
cere, Ter. that is, prce or proac, as prout volui, &c. Unless we
chuso rather to say it is an ellipsis of eequhf understood. For it
seems
Remarks ox the Conjunctions. 159
seems that the entire phrase ought to be coqiie ac, aque atque, which
are oftentimes used. Te mihi Jidelem esse ceqiie, atque egomet sum
ifiifii scibam, Ter. Me certe habebis cut cams erque sis Sf per-
jucundus, acfuidi patri^ Cic. Thus vvlien Plautus says, stout est hie,
quem esse amicum ratiis sunt, atque ipsus sum mihi : it is plain that he
means, ceque, atque ipsus sum mihi. And therefore in the above-
mentioned passage of Plautus, Non ApoUinis magis venim atque hoc
responsum est : the meaning is, non magis ceque verum est, atque hoc
responsum. And in the other passage of Terence, Nescio quid tibi
sum obtitus hodie, ac volui dicere ; it signifies, ceque dicer e ac volui.
Insomuch that as their having often omitted this ceq?(e, which re-
fers to atque, is intirely owing to custom ; so the same custom, on
many occasions, understands atque, and puts only the word (sque ;
for instance, Tamen erat nemo, quicum essem libentiiis quam tecum Sf
pauci quibuscum ceque libenter, Cic. Where it is evident we are to
understand cBque libenter atque tecum ; and the rest in the like
manner.
Tamen alwaj's requires another member, or another adversa-
tive particle, says Sanctius, which should answer, and refer to it.
Qui nondum libera civitate, tamen Pop. Romani comitiis liberatus est^
Cic. for qui, quamvis nondum libera civitate, tamen, &c. Where-
fore when it is not expressed, we are to understand it, and to take
it in the same case, as when Cicero begins the 19th letter of the
19th book in this manner, Tamen a matitid non discedis ; that is,
in short (supposing something that the other had wrote him word
about) you are still as malicious as ever.
Section VI.
Remarks on some particular Turns of Expression.
Chapter I.
Of Vekeor ut, 8^ Vekeor ne.
THESE turns of expression, Vereor ut, and Vereor ne, are dif-
ferent and opposite to one another. This difference is ex-
tremely well pointed out in a passage of Terence, where a servant,
speaking to two young men, one of whom was afraid of marrying
a girl that he did not love; and the other, who really loved her,
vi^as afraid lest he should not marry her ; he says to the former,
Tu paves, ne ilium ducas, you are afraid to marry her ; and to the
other, Tu autem ut ducas, and you are afraid lest you should not
marry her.
But it is not easy to account for these modes of speaking. And
the difficulty is in this, that what is expressed by an affirmative in
Latin, Paves ut ducas, ought to be translated by a negative ;
you are afraid le&t you, should not marry her. And, on the contrary,
the Latin negative, Paves ne ducas, ought to be rendered by the
affirmative; you are afraid to marry her.
This
160 Section VI. Chap. I. Book VI.
This has made several learned men imagine, tliat vereor ut and
vereor ut non oftentimes signified the same thing ; and Sanctius
seems to be of this opinion : as, on the contrary, that inetuo ne
was sometimes taken for meluo ne 7ion, in the same manner as ?jo;j
modb is taken for «o« modo non ; and Linaccr expressly declares
this to be his sentiment in his sixth book de constr.Jig.
In order therefore to unravel this difficulty, we must consider
that these phrases always include the particle ut expressed or un-
derstood. So that when we say, for example, vereor no id fiat, or
7ic non id Jiat, it is as if it were vereor ut ne, or ut ne non id fiat ; for
the subjunctive /ja^ cannot be governed but by an ut understood,
because the particle ne, as Vossius hath very well observed, being
only a negative adverb, cannot have this force of itself. And
here it happens to be the same thing as when Terence saith,
Nunc per amicitiam obsecro ne ducas, for ut ne or ut non ducax. And
Cicero, Vide ne illnrum quoque rerum a temetipso imminuatur aido-
ritas, that is, id ne, or ut non imminuatur. Sometimes we find
those two particles expressed together; as Peto a te ut, socrus
adolesccntis rea nejiat, Cic.
This being the case, we cannot account for these turns of ex-
pression, but by considering the force of the particle ut. Now
this particle hath two principal uses which particularly relate to
our present purpose, and by which we may explain these modes of
expression. The first is to be taken for quomodo, in the same sense,
says Sanctius, as we find it in Cicero, Tametsi vereor quomodo, or
Timeo qiiemndmodum hoc accepturi sitis. The other is properly to
mark the intention and final cause, as when Tully says, Est igitur
oratori providendum, non tdi illis satisfaciat, qiiibus necesse est, sed
ut illis, quibus liber e liceat judicare. And even with the ne. Ila
velim ut ne quid properes, Id. And Terence, Ut ne id videam mi-
sera, hue effugiforas.
And therefore when we say, Paves id ducas, if we take nt for
quomodo, as Sanctius pretends we ought to take it, the meaning is.
You are afraid hoiv you voill marry her, or /loru you tuill do to marry
her. Which expresses the same sense as that generally contained
in the negative. You are afraid lest you should not marry her.
On the contrary, Paves ne ducas, supposing as we liave already
observed, that the subjunctive ducas can be governed only by an
tit understood, must be taken for paves ut ne, or ut non ducas ; that
is quomodo non ducas, and may be rendered thus, You are solicitous
how you shall do not to marry her ; which is the same meaning as
when we say in the affirmative, You are afraid to marry her. And
this is the first explication that may be given.
The other depends on the second signification of the particle ut,
which signifies, as we have already taken notice, the intention
and final cause.
In order rightly to understand this explication, it is requisite
to observe, that the passions lying as it were between two opposite
terms, one which we pursue, the other which we would avoid,
it is certain that the fear of a thing always supposeth the love and
desire of its opposite. Thus we are afraid of death, because we
are
Remarks on VEREOR. . ]5i
are fond of life: we are afraid to marry a woman, because we de*
sire not to marry her ; and on the contrai-y, we are afraid lest wa
should not marry her, because to marry her is what we desire.
This being premised, it seems that the diSerence between these
turns of expression in Latin and our vulgar language, leaves iit
ducas, You are afraid lest you should not marry her ; Paves ne.
(for ut ne) ducas. You are afraid to marry her, is that in our vul-
gar language we barely express the object of fear; whereas ia
Latin, after marking fear by the verb, at the same time we signify
our desire of the contrary by Mi^. And thus Paves ut ducas signi-
fies, word for word, paves. You are solicitous, ut ducas, to marry
her ; that is. You are disturbed by fear in the midst of the desire
you have to marry her : and Paves ne ducas (where we are always
to understand ui) may be explained thus ; Paves, you are sohcitous^
ut ne ducas, not to marry her ; that is, you are disturbed by fear,
in the midst of the desire you have to get rid of her, and yoa are
afraid lest you should be engaged.
This reason seems more natural than the other, though I never
heard of its being mentioned before. But it will soon appear that
this is the real meaning, and the ground of these modes of speak-
ing, if we consider that the conciseness studied by the Romans,
oftentimes made them use this turn of expression, when of two
things, either opposite or relative, they marked one by the verb,
and the other by the particle. Thus they said, Aclesse ex Gallioy
Cic. Quern ex Hijperbords Delphosjerunt adveuisse, Id. Aliquem
ad nequitiam abdacere, Ter. Nunc abeo ad vul'j^i opinionem, Cic.
Propius abesse, Id. and .the like. Whicli evidently proves, as I
apprehend; that these phrases. Paves ut ducas, paves ne ducas ; ve-
reor ne jiat, vereor ut Jiat, and the like, were owing entirely to
this conciseness, whereby they intended to signify at the same'
time the fear of a tiling, and the desire of its opposite. And if we
consider this principle rigiitly, we shall easily comprehend the-
several turns of expression that may arise from these two^ and
which in other respects appear sometimes very intricate. We
shall reduce them all to six, according to Manutius ; 1. vereor ut,
% vereor ne, 3. vet ear ut ne, 4i. vereor ne non, 5. non vereor ut,
6. non vereor ne ; and we shall render them in the usual manner of
speaking in our language, leaving it to the reader to refer them
to the principle, and to translate them verbatim as we have done,
after he has formed a clear idea of their nature and force.
I. Vereor ut.
By what has been said it is obvious, that this form of speaking,
vereor ut, expresseth I'ear in regard to things which we desire, tiiat.
is, fear lest they should not succeed according to our wish. This
will further appear by the following examples. Hoc fcedus veretur
HiempsaL ut salis finnum sit S^ ratum, Cic. He is afraid that this,
alliance will not be lasting. Shi homo amens diripiendam urieni
daturus e^t, vereor ut Dolabella ipse vobis salh prodesse possit, Id. If
Caesar should give up the town to be plundered, I am afraid that
even the favour of Dolabella himself will not be able to protect
Vol. II. M you.
162 Section VI. Chap. I. Book VI.
you. Non duhiiabnm quin mens litems Ubenter Irdiirus esses ^ verebar ut
redder entur, Id. I did not at all doubt but you would be glad to read
my letters, but I was afraid lest they should not be delivered to
3'ou. Videris vereri ut epistdas tuas acceperim. Id. You seem to be
;;fraid that I have not received your letters. Vereor id placari pos-
sit, Ter. I am afraid there will be no pacifying him. Perii, me-
tuo ut substct liospeSy Ter. I am undone, I am afraid that this young
man won't be able to stand it. And an infinite number of others.
II. Vereor ne.
This manner of expression being opposite to the precedent, it
signifies fear in regard to things which we don't desire, Vereor ne
turpe sit pro virofurlissimo dicer e incipientevi timere, Cic. I am afraid
that it will be reckoned a disgrace to an orator, to be under ap-
prehension in attempting to defend so brave a man. Metuebat sci'
licet ne iiidicaretur, Ibid. Perhaps he was afraid of being discovered.
Vereor ne desidercs nfficium meuw, Cic. I am afraid you will think I
have forgot my duty. Timet ne deseras se, Ter. she is afraid you
will forsake her. Nhnis pavebuvi ne peccaret, Plant. I was greatly
afraid he would commit some mistake. And we might give an
infinite number of examples, to shew that these two phrases, ve-
reor ut and vereor ne, are opposite to one another.
I am not ignorant of the opinion of some learned men, that this
difference hath not been always observed by authors, and of their
having produced several passages out of Cicero to prove the con-
trary. But it will be easy for us to shew presently, that all those
Passages are corrupted, and vprested from their natural meaning,
shall only observe here in general, after Stevech and Vossius,
that it is a very usual mistake in books, even on other occasions, to
put ut for 7ie, or 7ie for ut ; because these two particles are so like
one another in manuscript, that very often it is impossible to dis-
tinguish them but by the sense.
For which reason, in one of the principal passages which they
quote from Cicero in support of their opinion, Vereor ne satis dili-
genter in senatu actum sit de litteris tneis, where they pretend that ne
stands for ne non, Stevech is lor having us read, vereor ui satis, &c.
and Vossius is of the same opinion. And this will easily coincide
with the above-mentioned sense.
III. Vereor ut ne, o?' Vereor ut non".
This manner of speaking may have a double use ; one right
and natural, the other false and corrupted.
The right use would be to signify the same thing as vereor ne,
says Manutius, because w^ ?/(? is oftentimes taken for ne ; and we
have seen but just now, that in vereor ne the particle ut is always
Tinderstood. So that it is the same thing to say, paves ut ne dttcas,
And paves ne ducas ; pavebam ut nepeccaret, nn^S piavebam ne pecca-
ret : which the explication above given ought to put beyond all
manner of doubt.
Hence it follows, that the other use in which we take this mode
of expression, vereor ut jie, or vereor ut nortf for vereor utf is false,
as
Remarks ON VEREOR. ^ 163
as Vossius testifieth ; and Tursellinus hath also questioned it. And
if we examine minutely into the thing, we shall find, that what
gave rise to this error is, that a great many people, not being able
to make out the words, or to comprehend that vercir ut id fiat y
which is an affirmative, should signify, / am afraid it tvill not be-
done, which is a negative, they have added a negative, contrary
to the use of the Latin language, saying, vereor ut id non fiat, to
express what is signified without a negative, vereor ut id fiat. And
it is owing to this ignorance that various passages of Cicero are
corrupted in several editions : such is that of the oration pro Mar-
cello, where most people read, Vereor ut hoc quod dicam perindc
auditu intelligi Jion possit, atque ego ipse cogitans sentio ; which is
evident mistake, as Manutius hath very well observed, after
correcting it by the authority of antient manuscripts. And this
is further corroborated by the testimony of the learned Asconius,
who, in quoting this passage in his notes on the oration de Div.
in Verreni, gives it without non. So that we have reason to be sur-
prized, that this error should have been suffered to continue in
the editions of Gruterus and Elzevir, which have been so carefully
revised.
The same may be said of the other passages produced by those
who defend this non. As that of the oration pro Planco, where
they read, Sed guam tempestatem nos vobiscum non ttdissemiis, metuit
ut earn ipse non posset opiUts suis sustinere ; where the best editions
have, metuit ut earn ipse posset, &c. and among the rest those of
Frigius, Gruterus, and Elzevir. And Lambinus saw plainly it
was nonsense to read it with ut, followed by a negative, since he
put ne non posset, which imports the same as ut posset.
But it is very extraordinary that this passage of Caesar in the
first book of the Gallic war, where he says of Labienus, Veritus si
ex Hybernisfiugce similcm prof'ectionem Jecisset, ut hosiium impetum
sustinere non posset, should be read thus in all the printed copies,
though Stevech hath observed that this must be owing to the mis-
take of the transcribers, who have put ut instead of ne ; and though
Aldus, and Michael Brutus in his notes on Csesar, had already en-
deavoured to correct it.
In regard to the passage from Cicero de Amicitia, which P. Monet
quotes in his Schorus digestus, or Delectus Latinitatis, (which is the
same book, having left out the name of its first author, Schorus, in
the latter editions) Vereor ut idem sit interitus animorum S)- corporumy
so little does it prove what he pretends, that it is absolute non-
sense to take it thus; because at least we ought to read those words
in conjunction with the precedent, and make the punctuation thus.
Sin autem ilia vereor ; ut idem sit interitus, &c. as we read it in
Lambinus and others, that is, nempe ut. But ij' I apprehend, as is
generally done, that the souls die ivith the body, &c. Or else we should
read whh Elzevir, Sin aidem ilia veriora ; ut idem sit, &c. where
the sense is very clear ; because Cicero says in this passage, that
if Scipio is in heaven, it would be envy to lament his death ; and,
on the other hand, if it is more probable to believe that the soul
M 2 dies
164 Section VI. Chap. I. Book VI.
dies witli the body, as some pretended, we ought no more to grieve
for the death of a person, than for one that was never born.
It is the same in regard to the other passages they quote, which
I could prove to be all corrupted, did not this require too long a
dissertation.
IV. Vereor ne non.
Since with vereor ne we mu^t understand iit, and take it for iit
Tie, it follows of course that with vereor ne non we must likewise
imderstand ul, and take it as if it were vereor ut ne non ; whence it
is clear that, as the two negatives destroy each other, vereor ne
non implies the same as vereor 7/t, and is more easily understood.
Vereor ne exercitunijiniium habere pomt, Cic. I am afraid lest he
should have a good army. Intellexi te vereri ne superiores Htene
mihi redditcc non essent, Cic. I understood you was afraid I had not
received your last letters, that is, You was afraid they were not
delivered to me. Tinieo ne non inipetrem, Cic I am afraid I shall
not carry it. And an infinite number of others, where we ought
to translate ne nun like ut, as bearing the same signification.
V. NOX VEREOR UT, Or NONT VEREOR NE NON.
The negative having ever the force in the Latin tongue to de-
stroy whatever follows it ; when it is put before verbs of fearing,
it must UL-eds remove all manner of apprehension, either that the
thing we dtsire wiil not happen, (as when there follows ut, or ne
•non) or that the thing ive dread will happen, as when there hap-
pens to be ne or ut ne : for which rea.«on 71 ^n vereor ut id Jiat, or
non vereor ne non id fiat (which is the same thing) shew that we are
almost certain the thing we wish for will come to pass, and there-
fore that we are not afraid it will not come to pass. It is in this
sense that Cicero has said of Octavius, Ne. verendum quidem est ut
tenere sepo'isit Sf modernri, &c. We have no reason to be afraid but
he can govern and contain himself; just as he said, Non vereor ne
tua virtus opinioni fwniinum non respondeat, I am not in the least afraid
but you will answer the advantageous opinion the public have con-
ceived of your virtue. Non vereor ne hoc (ifficium meum Servi/io non
prohem, I am not afraid but I shall be able to justify my conduct to
Servilius. Non vereor ne non scribendo tc expleam, I know how to
overpower you with letters, or I am not atraid but I shall attain
my end. Non sum Veritas ne tua bcnejicia sustinere non possem, I
never was afraid of not being able to bear all your favours.
But sometimes we find these two negatives, ne, non, one following
the other, though they fall into different members, and have nothing^
to do with each other ; this is very proper to be remembered, in
order to take their meaning, and to distinguish them properly.
Thus, in the 1. Catil. when Cicero sai^h, Credo eritveiendum mihi,
ne non hoc potius omnes boni seriiis a me, quani quisquam crudelius
facttim esse dicat ; it is as if he had said. An est ve, endum mihi nc
qimquant hoc crudeliiis ^ niejaclum esse dicat, <Sf non potiiis ne omnes
ooni seriiisjactum essedicant ? so that the particle non falls only upoa
potiiiSf (non potiusj and has no manner of relation to «e. And there-
fore
Remarks on Haud scio an, S;c. 165
fore it must not be rendered by vereor ne non, but only by vereor
ne, thus : But perhaps I shall have more reason to be afraid (ifbeins;
charged tuith too much cruelty, than to apprehend the complaints ^
honest men for being too mild and dilatory.
VI. NoN VEREOR NE, OV NoN VEREOR UT NE.
As non vereor ut signifieth that we are almost certain the thing
we wish for will happen ; so 7wn vereor ne, on the other hand, gives
to understand that we are almost sure the thing to be dreaded will
not happen, and therefore that we are not afraid of its happening.
It is in this sense that Cicero saith, ^on vereor ne quid timide, ne
^uid sttdtejacias, I am not afraid that you will act either cowardly
or indiscreetly; Non vereor ne assentatiuncula quadam aucupari iuam
gratiam videar, Id. I am not afraid of being charged with en-
deavouring to gain your good-will by flattery.
This is what I thought incumbent upon me to mention con-
cei'ning these verbs of fearing, on which I have descanted some-
what largely, because I have never yet met with any writer that
treated them thoroughly by investigating their principle, without
which even those who are versed in the language, acknowledge
they have been often puzzled.
There is still another phrase, where, for want of properly dis-
tinguishing the affirmation and negation, obscurity often ariseth}
we shall mention something about it in the following chapter.
Chapter II.
Of this other phrase, haud scio an, &c.
THIS expression hath been already taken notice of in our
notes on the translation of Terence ; yet we shall treat of
It here in its proper place.
This mode of speaking is not properly negative, but dubious,
or conditional, by reason of the force of the particle an ; whence
it often bears the sense o? Jbrtf.sse, and ought to be taken as if it
were hand scio an non (in the same manner as non modo is oftea
taken for nmi modo non). Hence Cicero, in his book upon Old Age,
where he finds fault with an expression of Solon's, viz. that he
should not chuse to die unlamented by his friends, and sets an-
other saying of Ennius in opposition to it, hath these words, Sed
haud scio an melius Enni^is : Nemo me lacrymit deco>et, &c. which
Gaza translates thus, 'axa' Jo-w; "E»»<os uixsivov. ISed Jbrte Ennius
melius. And Cicero abounds in the like expressions ; Aristoteles
quern, excepto Flatone, haud scii an rede dixerim principem philoso'
phorum, Cic. Whom next to Plato 1 know not whether I may not
stile the prince of philosophers. I'ibi non minus, haud scio an magis
etiam hoc Jaciendum est, 1. Offic. You are not less, but perhaps
more obliged. Capessentibus autem remp. nihil minus quam philoso'
phisy haud scio an magis etiant, Sf nwgmjicentia 8^ despicientia adhi-
benda
166 Section VI. Chap. II. Book VI.
henda sit rerum humatmrtim, Cic. Those who have the administra-
tion of the republic are not less, but perhaps more obliged than
philosophers, to shew a generous contempt of all earthly things.
£sc id quidem viagnum, alque hand scio an maxiiiium, lib. 9. ep. 15.
It is a great thing, and perhaps the greatest of all : or, I question
whether it is not the greatest of all.
Thus when Terence saith, Atqne hand scio an qua; dixit vera sint
omnia, this does not imply, I know not 'ivhetker all lie lias said be
true, as if he believed nothing ; but, on the contrary, it shews
tliat he was already half persuaded, and mcanS that what the other
said was likely to be true. And in another place, when he says.
Qui injtlix hand scio an illam rnisere nunc amat, this does not signify,
I question •whether he loves her ; but the reverse, / question xdiether
he does not love her. Thus Cicero pro Marcello, to signify that
posterity will judge more impartially of Caesar's virtue than the
present age, says, Serviiis etiamjudici'bus qui midtis post sceculis de
te jtidicabunt, cS" quidem hand scio an incorruptiiis quam nos. Where,
for want of understanding this elegant turn, and to judge only ac-
cording to our idiom, one would think at first that it should be,
Alque houd scio an non incorruptiiis quam nos, &c. An infinite num-
ber of such instances are to be found in Cicero, which plainly shew
that hand scio an ought always to be resolved hyjbriasse. True it
is that there are also some passages which may render it dubious,
as in his book of Old Age, where he says of a country life, Aique
baud scio an idla passit esse beatior vita. But, in all probability,
this example, as well as one or two more in his book de OrcU.
and in the oration de IJarusp. responsis, have been corrupted by
somebody who did not understand this manner of expression, and
that we ought to read, Atque hand scio an ntdla possit esse beatior vita.
Just as the same writer, in his third book of Offices, endeavouring to
persuade his son, that there is nothing more useful than the study
of philosophy, says thus. Quod cum omnibus estjaciendum qui vitam
honestam ingredi cogitant, atque hand scio an nemini potiiis quam tibij
where he does not say a7i idli, as he ought to do if tlie other ex-
ample was not corrupted, but an nemini. And in his book of
Friendship, after speaking against those who place the whole end
of friendship in utility, he adds, Atque hand scio an ne opus sit quidem
nihil unquam omnino deesse amicis. Byt perhaps it is not absolutely
necessary, or it is not always best in friendship, that friends should
never want any thing. Where it ought to be an opus sit, if the
example from the book on Old Age was to be admitted.
( 1^7 )
BOOK VIL
OF
FIGURATIVE SYNTAX.
What is meant by Figures in Syntax, of their use, and
that they may be all reduced to four,
WE have already divided syntax into two parts, simple and
figurative ; and we took notice that the figurative was
that which receded from the customary and natural rules, to follow
some particular turns of expression authorised by the learned,
which is what we understand here by the word Figure.
So necessary is the knowledge of these figures, that without it,
it is almost impossible to understand the antient authors, or to
write pure and elegant Latin.
We shall reduce them all to four, after the example of the
learned Sanctius, who says that all the rest are chimeras. Mon-
Strosi partus grammaticorum. In Miner, sua, lib. 4.
For by this word figure is meant, either a defect and omission of
some part of a sentence; and this is generally called Ellipsis :
Or something superfluous and redundant, and this is called a
Pleonasm :
Or a disproportion and disagreement in the parts, when the
construction is framed rather according to the sense than the
words, and this we shall call Syllepsis. Though some modern
grammarians give it the name of Synthesis :
Or an inversion of the regular and natural order of words in a
sentence, and this we call Hyperbaton.
To these figures some likewise join that of Hellenism, or
Greek Phrase, which is when we use such expressions in Latin,
in imitation of the Greeks, as cannot be defended by the rules of
Latin syntax.
And as for Antiptosis, or Enallage, we shall prove at the
latter end that it is as unnecessary as the rest which we have omit'
ted, and that the whole may be reduced to these four figures.
168 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
I.. Chapteu I.
Of tJie first figure called Ellipsis.
THE first figure is called Ellipsis, that is, dtfcct or omission^
and this is of two sorts. For sometimes we ought to under-
■etaiul AvUat is-Bot flt all mentioned in a sentence: and sometimes
we understand a noun or a verb that has been already expressed,
whether we take it in the same or in a diilerent sense ; this is
what we call Zenpva.
Now the first sort of ellipsis is built particularly on what we find
in^ntient authors, wjio exprc8>ing their thoughts inort at IttBge,
and ^vith the greatest simplicity, .liave thereby shewn us tJie «ia-
tural government, and what we are to suppose in the more fi^'ura-
tive and concise manner of writing, which was afterwards adopt-
ed. The most general rules that we ought to consider herCj and
Svhich have been pai'tly hinted at already in the preceding re-
marks, and in the Syntax, may be reduced to nine or ten heads,
and these should be looked upon as fundamental maxims, in order
to take the thread of the discourse, and to understand an author
thoroughly.
I. Verb understood.
1. GENERAL MAXIM. Every sentence is composed of a
yvoun and a verb, and therefore where the verb is not expressed, it
?nust be understood.
Hence wha't the grammarians call apposition, as Anna soror ;
Vrbs Athena;, is properly an ellipsis of the substantive verb, for
Anna ens, or (because this participle is obsolete) qiicB est soror-f
TJrbs qua; est, or qt^ce dicitur Athetia: : just as Caesar says, Carmo-
nenses qua; £st Jirmissima civitas, lib. 2. 13. C. Hence it is that the
French liardly ever make an apposition by substantives only, be-
cause this laiiguage ha;s an aversion to the figure ellipsis. But either
they put one of the nouns in the genitive, La ville dc Rome, the
citij of Rome i or they add a verb. La xille qui est appelee Rume, the
citi/ whifh is called Rome ; or they add an adjective to one of tl>e
two substantives, Rome ville celebre, Rome ajumous city ; Anne ma
'sceur, my sister Anne ; and not Rome ville ; sceur Anne. For which
reason they do not translate, Ora pro nobis peccatoribus, Friezjiour
'nous pecheurs, prayjvr us sinners i hut, priez pour nous pauvres pt'
cheurs, prayjbr us poor sinners, or priez pour nousqui sowmes ptdieurSf
pray for us •volto a;e sinners. And in like manner the rest.
Now the apposition is not only formed of one word, but like-
'wise of many, Donnrem tripodas, pra;mia Jortimn, Hor. that ig, qui
sunt pra^miafortimn. Vicina co'^gi ut quamvis avido parerent arva
fijluho : grattim opus agricolis, Virg.
But it is customary to refer to apposition, words that have more
of the nature of an adjective; as Homo servus ; Victor exercit us s
Nemo howo, &'C.
t There
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 159
There are also a great many occasions oi wliich the vrrb is un-
derstood, especiully the substantive verb, tyer/ ro.s y?/j tandem, sup.
estis? And some other verb likewise, as in Fompeianum cogito, Cic.
sup. ire. Dii meliora, sup. faciant.
When one speaks proverbially, Fortuna fortes, Cic. sup. adjuvat.
By a rhetorical figure, Q_a>s ego, Virg. sup. castigarern ; and on
many other occasions which may be learnt by use, or may be seen
in the 2d list hereto annexed.
II. The Nominative understood before the Verb.
II. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb hath its nominative
expressed or understood ; but there are commonly three ways of
suppressing the nominative.
1. In the first and second person, Amavi te^ quo die cognovi, Cic.
sup. ego. Quidjacis ? sup. tu ; &c.
2. In verbs relating to the generality of mankind, Aiunty Jeruntf
prcedicant, sup. homines.
S. In verbs that are called impersonal. Vivifur, sup. vita. For
since we say, Vivere vitam, it follows that we may also say Vivitur
■vita, because the accusative of the verb active may always be
Tfendered by the nominative of the passive. In like manner when
we say, peccatur^ we are to understand peccaiuni, and Cicero has
expressed it, Quo in genere niu/ta peccantur. VigUatur, sup. nox,
as Ovid has it. Nodes vigilantur aniarce. Festinatur, propcratur^
sup. res, ovfugQ ; as Virgil hath expressed it, Festinatefugam ; and
the rest in the same manner. The reason of this is because thesfe
verbs are called impersonal through a mistake, as we have already
shewn, p. li!2. and following, and that they may have their nomi-
native and persons like the rest.
" Hereto we may refer those verbs which Sanctius calleth Verba
natune, that express a natural effect, as Pluit, tonat, fidgnrat, tiin-
git, lucescit, where we understand, Deus, ccelum, or nature ; or the
jioun itself whence the verb is derived, as pluvia, nix, lux, &c.
since we find that the vulgar languages oftentmies put this nomi-
jaative, at least with an adjective, as in French, it a plu une grosse
^pluie, it has rained a heavy shotver : And in Latin other nouns are
joined, as saxa pluunt, Stat. Tantum phiit iiice glanais, Virg.
The infinitive oftentimes supplieth the place of the nominative,
.and ought to be understood as such in discourse, because it is con-
.^idered as a verbal noun, according to what hath been already
•^said, p. 113.
J II. The Accusative understood after the Verb.
III. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb I'ctive hath its accu-
isative expressed or understood. But it is oftentimes omitted, and
especially before the relative <jui, qucv, quod, as Fucilius reperia:^,
'(sup. hov.nnes) qui Romam prrj/iciscantur, quam ego qui Athenas, Cic.
•See likewise what hath been said on the 14th rule, and in the re-
taarks on the Verbs, chap. 1.
But
170 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
But it is also observable that the infinitive, as a noun verbal,
may be frequcnti}' understood for the case of its own verb, as we
have made appear in different places. Thus when I say currit, we
are to understand cursum, or to currere, which is the same thingx
Pergit, we must understand pergcre, and the rest in the same man-
ner ; which would seem odd at first, if we did not find that the an-
tients expressed themselves in this manner, Pergis pergere, Plaut.
Pergam ire domum, Ter. And thus it is the Greeks say tp-n <pdvxit
dixit dicere, and the like.
IV. IFhen the Lifinitke is alone, the mrb that governs it
is understood.
IV. GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever the infinitive is by it-
self in a sentence, we must understand a verb by which it is go-
verned, as ccepit, solebat, or some other. Ego iliud scdido negare
yhctumy Ter. sup. ccepi. FacUe omnes 2}erferre ac pati, Id. sup. 50-
lebat ; which is more usual with poets and historians, though we
sometimes meet with it in Cicero, Galba aidem mulias simddudines
affierre, imdtiique pro ccquitate dicere : where we ought always to
understand a verb, without pretending that the infinitive is there
instead of the preter-imperrect, by a figiure that has no sort of
foundation.
Sometimes a participle is understood, as in Caesar. Divitiacus
complexus obsecr are ccepit, ne qidd graviiis infratrem statueret; scire
se ilia esse vera, nee. quemquam ex eo plus quam se doloris capere, for
dicens se scire, &c.
V. JFhen an Jdjective is alone, some substantive or other
is understood. Of the zvord Negotium.
V. GENERAL MAXIM. Every adjective supposeth its sub-
stantive expressed or understood. Thus, hecdiuse j uveitis, servusp
&c. are adjectives, they suppose homo ; because bubula, suilla, &c.
are also adjectives, they suppose caro. There are a great many of
this sort, of which we sliall presently give a list.
But when the adjective is in the neuter gender, the word Ne-
gotium is generally understood for its substantive, which word
by the antients was taken for res, the same as the TO' nPAFMA
of the Greeks, or the Verbum of the Hebrews.
Cicero himself has used it in this sense, when he says of C An-
tony who did not pay him : Veneris ilia, lentum negotium. Ad At-
tic. It is an ajfair that goes on but very slowly. And in another
place ; Ad tnnti belli opinionem, quud ego negotium, &c. And in thia
sense Ulpian has used it, when he says, that there are more things
than words in nature, Ut plura sint negutia quam vocabula.
We even frequently find that Cicero tates Res and Negotium^
for the same thing. Ejus Negotium sic velim suscipias, ut si esset
BES mea. Which is proper to be observed in order to understand
the force of several expressions, and of many elegant particles,
which this author makes use of, as lierum antem omnium nee aptius
est
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 171
■(tit quidquam ad opes tuendas, quam diligi ; nee alieuius quam timeri ;
OfGc. 1. Where we see that aptitis and alienius, being of the neuter
gender, do suppose negotium for their substantive, which refers
however to the word res, mentioned by him before, as to its sy-
nonymous term. Again, Sed ego hoc utor argunienlo quam-ub-
rem me ex animo, iiereque diligi arbitrer. For quamobrem, which is
taken for an adverb, is composed of three words. And res here
refers to nrginnenttim, which he mentioned before, as if it were ob
^uod argumenlum, or ob quod negotium, on xvhic/i account.
So in his oration against Verres, where he says, Fecerunt ut
istum acctisarem, a quo mea longissime ratio, volmitdsque abhorrebat ;
that is, d. quo negotio acctisationis, according to Asconius. And
whence Terence says, Vtinam hoc sit modo defunctum, we must un-
derstand negotium, according to Donatus.
And therefore when we say, Triste luptis stabulis ; Varium 8^
mutabile semper Jemina, we ought to understand this same negotium,
without looking for another turn by the feminine, in order to say
with the grammarians, that it is Res tristis. Res mutabilis : as if
.Negotium could not perform the same office as Res.
In hke manner the names of arts and sciences are generally in
the neuter in Cicero, because this substantive is understood. Mu-
^corum perstudiosus, Cic. Nisiin physicis plumbei sumus, Cic. Phy^
sica ilia ipsa 8^ mathematica quae posuisti, Cic. sup. negotia.
It ought likewise to be understood, when the relative is in the
neuter gender, as Non est quod gratias agas ; that is, nan est nego-
iium, or nullum est negotium propter quod gratias agas, or agere de-
heas.
Classe virisque patens, per qua f era bellajeruntur, Ovid.
And in like manner, Lunam 4" Stellas, quce tujunddsti ; that is, quce
■negotia.
Hereby we see that the grammarians had no great reason to
call this a Syllepsis, or to say that the neuter gender was more
noble than the other two, and therefore included them both. For
herein they have committed two considerable mistakes : The first
is their not understanding what is properly meant by the neuter,
"which is only a negative gender, and consequently cannot be more
noble than the other two, nor include them both^ The second
is their mistaking the cause of this construction in the neuter,
which is no other than the ellipsis of the word negotia ; for which
reason they imagined it could be used only in regard to inanimate
things, whereas we meet v/ith instances of it in others, as hath
been shewn in the Syntax, rule 5. p. 11. and as we are further able
to demonstrate by authorities, as when Tacitus says, PareMes,
liberos,Jratres, vilia habere; that is, vilia negotia^ to slight them.
And Lucretius :
Ductores Danaiim delecti prima virorum.
.And this figure of Negotia understood, is so familiar in the
Xatin tongue, that Cicero makes use of it on many occasions,
where he might have done otherwise, as when he says, Annus 5«-
lubris ^ pestilens coniraria (for contrariij that is, sunt contraria ne-
gotiOf
172 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
gotta, are contrary things. And in liis book on Old Age ; Scepe enim
tnterfui querelis meorum (VqiKtliinn, qua: C. ^Jaiitintor,qucc Sp. Albinus,
dcplorare solebant ; he could not say, querelis qvce, without under-
standing nr^o^/a ; since it is plain, that quae refers to those com-
plaints, as it appears likewise by Gaza's Greek translation : ^oX-
Xax/f yjt^ TO/ zsi^nrvy^nt OAYPMOIS OT2 i'luiQxTi y.a.To^v^nTdxi '.
and therefore that he might have put qiias, if he had not under-
stood this other noun, which is of the neuter gender. In regard to
which we refer to what shall be said hereafter upon the Syllepsis.
And if it should be again objected, that in Hebrew the ad-
jective feminine is oftentimes taken absolutely, as Unam petii i
Domino, that is, unam rem, though we cannot understand a sub-
stantive feminine, because those words which signify rem, or negO'
tium, are all masculine in that language :
I answer that there is never a passage in Scripture, where the
adjective feminine occurs alone, but a substantive feminine is to
be understood, though it is neither res nor negotitim, which are mas-
culine in this language ; and therefore in the above-mentioned
example we arc to understand nVxii' scheela, pctitinnem, as appears
from what it expressed in another place, Fetitionem. unam ego peto
aOste, 3. Reg. 2. 16.
Negotium is likewise understood in the following elegant
phrases. Quoad ejus Jacerc poteris. Q,uond ejus Jieri p)oterit, and
the like ; of which we have made mention above, Sect. 5. ch. 1.
n. 5. upon the word (^uoarl. For the infinitive yacere, or Jieri,
ouiiht there to be considered as a noun, which governs ejus in the
genitive, sup. negofii. Thus, Quoad ejus Jacere poterisy signifies,
quatitum pnteris adfncere (for ad effectum) ejus negotii. And quoad
ejus Jieri piderit, signifies, quantum ad fjus rei, or negotii potestas
erit. As much as possible, as far as there will be a possibility of
doing if. And the rest in the same manner. This is what very
few seem to have rightly comprehended.
VI. Jnteccdent with the Relative widerstood.
VI. GENERAL MAXIM. Every relative has a relation to
the antecedent which it represents. Therefore it is an ellipsis,
when the antecediiit, which ought ever to be understood both be-
fore and after ihe relative, is mentioned only before ; as Est pater
qucm amo, for quern jxilrcm anio : And the ellipsis is double, when
the antecedent happens to be neither before nor after, as iiu7it quos
armci delicto nf, and the like. Put we have said enough of botli ia
the rule of the relative, p. 4. and following.
VII. ff^hat is to be understood zvhev the Ge?2itive comes
after an Jdjec/i've, or ajter a Verb.
VII. GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever there comes a geni-
tive after a noun adjective, or after a verb, either it is a Greek
phrase, depending on the preposition, or we must understand a
general noun by which it is governed :. And it is an unquestion-'
^■' ^ able
/
/
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 173
able truth, that neither in Greek or Latin, is there any such;
thing as verb or adjective, which of itself is capable of governing
the genitive. This we have shewn in each particular rule, and
what l)ath been said upon the subject, may be reduced to five prin-
cipal points.
1. When the adjective is said to be taken substantively, we must
ever understand the substantive negotium^ tenipus, or some other
particular noun, Ultinmm dimicatkmis, Liv. sup. fempus. Amara
cutanxni, Hor. sup. negotia. Which Lucretius, Tacitus, and Ap-
puleius seem to have particularly affected.
2. When one of the nouns, called correlatives, is understood,
Sophia Septhniy Cic. sup. Jilia. Hectoris Andromache. Virg. sup.
tixor. Palinurus Phcsdromi, Plant, sup. servus.
3. When causa, or ratione, is understood, just as the Greeks un-
derstand £»6xa or ^droti. Cum ille secustodice diceret in cadris reman-
sisse, sup. causa.
4. When mentioning the names of places, we put the genitive
gfter the preposition. Ad Castoris, Cic. In Veneris, Plant, sup. ce-
dent. In like manner, Per Varronis, &u^.Jundiim. Ex ApoUodoriy.
Gic. sup. chronicis. Exjeminini sexus descendentes, sup. stirpe, &c.
5. When the genitive is put after the verb. Est Regis, sup.
qfficium. jEstimare litis, Csesar ad Cicer. sup. causa. Abcsse bi-
dui, Cic. sup. itinere. Accusarefurti, sup. crimine. Est Romcc, sup.
in oppido. And others of the same sort, which we have observed in
the rules.
But when the genitive plural does not happen to be in the same
gender, nor in the same case with its adjective, we ought to un-
derstand the noun repeated. Cqrruptus vanis rerum, Hor. that is,
Corruptiis vanis rebus rerum ; so that this is the genitive of parti-
tion. Just as we read in Livy, Neque earnm rerum esse idlam rem*^
Which shews the little reason there has been to call this an Anti-
phrasis.
VIII. What we are to understand, xvlien the Accusative
is by itself'.
VIIL GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever there is an accu-
sative in a sentence, it is governed either by a verb active, or bv a
preposition (except it agrees with the infinitive, as 7ne amare.)
Wherefore when we find neither of these, we must supply the de-
ficiency, as Me miserum, sup. sentio.
But the preposition is inuch oftener understood, as Eo spectainm
licdos, for ad spectainm. See the chapter on the Supines, p. 129.
Pridie Calendns, for ante Calendas, and such like, of which we
fihall give a list hereafter.
IX. What we are to understand, wheji the Ablative is
by itself.
IX. GENERAL MAXIM. The ablative is never in a sen-
tence, but when it is governed by a preposition, though frequentJy
this
1 74 NEW M E T H O D. Book VII.
this ^preposition is only understood. We have given instances
hereof in all the particular rules, and we shall presently give a list
of them for the greater convenience of the learner.
X. Two Other very remarkable Ellipses ; one where wt
are to understand the Nominative oftlieVei^b, and the
other where we must supply the Verb by the Context,
1. It often falls out that the nominative of the verb is not ex-
pressed, and then we must take it by the context ; as Cujus belli
cum ei summn essct data, coque cum exercitu 'profcclus esset, &c. Corn.
Nepos, for eoqiic in cum exercitu pro/ectus essct. Id cum factum multi
indignarentur tnagnccque esset invidicc tyranno. Idem, for magnceque
id Jucttun esset imndice. Sec. Ain' tii, te illius invenisse Jitiam? In-
veni, Sf domi est, Plaut. for ilia domi est. Dum equites prcrliatitur,
Boccliuscum 'pcditihus, quosfdius ejus adduxerat, neque in piiare pugna
adjiicrant, postremam ilomanorum aciem invadnnt, Sallust. for neque
a adfiierant, or else quique non adfuerant. Cajsar and Livy abound
in such expressions.
2. We are oftentimes obliged to supply a verb in one of the
members of a period, not as it is in the other, but quite different,
just as the context directs us, as in Virgil :
Disce puer virtutem ex me verwnque labore77i,
Fortunam ex a/iis. ■12. i?in.
Where, as Servius obscrvcth, with Jo)-tuna77t we must understand
opta, pete, or nccipe, and not disce, which goes before, because^or-
tu7ia 710)1 discitur. Again,
Sacra manu victosque Deos, parvioTique 7iepote7n
Ipse trahit.
Where traliit refers only to nepotein ; and with sacra and Deos we
must understand portat. In like manner, 1. Georg.
Ne te7iues pluvicc, rapidive pote7itia solis
Acrior, Sf Borecc penetrabilejrigus adiirat.
For the word adurat refers extremely well to the sun, and to cold,
as Servius takes notice ; but as to tettues pluvicv, we must under-
stand noceant, or some such thing, as Linacer and Ramus have ob-
served. In like manner in TuUy, Fortuiid, qua iltiJlo7e/ilissitt7af
nos duriore co7iflictati videmur. Where co7iJlictati agrees only with
the second member, whereas in the first we must understand usi^
says Scioppius. And in Phaidrus, lib. 4. fiib. IG. No7i veto dimitti,
verhn cruciarij'a7ne, where it is plain, that with the second member
we must understand jubeo, volo, or the like, and not veto. Which
is still the more worthy of notice, as it is more contrary to the de-
licacy of our (the French) language, which does not admit of
our making use of a verb that refers to two words or members of
a period, unless it can be said separately of either.
It is by tiiis sort of Ellipsis that we must explain a great many
passages in the Vulgate edition of the Scripture, as in St. James,
Glorietur uute77ifr(iter humilis i« exaliatio7ie sua, dives autem in humi-
litate sua, where, according to the most probable opinion, followed
♦ by
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 175
by Estius, we are to understand confundatur in the second member,
and not glorietur, which is in the first. By this same figure Estius
explaineth this passage of St. Paul, Frohibentium nubere, abstinere
a cibis, where we must understand j5r^ci/3?>H<iMm. And this other,
I'erfidem ambidamns, non per speciem, where stamus must be under-
stood, because the word ambulare is indeed applicable to those
whom the divines call viatores, but not to the blessed, unless it be
simply to express the happiness they will have in being every
where with Christ. Ambulabunt mecum in albis, Apocal. 3. The
same may be said of this other passage of the Psalmist, Per diem
sol non uret te, neque luna per noctem : and of this other of Genesis,
Die noctiique astu urebar. For neither the moon nor the night
have any heat or burning, to occasion a sensible inconveniency.
Therefore we must understand some other word. In like manner
Lac vobis poUim dedi, non escam, yxXa. l^S.<; Ittotitx kxi ov Q^m^^x, as
in Homer, ohov x«; c'trov e'^ovTs, Vinum 6^ Jrumentum edentes, where
it is evident that something must be understood, since St. Paul did
not mean that we should drink what we eat, nor Homer that we
should eat the wine we drink.
_ But we must likewise take notice, says Linacer, that it is some-
times almost impossible to determine which verb ought to be un-
derstood in order to complete the sense, as in Quintilian, Si fur em
nocturnum occidere licet, quid latronem ?
XI. Of othtr more remarhahk F art'icks that are un-
derstood.
We are oftentimes obliged to understand, magis or potiusj as
Tacita semper est bona midier, qnam loquens, that is, magis bona.
Oratiofuit precibus qiiam jurgio similis, Liv. that is, magis similis
Thus the Greeks frequently understand ^aSLXKov. And thence it is
that we find in the Psalmist, Bonum est confidere in Domino, quant
conjidere in homine. And in Terence, Si quisquam est qui placer e
ciipiat bonis, quhm plurimis, that is, bonis jmtius quam plurimis.
With si}7iul we are often to understand ac or atoue, as in VirgiL
Eel. 4. •! > a 3
At simul heroum laudes, S>; facta parentis
Jam legere, 8^ quce sit poteris cognoscere virtus.
And in Cic. Itaque simul experrecti sumus, visa ilia contemnimus.
Si is understood when we say
• Tu quoque magnam
Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, Icare haberes, Virg.
Decies centena dedisses
Huic parco paucis contentOy quinque diebus
Nil crat in loculis, Hor.
Ut h not taken for quamvis, as some people imagine, but then
we understand esto or fac, as in Ovid, Protinus ut redeas, facta vi"
debor anus, that is, esto ut station redeas, tamen, &c.
Neither is ut taken for utinam, as when Terence says, Ut Syre
te magnus per dat Jupiter i for we are to understand oro^ or precor ut,
&c.
Whea
175 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
When we say, cave cadas, /axis, &c. we are to understand nei
as it is in Cicero, Noiine atvcam ne scelus faciam ; likewise with the
ne we are to understand ul, according to Vossius and Scioppius,
for otherwise this 7ie would not govern the subjunctive. See what
hath been said above, in explaining vereor ne, p. 162.
What they call the potential or concessive mood may be like-
wise resolved by this figure, as Fraugas poiius qiiutn conigas, that
iSyJlet potius ntjrnngax, &c. Vicent, that is, estout vicerit. Obsitf
prosit, nihil curan', ibr an obsit, &c. In like manner uhen we say.
Bono aniiiij sis, it mesLnHfJiic id sis, Sec. Ames, Icgas, that is, moneo
te v.t, or J ac ut ames, legas, &c.
After non nioclb, nun solu)n, nan tantuni, (provided it does not hurt
the sense) we are to understand non; as, Alexander non modo par-
euSf sed etima lihcralis, that is, non modo non parous. Ita ut non modo
civitns, sed ne vicini quideni proxinii sentiant, Cic. Non modo illi
invidetitr cetali, x^erum ctium Juvctur , Id. Offic. 2. Hence it comes
that the non is sometimes expressed. Qjina non modo vituperatio
nulla, sed etiam summa laiis senectutis est, &c. Concerning which
the reader may consult Muretus in his varicp /ectio7ies.
. Tiie particle nempe is orteulimes necessary for resolving se-
veral absolute modes oF speaking : as. Sic video philosopkis placu-
isse ; Nil esse sapicntis prceftare nisi culpam, Cic. that is, nempe nihil
esse, &c. Ccetera x^ero, (jnid qjusqne me dixissedicat, aut quomodo ille
accipinty aid quajide mecnm vivant ii qui me assidiie colunt S^ ohset'
vant,prcestare non possum. Id. that is, nempe, quid quisqiie,&c. Hoc
verb ex quo suspicio nata est, me quasivissc aliquidin quo te offendercm^
translatitium est, Id. that is, nempe me qucBsivisse, &c.
These are the most considerable things we had to observe in
regard to the figure of Ellipsis, whereby every body is capable o%
judging of" all the rest. For the most general rule that can be
given upon this subject, is to take notice of the natural and most
simple way of speaking, according to the idea we receive from
vulgar languages, which oftentimes point out to us what we ought,
reasonably to understand.
Yet because on those occasions we may be at a loss for words,
unless vv~e happen to be very conversant in the language, I shall
therefore subjoin three lists. The first shall be of nouns: and the
second of verbs, where I do not intend to include all those that
may be understood (for this would be too tedious a piece ofvvork)
but only the principal ones. Tlie third is to be ot' prepositions,
Vhich generally form most of the governments and connexions of
speech in all languages.
XJI. FIRST LIST.
Of several Nouns understood in Latin authors.
£de:s m understood, wlien we s.iy, as we have shewn (hat it is also nn-
Kst (iomi to the qut-sllon Uhi. See derslood, when wf say, Parvi pendo,
the Syntax, rule 25, p. 50. and fol- A^« sum soltx-ndo, &c.
lowing. Ambo, when we say, Mars Sf Venus.
IE% is understood, when we say, Ra- capli dolis, Ovid. Cmlor £C Pollux
tiQt or tal/uta aecepii Sf expensi, just allernis orienlet &; occidenles. And
the
OF THE ELLIPSIS.
177
Ihe like. For this is a kind of El-
lipsis acooidiii? to Scioppius; unless
we choose simply to say that then the
two singulars are equivalent to a plu-
ral, and refer it to the figure of syl-
lepsis, of which hereafter.
Amnis, when we say, confluens, projlvens,
torrens, fluvius. See the Genders,
vol. 1. p 6.
Animus, when we say, Rogo te ut
ioni consulas, that is, vt stalnas hanc
rem esse boni anim'i, proceedt from a
good icill ; though we generally
translate it by the person that re-
ceives, / beg you will lake litis in good
part.
Ars. or SciENTiA, when we say, Me-
dicina, Mitsica, Dialeclica, Rkeloricn,
Fabrica, &c.
Arvum, when we say, novale. Citlta
novalta, Virg. But when he says,
Tonsas nnvales, we are to understand
terras, so called A novando, says Varro,
because they are renewed, or the seed
is changed.
Bo.v^, when we say, Eomo frugi : for
the antientsused to say, bonce frugis ;
afterwards they said, bonce frugi ; and
at length frugi, by itself, as Sanctius
observes.
Campum, when we say, per nperlum ire.
Carcer, as it was heretofore neuter,
ought to be understood, in saying,
Pistrinum, Tullianum, &c.
Causa, in saying, Exercilum opprimen-
d(£ tiberlatis habet, Sallust. Successo-
rum Minervce indoluit, Ovid. Integer
vitce, sceleris purus, Hor. See the Syn-
tax, p. 22.
Caro, when we say, buhula, vervecina,
suilla, ferina, &.C,
Castra, when we say staliva, hyberna.
See fleteroc. vol. I. p. 161.
Centena, when we say, Debet decies,
or decies seslertium. See the chapter
on Sesterces, in the particular obser-
vations, book 8.
Clitellas, when we say, Imponere
alicui, to impose upon him, to deceive
him. For this is properly ti eating
him as an ass,
C(ELUM, vfhen we S3iy, serenum, purum,
&c.
Consilium, when we say, Arcanum,
secrelum, propositum, Perstat in pro-
posito, &c.
CopiA, when we say, Eges medicince,
abundas peciiniarum.
Corona, when we say, Citii:&. dona-
tus ; Muralem, Obsidionalem adepius,
&c. As likewise when we say,
• Voi. II.
serta ; just as serttim refers to cvmra^
mentttm, which we find in Cato and
in Pliny.
Crimine, or actione, when we say, .
Furti damnatus. Repeiundarum pos-
titlutus. See rule 2S.
Datum, when we say, Aon est te fallere
cuiquam.
Dies, when we say, Illuxit, or mens est
natalis, &c.
Dii, when we say, Superi, Ir^feri, Manes,
&c.
DoMus, when we say, Regia, Basilica.
DoMUM, when we say, Uxorem duxit.
Exta, when we say, casa el porrecta,
as in Cicero, Ne quid inter ccesa &!
porrecta, ul aiunl, oneris nobis ad-
dalur, aul temporis. That vyhen I
shall approach towards the expiration
of my time, I may net be troubled
with any new protraction of my of-
fice.
The metaphor is taken from
hence, that when the entrails are
cut and drawn out of the belly of
the victim, which is what they called
C.9iSA, the priest, who offered the
sacrifice, held and considered them
some time before he presented them
upon the Altar; which is what they
called Porricere,
Facultas, or potestas, when we say,
Cernere erat. Nun est te fallere cut'
quam, &c.
Testa, when we say, Bacchanalia, Sa-
tttrnalig, Agonalia.
Finis, when we say, haclenus, quatenus.
For it mean', hacfine lenus.
Frumenta, when we say, sata ; as
fruges, when we say, satce.
FuNERA, when we say, Justa persol-
vere.
Homo, in adolescens,juvenis, amicus, fa-
miliaris ; and whenever the adjective
which agreeth with man, is taken
absolutely, as miser sum, salvus ium ;
also in optimates, magnates, mortales,
Germani, Galli, &c.
Idem, as Eguo fere qui homini morbi,
Plin. for fere iidein qui.
Ingenium, or isstitutum, or morem,
when we say, AnUquum obtines.
Plant. Nunc ccgnoscn vcslrum tarn
superbum, Ter.
Is, for talis, or tantus, is very often
understood, as Homo improbus, sfd
cuipaucos itgenio pares invenias, for
is cut.
Iter, when we say. Sua pergis, quo
tendis? Virgil has even expressed it,
Tendit iter velis portumqice relinquit.
N JUDICES,
178
NEW METHOD.
Book VII.
JuDicEs, when we say, Mitlere in con-
silium. Whence, according lo Asco-
nius, it is taken for perorare, when
the orator having finished, the judges
met in order to gather the votes.
Teslibus editis ila mittam in consilium
ttt, &c. Cic.
JuDicio, or Jure, when we say, faho,
merito, immerilo, which are all of them
real nouns adjective.
Lapis, when wesaj', Molaris,
Laud EM, when we say. Cur mihi de-
trahis ?
Liber, when we say, annalis, diurnus-
In like manner in the plural,
LiBRi, when we say, pugillares.
As also when we say pandects, a
Greek word, which Tiro, Cicero's
freedman, gave for title to books
that he wrote on miscellaneous
questions. 3,uos Graco titulo, says
Gellius, TravSEKTttC, libra inscripsit,
lanquam omne rerumalque doclrinarum
genus conlinentes. And afterwards
this very title was conferred on the
body of the civil law collected by
Justinian, which is otherwise called
Digesta, orum. Several have doubted
of what gender this word Pandectee
■was, because, as Varro and Priscian
have very well observed, the nouns in
»ij of the first declension of the Greeks,
which in that language are mascu-
line, being changed into a in Latin,
become feminine, as o ;)^apT»)?, lusc
charla. Hence Budeus has said
Pandeclas Pisanas in the feminine.
But Vossius believes that this rule of
Priscian will hold good only as to
nouns that have no relation to an-
other more general word understood,
as in this case libri ; for which rea-
son he says, comcla and planela are
masculine, because ix{-^S is understood.
Ant. Aug. H. Stephen, Mekerchus,
Andr. Scliot, and several others, are
of this opinion. And Ciijas himself
has acknowledged his error, since in
his latter works he always put it in
the masculine.
LiBR£, or MBRARUM, (gcnitlve sin-
gular or plural of lihra, a pound)
when we say, Curona aurea fuit pondo
v'ginli quinqne, Lin. and the like,
that is, pondo or pondere librarum '25.
For pondo is only an ablative like
mundo. See the Genders, rule 8, and
the Heretoclites, list 6.
LiNEAS, when we say, ^d incilas re-
dacl'is, reduced to extremity; for
incilie comes from cieo for tnovfo.
b0C»tusd those who play at draughts.
being driven to the last row, can stir
no further. Hence it is that th»
men at draughts are called incUi, that
is, immobiles. But where Lucilius
said. Ad incita, we are to understand
Inca. Hence it is, says St. Isidorus,
that they gave the name of inciti
to those who had lost all hopes of ever
extricating themselves from their mi-
sery.
LiTERAS, where Cicero says, Tiiduo
abs ie nullas acceperam. And in this
passage of Plautus, Hodie in ludum
occaepi ire lilterarum ; lernasjam scid,
A. M. O. Where there is no sort of
foundation, say Scioppius and Vos-
sius, for taking this word ternas for
the three conjugations of verbs, as
Alvarez has done, just as if a child
could learn three conjugations, the
lirst day he went to school.
Locus, when we say. Hie senex de pro-
ximo : ab humili (sup. laco) ad sum-
mum (sup. locum.) In medium ,• con-
venerunt in unum, &c. Prima, secun-
dn, tertio, &c. sup. loco.
LocA, in the plural, when we say,
/Estiva, hjberna, stalica, pornaria,
rosaria, supera, in/era, &c.
LuDi, when we say, Circcnses, Mega-
lesii, Sitculares, Funebres, &c.
Malum, when we say, Caveo tibi, 71-
meo tibi ,• Metuo a ie, de te, pro le,
&c. But when we say cnvere malo,
we are to understand se a malo.
Mare, when we say, profundum, ultiivt,
tranquillum,
Mensis, when we say, Januarius, Apri-
lis, October, &c.
MiLLE, or rather millia, which sup-
poseth also 7iegotia, when we say
decern or centum sesterlia, or denatia.
See the chapter on Sesterces in thtt
next book.
MoDiA, when we say, Millia frumenii .
MoDO, in perpeluo, cerlo, &c.
Mortem, when we say oh'iil. And
it is still usual to say occitmbere mor*
tern, &c.
Navim, when we say, solvit, conscendit,
appulit.
Negotium. We have already taken
notice of this, as one of the most
general rules. It may also be ob-
served on this occasion, that this
same noun is understood, when wft
say lanto, quanta, aiiquanto, hoc, «<?,
quo, multo, paulo, nimio. For mullo
ductiar signifies multo negntio doctior ;
or else multd re, multis partibus doc-
tior. In like manner, when we say,
Suijitri potest ? jwi is 8.a ablative
fer
OF THE ELLIPSIS.
179
for quo, that is, quo modo, or quo
negolio.
When id, quid, or aliquifl, are put,
riegutiiirn is understood, those nouns
being of their nature adjectives. As
we see in Terence, Andrim id erat
tin nomen. And in Plautus, Quid est
til/i nomen 9 Nisi occupo aliquid mihi
consilium.
Even when quid governs fhe ge-
nitive r.egdtii. Still it snpposeth nego-
tium repeated for its substantive, as
Videri egeslas, quid negolii dal homini
misero mali. Plant. This is as if it
were, 2uid negolium mali negotii dat
egestas homini misero. Where quidne-
gotium negotii is the same thing as quce
res rei, or re' urn, as in the same a\i-
thor, S'immum Jovem deteslor, said
Menechmus : 3ua de re out cut rei
reruin o7nni>im ? answers the old man.
And thus Scioppius explains it.
This noun is also nnderstood, when
we say 7nille or millia, sup. negotia ;
for mille being an adjective like the
other numeral nouns, it must needs
have its substantive, concerning which
see the chapter on Sesterces in the
next book.
JIdmus, or NUMERUs, when we say, de-
Jiarius, quinarius, &C.
Also when we say, quadrans, quin-
cunx-, sestertius, &c.
NuNTiuM, when we say, Obvidmilli mi-
simus.
Nux, when we say, avellana, juglans,
pinea, persica, castanea, &c.
Officium, when we say, Nan est meum,
or Regium eU bene facer e. Also when
we say. Est regis, &c.
Opera, when we say, Bucolica, Geor-
gica, Rhetorica, orum, &c.
Opus, when we say, Hoc nnn solum la-
boris, veritm etiam ingeniifuit.
Oratio, when we say, prosa, which
Cometh from prorsa for recta, the
contrary of which is versa. For
prorsus heretofore signified rectus,
from whence comes prorsi limites, in
Festus; Prorsa Dea, that presided
over women in labour.
Ostium, when we say, posticum, a back
door.
OvES, when we say, hidentes ; hence it
is generally feminine in this sense.
But if we join it with verres, it will be
masculine, as in Non. bidenti verre.
Pabs, when we say, Antica, postica,
decima, quadrageiima, primas, secun-
das, Sue. Non posterinres feram, Ter.
Eisecundns deferl. Quint, sup. partes.
In like manner, pro raid, pro virili.
sup. parte.
Passus, when" we say. Ire duo millia,
Mart. Luiitudo septingentorum mil-
Hum, Cebs.
Pr/^dium, when we say, suburbanum,
Tusculanum, &c.
PuER or PuELLA, when we say infans ;
for this word is an adjective : hence
it is, that in Valerius Maximus we
find puerum infantcm, that could not
speak.
Raster, when we say, bidens, tridens,
&c.
Ratio, when we say, expensa, imptnsa,
summa ; just as we understand ra-
tiones, when we say coniurbare, to
confound one's accounts, and to use
some fraud, either towards the master
or towards the creditors, to make
them lose their turn, and to pay the
last before the first.
Rem famii.iarem, when we say, deco'
quere, to squander away his estate,
to turn bankrupt ; whence also we
have decoctor, a bankrupt.
Sermo, in these familiar phrases, of
Cicero's, Brevi dicam. Cmnplecti
brevi, Brevi respondere. Circum-
scribi S^ dejiniri brevi, sup. sermone.
And when he says, Brevihus agere,
brevibus aliquid dicere, sup, sermo-
jiibus or verbis, in short, in a few
words.
Servus or Minister, when we say.
Est illi a pedibus, or circicm pedes, a
manu, or ad manum, a. secretis, a.
libellis, &c.
Sestertium, (for sesterliorum) when we
say centum millia. And both are
understood when we reckon by the
adverb, as debet mihi defies, and the
like. See the chapter on Sesterces \u
the next book.
SiGNUM, when we say, bellicum or clas»
sicum canere.
SiNGULi, when we say, in naves, in
annos, in horas, &c.
Solum, when we say. Terra defigitur
arbor, Virg. sup. 171 solo. Hence ia
Sallust, Arbores quce humi arido al-
que arenoso )iascuutur, that is, in solo
humi arido, &c.
Tabells, when we say, in eborcis,
laureatis, &c. For heretofore the
tablets or table-books took their
name either from the matter they
were made of, or from the number
of leaves. As eboreie, citrex, dupli-
ces, iriplices, &c. Laureatep, were
those which the emperors used to
send to the senate after obtaining a
victory.
N2 Ta-
no
NEW METHOD. Book VIL
Taberna, when we say, medicina, su-
irina, tcxiiina, lonstrina, fabiicn, sn-
Ihin, laniaua, &o, whicli are all ad-
jectivHs. See pist.-iriiim in the Hetcr.
vol. 1. p. 137.
Tabu us, when we «ay in diiodecim.
For the twelve tables were the fun-
damental laws of the Roman re-
public.
Tempus, when we -say ex en, ex quo,
ex il'lo : Ex illo fiuere res JJanaum,
Virg. Tcrlio, quarto, exlremo, Set'.
Opiate, brevi, sera, &c. Terlium
fonsul, postremum ad me v(nit, ice.
Hoc noclis, id ittalts, &c. Antehnc,
posiliac, ( liac is here taken for hec. )
Antea, poslea, prrrterea, pest ilia, sup.
iempora. Cicero hath even expresbed
it. Post ilia tempora qukunque rem}),
agitavere, &c. Non iicehal nisi prtr-
finiLo loqui, ?.\x\}. tempore. Prope adest
cum alieno morevivendum est mifii, Ter.
sup. tempus. Eril ciimfccisse nolles,
sup. lempus. And an infniite number
of the like sort.
Teiira, when we say, patria, conthiens.
Likewise when we say, jacet humi, in-
stead of in lerrd humi. For the earth
is divided iTt aquam et hnmnm, ac-
cording to Varro. In like manner,
when we say, Natus est JEgypti, sup.
in terrL See r. 25. p. 50.
Vada, when we say, brevia, shallows,
flats.
Vasa, when we say, Jtctilia, vitrea,
chryslallina. Just as
Vas, when we say, atramenlarium, sa-
il num.
VERnA. Doccre pauds, Virg. sup.
verbis. Responsum paucis reddere, Id.
Pro re pauca loquar. Id. panels le
V lo, Ter. sup. verbis alloqui. As
also, Pauds est quod te volo, for Est
neguliinn propter quod pnttcis te verbis
alloqui voln. Dicer e pauca, sup. verba.
Respondere pauca, Hor. &C.
Via, when we say, kac, iliac, islac, qua,
e&, recto, &c. Appia, Aurelia, &c.
As also viam, when we say, ire, in-
gredi. Virgil has even expressed it,
[!qtte reditque viam, 8cc.
ViNUM, when we say, mustum, merum,
Falernum, Mnsiicum, &c. which are
nouns adjective.
ViR, Uxor, or Femina, when we say,
conjux, maritus, or marita. And
in the plural, opiimates, magnates,
primates, majores, &c. sup. viri or
feminic.
Virga, when we say, rudem accipere,
that is, to be discharged from further
business. For one of the ways of
discharging was by the praetor's put-
ting a rod or wand on the head of the
person whom he discharged or re-
leased, and this rod was called rudis,
from its being rough and unwrought.
It had also the name of festuca, as
likewise of vindicia, because by this
method, servi v'lndicahantur in liher-
iatem. Hence cometh rude donalus,
discharged from ail exercise or busi-
ness, because when a gladiator came
to be excused from fighting any more,
they used to give him one of those
rods.
Urbs, when we say, natus Roma for
in urbe Rom(e. See rule 25. p. 50.-
Utile or commodum, when we say con-
sulo tibi ; prospicio rrdhi, &c.
It rnay likewise be observed on this occasion, that it is a kind
of Elh'psis, at least according to Sanctius and Scioppius, when we do
not follow the gender of the termination in particular nouns, but
only the gender of the signification in regard to the common and
general term. As,
In names of trees, Delphica laurus, patula JagiiSy tarda morus^
&c. sup. arbor.
In the names of herbs, Diclamnum pota sagittas pellit, Plin. Cen-
tuncidiis trita ncclo, sup. herha, Idem.
In the names of provinces, islands, towns, and others, con-
cerning which see what has been said when treating of genders,
rule 3, 4, 5, and 6.
But then with the Ellipsis, there is also a Syllepsis, as we shall
shew hereafter, p. 189.
XIII.
OF THE E L L I P S I S.
XIII. SECOND LIST.
Of several Verbs widerstood.
181
Adspicio or video, when we say.
En qualuor ecles, Ecce hominem. En
Priamiim. But if we put the uomina-
tive, Ecce homo, en Priamus, we are to
understand adest or venit, or the like.
Amet or ADJirvET, when we say,
Mehercule, Mecastor, Medius Jidius,
(heathen forms of swearing, which
Christians ought not to make use of)
that is, 3Te Hercules, Me Deus Fidius
amet or ndjuvet. And Cicero him-
self informs us, that mehercule was
said for Me Hercules.
Thus Edepol is composed of three
•words, that is of e for me, de for Deus,
and pol for Pollux, sup, adjuvet. But
■we likewise say epol, that is, me Pol-
lux, sup. adjuvet. So that it is a mis-
take to write {edepol with an a, as
practised by those who pretend that
it means, guasi per adem Pollucis,
which is not true.
Canere, when we say, scit fidibus.
CtEPiT, when we say. Ire prior Pallas,
and the like. See the Syntax, p. 34,
and the Figurative Syntax, p. 170.
Dici, when we say, Male audit, he has
a bad character. For it signifies male
audit de se, or in se, or sibi dici ; so
that male does not refer to audit,
but to dici, which is understood. In
like manner, when we say. Audit
bonus, audit doctus, it implies, audit
dici esse bonus, according to the Greek
construction which we explained in
the 5th rule, p. 14.
Dico, when we say, Bona verba gutEso,
sup. die. Nugas, sup. dicis. Sed h<zc
hactenus, de his hactenus, sup. dixeri-
mus, or dictum sit. Suid multa ?
sup, dico verba.
Esse, or fuisse, or fore, when we
say, Factum i'.li volo. Ne dicas non
pT<Edictum. Promisi ultorem, sup. me
fore, &c.
EsTO, or FAC, DA, Or poke, when we
say, HtPc neg>tia, 1U ego absim, con-
Jici pcssunt, that is, po^ito ut ego ab-
sim, or esto, or fac ut, &c. Bono sis
animo, or in animo.
Facio, when we say, Dii meliora, sup.
faciant. Studt-s, an piscaris, an ve-
naris, an omnia simul? sup. facis.
Hid node mliil pr<Elerqnn>n vigilaium
est in urbe, that is, Jiikil factum eit
prcelerguam, &c.
Ire, when we say, In Pompeianum co-
gito. Rhodum volo, inde Athenas, &c,
LoQui, when we say, ScitLatint, GrtEce,
&c. See p. 34,
Moneo, or FAC UT, when we say
ames, legas ; ametis, leqatis ; Istud
7te dicas; lllud cogiles tecum; ISikil
rescribas,
Obsecro, imploro, or nuncupo, when
we say, Pioh Deum. atgue komi-
numfidem. See the Syntax, rule 35.
p. 74.
Oro ut, or PRECOR UT, when we say,
Dii meliora ferant. Ul ie perda' Ju-
piter. Sui illi Dei irati sinl, where
gui signifies ut, or rather ^uj, sup.
modo. See the remarks on the pro-
nouns, ch. 1. n. 5. p, 93. and re-
marks on the Adverbs, n. 2. p. 145.
Paro, invenio, or the like, when we
say, U'ide mihi lapidem ? Marlis sig-
num, quo mihi pacts autori ? &c.
Sum, es, est, is frequently under-
stood : Suid mihi tecum ? sup. est,
Huud moia (sup. est J festinant jussi.
Hei mihi, imlibi, sup. est. See r. 35.
p. 74. Suxnarn (malum) isla seivi'
tus volur.taria, sup. est.
Timeo, cave, vide, or the like when we
say, Ah le nefrignra ladant. At ut
satis conlemp/ala sis. Verum ne quid
ilia tit u bet, &C.
Of
XIV. THIRD LIST.
Prepositions that
A, AB, AD, IN, ought to be understood
with the names of large places or
provinces, where they are not ex-
pressed, as ^gypio remenns, Tac.
sup. ab. Degit Carthagine, sup. in.
See the Syntax, rule 25. p. 48.
A, AB, are also understood with nouns
signifying cause, instrument, trou-
ble, &c. as. Culpa pallescere, Ense
perforatus, Pleciere capite, &c. See
the Syntax, rule 32, p. 70. With
are to de understood.
nouns of time, when they signify
after, as Rediit hoste superalo, after
having overcome the enemy, which
is what we call the ablative
ABSOLUTE. See the 34th rule, p.
72,
With nouns signifying difference,
or distance, as Stulto intelligens quid
interest ; Abest virt'.ite illius. See
the' 30th rule, p. 66.
When we would signify only a
part J
182
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
part ; animo otiosus, for ab nnimo, in
regard to ihe iniricl. Mulih, rebus me-
lioT, for n multis rebus. See the 52d
rule, p. 61).
Ad, is understood in expressing measure
or space. Lalus quinque pedes. See
the 26th rule, p. 3.3.
In expressing the end one aims at.
2ui(l Jrustrti luboramus ,■ for ad quid.
Ramus visum or visere, for advsum, or
ad visere. See the remarks on the
Supines, ii. 3. p. 132.
Also when wc say Cetera Icclus,
for gucad ccflera, and the like. See
the annotation to the 24th rule, p. 45.
Ante, with nouns signifying time,
Pridie Kalf'tidas, sup. ante. Mullos
abhinc avuos, sup. ante. See the 26th
rule, p. 53, and following.
Circa, when speaking of time, as
Tu homo id atnlis, that is, circa id
(etofts.
Cum, when speaking of instroraents,
SagHld. saucius. See the 32d rule,
p. TO.
When we say, officio, honore, odio
persequi, and the like. Sec. For it is
the same signification as when Cicero
saith, Cum equis persecuti sunt.
To express time, eras, prima luce.
Instead of which Terence hath, Cras
cum primo lucu. But with time we
may likewise understand in. See the
26th rule, p. 53.
Pe, e, ex, with nouns that express
plenty, or want, or the subject, as
Nugis rejerti libri. Plenus vino. E-
guus ligno fabrefnclus. Sacrificare
tauro vcl agno, &c. See the 28th
rule, p. 62.
With the names of place that ex-
press departure, F.xire Romd, Ilalid
cedere. See the 25th rule, p. 48.
With nouns sisrnifying time, as
noctu or node. Ilord prima, Tertid
vigilid. See the 2Cth rule, p. 53.
With nouns that denote the cause
or manner, Fltre alicujus o/.ibi ; vic-
tilare Idio ; qunre for qua de re, li.c.
See the 32d rule, p. 70.
In like mauuer, laboro dolore, for
e dolore. Amuris abundanlid hoc feci.
Virlute clarus, &C.
Also, Lege agere cum aliquo. Vo-
care aliquem nomine, &c.
In, with nouns signifying place, whe-
ther in the ablative or the accusa-
tive, as Domome conlineo, Vic. Sardi-
niam venit, Cic. See the 25th rule,
p. 48.
With nouns signifying time, whe-
ther in the ablative or the accusa-
tive. See the 26lh rule, p. 53. and
following.
Wltl) nouns that denote the sub-
ject or object, as Opus est mihi lihris,
for in libris. See the annotation to
the 28th rule, p. 65.
With nouns that denote the cause,
Accusal me eo quod, &c. for in eo quod.
With nouns that express the state
or condition. Sum magno lirmre, for
in magno timore. Magna est apud
omnes ghrid. De pace nee nulla, iicc
magnd spe sumus, &c.
With nonns that denote the means
to attain the end, as Libris me obleclo.
Ludis delectari. Sec.
With nouns that denot-e order and
arrangement, as Ordine a liquid facer e
or cidlucare.
With nouns that denote a particu-
lar thing. }\on arm'tsprceslantior qudm
iogd.
Ob or Propter is oftentimes under-
stood, when an inCtiitive supplietb
the place of an accusative, that de-
notes the cause or end, as Accipio do-
lorem mihi ilium iraici, that is, ob irasci.
See the remarks on the Verbs, chap.
2. n. 10. p. 113, 114.
Iluod is frequently governed by the
same prepositions, when we say, '2tiod
ego le per hanc dexleram oro, Cic. that
is, propter quod. Sund utinam miniis
viicp cupidusfuisiem, for quam-oh-rem.
See the remarks on the Adverbs, n. 3.
p. 146.
Per is frequently understood with nouns
signifying time or distance, Vi.vii cen-
tum annos. Distal quinque milliaria.
See the 26th rule, p. 53.
Also with nouns signifying a part,
hirsulus brachia, for per brachia, and
the like, of which wo have taken no-
tice, in the annotation to the 24th
rule, p. 45. and shall take further
notice hereafter when we come to
treat of the figure of Hellenism.
Vr/e in comparisons, Dociior cictfris,
for prcE Cfeteris, Sec. See the 27tli
rule, p, 55. and following.
To express the cause, Ilomini la-
crymcE cadunt gaudto, Ter. that is,
pro: g audio.
Pro, with nouns signifying price, Emi
magno, that is, pro magno pretio. Au-
reus unus valet decern argenteis, that
is, pro decern. See the 29th rule, p. 66.
Sub, with the ablative called absolute,
especially when it denotes some post,
condition, dignity, or pre-eminence,
as Te consule, Jpto teste, Aristottde au-
tore, sole ardenie, Sec. See the 34th
rule, p. 12.
CHAP.
OF THE ZEUGMA. 183
Chapteii ir.
Of the second sort of Ellipsis^ called Zeugma.
HITHERTO we have treated of the first sort of elh'psis,
where we are obliged to understand some word which is not
at all mentioned in the sentence. The second sort is, when the
vrord has been already mentioned, and yet is again understood once
or oftener. This is called
Zeugma, a Greek word that signifieth connection or assemblage^
because under a single word are comprized several other nouns
that depend thereon : and of this there are three sorts.
I. A word understood as it was compressed before.
The first is, when we repeat the noun or verb, in the same man-
ner it has been already expressed. Donatus gives the following
example hereof from the 5}d book of the jEneid:
TroJHgena interpres Divum, qui numina Phcehi,
Qui Iripodas, Clarii lauros, qui sydera sentis,
Et volucrum linguas, Sf prcepetis omina penned.
For sentis is expressed but once, and ought to be understood five
times.
It is however to be observed, that when we do not repeat the
word that has been expressed, but understand a new one, it is
not merely a Zeugma, but an Ellipsis, as already hath been ob-
served, p. 168.
II. A word understood otherwise than it was expressed
before.
The second sort of Zeugma, is when the word expressed cannot
be repeated without receiving some alteration.
1. Either in gender, Ei genus, 8^ virtus nisi cum re vilior alga
est, Hor. JJtinam aiit hie surdus, out hcec mutajiicta sit, Ter.
2. Or in case, Q,uid ille Jecerit quern neque pudet quicquam, nee
metuit quemquam, nee legem se putat tenere uUam ? Ter. for qui
nee metuit, &c.
3. Or in number, Sociis Sf rege recepto, Virg. Hk illius arma,
hie currus fuit, Id. Tutaturjavor Euryalum lacrymaque decorce, Id.
4. Or in person, Ille timore, ego risii corrui, Cic. Quamvis ille
niger, quamvis tu candidus esses, Virg.
III. A word understood in the enuyneration of parts.
The third is, when after a word which includes the whole, a dis-
tribution of the parts is made without repeating the verb, as Aqui^
la volanint, hcec ab oriente, ilia ab occidente, Cic. Consules pnfecti, '
Valerius in Campaniam, Cornelius in Samnium, Liv. Bestia alia:
mares, aliccfemince, Cic. Where we may observe how wrong it is
to say, that &k such occasions we are always obliged to use the
genitive of partition, as bestiarum alia, &c,
♦ IV»
184 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
IV. Elegance to be observed in 7xgard to the Zeugma.
It is sometimes extremely elegant to understand the same word
under a different meaning ; as Tucolis harbam, il/e patrem. Nero
siistidlt matrem, JEncax patron, &c.
ClIAPTEIl III.
Of the second figure, called Pleonasm.
A PLEONASM is when there happens to be a word more than
is necessary, as magis majores nugas agere. Plant, where
viagU is superfluous. Sc ab omnibus desertos potius, quam abs te
defcnsos esse malurit, Cic. Where poiius is superfluous, because of
the force of the word nmlo.
In the same manner in Cicero, Omnia qucecanque. In Terence,
Nihil quicquam, where omnia and quicquam are superfluous.
Likewise when a noun is joined to a pronoun, m the same pe-
riod, Sed urbana plcbs, ea verb prccceps erat multis de causis, Sail.
Posthumius autem, de quo nominatim senatus decrevit ut statim in
CUiciam iret, Fusanoque succederef, is negat se iturum sine CatonCf
Cic. ad Att. for is is altogether redundant in this passage, unless it
be to render the sentence more elegant and perspicuous. For
which reason those pronouns are often repeated in French.
Also when there are two particles in a period, that have the
same force, as Oportuit prcescisse me aide, Ter. Nosmeiipsos, Cic.
Nidlam esse alteram, Plant. Qids alter, quis quisquam, &c. or two
negatives that make but one, as neque nescio, and others, of which
we have taken notice already, p. 15.5.
In a word, whatever is inserted in a sentence without any depen-
dence on tlie sense or government, is called a Pleonasm.
But it is to be observed that sometimes what we look upon as
abundant, was inserted by the antients for the sake of elegance,
strength, or perspicuity ; and therefore is not really abundant.
We must likewise take notice that some grammarians happening
not to understand sufficiently the real causes of government, give
us as a Pleonasm what is indeed a most simple and natural expres-
sion ; as when Linacer says that Venit ad Messenam, in Cicero,
Ab Romci abire, in Sallust and the like, are pleonasms ; whereas the
construction depends entirel)'^ on the preposition, as we have shewn
in the 25th rule and following, and when it is not expressed, it is
an Ellipsis.
Thus vivere viiatn, gauda-e gaudittm, Jurerefurorem, servireser-
ritutetn, and the like, may indeed be called Pleonasms, in regard
to the use of authors and to the sense, because the verb by itself
signifies as mucjj as when joined with those other words : though
with respect to the construction, it is rather an Ellipsis, when they
are not expressed, as we have already observed, chap. 2. n. 3.
l>ut when an adjective is added, as longam vivere vitam, duram ser-
vire servilutem, it is then no longer a Pleonasm even according to
the sense, because the verbs vivere and scrvirc do not by themselves
imply this meaning. . la
ON
THE SYLLEPSIS. 185
In lilce manner the pronouns, Triihi, tib'i, sihi, are oftentimes
taken for a Pleonasm, when they are only the real dative of rela-
tion ; as me, se, te, the real accusative, necessary in construction.
Qui mild, tumjijtnt senes, Ter, Mihi, that is, in respect to me. Me
id faccre studeo, Plaut. mcj'acere is only the real construction of the
infinitive; and if it were simply stiideo facer e, it would be an El-
lipsis, where we should be obliged to understand me ; and in like
raanner the rest.
Chapter IV.
Of the third figure^ called Syllepsis.
SYLLEPSIS or conception, is when we conceive the sense
different from the import of the words, and thus the con-
struction is formed according to the meaning, and not to the words.
This figure is of very great use for the right understanding of au-
thors, and may be divided into two sorts according to Scioppius,
one simple or absolute, and the other relative.
I. The simple Syllejms.
The simple Syllepsis is when the words in a sentence differ either
in gender, or number, or both.
- 1. In gender, as when Livy saith, Snmniliiim duo milUa ccesi, and
not ccesa, because he refers it to homines. There were two thou-
sand Samnites slain. Duo miltia crucihus qffixi, Curt. Duo millia
electi qui morijuberentur, Flor. and such like ; where we may see
that L. Valla had no foundation to find fault with these Scriptural
phrases. Duo millia signati, &c.
And when Horace saith, Daret ut catenis Jhtale monstrum, quce
generosius perire qucerens, &c. he put quts, because by monstrum he
meaneth Cleopatra. Thus it is we find Ducn importuna prodigia,
quos egestas, &c. Cic. Potiiis quam islam a me operam impetres,
quod postidas f Phut. Ulii est scelits qui meperdiditf Ter. And in
one of the hymns of advent,
Verbum supernum prodiens,
A patre olim exiens,
Qui natus orbi subvenis ;
Cursu declivi temporis.
Verbum qui, because Verbum is the same as Filius Dei ; especially,
after having mentioned the Father. Hence it is when Urban VIII.
set about revising the hymns, he did not choose to alter this expres-
sion, but only corrected the second verse, where the measure was
not observed, and put E patris ceterni sinu. And I remember this
gave occasion to a person to find fault with that Pope for leaving a
solecism in this hymn ; so dangerous is it to be only a smatterer in
learning, and have but a slender knowledge of the real principles of
the Latin tongue.
2. In number. There is also a disagreement in number, as
turba ruunt, Virg. because the word turba, though a singular, in-
cludes a multitude. And in like manner, Attcrum in alterius
mactatos
t>
ne NEW iMETHOD. Book VI I.
maclatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Ut alter aiterum nee opinato vide-
rimiis, Cic. Missi mairnis dc rebus nterque Irgati, Hor.
Proplerea quod, for propter id quod. In the same manner as
Plautus said, a^nor amara dnt tihi satis quod agre sit. And Cic. Si
tempus est idlitmjure hominis necandi qucB luuila sunt. Quid enim
Jail in illis Uteris, j)r(vter querelam temporum, (xvx. non animum meum
magis sollicitum haberent quam tuum '^ Cic. Quce for quod, referring
to quid. Servitia repudiabat cujus initio ad eum magnce copies con-
currebant. Sail, in Catil. that is cnjus servitii, for servitium is taken
there for slaves, as Cicero hath put it, cceptum esse in Sicilia nioveri
servitium.
In like manner Terence says, Aperite aliquis ostium, which agrees
very well with the French language, ouvrez la porte quelquun, that
\?.y ouvrez la porte (speaking to them all) S<; que quelquun de vous
Vouvre. It is likewise by this figure that the same poet saith, ac-
cording to Ramus and Scioppius, absente nobis, and Plautus, prcc-
sente nobis.
3. In gender and number, as Pars in carcerem octi, pars bestiis
objecti, Sail. Pars mersi tenuere ratcm, Virg. Allerum in alterius
mactatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Mars S^ Venus capii, Ovid.
But that which is formed with the Preposition cum, seemeth
somewhat bolder, and is tolerated rather in the writings of poets
than of orators : Ilia cum Niso de Nnmitore sati, Ovid. Syrus cum
illo vestro susurrant. Ter. Divellimur inde Iphitus 4" Pelias viecum,
Virg. Remo cum fratre Quirinus — -juj-a dabunt, Id. Yet Cicero
has also made use of it, Dictrarchum vero cum Aristoxeno cequali Sf
condiscipulo suo, doctos sane homines relinquamus. And Q. Curtius,
Pharnabasus cum Appollonide 8^ Athenagora vincti traduntur, lib. 4-.
In like manner an excellent author has wrote thus in French,
laissant sa mere avec sajemme Sf ses eiifans prisonniers.
II. The I'elat'we Syllepsis.
Tlie relative Syllepsis, is when we refer the relative to an ante-
cedent that has not been expressed, but of which we form an idea
by the meaning of the whole sentence. Inter alia prodigia etiam
came pluit, quem imbrem avesjeruntur rapuisse, Liv. The reference
is here made to imber, which has not been expressed, but is in-
cluded in the word pluit, as if it were carnis imber pluit. In like
manner, Perliteras me consolatus sum, quem librum ad te mittam,
Cic. Where per literas is taken for the composition or work
which he promises to send. Mitkridaticum verb bellum, magnum
atque difficile, &; in midta varietate terra marique versatum, totum
ab hoc expressum est, qui libri non modb L. Lucullum fortissimum &(
clarissimum virum, verum popidi Ilomani nomen illustrant, Cic.
where qui libri refers to his work, which is included in these terras,
bellum expressum est.
De Prcetiana heredilate, quce quidem mihi magno dolori est fvalde
enim ilium amavi,) hoc velim cures, Cic. here ilium refers to Pretius
his friend, whom he has not mentioned, but who is included in
these words, Prcetiana hccreditate. Sed antea conjuravere pauci
contra rempublic. in quibus Calilina J^uit, de qtta quambrevissime
potcro dicam. Sail,
That
OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 187
That is, de qua conjuratione, says Sanctius.
Et laudare fur tunas mens,
Qui gnatiun haberem tali ingenio prceditum, Ter.
That is, meas hominis qui, &c.
Nam Sextianiis dum vulo esse conviva,
Orationem in Attium petitorem
Plenam veueni Sf pest il entice tegit, Catul. Carm. 45.
Where we must understand ille, that is Sextius, for the nominative
of legit. For this nominative is included in the adjective Sextiauus ;
and it is just as if it were, Nam Sextiiipse dum voto esse conviva, &c.
Deinde Philenorum arcc, quern locum habuere Carthaginenses, Sail,
where we must understand locus by apposition, as if it were Arce
locus, quern locum, &c. Likewise in Virgil,
Inierea socios, inhumataque corpora terrcs
Mandemus, qui solus ho/ios Acheronte sub imoest.
Where honos is the apposition of mandare corpora terrce. Again,
Hortamur Jari quo sanguine cretus,
Quidve ferat memoret, quce isitjiducia capto, iEn. 2.
That is, qucB hortatio sit Jidncia capto, in order to encourage him
to speak. And in Cicero, Atque in hoc genere ilia qiioque est
infinita silva, quod oratori plerique duo genera ad dicendum dederunt,
2. de Orat. where quod supposeth negotium. For the meaning is.
Quod negotium, nempe silvam illam hifinitam, plerique dederunt ora-
tori, tanquam duo genera ad dicendum.
To this relative Syllepsis we must likewise refer these modes of
speaking by short parentheses, which are so graceful in the Latin
Janguage, and include a relative that has no other antecedent
but the very thing expressed before; as quare quoniam hcec a me sic
petis, ut (quce tua potestas est) id neges me invito usurum, Cic. ad
Attic. Tamen (quce tua suavitas est ; quique in me amor) nolles ci
we hoc tempore cEstimationem accipere. Id, ad Rufum : that is, to nolle
accipere quce tua suavitas est, &c. Where we see that the relative,
being between two nouns of different genders, agrees here with
the latter, according to what was observed in the rule of the relative,
p. 6.
To this figure also we must refer a great many obscure passages
of the Vulgate, where the pronoun relatives do not refer to the
nearest noun, but to some other more distant, or which is under-
stood ; as Prcecipiens Jesus duodecim apostolis suis, transiit inde ut
doceret <^ prcedicaret in civitatibus eorum. Matt. IL where eorum
refers to Judceorum, and not to the apostles who are mentioned
immediately before. Cwm loquitur mendacium (Diabolus) ex pro-
priis loquitur, quia mendax est, S^ pater ejus, (sup. mendacii) Joan. 8.
Et erant Phariscei 8^ legis doctores, &c. Sf virtus Domini erat ad
sanandum eos, Luc. 5. that is, the great multitudes mentioned be-
fore, and not the Pharisees. You may likewise see S. Matt. c. 12.
V. 9. S. Luke c. 4. v. 15. and the 98th psalm v, 8.
The relative adverb is sometimes resolved by the same figure, as
in this passage of Job in the Vulgate, Nudus egressus sum de utero
matris mece, 8^ nudus revertar illuc. Where illuc does not refer to
the preceding word, which is uterus, but to another understood,
which is the earth, or the dust. C ii a p.
laS N E W MET H O D. Book VII.
Chapter V.
That the Syllepsis is fre.que.ntli) joined mth another
figure, and oj' some dijjicult passages which ought to
be referred thereto.
WE are also to observe that the Syllepsis is frequontly joined
with other figures, as with the Zeugma, the Ellipsis, and'
the Hypcrbaton ; and this is what renders it more strange and dif-
ficult. Hereto we might refer some of the passages cited in the
precedent chapter : but we must illustrate the matter further by
more particular examples.
I. JSyllepsis xvith a Zeugma.
It is joined with a Zeugma, when the adjective or relative does
not refer to the gender of the nearest substantive, but to some
other that precedeth ; as Amor Urns ac judicium de me, utriim mild
plus dignitatis in perpetuum, an vohiplaiis quutidie sit allaturus, non
facile dixerimy Plaiicus Ciceroni, where allaturus refers only to
amor tuus, so that we must understand allaturum once more, along
w'lih judicium. In like manner, Gens cui natiira corpora animbsque
magis magna quain Jirma dedit, Liv. Pedes ejus pirccisos Sf caput Sf
manus in cistam chlamyde opertos pro munere natalitio matri misit,
Valer. Maxo Nefando quideni auditum est crocodilum aut ihim aut
Jielem violatum ab Aigyptio, Cic. 1. de iiatur. where he makes the
construction in the masculine, though ye/cs, which is tlie latter
word, be of the feminine, as we have already shewn when treat-
ing of the Heteroclites, vol. 1. p. 142. col. 2. Qidn ctiam vites ^
caulibus brassicUque si propc sati sint, ut a jjestijeris Sf nocentibus re-
Jugere dicuntur, nee eos tilla ex parte contingere, 2. de natur. where
he likewise makes the construction in the masculine, because of
caulis, masc. though brassica, the latter, be feminine. Ccvlum ac
terra ardere visum, Jul. Obsequens. Philipjn vim atque arma toti
Grcecice cavendam metuenddmque esse, Gell. as H. Stephen reads it,
and as it is quoted by Saturnius and Sanctius. And in Virgil,
Me puer Ascaniiis, capitisque injuria cari,
Quern regno Jlespericujraudo.
Where he puts quern, though cajnit, the latter word, be of the neu-
ter gender.
Thus in the 2. de Natur. Dear, by the same figure Cicero saith,
TLx ccthere igitur innumerabiles flamm^ siderum existunt, quorum
est princeps sol, Szc. Deinde reliqua sidera magnitudinibus immeu'
sis. Atque hi tanti ignes tamque multi, non modb nihil nocent ter-
ris, rebusque terrestribus ; sed ita prosunt, ut si mot A loco sint, con-
Jlagrare terras necesse sit a tantis ardoribus. Where woia, which we
find in the best copies, refers to sidera, and not to ignes, which is
the latter word. But if we read mota; in the feminme, according
to Lambinus, we must needs refer it to Jlammce, which is only in
the beginning of the precedent period, and then this figure will
be still more extraordiiiar\'.
And
OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 189
And it may further be observed that tliis same figure is also
practised in regard to the verb, when after two different nouns, it
IS not pat in the pkiral so as to follow the noblest person, nor made
to agree with the Intter person, though it be put in the singular,
as Ego Sf popuhis Bom. helium indico Jacioque, Liv. not indicit nor
indicimus, &c.
II. With an entire Ellipsis.
And though these constructions seem very extraordinary, yet
there are others still more surprizing, when this figure is joined
with an entire Ellipsis, that is, when we must understand a word
that has not been at all expressed, which happens particularlj' on
two occasions.
1. When we make the construction and the reference in the
worthiest gender, pursuant to what hath been explained, in the
4th rule, p. 9. though departing entirely from the gender of the
noun expressed, as when Virgil saitli, Timidi Damce, Talpce oculis'
capti, which he could not say without understanding masculi, with*
those epicenes of the feminine.
Thus Cicero saith, Qiwd si hcec apparent iyi hestils volucribus,
agrestibus, natantibus, suibus, ciairibus, Jeris, primum id se ipsi di-
ligant, &c. Where it is remarkable that he has put ipsi in the mas-
culine, though there is nothing before it to which it can be referred
but to besticCf since all the other nouns refer to it, either as ad-
jectives, or as substantives of the common gender, put by apposi-
tion. And Virgil :
Hinc pecudes, nrmenta, viros, genus omnejerarum,
QuEMQUE sibi tenues nascentem arcessere vitas.
We might mention a great many other examples of the same sort :
and it may likewise be observed, that when we take the common
and general noun to refer to, rather than to the particular noun
which has been expressed, this is also a Syllepsis joined with an
Ellipsis: as in suam Eunuckum, su:p. Jabulam. Centauro invehitur
magna, sup. navi, &c. Which is sufficient to shew tkat the Latin
tongu6 hath its irregularities, or rather its figures in gender and
construction, as well as the Greek ; and that no expression is u^ed
in either without some grounds, or reason.
'2.. The second case where the Syllepsis is joined with an Ellipsis,
is, says Scioppius, when understanding the attribute or subject of
a preposition, we take the gender of the word expressed, for that
of the other understood, to which it refers notwithstanding; as if
holding a diamond in my hand, I were to say, Hcec est gemma,
where hcBC without doubt would refer to adamas, though masculine.
And this construction occurs quite at length in Virgil, where he
says :
— Fatilis descensus Averni,
Sed revocare gradum, supetdsgue evadere ad auras.
Hoc opus, hie labor est.
Where hie labor, as well as hoc opus, refers to to revocare and to
evadere. And Cicero has used it in the same manner, where he
says, Solum igitur quod se movet hicjbtis, hoc principiwn est
movendiy
190 NEW METHOD. Book VI I.
movencfi, in Somn. Where quod se movet, (which is self-moved) is
the subject to which hie Jons, unci hoc pnncip/utn refers. Thus it
is elegant to say, Hie error est, non scelus, that is, hoc negotium est
error, S; non est scclus. We say, Hie est pants qui de ccelu descendit,
that is, hcec res est panis qui, &c. And in like manner addeth
Scioppius, Hie est sanguis meus ; hoc est corpus meum, for hcec res est
sanguis meus; hcec res est corpus meum, &c.
But this relative Syllepsis occurreth also in regard to the attribute,
wlien it is evidently understood, and yet without being referred
to, as when we say, Leo est animaliumfortisyiinus ; homo animalium
divinissimus, it seems that we ought necessarily to understand ani-
mal : lea, or homo ed animal, &c. So that we conceive the neuter
gender, which would require us to \i\xi Jbrtissimum, diviuissimum,
&c. thougli we oftener use the masculine, that is, the gender of the
substantive expressed, according to what has been observed in the
rule of the Partitive, p. 59.
III. IVith an Hyperhaton.
The Syllepsis is joined with an Hyperbaton (of which we shall
treat presently) when in a sense bordering on that above explain-
ed, there is likewise an inversion of the order of words. As in the
passage of Tertullian, of which the Protestants have attempted to
avail themselves, where he says, Acceptuin panem Sf distributum dis-
cipulis corpus suum ilium fecit, hoc est corpus meum, dicendoy id est
Jigura corporis mei : jigura autem, &c. where it is plain that Jigura
corporis mei, is only the explication of the subject of the preposi-
tion, as Cardinal du Perron proveth admirably well in his book
on the Eucharist. For it means, hoc or hcec res, id est Jigura corporis
mei, this thing which is the legal figure of my body, est corpus
■meum, is my body. For it is certain that otherwise there would be
no sense or meaning in what follows.
Chapter VI.
Of the fourth Jigure, called Hyperbaton.
AN Hyperbaton is the mixture or inversion of the order o^
words, which order ought to be common to all languages,
according to the natural idea we have of construction. But the Ro-
mans were so fond of figurative discourse, that they hardly ever
used any other, and Horace is the most obscure of all in this way of
writing.
The figure ha!ith five species.
1. Anastrophe, which is the inversion of words, as mecum for
cum me. Quamobrem, for ob quam rem. Qua de re, for de qua re.
His accensa super, Virg. Ore pedes tetigUque crura, Hor. and in like
manner Quhin potius for potius quam ; quamprius for priusquam.
Ilium sccpe suis decedensjovit in idnis,
Qudm prius abjunctos scdula lavit equos, Prop.
Which is borrowed from the Attics, according to Scaliger, who
say ii v^iv, instead of Trfiv v.
2. Tmesis, when a word is cut in two, as Septem subjecta trioni.
Virg.
OF THE HYPERBATON. 191
Virg. for septentrioni. Garrulus hunc quando consumet cunque, Hor.
for quandocunque, &c. Quo me cunque rapit tempestas : and the like.
3. Parenthesis, when the sense is interrupted by parenthesis;
as Tityre dum redeo (brevis est via) pasce capellas, Virg.
4. Synchisis, when the whole order of natural construction is
confounded, as
Saxa vocanf Itali mediis quce injluctibus, aras, Virg.
That is, Jtali vacant aras saxa ilia, quce sunt in mediis Jiuctibus.
• Donee regina sacerdos
Marte gravis geminam partu dabit Ilia prolem. Id.
That is. Donee Ilia sacerdos regina, gravis Marte, dabit partu pro-
km geminam.
Si mala condiderit,in quern quis carmina, jus est
Judiciumque. Esto, si quis mala : sed bona si quis
Judice condidcrit laudatur Ccesare, Hor.
That is, Si quis bona carmina condidcrit, laudatiir judice Ccesare.
-Instates peragct qui nigris prandia maris
Ille salubresjiniet, &c.
That is, Ille quijiniet prandia nigris maris, peraget cestaies salubres.
He who will finish the meal called prandium, with mulberries,
•hall enjoy good health all the summer.
Et male laxus In pede calceus hceref, Id. for male hceret.
Contra Lcevinum Valeri genus, unde Superbus
Tarquinius regno pulsus Juit, unius assis
Nan unquam pretio pluris licuisse, notante
Judice, quern nosti, populo, &c. Id.
That is, Lcevinwn qui est genus Valeri, S^ a quo Tarquinius Superbus
pulsus J'uit regno sua, aliquando licuisse non pluris pretio unius assis,
judice populo notante, quern tu nosii.
Hnbet gladium ; sed duos quibus altera te occisurum, ait, altera
villicum, Plaut. in Cassin. that is, quibus ait se occisurum, altera
qtiidem te, altera verb villicum.
To this same figure Linacer would have us refer these modes of
speaking, where a construction is used in a sense that seems quite
inverted, as in Virgil, Ibant obscuri sola sub node, JEn. 6. for
soli sub obscurd node. Sceleratam intorserit hastam. Ibid, for ipse
sceleratus. Dare classibtcs austros, JEn. 2. for dare austris, or com-
mittere austris classes. To expose them to the winds, which is ge-
nerally called an Hypallage. Nevertheless, to be ingenuous,
these modes of speaking are not a figure of grammar. For either
they subsist in a plain and natural construction, as the latter ex-
ample, dare classibus austros ; it being indifferent in regard to con-
struction to say, dare classibus austros, or austris classes, to expose
them to the wind, or to make them receive the wind : or else it is
a trope, or a figure of rhetoric, as sold sub nocte, where the night is
called sola, just as death is called pallida, because it makes us
pale.
But to this figure of Hyperbaton we may very well refer the
following elegant and useful phrases of Cicero's, where the rela-
tive is always before the demonstrative, which serves for its ante-
cedent, as, /SVfi? /20c non concedo, ut quibus rebus gloriemni in vobis,
easdem
]9^ NEW METHOD. Cook VII.
easdem in aliis repreltoidatis, Cic. Qnarum enim tu rerum cogitations
nos levare cegriludine volidstiy earum etiain commemoratione lerwnwj
Id. for earum rerum quarum^ &c.
Hereto \vc must also refer these other phrases, where the rela-
tive being placed first, it is followed by an entire period which
serves for its antecedent : as in Livy, Quod bonum,faustum,fel'ixque
sit, Qiiirites, regent create. And the like.
5. Anacoluthon, when there is hardl^f any connexion or
construction in the sentence, as in Terence, Nam oninesnos quibus
est alicunde aliquis objectus labor, omne quod est interea tempus ])rius-
qitam id rescitum est, lucre est. And in Varro, Mc in Arcadia scio
spectatum sueni for spectasse. Likewise in Cicero, Prcetor interea,
ne pulchrum se ac beatum putaret, atque ali quid sua sponte loqueretur,
ei qnoque carmen compositum est. Cic. pro Mura'na. Et enim si ora-
tiones, quas nos vndtitudinis judicio probari volebamus (popuiaris est
enim illajacultas, S) ejfectus etoquentice est aiidientium approbatio) sed
si reperiantur nonnidli, qui nihil laudarent, nisi quod seimitari jwsse
conjiderent, Cic. 2. Tusc. Quce qui in ntramque partem excelso ani-
mo magnoque despiciunt, cumque aliqua his anipla S^ honesta res objecta
est, totos ad se convertit &; rapit : turn quis non admiretur splendorem
pulchritudincmque virtutis? Off. 1. Where we see there is no sort
of connexion in those periods. But this figure is oftentimes only a
specious term to make us overlook several things in antient authors,
which seem rather to have dropped from them inadvertently, than
to be rationally accounted for.
Chapter VII.
0/ Hellenism, or Greek Phrase.
BESIDES the figures above mentioned, it is proper also to
observe, that there are several phrases whose construction is
borrowed from the Greeks, which way of speaking is included under
the general term of Hellenism.
Linacer extends this figure to an infinite variety of expressions,
merely because they are more common among the Greeks than
among the Latins. But we shall be satisfied with referring to this
figure whatever particularly belongs to the Greek tongue, having
treated of the other things by principles which are appHcable to
both languages.
I. Hellenism by ATTiiACTioisr.
Now in order rightly to understand the expressions borrowed
from the Greek, and even to comprehend the Greek authors, we
must always distinguish in the Greek phrase between attraction
and government ; that is to say, when one case is rather attracted
by another preceding case, than governed by the verb to which
it refers. This is what Budeus transiently has observed in several
parts of his Commentaries, and what Sanctius has made a very
considerable point of; Grceci, says he, e duohus casibus fsise mutub
respiciant) alterum tantiim regunt, alteriim illi adjungunt, ita ut alter
ah
OF THE HELLENISM. 193
ab altera trahatur, ut m§i xiyoy uv i'Xs^x, de verbis quibus dixi, for
qucs dixi.
Thus we find in St. Paul, to o-iD/ix* u/awv vxni tS h Cif/.~v xym ttyiom
(A.xroi hiy, » '^X^'''^ *''''' ®^^' '* ^^^' 6- 19" Corpus vest rum tempLum
est Spirilus sancti, in vobis existentis, cujus (for quern) habetis d
Deo. And in Demosthenes, Ik tmv lTnTo>iuiv ruv Ixsi'm (/.xQ-h^iT^e uf
*<? nsXoCTo'yma-ov 'ivifx-i^t. Ex epistoUs ejus cognoscetis, quibus (for quasj
in Peloponnesum misit. And this the Latins have often imitated, as
when we find, Quum scribas &; aliquid agas quorum consuevisti, Luc-
ceius Ciceroni, for quce consuevisti. Sed istum, quern quceris, ego sum,
Plaut. for ego sum quem quceris. Occurrunt animcc, quales nee can-
didiores terra tidit, for qualibus, which Lambinus seems not to have
rightly understood.
It is by this same figure they say, Non licet mihi esse securo ; cu~
pio esse clemens. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis, Hor. Sensit medios
delapsus in kosfes, Virg. and the like. Which very few have com-
prehended ; see what has been said already in regard to this mat-
ter in the 5th rule, p. 14.
By this also it is, that a case being betwixt two verbs, shall be
sometimes attracted by the verb that it does not refer to, Illumy ut
vivat, optant, Ter. Hczc me, ut confidam,Jaciunt, Cic. Where the
accusative seems to be put for the nominative, Optant ut ille vivat.
In like manner, Metuo lenonem ne quid suo suat capiti, for inetuo ne
leno, &c. in Phorm. Atque istud quidquid est Jac me ut sciam, in
Heaut. ioxfac ut ego sciam.
Hence it is that one gender is sometimes attracted by another, as
Saxum antiquum, ingens, campo quijbrtejacebat
Limes agro positus, Virg.
Whereto we must refer what hath been said concerning the rela-
tive betwixt two nouns of different gender, p. 6.
IL Hellenism of the Preposition KATA.
»
But the Latins have imitated the Greeks in no one article so
much as in those phrases, where understanding their preposition
xxToi or TTE^j they put what Budeus calls an accusative absolute,
as in Theognis.
Of^eiV avOpuvuv l?iv »Trxvrx aopii.
Mortalis sapiens omnia nemo datur,
that is xxrai itxvrx, secundum omnia. And in Isocr. w£/fiS to /ai»
traJ/Aa j/»a< (piXoTtovo^, t^v Se 4/(;;^^v (p/Xotroipo;. Stude COrpuS quidem
esse amans laboris, animumautem amans sapientice, that is, secundMn
corpus, secundum aniraum, x«t« a-M(xx, as it is in the ancient
epigram.
*0s xxrx (tZijlx naXo?, kxtx vSv S xv s^iy xf/.o§^os,
'A((rXfo? ^y) 'JtXiiov /u.o< Soke* he nxXo;.
Qui quod ad corpus pulcher est, he says, quod ad mentem deformis,
deformis magis mihi videtur quam pulcher.
Thus Aristophanes says yvw/^viv l/x^v, where Plato often useth
jcaTii T^y Ifji-riy, Juxta meam, sup. sententiam. Thus they say rrif
TTfwTnv, pnmo ; rijy x^yity, principio ; to riXos, tnndem. And thus
in imitation of them the Latins say, Expleri mentem nequit. Fractus
Vol, II. O membra.
194 NEW METHOD. Book VIL
membra. Os humerosque deo similis. Pacem teposcimus. Doceo te
artes, and other such phrases, wliich may be seen in the annotation
to the 24th rule, p. 45. Thus it is that they say indifferently pri-
mum for priiuu, tertium for iertio : that they say taiitnm, quantumj
nimium, principium : in regard to which see the chapter on the Ad-
verbs, p. 145.
III. Hellenism of the Preposition EK.
It is so usual likewise with the Greeks to understand this pre-
position, which with them governs the genitive, or some other
word of the same government, that for this very reason gram-
marians imagined there were a great many verbs which governed
a genitive. Whereas, according to what hath been above observed,
the whole government is included in the preposition understood.
And hence the Latins have taken, Ahstine irartim, desine lachrv'
ynarinn, regnnvii joopidorum, and others ; concerning which see the
9th and 10th rules.
They said likewise, Imperii me divitianim, arripuit ilium pedis,
gustavit mellis, audivit viusica:, and an infinite number of others.
Hence it is that Vitruvius hath even joined the Latin preposition
ex in this government, Descripitio ex duodecim signorum cceleatium,
&c. which deserves more to be remarked than imitated.
IVi Other more Particular Ei'pressions, which d€pe7i(l
on the figure of Helleiiism.
It is likewise to the figure of Hellenism that we are to refer
these phrases, where the nominative is put for the vocative, as
hath been observed already, p. 83. Da mens ocellus, da anime mi,
Plaut. which is an imitation of the Attics, or even of the TEolians,
whom the Latins have always endeavoured to follow.
Thus it is in imitation of the Greeks that Ovid says,
Sen genus Adrasti, seufurtis aptus Ulysses,
Sell pius jJ^ncds eripuissejcrtait.
Because they may indifferently put either the nominative or the
accusative before the infinitive, as we have made appear in the
New Method of learning the Greek tongue ; whereas the Latin
construction admits only of the accusative on this occasion.
It is likewise by this figure that an infinitive is put after a noun,
understanding some particle by which it is governed, and which
answers to their 'Jjrt, as in Persius,
Et pectore Icevo
Excutias guttas, Icetari prcctrej)idum cor :
for usque ad Icetari. And in Virgil,
Pestis acerba bourn jjecorique aspergere virus,
that is, acerba usque ad aspergere. .
Hence it is that the Latins on this occasion have sometimes put
an utf as Horace, lib. 1. od. 11.
A^eu Babijlonios
Tentaris numeros, id melius quicqnid erit pal/.
That is, u-s (^'soEiv. ut melius patiaris, according as Sursin and
Vossius explain it. And the same expression occurreth likewise
in
OF THE ANTIPT. AND E N A L. 195
in Ulpian, 1. 62. as Sclpio Gentilis observeth, In lege Jacienda,
Julia)ius cut : Ux, si duo rei promittendij'ue/int, vci si duo stipidnndit
siqnidem socii siiit, in ea re dividi inter cos debere obligationem,
where according to tiiis author, whom Vossius hath followed, ut
oufflit to refer to dividi debere, as if it were id dividi debeat, &c.
Chapter VII.
Of Antiptosis and Enallage.
I. JVJiether xve ought to join Antiptosis and Enallage to
the foregoing Jig ures, and what the grammarians un-
derstand by these two zvords.
BESIDE the above given figures of construction, there are
who pretend that we ought at least to admit of Antiptosis
and Enallage.
They give the name of Enallage to every change which they
fancy in speech, and for which, as they think, there is no founda-
tion or reason, as of one mood for another, one tense for another,
one gender for another, &c. And in particular they distinguish
by the name of Antiptosis the change of one case for another,
which may happen, says Despauter, as many ways as there are
particular cases, because according to him, there are none but
what may be interchanged for another, by virtue of this beautiful
figure.
But who does not see that if those changes were so arbitrary and
unaccountable, the rules of grammar wouid be of no sort of use,
or at least we should have no right to censure a person fur any
transgression whatsoever against them ? Hence this figure is indeed
the most idle thing that can be imagined, says Sanctius, Antiptosi
grammalicorum nihil imperitiiis, quodjigmentum si esset verum,frustr^
qucBreretur, quern casum verba regerent, lib. 4.
And only to touch lightly on the principal examples which
Despauter hath given of this figure, it is an easy matter to shew
they have other foundations than he imagined, and that the rules
of grammar present nothing to us but what is supported by reason;
though in such a multitude, we are ever to make a judicious
choice, and to pick out only what is most pure and elegant, that
is, what is most received and established by the use of good au-
thors. For though we may sometimes' make use of particular
turns of expression without being guilty of error, yet it is true
what Quintilian says, that Aliud est Grammatice, aliud
Latine Loaui.
II. Examples of the Antiptosis taken particularly from
Despauter.
Thus when Despauter saith that in this example from Livj'»
Qiuando duo consules ejus anni, alter mnrbo, alter Jerro periisset, Sec-
the nominative is there for the genitive, duo consules for duorum
consulum ; it is evident that this is only an Ellipsis or rather a
2 Zeugma,
196 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Zeugma, where the verb which is expressed but once, ought to be
understood three times, duo coiisules penissent, alter morbo periissei,
Sf alter Jerro periisset.
When he sa3's xXvdt fortiora horitm is a genitive for an ablative,
Jinrum for his, this is only a partition, by virtue of which the ge-
nitive may be put after the comparative or even after the positive,
as we have observed, p. 59.
When he says that Sallui Sf velocitati certare, in Sisen. accord-
ing to Nonius, is a dative instead of an ablative ; I say, either it
is an ablative, because formerly the dative was every where like
the a!)lative, pursuant to what hath been already demonstrated :
or even that the construction by the dative may be defiended, this
being only the case of relation, which may be put every where, as
hath been observed, p. 2.5. The same may be said of the other
examples which he produces. Vino ntodo cupidce estis, Plant. Mode-
rari orationi, Cic. Alienis rebus curas, Plaut. where it is only a
simple government of the dative. See the 12th rule, p. 25.
When he says thatjerax oleo in Virgil is for olei, tliis may be an
ablative of the manner, abounding in olive trees. Just as Ovid
says,
Terra Jerax Cerere, muUoqueJeracior uvis.
But we may farther observe that most editions, as those of Holland^
Hobert Stephen, Ascensius, Erithreus, Farnaby, and others, have
Jerax niece ; though Pierius owns he found oleo in some manuscripts.
When he says that in the example from Pomponius, quoted by
Nonius, ch. 9, Qiiot Icetitias iusperatas niodo mihi irrcpsere in sinuntf
it is an accusative for a nominative : I sa)'', either tnat the passage
is corrupted, having shewn elsewhere, that this author hath fre-
quently made use of bad editions, in the examples he produces ;
or that in the above passage Pomponius hath taken irrepsere for a
verb active, which hath its nominative understood, and which
really governeth Icetitias; for it is very common, as we have seen
already in the list of the verbs absolute and active, p. 99. and
we shall further demonstrate in the followinfj list bv various exam-
pies of verbs of different governments; that those which are called
neuters, do govern the accusative as real verbs active. Were it
not for this, I should have no scruple to say that Icetitias irrepsere
for Icctiticc, is a downright solecism, and that neither an Antiptosis,
nor Nonius, nor Despauter, can justify this mode of expression.
And it is evident that Nonius did not understand this example
when he quoted it, since he refers to the same figure, Urbem quant
statuo vestrn est, which is quite a different expression, and a con-
struction authorized by the use of poets, as we have already shewn
in the annotation to the second rule, p. 5.
When he says that in Nevius, Quot res htinc vis prixmri pulchraSf
quas uti snlet, this q^ias is an accusative for an ablative: it is only
the natural government, and the accusative to which the action of
the verb passeth. For utor governeth also sometimes the accusative,
though it be more usual with the ablative. Butprivari res pulchras,
is an Hellenism, which supposeth xxrei, just as Icetor hanc rem, and
the like, of whicii we have made mention already, p. 203. and in.
the 24:th rule, p. 44;. When
OF THE ANTIPT. AND ENAL. 197
"When he says that in Virgil -Hceret pedcpes, densusqite viro
vivy Mn. 10. it is an ablative fur a dative : it is only a real da-
tive ; but this is because the dative heretofore was alvvays like the
ablative; as we have made appear in the 2d chapter of the re-
marks on the Nouns, n. 2. p. 8i5. and elsewhere.
And in regard to what Despauter addeth further, that in tlie
same poet,
Forte ratis celsi conjuncta crepidine saxi
Expositis stabat scads, S^- ponte parato :
crepidine is likewise an ablative for the dative crepidini : I say,
that the construction of the ablative in this passage with the verb
coiijungo, is as natural as that of the dative, let Servius say wiiat he
will, who insists on the same Antiptosis. This we might demoa-
strate by an infinite number of passages even out of Cicero, De-
clarat enim sumniam benevolentiani conjunctam pari prudeiitia, lib. 5.
ep. 13. Ea siimma miseria est summo dolore conjunctti, contra Verr.
Fannii eetate conjunct us Anttpatcr, 1. de Leg. And the reason hereof
is, this word being compounded of the preposition cum, it pre-
serveth its government also ; so that it is just as if we were to say
cum summo dolore conjuncta ; cum estate conjunct us, &c. This is so
true, that sometimes they repeated the preposition, Varro cum Si-
cinio cBtate conjuuctus, lib. de claris Orat. This much may be also
sufficient to prove that the ancients as well as modern grammarians,
have oftentimes committed blunders, for want of having rightly
comprehended the real causes of construction and government.
III. Other e^vamples taken from those who wrote upon
Despauter^
Behourt and others who wrote upon Despauter, have even given
ft further extent to the use of this figure. For they say that
Uxor invicti Jovis esse 7iescis, Hor.
is a nominative for an accusative, uxor for iixorem. "Whereas it is
only an Hellenism, as hath been shewn in the preceding chapter.
They say that in Virgil,
Projice tela manu, sanguis meus,
is a nominative for a vocative. Whereas it is only an Hellenism,
as we have above demonstrated.
They say that in Pliny, Canum degeneres, is a genitive for the
nominative canes. "Whereas it is only a partition ; for every noun
in the quality of a partitive may govern the genitive, as we have
shewn in the 27th rule, p. 55.
They say that abstineo irarum is a genitive for an ablative ;
whereas it is only a Greek phrase, as may be seen in the preceding
chapter.
They say Quod rnihi lateat, in Cic. is for me latent, a dative in-
stead of an accusative ; which is without any manner of reason,
since the verb latet can govern only a dative in the Latin construc-
tion, and is never used otherwise in Cicero, as hath been shewn in
the 15th rule, p. 31.
They say that in Plautus, Curatio hanc rem, is an accusative for
a genitive, hujus rei. But we have demonstrated that, this phrase
t * was
198 N E W M E T H O D. Book VII.
was very common in Plautus's time, and that it is only a natural
construction, because as the noun verbal generally denotes the
action of the verb, it may likewise preserve the government
thereof, since it is only by virtue of this action that the verb
governeth an accusative.
IV. Examples of the Enallage.
But these authors go further. For whereas Despauter speaks
only of the Antiptosis, or interchanging of cases, as appears in the
edition of Robert Stephen, which I have made use of; they have
added four verses to this rule, to mark the same change in gender,
person, tense, mood, and number.
1. In gender, they say that this happeneth both to nouns and
verbs. To nouns, as
Tameii vel virtus tua me, vel vicinitas.
Quod ego in jjropinqua jjarte amicitice pulo,
I'acit Ter.
Where quod, say they, is for qnce. Whereas quod supposeth vego-
iium for its substantive, 'wldch ihiug. And is a mode of speaking,
that ought to be referred to the figure of Syllepsis^ which hath
been explained ahead)', p. 185.
To verbs, as helluntur for hellant.
■ Et piclis bellanlur Amazones armis, Virg.
But j'ou may see other examples above quoted, in the list of verbs
deponent, p. 101. Which is owing entirely to this, that hereto-
fore there were more verbs common than at present.
1. In person, as in Terence in Phorvi. act. 1. sc. 2.
Get. Si quis vie qucvret rirfus. Da v. Prcesto est, desine.
Where /)?-^i/o est, say they, is for prasto sum, because Davus speaks
of himself. But if there be any figure in this, it is rather of rhe-
toric than of grammar, because he answers to what the other had
eaid of him in the third person. Si quis vie quccrct rujus. And it is
the same figure, as when in the 4th scene Geta says of himself in
the second person,
Au/lus es Geta, nisi jam aliquod tibi consilium celcre repperis, &c.
Which is only a turn of expression where one person is introduced
for another; a thing common to all languages.
3. Ill tense, x-icimus for rinccmus ; as Huic si esse in orle tuto liceatf
vicinms, Cic. Attic. Jkit a>:ain if this be a figure, it belongs to
rhetoric, and not to grammar : as it is very common in narratives
to make use of the present in recounting past transactions. For
the anticipating or combining of tenses is very common in rhetoric;
but this does not relate to grammar, which one way or other finds
its government.
4. In mood, as ralehis for xale, Cic. But we have made ap-
pear above, p. 109, that ihe imperative was only a real future;
and therefore we ought not to be surprised if they were frequently
put one for the other.
Jlo»iai.iJestiJia)c, paiare, &c. iorj'estinahunt, parabont, say they.
But this is only an ellipsis of a verb understood, as cceperuni, or
some other which governs this infinitive, according to what we
have shewn, p. 170.
5. In
OF THE ANTIPT. AND E N A L. 199
5. In number. But here it can only be a figure of rhetoric, as
when they give for instance, dedimiis operam, Cic. for dedi, which
is very common ; or they must be things referrible to the prece-
dent figures ; as Nominandi istorum tibi erit magis qiihn edendi copia^
Cic. Wliere they will have it that edendi is tlie singular for the
plural edendorum ; whereas it is but an Ellipsis of to edere understood,
as we have shewn in the chapter of Gerunds, p. 125. Sitempus est
ullumjure hominis necandi, qiicc multa su7it, Cic. This is only a Syl-
lepsis, of which we have made mention above, p. 186. and the
like may be said of the rest. Whence we conclude that all that
can be said of the figures of grammar, may be reduced to the four
above laid down, or to Hellenism.
Therefore I am of opinion that upon a careful perusal of what
hath been said in the Syntax, and in these remarks, very few
difficulties will arise in regard to government that may not easily
be solved, and tliat hardly any pasage will occur in ancient
authors, but what may be accounted for. But as the chief found-
ation of all languages depends on practice, I have endeavoured
to collect here a multitude of verbs of different governments, which
perhaps will be the more useful, as some of them are not to be
found even in the most copious dictionaries. They are comprised
in the following list, which is only an abridgment of a more ex-
tensive work, wherein we intended to include every remark that
could be made on the elegance of this language, for the service
of those who endeavour to write pure Latin ; and perhaps some
day or other we may publish a separate work on this subject for
the use of learners, if ever we find that they have derived any
benefit from this abridgment.
'200
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
LIST OF VERBS
OF
DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS.
A.
ABauenare aliquid, or aliquid
alicujiis, ric laaiimnte, Ali()ium
ab altero, se ab alio, alium a se, volun-
tatt-m alicujiis at> aliquo, id.
Abderf. se litleris tX in littfras : se
in teneb' is, id. to hide or bury one^s self.
Abdicare, simply, or maeistratum,
or se magislratu, id. to aedicule, or to
resign.
Abdicare aliquem, Tuc. to renounce
him.
Aboucere a consuetiuiinp, Cic. to
Ireak off, or viian from a cuUom. Ab
o.mni rrip. cura, id. lo retire, to re-
sign. Vi (S" per vim, id. to cany off
by main free. In aliquem locum, id.
Ex acie, id. A fide, id. Ad nequi-
tiam, lerj ■
Me coiivivam abducebat sibi, Cic.
Equitatum ad seabducere, rJ. to draw
the cavalry lo himself.
Aberrahe propiisitn, fiC a proposito,
id, to wancer fr. m hii subierl.
Nihil equidem le>or, sed tamen
aberro, id but at least I divert myself.
Aberiatio a doloie, id. any diveision
that gives an allay to g'ief,
Aberrat ad alia oralio, id. digresses.
Aberrant inter se oratioiies, Liv. do
not agree.
Artificem re in melius quidem sinas
aberrate, Flin. do not s'ffer him to depart
from his model, even though he were to
mend it. i
Abesse urbe, domo, 5r ab urbe, ab
dpmo, Cic. to be absent. Alicui abesse,
id. to be wanting tuvsards him, to forsake
him. In altercatioiiibus abesse, id. not
to be there.
Abhorret faclnus ab illo, id. he
is far from committing such a wicked
action.
Parum abhorrens famam, Liv. not at
all afraid of defamation.
Illud abhorret a fide, Cic. thai is alto-
gether incredible.
Ab diicenda uxore abhorret, id. he
has an aversion to matrimony.
Abjicere se alicui ad pedes, &!
ad pedes alicujus, Cic. to throw himself
at his fett.
Abjiceie se & prostemere, iV/. Consi-
lium aedificnndi abjicere, id. to lay aside
all thr'u^hlt of building.
Abjicere ad terram, id. in herbam, id,
humi, Pliv. to throw hpi,n ihe g'ound.
C'o-'itationes in rem humilem abji-
cere, ^'ic. to apply his thoughts to it,
Abjicere animum, id. to despnd.
Abire magistratu, id. to finish his
office.
Ab emptione. id. lo depart from his
bargain. Ad vulgi opini'pnem, id, to be
led uwau bi) vulgar opinion.
Abire, ii, ab, de, fe, ex, loco, id, to he
gone, to go out. til r I lire.
Non hoc sic tibi abibit, Ter. you shall
not esciipe thus,
Abi ill malam crucem, Ter. go and
hang ijoursi If.
Abjijdicare sibi libertatem, Cic, to
shew himself nnvourthy of liberty. Se vit^,
Plaut. lo part trith l\fe.
Abnuere aliquid alicui, Cic. Alicui
de re aliqua, Snl. to refuse him some-
thing.
Abrogare leeem or legi, Liv, the
former more usual, to demand the repeal
of a law.
Abstinebe sese dedecore, animum
a scelere, Cic. to abstain. Ignem ab
rede, Liv. not to set Jire lo it, iEgrum
a cibo, Cels,
Abstinere jus belli ab aliquo, Liv,
n't lo trtot him with the full severity- of
the rights of tvar.
Abstinere maledictis £( a maledictis,
Cic.
Ab-tinere irarum, Hor. Placidis bo-
nis, Ovid.
Ahs-tine isti banc tu manum, Plaut.
Abstrudere in fundo, in silvaro, Cic.
to hide.
Abuti stndiis, id. to make a wrong
use of his studiis, Operam abutitur,
Ter. he Ivselh his labour.
Accedere alicui proximo, Cic. Virg.
Deo ad similitudinem, Cic, to re-
semble. Ad aliquem, Cic to draw
near
OF Verbs of different Governments. 201
near him. Alicui ad aurem, id.
Quos accedam ? Sail. sup. ad. to
whom shall I apply ? Quas vento ac-
cesserit oras, Virg. sup, in. to what coast
the winds uiitl drive him.
Accedit quod, Cic, there is this be-
sides ; or simply, besides, moreovtr.
AcciDERE. Omnia enim secundis-
sima nobis, adversissitua illis accidisse,
id. to have happened. Where we see
that this verb is taken either for good
or bad fortune.
AcctPERE ab aliquo, Ter. De ali-
quo, Cic, Ex aliquo, Plant, to receive
or to learn from, a person,
Accipere in contumeliam, Ter. to
take in bad part.
Acceptutn plebi, CtES. Apud plebem,
Plant. In pFebem, Tac. agreeable to
the people.
Acceptum, or in acceptum referre,
Cic. to be obliged i properly, it is to place
to your account.
AcQuiEscERE lecto, Catul, to rest upon
the bf-d. Alicui rei, Sen. to set one's
heart upon a thing, to fix upon it.
In tuo vultu aC(|uiesco, Ci(^. your pre-
tence gives me comfort,
AoffQUARE cum virtute fortunam,
id to be no lets successfii' than brave.
Aliquem sibi, id. to render him equal to
one's self.
Judices adaequarunt, id, the judges
Vtre divided.
Addicehe mnrti, id. In servitutem,
Liv. to condemn to.
Addicere liberum, Cic. to declare one
free.
Ni aves addixissent, id. If the augu-
ral birds had not approv-d it by their
signs. The contrary is Abdicere.
. Adesse omnibus puguis, id. to be
present at every battle. Ad exercitum,
Plaut. Ad portam, Cic. In cau^a, in
aliquo loco, ad tempus, id.
Adesse alicui, id. to favour him, to as-
sist him with one's creditt or presence.
Adhsrere castris, Appul. In re
aliqua, Ovid. Ad rem aliqiiam, Plaut.
In rem aliquam, Cic. to slick to, to ad-
here, or keep close to.
Adhibrre severitatem in aliquo, or
in aliquem, id, to use severity, Reveren-
tiam adversus, or erga aliquem, i/.
Adhibere viuura aegrotis, id, to give
them uine. <
Adigerk jusjurandnm, or aliquem
jurejurando, or aliquem ad jusjuran-
dum, Liv. Per jusjurandum, Cies. to
oblige by oath.
Adire aliquem, ad aliquem, in jus,
Cict to go to see, to go, &c. Ilia pericula
adeuntur praeliis, id. they run those
risks in battle.
Adjungere aliquem alteri £C ad anii-
citiam alterius, id. to make him his
friend. In sucietalem adjungere, Liv.
Admiscere Illiquid in aliud, Plin.
Alicui, or cum aliquo, Cic. to mingle
uitli. ■ ■
Admisceri ad aliquod concilium, id.
to be admitted to it.
Admonere, See Monere.
AootESCiT aetas, ratio, cupiditas, id,
Vi'g. grou.'s, zvaj>es strong.
Adolescere ad aiiquam aetatem, Pliti.
Annosterseuos, Uvid. In partum, Co/um.
Adolescunt ignibus araB, Virg. are
covered with ike fire of (he sacrifices.
Flammis adolere penates, id.
Adoftare sibi filium, Cic. Aliquem
pro filii), Plaut. to adopt him, Aliquem
in divitias, Plin. to make him his heir.
Aliquem ab aliquo, dc. Se alicui or-
dini, Plin.
Adscribere civitati, in civilatem, or
in civitate, Cic. to make him free qf the
city.
Adversari alicui, id. Aliquem, Liv,
Contra & adversus aliquem, Plaut, to
resist, to amtradict, '^
Anibitionem scriptoris adversari, Tac.
Adveri^ari quomiuus aliquid fiat, Cic,
to hinder.
Advertere, simply, Ter. Animum,
Liv. Animo, Plin. to give attention.
Advertere urbi agaien, Virg. to make
it diata near, to make it take the read
towards the city.
Scythias adverteret oras, Ovid, aas
arrived.
Advertere in aliquem. Tacit, to punish
him.
Adulare. Pinnata cauda nostrum
adulat sanguinem, Cic. Ex. veteri poetd.
Si Dioiiysium non adulares, Val.
Max. from thence cometh Adulor, paS'
s've. Ca vend urn est ne assentatoribus
patefaciamus aurcs ne adulari nos sina-
mus, Cic. Tribuuus militum adulatus
erat, Fu/. Max.
Aduiari deponent. Adulari aliquem,
Cic. Alicui, 2m. to fatter a person.
The former is preferable even according
to Quiutilian.
MmVLari alicui, Cic. to bear envy to a
person, Aliquem, id. to endeavour to
surpass him,
yEmulari instituta alicujus, id, to
equal, to surpass,
^mulari cum aliquo. Lie. to rival a
person.
Invicem aemulari, Quint, to rival one
another.
^stima«e aliquem, Plaut. De ali-
quo, Cic. to esteem him,
^stimare magni, or magno, id.
^stimare litem capitis, id. to judge
202
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
a person deserving of death, or of banish-
ment.
Aggredi aliquem dictis, Viig. ali-
quem <ie le aliqud, Pluul. lo speak loh'im
about something, Aliquid, Cic. to begin.
Ad injuriam faciendam, id.
Agere rem, or de re, id. aliquem,
or partes alicujns, id. Cum populo, id.
Lege or ex lege, id. lo treat, to act, to do.
Agere so pro equite, Suet, to act as a
lenight. Agere gratias de re, in re, pro
re, in res singulas, Cic, to thank.
Agitabe animo, Liv. Cum animo,
Sal/. Mente, Sat/. In inenle, Cic,
Secum, Tcr, to revolve a thing in one^s
mind.
Allatrare magnitudinem alicujus,
Liv, to exclaim against.
Allatrant maria oram maritimam,
Plin. to heat against,
Allalrare alicui has not the authority
of pure writers. It is true that the
following passage is quoted from the
book de Viris illust. attributed to I'li-
uy : /'/ CapitoUum inlempesld nocte eunli,
canes allalraverant. 13ut besides that
one might jierhaps read nocte eunte,
Vossius also observetb that the author
of this book was not Pliny, but Sextus
Aurelius Victor, who liveil about two
hundred years later, when the language
was greatly corrupted.
Ali.egare alicui, or ad aliquem, Cic.
to send tuzwrds a peisun, Hominem
alicui rei, Plant, to send him to treat
about something.
Allegare seuem, Ter. to depute an old
man.
Ambulare pedibus, Cic. to Kolk.
Foro transverso, id. to widk across the
market. In jus, id. In littore, id.
Ambulat hoc caput per omnes leges,
Plin. to occur every where.
Ambulare maria, Cic.
Ambulantur stadia bina, Plin.
From the labt two examples it ap-
peareth that this verb may be active,
and that Quintilian, lib. 1, c. 5. bad no
reason to say that ambulare viam was a
solecism, since at the most it is only a
pleonasm, and every verb, as m'c Imve
demonstrated in the Syntax, rule 14. p.
29. and in the Remarks,p.98. may govern
the accusative of a noun derived from
itself, or of nearly the same signification.
AscERE sese animi, Plant. ali<|uein
kicommodis, id. Angit animum quoti-
diana cura, T(r.
Anci animo, Cic. Re aliqud, or de
re, id, to be vexed.
Anhelare scelus, id, to think of no-
thing but villainy.
Amnis arihelat vapore, Plin. throws
out vapours.
Verba inflata et anbelata, Cic. pro-
nounced with great exertion of voice, and
that put us out of breath,
Animadverto aliquid, Ter, I look at
it and consider it. In aliquem, Cic. I
punish.
Annuere coeptis, Virg. to favour.
Vicloriam, Vtrg. to promise. Aliquos,
Cic. to shew.
Anuuirere aliquid, id. to inform.
Capitis, or de capite, Liv.
Antlcedere alteri, or alterum aetate,
Cic. to surpass him in years.
Antecello tibi hac re, id. Ilium
hac re, id. aliis in re aliqua, id. Qui
ooeteris omnibus rebus his autecellun-
tur. Ad Heren.
Anteire alicui, Plaut. Aliquem,
Sail.
Antestare alicui, or aliquem, Gell,
to excel or surpass a person in something.
Antevenire alicui, Plant, to go to
meet him. Aliquem, id, to prevent him.
Omnibus rebus, id. lo surpass him in
every thing. Nobilitatem, Sail, to sur-
pass the nobilily.
Antevertere alicui, Tcr, to outstrip,
to be beforehand zvilh, to prevent.
Fannius id ipsum antevertit, Cic, Fan-
nius was befoi ehand wHh me in that.
Appeltare aliquem sapientem, id. to
call him. wise. Suo nomine, id. to call
him by his name.
Appellare tribunos, id. Ad tribunes,
id. to appeal to the tribunes.
Appellari pecuiiia, Suint. de pecu-
■ nia, Cic. to be dunned,
Caesar appellatus ab ^duis, Cces.
that is, the Aidui being dme to beg his
assistance. And this verb is very re-
markable in this signification.
Appellere ad aliquem, Cic. to bring
to land. Aliquem alicui loco, id.
Animutn ad pbilosophiam, id. Ter,
to ajiply.
Appellere classe in Italiam, Virg.
appellere classem, Cic. ad villam no-
stram navis appellitur, id, is brought to
land.
We say therefore navis, or dassis ap-
pellilur, just as we say navem, or classem
appellere, but not navis or classis oppulit,
says Schotus. Yet navis appulu occurs
in Suetonius' Life of Galba; which
should not be imitated without great
caution,
Appropinquare portas, or ad
portas, Hirt, Britanniae, Ctes, to op-
proach.
ARVERB;
OF Verbs of different Governments. 203
Ardere, or Flagrare odio, are said
actively for the hatred wc bear to
others, and passively for the hatred
others bear to us. Examples hereof
are very common.
Ardebat Sirius Indos, Vtrg. for Ad-
tirebat. Ardebat Alexim, Virg. was
fassionatfly fond of him.
Ardeo te videre, Plin. Jun. J am im-
palient to see you.
Ardere in arma, Virg. AvariliS,
Cic. Amore, id.
Arridere alicui, Cic. to smile at him,
and to please him.
Arrident cetles, Plaul. do phase me,
do suU me. Flavins id arrisit, Gell.
seemed to approve of tkal.
Arrideri, Passive, the contrary of
Derideri, Cic.
AsPERGERE labem alicui, or dignitati
alicujus, id. to blacken him, to speak ill
of him.
Maculis vitam aspergere, id.
AspfRARE in curiam, id. ad ali-
qiiem, id. to endeavour to reach to, or to
obtain.
Aspirat primo fortuna labori, Virg.
favoureth.
Vento aspirat eunti, Vir^. JEn. 5.
Et modiois fenestellis Aquilonibus as-
pirentur, Colum. for iospirentur.
AssENTiRE or iRi alicui, simply, or
else alicui aliquid, or de re aliqna,
or in re aliqua, to grant something to a
person. Instances hereof occur fre-
quently.
But this verb ought not to be con-
founded with CoNSENTio, which signi-
fietii rather the a^ieement of the will,
whereas Assentio is to submit or to agree
to anolhei's judament.
AssERVARE in carcerem, Liv. Domi
suae, Cic. to keep.
AssuEFACERE and Assuescere, ad
aliquid, or in aliquo, are not Latin,
says Scholvs. 1 own they occur but
seldom ; yet the ktiter is in Quinti-
lian.
But Schotus was still more mistaken,
when he fancied that this verb could
be joined with the ablative only, y7s-
suescere aliijua re. Whereas its proper
construction is to put a dative, as
Robert Stephen observeth. For wh ch
reason Murftus and the best writers of
vari<e leaiuties, have restored the dative
■wherever the ablative wus put before,
as in the 2, Catil. Assuefactus frigori
& fami & sili & vigiliis perferendis,
inured to.
There are even some passages where
tbis goTernment canoot be at all doubt-
ed of, Carilas soli, cui longo tempore
assuescito, L,v. So that if there be
sometimes an ablative used on this oc-
casion, it cannot be any other than the
ablative of the manner.
AssERERE aliquid, Cic. to affirm it.
Aliquem manu, Liv. to set him at liber-
ty. In libertatem, Id. Asserere se,
Ovid, to aisert or recover his liberty. Ali-
quem ccelo, Ovid, to canonize. A mor-
talitate, Plin, Jun. Sibi aliquid, Ptiin.
Se studiis, Plin.
AsTARE in cons])ectu, Cic. to present
himself. In turaulum,if/ In be near.
Astitit mihi contra, Plaut. he opposed
me sf'origly,
Ass-URGERE ex Diorbo, Liv. to re-
cover from sickness. Alicui, Cic. to rise
up to one, to do him reverence. In arbu-
rem, Plin. to grow up lo a tree.
Assurgi, Passive, Cic. to be done re-
verence to.
Attendere aliquem, id. to listen to
him. Primum versum legis, id. to
cnmider it. Animum, or aniraum ad
aliquid, id. to apply one^s self, Alicui
rei, id. to take nnt'ce of it.
ArriNERE aliquem, Tac. to retain
one. Ad aliquid, or ad aliquem, Cic.
to concern him. In belong to him. Nunc
jam cultros attinet, Plaut. he has them
already.
Attineri studiis, Tac. to be fond of
Slur/y.
AuscOLTARE alicui, Plaut. Cic. to
obey him, Aliquem, Plaut. to listen to
him.
B.
Bei.lare alicui, Stat. Cum aliquo,
Cic. to flight against him.
Take notice that all verbs of fight-
ing, quarrelling, resisting, contesting,
and the like, are more elegantly joined
with the preposition cum and its ablative,
than with the dative.
C.
Cadere alt^, or ab alto, Cic. In
piano, Ovid. In terram, Lucr. In
unius potestatem, Cic. to fall.
Cadere formula, Quint, to be cast in
law, to lose the suit.
Non cadit in virum bonum mentiri,
Cic. an honest man is incapable of telling
a lie.
Nihil est quod in ejusmodi mulierem
non cadere videalur, id. there is nothing
but what suits her veiy well.
Honesta et jucunda ceciderunt mibi
a tp, id. happened lo me on ynur part.
Csf.ARE argentum argento, &! in ar-
gento, Cic. to chase or emboss.
Caelare flumina et bestias in vasis,
Ovid.
204
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Ontd. Opus caelatuni uovem musis,
Hor. where the wk'U Jmce nf human ail
and I'lduiiry halh been exerted.
Calerb. Thure cale il aijE, Virg.
Aures nostra) caleut iliius cniiiiaibus,
Cic. o'lr ears ring wii/i.
Cum caletur niaxime. Plaut. sup.
Cator. For tht n it is passive, whence
we may infer that it has also its active.
For which reason Sanclius iitaintaineth
that we may say, Calere rem aliquam,
or re aliqiia, to have a passion for a
tkint;. And it is in this sense, accord-
ing to him, that we say, Iliius sensum
pulciir^ calleo, Ter. I know him w:lL
Calere jura, Cic. to know.
I am not ignorant that all the dic-
tionari'^s make a distinction between
these two verbs, caleo and calleo, and
that Cicero seems to derive the latter
from callum. But one would think that
callum rather comes from calro, since a
callosity proceeds from action often rp-
pcated, which first t-nijienders heat, and
afterwards the hardness of skin. And
indeed, callere ad iuum queestum, in
P'.autus, seems rather to imply a par-
ticular attention and warmth of the
mind, than an inveterate habit or
custom.
Canere aliquem, Cic. Super ali-
quo, id, to sing the praises of a person.
Sibi intus canere, id. to care for no body
but himself, to praise hirmtlf.
Carere commodis, id. not to have the
convniencii^s.
Prasterquam tui carendum quod erat,
Ter.
In qu' d amo, careo. Plant.
Caruit te f( bris, Plaut. the fever did
not seizf y u.
Cavere aliqiiid, Cic. Hot. to acid,
to lakf rare of. Alicui, Cir, to watch
over his prnervaimn. Ah alqiio, id. to
guard aaai'st him. Malo, fir a malo,
Petron. T>i' verbis alicujus, Plaut. Ca-
vere obsidibus de pecunia, CfPs. tn give
security by hostages. Sibi obsidibus ab
aliq''0, id. to t«kf securilij by liu tiigis.
Quod nihil de iis Augustus testa-
niento cavisset, Suet.
We say Cavere aliqno, cr per ali-
quem, Cic, to take bail c r security vf a
person,
Caetera quae qtiidem provider! pute-
runt, cavebuntur, ul.
Cederr locum, Slat. Loco, Cic.
Cas. to quit. Ad locum, Liu. to go
thither. E vil^, Cic. to die. F.xitio,
Ovid, to turn out to one'i destiuction.
In proverbiuin, to become a pr^veri.
Intra fiiiem juris, Liv. to abide within
thr limits uf h'S light.
Ccdt re alicui, Virg. to comply with a
pennn.
Cessit mihi, id. it has ka'ipenrd tome.
Honori non cedere, Virg. to dtitrae
no less honour than is done us.
Haereditas alicui cedit, Vtrg. remains
to him.
Pro pulmentario cedit, Colum, is tukei%
for nourishment.
Cedit dies, Ulp when the day of pay-
ment b-gins to draw near.
Ccr^EE. See the Syntax, rule 24,
p. 43.
Certare laudibus alicujus, Virg. to
oppose his gieat'iess. Cum aliquo, Cic.
to fght. Bello <le re aliqud, Liv.
Secum, Cjc. to endeavour to surpass
him.
Certat vincere, Virg. he strives ie
overcome.
Ceitare aliquid, Hor. to strive to do a
thing.
Si res certabitur, Hor. if the thing
comes to be di pitted.
The latter examples shew that this is
really an active verb, and therefore Re-
gius had no reason to find fault with
Ovid for saying
Certntam Hie Denrum Amhraciam,
CiRCUNDARE oppidum castris, C(es.
Oppido mcenia, to suriound or invest.
CoGiTAnE aninio, id. In animo,
Ter. Cum animo, Plaut. Secum, Ter.
to think.
Aliquid, or de re aliqua, Cic.
CoiRE in unum, Vrrg. to assemble
together. Societatem cuua aliquu, Cic.
to make an alliart' e.
Societas coitiir, /(/.
Immitia placidis coeunt, Hor. are
mixed irilh.
Milites coeunt inter se, Cees. to join
battle, 10 rally.
Coi.i.oQUi alicui SC aliquem, Plaut,
Cum aliquo, Cir. to speak.
Inter se colloqni. Cic. C<£s. to con'
vers' liiih mie another,
CoMMiTTERE se alicui, Cic. Se in
fidem alicujus, Ter, to put one's self un-
der liis protection. Aliquem cum alio.
Mart. Inter se omncs, Suet, lo sf/ then^
all together by ihe ears. Lacum niari,
Plm. to join it.
CoMMODAiiE aurum, Cic to lend gold,
Alicui, simi'ly, or se alicui, id, to asiift
him. In rebus alicui, id. De loco
alicui, id.
CoMPLERE armntomilite, Virg, Com»
pletus mercatorum career, Cic.
Com*
OF Verbs of different Governments. 205
CompOVere aliqnid alicui, or cum
aliqus Vug. to compare, to confront, to
join i'lgdher.
C'linpaiiere se ad exemplum, Quint,
to conform to examnle.
Concedeue, Plant, to die. Peti-
tion! aliciijiis, Cic. to condescend, to
grant. De jure suo, id. Injurias reipub.
id.
Concedere in aliquetn locum, &c.
See Cedere.
CoNCiLiARE aliquem, Cic. Ad al-
terum, Plaut. Homines inter se, Cic.
Animos aliquorum ad benevolentiam
•rga alios, id. Conjunctionem cum ali-
quo, id. Pacem ab aiiquo, Piaui. for
cum aiiquo.
CoNCLUDERE SB in celiam, Ter. In
cavea, Plaut. to slmt one^s self up.
Res multas in unum, Ter. to put them
togethfr.
CoNcuRRERE cum allquo, Sil. Ali-
cui, Virg. to fght. See Bellare here
above.
CoNDEMN'ARE criminc, criminis, or de
crimine, Cic. to condemnfor. Omnes de
consilii sententia, id. with the opinion of
the whole council.
Condemnare alicui, Ulp.
CoNDERE in pepulchro, Cic. Humo
et in humo, Ovid, to bury. In furnum,
Plaut. to put into the oven. Moenia,
Virg, to build.
CoN'DicERE ccenam alicui. Suet.
AJ ccenam aliquem, Plaut. to invite to
supper.
Condicere alicui, simp'y, Cic. to pro-
mise to suf) v:ilh him.
CoNDUCERE virgines in unum lo-
cum, id. to bring them together. Ali-
quem, Plaut. to hire him to do someth'via.
De censoribus, Cic. to take a kase of the
censors.
Conducit hoc tuse laudi, id. is condu-
€ive to. In rem, Plaut. Ad rem ali-
qHam, Cic.
CoNFERRE tributa, id. to pay. No-
Tissima primis, id. to compare. Se in
or ad urbem, id. to go to t ivn. Omne
studium ad rem aliquam, id. to apply
one^s self entirely to it. Crimen in ali-
quem, id. to thro-ju the hlame 'ipon him.
Seria cum aiiquo, Ovid, to cofif^r. Ca-
pita, Cic. to have a pnvate meeltng, to
speak tete-a-tele.
Pestem hominibus conferunt, Colum.
do give them the plugue.
Neminem cum illo conferendum
pietate puto, Cic. Conferunt ad tem-
perandos calores, Cnlum. contribute to,
HsBc oratori futuro coaferuat, Suint.
ere of service.
CoNFiDERE vlrtuti, Cips. to confid«
in his strength. Ammo et spe, id. In
aiiquo, Hirt. Aliqui re. Multum na-
tura loci confidebaut, Ctes.
Confiteri crimen, Ccfs. to confess. De
maleficio, id. to acknoicledse it. Ut de
me contitear, id. to tpeak ingenuously of
xvhat regards me.
CoNFLicTARE fi( Ri. Conflictati tem-
pestatibus & sentinae vitiis, C(ps. incom-
moded to the highest degree, ttc.
Qui cum ingeuiis conflictatur ejus-
modi, Ter. who haunts, tv/io converses.
Rempublicam conflictare, Tac. to af~
fict.
CoNGERERE tilulos alicui, Sen. to load
him with titles. Crimen in aliquem,
Cic.
CoNGREDi alicui, Cees. Aliquem,
Plaut. to draw near him. Cum hoste £^
contra hostem, Cic. In attack him,
CoNGRUERE. Congiuunt literae li«
teris aliorum, id. do agree.
Congruunt inter se, Ter. agree toge-
ther. Congruit sermo tibi cum ilia,
Plaut.
CoNJUXcERE. Conjuncta virtuti for-
tuna, Cic. joined.
Conjuncta & sociata cum altera, id.
Conjuncta mihi cura de rep. cum
ill.., id.
Conjungi hospitio & amic'tia, id. is
be joined by the ties of hospitality and
friendship.
CoNQi'ERi rem aliquam, or de re
aliqna, id. Ob rem aliquam, Suet, to
complain. Cum aiiquo, Cic. Pro aii-
quo, id.
CoNquiESCFRE a re aliqua, id. i»
leavr off, to be respited. lu re aliqua,
id. to take a delight in it.
Hieme bella conquiescunt, id. do
cease Nisi perfecta re, de me noo
conquiesti, id
CoNSCENPERE naveffi, id, in navem,
Lerit. Cic. to embark.
CoNSENTiRE sibl CT secum, id. to
be consistent xuith one's self. Alicui, or
cum aiiquo, id. to agree with him. Ali-
quid or di- aPquo, or ad aliquid, id. to
agree about something. In aliquem, Ulp.
to azree to take him for an arbitrator.
In eum omnes illud consentiunt elo-
gium, Cic. they agree with one voice to
bestow this encomium on him.
Astrum nostrum consentit incredibili
modo, Hor.
CoNSF.ftui aliquem itinere, vel in iti-
nere, Cic, to overtake him,
Aliqnid consequi, id. to obtain it, to
gain his end.
CoNSEREBE fflanum or manu cum
boste,
W6
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
hoste, id. the former more usual, lofiaht
hand lo hand, to come to handy strokes.
Diem nocti, Ovid, to join night iciih day
vpon an afi'air. Aites belli ii)ter se,
JLJv. Baccho aliqiiein locum, Virg, to
plant lines.
Consider E aliquo loco, vel in aliquo
loco, Cic. to sto[> there.
CoNSTARE per ipsum, id. In depend
only upon himself. Sibi, Cic. Hor. to be
consistent zcilh himself. Ex multis, Cic.
to be conipoiirdtil of.
Agri constant campis & vineis, riin.
consiU of fields and vineyards.
Constat gratis tihi navis, Cic. cods
you nothing. Auri ratio, id. the sum is
entire.
Non constat ei color negue vnltiis,
Liv. his colour and counlennnce changes.
Mente vix constat, Cic. he is hardly in
his senses.
Hoc constat, or constat inter omnes,
id. it is biynnd nil doulit.
Constat hac de re, 2uint. Plin.
Constat hoc niilii tecum, yhl Ileren.
CoNsuESCERB alicui, Ter. Cum ali-
quo, Plaul. tofrer/uent his company,
Consuesccre pronuntiare, Cic. to ac
custom one's self to. Ade6 in teneris
consucsceie multum est, Virg. Plaustro
& aratro jnvencum consuescere, Colum.
Omnia pericuia a pueritia consueta ba-
beo. Sail.
CoNSULERE boni, Suint. Plant, to
take in good part. Alicui, Cic. to do him
teivice. Aliquem, id. lo ask counsel.
Consuli quidem te a Cssare scribis, sed
ego tibi ab illo consuli mallem, id. but
to signify, I give you counsel or advice, zve
say rather, Autor tibi sum.
Consulo te banc rem, or de bac re,
id.
Consulo in te, Ter. I am contriving
something for you, or against you.
Consulere in commune, Ter. to con-
iHlt the public good.
Contendere alicui, Hot. Cum ali-
quo, Cic. Contra aliquem, id. to dis-
pute, to maintain a thing against an-
other.
Contendere aliquid ab aliquo, id.
Contendere animum, Ovid. Animo,
Ci''.to bi'nd vni's mind. Cursum, Virg.
Plant, lo run swiftly. In aliquem lo-
cum, Cic. to make all expediiion lo a
place.
Contendere rem cum aVik re, id.
Alicui rei, Hor. to compute it.
CoNTiNoERE se inter se, or inter
scse, Plant. Colum. to touch one anothtr,
to ie allied.
Atque in magnis ingeniis id plerum-
que contigit, Cic hath often happened.
Contigit mihi, id. it hat happened to
me.
Cont'n;it mihi, id. it relates to me, it
belongs lo me.
Contu)<rere funem, Virg. to touch.
CoNvi NiRp. cum aliquci, Cic. to agree
very Well with a pers'^n. Sibi, id, to
preset ve always an evenness if temper.
Ad aliquem, /'(/. Id go to meet one, Ali-
quem, P,aut. lo talk with him. In jus.
Plant, to sue him.
Convenit inter utrumque, Cic, they
are both agreed, I\Iibi cum illo, id. [
am of his opinion. Ad eum haec contu-
nieli:i, id. concerns him.
Aliam setatem aliud factum, Plaul.
becomes belter.
Ilrec fratri mecum non conveniuut,
Ter. does net agree with me in this.
De hoc pa rum convenit, Quint, they
are not well agreed ahmit this.
Hoc maledictum inillam aetatemnon
convenit, Cic. does not sail or become.
CupERE alicui, Cic. Cces. Alicujus
causa, Cic, to favour him.
Aliquem, Ter. Cic. to seek and desire
h:s company.
Cupit te videre, Plaut. Te conven-
tum, id.
D.
■ Damnare sceleris, or nomine scelcris
aliquem, Cic. De vi, de majestate, id.
to condemn. Ad pcenam in opus, in
metallum, Plin. Jun.
Dare literas alicui, Cic. to give or to
put them into his hands.
Litteras ad aliquem, kA to send or direct
letters to him. Se fngce ^ in fugam, id.
to run avcay. Se ad lenitatem, id. lo be
extremely mild. Gemitnm (3C se gemitui,
Cic Virg. to moan. Operam, el ope-
ram alicui rei, in rem aliquam, ad rem
aliquam faciendam. Cic. to be employed
about a thing. Mandata alicui, id.
Aliquid in mandatis, Plaut. to give in
charge. Se in vi.Tm, Cic. In manum
ft" in manu, Ter. Cic.
Dedcrat comas diffundere ventis,
Virg. loose was her hair, and wantoned
in t/ie wind. Dare manum alicui, Plaut.
to sha^e hands.
Dare manus, Cic. lo give up, to yield.
Cibo dare, Plin. to give to eat. Dare
ritio, dc. to blame.
Da Tityre nobis, Virg. tell ns.
Dare oblivioni, Liv. to forget. The
contrary is Manhare memoris, Cic to
transmit to poUetily, lo commit to me-
mory, lo retain, lo learn by heart. But
oblivioni mandarf, which se^'eral mo-
derns make use of, is not Latin, for it
cannot be found in any good writer.
Debers
OF Verbs of different Governments. 207
Deberb amorem et omnia in aliquem,
id, tibi (lebemus, id. we are indebted to
yov.
Tibi video hac non posse deberi, id.
Decedere alicui, to give way to hitrif
Plant, lo shun one's compantj, Cies,
Decedere, Cic. fsup. e vita) lo die.
Dc suo jure, or jure sue, ii. lo relin-
quish his right.
De sumina nihil decedet, Ter. the sum
shall be untouched.
DECEUNEnE aliquiJ, or de re aliqiia,
C:c. lo orduin, to decree, Armis, id. to
figh!. Pugnam, Liv. Pngna, Vat.
Max. Sno capite, Cic. lo expose one's
telf lo danger,
Decere, see tlie Syntax, rule 15.
Deciuere (from cadu) a spe, or de
spe, Liv, Spe, Ter. to fall from, fn
laqueos, Ovid, lofall intn.
Decidere (from C£pdo) caput, Vellei.
to behead, Quaestionem, Papin. to de-
cide. Damnum, f///i. to determine.
Cum aliquo, Cic. to transact, De ali-
quonegotio, id. Prfe'iio cum aliquo, id.
to decide a dispute by the sword.
Pro se, id. Pro libeitate. Sen. to
compoundfor its liberty.
Decidere jugera singula ternis me-
dimnis, Cic. to tax them at three mimt.
Decisa negotia, Hor, finished, put an
end to.
Declinare loco, a. loco, or de loco,
Cic. to turn from. Se extra viam, Plant.
Ictum, Liv. to avoid the 6/0:0. Agmen
aliquo, Liv. to remove his camp. No-
mina & verba, S-uint. to decline and con-
jugate.
Dedere se hostibus, Cas, In di-
tionem & arbitrium hostium, Plaut. to
surrender himself. Aliquem in pistri-
Qum, Ter. to condemn him to hard labour.
Ad scribendum se dedere, Cic. to ap-
phj himself entirely. Deditk operd, id.
on purpose.
Deferre studium suum et laborem
ad aliquem, id, to offer one's seriice lo
him. Opes ad aliquod negotium de-
ferre alicui, id. Deferre aliqnid in be-
neficii loco, id. In present a thing to a
person in order to oblige him. In benefi-
ciis delatns, id, one that has a pulsion
from the itate.
Deferre aliquem, id. to infoim against
him.
Defendere aliquem contra iniquos,
id. Aliquem ab injuria, id. Injuriam
alicujus, id. lo avenue the ztrong done to
kirn. Injuriam alicui, Plaut. to lake
care that no harm is done him.
Defendere & obsistere injurirc, Cic.
Defendere ac propulsarejnjuriam; id.
Defendere civem i periciilo, id. Myr-
tos i'l frigore, Virg. lo preserve them.
j'Estatem capellis, Uor. Solstitium pe-
cori, Virg. to shelter them from the heat,
Deficere ab alif\no, Cic. Liv. to de-
sert his party. Aninio vel animis, Cic.
Animum, Varr. to lose co irage.
Dies & latera & vox me deQciunt,
Cic. begin to fail me.
Deficiunt mihi tela, Ci£s. do fail me.
Animus si te non deficit aequus, Hor.
has 7iol left you.
Si memoria deficitur, Cul. if it comes
to fail you.
Deficio a te ad hunc, Suet. I leave
you t) go to him,
Mulier abundat audaciaj consilio et
ratione deficitur, Cic.
Deficiorque prudens artis, ab arte
mra, Ovid.
Deficere ocuIos in rem aliquam,
Cic. Mentem in aliquo, id. to fix one's
7nind on a thing,
Dffigere furta. alicujus in oculis po-
puii, id. lo expose them,
Definire aliquid alicui, id. to shetv
him^ or to lay down to him. Imperium
terminis, id. to limit. Magnitudinem
alicujus rei, id. to define, or mention
precisely.
Certus & definitus locus, id, a parti'
cular and determined place. 1
Deflectehe iter, Lucan. Ex itinere,
P.iji. Cic. to turn out of one's road.
Declinare proposito & deflectere sen-
tentiam, id.
Amnes in alium cursum deflectere,
id. to turn or divert their bed.
Degenerare a gravitate paterna, id.
to degenerate.
A familia superbissiroa, Liv, to dege-
nerate, to be unlike.
In feritafem, Pirn.
Hoc animos degenerat, Colum. enir-
vales, zceakens.
Delinquere aliquid 3^ in aliqua re,
Cic. In aliquam, Ovid, to fail, . to do
wrong.
Depellere loco. CcEs, De loco, Cic.
lo drive away.
Suspicionem a se, id. to remcve.
Deperire aliquem, or aliquem amore,
Plaut. Amore alicujus, Liv. lo be pas-
sionately in Icve zvith.
Naves deperiernnt, Ccrs. are Lst.
Deplorake vitam, Cic. to deplore, or
bewail.
De suis miseriis, id. to lawnt,
Depont.re in giemio, Plin. Cic.
Stratis, Ovid. Sub ramis, Virg. In
terram, Culum. In silvas, Cces. lo put
in, upvn, or under something.
Deponere
208
NEW METHOD.
Book VII.
Deponere sediGcationem, Cic. to lay
aside the design of building.
yEgrum, id. to despair of a sick per-
ton.
Aliquid, Virg. to pledge or pawn, to
stake.
Deponere aliquid in alicujus fide, Cic.
Ill fidein, Liv. Apud fi'.lem, Trajan.
Pliii. til entrust him with.
Deprecari arujuid ab altero, Cic,
to O'k htm for a thing, Aliqiiem pro re
aliqiii, id. Alicui ne vapulet, Plant, to
intercfde for kin.
Calaniitatem abs se, Cic. to avert and
heej) off' by p'oyr.
Dercig^re fidem alicui, or de fide
alicujus, /'/.
Sibi derogare, id. to derogate from
himself,
Dfsinere artem, id. to quit a pro-
fession.
Desistere a senfentid, or de senten-
tia, id. ^' cense, to dfsnt.
Desperare salutetn, saluti, or de sa-
lute, id. tn despair of. Ab aliquo, id.
to have no further erpfrtation from him.
Sibi, C<ts. D'^ SH, Pliiut. Cic, to aban-
don nnf's self t" despair.
Non despero ista esse vera, Cic. Sive
restituimur, sive desperamur, in the pas-
sive, id,
Despondere filiam alicui, id. to pro -
7nise in maniage. Sibi df)mum alicu-
jus, id. to promise it to one'a self, to be
sure of it.
Despondere animis, Liv, to think one's
self secure of. Anioium, id. to fall into
despair.
Detrahere alicui, Ovid, De aliquo,
Cic. to backbite. Ali((uid alteri, td. to
lessen or abate. Laudem, or de laudi-
bus, id. to dimmish his reputation. In
judicium, id. to sue one at law.
Detureari spe, de spe, vel ex spe,
Cic. to fall from his hopes.
Differre famam aliquam alicui,
Plant, to spread a report. Rumorem,
Ter. Aliquid rumoribus, Tac.
DiflPerre aliquem, to put him off, and
make him wail. Mart, to te'ize and vrx
him, Ter. Rationem sperat invenisse
se qui differat te, Ter.
Differri doloribus, Tac. to feel vio-
lent pains. Amore, cupiditate, laetitid,
&c. Plant, to be transported tvith.
DifFerre vestitu ab aliquo, Cic, In
candore, Ptin, DifFert ab hoc, Cic.
Huic, Hor.
Differunt inter se, Cic.
Ad aliquod tempqs aliquid differre,
id. In annum, JJor, to dffei, to put off,
DiMiCARE de re, Cic, Pro re, I lin,
to^ght, to dispute about or for a thing.
Dimicant inter se, Plin.
Dimicandum omni ration?, ut, &c.
Cic, we must use all our endeavours to
obtain it,
DiscEPTARE aliquid jusiS, Cic. to
judiie, to decide, to dispute. Damni,
Ca'lislr. Eoiiein foro. Plant, to come
anil plead in the sane court.
D'sceptant inter se de uegotiis, Sail.
DiscntPARE rei alicui, Hor, A ro
aliqua, Cic the latter more usual, to
vary, to disagree, Sibi, id. not to be al-
ways one's self. In re aliqua, id, irt
something.
Discrf-pant inter se, id,
DiscnucioR atiimi, Plaut. animo &
animum, from Diom^dts, who gives no
authority f>r it.
DispurARE aliquid Sf de aliquo.
Plant. Cic. Circa aliquid. Suint. to treat
about somethlns;. Mu'ta disputat quam-
obrem is qui torqueatur, beatus esse
non possit, Cic.
DibSENTiRE de veritate ab aliquo, id.
In re aliqi a ab altero, id. Cum aliquo
de re aliqua, id. Alicui opinioni, 3uint,
Coliim. to disagree about,
Ne orationi vita dissentiat, Sen.
Dissentiunt inter se, Cic.
DissiDERE capital) odio ab aliquo, id,
to hate him mirlaHy. Dissidere a seipso,
secumque disccrdare, id.
Inter se dissid'iit & discordant, id.
Si toga di'^sidet impar, Hor. if it be of
different length, or wteven,
DiviDERE nummos viris, Cic. In
viros, Plaut. to distribute, to divide.
Factum cum aliquo. Plant.
Dividere sententiam, Cic. to ask to di-
vide the judge's opinion, iri order to follow
one part, without being obliged to follow
the other.
DoCERE de re aliqua, Cic. to give ad-
vice of it. Rem aliquam aliquem, Ter.
to teach it him,
DotERE ab animo, ex animo. Plant.
Succossu alicuju";, Ovid. Dolore alicu-
ju-, Vi'g. t" b' deeply afflicted,
Dolel iiiihi cor. Plaut. Hoc cordi
meo, ill. C.iput k sole, id.
Doleo me, Pltul. Vicfm alterius,
Cic. Casuni aliorum, C/'c. Propter ali-
quem, 3u nl De aliquo Ovid.
DoNARK alii|ueni re, vel rem alicui,
Cic. to mak' him n preseut of a thing.
DuBrTARE de fide alicujus, Ad //e-
renn.t d ubl of hi\f\d ily,
Haec dum dubitas, Ter. while you <^re
conii'ie>i"e.
DoMiNARi ali<iii, Cic. in alicinem,
Ovi/. Iw re aliqiiA, Sail. Cic inter
aliquos, Cdsi, to domineer,
Omne
OF Verbs of different Governments. 209
Omne pecus indomitum curari acdo-
minari potest, Nigid. may be tamed.
O domus antiqua, heu quam dispari
dominare domino, Cic. 1. Off', ex veteri
poeld.
DucERE agmen, id. to lead. Sibi
alapam gravem, Phted. to give one^s
self a box on the ear, Ilia, Hor. to
be broken winded, to be out of breath,
£ra, Uor. to cast in brass. Aliquera
ex aere, Plin. Rationem salutis, Cic.
to have a regard. Versum, Ovid, to
write verses. Uxorem, Cic. to marry.
Usuras, id. to continue the payment of
usury.
Ducere laudi, Tfr. to esteem it an Ito-
nour. In gloria, P/f«. In hostium nu-
mero, Cic. Infra se, id. to esteem beneath
one. Pro nihilo, id.
Duci despicatuj, id, to be despised.
E.
EffErre pedem domo vel porta) Cic.
to go abrvad. Pedem aliquo, id. to go
some where, De nave in terram, id. to
unload.
EfFerre laudibus, id. to extol greatly.
Efferre fruges, id. to dear fruit.
Efferri funere &! cum funere, id. Pe-
dibus, Plin, to be interred.
EfFerri studia in re aliqua, Cic. to
have a strong passion for.
Efferri in amorem, Plin, to be be-
loved.
EcERE consilii ct consilio, Cic. to have
need.
Egere multa, active, Censorinus apud
Gellium. Hence Plautus useth egetur
in the passive. And hereby Sanctiiis
sheweth that one may elegantly say,
Turpem egere egestatem.
Nihil indigere, Varr. See Indigeo.
Egredi ab aliquo, Ter. to go out of a
person's house. Ex proviticia, Cic, Extra
fines & terminos, id. Urbe, id. Officio,
id, A proposito, id.
Elabi de, e, ex manibus, id. to slip
away. Inter tela et gladios, Liv, to
escape. Pugnam aut vincula, Tac.
Paulatlm elapsusBaccliidi, Ter. mean-
ing himself of her by degrees,
Elaborare in Uteris, Cic, In ali-
quid, Siiint. Aliquid, Pi'in. Oratio-
nemeamqueinstruere, Cic. Ad judicium
alterius, id. to endeavour to pleate him,
mnd to merit his approbation.
Emergere ex malis, Cic, Ter. In-
commoda vaietudine, Cic, Extra ter-
rain. Pirn, Super terram, Colum. to
rise out of,
Se vel sese emergere, Colum.
Vol. II.
Unde emergi non potest, Ter.
Eminere inter omnes, Cic. In novo
populo, Liv, to appear on high, to be
conspicuous,
Eminebat ex ore crudelitas, Cic. la
voce sceleris atrocitas, Curt.
Moles aquam eminebat, Curt, ap'
peared above the water.
Emungere aliquera argento, Ter, to
cheat one of his money. Alicui oculos.
Plant, to pluck oul his eyes.
Enuntiare consilia amicorum adver-
sariis, Cic. Apud homines quod ta-
citurn erat, id. to divulgf,
Eripere a morte aliquem, id, to
save him from dying. Morti aliquem,
Virg, Morti m alicui, Sen. Ex periculo
aliquem, Cic.
Erijbescere in re aliqua, id. Ora
alicujus, id. to blush to be in his presfnce.
Preces, Claud. Loqui, Cic, Forltnife,
3, Curl, to be ashamed of his condition of
life.
Epistola non erubescit, Cic. does not
blush.
Genis erubuit, Ovid.
Malis alterius enibescere, Ovid, to
blush at another's mtsfcrtunes.
Erumpere ex tenebris, Cic. In ali-
quam regionem, id. In hoc tempus, id.
In actum, id. In eflfectnm, Quint. Por-
tis, Virg. Per castra, Plin.
Loco aliquo, C(ts, Subito clamore,
Vng.
Erumpunt sese radii, Virg. Se?e por-
tis foras, C<es. Stomachum in aliquem,
Cic. Gaudium, Ter.
Vereor ne isthaec fortitude in ner-
vum erumpat denique, Ter. lest you
bend the bow so as to endanger the
string.
EvADERE manus alicujus, Virg. E
manibus, Liv. Pugna, Virg. to make his
escape. Omnem viam, Virg. Ante ocu-
los, Viig, t'l come Ijefore one, Adsummi
fastigia tpcli, Virg. to climb.
In aliquod magnum malum, Ter. to
become very destructive,
ExARUERE & -ESCERE ira, indigna-
tione, Liv. In iras, Mart, to be in-
flamed.
Dolor exarsit imis ossibus, Virg.
Exarsit hi id quod nunquam viderat,
Cic. Exarsere ignes aniino, Virg,
ExcELLERE super alios, Liv, Longi
aliis, Cic. Inter alios, id.
Prseter ceteros, id. to excel, to sur^
pass.
ExcusARE B3 alicul S\ apud ali-
quem, id. to excuse himself. Valetudi-
neni alicui, to allege his indisposition as
an e.rcuse.
p iiic
210
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
-Ille Philippo
Excubare laboram 8c mercenaria vin-
cla, Hor.
lixcusarese <le re aliqua, CtEs.
ExiGERE aliquem 6 civitate, Cic. to
drive liim out. Honoiibus, Plin. to
deprive him of honours. Aliquid acer-
biiis, Cic. to demand it uilh menaces.
Columnas ad perpendiculuin, id. to try
uilh the plummet whether they be straight.
yEvum in sylvis, Virg. vitam cum ali-
quo, id. to pass his life. Ensem per me-
dium juvenem, Virg, to run him through
the body.
Sues pastum, Varr. to drive.
Exigere tie re aliqua, Plin. Jun. to
dispute about a thing, to discuss it.
ExiMERE 6 vinclis, Cic. Vinclis,
Plaut. Metu, id. to deliver. In li-
bertatem, Liv. to set at liberty. Ali-
quid de dolio, Ci:. to droit' out.
Eximere diem, id. to waste the time.
Eximi noxae, Liv. to be discharged or
forgiven.
ExoRARE, expetere et exposcere ali-
quid Deos et a Diis, Cic. ^ alii, to ash.
See the 24th rule, p. 43.
ExpECTARE alicujus adventum in
aliquem locum 6r in aliquo loco, C<zs.
to wait for a person's arrival at a place.
ExpELLERE, expedire, ejicere, ex-
terminare, extrudere, exturbare, urbe,
vel ex urbe, Cic to drive out, to put
out.
ExPLERE aliquem, Cic. Ter. Ani-
mum alicujus, L>v. Animum alicui,
Ter. to content, to satisfy him,
ExPLicAUE rem aliquam, vel de re
aliqua, Cic. to explain something.
ExPOSTULARE cum altero injuriam,
id, De injuria, Ter. to expostulate.
ExpRiMERE vocem alicujus, Ces. to
make him speak. Risnm alicui, Plin.
Jun. Pecuiiiam ab nliquo, Cic.
Exprimere effigicm, uL to draw to
the life. Veibum verbo, de verbo, h
verbo, exprimere, id, to translate word
for wnrd.
Exprimere ad verbum do Grsecis, id.
Vim Grascorum p<j£tarum, id.
ExpuoBRARE Vitia adversariis vel in
adversarios, id. to reproach.
. ExuERE jugum &! se jugo, Liv.
to shake off the yoke. Vestem alicui.
Sen. to sliip him. Hominem ex ho-
mine, Cic. to divest one's self of all hu-
manity.
ExuLARE Romse, id. to live in exile
at Rome. Domo, Ter, to be banished
from home.
A patrii, Plaut.
Per externas profugus pater wx-
ulat oras, Ovid,
Respubl. discnssu alicujus exulat, Cic.
Exulatum abiit res patns, Plaut.
F.
Facere ab aliquo, Cic. Cum aliquo,
id. to be on his side. Bona alicui el ia
aliquem, Plaut. to do good.
Consilio alicujus, or de consilio, Plin.
Cic. with his advice.
Cum pro popuio 6eret, id. as ihetf
were offering sacrifice for the peojde.
Flocci nou facere, id. Floccum fa-
cere, Plaut. not to value a rush.
Facis ex tua dignitate, Cic, you act up
to your dignity.
Hoc facit ad difficultatem urinai,
Plin. is a remedy against the strangury,
Non facere ad Corensem pulverem,
Suinlil,
But facere alicui rei, signifying to
serve for that use, or to be profHable,
is not good Latin. Some however
have attempted to defend it by this
passage of Pliny, book 23. chap. 1.
Mustum capitis doloribus facil. Which
is repugnant not only to the rules
of physic, but to the purity of the
Latin tongue. Therefore the manu-
script copies, and all the best editions,
have Capitis doluresfacit, causeth head*
achs, and nut, is good against head*
achs,
Facite hocmeum consilium, legiones
novas non improbare, Cic. suppose that.
Non faciam ut euumerem miserias cra-
nes in quas incidi, id.
L'c.cere is likewise put with the accu-
sative an infinite number of ways, as
Nos magnum fecissemus, id, we
should have struck a great blow.
Facere gratiam alicui, Liv. to shezv
him favour, Facere posam, Plaut.
Facere stipeudium, Liv. to serve a
campaign, or to follow the army.
Facere nomina, Cic. to burrow »w-
ney.
Facere rebellionem, C(£s. to raise a
rchiiliou. And the like.
Fastidire aliquem, Cic. Virg, Hor.
Alicujus, Plaut. to despise him.
A nie fasti d it amari, Ovul.
Fateri scelus et de scelere, Cic, Hor,
to confess, to acknowledge,
FoENERARi aliquid alicui, Cic. to lend
out at usury.
FoENERARE (and not foenerari) ah
aliquo, Appul. df Juriscons. to borrow at
interest,
Haec sapit, haec omnes foenerat una
Deos, Mart.
FiDfiRK nocti, Virg, terra, id,
Moliri
OF Veres of different Governments. 211
Moliri jam tecta videt, jam fidere
terra, .'E«. 8.
Foumidahe alicui, Plant, to he
afraid lest some harm befal him. Ab
aliqiio, 'ir aliquem, Cic-ro, lu fear and
tu dread him.
Fraudare aliquem pecunia, Cic. to
cheat him. Militum stipendium, Cees.
lo keep back their paij. Genium suum,
Plant, to pinch his belly.
FuGERE conspectum alicujus, Cic.
E conspectu, Ter. Oppido, C<&5. De
civilate, Suintil. to run aicay. De illo
fugit me ad te scribere, ('ic. I forgot.
Fungi officio, Cic. Ter. Officium,
^er, to discharge his office. Vice, Hor.
Vicem alterius, Liv. Suet, toperform the
office of another. Fungi miiaere, to ex-
ercise an employment, Cic. CtEs. Hor. and
sometimes to make a present, Cic.
Gaudere gaudio, Plant. Gaudium,
Ter, to rejoice. De aliquo, propter ali-
quem, Cic.
Furit homines gavisos suum dolorem,
id. Mihi gaudeo, id.
GiGNi capite vel in caput, Plin.
Glaciare. Positas ut glaciet nives
Jupiter, Hor. to congeal.
Humor glaciatur in gemmas, Plin.
Gloriari aliquid, de re aliqna,
in re aliqua, ob rem aliquam, Cic. to
boast.
Gratolari adventu, or de adventu,
id. to congratulate him upon his ar-
rival.
Gratulari victoriam alicui, id. to con-
gratulate him upon his victory.
Gratulor tibi in hoc, or de hac re, or
pro hac re, id.
Gravare & Ri, Ovid, to burden, or
Keigh down.
Gravari dominos, Lucan. to bear no
subjection.
Caetera tanquam supervacua gravari
solet, 2uint. he w- lulh to see them.
Ne gravere exaediticare id opus quod
instituisti, Cic.
Gravatus somno, Ovid.
Pluvia ctim forte gravantur, Virg.
H.
Habere rem certam, vel pro certo,
Cic to know for certain. Aliquid certi,
id.
Habere quaedam dubia, id. In dubiis,
Suint. Pro dubio, Liv. to doubt.
Habere aliquem despicatui, vel des-
picatum, Ter, to despite.
Habere aliquem prajcipuo honore,
CiEs. la honore, Cic. Hoiio;es alicui,
id. De aliquo, T^i: to praise, to hmour.
Habere aliquem loco patris. Brums.
In loco patris, Cic. Pro patre, Liv. to
esteem hi,n as a father.
Pro stercore habere. Plant, to look
upon as dirt.
Habere aliquid odio, Plaul. In odi-
um, C/c. to hale if.
Habere in numero S^ in numerum
sapientum, /'(/.
Habere orationem apud aliquem,
St'imt. Ad aliquem, C/c. Cumali,juo,
C(es. to speak to, or before a person.
Habere in potestate <^ in potestatem,
Cces. to have in one's po-xer.
Bell6 habere <5< bell^ se habere, Cic.
Habere usum alicujus rei, Cic. Cces:
Ex re aliqua, Cic. In re aliqua, Caes. to
have experience, to be practised.
Habet se erga sedem, Plaut. she
dicells.
Habitare in platea, Ter. Valiibus
imis, Virg. sj'lvas, id.
H^rere. Hasret peccatum illi ^
in illo, Cic. sticks in liim, falls upon
him.
Obtutu haeret.defixus in uno, Virg,
continues fixed.
In multis nominibus haerebitis, Cic.
Si hie terminus hserct, Virg. if this
remains fixed and settled,
HoRRERE divinum numen, Cic. to fear
and to respect. Omnium conspectum,
id. to dread.
Frigoribus hyemis intolerabiliter hor-
rent, Colum. to shiver.
Horruerunt comas, Ovid, his hair stood
an end.
Horrebant densis aspera crura pilis,
Ovid.
Jactare se in re aliqua, S^ de re ali-
qua, Cic. Ob rem aliquam, to boast,
Jactare rem aliquam, Virg.
Itr-ABi. Iliabitur urbi, Virg. to slip
into the to'^en.
Animis illabere nostris, Virg.
Pernicies illapsa civium animos, Cic.
Medios illapsus in hostes, ordelapsus,
Virg.
Ad eos cum suavitate iliabitur, Cjc.
Illudere alicui, aliquem, in ali-
quem, in aliquo, Virg. J'er. Cic. to mock,
to deride.
Vestes auro illusje, Virg. emlroi-
dered.
Imminere in occasionem opprimendi
ducis, Liv. to seek the occasion.
Imminent duo leges toti Asiae, Cic.
P 2 Homo
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Homo ad caedem immioens, id.
Imminenti avaritiii esse, id. to lie ex-
tremely avnricim/s.
Gestus imminens, hi.
L\n>ENDERE. Impendebat moiis altis-
simus, Crps. ftun<r ovrr, commanded.
Contentio iinpendet inter illos, Cic.
Impendet nobis malum, id. Nos
mala, Ter. tluenten its.
Impertirk & Ri. Impertire alicui
salutem, Cic. Aliquem salute, Ter. to
salute.
Fortunas aliis impertiri, Cic, to im-
part.
Alteri de re aliqua impertire, id.
ColiegiE meo laus impertitur, id.
Implere veteris Bacchi, Virg. Me-
ro pateram, id. De re aliqua, Mart, to
Jill.
Implicare ossibus ignem, Virg. to
throw into.
Implicari morbo et in morbum, Liv.
to be taken ill.
Vim suam cum natnris hominum im-
plicant Dii, Cic. Implicat ad speculum
caput. Plant, to trim or dress.
Imponere arces montibus, Virg. to
build. In coUum, in manum, innavim,
Plaut. to put upon, or in,
Summam manum alicui operi, Virg.
In aliqua re, 3uint.
Imponere alicui, Cic. to impose upon
him, to deceive him. See Clitellas in
the first list of Ellipses, p. 177.
Imponere vim alicui, id. to constrain
him. Vulnera, id. to teound him. No-
men alicui, id. to name him. Regem
regioni, id. to appoint. Partes alicui,
id. to give a charge. Improbam perso-
nam alicui, id. to make him pass for a
vdlain. Leg'cs alicui, id. to enjoin him.
£xercitum Brundusii, id, to garrison.
Ita Slephan.
Imponere onus alicui, id. In ali-
quem, Plaut. \
Framentum imponere, Cic. to tax at
a certain quantity of corn.
Imponere servitutem fundo, id. to
subject to certain duties,
Hujus amicitia me in banc perditam
causam imposuit, id. has thrown me into
this unfortunate party.
Imprimere aliquid animo, Plin. Jun,
In aninio &\ in animum, Cic.
Incessere hostes jaculis et saxls
aut pilis, Liv. to assault or set upon. In-
cessere aliquem dolis, Plant. Incessit
eum ciipido, Liv. Cutt. Illi, Sail. Liv,
Curt. Val. Max. In te religio nova,
Ter. Virg. Morbus in cabtra. Lie. has
crept into.
i:<cu)ERB (laken from cadere) saxis;
Plin. Jun. to cut, engrave. In jes,
Liv. In a;rc, Cic. Pirn, in Panegyr.
Ludum incidere, //or. to break off
play.
Incmnare omnem culpam la ali-
quem, Liv. to throw the vikiile blame upon
him.
Hos ut sequar inclinat animus, Liv.
my mind inclines to.
Inclinat acies vel inciinatur, Liv. the
army gives nay.
Se fortuna inclinaverat ut, Cces. for-
tune has taken such a turn that.
Inci.udere in cavcerem et in carcere,
Cic. Orationi suae, id. to shut up, to
include.
Vocem includit dolor, id.
Smaragdi auro inciuduntur, Luc.
Incubare ova et ovis, Colum. to brood
upon.
Quod si una natura omnes incubaret,
Plin.
Incumbere gladio, Ad Heren. Lecto,
aratro, toro, Virg. Ovid. In gladium,
Cic. to lean upon. In aliquem, id. to
full upon him.
In or ad aliquid, Cic, Css. Alicui
rei, fiil. Plin. to apply one's self to some'
thing.
Venti incubuere mari, Virg. In mare,
Quint. Incumbit in ejus perniciem,
Cic. to endeavour to ruin him.
Verbo incumbit illam rem. Sail.
Incumbit illi spes successionis, Suet^
he is considered as ?2ext heir.
Incursare aliquem puftnis, calcibus^
&c. Plaut. to assault with blows, d^c.
Incursare in aliquem, Liv. to run upon
him.
Lana cui null us color incursaverit»
Plin. that has not been dyed.
Indicare conjurationem, Cic. de con-
juratioiie. Sail, to discover or give infor-
mation of a conspiracy.
Indicare in vulgus, Cic. to divulge..
Se alicui, id. to discover one's self to a
person,
Postulabat ut sibi fundus indicaretur,
id. that they ■would tell him the price.
Inducers animum ad aliquid, or ali-
quid in animum, Ter. to apply one's se(f
to something,
Inducere aliquid, Cic. to introduce,
and likewise to rase or strike out. Ali-
quem, id. to deceive him, to cajole, or
drazo him in.
luducere animum, simply, or animum
ut, or ne, or ut ne, Ter. to persuade him-
self.
Inducere scuta pellibus, Ctes. to cover
with skins. Inducers colorem pictura?,
Phn, to varnish,
Imsvgse
OF Verbs of different Governments. 213
iNDUEnE se veste, Ter. Sibi vestem,
Plant, to dress himself.
Cum in nubem se induerint anhelitus
terrae, Cic. will he converted into clouds.
Induere se in laqueos, id. to entangle
himself, fnduit se in floiem, Virg. blos-
soms,
Indulgere alicui, Cees. In aliqnem,
Liv. to treat him gently,
Nimis me indulgeo, Ter. Indulgent
patientiam flagello, Mart.
Qui malis moribus nomen oratoris in-
dulgent, 2uint. who grant the name of
orator to a person of a bad life.
Jus trium liberorum mihi princeps
indulsit-, Plin. Jun. has granted me.
Quando animus eorum laxari, indul-
gerique potuisset, Gell.
Inferre litem capitis in aliquem,
Cic. Perlculum capitis alicui, id. to
draw up an indictment against him.
In periculum capitis se inferre, id.
to bring himself into danger of his life.
Inferre rationibus, id. to charge to ac^
count.
Infundere in naribus 6f per nares,
Colum. In nares, Cic. Cribro, Sen. to
pour.
Infundere venenum alicui, Cic.
Ceiis opus infuudite, Phced. do your
work in wax.
Ingerere convicia alicui, Hor, In
aliquem. Plant, to load a person with
abusive language.
Pugnos in ventrem ingerere, Ter.
Ingredi orationem 6f in orationem,
to begin to speak.
Vestigiis patris ingredi, Cic. to follow
his father's footsteps.
Ihgurgitare se cibis, id. to cram
one's self with victuals, Se in flagitia,
id. to plunge into debauchery.
Inhiare haereditatem, Plant, to gape
after. Uberibus, Suet, the dative is most
tisuat,
Inire gratiam ab aliquo &; cum all-
quo, Cic. to curry favour.
Imsaxire amore, Plin. Amoribus,
Hor.
Hilarem insaniam. Plant. Sen.
Inscendere currum. Plant. In ar-
borem, id. Supra pilam, Cato, to mount,
ic climb up.
Inservire suis commodis, Cic. to
study his own interest. Honoribus, id. to
study to obtain.
Matronas est, unnm inservire aman-
tem. Plant. Nihil est k me inservitum
temporis cau£&, Cic.
Insilire defessos, Suet, to leap in, or
ttfon. In equum, Liv, In scapham.
Plant.
Insistere viis, Cic. Viam, iter,
Virg. to proceed and hold on. Hastae,
Plin. Jun. to lean vpnn. Ignibiis, Cic.
to stop, or stand still. In rem aliquam,
Piaut. Ces. In re aliqusl, 2uint.
Alicui rei, Plin, TihuU.-to apply him'
self
Insistebat in manu de%tr& Gereris
simulachrum victoriae, Cic. there was in
the right hand.
Institio. Stellarum cursus, pro-
gressus, institiones, id. their course, and
their resting.
Insputare aliquem, Sf! alicKi, Plant,
to spit tip m.
Instare aliquem, Plant, io urge, to
press him. Currum /or in currum, Virg.
to run upon, Operi, Virg. to make haste
with.
Insternere. Pelle leonis insternor,
Virg. to cover one's self.
Tabulasque super instravit, Virg.
Terrse insterni, Stat,
Tori inslrati super pelle leonis. Si'
lius.
Insultare, simply, Virg. Solo, Virg.
to rebound. Alicui fiC in aliquem, Virg,
Cic. to insult f to deride. Multos, Sail,
apud Serv.
Insultare fores calceis, Ter. to bounce
at the door with his heels.
Intendere arcum, Plin. to bend, or
stretch.
Animum studiis, Hor, to appiy one't
self.
Animum in or ad rem aliquam, Liv.
Intendere alicui rei, or curam ali-
cui rei, Plin. to employ his care about
it,
latendi animo in rem aliquam, Liv,
Pergin' sceleste intendere ? Plant.
Repudio consilium quod primum in-
tenderam, Ter. I alter my rtsoluiion.
Intercltjdere aditus ad aliquem,
Cic. to slap up the passage- Commeatum
inimicis, Plant. Inimicoscommeatibus,
Plant. &; CiEs.
Interdicerb histrionibus scenam.
Suet, Feminis usum purpurae, Liv, to
piohihit, to hinder.
Omni Gallic Romanis interdixit,
Cces. forbade them to set font in France.
Mal6 rem gerentibus bonis paternis
interdici solet, Cic.
Interdico tibi domo me^, Liv.
We may therefore say, interdico tibi
hanc rem (which is more rare), or tihi
hac re (which is usual), but we do not
meet with interdico tibi hac re, says
Vossius. Yet we raay use it, since
we
214
NEW METHOD.
Book VII.
we find in the passive, interdicor aqniV
& igiii, as wW/ (25 ignis & aqua niilii in-
tcrd icunlur, C«c. Suet. I am Jot hid, I am
Aeprived,
Cui nemo interdicere possit, Cic. whom
none could wilhstand.
Interdicere vestigiLs, Plin.
Interdioo iie hoc facias, Tcr.sup. tibi.
Prastor interdixit de vi hominibns
armalis, Cic. decreed thai those uho had
forciltty ejected their a?itagonists out of
their share of the estate, should be obliged
to make a reparation.
I.NTEREssF. convi\ iis £s in convivio, uh
In cajciem, id. In be present.
Inter belluam & liuminem lioc ma-
xim^ interest, quod, id. the greatest
diffcreiice betwixt man and beast is that,
&,c.
Nihil interest hoc & ilia, nisi divisim
Jegas, Seriec. Hoc morari victoriam,
qubd interesset amnis, Liv,
Hoc pater ac dominus interest, Ter.
this is the difference between a father and
b master.
Siulto intelligens quid interest ? Ter,
Quuniam ve/wEs-av interest tou <fQocEiv,
Cic.
Seri radices illitas fimo interest, Co-
lum.
Interest regis, hiv. it behoves.
Interest omnium rectfe agere, Cic,
Magni mea intercsse putavi, id.
Ad nostram laudem non multum in-
teresse video, id.
Intehjacere. Planicies Capuain
Tipharamque iiiterjacet, Liv, lies be-
iuieen,
Spatium quod sulcis interjacet, Co-
lum.
. Interjacet ha^c inter earn, Piin.
Intueiii aliquem i^ in aliquem, Cic.
4o look at.
Invadeue aliquem &* in aliquem,
iirbem b\ in urbem, Cic. Virg. to invade,
to seize.
In pecunias alienissimorum liominuin
invadere, Cic.
Invasit cupiditas plerisque ^"pleros-
que, Varro, Sail. Furor invascrat im-
probis, Cic. ad Tiron.
Lassitudine invaserunt huic in genua
ficinina, Plant, he icas troubled xvith the
Jailing dozen of blood to the anklr-s, l,y rea-
son ol' ovnrnuch walking.
iNVEiiEHf per mare, Plin. to trans-
porl^
Invchi ex a'to in portuni, Cic.
Portuui, u>-bem, Plin. lo be imported,
in aliquem, to inveigh or speak bitterlg
against.
Inviderjb laudes alicui, Lii, Hot.
Cic. Laudibus alicujus, Cic. to envy a
persnn^s praise.
Invidere alicui, Ter. Aliquem, Ocirf,
to bear him envy. Alicujus, Plaut. In
hac re tibi invideo, Cic.
Invideat Herniogencs quod ego can-
to, Hor.
The accusative only, without the
dative of relation, after tliis verb, is
more rare. Yet Cicero, in the third
book of his Tusculan questions, ob-
serveth, that as we say videre Jlorem,
so invidere jlorem would he better than
fori, if the custom was not against it.
Hence Quin. lib. 1>. c. 3. enumerates
among the incorrc-ct phrases of his time,
Huic Rti invidere, pro quo, adds
he, omries veteres, 6s" Cicero ipse banc
REM. Whereby we see that the custom
has varied.
But the accusative with the dative is
common enough.
Ut nobis optimam naturam invidisse
videantur qui, &c. Cic.
Jampridem nobis coeli te regia, Csb-
sar, invidet, Virg.
Invitare h'lspitio Sf in hospitium,
Liv. Cic. Ad legcndum, Cic. Domum,
Liv. Tecto ac domo, Cic. to invite, to
desire to come.
Invocare subsidium, id. to ask for
succours. In auxilium aliquem, Suint.
Ire viam, Virg. to go. Itineribus
alicujus, Cic. to keep the same road. Sub-
sidio, Ccps. In subsidium, Cic.
Accersitum, Ter. to p) to fetch.
Si porr5 ire pergant, Liv. if they have
a mind to go further,
Eamus visere, Ter,
JuBFRE. See the annotation to the
12th rule.
.JuNciRE prudentiam cum cloquentia,
Cic. Dextram dextrae, Vtrg. Leones
ad curruin, Virg. to put to.
Rliedam equis, Cic. Res inter ae^id.
JuRARE alicui, Plin. Jun. per sidera,
Virg.
In legts, Cic. In verba aliqua, C(rs.
Maria aspera, Virg. Pulcherrimum
jusjiiranduiT), Cic.
Qui (Ifiiegat & juravit morbum, id.
Belluai ingens juratur. Slat.
.lurandiisque tuum per nomen poni«
mns aras, llor.
The latter examples shew plainly
that this verb may govern the accusa-
tive of itself, and that Vossius had
very little ground to affirm that it never
did govern this case but by virtue of
the preposition per. For besides its
being hard to say that J«»-«rc jusjnran-
dum, or morbum, is jurare per jusju-
randum,
OF Verbs of different Governments. 215
randum, or per morbiim ; it is moreover
evident that since we say juranrlas aras
in a passive sense, we might likewise say
jurare aras in a real active sense. And
adding per lawn nomen, he plainly in-
timates that the force of the verb and
the preposition are two different things,
which ought therefore to be distin-
guished. So that when we say per sidera
ju'O, we are to understand juramenlum
per sidera, just as jurandas aras per tuum
nomen, &c.
L.
Laborare invidia vel e\ invidia, Cic.
to be envied and haled. Ex pedibus, id.
De verbo, non de re, id. to trouble
himself about terms. A veritate, Liv. to
be examined for nut telling the Irulh.
"Laborare arma, Slat, to work, or make.
Ad rem aliqnam, Cic.
Ambitios^ circa aliquid, Quint, to lake
great care.
Ad quid laboramus res Romanas, Cic.
Laboratur vehementer, id, they are in
great pain, or concern.
Latere alicui, id. Aliquem, Virg.
See the Syntax, rule 15. p. 31.
Legare ad aliquem, Cic. to send nn
ambassador to. Alicui, id. to bequeath.
Ah aliquo, id.
Sibi aliquem legare, id. to make him
his deputy.
Levare nietum aiicui, vel aliquem
metu, id. to ease him of, or to remove his
fear.
LiBERAUE aliquem metu, Ter. Ali-
quem culpac, Liv. to acquit. Fidem
suam, Ci's. to fulfil his tourd, Aliquem
a creditoribus, Sen. to set him free,
Lociui alicui, Ter. De aliquo, Cic.
Apud aliquem, id. Cum aliquo, id, to
speak.
LuDERE pila, id. Ludum, Ter. Alei
S^ aleam, Suet. In numerum, Virg.
LuERE aes alienum. Curt, to pay his
debts. VcensiS, Cic. to be punished. Se,
Ulp. to pay a ransom.
Oblatum stuprum voluntaria morte
luit Lucretia, Cic. expiated.
M.
Maledicere alicui, Cic. K alii. Ali-
quem, Tertul. Petron.
Manare. Mella manant ex ilice,
Hor. flow.
Manat picem haec arbor, Plin,
Manat cruore culter, Liv.
Manere ad urbem, ad exercitutn,
Liv,
In urbe, in exercitn, Cic. to slay or
abide there. Aliquem, Plaut. Hor. Virg,
to wait for him.
In proposito, Cic. Statu suo, id.
Sententia ma net, vel in senteiitia ma-
neo, Cic. iVFanere promissis, F«rg. to
keep his luord.
Manent ingenia seuibus, Cic.
Ad te poena manet, Tibul.
Maneat ergo istud, Cic. let this stand
good.
Maneat ea cura nepotes, Virg. let our
posterity take care for that.
Mederi alicui rei, Cic. to remedy.
Quas minus mederi possis, 7W.
Contra serpentium ictus medentur,
Plin.
Haec mederi voluerunt, Cic.
Medicare capillos, Ovid. Semina,
J^irg. to give an artificial preparation or
tincture to a thing. Alicui, Ter. Cuspi-
dis ictum, Virg. to dress a wound.
Meditari rem aliqiiam, aut de re ali-
qua, Cic. to meditate or think on a thing.
Memini me videre & vidisse, id.
Rem aliquam &" rei alicujus, id.
De alicujus periculo, id. to recollect.
Ciceronis &^ Ciceronem. See the Anno-
tation to the llth rule.
Memoror, which Valla denies to
be ever found with the genitive in clas-
sic authors, occurreth in Cicero, Sui
oblitus, alii memoretur, for alius, in 4 Ca-
til. which shews the little foundatioa
this author had to censure the following
passage of the Vulgate, Memorari testa-
menli sui sancti.
Merere & Ri bene vel mal6 de ali-
quo, Cic. to deserve well or ill of a person.
.Apud aliquem, Liv. to serve or lu bear
arms under him. Sub aliquo, id.
Stipendiuni in aliquo bello, Cic. E-
quo, pedibus, Liv. to serve on foot, or on
horseback. Alicui, Slat. Lucan, to serve
to the profit rf any one.
Mereri laudem, Cccs. Offensam,
3uint.
Scio banc meritam esse ut memor
esses sui, Ter. she deserved aplace in your
memory.
Saepe quod vellem meritam scio,
Ter. that she often did whatever I would
have her.
Mergere aliquem ^quore, or sub
^quore, Virg. Unda vrl in undis, Ovid,
to put under water, to sink.
Metuere alicui, Plaut. Pro ali-
quibus, Cels. Propter aliquos, Plaul»
Aliquem, Cic. Ab aliquo, id. De vita,
id. to fear. Metno ut ft' metuo ne.
Seep. 159.
Mi:<isTRABB vires alicui, id, to fur-
nish,
216'
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
nish, to afford. Furor arma ministrat,
Virg.
MiRARi aliquem, CAc. De aliquo,
id. In aliquo, id. Jiistitia-ne prius
niirer, belline laI)orum, Virg. in be sur-
prised. Mirari se, Mart, to value or
Citfiem himielf.
MiscERK vinum aqui S^ aquam vJno,
Plin. to mix.
Miscere in aciem, Liv. Mibtos in
sanguine denies, I'irg.
Misccre ad, Culum. Cum, Cic. Co-
lum.
Miscpre sacra profanis, Hor.
MiSEREIIE & RI, or MiSERESCERE.
Laboruin inisereri, Virg. to have com-
pnsiion, or pily. Mel miseret nemo,
Plin. nobody pities me. Miseret me tiii,
Ter. Atque inupis nunc te miserescat
mei, Ter.
Sanctiiis pretends that these verbs
govern also the dative. And it must
be allowed that examples hereof are to
be found in authors of the latter ages,
as ill Boethius.
Diligejure bones ^T miseresce mcUs.
But there is no authority for this from
writers of pnre Lalinity, if we believe
Vossius. Hence in Seneca, lib. 1.
contr. 4. where some read, Ego mise-
reor tihi pnella, tlie best editions have
itii. And in regard to that passage
■which TJnacer quotes from the '2il Tusc.
it is to be observed that those are verses
translated from Socrates, and they are
to be pointed thus,
Perge aude nate, illacryma pairis pfs-
tibus :
Miserere, genles nostras Jlehunt mise-
rias.
For we find likewise in another place
tliat Cicero has joined the dative with
illncrymo. 2nid dicam de Soerate 'f Cuj'/s
morti illncrymo i soleo, Platonem legens,
3. de Nat. And Livy also, Men infelici
errcri units iHacrymasti, lib. 10.
MoDERAUi animo, orationi, Cic.
Cantus rumerosque, id. to regulate.
MoEnrnE mortem filii, id. Incom-
mndo suo, to giieve.
MoNERE aliquem rem, Cic. Ter.
Alicui rem, Plaut. Terentiamde testa-
mento, Cic. Aliquem alicujus rei, Sail.
See the '24th rule, p. 43.
MoRARt in re confessa, Plin. Circa
aru|ui(l, Ifor. Apud aliquem, Cms.
Cum aliquo, Pompon. In urbe, Ovid.
Sub dio, Ilor. to stai/, to dwell.
Iter al cujus morari, Cic. to deity
Mm. Quid inoror ? Virg. IVhat do I
stay for?
Purpuram nihil moror, Plaut. I do
not value.
MovERE se loco re/ ex loco, Ctts. De
convivio, Cic Ab urbe, Liv. to be gone,
to move,
Movere aliquem senatu, vel 6 senatii,
Cic, to depose him, to degrade him. A
se moram, Plant, to make no delay. Ri-
sum & jocum movere alicui, Hor. to
make him laugh.
Ego istha'C moveo aut euro ? Ter. Is
it I that am the cause of ihii hustle ?
MuTARf rem alia re, Hor. Belltiin
pro pace. Sail. Aliquid cum aliquo,
Ter. to change rvilh him.
Mutare loctim, Cic, to change place.
Mutari civitate, id.- to be removd from
one town to another.
MuruARi auxilia ad rem aliquam,
Ca-s, In sumplum, Cic. to ask, to bor-
roTD.
A viris virtus nomen est mutuata, id.
has borrowed ils name.
N.
Narrare aliquid, or de re aliqua, Cic
to tell, or to relate.
Natarr aquas, Virg. Unda natatur
piscibus, Ovid. Pars multa natat, Hor.
the generality of mankind are inconstant
and wavering. Natabant pavimenta
vino, Cic. swam with xeine,
NiTi sub poiuleie, Virg. In ad-
versum, Ovid, Ad sidera, Virg. to tend
towards. Gradibus, Virg. to mount,
Hastd, Virg. to leanvpon. Humi, Virg,
to walk upon the ground. Contra hono-
rem alicujus, Cir. to oppose. Pro ali-
quo, Liv. De a;quitate, id. to defend
awl mairitain.
Cujus in vitS nitebafur salus civitatis,
id. was supported, depended.
Alternos longa nitentem cuspide gres-
sus, Virg.
Tantiim quantum quisque potest ni-
tatur, Cic. Let him do what he can.
Noc) HE alicui, id. Alitpiem, Plant.
Sen. lo hurt. Qui Deorum quemquam
nociierit, Liv.
Nlbere alicui or cum aliquo, Cic.
the former more usual. The second
occurs in the 3d epistle of the \5th book.
Quocum nnpta regis Armeniorum soror.
And against Veries. Virorum quisbus-
cum ilLx nupta; crant.
Now nubere, as we have observed p.
30, significth properly velare, to cover
or to veil. Mulier nubil, says Caper
in his orthography, quia pallio obnubit
caput suum SC genas. Hence nubere
alicui, is to liide and to reserve herself
for him. And nubere rum aliquo, is te-
gere SC opnire se nno cnhiculo cum illo,
according to Donatus, on Terence's He-
cyra. So that the accusative is always
understood.
OF Verbs of different Governments. 217
This verb is never used but of the
woman, for which renson we use only
nupla sum in the participle. It is true
Plautus said, Novum nuptum, but it was
only through theatrical buffoonery, when
a man appeared upon the stage in wo-
man's apparel.
But it is observable that in Pliny nu-
here is applicable also to trees and vines,
when they are joined together.
O.
Obambulare muris, Liv. to tealk round
the walls. Ante portas, Liv,
Obecioitare slationibushostium, Liv.
Agmen, Curt, to ride round about,
Objicere feris, Cic. to exnose to zoild
beasts. Ad omnes casus, jrf. Se in impe-
tus horainum, i'f. Aliquid criminis,
Plin. Loco criminis, id. 6," Cic.
Oblivisci aliquem, Virg. Suse dig-
nitatis, Cic. to forget.
Artificium obliviscatur licebit, id.
OflRErERE ad magistratum, id. to
steal by degrees, to creep in private/)/.
Adolescentiae senectus obrepit, id. suc-
ceeds immediately. Nulla; imagines ob-
repunt in animos dormientium extrin-
secus, id.
Statim te obrepet fames, id.
Obruere tells, id. to oppress with
thrls. Terra, Cnto. In terra, Ovid,
to bury. Se vino, Cic, to get drunk.
Nox terram obruit umbris, Luc. co-
vers it,
Obstrepere portis, Liv. to make
a noise. Litteris alicui, Cic. to impor-
tu7ie him by letters. Hinc illi geminas
vox avium obstrepit aures, Virg. Cla-
more obstrepi, Cic. to be stunned zvith
noise.
Obtrectare laudibus d\ laudes ali-
cujus, Liv. to backbite.
Obtrectare legi, Cic. to oppose it.
Obversari oculis, Liv, Ante oculos,
Cic. In somnis, Liv. to present itself
before us,
Obvertere signa in hostem, Liv. to
turn against the enemy. Terga alicui,
Virg. to run azvay.
Obumbrare. Oleaster obumbrat ves-
tibulura, Virg. overshadows.
Sibi ipsa non obumbrat, Plin.
Occumbere morti, V/rg. Morte, Cic.
Mortem, Liv. Suet, lo die.
Ferro occumbere, Ovid, to be killed.
Occupare aliquem, Cic. Curt, to
he beforehand ivilh him, to surprise
him, Se in aliquo negotio, Cic, Ter.
Ad aliquod negotium. Plant, to busy or
employ one's self. Occupare pecuniam
alicui, vel apud aliquem, Cic. {o put
moneij out at use.
Quorum magnae res agnntur in vestris
vectigalibus occupatas, id.
Offendere aliquem, id Apud ali-
quem, id. Aliquo, id. ti offend a person,
to be upon bad terms with him.
At credo si Ceesarem lauilatis, in me
offenditis, Cic. but very likely if Ji>u
commend Cesar, you offend me. Offen-
dere in arngantiam, Cicer. lo give into
pride or arrogance.
Sin quid offenderit, sibi totum, tibi
nihil offenderit, id. but if he takes any
wrong step. It mil be all t'l himself.
Cecidisse ex equo & latus ofl'endisse,
id. that he fell from his horse and hurt
his side. S' in me al quid offendistis, id.
if you have fou'id any fault with me ; if
in aught I hcv offtnded you.
Ciim rffendisset poiiuium Atheniensi-
um prope jam desipientem seaectute,
id. having friund.
Offendeie in scopulis, Ovid. Ad sti-
pitem, Cidum. to run, or hit against.
Naves in redeuiido offenderunt. Cms.
■were unfortunate, fell into the enemy's
hands.
Offendere alicuius existimatinnem,
Cic. to hurt his reputation. Alicui ani-
mum, id. to shock, or lo vex htm.
Olere. Olet unguenta, Ter. he
smells of perfume. Olet huic aurum
meum, P^aut. he hath got some inkling of
my gold.
Olent ilia superciiia inalitiam, Cicer.
Olentia sulphure, Ovid, that smells of
sulphur.
Redolentque thymo, Virg,
Opponere pericuiis, Cic. to expose to
danger. Ad omne periculum, id.
Opponere pignori, Plaul. Ter. to
pawn, or to pledge.
Opponei-e manum fronti, or ante ocu-
los, Ovid, to put before.
Oppugnare aliquem clandestinis con-
siliis, Cic. to endeavour to ruin him by
underhand doings. Oppugnare consi-
lia alicujus, Piaut.
Pallere argenti amore, Hor. to
grow pale. Pindarici fontis haustiis
non expailuit, Hor. he u.as not afraid
of,
Palpare & pi. Palpare aliquem,
munere, Juv. to caress, to flatter,
Cui male si palpere, recalcitrat, Hor.
Pecto'-a palpanda manu, Ovid.
Parcere labori, Ter. to spare, Ali-
quid alicui, Ter, to forgive him. Parcite
oves nimiiim procedere, Vi'g. do not
sujer them to go too far.
218
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Precantes ut a caedibus, & iiicenclia
parceretur, Liv, ihut they would abstain
from.
Participaue servum consiliis, Pluut.
io imparl your secrets to liirn.
Siuis laiides cum aliqiio, Liv.
Rem aliquam, Cic. to par'ake, or
have fiis share,
Pasceue piatum S^ in prato, Ovid, to
feed.
Animum pictura pasclt inani, f^irp;.
Hie pascor bibliotheca Fausti, Cic. id.
Delector.
Pasci, deponent. Apes pascuntur
arbuta, Virg. Armenia pascuntur per
herbas, Virg. and Ovid.
Pei.lere tectis, Ovid. A foribus,
Plir}, E foro, Cic. £x aliqua regione.
Plin. Domo, regno, civitate, agro, se-
dibus, &c. Cic. to drive from.
Pendere promissis, id. to depend en
promises. Aiiimr et animis, id. to be
in doubt. Pendet animus, vel animus
tibi pendet, Ter. you are in suspense.
Cui spes omnis ex fortuna pendet, Cic.
De te pendentis, te respicientis amici,
Hor. Pendent opera intcriupta, Vi'g.
remain imperfect. Casu pendemus ab
«no, Lucan. ue depend on. Ad sua vota
pendentes, Sen. In sententiis civium
fortunam nostram pendere, Cic.
Dumosa pendere de rupe, Cic. to be
at the top of a ruck.
Hi summo in fluctu pendent, Virg.
ere tossed to the top of ike waves.
Illisariue prora pependit, Virg, stuck
there.
Scopuli pendentes, Virg, hanging as it
ttere in the middle of the air, and leaning
over us. Nnbila pendentia, Virg.
Pendere pa3nas temeritatis, Cic.
Pcenas pro scelcre, Lucr. to pnij.
Pater is nihili pendit, Ter. gives
himself no sort of trouble. Magni pendi,
Lurr. to be greatly esteemed.
Penetrare in ccelum, Cic. to enter
into heaven. Atlantem, Piin. to pass
beyond. Sub terras, C/c. Seinfugam,
Plant, to run atiay. Pedem intra aedes,
Plant, to enter. Ad Romanos, Pli7i. to
go towards.
Pensare una laude crimina, Plin. to
recompense.
Laudem cum crimine, Claud.
Pensari eridem truliiiii, Ilor. to be
neighed in the same balance.
l>i nci'NCTARi aliquem, ^Tiint. Hor,
Ab aliquo, Cic. Aiiquid, aliquem,
Plaul.
Aiiquid ex alio, id. 6( Cic. Aliquem
de re aliqua, id. to inform one^s self, to
inquire, to ask.
Pergo prajterita, id. to ivave or pass
over in silence,
Perge facere, Ter. to go on.
Permittere se in lidem vel fidei ali-
cujns, C<es. to put one's self under his
protection. Equum in hostem, Liv, to
put on, to ride full speed against. Vela
ventis, Suint. to set sail.
Persequi vestigia alicujus, Cic, A-
liquem vcstigiis ipsius, id. to follow his
footsteps, Artem aliquam, id.
Personare asquura c'oncha, Virg. to
make the sea resound.
Est niibi purgatam crebr6 qui perso-
net aurem, Jlor, Personabat domus
cantu tibiarum. Cic. echoed. Ululatns
personant tola urbe, Liv, nothing else is
heard,
Pert^dere tliaUmi, Virg. Igna-
vlam suam, Ctfj. Morum perversita-
tem, Suet.
Pervaderf. Pervasit murmur to-
tam connionem, Liv. vtas spread every
where, Incendium per agros, Cic. Pars
belli in Italiam, id. Consul ad caslra,
Liv.
Petere ab aliquo, Cic. to ask. Ali-
qunm, Virg. to supplicate. Auxilium
sibi ab aliquo, per aliquem, Cic. Pcenas
ab aliquo, id. to have him puniihed. Ve-
niam errati ilS" errato, id. Aliquem gla-
dio, lapide, &c. to strive to hit him.
Locum, id. to go to a place, and make
to it.
PiGNERARE & Ri. Ex aurc matris
detractum unionem pigneravit ad itine-
ris impensas, Suet, to pawn.
Mars ipse ex acie fortissimum quem-
qtie pignerari solet, Cic. is used to take
them OS a pledge.
Plaudeiie aliquem, Stat, io ap*
p laud him. Sibi, Hor. to applaud him-
ielf. Pedem supplaudere, Cic. tu stamp
on the ground, to knock with the
foot.
Propter vicinum malum nee victoria
quidem plauditur, Cic. Atltco.
PoLLERE moderatione & constantia,
Cic. to be fumed for moderation and con-
stancy. Pollet ejus autorilas. Sail, is
very strong, has a great weight.
PoNERE cornnam in caput vel in
capite, Gell. Curam in re aliquA, Cic.
Dies multos in rem aliquam, id. Fidem
pignorl, Plant, to pawn his word. Cus-
todias portis, Hirt. Insidias alicui vel
contra aliquem, Cic. to lay ambush.
Officium apud aliquem, id. to oldige a
person. Sibi aiiquid in spe optima, id.
Spem in armis, id.
Ponere in beneficii loco, id, to look
upon it as a great favour,
Ponere
OF VeUBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 219
Ponere de manibas, id. to quit,
Ponuntque ferocia Poeni Corda
volente Deo, Virg.
PoscERE munus ab aliquo, Cic. Ali-
quem causain difFereiidi, id. Filiam ali-
cujus sibi uxorem, Ptsul. to ask.
Poscere inajoribus poculis, Cic. to re-
quire that one should pledge him in larger
glasses.
PosTULARE aliquem de ambitu, id.
to accuse one, or to sue at law. Sarvos
in qusestionem, id. to insist thai the plain-
tiff be obliged to expose his slaves to the
torture, in order to come at the truth.
Postulabatur injuriam, Suet, he icas
accused of.
PoTiBi prsesentibus, Cic. Gaudia,
Ter. Voluptatum, Cic. to enjoy.
Potiri hostium, to have the enemy in
his power : and sometimes (as in Plau-
tns) to fall into the hands of the enemy.
The reason hereof is, that the ancients,
to avoid a bad omen, frequently made
use of a favourable expression to denote
a bad thing ; whence cometh sacer for
execrable, and bentdicere in the Scripture
for to curse, and the like. Hence it is
that they have an infinite number of
phrases and turns to signify death, with-
out hardly ever naming it.
PRiEBERE strenuum honiinem, Ter.
to shew himself brave. Se aequum, Cic,
to shevi himself just or impartial.
PuiECAVERE ab insidiis, Liv, Pec-
cata, C'C. to avoid.
PRiECEDERE, ut vcstras fortunffi meis
pr^ceduiit, Plant. Vinum aliud aliud
amoenitate praecedit, Cilum.
Praecedere in re aliqua, Plin.
Pr^currere aliquem 5C alicui,
Cic to run or make speed before, to out-
run.
Pbsire verbis, Plaut. Verba, Liv.
to speak before. De scripto, Plin. to
dictate..
Prseeunt discipulis praeceptores, 3u.
to teach them. But prwire alici'i, to sig-
nify excelling, is not used. See prostate.
Pr^ESTARE, PR;ECELLERE, PRa:CE-
DERE, pRiEVERTERE, alicui, «f/ aliquem
(but praeire alicui only, says Vossius),
to surpass, to excel.
Homo ceteris animantibus praestat,
Cic. Virtus praestat ceteris rebus, id.
Quantum GalU virtute alios prsesta-
rent, Liv. Praestat tamen ingenio alius
alium, Splint.
Vel magnum praestet Acbillem, Virg.
even if he were more valiant than
j^chilles, or were he another Achilles,
Prsestare alicui scientia; setate, &c, Cic,
Inter suos aequales longfe praestare, id.
to excel, to he foremost.
Prsasiare benevolentiam alicui, id. to
shew him affection.
Sapientis non est praestare nisi cul-
pam, id. a wise man ought to answer for
(or be sure of) nothing bul his own faults,
Sed motos praestat cumponere Auctus,
Virg. it is better.
Praestare rempublicam, Cic. to support
the republic. Se & ministrossociisreipub.
id. to answer for himself and his officers to
the a'lies of the republic. Factum alien-
jus, i /. to a/ prove of it.
Al'quem ante tedes, Fluid, to bring
him out. Hoc finibus his praeslabis,
Cic.
Se incolumem praestare, id, to preserve
his health.
Principem prcestare. Suet, to act the
part of a prince,
Praesto haec, Ceccil. I give this, I
bring this.
Praestare vitium, Cic. to take it upon
himsflf.
PrjE-tolari aliquem, Ter. alicui,
Cic. to wait for a person.
pRiEVERTERE aliqucm prsB repnb.
Plaut. to prefer, to set before. Aliquid
alicui rei, Cic, Plaut. to prefer it, or to
say it before.
Huic rei praevertendum existimavit,
C(Es. that it ihusi be prevented.
Illuc praevertamur, Hor. let us see
this first.
Procedere in virtute, ad virtutem,
ad viftutis aditum, Cic. to advance iit
virtue,
JEtate processit, id. he is advanced in
age.
Omnia ut spero prosper^ precedent,
id, all will go very well.
Procumbere genibus, Ovid. Ad ge-
nua, Div, Ante pedes alicuius, Ovid,
to proilrale one's self at his feet. Ad ar-
borem, Mart, to lean against.
Procumbit hum! bos, Firg. falls
down.
Procumbere in armos, Mart, In ca-
put, Ovid, to fall ypon.
Prodere memoria;, Cic. Memoria,
CiEs. Monu mentis, Cic, to commit to
posterity.
Prodere memoriam alicujus festi, id.
Prodit memoria, Culum, we find in
writing.
Prohibere vim hostium ab oppi-
dis, Cces. to repel, to keep away, is'
stay. Aditum alicui vel aliquem aditn,
Cic. to dehor or hinder kirn from
coming,
Doloreoa
220
NEW METHOD.
Book VII.
.' Dolorem dentium, Plin, to give case,
to keep under. Aliquom ab injurii, Sail,
to defend lum,
Uxorcm prohibent mlhi, Plaul. they
keep her away from me.
Puoi'LUARE in campum, C'ic. Ad
exitum, Brutus,
Properare proficisci, Ci^s. to make
haste to be gnne.
Pecuniam indigiio hmredi properare,
Uor, to hoard in a hurry.
Hoc opus hoc studium parvi prope-
remus & ampli, Hor.
LanaB pioperabantur, [for.
PiiordCNAKE commoda patriae, Cic.
to defend them against the enemy. Pro
salute alicujus, id. to fight for.
Propugnat nugis armatus, Hor, that
IS, Pro 7iugis,
Prospicere sibi, saluti sua;, &c.
Ter. Cic. to take care of. In posterum,
Cic. Futura, id. to foresee. Senectu-
tem, Sen. tn be near,
Ni parum prospiciunt oculi, Ter. if
my eyes do not deceive me.
Nee oculis prospicio satis, Plant.
Villa quai prospicit Tusciim mare,
Phtcd. thai has a prospect over the sea.
PnoviDKnF. in posterum, Cic. Ali-
cui contra aliquem, id. to protect him.
Bei frumentariiE, Vfl rem frnmentariam,
vel de re frumentaria, Cas. to make pru-
viiion, to look after.
Ha;o si non astu providentur, me aut
lierum pessumdabunt, Ter. if they are
not looked after, or prevented.
Provisum est rationibus multis ne,
&c. Cic. A diis immortalibus, &c. id.
PucNARF. pugnam, Plaut. Pra;Iia,
Jlor. tojigkt battles. Cum lioste, Cic.
Contra peilites, Plin.
Adverbus latrones, Plin. to f'ghl
tgainst.
Illud video pnpinare te ut, &c. Cic. I
plainly see that yoii pretend.
Piignare de re aliqua, Cic, Ter. Pro
aliquo, Cic.
In aliqu'i loco, id.
Pugiiata pugiia eiim rege, Liv.
Piignata bella sub Ilio, Uor.
Quod it Vdb s hoc pugnari video, Cic,
PuncAHE sp iipiid aliquem vel alicui
de re aliqua, Ter to clear or to justify
himself.
Purgare crimen, Cic,
Mores tuos mihi purgatos voluisti,
id.
PuTARE nihil, Ter. Pro nihilo, Cic.
Aliquid minimi, id. to make no account
of.
Rem ipsam putemus, Ter. let us con-
sider the affair itself.
Putare rationem cum aliquo, Cic. to
adjust, or cast up actnunts.
Putatur prudeiis, id. he is esteemed
prudent.
Q.
QuADHAUE acervum, Hor, to make
sqtiare.
Omnia in istam quadrjireapte viden-
tur, Cic. speaking of Clodia, do suit her
very well.
Visum est mihi hoc ad multa qua-
drare, id. may serve for many purposes.
Quare quoniam tibi ita quadrat, id,
since you judge fit.
Qu/EREHE aliquid ab aliquo, Cic.
C<Es. De aliquo, Liv. Cic. Kx aliquo,
id. to ask or inquire vf idm. In aliquem,
Cic. to make inquisition, or to inform
against him.
QusLrere omnes ad unum exemplum,
id. to want to reduce them all to one
model.
Quaerere rem tormentis &! per tor-
nienta, id. to put to the rack,
Quairere rem mercaturis faciendis,
id. to endeavour to make a fortune by
commerce.
QuERi. Multa de mea sententii
questus est Cassari, id. he complained.
Acoeperam Milonem meum queri per
litteras injuriam meam, id.
Is mihi queritur quod, id.
Quereris super hoc quod, Hor.
Apud populum questus est, Plin. Jun.
QuiEscLUE tola nocte, Cic. Viginti
dies, id. Somnum humanum, Appul,
to sleep, to repose.
Quibus quidem quamfacili poterat
quiesci, si, &c. Ter. liovi easy it would
have been to have done without them.
Nunquam per M. Antonium quietus
fui, Cic.
Quiescat rem adduci ad integrum, I'i
let him suffer.
R.
Recipere alicui, id. to promise. Ali-
quem, id. to receive him. Urbem, id.
to take or to recover it. In se omnia,
id to take upon him. Se ad or in locum,
id. to betake himself to. Se ex loco, id.
to return. Se ail aliquem, Cics. to retire
to. Se ad ^rugem, C'ic. to grow better.
Se proximo castello, Hirtius, to shut him'
self up, to retire to.
Recipere tectis, Cic. to entertain, or
harbour. In navem, id, on board.
Recipitur in cibum hajc berba, PUk.
is good to eat.
Recordarj alicujus rei, aliquam
rem, de re aliqua, Cic. Cum animo
suo
OF Verbs of different Governments. 221
suo vitatn alicujus, id. to call to mind, to
remember.
Redder E colori aliquid, vel colorem
alicui rei, Plin.
Vitain pro repiibl. Cic. to die in the
service uf the ripublic. Spiritum alicui,
Liv. to expose his life for another's ser-
vice.
Keperre alicui, Ovid, to relate, to
tell. Ad aliquem, C:C. to ask his opinion,
to refer to him. Omnia ad aliquem fi-
nem, id.
Aliquem ore referre, Cic. to resemble
him.
In acceptum referre, Cic. to achnow-
led^e the receipt of.
Referre mandata ad aliquem, Ctes.
Alicui, f'^irg.
In vet inter reos referre, Cic.
Referre alicui saiutem, id.
Accept an saiutem alicujus benevo-
lentias referre, id. to think you ,Wf your
life to his goodness.
Referre ensem vaginje, Sil. to put it
up in the scabbard. Aliquid in com-
mentarium, Cc. to zcrite or tet dozen.
Sp in gregein suum, id.
Retulit ad me pedem, Plant, is come
lack to me.
Me referunt pedes in Tusculanum,
Cic, I return nnf^ot to Tusculanum.
Referunt 1 !EC ad rem, Plaut. This
relates to the mutter.
Par pari referre, Cic. to return like
for like.
Haec ego illorum defensioni retuli, id.
This I said to obviate iuhat they might
allege in their defence.
Referre cum aliquo, id. to confer with
a person.
Renuntiare alicui vel ad aliquem,
id. to advertise, or acquaint.
Renuntiare aliquid, id. De re aliqua,
Plaut. to speak of an affair.
Renuntiare consulem, Cic. to pro-
claim the consul.
Renuntiare alicui amicitiam, Suet.
Hospitium, Cic. to renounce his friend-
ship and alliance. Repudium, Ter,
Renuntiare vitae, Suet. Societati,
Paul. Jurisc. Matrimonio, Licm.
Jurisc. Muneri, officio, 2uint, to re-
nounce.
Praetor renuntiatus est, Cic. was de-
clared prxtnr.
Reponere in numero £^ in nume-
rum, id. to place among the number.
Omnia suo loco, id. to put in their proper
place.
Rei'oscere aliquid alterum 5f ab al-
tero, mJ. to ctsk again, to claim.
Ad poenas aliquem reposcere, Virg.
to insist on his being brought to justice.
Repug5are alicui rei, Cic. Contra
veritatem, id. Circa aliqua, 2,uint. to
oppose, to resist.
Requiescere lecto, Tibull. Humo,
Ovll. In sella, Cic. to res/, to repose.
In miseriis. id. A malis, id. to have
some respite.
Et mutata suos requiescunt flumina
cursus, Virg. dost^p.
Rescribere littt'ris, Cic. Ad lit-
teras, Brutus ad Cic. to answer. Ar-
geutum alicui, Ter. to pay money by bill.
Legionem ad equum, Cces. to make horse
of foot.
Residere humo, Ovid, to sit upon
the I'jound.
Si quid residet amoris in te mei, Cic*
if yoi have any hve for me still left.
Culpa residet in te, Brutus ad Cic,
Penes te, Alphen.
Pecunia publica apud eum resedit,
Martian.
Residet spes reliquis, Cic. the rest have
hopes still.
Quum tumor animi resedisset, id.
being abated.
Venter gutturque resident esuriales
ferias, Plaut. cap. act. 1. that is, Se-
dendo agunt, says Sanctius.
Resideutur oiortui, Cic. 2. de Leg,
when the corpse is watched or attended.
Resi'icere aliquem &s ad aliquem,
Ter. to look, or to respect.
Summa imperii ad nos respicit, Ctcs.
belongs to us, regards us.
Respondere alicui, Cic. Virg. Ad
aliquem, Pliny, to answer, or to corre-
spond.
Contra elata mari respondet Gnosia
tellus, Virg. presents itself, shews itself.
Restituere sanitatem alicui ^ ali-
quem sanitali, Plin. to heal, to restore ia
health.
In possessionem restituere, Cic.
Retinere memoriam alicujus rei, AT
memoria retinere aliquid, id. to remem-
ber.
Pudore & Hberalitate retinere pueros,
Ter. to restrain or govern.
RiDERE aliquem, Cic, Ter. to laugk
at one,
De re aliquS^, Cic.
Ridere risum, id.
Domus ridet argento, Hor. shines*
RoRAUE, Rorat, simply, Colum. tf
fall down like dew, to bedew.
Si roraverit quantulumcunque im-
brem, Pliny, if it drops never so little-
rain.
Rorare
222
NEW METHOD. Book VI I.
Rorare aliquem cruore, Sil. Co Le-
sprinkU him. zcilh blood.
Lacriniis ociili rorentur obortis, Ovid.
Roratae rosae, Ovid, bedewed.
RuEHE ad interitum voluntarium,
Cic. In ferruin pro libertatc, Virg, to
rush iip'in.
Ruere ilia non possunt, Cic caiviot
fall to llii pmtnd.
Vide ne quid impruJens ruas, Ter.
Spumas salis reie niebant, Virg.
CiBtcros ruerem, agerem, prosterne-
rein, Ter.
Saltare laudes alicujus, PUn, Jan.
to dance singing his praises.
Pastorem saitaret uti Cyclopa roga-
bat, Ilor. that he would act the part of
Polyphemvs in dancing.
Nemo fere saltat sobrius, Cic.
Sapehs. Palatus ei sapit, id. he has
a smock of.
Mare sapit, it has the taste of sea-
water.
Si recta saperet, Cic, if he were
tcise.
Egomeam rem sapio, Plant. I know
my own affairs.
Satisfacere alicui de visceribu?,
Cic. to pay him vcitU his oa« money.
Alicui de re aliqua, C(es. concerning
something. Alicui in pecunia, Ca:l. ad
Cic.
Donicum pecuniam satisfecerit; Cafo
de RR. till he has paid his money.
Satisfactuni est promisso nostro, Cic.
Satuiiare. Ha; res me vitae satu-
rant, Plant, give me a surfeit of life.
Pabttlo se saturare, Varro.
Scatehe molestiarum, Gell. Fera-
rum, Lticr, to be full of, to overflow.
Pontus scatens bellui?:, Ilor.
SEDEnE in eciiio, Cic. Equo, I.iv.
Marl, to ride. Post equitcm, Ilor. to
ride behind. Supra leonem, Plln. Ad
latus alicujus, Cic.
Dum apud hostes sedimus, Plant, so
long as li-e were near.
Si sedet hoc animo, Virg. if it be your
pleasure.
M( mor illius esca^, qna; tibi sedcrit,
Hor. which agreed zvith you lest.
Vestio sedet, 3uint. sits well.
Onine!5 consurrexisse, & senem ilium
acssum rt cepisse, Cic. rose up, and made
room lor Ihe old man.
Sequi vestiiiiis aliquem, Liv. tofolhw
his^racl. Sententiam alicujus, Cic. to
he of his opinion.
Sbrpeue humi, Hor. Per humum,
Plin. tti creep along the ground.
Serpit draco subter aupraque revol-
vens sese, Cic.
Sehviue ti-mpori, valetudini, rei fa-
miliari, Sac. id. Servitutem, id. Plant.
L.v.
Sternum servire, Hor. Apud ali-
quem, Plant. Sfrtius.
Liber servibo tibi, Phiul. Marlis ser-
vibo commodis, Ter. Ut communi uti-
litati serviatur, Cic.
Non bene crede mihi servo servitur
amico, Mart.
SiTiuE sanguinem, Cic. to thirst after
blood.
Sitiunt agri, id. Sitientes loci, Plin.
dry plices.
Quo plus sunt potae plus sitiunlur
aquaj, Ovid.
SoLVEUE crimine, Stat, to absolve,
to discharge, Fidem, to break his word,
Ter. to fulfil his vow, Ovid. Argu-
mentum, Quint, to solve. Pecuniam,
Cic. to pay. Vitam alicui vel aliquem
vita, Piaut. to put him to death. Ob-
sidionem urbis, &! urbem obsidione.
Lis. to raise a siege, Foedera, Virg, to
break.
Solvere iunply, or solvere navem, ot
solvere £; portu, Cic. Ctes. to weigh an-
chor, to put to sea.
Solvere ab Alexandria, Cic. to set sail
from Alexandria.
Solvere ab aliquo, id. to take money
from a pirson in order to pay his debts.
Nee solvitur in somnos, Viig. cannot
sleep.
Solvendo non esse, Cic. to have not
wherewithal to pay.
Soluturus no sit eos pro bonis, id.
whether he will pay them away as good
money.
Spectahe orientcm, Plin. Ad orien-
tem, Cis. In meridiem, Cato, to look
towards.
Spectare animum alicujus ex suo,
Terlul. to judge of another person from
one^s sef.
Spectare aliquem ex censu, Cic. to
respect htm according to his income.
In unum exitum spectantibus, id.
tending to the same end.
Stare ad curiam, id, not to stir from
the court. In a;quo alicui, sup. loco.
Sen. to be upon a level wlh him, Aa-
tore certo, Liv. to abide by a particu-
lar author. Ab aliquo, Cic. Cum ali-
quo, id. and Liv. to be <f his side or
parly. Contra aliquem, Cic. Virg. to
be against him. Pro judicio erroris sui,
Phaid. to maintain obstinately, Animis
Cic. to take courage. Fide, Liv. In
fide.
OF Verbs of different Governments.
225
fide, Cie. to stand to kis word. Mul-
torum sanguine ac volneribus, Liv. to
tost the blood uf many.
Quorum statuae in rostris steterunt,
Cic. vctre fastened to.
Ciiai in senalu pulcherrim^starenius,
id. being in a very good posture, when
our affairs xuent very well.
Slant lumiaa flamma, Virg. are full
of fire.
Ubi jus sparso croco steterit, Hor.
Kill begin to grow thick.
Qui si steterit idem, Cic. if he con-
tinues resolute.
Modo stet nobis illud, id. provided we
continue resolute.
Omnis in Ascanio cari stat cura pa-
rentis, Firg. is fixed on him.
Per me stat, Suint. Plin. it depends
on me.
Standam estepistolis Domitiani, Plin.
ue must abide bg.
Quidagitur? Statu r. P/aM/.
Statuere exemplum in hominem
& in homine, Cic. to inflict an exem-
plary punishment. Capita aliquem ia
terram, Ter, to fling headlong against
the ground.
Statuere in aliqaem, Cees. to give sen-
tence against him. Apud animos vel in
animum, Liv. to determine ivithin him-
ielf. Statuam alicni, Cic. to enact a
ttalue to him.
Statutura est, it is decreed.
Struehe calamitatem alicui, id. to
contrive some mischief against him, O-
dium in aliquem, id. to endeavour to
render him odious. Mendacium, Liv. to
forge a lye.
Studere alicui, Cic. to favour, or [to
bear good mil and affection to one.
Laudi & dignitati, id. to aspire to,
Aliquid, id. Ter. Hor. to have a strong
desire for a thing. In aliqua re, Gell.
to study or apply the mind to it. In ali-
quid, kuint, to aim only at that.
Non tui stiidet, Cic. he does not trou-
ble his head about you,
Studet rem ad arma deduci, C(^s. he
endeavours to push things to extremity.
Stupeue in aliquo, Val. Max. Re
aliqua, Hor. Ad rem aliquam, Ovid,
to be surprised or amazed at a thing.
Rem aliquam, Virg. to look on zaith
amazement.
Haee cum loqneris nos Varrones stu-
pemus, tu videlicet tecum ipse rides,
Cic.
SuADERE legem, id. to persuade the
people^ to accept of a law.
Pacem Sf de pace, Cic. 2uint.
SusiRE teetis 8f ad tecta, Virg.
In coclum, Plin. Limina, Virg. to
go, to draw near. Onus, Liv. to under-
go, to s//stain.
Mihi cunctarum subeuut fastidia,
Ovid, they displease me.
Humeris subirc aliqaem, Virg. io
carry on the shoulders.
Subire animos, Liv,
SuBJicERE aliquid ocnlis, Plin. Jun,
Liv. Sub oculos, id, 6," 3,'iint. to put
before one's eyes. Sensibus, Cic.
Subjicere testamenta, id. to forge.
SuccEDERE Penatibus, Muro, Virg.
io come within. Murum, Sallust, ta
draw near. Sub primam aciem, C(es. to
move towards the van-^uard. Alicui,
Cic. to succeed him. Oneri, Virg. to take
it upon his back. In locum, Cic.
SuccENSERE alicui, id. lojuriam ali«
cui, Gell.
Si id succenaeat nunc, Ter. if he is
vexed at this.
SuDARE sine caus4, Cic. Pro com*
munibus commodis, id, io work.
Sanguine multo sudare, Liv, to sweat
blood,
Et durae quercns sudabunt roscida
mella, Virg.
Et vigilandae nodes & in sudata vests
durandum, Suint.
Sudataque ligno . Thura ferat,
Cic,
SuFFiCERE omnibus, Lucan, Cic, to be
sufficient for all.
Nee obniti contra nee tendere tantun*
sufficimus, Virg. we are Jioi able.
Ad quas nee mens, nee corpus, nee
dies ipsa safficiat, Suint.
Ipse Danais animos viresque snfficit,
^'''■»' furnishes them. Aliam sufficere
prolem, id. to substitute. Ardentesque
oculos suffecti sanguine & igni, id.
zehose eyes were red and inflamed.
SopEREssE alicui, Plaui. io survive.
Suet, to defend as a patron kis client
in law. Labori, Virg, io overcome
and surmount the trouble. Snperest
mihi, Cic, it remains for vie. Populi
supersunt auxilio, Virg, there are more
than we want for our assistance. Tu
planS superes nee ades, Gell, you are one
too 7nany, you are not wanted. Mod6
vita supersit, Virg. if I do but live.
SuspENDERE arbori, in arbore, 8f de
arbore, Cic. to hang upon a tree. In
f ureas, Uip.
Suspend it picti vultum mentemque
tabella, Hor.
Tacere aliquid, Ter. Cic. Plaui. De
fe aliqua, Suint, to keep it secret,
^ Potest
224
NEW METHOD. Book VIL
Potest taceri hoc, Ter.
Diccnda, tacenda lociitus, Hnr,
Temi'iuare iras, Virg. to inodeTale.
Ca;>libus, Liv. to refrain from.
A lacrymis, Virg. Alicui, Cic.
EX&H juvenum temperare, Plaut. lo
govern them,
Sibi teiupcrare, Cic. to command him-
self
Tendere ad littora, Liv, In Latium,
Vii^. to go towards.
Tendit iter velis, Virg. begins to make
sail.
Rete tenditur accipitri, Ter.
Manibiis tendit divellere nodes, l^rg,
endcavmirs.
Tendere adversiis autoritatetn sena-
tus, Liv. to resist or uiithitand.
Tendere alicui raetum aut spetn, Cic.
to shew or hold out to him.
Hie SGGvns tendebat Achilles, sup.
pelles, or tentoria, Virg. pitched his
tent.
Time RE aliquem, Ovid, to fear
him. Alicui, Ter. to fear lest some mis-
fortune happen to him. Ab aliquo, Cic.
to be afraid of him, to mistrust him. De
republica, itl. to be afraid for the repub-
lic. Dp vitrl, Ceelius Ciceroni, I ainafraid
of my life.
Tinieo ut, 6r timeo ne, See p. )59.
Trader E in custodiam, Cic. Ciisto-
dia;, Colum. to deliver up, or send to
prison. Se totum alicui, Cic. to give
one^s self up entirely to him.
Tkansfiger e gladio aliquem per pec-
tus, Liv. Cum armis corpus alicujus,
Liv. to run through, to stab.
Vacare morbo vel a morbo, Celt,
to be free from illness. Sibi, Mart, to
work for himself. Philosoplii;r>, Cic.
to study philosophy. In aliquod opus,
Ovid.
Vacare culpa, Cic. a culpa, Senrc.
to be free from fault. Ab oami admi-
nistralione, Cic. to be exempt from. Ani-
mo, id. to be at leisure, to have nothing
to do.
Vacat locus, Ca^s. the place is empty.
Vacat mihi, iiumt. I am at le.sure.
Vacat annales audire, Virg.
Tantum huie studii relmquendum,
quantum vacat a ptiblicis (>fficiis, Cic.
Eorum animus ponendi pectuniam
nunijuam vacavit, Val. I. 4. c. 3. sup.
vacationem, ul vult Sanctius, lib. 3.
never gate their minds to the amassing of
money.
Vagari passim toto foro, Cic. In
agris, id. to wander about.
Vagatur errnre animus, id.
Valeui:. Valet oculis, Gell. Va-
lenl ejus oculi, Plaut. his eye-sight it
good.
Autoritate valet, Cic. Valet ejus au-
toritas, id.
Valet tanti, valet nimis, among the
civilians. Denos ajiis valebant, Varro.
Quid igitur ? Valetur, Plaut. we are
very well.
Vapulare. See the Preterites,
vol. 1 . p. 305. and the Syntax, vol. 2.
p. 68.
Vehere amne, Ovid. Per maria,
Plin. to convey by water, by sea.
Vehi curru, Cic. In curru, Ovid.
Equo, Ovid. In equo, Cic. lo travel, or
ride in a coach, or on horseback.
Velle aliquem, Plaut. to want to
speak to him. Alicui, Cic, to wish him
well. Alicujus causa, id. Rem volo
defensam, id. I will have it defended.
Quid sibi vult istud ? Cic. What's the
meaning of this ?
Venire alicui auxilio, Liv. Subsi»
dio, Cic. Suppctias, Uirl. to come to
the assistance of.
Venire alicui advcrsiim, Plaut. to go
to meet him. In certamen cum aliquo,
Cic, to fight him. In consilium alicuj\is,
id. to cumc to give him counsel. Sub
j actum telorum, Liv. to come ivithiri
shot of.
Iiiimicus alicui venire, Cic. to be his
enemy.
Ad inimicitias res venit, id.
Venire viam, id. to go his own way.
Ad me ventnm est, id.
Mihi venit in dubium fides tua, id. I
begin lu doubt of,
De sorte venio in dubium, Ter. 1 aw
in danger of losing the principal.
Venit mihi in mentcm Platonis, Cic.
I Call Plato to mind.
in mentem venit de speculo, Plaut,
Venit in mentem P. Roniani digni-
tas, Cic,
V'ertere aliquid in laudem, Tac. to
turn to praise. Stultitia; aliquid alicui,
Plaut, to impute it to his folly. In rem
suani, IHp. t<> turn to hisprojil. In pri-
vatum, Liv. to his piivatc use. Ad se
partem alicujus rei, Cic. to appropriate
lo tiimstlf.
Vertere Platnnem, Cic. to translate
Plato. Graeca in Latinum, Suint. De
Gfjecis, Cic. Kx CJiajcis, Ter.
Tribus iu rebus fer6 vertitur omnis
virtus, Cic, consists in, is included.
Intra
f
OF Verbs of different Governments. 225
Intra fines hos vertuntur omnia, Ccel.
ad Cic.
In priorem partem sunt versa & mu-
■ tata omnia, id. are changed.
Jam verterat fortuna, Liv. teas now
changed.
Quae te genitor sententia vertit ?
Virg. has made you change opinion.
ViGiLARE ad multam noctem, ^ de
mulla nocte, Cic. to sit up vfiy late,
Noctes vijilare ad ipsum mane, Hor,
Vigilare studiis, Proper, In scelus,
Stat.
Noctes vigilantnr amaroe, Ovid.
ViNDicARE se ab aliquo, Sen. De
aliquo, Cic. to be revenged of a person.
Tc vald6 vindicavi, Cic. yitlico. I
have got my full revenge of you. Ita
jMan.
Peccatum in altero vindicare, Cic. to
punish.
In aliquem scelera alterius vindicare,
id.
Vindicare a labore, id. to exempt.
Grails bis vindicat armis, Firg.
Vindicare in libertatem, Cic. to set
at Tiberty, to restore, Libertatem, Cees.
to defend the liberty. Se ad snos, Cic.
to return safe and sound to them. Se
existimationi horoinum, id. to maintain
his reputation.
* Some write the following exam-
ples with an e, Vendicare. But
we shall make it appear in the ninth
book, of Letters and Orthography, that
we ought always to write Vindi-
CAUE.
Aliquid pro sue vindicare, Cic
claim.
Sibi assumere & vindicare, id,
Dicere suum & vindicare, id.
Ululare. Ululant canes, Virg
howl.
iEdes ululant plangoribus femineis,
Vir^. do ring with.
Tristia ulularunt Galli, Lucan,
Centum ululata per urbes, Lucan.
Utor. See the Syntax, rule 33,
p. 70.
to
to
Vol. U.
Q
[ 226 ]
BOOK VIII.
PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS.
On the Roman Names, On their Figures or Arithmetical
Characters. On their manner of counting the Ses-
terces. And on the division of Time.
Useful for the understanding of Authors.
Chaptkr I.
Of the Names of the Antient Romans. Taken from Va l.
Maxoius, SiGONius, Lipsius, and other authors.
I ' H E Greeks had only one name, but the Romans had
JL sometimes tliree or four, which they called PrjENOMen,
NoMEN, Cognomen, and sometimes also Agnomen.
The prccncnien is that which agreeth to each individual ; the «o-
men that which denotes the family from which he is descended ;
and the cognomen, that which agreeth to a particular branch of this
family.
I. Of the Proper Name, Vr2£.^o-m EN.
The prccnomen was therefore, as the very word expresseth, what
was prefixed to the general name, and amounts to the same thing
as our proper name, by which we distinguish brothers of the same
family, as when we call them, I'eter, John, James, &c.
The prcenomen was not introduced till a long time after the nO'
men. Hence it was customary among the Romans to give the fa-
mily name to children, of the male sex, the ninth day after their
nativity ; and of the female the eighth, according to Festus and
Plutarch. And those days were called dies lustrici, because it was
a ceremony whereby they were acknowledged as legitimate, and
of such or such a family, whose name was given them. Whereas
they did not receive the pranomcn, till they took the toga virilis,
that is, about the-age of seventeen, as appeareth by the epitome of
the 10th book attributed to Valerius Maximus. Pueris, says he,
72071 priuaquam iogam virilem sumerent, puellis non anlequam nuherentj
•prcenomina imponi morisfuisse Q. Scavola autor est. This is farther
confirmed by Tally's epistles, where the children are called Cicero-
vex pneri, till that age, after which they are stiled Marcus JUius,
Quiiitus filius.
And though Cicero in the last epistle of the 6th book to Atticus
calJeth his nephew, Quintum Ciecronem ptierum ; yet it i« very pro-
bable
Of the Roman Names. 2^7
bable that Cicero wresteth the sense of the word pueTf to distinguish
him from his father, who was also called Quintus ; or perhaps be-
cause he had but very lately taken the toga virilis. And in regard
to what Sigonius mentions from Plutarch and Festus, who, ac-
cording to him, are of a different opinion from Valerius Maximus,
we are to take notice that those authors do not speak of the prce7w-
men, but of the nomen, which, as hath been above mentioned, was
given to children the 8th or 9th day after their nativity. And
there is no manner of doubt but this is what led Sigonius into a
mistake.
In conferring this prcenomen, they took care generally to give
that of the father to the eldest son, and that of the grandfather and
the ancestors of the family to the second, and to all the rest.
Varro observeth that there were thirty of those prcenomina, in
his time, or thereabouts, whereof the most usual may be reduced
to eighteen, some of which were marked by a single letter, others
by two, and others by three, as we shall here exhibit them, toge-
ther with their etymology.
1. With a single letter we find eleven.
A. stands for Aulus, so called from the verb alo, as being born
Diis (de^itibus.
C. stands for Caius, so called a gaiidio parentum,
D. stands for Decimus, that is, the tenth born.
K. stands for K.i;so, taken from cctdo, because they were
obliged to open his mother's womb to bring him into the world.
L. stands for Lucius, from hix, Incis, because the first who
bore this name, was born at break of day.
M. stands for Marcus, as much as to say, born in the month
of March.
But M' with an acute accent on the top, or M* with a comma,
signifieth Manius, that is, bor7t in the morningi or rather quite
good, because manis heretofore, as we have already observed, p.
150. signified good.
N. stands for Numerius, which cometh from mimerus, number.
P. makes Publius either from the word piibes, or irom popidus^
as much as to say popular and agreeable to the people.
Q. stands for Quintus, that is, the fifth child of his family.
T. stands for Titus from the word tueri, as if the defender or
preserver of his country.
2. With two letters we find four.
AP. stands for Appius, which cometh from the Sabine word
Attius. For Aitius Clausus was the first, who having been ex-
pelled his country, came to Rome and changed his name into that
of Appius Claudius.
CN. stands for Cneus, as much as to say noevus, from some
mark on his body.
SP. stands for Spurius, which denotes something ignominioOs
in birth. For this word in the \jdX\x\. tongue signifies also spurious
or illegitimate. Spurii, quasi extra puritatem, Sf imjnundi, says St.
Isidore.
TI. stands for Tiberius, that is, born near the Tiber.
3. With three letters, we find three.
Q 2 MAM".
i228 PartiC. Obseuv. Chap. I. Book VIII.
■ MAM. that is, Mamf.rcus, which in the Tuscan language
signific.) Mars, according to Fcstus.
SER. that is, Servius, from the word servus, a slave, because
the person who first toolc this name, was not free born.
SEX. that is, Skxtus, as much as to say thcsixlk horn.
These are the eighteen proper names most usual among the
Romans. To which we might likewise add some that are very well
known in antient history, as Ancus, Aruns, Hodilius, Tiilliis, and
some others.
II. Of tlie general Name, Nomen Gentis.
The nomen or name was what agreed to the whole race or family
with all its branches, and answered to the Greek patronymics, ac-
cording to Priscian, lib. 2. For as the descendants of TEacus were
called JEacidcs, so the descendants of lulus son of TEneas, had the
name a? JuUi ; those of the Antonian family, Antonii, and the rest
in the like manner. Hence we may observe that all those general
names which they called Gent'dilia, are properly adjectives, and
that they all terminate in ius, except two or three, namely, Vc'
ducccus, PoppcBus, and perhaps Norhanus ; though Lipsius questions
whether the latter be one of those names.
III. Of the pariicular surname^ Cognomen and
Agnomen.
The particular surname called cognomen, was properly the name
by which the different branches of the same stock or house, ?«fa£/e?9
igente, were distinguished ; as when Livy says that the house of the
Potitians was divided into twelve families. For gens S)- Jamilia
were like the whole and its parts. Those of the same stock or house
were called Gentiles ; and those of the same bianch or family, Ag-
nati. As we See in France that the royal house hath been frequently
divided into different branches, as those of Valois, Bourbon, Or-
leans, Montpensier, &c. Thus when we say that the family of the
Caesars were of the race of Julius ; Julius is the general name of the
race, or norncn gentis ; and Ctcsar that of the fumil}', cognomen Jci-
milicc. But if you add Caius for his proper name, this will give us
the prcenomen. Therefore all three will be C Julius Ccesar.
There are some who hereto add the agnomen, which signifieth
as it were an increase of the surname, and was conferred on some
particular occasion, as when one of the Scipios was entitled A^ri-
canns, and the other Asiaticus, because of their great exploits in
those parts of the world. And no doubt but a man might in this
manner have sometimes a particular surname, and as it were »
fourth name. Hence the author ad Herennium makes mention of
this agnomen, when lie says, Nomen axitem cum dicimus, cognomen
(l»oque S) agnomen inlelUgalur oportet.
Yet it is certain that the word cognomen comprehendeth likewise
this sort of nouns, witness Sallust, when he says of Scipio himself,
jyjasinissa in amicitiam recent us u P, Scipione, cui pustea Africano cog-
nomen J'uit ex virtute : ana Cicero writing to Pompnnius, who was
surnamcd Atticus, for having performed his studies at Athqns,
says.
■tf^
Of the T?oman Names. 225
cays, Tcque non cog7wmen Athenis solum deportasse, scd hitmanitatem
^ prurfe?itiam intetligo.
And indeed if we examine closely into the thing, we shall find
that there are no surnames, I mean of those which are called cog-
nomina, and distinguish families, but what are thus derived frora
some particular occasions ; since even the proper names (jtrccnomi^
na) are originally owing to such occasions, as we have above de-
monstrated in pointing out their etymology.
IV. OBSERVATIONS on the Names of Slaves,
Freednien, Women, and Adoptive Childieo.
And fast of Slaves and Freedmen.
Slaves formerly had no other name than that of their master, as
Lucipor, Marcipor, for Lucii puer, Marci puer. Yet in process of
time they had a name given them, which was generally that of
their country, as Sijrus, Davus, Geta, &c. Just as in France the
lackeys are sometimes called Champagjie, Basque, Ficnrd, &c.
When they were enfranchised, they took the prcenomen and the
nomen of their masters, but not the cogn(>men, instead of which they
retained their own prcEnomen. Thus Cicero's learned freedman was
called M. Tullius Tyro, and others in the same manner. 7'he like
was observed in regard to allies and foreigners, who assumed the
name of the person, by whose interest they had obtained the free-
dam of the city of Rome.
2. Of Women.
Varro takes notice that the women had heretofore their proper
and particular name, as Caia, Ccecilia, Lucia, Volumnia. And
Festus says that Caecilia and Tarratia were both called Caice. We
likewise meet with Titia, Marca, &c. in Sigonius and others. And
those names, as Quintilian observeth, were marked by inverted
letters, thus, 3, -^^ j^, &.c. In process of time they were discon-
tinued : if there was only one, it was customary to give her the
name of her race or stock ; or sometimes it was softened by a di-
minutive, as Tullia or Tulliola. But if there were many, they
were called after the order of their birth, Prima, Secunda, Tertia,
Quarta, Qiiinta, &c. or these were formed into diminutives, Se-
cundilla, QiiartiUa, Qiciidil/a, &c.
But as several are mistaken in affirmins that the women had no
'prcenomen ; so they are also in an error in pretending that they
had no cognomen. For. it is certain that Sylla's daughter, who was
married to Milo, had the surname of Cornelia; and Caelius writing
to Cicero, speaks of Paula, who had the surname of Valeria.
3. Of Adoptive Children.
It was customary for those who were adopted, to take the names
iand surnames of those who adopted them. And in order to mark
their birth and descent, they only added at the end the name
of the house or stock from which they were descended, or the sur-
name of their own particular branch ; with this difference however,
tljat
•230 Partic. Observ. Chap. I. Book Vlll.
that if tlip}' made use of this surname, they wrote it simply ;
whereas if they used tiie name, they formed it into an adjective ;
Si cognomen, integrum servabant ; si nomen, mutatum S^ iujiexum,
says Lipsius.
For example, M. Juniua Brutus having been adopted by Q. Ser-
xiiliiis Ccepio Again ; he took all his names, and preserved only the
name of his own branch, calling himself Q. Servilius Ccepio Agalo
Brutus. On the contrary, Octavius having been adopted by his
grand uncle, Julius Ccusar, he preserved the name of iiis house,
changing it into an adjective, and was called C. Julius Ccvmr Octa-
vianus ; which did not hinder them from preserving also any sur-
name they might have acquired, as Atticus, who having been
adopted by Q. Ccecilius, had the surname of Q. Ccecilius Fomponia-
nus. Atticus ; or from acquiring any new one by their merit, as
Octavius, who had afterwards the surname of Augustus given him.
To this rule of adoption we must refer what Suetonius saith,
that Tiberius having been adopted by M. Galliiis, a senator, he
took possession of lu's estate, but would not go by his name, be-
cause he had followed the party that opposed Augustus ; and what
Tacitus sa)'s, that Crispus Sallustius adopting his sister's nephew,
made him take his name. And such like expressions.
V. Other observations on changing the order of
those Names.
Though the usual custom of the Romans was that above ob-
served, of putting the ^r«?no»?<??2, nome?!, and cog7iamen, one after
the other ; yet we must take notice that this order hath not been
always carefully adhered to, as Valerius INIaximus testifieth : Anim-
adverto enim, says he, lib. 10. in consulinn fastis perplexum usiimprce-
nominum &: cngnoniintimfuisse. Concerning which there are several
changes to be observed.
1. The cognomen before the nomen.
Manutius sheweth that they sometimes put the surname of the
particular branch before the general name of the stock, cognomen
ante nomen gentis, as in Cicero we find Gallo Fnbio, Balbi Cornelii,
Fapum JEviilium ; and in Livy, Paullus JEmilius Cos. and the
like, though Gallus, Balbus, Papus and Paullus^ were cognomina
non prcenomina.
2. The cognomeji become Jiomen.
Sometimes the cognomen became a nomen. Qtitn etiani cognomina
in nomen versa sunt, says Valerius INIaximus.
3. The prce770J}2en become nomen.
Sometimes the preBuomen became a nomen, says Priscian, as
Tullus Servilius, M. Tul/ius.
4. The pjYPnomen put in tlie second place.
And sometimes ihe prcsnomen used to be put i>nly in the second
place, as Sigonius observcth. Thus we find in Livy, Allium Ttd-
lus, Manlius Cnceus, Octavius Melius. In Cicero, Malaginensis M.
Scipio. Ill Suetonius, ad Pompcium.
5. The
Of Names under the Emperors. 231
5. The prccnomcn or proper name put last under the
Emperors.
But those changes were still more considerable under the em-
perors. For whereas during the time of the republic, the fra-
nomen was the proper name which distinguished brothers and in-
dividuals from one another, as M. TuUius Cicero, and Q. TuUius
Ciceroy brothers ; on the contrary in the monarchical state of
Rome, the proper name which distinguished individuals, was ge-
nerally the last, whence it came that the brothers, commonly
speaking, had nothing in particular but that; as Fiavius Vespa-
sianus, and Fiavius Sabiinis, brothers, in Suetonius.
This new custom appeareth plainly in the case of the Senecas.
For Seneca the father, the rhetorician, was called M. Annceus Seneca;
and he had three children, M. Annceus Novatus^ L. Anna:iis Se-
neca, the philosopher ; and L. Annceus Mela, father of Lucan the
poet. Yet the latter of each of those names was so far the proper
and particular appellation, by which they were distinguished from
one another, that the other two are common to them all ; and that
Seneca the rhetorician, father of those celebrated sons, sometimes
gives both to himself and them only the latter of those three
names, as appeareth by the title of his first book of Controversies,
Stneca, Novato, Senecoe, Milce fiUis salutem. And his eldest son
Novatus, having been adopted by Junius Gallio, he is called by
Eusebius in his Chronicle, Julius Gallio f rater SeneccE ; though his
brother, Seneca the philosopher, generally calls him by the last of
those three, which was his proper name, as in the title of his book
on a Happy Life, and in his epistles ; likewise St. Luke in the Acts
of the Apostles, c. 18. calls him by no other name than Gallio.
Whence it is clear that in those days it was the last nam.e that
distinguished the brothers from each other, as might be demon-
strated by several other examples.
Hence aLo it comes that only this last name was generally given
to the principal persons of the empire in the first ages of the
Church, as sufficiently distinguishing them from every body else.
This is the reason that though St. Jerome in the preface to his
commentaries on the epistle of St. Paul to the Galatians, speaking
of Victorinus, that famous professor of eloquence at Rome, ob-
serves that he was called C. Marius Victorinus ; yet Victorinus was
in such a manner his proper name, that this very St. Jerome in
his treatise of Ecclesiastic Writers, chap. 101. and St. Austin in his
Confessions, book 8. chap. 2. call him only Victorinus.
It appeareth likewise that St. Paulinus, Bishop of Nola, was
called Pontius Meropius Paulinus ; and yet St. Austin and other
authors generally give him the latter of those three names only,
as that by which his person was particularly distinguished Thus
Rufinus is called only by this name in the writings of S Jerom,
S. Austin, and S. Paulinus, though his name was Tjran:.ius liu-
Jiniis : nor has S. Prosper any other appellation in the autient
writers of the Church, though his name was Tyro Prosper. Nor
is Volusian, governor of Rome, mentioned by any other name in
the 1st and 2d epistle of S. Austin, though we find by an antient
inscription
2i32 Partic. Observ. Chap. I. Book VIII.
inscription that he was called Caius Canotiius Rtifiiis Volusinnns ;
nor 15oetius by any other than tJiis name, though he was called
Auicius Boelius ; this name of Aniciiis, which is here put first,
being nevertheless the name of the noble family from which he
was descended.
6'. Edxeption to this rule of taking the last name under
the Emperors.
Contrary to this general rule of the Roman names under the
emperors, it is to be observed however (as Father Sirmond hath
observed in his notes on St. Sidonius) that we call Palladius the
person who wrote on agriculture, though his name being Palla-
dius liutilius Taurus yEmilia7ius, we should call him yjvmiliaiius, as
he is stiled by St. Isidorus. In like manner we give the name of
Macrobius to the person whom Avienusand Boetiuscall Theodosius,
because his real name was Macrobius Ambrosius Aureiius 2'Jieodosins :
and we give the name of Cassiodorus to that great man who was
called Cassiodorus Senator, the word Senator, which was his real
name, having been taken by many rather as the name of his dig-
nity than of his person.
But though a few such particular cases may occur, they must
be considered, notwithstanding, either as exceptions to the general
rule, or as errors that have crept into the title of the works of those
authors, through the negligence of those who, choosing only to put
one of their names, did not reflect that the custom of the antients
was changed, and that the last name was become the proper name
of individuals.
7. Other names changed as xvell as the latter.
It is also observable, as Father Sirmondus shewcth extremely
well in the same place, that whereas the antients always retained
the name of their family together with their proper name, this
custom was so far altered in the latter ages, that not only the pro-
per name, but likewise all the others were changed in regard al-
most to every individual, not attending so much to the general
name of the family, as to those which had been particular to the
illustrious men of that same family, or to their relations and
friends. Thus the son of the orator Symmachus was called Q.
Flavins Memmius Symmachus, having taken the name of Flavins
from his uncle by the father's side, and q? Memmius from his uncle
by the mother's side. Thus St. Fulgentius was called Fabius
Claudius Gordianus Fulgeyiiius, having taken the name of Claudius
from his father, and that of Gordianus from his grandfather, which
is oltentimes the cause of our not being able to trace the antiquity
of families.
Of THE Numbers of the Romans. 233
Chapter II.
Of Figures, or Arithmetical Characters, among the
Romans.
I. In what vianner the Romans jnarked their Numbers.
H E Romans marked their numbers by letters, which they
anged thus :
1
I
One.
5
V
Five.
10
X
Ten.
50
L
Fifty.
100
C
One hundred.
500
Id
Five hundred.
1000
do
One thousand.
5000
lOD
Five thousand.
10000
CCI03
Ten thousand.
50000
Idod
Fifty thousand.
100000
ccclooo
One hundred thousand
These are the figures of the Roman numbers, with their sig-
rjification and value : for, as Pliny observeth, the antients had no
number above a hundred thousand; but to reckon higher, they
put this number twice or thrice. Whence comes the manner of
computing by, bis, ter, quater, quinquies, decies centena miUia, and
others, of which we shall have occasion to speak in the chapter
on Sesterces.
II, Proper observations in order to understand these
Figures thoroughly.
In order properly to understand these figures, we must consider :
1. That there are only five different figures, which are the first
five, and that all the rest are compounded of I and C ; so that the
C is always turned towards the I, whether it comes before or after,
as may be seen above.
2. That as often as there is a figure of less value before a
higher, it signifies that we are to deduct so much from the latter,
as IV. four : xl. forty : xc. ninety, &c. Whereby we see that there
is no number but what may be expressed by the first five figures.
3. That in all those numbers, the figures go on increasing by a
fivefold and afterwards a double proportion, so that the second is
five times the value of the first, and the third twice the value of
the second; the fourth five times the value of the third ; the fifth
twice the value of the fourth, and the rest in the same manner.
: 4. That the figures always begin to be multiplied on the right
side, 50 that all the o which are put on that «de are reckoned by
§ five,
234 Partic. Observ. Chap. II. Book VIIL
five, as those on the other side are reckoned by ten ; and thus we
may easily find out all sorts cjf numbers how great soever : as when
an author in tlie IGth century, giving a list of the number of
citizens in the Roman empire, puts contrary to the custom of the
antients, cccccccIoododd.o. Iddooodo. cccIooo. ccIo,-). taking the first
c after the I for one thousand, or the first c on the right hand for
five hundred, and proceeding through the whole with a tenfold
progression, in eacli figure on ei'Jier side, I see immediately that
the whole comes to one billion, five hundred millions, a hundred
and ten thousand citizens ; which we should express thus by Ara-
bic cyphers, 1500,110,000. But as we have already observed,
the antients did not pass ccclooa. one hundred thousand in those
figures.
III. JVhat this manner of reclioning has been orving to,
and whence these Figures have been taken.
Now if I may be permitted to reflect a little on this manner of
counting, it is easy to judge that it is owing to this, that mankind
having begun at first to count with their fingers, they told as far
as five with one hand, then adding the other hand, they made ten,
which is double ; and hence it is that their progression in these
numbers is always from one to five, and then from five to ten.
To this same cause the very formation of these figures is owing.
For what is more natural than to say, that I is the same as if an
unit was shewn by raising one finger only ; and that the V is as if
depressing the middle fingers no more was shewn than the little
finger and the thumb, to include the whole hand; and adding
the other to this, they formed as it were two V, one of which
was inverted under the other, that is an X, which is equivalent to
ten. I
Manutius shews further that all the other figures are derived
from the first, because as the V is only two 1 joined at the bottom,
so the L is only two I, one upright and the other couchant ; and
adding thereto a third on the top, they expressed by this figure
a hundred, instead of whicli the transcribers, for greater currency
in writing, have borrowed the C. And if we join a fourth I to
shut up the square thus □, this makes five hundred, instead of
which they afterwards took the id, and at length the D. Doubling
this square \Zl.\ they formed their thousand, instead of which the
transcribers, either for the sake of ornament, or for greater con-
veniency, began likewise to round this figure, and with a dash of
the pen to frame it thus co , afterwards thus u, for which reason
we frequently meet with the couchant cypher co , or a Greek w to
mark a thousand. But afterwards they marked it thus cio, and
after that cd, and at length because this has a great relation to
the Gothic 1' 2 , they took a simple M to denote a thousand, as
likewise C for a hundred, and D for five hundred. And hence it
comes that there are but just seven letters which serve for this sort
of numbers, namely, C. D. I. L. M. V. X. except we havy a
mind to add also the Q. which tome have taken for five hundred,
according to Vossius.
IV. Whether
Of the Roman Sesterces. 233
IV. JVhether there are other methods to mark the Ro-
man Cypher than the preceding.
We must also take' notice of the opinion of some, that when
there is a bar over the cyphers, this gives them the value of
a thousand, as v, X five thousand, ten thousand. Bui Priscian's
manner of computing, nannely, that to express a thousand, the X
must be put between the C's,'thus CX3, and to express ten thou-
sand we should put the M there, thus CiVl3, is absolutely false
and contrary to antiquity ; and it is owing to this only, that not
knowing the real foundation of this manner of computing, which
I have here explained, they thought to adjust it to our's, which
proceeds by a tenfold progression. And though we sometimes
find the L between the C's, thus CL3, or the like, this is only a
mistake of the transcribers, who perceiving that on those occasions
the I is generally bigger than the C's, they took it for an L. So
that even then the L ought to be reckoned only as an I, and to
mark no more than one thousand.
Chapter III.
Of the Roman Sesterces.
AS I have some notion of publishing a separate essay on the
antient coins, with their respective value reduced to the
standard of the present currency in France, I shall therefore speak
here of sesterces, only in regard to grammar.
The sesterce was a little silver coin in value the fourth part of
a Roman denarius, or two asses and a half, which as was also called
libra, because at first it was of copper, and weighed a pound.
Hence the vv-ord as (quasi ces, says Varro) came from the matter;
and the word libra, from the weight that was given it. And when
they added the ablative pondo, it was to determine the word pound
or weight, which of itself was also by measure.
Hence it is that heretofore they marked the sesterce thusL. L. S.
the two L's making two pounds, and the S signifying s«n?, two
pounds and a half. Whereas the transcribers have since given
us an H with the S, thus H. S. And this sesterce, pursuant to the
valuation which we have elsewhere observed, was equivalent to a
sou and two deniers, French money, or something more.
In order to count the sesterces, the Romans proceed three ways.
From one to a thousand they reckon them simply by the order
of the numbers, without understanding any thing; Sestertii decern,
viginti, centum, mille, &c.
From a thousand to a million they reckon three ways, ei-
ther by the numeral nouns, which they make agree with ses-
tertii, as 7nille sestertii ; or by putting the neuter sestertia witli
mitlia expressed or understood, as decern sestertia, or decern millia
sestertia; or in short by putting sestertiuni in the genitive
plural formed by syncope for sestertioriim, as octo vnllia sester-
Hum, centena millia sestertium. Which they likewise mar k some-
times by putting a bar over the capital letters, fhus c. m. s.
% whicfe
236 Partic. Observ. Chap. III. Book VHI.
which bar sheweth that the number is taken for a thousand ; so
that the C which makes a hundred, stands here for a hundred
thousand, though they frequently put this bar, where it is impos-
sible to judge of the sum but by the sense.
From a million upwards they reckon by adverb?, as decies, r/-
cies, centies, sestertium, &c. where we must always understand ceit'.
teiia millia, sestertii or seslertium, or else millia only, when ccnlcna
lias been already expressed, as when Juvenal saith :
Et ritu decies centena dahuntur
Anliquo : that is, decies centena millia.
But if the adverb alone is expressed, then we are to understand
all these three words centena millia sesteriium. Thus bis millies, for
example, is the same as bis millies centena millia sesteriium.
We are to observe however that sestertius and numus frequently
signify the same thing: tlius mille niimum, milte sestertiiim, or 7uiUe
numum sesteriium^ may be indifferently said one fpr the other.
II. Reason of these expressions, and that mille sirktli^
speaking is always an Adjective.
Various are the opinions concerning the reason for this con-
struction and these expressions : for not to mention those of Varro,
■Nonius, and some antients, whO' without any probability ima-
gined that these genitives, juunmum and sesteriium (formed by syn-
cope, instead o^ numorum and sestcrliorum ) were accusatives; mille
is generally taken as a noun substantive that governeth the genitive
niimmum or sesteriium.
Scioppius on the contrary pretends that mille is always' an ad-
jective, in the same manner as other numeral nouns ; and there-
fore that we must suppose another noun on which the govern-
ment of this genitive depends. And therefore he endeavours to
show in his fourteenth letter, that then we must understand res or
negotium, just as when Juvenal says :
Quantum quisque sua nummorum possidct arcci :
Where quantum being an adjective ought necessarily to suppose
negotium. So that if we were to say, res or negotium mille nummorum
est in area, the construction would be quite simple and intire : but
if we say Mille nummorum est in area, it is figurative, and then we
must understand res, which governs mille nummorum (which are the
adjective and substantive) in the genitive. Now res mille nummo-
rum, is the same thing as mille nunmii, just as Phredrus saith, res
cibi for cibiis. Which we have shewn elsewhere more at large.
Perhaps we might make use of this principle to solve some dif-
ficult passages, which coincide with this same construction, as
when Terence saith, Omnium quantum est qui vivunl ornalissi^ne,
the most vain fellow in the whole world. For it meaneth, Quan-
tum est negotium omnium hominum qui vivunt, ^ov quanti sunt homines
qui vivunt. Just as the (i reeks say %f5j/xa Saf/xa-ov 'yv)ixiy.os for
3af/>t«roj yvv^, an admirable woman. And a^ Paul the learned
Civilian said, Si juraverit sejilio mco decern operarum daticrum, liber
csto. And in another place, Cum decern operaruinjussus ^st dare, for
decern
Of the Roman Sesterces. 237
decern operas. And it is certain that he might hkewise have said,
Chn decern talentumjussus est dare, where there cannot he the least
doubt but he must have understood rem, since Terence hath even
expressed it, Si cognutiis talcntum rem reliquissct decern, &c. Wliere
it is also obvious, that rem decern talenlinn and decern talenia, are the
same thing, and therefore that decern is the adjective of talentum,
let it be in whatever case it will. Therefore if I say, Reliquit
tnihi decern talent uin (omitting rei7t, as this Civilian has done) there
is no manner of doubt but they are both in the genitive, and but
that this word res, is understood upon the occasion.
For which reason when we say mi/le homimim, mille nummum, it
is the same construction as decern uperarum, decern talentilm ; and we
hiay further affirm that it is a construction of the adjective and
substantive in the genitive governed by res or negoiium, which is
understood. At least this is the opinion of Scioppius.
This seems even to be the principle, by which we ought to ac-
count for these expressions framed in the plural, as when St. Je-
rom saith. Si Origenes sex miUia scripsisset libros. And Livy, Fhilip-
jjei nummi quatuor mUlia viginti quatiior. And Cicero, IVitici tne-
dimnos duo millia. For if this principle of Scioppius be just, we
must resolve these phrases, and say, Scripsit libros ad sex millia ne-
gotia illorum librorum ; tritici medimnos ad sex millia negotia illorum
jnedimnorum. And in like manner the rest. Wliich will not perad-
venture appear so extraordinary, when we once conceive, that the
word res or negotium with the genitive of a noun, always supposeth
this very noun in the nominative, res cibi for cibus. Millia nego-
tia medimnorum, for mille inedimni, &c. For that millia in the plural
is an adjective, is beyond all doubt, notwithstanding what Linacer,
L. Valla, and Scaliger, pretend; since we find in Pliny, Millia
iempestatum prcesagia : in Tully, Decent millia talenta Gabinio esse
promissa, and the like.
Such is the principle laid down by Scioppius, and in the main
it seems to be undeniable. This however does not hinder but 'm
practice, which is the master of speech, magister S) dictator loquendiy
as Scaliger expresseth himself, one may say that mille is fre-
quently taken as a substantive, being then rather for y^iXixs than
X'^'°'> according to A. Gellius, as when we say unum mille, duo
millia, &c. one thousand, two thousand, &c. And thus we are
furnished with an easy method of resolving those expressions.
For it is not to be imagined that the custom of language should
be so confined to general rules, but it may sometimes make a sub-
stantive of an adjective, and sometimes an adjective of a substan-
tive ; nor that the human mind will take a perplexed ami dark
winding in order to apprehend things, when it can find a shorter
and clearer method. Hence there are a great many nouns taken
substantively, though in the main they are adjectives, as vivens,
mortalis, patria, Judcea, molaris, &c. which, strictly speaking, do
refer to homo, terra, dens ; and the same may be said of the rest.
And therefore when we say mille denarium est in area, mille equi-
tum est in exercitu, I see nothing that can hinder us from looking
upon mille as a substantive ; or at least as a noun taken substan-
tively.
'23S Partic. Obseuv. Chap. III. Book VIII.
lively, which shall govern the genitive denarium, equitum^ &c.
And thus it is that Lucilius says,
Tu miUi nummum putcs into qucerere centum :
With a thousand sesterces you can gain a hundred thousand.
Therefore when we say, Sex millia scripsit libros, tritici medhnnos
recipii duo miliia, we may take it, either as an apposition, libros
sex millia ; or resolve it by ad libros, ad sex millia : which does not
hinder but in the main we may also resolve it by negolium, accord-
ing to Scioppius's principle : just as, strictly speaking, mortalis
ought to be resolved by homo, Judcea by terra, and the rest in the
like manner.
Be that as it may, we must observe that when a verb or an ad-
jective is joined to this word mille, it is generally made to agree
in the singular, whether we are to understand wen^o^iitw, as Scioppius
pretends, or whether we take it, not for ;^/X/o/, but for x^Ktxs, a
thousand, as A. Gellius will have it. Qui L. Antonio mille nummum
Jerret expensitm, Cic. Quo in Jcindo mille hominumjaciie versabatur,
Cic. Ad Romuli initium plus mille 8^ centum annorum est, Varro. Ibi
occiditur mille Ikominum, and not occiduntur, says Quadrigar, in A.
Gellius, lib. 1. c. 16.*
III. Oilier remarkable expressions in regard to the same
subject.
When we meet with Sestertium decies numeratum esse, Cic. act. 4.
in Verr. it is a Syllepsis of number, or numeratum which refers to
negotium, understood, instead of numerala, which it should have
been ; as indeed it is in some editions, because we are to suppose
centena millia. In like manner, An accepto centies sestertium fiecerit,
Velleius, lib. 2. de Curione, for acccptis ceiities centenis millibus ses-
tertium, and the like.
Now as the antients said, decies sestertium, or decies centena millia
sestertium ; so they said likewise decies crris, or decies centena millia
arts : decies ceris numeratum esse, &c. where the word ess is gene-
rally taken for the asses, which at first were of brass, as already
hath been observed.
♦ And this is so much the more to above noun hath this in particular,
be observed, as in French it is quite that it does not take an s at the latter
the reverse, the construction being al- end, except it be to mark the miles
ways in the plural with this numeral on the highway; for every where else
noun as well as with the rest, since we write in French un mille, dix mille,
we say for instance, Les cent or les mille trente mille, &c. one thousand, ten i/iou-
soldats venus d'ltalie fureni tues en ce sand, thirty thousand, &c. though we
(omhat, the hundred, or thousand sol- say, deux cens, two hundred, quatre'
diers uho came from Italy, were killed vingls, fourscore, and the like with an s.
in this battle. Again, il y en a eu mille But when we say, mille dc lues, it is a
tues, or rather mille de tues and not tui, partition, as if it were mille occisurum
nor de lue, there were a thousand killed, or ex numero occisorum.
Where it appears likewise that the
Ov Days and Hours. 239
Chapter IV.
Of the Division of Time according to the Antients.
TH E antients had a particular manner of reckoning and
expressing time, which is necessary to be known fur the
right understanding of authors.
I. Of Days.
We shall begin with a day, as the part of time most known and
most natural.
The antients divided a day into natural and artificial. The na-
tural day they called that which is measured by the space of time
the sun takes in making his circuit round the earth, which in-
cludes the entire duration of day and night. Artificial day they
called that space of time which the sun stays above the horizon.
The natural day is also called the civil, inasmuch as it is diffe-
rently computed by different nations, some beginning it one way,
and others another.
Thus the Babylonians began their day with the sun-rise.
The Jews and the Athenians began it with sun-set, and in this
they are imitated by the modern Italians, who reckon their first
hour from the setting of the sun.
The Egyptians began it at midnight, as we do.
The Umbrians at noon.
The day which commences at the setting or rising of the sun,
is not altogether equal. For from the winter solstice to the sum-
mer solstice, that which begins from sun-set, has a little more than
24) hours: and quite the contrary from the summer solstice to the
winter solstice. But the natural day which begins at midnight, or
at noon, is always equal.
On the contrar)^ the artificial day is unequal in all parts of the
earth, except under the equinoctial line. And this inequality is
greater or lesser according to different climates. Now from thence
ariseth the difference of houi's, of which we are going to speak.
II. Of Hours.
There are two sorts of hours, one called equal, and the other
unequal.
Equal hours are those which are always in the same state, such
as those which we make use of, each of which constitutes the four-
and-twentieth part of the natural day. ,
Unequal hours are those which are longer in summer, and
shorter in winter for the day; or the reverse for the night; being
only the twelfth part of the day or of the night.
Therefore dividing the artificial day into twelve equal parts,
ive shall find that the sixth hour will be at noon, and the third,
will be half the time, which precedes from sun-rise till noon ; as
the ninth hour is half the time which follows from noon till sun-
Bet ; and the rest in the same manner.
This
240 Pautic. Obseuv. Chap. IV. Book VIII.
This is uliat gave occasion to the naming of the canonical hours
of prime, tierce, sexte, none, and vespers, in honour of the sacred
mysteries that were accomplished in those hours, in which the
Church hath therefore been used to say those prayers.
III. Of the JVatches of the Night.
The twelve hours of the night were divided into four watches,
and each watch contained three hours. Hence we frequently find
in Cicero and other writers. Prima vigilia, secunda vigilia, &c.
IV. Of Weeks.
Weeks were composed of seven days, as the Scripture sheweth.
And almost all the oriental nations have made use of this method
to compute their days. Whereas the western world did not adopt;
it till the Christian religion was established, the Romans gene-
rally reckoning their days by nines, and the Greeks by decads or
tens.
But the Pagans called their days by the names of tlic seven
planets; thus the first was dies So/is, the second dies Lunce, the
third dies Marfis, the fourth dies Mercurii, the fifth dies Jovis, the
sixth dies Veneris, the seventh dies Sntnrni : and these names are
still in use, except that instead of dies Satiirni, we say dies Sabbat? ,
that is, the day of rest; and instead of dies Solis, we call the first
day of the week dies Domini, in memory of the resurrection of the
Son of God : the other days, from the custom of the Church, are
called Ferice according to their order ; thus Monday, Feria se-
cu7ida, Tuesday, Feria tertia, and so on.
V. Of Months.
Montlis are composed of weeks, as weeks of da)'S. But months
properly speaking are no more than the space which the moon
takes either in her course through the Zodiac, and is what astro-
logers call the periodical month, or in returning from one con*
junction with the sun to the next conjunction following, and is
what they call the synodical month.
Yet this name hath been also given to the time which the sun
takes in its course through the twelfth part of the Zodiac, whereby
' two sorts of months are distinguished ; lunar and solar.
The lunar synodical month, the only one considered by the an-
tients, is little more than twenty-nine days and a half.
The solar month is generally computed at thirty days, ten hours
and a half.
But the month is further divided into astronomical and civil;
Astronomical is properly the solar month ; and the civil is that
which has been adapted to the custom and fancy of particular na-
tions, some making use of lunar, and others of solar months.
The Jews, the Greeks, and the Romans, heretofore made use
of lunar months ; but to avoid the different fractions of numbers,
they made them alternately of nine and twenty and thirty days,
calling the former cavi, and the IdiWcr pteni.
The Egyptians preferred the solar months, each of which they
made of thirty days only, adding to the end of the year the five days
that
OF Weeks and Months. 241
that arose from the rest of the hours, and neglecting the six hours
or thereabouts that arose from the half hours, which was the reason
that every fourth year their seasons fell back a day.
We may be said .likewise to m ike use of those months, though
we render them unequal, reserving moreover the six hours to
make a day thereof every fourth year, as hereafter shall be ex-
plained.
Yl.Theantient manner of reckoning tJieDays of theMonth.
The Romans made use of three terms to denote the several days
of the month ; these were the calend>, the nones, and the ides,
which they marked thus, Cal. or Kal. Non. Id.
The calends they call the first day of every month, from the verb
y.xXiu, voco, because as the antients computed their montlis by the
revolution of the moon, there was a priest employed to observe the
new moon, and upon his first perceiving it, to give notice thereof
to the person who presided over the sacrifices ; then the people
were called to the Capitol, and information was given them how
many days were to be reckoned till the nones, and upon the day
of the nones all those employed in husbandry were obliged to be
in town, that they might receive the direction for the festivals and
other ceremonies to be observed that month. Hence some are of
opinion that the nones were called 7inncc, quasi novce, as much as
to say new observations ; though it is more likely the reason of
this denomination, was because from that time to the ides there
were always nine days.
The word ides, according to Varro, was owing to this, that in
the Etruscan language, iduare signified dividere, because they di-
vided the month into two almost equal parts.
After the first day, which went by the name of calends, the six
following in the month of March, July, and October, and the
four in the other months, belonged to the nones : and after the
nones there were eight days belonging to the ides; and the re-
mainder after the ides was reckoned by the calends of the next,
month. These particulars may be easily retained by these two
Latin verses.
Sex Mains, noiias, October, Julius et Mars ;
Quafuor at rcliqui : dabit idus quitibet octo.
So that in the months above mentioned, each of which had six days
for the nones after the calends, the day of the nones was properly
the seventh ; and of course the ides were the fifteenth. But in
the other months that had only four days betwixt the calends and
the nones, the nones were the fifth, and of course the ides the
thirteenth. And the proper day of the calends, nones, and ides,
was always put in the ablative, calendis, iionis, idibus, Januariiy
Februarii, &c. But the other days were reckoned by the follow-
ing term, expressing the number of days till then, and including
both terms, whether nones, ides, or calends, as quarto nonas, sup.
ante : sexto idus : quinto calend. &c.
Now they never said prima nonas ; but nonis, 8cc. mor secimdo no-
nas, because secundus Cfmeth from sequor, and the business here is
Voj^. II. R to
242 Partic. Observ. Chap. IV. Book VIII,
to mark the preceding day. For which reason they made use of
pridie ; just as to signify the following day they made use of poS'
tridie, as pridie nnnas, or nonarnni. Postridie cnlendas or ccdenda-
rum, where we are to understand the preposition ante or post, when
there is an accusative ; whereas the genitive tionarurn, or the hke,
is governed lilie the ablative die.
VII. Of the Year.
A year is properly the time which the sun takes in performing
its revolution through the twelve signs of the Zodiack. It is di-
vided into astronomical and civil.
The astronomical or tropic year, is that which includes the
exact time the sun is in returning to the same point of the Zodiack
from which he set out : this the astronomers have not yet been able
exactly to determine, though by the nicest observations it is found
to consist of 365 days, 5 hours, and 49 minutes.
The civil year is that whicli hath been adapted to the custom and
fancy of different nations.
The year appears to have been of three sorts among the Ro-
mans. That of Romulus, who made the year only of ten months,
beginning it in the month of March, for which reason the last
month was called December.
That of Numa, who corrected this gross error of Romulus,
adding two months to the year, January and February, and com-
posing it of 355 days only, which are twelve lunar months.
That of Julius Caesar, who finding this calculation also erro-
neous, added ten days and something more, whereby he made
the year to consist of 365 days and six hours exactly, re-
serving the six hours to the end of four years in order to form
an entire day, which they inserted before the sixth of the calends
of March, and therefore that year they reckoned twice the sixth
of the calends, saying the second time his sexlo cnlendas^ whence
came the word bissextiis, and then the year had 366 days, and was
called bissextile. This manner of computing has continued down
to our times, and because of its author is still called the Julian
year. Now the ten days which Cassar gave the year above what
it had before, were thus distributed : to January, August, and
December, each two : to April, June, September and November,
each one.
But as in these latter times this calculation hath been likewise
found imperfect, and the equinoxes had insensibly retrograded, in-
stead of remaining where Julius Caesar had fixed them, thence it
clearly appeared iliat the year did not contain exactly 365 days and
six hours, but that it wanted eleven minutes : this in 131 years made
the equinoxes fnil back almost a da}', because an hour containing
sixty of those minutes, a day must contain 1440 of them, which
being divided by 11. give 1S0.|^, so that the equinoxes were
fallen back to ihe tenth of March. For which reason, in the
year 1582, Pope Gregory XIII, in order to correct this
error, left out ten days of that year, by which means he re-
stored those equinoxes to the 21st of March, and to the 22d or
23d oii Srpi ember; and that the like inconveniency might be
. avoided
OF Olympiads and Lustres. ^43
avoided for the future, he ordained that as 131 muhiplied by three
malcb 39.'5, that is near 400 years, the computation should be regu-
lated by hundreds, in order to make a round number ; and there-
fore that in 400 years, the Sist three terminating tliree centuries
should be common without reckoning the bissextile. And this is
properly what is called the Gregorian account.
So that in this calculation, there is never a hundredth year a
bissextile, except those that can be measured by four. Thus 1700.
1800. 1900. 2100. 2200. are not bissextile. But the years 1600.
2000. 2400. &c. are bissextile.
VIII. Of the Spaces of Time composed of several Years.
And first of Olympiads and Lustres.
I shall but just touch on these matters, because to treat of them
fully, requires too copious a dissertation, and properly belongs to
another subject.
The Greeks reckoned by Olympiads, each of which contained
the space of four entire years. And those Olympiads took their
name from the Olympic games, which were celebrated in the
neighbourhood of Pisa, heretofore called Oli/mpia, in Pelopon-
nesus, whence they had the name of Olympic. Those years were
likewise denominated Iphiti, from Iphitus, who instituted, or at
least revived the solemnity of those games.
The Romans reckoned by lustres, that is, by a space of four
or five years : for the word lusti-iirn, according to Varro, cometh
from tuo to pay ; because at the beginning of every fifth year, the
people used to pay the tax imposed upon them by the censors,
whose offices had been established at first for that space of time,
though afterwards they became annual. ^
2. Of the Indiction and the Golden Number.
The Indiction is a revolution of 15 years, which according to
Hotoman was established by the emperor Constantine, who pub-
lished an edict ordaining that the subjects of the Roman empire
should no longer reckon by Olympiads but by Indictions. Theif
name perhaps was borrowed from some tax that was paid to the
emperors every fifteenth year ; for indictio signifieth a tribute or tax.
The Golden Mumber is a revolution of 19 years, which was
invented by Meto the Athenian, in order to reconcile the lunar
to the solar year ; at the expiration of which term of 19 years it
was found that the moons returned to the same days, and that
the moon recommenced her course with the sun, within an hour
and some minutes. And this was called the goldgn number, either
for its excellence and great utility, or because, according to
some, the inhabitants of Alexandria sent it to the Romans in a
silver calendar, on which those numbers from I to 19 were in gold
letters. This number was likewise called the great lunar
Cycle, or decennoveimalis, and IwraJexalw^/j of 19 years, or Me-
tonicus, from the name of its author ; and has been of great use
in the ecclesiastic calendar, to shew the epacts and the new moons, '
R 2 since
244 Paktic. Observ. Chap. IV. Book VIIL
since tlie council of Nice had ordained that the feast of Easter
should be celebrated the first Sunday after the full moon in March.
3. Of the Solar Cycle, and the Dominical Letters.
Tlie SOLAR Cycle, or the dominical letters, is a revolution
of 28 years, at the end of which the same dominical letters revert
again in the same order.
To understand this properly we are to observe, that as the
year is composed of months and weeks, every day of the month is
marked out in the calendar by its cypher, or by one of the follow-
ing seven letters, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the first beginning the
first day of the year, and the others continuing in a constant round
to the end.
Hence those letters would invariably distinguish each feria or
day of the week, as they are invariable in regard to the days of
the month, if the year had exactly but a certain number of weeks ;
so that as A always signifies the 1st of Januar}'^, B the 2d, C the 3d,
in like manner A would always stand for Sunday ; B, for Monday,
&c. But by reason the year has at least 365 days, which make
52 weeks, and a day over, it happens to end with the same day
of the week as it began; and therefore the next year begins not
with the same, but with the following day. That is, as the next
year. 1651 begins with a Sunday, it will finish also with a Sunday,
consequently the following year 1652 will begin with a Monday.
And thence it comes of course that the letter A, which always
answers to the first of January, having stood for Sunday one year
(which is being the Dominical Letter), it will stand only for
Monday the next year, in which of course the G will be the do-
minical letter or characteristic of Sunday : and so for the rest.
Hereby it appears that if the year had only 365 days, this circle
of dominical letters would terminate in seven years, by retrogres-
sion, G, r, E, D, C, B, A. Biit because from four to four years
there is a bissextile, which has one day extraordinary, two things
ensue from thence.
The first, that this bissextile year hath two dominical letters,
whereof one serves from the 1st of January to the 25th of Febru-
ary, and the other from thence to the end of the year. The rea-
son of wliich is extremely clear, for reckoning the sixth of the ca-
lends twice, it follows, that the letter F, which answers to that
day, is also reckoned twice, and therefore it fills two days of the
week, the consequence of which is, that the letter which had hi-
therto fallen on the Sunday, falls now on the Monday, and the
precedent by retrogression takes its place in order to be the charac-
teristic of Sunday.
The second thing that follows from thence is, that as there are
thus two dominical letters every fourth year, the circle of these
letters does not terminate in seven {years, as it otherwise would ;
but in four times seven years, which make twenty-eight. And this
is exactly what they call the solar cycle, which before the refor-
mation of the calendar, began with a bissextile year, the dominical
letters of which were G, F.
§ 4. The
OF THE Julian Period, S^c, 245
4. The Julian Period, the Sabbatic Years, a Jubileey
an Age.
The Julian Pbriod is formed of tliose three cycles or revo-
lutions multiplied into one another, that is of 15 for the indiction,
of 19 for the golden number, and of 28 for the dominical letters;
which make 79S0 years. The use of this period is very com-
mon among chronologers, and of vast advantage for marking the
time with certainty ; because in all that great number of years, it
is impossible to find one that has all the same cycles as another*,
for instance 1. the cycle of the sun, 2. the cycle of the moon,
and 3. the cycle of indiction. This period was invented by Jo-
seph Scaliger, and is called Julian, from its being adapted to the
Julian year, and composed of three cycles which are proper to
that year.
The Jews reckoned their years by weeks, of which the seventh
was called Sabbatic, during which they were not allowed to till
the land, and their slaves were to be set at liberty. They had
likeVvise their years of Jubilee or remission, which was every
50th, or according to some every 49th year; so that every jubilee
year was likewise sabbatic, but more solemn than the rest ; and the
years of both terms, that is, of the preceding and following jubi-
lee, were likewise included in the number 50. And then each
estate, and whatever had been alienated, was to revert to its former
master.
The word Age, which is frequently used, includes the space of
one hundred entire years, according to Festus. Servius observeth,
that scBculum, which we render age, was also taken sometimes for
the space of thirty years, sometimes for a hundred and ten years,
and sometimes for a thousand.
5. Of Epochas, and the word Mum.
We may likewise take notice of the diffei'ent Epochas, which
are certain principles, as it were, and fixed points, that chronolo-
gers make use of for the computation of years ; these they like-
wise call JErje, from a corrupt word taken in the feminine for the
neuter ccra, a name they gave to the little nails of brass, with
which they distinguished the accounts and number of years.
The most remarkable of all is that of the birth of Christ, as
settled by Dionysius Exiguus, which commences in the month of
January of the 4714'th year of the Julian period, and is that which
we make use of.
That of the Olympiads begins 776 years before the birth of
our Saviour.
That of the foundation of Rome of the year 752 before Christ,
according to the most probable opinion.
And several others, which may be eeen in those who treat more
diffusely of these matters.
( 245 )
BOOK IX.
Of letters,
AjuI the Ortliography and Fronunciation of the
Antlents.
Wlierein is shewn the aiitient manner of pronouncing
. the Latin tongue, and occasion is taken to point
out also the right manner of pronouncing the
Greek.
Extracted from the best treatises both of antient and
modern xvriters on this subject.
'^I^IIE Reader may consult what hath been said in regard
X to Letters in the GENERAL AND RATIONAL
GRAMMAR. * But hei-e we follow a different order in favour
of beginners. For whereas, one would imagine, that we ought
to set out with a treatise of letters, as the least constituent part of
words, and consequent!}' of speech ; and afterwards proceed to
quantity and pronunciation, before we entered upon the analogy
of the parts of speech, and the syntax or construction which in-
cludes their arrangement; we have reserved the two former parts
for the present treatise, after having previously discoursed of the
other two ; not only Air this reason, that there can be nothing more
serviceable to those who begin to learn a language, than to intro-
duce them immediately intd the practical part, but likewise because
there are several things in those two latter parts which suppose
some progress, and knowledge of the former.
And indeed if tlie point be only to know how to assemble the
letters, children ought to be well acquainted with this, when they
enter upon the study of languages, and therefore they have no oc-
casion here for any instructions about it ; which made Quintilian
say that this is beneath the office of a grammarian. But if we
would examine this point with any degree of accuracy, and develop
the several difficulties that entangle the subject, we shall find the
truth of the following remark of an antient writer;
Fronte exile neiiutium
Et di^num piteris pntes,
Aggiessis labor arduus. Terenlian. Maurus.
But I hope this labour will not be unprofitable, since it may con^
tribute, as Quintilian saith, not only to sharpen the ivits of young
people, but likewise to try the abilities of those ivho are more advanced.
And I persuade myself that it will help to demonstrate the
* A translation of this work was lately published by F. Wingrave, Successor
to J, Nourse iu the Strand.
nature
■ Of letters, <^^c. Q4>7
nature and mutual relation of letters; which is indeed the ground-
work of pronunciation and orthography ; the reason of the quan-
tity of syllables and dialects ;_^the surest way of arguing from the
analogy and etymology of words ; and frequently serves as a clue
to find our way through the most corrupt passages of the antients,
while it shews us the manner of restoring them to their genuine
sense and purity.
Chapter I.
Of the Number, Order, and Division of Letters.
THEY generally reckon three-and-twenty letters in the Latin
alphabet. But, on the one hand, K being hardly any
loiiger of use, and the I and U being not only vowels, but also
consonants, and thus forming two new letters, as consonants, which
the most skilful printers distinguish even from I and U vowel, by
writing J consonant with a tail, and the V consonant with a sharp
point, even in the middle of words ; it would he better to reckon
twenty-four letters in the alphabet, giving the Hebrew names Jod
and Van to the J and V consonant.
Thus of these twenty-four letters there are six vowels, that is,
which have a distinct sound by themselves, and can by themselves
form a syllable ; and eighteen consonants, that is, which have need
of a vowel to form an articulate sound and compose a syllable.
The six vowels are A, E, I, O, U, and Y.
Of the eighteen consonants, X and Z, as pronounced by the
antients, are properh^ no more than abbreviations ; X being only
a c and an 5 ; and Z a (/ and an s, as we shall demonstrate presently.
For which reason they are called double letters.
Of the sixteen remaining there are four called liquids or gliding
letters, L, R, M, N ; though, ^operly speaking, none but L
and R deserve that name, the other two, especially M, being hardly
gliding.
There are ten which may be called mutes, and divided into
three classes, according to the relation they have to one another,
and as they may more easily be changed one for the other, thus,
( B, P, F, V.
Mutes J C, Q, G,J.
( D, T.
Of the two remaining S makes a class by itself, only that we
may join it to X and Z, as it constitutes the principal part of the
double letters. And those three may be called hissing letters, though
it is a fault in some to give them too hissing a sound.
In regard to H, it is only an aspiration, though it ought not to
be struck out of the order of letters, as hereafter we shall more
particularly observe.
This is, in my opinion, the clearest and most useful division of
letters. As to the distinction of consonants into semi-vowels and
mutes.
248
NEW METHOD. Book IX,
mutes, whosoever will take pains to examine into the matter, must
find that this half sound which he gives to the semi- vowels, L, M,
N, R, S, X, does not proceed from their nature, hut only from
the vowel which he prefixes to them in telling over the alphabet,
el, cm, cr, es, ex ; for if it had been customary to prefix the vowel
to all the others which they call mutes, and say eb, cc, cd, &c. they
would have an half sound as well as the precedent. And it is easy
to shew that it was merely through caprice, and without any solid
reason, that the Latins prefixed the vowel to some letters rather
than others.
1. Because the Hebrews and Greeks, of whom the Romans
borrowed their alphabet, have always begun with a consonant in
naming those letters in general.
2. Because x being composed of c and 5, it is evident that
according to reason it ought rather to be pronounced alter the
manner of the Greeks cii, than ecs^ as it is generally sounded,
•which is difficult and disagreeable, not only to young people, but to
grown-up persons.
3. The F has so great an affinity with the Greek ip, that, the ^
being a mute, there is no reason to think but F was a mute likewise,
and 3'et they put a vowel before ef.
Upon the whole there is room to believe that this distinction
ought not to be minded, though we retain the name of mutes in
opposition to that of liquids, and not of semi-vowels. Therefore
letters may be divided into
Vowels
("open,
(shut,
Liquids,
\A, E, T.
JO, U, Y.
L, 11.
1
M, N.
Consonants,
Mutes,
Hissing,
Aspiration,
F,V.
G.J.
\X, Z.
I 11.
}
}
}
10
3
I
24
Chapter II.
Of Vozvels in general, as long or short.
THERE is no one article in which the moderns have varied
more from the pronunciation of the antients than in this.
For the distinction ottlie vowels, long or short, on which depends
the whole quantity of syllables, save only those which are long by
position, is now no more observed, except on the penultima of
\vords of more than two syllables.
Thus
Of letters, ^c. 249
Thus in pronouncing amabam and circumdabam, it is plain that
ma is long in the first word, and da short in the second. But in
pronouncing dabam and stabam, it is impossible to tell whether the
first s}'llable of either be short or long. In sounding legimus in the
present, and legimus in the preterite, we give no mark that the c
in the first syllable of the present is short, and in the preterite
is long. Reciting mensa in the nominative, and mensa in the abla-
tive, one cannot judge whether the last be short in one, and long in
the other.
Now the antients, in uttering those vowels, distinguished exactly
the long and short ones, wheresoever they occurred. Hence
St. Austin takes notice, that when we find this passage in writing,
Non est absconditum a te os mev.m, it is impossible to tell at first whe-
ther the of this word os be long or short; but it' it be pronounced
short, it comes from os, ossis ; and if it be pronounced long, it
comes from os, oris. And this without doubt added greatly to
the beauty of versification. For which reason the same Father says
likewise, that in this verse of Virgil,
Anna virumque cano, Trojce qui primus ab oris,
if we were to put primis, the last of which is long, instead of pn-
mzis, where it is short, the ear would be offended, and cease to find
the same harmony. And yet there is no ear, however, so delicate,
that, without knowing the rules of Latin quantity, and hearing
this verse recited with primus ab oris, or primis ab oris, would be
able to distinguish any thing that gave offence more in one than the
other.
The antients also observed this distinction of long or short
vowels in their writing, in which they frequently doubled the
vowel, to denote a long syllable ; which Quintilian acknowledged
to have been practised till the time of Attius.
Sometimes they inserted an k between these two vowels, in order
to strengthen the pronunciation, as Aliala for Ala or Aala ; and,
after dropping the first A, they likewise made Hala ; for this is
still the same noun, though some learned men have been dubious
about it.
And it is for this same reason that we find in the antients mehe
for mee or me long, mehecum for niecum, and the like; just as we
say vehemens for veemeyis ; prehendo for preendo ; and mihi for the
antient mi or mii.
But afterwards, for the sake of brevity, they were satisfied
with drawing only a small stroke over the vowel, to shew it was
long, thus A, E, O, U. Though for the vowel I they never
\ased this mark, as we shall shew hereafter. And hence it is
that we still meet with totiens for toties, quotiens, vicensimus, for-
monsus, aquonsus, and such like ; which is owing entirely, as Lip-
sius observes, to the ignorance of transcribers, who took this small
stroke for a tittle, that stood for an n or an m, as is still practised,
not knowing that among the antients it served only as a mark of
quantity.
250 NEW M E T II O D. Book IX.
CllAPTKR III.
T
Of' Vowels in particular. And particularly of thoie
that are called open.
n E three first vowels, A, E, I, are called open, because
in pronouncing them the mouth ought to be opened wider
than in pronouncing the rest.
I. Of A.
Notliing more remains to be said of the A, after what hath
been mentioned iu the preceding chapter, except that this vowel
hath a relation and affinity with a great many others, as we shall
see in the sequel. We may further observe that it is the most open
of them all, as the most simple, and the easiest to pronounce ; for
which reason it is with this that children begin their alphabet. So
that if we do but rightly consider the natural order of those yovyels,
we shall find, that from this, which is the most open, they diminish
gradually down to the U, which is the most shut, and which of all
the vowels has the greatest need of the motion of the lips to pro-
nounce it.
II. (y E.
There is scarce a letter that admits of more different sounds in
all languages than this ; particularly in French. We may take notice
of three of those sounds which sometimes occur in a single word,
as/^rmd6', netlete^ brevete. Sec. The first is an c which I call open,
because it is pronounced with the mouth open. The second is
generally called obscure and mute, because it has a weaker sound
than the rest ; or feminine, because it serves to form the feminirte
rhymes in French metre. And the third, opposite to this, is called
e clear, or masculine ; as also e shut : it is frequently marked with a
small accent over it to distinguish it from the rest.
Besides this the French language hath another, which is pro-
nounced like an «, and therefore ought rather to be called an a,
since the figure is quite accidental in regard to letters : and perhaps
it would be better to write it with an n, were it not for point-
ing out the derivation of words in the original languages. As
Empereur for Ampcreur, because it comes from Invperator ; en for an,
because it comes from in ; pendre ior pandre, because it comes from
pendere ; grandement,foriement, dijfficilement, &c. nient for mant^ be-
cause they come from the Italian.
But as for the other open e, which some make use of, as in bete,
Jete, tele, or with an S, hcste, feste, teste, we ought to look upon
it as the same with the first e "in brevete, fennele, &c. from which-
it hardly differs, except in some length of quantity or accent."
This seems to be well illustrated by the comparison of these
two words, fer, and/crT-e, where this e, which becomes longer ii)'
the first svilable of the second word, is nevertheless the same as
that
Of letters, §c. 251
that of the first word. And therefore we may reduce all the French
E's to tluee, or at nnost to four, if we likewise include that which
is sounded as an A ; and these four different sounds may be observed
in a single word, as Deterrenient.
But the latter, which is called the long and open e, and appears
particularly in these words, bele, Jtle^ tete, &c. properly corre-
sponds with the Greek eta, whose sound it perfectly represents,
since the aforesaid eta was introduced on purpose to distinguish the
long E, saying /3^t«, as if it were beeta. Which made Eustathius
say that ^n^-h, bee bee, expresseth perfectly well the bteating of the
sheep ; wherein he is supported by the authority of the antient poet
Cratinus. So that it is really amazing, there should be people
who still pronounce it like an i, contrary to the general analogy of
the language, since Simonides, who invented the two long vowels
n and u, did it with no other intent than to make them correspond
to the two short ones e and o ; contrary to the unanimous opinion
of all the antients, and the testimony of the ablest writers of the
latter ages ; and contrary, in short, to the standing practice of the
best scholars both in France and other nations ; which might be fur-
ther evinced by a great number of authorities and arguments,
drawn from the comparison of all languages, if it had not been
already sufficiently demonstrated by those who before us have
handled the subject.
'On the contrary, the e shut expresseth the Greek ItJ/z^o'v, like
the last in Jermete. And the other, which is between both, gives
a particular grace to the French language, the like of which is not
to be found in any other ■ for it forms the feminine rhymes in verse,
as when they say Jerme, terms, &c.
But it is very remarkable that this E, which constitutes almost
one half of the French rhymes, hardly ever occurs twice successively
in the same word, except in a few compounds, as devenir, revenir^
remener, eutretenir, contrepeser, &c. and even here it is not at the
end of the words. For which reason in verbs that have an E fet
minine in the penultima of the infinitive, as peser, mener, it is
changed into an open e in those tenses which finish with this E
feminine: so that they say, celu se phe, il me mene, as if it were
paise, maine, &c. And in the first persons which end with this
same E feminine, it is changed into an E masculine in interroga-
tions, because of the pronoun je which follows and is joined to it,
and which hath also an e feminine. Thus we say, faime, je joile,
je prie. But in interrogating we say, Joiie-je? nime-je? prie-jef
And if, to facihtate the pronunciation on those and other occar
sions, people would only accustom themselves to put some little mark
on the e feminine, as it is customary to put under the 9 in parti-
cular words, it would be distinguished from the e masculine, which
has its mark over it, and the plain letter e might remain for what
we call the e mute and obscure. And thus we might effectuate, al-
most without any trouble, such a distinction in orthography and pro-
nunciation, as may be deemed perhaps of all others the most ne-
cessary in the French language, since v/e see daily that not only fo-
reigners, but even those who are versed in the language, are mis-
taken and puzzled in the distinction of those two e's.
i52 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX.
The Latins had also their different sounds of this letter. They
had their E long and open, wliich answered to the Greek Eta, and
for that reason was frequently doubled, as we see in medals and
antient inscriptions, /ee/ix, seedes, <S:c.
The second was like the E short and shut of the French, and
answered to the Greek l-^^iXoi. And these two differences of
the E are plainly marked in the writings of the antients. E voca-
lis, says Capella, duarum Grcecarum vim possidet. Nam cum corri-
pitur E, Grcccum eat, ut ab hoste ; Ciim producitur, eta est, nt ab
hoc die.
But beside this, there was a middle sound between the E and
the I. Whence Varro ohserveth, that they used to say veam for
viam : and Festus, that they said me for mi or mihi : and Quin-
tilian, that they put an E for an I in JMrnerva, Lcbevy Magester, and
that Livy wrote sehe and quase : and Donatus, that by reason of
the affinity of these two letters, the antients made no scruple to
say Iteri and here, mane and mani, vespere and vesperi, &c. Hence
we still find in antient inscriptions, navebus, exemet, ornavet, cepet,
Deana, mereto, soledas, and the like. And, as we have elsewhere
observed, from thence also ariseth the change of those two vowels
in so many nouns, either in the nominative, as impnbes and impubis,
pulix and piilex, cinis and cinet; &c. or in the accusative, as pelvem
cr petvim ; or in the ablative, sl& nave or navi, and the like nouns
of the third declension ; and in the second Dii for Dei. Concern-
ing which see what has been said in the first volume, when treating
of the Declensions.
The fourth E of the French, which is put for A, was also found
among the Latins; whence Quintilian witnesseth that Cato wrote
indifferently dicam or dicem,Jaciam or faciem. And hence, with-
out doubt, it comes that the A of the present tense is so frequently
changed into E, either in the preterite, as facio, feci ; ago, cgi ;
jacio,Jeci, &c. or in compounds, as arcco, co'erceo ; dnmno, condem-
no; spargo, aspergo, &c. To this also it is owing that they said
halore for belare (to bleat) which is still to be found in Varro, 1. de
R. 11. cap. 2. luccstiis for iiicafstus ; talenium ior rxXtxylov ; damnum
for demnian, from dimirmo, according to Varro. I'rom this same
cause it proceeds that we meet with so many words written with E
or A in antient authors and in the old glossaries, as ccquiperare for
(Equiparare. Condamnare for cundem-)iare, V. Gloss. JJef'etigari for
defatigari, Varr. FJJligi for ajjligi, Charis. Expars for cxpers, ocfAoipoc,
v. Gloss. Expertcc for cxpartcc or effceicc, Varr. Imbarbis for imber- .
bis, V. Gloss. Inars, artyvoi, for ttiers, id, liejKrare for reparare,
whence comes rpcM^^/rtrf, and the like.
But it is further observable that the E had likewise some affinity
with the O, as we shall shew hereafter ; and even with the U.
Whence cometh diu for die, lucu for litce, alhtx for a II ex, the great
toe, dcjero for dejuro, Nepturnis for Nuptunus, a nubendo terram, id
est operiendo, according to Cicero, Brundusium for (S^cvr-naiov, idcus
for iXkos. And hence it comes that the verbs in EO make UI,
moneOf tnomti ; doceo, docui, &c.
in. 0/
Of letters, S^c, 255
III. O/I.
Tlie I, as we have already observed, was the only vowel over
which they did not draw a stroke to mark its being long ; which is
further proved by the authority of Scaurus. But in order to shew
the quantity thereof, they lengthened it in the nature of a capital
letter among the rest pIso, vIvus, ^dIlis, and the like. Where-
fore an:iong all the letters it was called long by Synecdoche.
Hence it is that in the Aulidaria of Plautus, when Staphilus
wants to hang himself, he says that he wanted to make a long letter
of himself.
ex yne unamfaciam litteram
Longam, meiim quando laqueo collum obstrinxero.
This is the explication that Lipsius gives of it, which seems far
more rational than that of Lambinus, who understands it of all
sorts of capital letters ; not considering that the Romans had no
small ones, and that among the capitals, this alone surpassed the
rest.
But if we should be asked whether the I was not also doubled
like the other vowels, to signify the long quantity, Lipsius an-
swereth, that absolutely speaking, it was not. And this is the
opinion of the most learned critics, though we meet with some
examples to the contrary, perhaps by corruption, as diviI Au«
gustI, is an inscription in the reign of Augustus.
As therefore the I by its length alone was equivalent to ii m
quantity, so it has happened frequently to be put for two real ii^
that is, which ought to be expressed in discourse, as de manibIs,
for manibiis. dIs manibus, for Diis Manibus. And to this are
owing those contractions which are looked upon as established in
the writings of poets, Di for Dei, ott for otiiy urbem Patavi, for
Patavii, Virg. and the like.
But the antients marked likewise the quantity of this letter by
the diphthong ei, as Victorinus observeth ; so that it was the same
thing to put Divl, or divei, and the like, the long I and ei hav-
ing the same, or at least a very similar sound. This is so far true,
that Priscian thought it was the only way to mark the long 1;
though what has been above mentioned, sufficiently sheweth there
was another.
And this pronunciation of ei was become so common among
them, that they even gave it to the short words. This shews that
it was not perhaps so much a mark of quantity, as of a fuller and
more agreeable sound, which sufficiently appears from some verses
out of Lucilius, which 1 shall presently produce, and which made
this its medium betwixt the two vowels, of which we have taken
notice above. Hence it is, that in old copies we still find omneis,
not only for omnes in the plural, but moreover for omuis in the
singular, and others in the same manner.
And indeed there is no manner of writing, says Victorinus,
about which there have been such disputes among the antients, as
-this. Lucilius and Varro endeavoured to distinguish it, by laying
down as a rule to put i only iu the singular, and ei in the plural :
60
254 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
so as to say hujns piieri, amici, &c. and in the plural, fii puerei, ami'
cei, &c. And likewise in the dative i//i with i only, but in the
nominative plural il/ei with ei. This is proved from the following
verses out of Lucilius :
Jam puerei venere, E postremumjacito atqiie I.
Ut plures puerei Ji ant, &c.
Hoc iWiJiictiim uni, tenue hocjacies I.
HdC \\\c\fecere, addes, E, ut pinguius fiat.
With the rest which may be seen in Joseph Scaliger, who extracted
them partly from Quintilian, and partly from Victorinus, where
it is observable, as 1 have mentioned, that this writing with ei, for-
merly made a fuller sound ; since he says, ut pinguius Jiat.
Quintilian nevertheless finds fault with this manner of writing,
as well because he says it is superfluous, as also because it is only apt
to confound those who begin to learn to read. Whence we may
conclude that the pronunciation had changed, and that there was
no longer any difference betwixt ei and i. This made Lipsius say,
that it is idle now to dispute, whether we ought to write omneis or
omnis, puertis or puer is ; since according to Quintilian there was
not the least difference between those two sounds in the Latin lan-
guage. Concerning which see what we shall further say in the
5th chap. n. 3. treating of this diphthong.
Chapter IV.
Of the three last Vowels, zvh'ich are called shut.
TH E three last vowi-ls are O, U, Y. They are called shut,
because in pronouncing them the mouth is not opened so
wide as in pronouncing the others.
l.OfO.
The O by its two sounds, long and short, perfectly represented
the Greek omega and omicron, the pronunciation of which was very
different, says Caninius after Tercntianus. For the u was pro-
nounced in the hollow of the mouth with a full and thick sound,
as including two oo ; and the omicron was pronounced on the edge
of the lips with a clearer and more slender sound.
The French have these two ways of pronouncing, expressing the
long O by the addition of an S, coste, fioste, which are different
from cotle, liotte, motlc ; or by the diphthong «^^ haide,J'aide, &c.
The affinity between this vowel o and the French diphthong an,
is not without example among the Greeks, who say «i/Aa| or
Z>M^, sufcu.s ; Tfiocvfjia. or rpa/fAx, according to the Dorics, whence
it is that the Liuins have also caiidex or codex, caitrns, or corus, &c.
And hence it is perhaps that as this diphthong an partook greatly
of the A, so the O had also some affinity with A. For the vEo-
lians said ^piros for s^§ol■ro!, cxercitus ; ovu for uvu, supra. Which the
Latins have likewise imitated, borrowing domo from ^a^iD, and
saying Fabius for Fovius, according to Festus; Farreus for for reus,
&c. And in French the A and O are oftentimes joined in the same
word, lafjn,Jaon, paon, which are prououDced with a long A, lartf-
Of letters, ^c. 2,55
farii pan / though Ramus takes notice that in his time some
marked the long O with these two letters AO, which they did
perhaps in iinitation of the Greeks, who change «o or aw, as well as
ea, into w long in their contractions.
The O hath likewise an affinity with the E ; hence it is that of
>,iya>, dico, the Greeks have made XiXoyx, dixi, and the like;
that the ^olians said r^ni/.ioi for r^ifjLu, tremo, that the Latins of
o-vriy^u, libo, made spondeo i of pendeo, pondus ; of tego, toga ; and
they say ndversum or advorsiim ; vertex or vortex ; nccipiter for
accipitor, or acceptor, U^x^, according to Festus, a bird of prey j
hemo for hojuo ; ambe for nnibes, for ambo and ambos, in Ennius :
exporrectus for cxperrectus, &c. Hence also it is that there are so
many adverbs in E and in O, vere and vera, tute and tuto, nimie
and nimio, cotidic and cotidio, rare and raro, in Charisius, and such
like. And it is by this very analogy, that the nouns in US make,
i6me the genitive in ERIS, as vidnus, vulneris, and others ORIS,
«s peons, pecoris ; stercus, sferceris, and slcrcoris. See. And that the
verbs have a reduplication in E and O, as momordi for memordi,
spopondi for spepcmdi, &c.
But the O had still a much greater affinity with the U. Hence
it is that the antients, says Longus, were apt to confound those
two letters ; and though according to him, they wrote consol with
an O, yet they pronounced consul with an U. And Gassiodorus
informs us that they wrote prccstu for prcesto ; pobliciim for publi-
cuvi ; colpam fov culpam, &c. Pliny in Priscian tells us the same
thing, and thence it is that we say hue, Uliic, for hoc, illoc, which
Virgil himself hath made use of.
Hoc tunc ignipotens ccelo descendit ah alto, Mn. 8.
Which is likewise proved by Servius on this passage. And Quin-
tilian observeth that they said, Hecoba, riotrix, with an a for an u ;
that of Odysseus, the iEolians made Udijssens, whence the Latins-
had borrowed Uli/ssetis. And in short his tutors had wrote Servom
with an o, whereas in his time they wrote it with two uu, though
neither of those writings did perfectly express the sound which
struck the ear.
II. Of v.
From what has been said it plainly appeareth that the U had a
very full sound, which bordered very .much on the O. And Te-
rentianus expressly declared that the U filled the sound of the
diphthong OT. In vain does Lipsius, as well as Vossius, pre-
tend that this pronunciation was only for the U long, and that
the short one was pronounced like an v-^iKov, that is like a French
u. For Priscian teacheth the contrary, and doubtless his autho-
rity is preferable to their's on this occasion. And in regard to the
argument which they draw from a passage of Varro's, which says
that they pronounced /z<2Y in the present, differently from hat in
the preterite ; we shall shew hereafter, in the treatise of accents, that
this difference was only in the quantity, and not in the sound.
And if any body should still doubt of this truth, we might fur-
ther produce the authority of antient marbles and inscriptions,
v.hich being written according to the simple pronunciation, have -
frequently ou for u, not only in long %vords, as loumen, nountios, '
\
S56 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
but likewise in the short, as fouom, Jbiio, &c. And Jbtnt for fuit
is in Gellius, lib. 1. c. 12. according as we find it in the edition
of H. Stephen, esteemed by all the learned. And it is without
foundation that Vossius attempts to correct it.
Besides, we find that Ausoniu?, speaking of the sound of this
Towel, does not make this distinction, but says absolutely,
Cecropiis ignota notis,Jerale sonans U.
Where mentioning that there is no such sound among the Greeks,
he plainly gives to understand that it could not have the sound of
it-^iXov; as on the other hand he has sufficiently pointed out the
natural sound of this letter by the word Jhrale, whereby he meant
the note of the cuckoo, or of the night owl, to which a parasite
in Plautus alludeth, where he says,
Tu, TU, illic inqiiam, vin' adferri noctuam,
QucE TU, TU usque dicattibi? nam nos jam nos usque defessisumus.
Which perfectly represents the sound of the U like on, according
to the note of that wild and well known bird.
And if any body should object that Cicero in his book de Ora-
tore takes notice that heretofore they wrote .Phruges and Piirrhus
without Greek letters, and therefore that the u on those occasions
had the sound of v\)/<Xoy : I answer that on the contrary, writing
Purrhus, they pronounced according to the value of the letters
Pourrhous ; as we see an infinite number of words, which passing from
one language to another, assume the sound as well as figure of the
language they pass to. And this answer is agreeable to Quintilian,
when he says, Furtusse etiam quemadmodum scribebant, ita &/■ loque-
bantur. Though we may likewise say that perhaps sometimes they
erroneously pronounced the u like an upsilon, and put it in the stead
of v\J//Xr5v. But then this was no longer a Latin u, but a real
Greek Y in power, though not in figure, which is merely acci-
dental to all sorts of letters.
And thus we arc to understand the verses of Terentianus, which
Vossius endeavoureth to wrest to another meaning, where he says
of the three common vowels among the Greeks, namely, a, /, «;
Tcttiam Romana lingua quam vacant Y non habet,
Hujus in locum, vidctur U Lntina subdita :
Quce vicem nobis rependil interim vacantis Y,
Qtumdn communcm reddit Latino S^ Grccco sonum.
For since he formally declares that this third vowel Y does not
belong to the Latin tongue, he plainly sheweth that the Latin
U was not sounded like the Greek Y, because otherwise he would
have had no reason to say that the Romans were without this letter.
And adding that the U was sometimes put instead of this Greek
Y, "when, says he, it made a sound that ivas common both to Greeks
and Latins, he lets us know that this U was put there improperly
and instead of the Greek Y, whicli was owing merely to the am-
bition of the Romans, who made use of Latin characters, that they
might seem to borrow nothing of the Greeks. Thus it is that Cas-
siodorus observes they wrote Suria for S^ria ; and Donatus that
they put sura for syra.
Longus mentions the same thing, adding nevertheless that it is
better to use the Y in those Greek words. Which shews that they
Of letters, c^c- ^2.51
had still retained the sound thereof, even when they made use of
the U. For if the U, as a Latin letter, might have been sounded
as the Greek Y, that is, like the French U, which is much
softer than that of the Latin OU, Quintilian would not have said
that in the word Zephyris, for instance, there ivere two letters, (the
Z and the Y, which he calls jucundissimas litteras) •which the
Romans had not, but. were obliged to borrow of the Greeks whenever
they wanted to make use of Greek words, because if theij had attempted
to write them with Latin letters, this would have produced a rough
and barbarous sound, lib. 12. c. 10.
If after all this there can be any doubt that the real pronun-
ciation of the Latin U was that of the French diphthong ou, we
need only to observe the manner in which it is pronounced by the
modern Italians. And should it be imagined that this U might
sometimes have the sound of the Greek Y in Latin ; then the
Greeks in all probability must have been very much in the wrong,
when in making use of Latin words they had recourse to « to ex-
press the force of the Latin U, when they needed only to have
wrote their y\J/<?io'».
To this genuine sound of the Latin U it is owing, as already
hath been mentioned, that it was so frequently changed into O,
as volt for vult, &c. because the U being pronounced like the
French ou, it greatly partook of the nature of O. And for this
same reason these two letters are so often changed for one another
in analogy. For from roOur cometh roboris, from dominum in the
singular cometh dominos in the plural, and the like.
But it is to be observed, that we still retain something of this
antient pronunciation of the U in those words where it is followed
by an M or an N. Dominum, dederunt, &c. This is owing to the
natural property of those two consonants, which produce a very
particular sound, and are always pronounced broader and fuller,
let them be joined with whatever vowel they will: it being the
same thing, according to Quintilian, to say servom, as seivum, or
servoum. Though we have lost this pronunciation in some words
when the 7i is followed by a c, as nunc, tunc, hunc, cunctis, and de-
Junctis in the Church service.
But if it should be asked whether the U had entirely the same
sound as the diphthong a, we may answer it had not, but some-
thing very like it ; because the diphthongs, as the word implies,
were productive of a double sound composed of two vowels, as
we see in the French diphthongs, del, beau, mien, &c. though of
one syllable. This was not the case of the U, vv'hich had but one
though a full sound. And this is the opinion of Ramus, for other-
wise, he says, it would have passed for a diphthong. Hence we see
that Joseph Scaliger had no right to find fault with Ausonius for
saying in this verse,
Cecropiis ignota notisjerale sonans U,
that the sound of this U, which is ou, was unknown to the Greeks,
because the sound of the diphthong ou was not altogether the
same. '
Vol. H. . S But
258 NEW M E T H O D. Book IX.
But besides this natural pronunciation of the U, there was an-
other, according to Quintilian, that had a middle sound, as it were,
between I and U, which was the reason oi its being variously
written : and thence it is that we still meet with nptimus or optumiiSy
))iaxi»ius or vxnxumas, vwnimentiim or monuincntum, Sec. And the
antient inscriptions abound with these variations, stupendium for
itipendium, auritfex for aurifex ; and in like manner we say, capulum
ensis, the hilt, from capio ; clipeus for clupeus ; exut for exil, from
exilium ; facul for facile ; lubet for libel ; manibicc for manuhice ;
olitare for wlutare, Varr. and the like.
III. 0/Y.
There is hardly any thing further to be said in regard to this
sixth vowel, after what has been observed upon this head, when
speaking of the U ; we are only to take notice that it was always
used in Greek nouns, and pronounced very near in the same
manner as the French U, which has a middle sound between the
Latin i and u.
The French particularly make use of this letter Y in all words
ending in i/, as epi/,Jbuni7/y garni/, &c. though they have lost its
sound, for they always pronounce it as an i. And this pronun-
ciation they have even introduced into the Latin tongue, where
there is in some measure a necessity for tolerating it because of
its being established by custom ; but it is by no means to be ad-
mitted into the Greek language, where the v-^i'^ov ought to be
pronounced like a French U : which is demonstrated by all the
antient and modern grammarians, and may be further corrobo-
rated by an invincible argument, borrowed from those words
which are formed by the imitation of sound, to signify the cries
of animals. For it is beyond doubt that when we say trAaxr/^e;*,
ululare, /xyxa^t/y, mugire, rvi^ei*, grunnire, the original intent was
not to convey the sound of an I, but of an U, as the vowel that
borders nearest on the cry of those animals.
Therefore it may be observed here in general, that use being
the mistress of living languages, and the Latin being now adopted
by the Church, and in every body's mouth, it would be imprudent
to change the pronunciation of it in things universally received.
But in regard to the Greek tongue, as it is confined to a small
number of literati, it seems to be wronging their abilities to sa}',
either that they are ignorant of the genuine pronunciation of the
antients, of which so many learned men have wrote express trea-
tises, or that knowing it, they make a difficulty to conform thereto ;
since it is now received by the most learned of every nation : and
were it not for this (as hath been observed by Sir John Cheke,
the king's professor in England, who wrote a learned dissertation
on this subject above a hundred years ago), we should be deprived
of the whole beauty of the analogy of this language, whether in
regard to the numerousness of periods, and the cadence of verse,,
or to the surprising relation which the words have to each other
in the declensions, conjugations, augments, dialects, and inter-
changing
Of letters, fc ^59
changing of letters : which shews a most beautiful proportion in
the whole, and greatly facilitates the principles to those who have
a mind to learn the Greek tongue.
Chapter V.
Of Diphthongs.
WE join the diphthongs to the vowels as the whole to its
parts. Lipsius calls them Bivocales, double vowels,
because they are compounded of two vowels : and it may be ob-
served that there are eight in Latin, ]E, cetas, AI, Maia, AU,
audioy EI, e'ia, EU, eurus, OE, pcena, 01, Troia, UI, harpu'in.
For in this word there is a Greek diphthong, says Servius, though
some write it also with a Y only, harpya.
These diphthongs used to be pronounced with a double sound,
as their name implieth : but the two vowels were not distinguished
alike, one being sometimes weaker, and the other stronger.
I. Of the Diphthongs M and AI.
Therefore in cs and ai, the first vowel had its full and complete
sound, because the A of itself is stronger than the other vowels,
and never loseth the advantage it has over them in pronouncing,
as Plutarch witnesseth in his treatise of banquets: on the contrary
the latter had a much weaker sound, as may be experienced in
Aiax. Hence it was that oftentimes they did not distinguish whe-
ther it was an E or an I, and for this reason they wrote hereto-
fore with an AI, what afterwards they came to write with an M,
viusai for muscB ; Kaisar for Kcesar^ whencfe the Germans and Fle-
mings have still preserved the word Keyaer, to signify Ccesar ; Jidiai
for Jiilice, and the like ; as appears by the authority of Quintilian,
Longus, Scaurus, and other grammarians. Hence it is that in
some words the A hath remained by itself, as Aqua ab cequando,
says St. Isidorus, so that in the Greek the diphthong ai ought al-
ways to be more open than the vi, and we should lean more upon
the A than upon the I. Though we must confess that after the
corruption of the language, the M was also pronounced like a
simple E, for which reason, instead of M they frequently put only
the E, as eger for ccfrer^ etas for cetas, es alienum for ces. And on
the contrary the IE has been sometimes put for a simple E, as
avocatus for evocatus, and the like, with which the old glossaries
abound. And hence it is that Beda in his Orthography ranks
cBqiior among the words that are written with a simple E. Which
he does likewise in regard to comcedia. Whereby it appears that
the corruption which hath been introduced into the pronunciation
of the diphthongs, was contested even in his time, that is, so early
as the seventh century.
II. Of the Diphthongs AU and EU.
The pronunciation still observed in AU and EU, borders
nearer upon that of the antients. For the AU had a great affinity
s 2 with
260 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
with the O, for which reason they wrote caurus and corus ; cauda
and coda, lautns and lotus, plaust rum and plustritm, with a great many
others which ntiay be seen in Festus and in Priscian, lib. 1. This
the Latins had borrowed from the Dorians, who said Zxat^ for
avXac^y sulcus ; r^aJ/iAa for r^xZ/xx, vulnus ; where we likewise per-
ceive that the pronunciation of the u was much fuller than that of
the omicron, since it bordered upon the au, only that they sounded
the A somewhat stronger in order to form a diphthong, whence
it is that we find Aorelius for Aurelius, in Veter. Epigram.
The EU was pronounced alrnost in the same manner as we now
pronounce Eudoxia, Eucharistia, jE«r?;)?a, not joining the two letters
all together, but dividing them as little and as nicely as possible,
and leaning more upon the U than the E. These two diphthongs
had a relation to each other ; for from Eurus comes atira, and
they have this in particular, that both in Greek, Latin, and
French, they have nearly retained the same pronunciation. So
that it is quite without reason or foundation that some attempt to
pronounce xv in Greek like of, and tv like ef, as if l-^^tXli was an
yi and not an ii ; or a diphthong could be formed of a vovvel and
a consonant, instead of two vowels ; or in short the u ought to
have any other effect on both those occasions than the diphthong
«, which is pronounced ou and not o/J as one would think it ought
to be pronounced if those other two sounds were to be admitted.
From this error nevertheless it comes that the French pronounce
uyi af-tomate, tin e-vangile, and not au-tomate, nor eu-angile, as
they say eu-nuque, eu-charistie. And though it be ill founded, yet
it seems to have been introduced a long time ago, since Beda in
his poetry takes notice that they said a-vrum for au-runt, e-vange-
Hum for eu-angelimn. But as to the verses which are quoted out
of Tertullian,
Tradit evangelium Paulus sine crimine miindum,
it is not his, no more than the others which are attributed to him,
according to what Mons. Rigault hath observed in his notes on
ttiis author. And it is contrary to the practice of the antients, who
always make cu long, as in Eu under, Eu-ans, and such like.
Nanupte ab Ffiandro caslris ingressus Hetruscis, Virg.
Nee lion Eiiantem Phrigium, Paridisque Mimanta, Id. .
Which they would never have done, says Vossius, had the U been
separated from the epsilon, which is naturally short.
But it is observable that Terentius declares that these two
diphthongs au and eu were pronounced somewhat shorter than the
others.
AU& EU quas sic habemus cum Grcccis communiter,
Corripi plerumque possunt temporum salvo modo. And lower down;
. Syllabus primus necesse est ore raptim promere ;
Tempus at duplian maaebit, nihil obest correptio.
111. OJ the Diphthong El.
In the diphthong EI, the E was very weak, so that scarce any
other sound was heard but that of the I ; hence it is that this E
was
Of letters, ^x. 261
was often lost, and there remained only a long I, as in eo, is, it, for
eis, eit, &c. because, as we have already observed, the long I had
almost the same sound as this diphthong, as Cicero sufficiently
testifieth, when he makes an allusion and comparison betwixt bi^ii
and 0iyci, and as we Hkewise see in the old monumental inscrip-
tions, where they wrote indiiferently dico or deico, heic or hie, om-
tieis or omnis, &c. Which was owing to a delicacy of the language
particularly used by well-bred people ; whereas the vulgar or
illiterate persons rather sounded the E entire. For which reason
Varro observes that the peasants said ve.llam for ^viilani, which
came from vehillam or veillam. And in Cicero, Crassus reproves
Sulpicius, because by leaning too much on the E in this diph-
thong, he did not pronou7ice like an orator, but like a ploughman. And
hence also it is that heretofore some pronounced teber, and others
liber, because it came from teiber ; and in like manner Alexandrea
or Alexandria, as coming from Alexandt eia : and the like.
IV. Of the Diphthongs OY. and Ol.
Terence and Victorious inform us that these two Latin diph-
thongs had a very great affinity with the Greek diphthong 01.
And Ramus in the third book of his schools, expresseth the sound
of the latter by these French words moi, toi, sot. This has occa-
sioned the changes we sometimes observe in the antient copies, as
Adelphoe for Adelphoi, in Terence ; and in another place Oijionem
for Oenonem, with the like : and shevvs us the reason why in ren-
dering words from Greek into Latin, they are always changed
one for the other, -jrotvi, poena, &c. where we see that as of Al
they made JE, so of 01 they made OE, only by changing I
into E.
Now as among the Latins the O bore a great relation to the U,
it happeneth that OE hath been oftentimes changed into U, as
when of pce7ia they made punire, that is pounire, after their manner
of pronouncing the U. And therefore we find in antient inscrip-
tions, oisum or cesum for usiim. Coiravit or cceravit for cnravit.
They said likewise moerus for murus — aggeribus moerorum, ^x\. 8.
according to Servius, whence also cometh pomcerium quasi post
moerum sive murum ; we find also moenus for moerus (changing n
into /•) and in the plural wcenia for munia, from munio. In Tike
manner mcenera for munera, &c. Thus it is that the Flemings
write goet, and pronounce it goot, to signify good : and thus we
still say Puni for Pceni ; bellum Punicum for Pcenicum ; the Car-
thaginians having been called Pceni, quasi Phosni, says Servius,
because they came from Phoenicia, where we may hkewise take
notice of the change of Ph into P. For the Jews and other eastera
nations, according to St. Jerom, had no P ; whence it comes that
he always translates Philistiim to signify the people of Palestine,
though now of one and the same letter, which is the £3, they make
either a P or a Ph, putting it with or without a daguesh.
But we are to take notice that this change of the diphthong 01
into U, was received only in those words where the O was sounded
stronger than the 1 : whereas in most other places, it partook a
great
262 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
great deal more of the sound of the I, as Lipsius sheweth.
Which makes us doubt whether Ramus hath sufficiently explained
the sound of this diphthong, when he says it was the same as in
the French words jiioi, tai, soi ; and whether it would not be better
represented by these verses out of Virgil, Mn. 1 i.
Proinde tona el(>(/uio solitum tibi ; ytiegue timoris- Argue.
Where proinde being only a dissyllable, perfectly expressed the
sound of this diphthong, says Vossius. Hence, as in these words
where the O was strongest, it has prevailed, and been afterwards
changed into U ; in like manner where I was strongest, it has
often remained by itself. For from XolSu or xdCu comes libure ;
from loiber or leiber comcth liber ; and thereby we see that it is
no wonder that the Athenians did not all understand in the same
planner this oracle pronounced at Delphi :
and that some took ^//>ios for Aoz/xos, aj'ainine instead of the plague.
Not that these two words had cntuely the same sound, says Vossius,
but because in reality there was very little difference.
Chapter VI.
Of the nature of I and V consonants. Whether there,
are any Triphthongs, or other Diphthongs among the
Latins, than those above explained.
IN order to explain entirely what relates to the Latin diphthongs,
it is necessary for us here to take notice of the 1 and V con-
sonants.
I. JVhether the I and V xcerc Consonants amo7ig the
antients.
Scioppius pretends that the I and V were never any thing else
but vowels among the Latins, and his principal argument is that
in verse we often see them unite into a diphthong, as Jidsset, of
two syllables in Lucilius ; piiuita, of three in Horace ; suadety
suasit, suetus, and others, of two in Virgil :
Suadei enim vesatiajcwies &c.
where the u in sua is pronounced in the same manner as in qua.
So that according to him the Latins pronounced vinumy vale, just
as the Germans pronounce ivin, wal, &c.
Hence he believes that in navita, the first syllable was pro-
nounced in the same manner as in nauta, because it is only the
same word ; and the first in yaw'ior (which we find in Plautus) in
the same manner as mjlnttor, the I being lost in those words,
merely because it was scarce distinguished in the pronunciation.
This may be supported by the authority of Tully, when he
shews that there was no great diflerence between caiuicas and cave
ne eas. For the E of cave, being hardly distinguished, no more
than \njace, dice, and the like imperatives, where it is now entirely
disused ; they seem to have said cau-n'eas, for cave ne eas.
11. Whether
Or LETTERS, ^x. 263
II. JVhether there are any Triphthongs.
Now according to this opinion of Scioppius, we must also
admit not only of more diphthongs than are commonly allowed,
but of course of triphthongs, as \3M in aqucBy VEA in alvearia,
laquearia, &c.
Seu lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta, Virg.
And we find even by Cornutus, that they were admitted by some
of the antients ; for otherwise they would not have given them-
selves the trouble to refute this opinion. Besides that Charisius
expressly declares in the beginning of his first book, that sylla-
A
bles may be long either by a single vowel, as A, or by two, as
UA, or by three, as \]M.
On the contrary Quintihan says, that there are never three
vowels in a single syllable, but one of them is changed into a con-
sonant. And Terentianus maintains the same thing.
Syllabam nee invenimus ex trihus vocalibus.
Vossius likewise rejects these triphthongs, insisting that the Ro-
mans had at all times the J and V consonants, and founding his
opinion on this, that the oriental languages have their vmi and
their jorf, which answers to these two letters, as we likewise find
that they have been adopted by the French and by other vulgar
languages.
We read also in Cassiodorus, that according to Cornutus, Varro
had taken notice of the V consonant, which he called va or
vau, because of its rough sound. Priscian declares the same
thing, and confirms it not only from Varro, but likewise from
Didymus. And it does not seem at all probable, that the Latins,
after following the iEolians in every thing, should not likewise
have borrowed their digamma, that is the V consonant which sup-
plied its place every where ; pursuant to the same Priscian.
This is further corroborated by the figure invented by the em-
peror Claudius for this V, which is only an inverted j. Which
doubtless he would never have done, had it not been received in
the pronunciation. Whence one might infer that the use of this
V consonant was greater than that of the I, for otherwise he
would have no reason to order a new character for one more
than for the other : though they are both marked as consonants
in the antients, as in Quintilian, Charisius, Diomedes, Terentianus,
Priscian, and others.
St. Austin, in his book of the Principles of Logic, observes also
as a thing beyond all sort of' doubt, that in these words venter^
xafer, vinum, and the like, where V is a consonant, the sound is
strong andjidl. For which reason, says he, we drop it in some
words, as amasti, abiit, for amavisti, abivit, &c. in order not to
offend the ear. And hence it is, he addeth, that we derive the
etymology of the word from vist because sonus verbi, quasi validusy
congruit rei quee signijicatur. Which is consonant to the opinion of
Plato in his CratyluB, and to that gf the Stoics, who believed there
were
264 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
were no words, but what could be some way accounted for by the
sound of the letters: though Cicero laughs at this opinion, which
St. Austin likewise seems to disapprove.
But besides these reasons and authorities, Scioppius's opinion is
liable still to three or four difficulties, which it will not be easy to
solve.
The first is, that it destroys the position in verse, where one
would think that ad, for example, in adjiivnt could not be long,
if the I after the D were not a consonant. And it signifies nothing
to say with this author, that the ad is long by the apposition of
the diphthong m, which being hard to pronounce, sustains this
first syllabic. For if tfiis length of ad proceeded only from the dif-
ficulty of pronouncing the second syllable, how comes it that this
syllable itselfvvas not long, since according to him it lasted longer
in pronouncing ? And how came it to give to the first syllable a
length of time and quantity by sustaining it, when it was neither
long, nor sustained itself? But if the length of one syllable might
be owing to the fullness of the next, how comes it that the first in
Adaiicliis, is not rather long, since the second is so full and so hard
to pronounce, as to be long both by nature and position ?
The second objection that may be made against him, and which
depends on the first, is, that if the j was a vowel in ah Jove, ad-
Juvat, and the like, it would be a diphthong with the next vowel,
and therefore would lengthen that syllable, whereas it is short.
To which it signifies nothing to answer, that all diphthongs are
not long by nature, because the first in giieror, and the second in
aqua, sanguis, and the like, are not such. For it may be said, I
think, that those syllables are not real diphthongs ; the nature of
the diphthongs, as we have already shewn, being to have a double
sound, whereas that of the U was always to become a liquid after
these two consonants, Q and G ; as in agua, sanguis, &c. and even
frequently after 8, as in suavis, suetiis, suudet, and the like, whose
genuine pronunciation is to be only of two sylliil)les. And then
the U was lost, and slippe<l away in such a manner, that it had no
power or force to lengthen the syllable, unless the following vowel
was already long by nature, as in qucero, suudet, &c.
The third objection is that if this I and this V had been always
vowels, they would have occasioned an elision of the letter m or
of the vowel in the preceding word, which they do not. As iollere
vento. lucnte vim ventis. Jnterpresdivum Jove missus ab ipso. Au-
denies Jortuna jurat, Virg. And not toller'' uento,/ortun' luiiat, &c.
The fourth objection is, that even the U and I vowels are fre-
quently changed into consonants, as in gen-vn labant. Ten-vis ubi
argilla. Ar-jetat in portas. Far-jetibusqiie premunt arctis, accord-
ing to Probus and Terentianus. Which is much more probable
than the opinion of Macrobius, according to whom those verses
would begin with a foot of four short syllables.
But whatever may be the result of this question, which hath its
difficulties on both sides ; what we are most to observe is, that in
all probability the Latins did not pronounce this I, though a con-
sonant,
Of letters, ^c. 265
sonant, so strong as we do. As may be still seen by the Italians,
who always pronounce their I like a vowel, unless they put a G
before it, to which they even give somethinj; of the D ; for though
they write Gincomo, they pronounce it almost like D(^iacomo ; but
except on tlw's occasion, always iacomo or iacopo. And in the La-
tin words where they do not put the g, because they cannot alter
the orthography, as jacio, jiidico, adjiivo, they pronounce this j
in such a manner, that we only perceive the sound of the i vowel,
though they call it i consonant. And among the Hebrews the vau
and the jod have a much greater affinity with the sound of our i
and u vowels, than of our consonants.
It is for this reason very likely, that the poets join one of these
vowels to others in verse oftener than we imagine. For, not to
mention suavis, snetiis, suadet, and others, which have this sound of
themselves, and not by poetic licence ; we find alveo of two syl-
lables only, alvearia of four, fuisset of two in Lucretius, and a great
many more, whether this is to be called a diphthong or a triph-
thong, or a Syneresis, that is, when two syllables are contracted
into one; examples of which may be seen in the next book, in the
Section of Latin Poetry, chap. 3. n. 5.
III. Whether the 1 may sometimes pass for a Double
Consonant.
From the foregoing discourse it is easy to see that the Gramma-
rians had very little foundation to say that the I was sometimes a
double consonant, since it appears rather to have been only a semi-
eonsonant. And little does it import to allege that it makes
the syllable which precedes it long bj^ position, as the first in ma-
jor ; smce it is certain that if the I was a double letter, it might
be resolved into two simple ones, which is not so much as imagined.
And therefore the reason why the first is long, in majo?-, pejus, and
the like, is not that the ; is a double consonant in those words, but
on the contrary it is because being there a vowel, it makes a diph-
thong with the first, mni-or, pei-us, &c.
And indeed it evidently appears that this i cannot form a long
position of itself, since in bljugus, trijugus, quadrijugus, the i is short
in the antepenultima before this consonant.
Interea bljugis infert se Leiicagus albis, lE^n. 10.
Which happens not only to the compotjnds of jugtnn, as some have
fancied, but likewise to the other words;.
Aure rcjedantem mistos cum sanguine denies, JEn. 5.
as Pierius would have us read it ; whereas others put ejectantenif
which Macrobius, Farnaby, and Vossius, seem to favour : though
this makes nothing at all for the I consonant, the fii'St syllable being
long in this word, only because we are to read it with a diph-
thong ei-ectantem, and perhaps they even put two ii, as Prisciani.
witnesseth that the antients wrote with a diphthong eiius, peiiuSf
Pompeiius, examples whereof are still extant in antient inscriptions ;•
and as we learn from Longus, that Cicero wrote alio, Maiiam, and
th$ lij^^ with ii.
For
266 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
For this very reason the first is long in Caiius, and Caii, and the
like.
Quod pet da Caii, non peto consilium. Mart,
and Lucretius has made it the same in reiiy eii, as likewise
Plautus.
Chapter VI.
Of Licjuids.
THEY generally reckon four liquids, or gliding letters ;
that is, which run glib and smooth in pronouncing; namely,
L, R, M, N ; though, as we have already taken notice, the two last
are not very gliding.
The L and R have so great a relation to each other, that those
who want to pronounce an R, and are not able to effect it, be-
cause of its great asperity, do naturally fall into the L.
Hence ariseth the mutual change betwixt these two letters.
For not only the Attics say xf /Cavoj for xX/^«vo?, clibarws ; and
the like ; but the Latins have also taken cantherus from xix»]*)X/or,
lilium from >.£i^iov, vermis from tX/ix/v?, or FtA/iAdiy, a toorm, &c.
And by the same analogy of 7ijger they have made nigellus, of
umbra, umbel/a, and such like diminutives. They used also to say
conjiacuit for conjraciiit, Varr. Parilia for Palilia, Festus ; just as
we say Alvernia for Arvernia, Auvergne.
But the R was put also for D, as Priscian observeth, Arvocatos
for advocntos ; arverna for adverna. And in like mar>ner meridies
for medidies, taken from media dies, &c. And the R was likewise
changed into S, as we shall shew hereafter.
The M hath a very obscure sound, and is pronounced on the
edge of the lips, whence it was called mugientem litteram. It was
often dropped in prose, as it is still in verse. Restittituiri, in the
civil law, instead of restituUim iri. Sake for saltern. Vet. Gloss.
On the contrary the N was called tinniens, because it had a
clearer and neater sound, the tongue reaching the palate of the
mouth, as Nigidius and Terentianus observe. Which sheweth
that it was pronounced in Manlins the same as in an, in menses
the same as in en, &c. Though sometimes it lost great part of
its force in particular v.ords, and helped to form a simple sound
between it and g, as we shall more particularly take notice in the
9th chap. num. 7.
Scaliger in his book de emend, temp, observes, that the Chal-
deans frequently changed nun into lamed; Nabo7iassar, Nabolassar ;
Nabonidus, Lahonidus.
It was also customary with the Greeks to change the n into I,
saying for instance, XeV«? for vfVw, from whence we have lepus :
'nXiviJ.uv for itnv[j.uv, from whence we have pulmo : MeixXtor for
Manlius, See. But sometimes they dropped the n entirely, as
'OfTi7o-/o?, for Hortensius : which made Lambinus imagine, that the
real name of this Roman orator was Hortesius, contrary to the
authority of antient copies and inscriptions. Besides, we find by
* a mul-
Of letters, <^c. 267
a multitude of other examples, that it was usual with the Greeks
to drop the n, when it happened not to be final, as TaWla Na^-
Qiovrjatx, AaySavtxria, 'ij-wav/a Ta^ycuviriTla in geographers and histo-
rians, for Gdllui Narboiieiisis, Lugdiineiisis, Hispania TaraconetisiSf
'Ova\ris for Vate/is, &c. KXriiJ^-ns, Kj^o-xr?, Uoi^yiq, for Clemens, Cres-
cens, Pudeus, in the New Testament and elsewhere.
This letter is also sometimes lost in Latin, as when of abscindo
is formed abscidi in the preterite. We likewise meet with abscidit
for ocnoTtpLvti, in the present, V. Gloss. Hence they used to write
coss. to signify consides, as Quintilian observeSh by cutting otF the
n. But very often this omission of the 7i can be attributed to no
other cause but the ignorance of transcribers and sculptors, when
we find in the antients, for example, Clemeti for dementi^ cojiix
for conjiix, meses for menses, &c. Because as the small stroke^ that
are put over the vowels to mark the long ones a, e, o, have been
sometimes taken by the ignorant for tittles that made n and m, as
we have already observed ; so on other occasions, where they af-
terwards really signified those same letters, they were omitted by
those vvhi) believed that they were only marks of quantity. And
that is what deceived Lambiuus in the word Hortcsiiis, as we have
seen but just now.
Quintilian says that the m was frequently at the end of words in
Latin, but never in Greek, and that the Greeks changed it then
into n, because the n had a more agreeable sound, though it was
rare in Latin to see words ending with this letter.
Hereby we see that it is an error to pretend that in Greek the n
ouglit to be pronounced like an m before ^, w, or /* ; since at the
end of words it would be a barbarism, according to Ramus, to
say To» ^lov, as if it were torn bion, rw ixi^ilx, as if tern meriday and
the like.
But N had also an affinity with R, as dirus and hivos, Juria from
<po)ii'x. And from thence comes jfEneus for areus. Cancer for car-
eer, of which they formed canceUi. Carmen for canimen, from cano.
Germeji for genime7i, from ge7io for gigno, according to Joseph Sca-
liger upon Varro, and the like. And it was likewise put for S.
whence we have cessores for censores in Varro, as the same Scaliger
observeth. Sanguis for sanguen, &c.
Chapter VIII.
Of the Mute Consonants, and first of those of the first
order, P, B, F, V.
WE give the name of routes to those consonants, which have
a more obscure and less distinct sound than the rest. There
are six of them in our division, which we disposed according to the
relation they bear to each other.
L Of
268 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX.
I. Of Band V,
B and P are so near a-kin, that, according to Quintilian, rea-
son required a f> in tlie word obtiuuit, bat the ear could distinguish
only a p, optinuit. Ilcnce we iind by antient inscriptions, and
by the old glossaries, that these two letters were often confounded,
npsens for abseiis, optimns for nbfimus, 2}leps for plcbs, poplicus for pub-
ticiiSy and such like. Hence we have still remaining 5?/:/;;)o?io for sub'
pono, oppo?io for obpojw, &c. And several nations frequently pro-
nounce one of these letters for the other, as the Germans, who say,
ponum vinum for bonuin, aiid the like.
The Greeks also used frequently to change these two letters, one
for the other; and Plutarch takes notice that it was customary for
the inhabitants of Delphi to say, ^ocnh for 'nat.rBiy, l2ixfo¥ for tt/x^ok^
&c. And hence it comes that whenever an S followeth, we change
the b into p. Scribo, scripsi, just as the Greeks say, Xsi^u, ^ei'-^u,
Sec. for the B, according to Priscian, is never suffered to precede
the S in any syllable. But this is not so general as this author
imagined, since we still meet with absis and absinthium, for the
Greek words a4/<? and a^\^/v9iov.
It is by this same analogy that the Latins have taken pasco from
fioax-w, papce from /3«^«;, buxus from 9n;|of, pedo from ^Itu, puteus
from /3y6o?, and the like; as the Greeks have borrov\ed wu^yof,
iurris, from the Phoenician word Borg, whence the French word
buurir seems also to be derived.
These two letters have likewise this in common, that they have
crept into several words without any necessity, as absporlo for as-
porto, see Gloss. Obstendit for ostendit, see Ciloss. Obstentui for
ostenfui, ibid, and thence it is that from were they say comburere :
and hence also, according to Nonius, they say celebre for celere, &c.
And the same in regard to the P. Dnnipnum ^or damnum, see Gloss.
Scmnpnum for scavinmn, Id. Sumpsi for sumsi, &c. See the Pre-
terites, vol. 1. rule 51. p. 257.
II. Of the F and the V consonant.
The F was pronounced almost like (f», but not with so strong an
aspiration ; as Terentianus observes.
F littera a Graca 4> recedit lenis S^ hebes sonus.
Hence Tuliy rallies a Greek, who instead of Fundnniits, said *?/«-
r/a//2W5, that is a /; with an aspiration, P-hundariius. Nevertheless,
upon the decline of the language, these two letters used to be put
for one another, as may be seen by the old glossaries, yo/ozx for
•phalanx^ and in like maiM)er,Jl/os(iphHt,Jh/erce, &c.
The V, that is the V consonant, had a f'uller sound, but less
rough than we now give it, by which we make it border very
near upon the F. Jt had more of ihe^. German W, mnurn, wine ;
concerning wliich see what hath been already said, c. 6. And
hence the Greeks frequently changed it into qv, Varus, Oii«fof, &c.
III. Be-
Of letters, ^^0. 269
III. Relation bettveen the V and the Digamma.
This V supplied the place of the iEolic Digamma, which was
so called because it had the figure of two ramwas, one upon ano-
ther, thus, F. But we are particularly to observe that the digam-
ma was not pronounced so strong as we now pronounce the V con-
sonant, for which reason it produced no position inverse, as we shall
shew hereafter. Hence Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius,
hath extremely well observed this difference between the digamma
and the V consonant, that after the digamma is dropped, the word
still subsists, as F«xi»», Ixhv, u Fov, wov : whereas the V is necessary
to form the word, as vulgus, volo, vado, which would be destroyed,
were we to say only zilgus, olo, ado, &c.
IV. Other Relation betxveen V and B.
This V consonant had likewise a great relation to B, for which
reason in words derived from the Greek, one is often taken for
the other, as /S/w, vivo ; ^Ix, vis ; ^ovXoj, volo ; j3«/vw, venio ;
^aS»^&/, vaio ;*i3o3-xw, vescor ; ^oii, vox; 0v^oi, vorax ; ^sQxw, vo-
veo. For we have already taken notice that e was frequently
changed into o, and di into e.
Hence it comes that the Greeks sometimes rendered by a /3
the Latin words that begin with a V, ^xXti^b for valere, because,
as they no longer used the digamma, they had nothing that came
nearer to it ; especially since the B began akeady to degenerate
from its natural sound, which is that of 0. This is a further
proof, says Lipsius, that this V was not sounded in the present
manner, because otherwise the Greeks would as naturally have
attempted to express it by <p as by 13. Therefore the passage we
quoted from St. Austin, chap. 6. n. 2. who calls it crassum 8^ quasi
validum sonum, ought not, in all probability, to be understood of
the roughness, but rather of the fullness of the V, v/hich sounded
almost the same as the French diphthong ou, and was very near
a-kin to the German W. But this does not prove by any moans
that the Greek B should be pronounced like a V consonant,
which we have made appear in the New Method of learning the
Greek tongue.
Now what has been here observed in regard to the affinity be-
tween the B and the V, greatly favours the pronunciation of the
Spaniards and Gascons. And though this error may seem very
gross, yet it is more antient than-people imagine. For not only
Adamantius hath taken particular notice of it in Cassiodorus, but
there are examples of it in old inscriptions, as base for vase,
ciBicA for civiCA, &c. Just as we likewise meet with instances
of V for B, VENEFiciUM for BENEFiciU-M, siEE for siVE ; and
in the Florentine Pandects, aveo for abeo, vobem for bovem,
VESTiAs for bestias, and the like; which is very necessary to
observe. *
It is likewise in consequence of the affinity and relation betwixt
these two letters that of adfero is formed aufero^ whence we have
abstulif
270 NEW M E T H O D. Book IX.
absiuli, ahlatum. And to this also it is owing that we have arbilla
for arvilla, taken from arvina. Likewise albena for nlvena, ad-
Venn, whence coineth auhain in French, a foreigner according to
Cujas : and also aubene, as much as to say advene. : bona caduca sive
adventitia, the droit d'aubene, or escheatage, being relative to the
estates of foreigners deceased without lawful heirs, and which
therefore devolve to the king.
V. Relation of B to Fj and to $.
But beside this relation of B to V consonant, it had also another
to F, and to 4>. For they used to say bruges for fruges, as Cicero
takes notice; of ^^i(A.u they ma.de J'remo, of $x(Tx.oi.>os Jasciniim, o{
^h9Q;,_fundum, &c. And on the contrary they used to say sijilare
for sibilate, whence also comes the French word siffier ; they said
af vubis for ab vobis ; and thence we have still remaining, suffero
for subfera, sujfficit for subficit, suffasio for subj'usio, and others.
Whereas the Macedonians, as Plutarch informs us, said Bi^ivjrot
for <i>tXt7nTov, and such like ; and according to Fcstus we say album
for a.X(po¥, a kind of white itch; from a/Afw coiiieth umbo ; and the
rest in the like manner.
VI. Other relations of B orFtoM, and of V to F
or PH.
As the letter M hath a very obscure sound, and is almost as
labial as B and P, hence it is often changed into one of these two
letters; as globus, a globe; glomus, a bottom, or clew of thread:
Submitt'), summillo, (/.eXXitv, JEo\. /Se'XXe/k, ttxQovo-x, JEo\. (AxdoDo-tx,
•vermis from e^ttw, somnus from i/Trvoj, polluo from iji.i?<.vvu, /x,(XKvXer,
uEo\. TrinKvXoi, whence the Italians have taken picolo, little.
Again, as P hath a relation to B, and B to F, so P hath also a
relation to F, as Jido from 97£;9a/ persuadeo, figo from •nt'iyu. And
it has likewise a relation to PH, either because originally this PH
is no more than an aspiration added to the sound of P. or because
in process of time this PH was pronounced like an F, which, as
we have just now observed, has an affinity with P. Thus trophccum
comes from rqciixm, romplicca from fo^<pxi<ii, verto from ps'rru. In
like manner, caput from y.tipxX^, carpo from Ku^ipu, sapiens from
erofoi, &C.
Chai'ter IX.
Of the second class of' Mutes, C, Q, G, J.
THERE is an affinity or relation between C and Q, as liTcewise
between G and J consonant. Besides, there is an affinity
between C and G ; but we must see in what manner.
I. Re-
Of letters, &;c. 271
I. Relation between C and Q.
So great is the relation between C and Q, that several gram-
marians have attempted to discard the Q as a superfluous letter,
pretending that the C and the U are sufficient to express the same
sound as Q. And we see that the Greeks have not this letter,
vtrhich was taken from the Kophe or Koppa of the Syrians, and in
French it has no other force than that of the single K, or that of a
C before A, O, U.
Quintilian asserts, that the letter K hath nearly the same proper-
ties and effect as Q. And Ramus declares, that in the university
of Paris the letter Q had always the same sound in Latin as it has
now in French, till the foundation of the royal professorships, under
Francis I. So that they said qnlis, qantus, qis, as we see some
people pronounce it still. And he observes, that at first every body
opposed the other pronunciation, introduced by the king's profes-
sors, as an innovation by no means to be admitted ; though after-
wards it made its way.
Nevertheless the letter Q still retains the same sound as K or C
before O and U, as we see in qiium, which is the same thing as
cum, pursuant to what hath been mentioned in the remarks on the
pronouns, chap. 1. num. 4. And in quo: hence Cicero, as Quin-
tilian informs us, rallying a cook who was intriguing for some
high preferment, made use of these words, Ego quoque tihi jure
faveho, because they could not tell by the sound whether it was
the particle quoque, or the vocative of coquus, a cook.
But in conjunction with the three first vowels, A, E, I, it has a
thicker and fuller sound, which is so particular, that it cannot be
expressed by any Greek letters, Duras 4" i^la syllabus Jacit^ says
Quintilian, qucs ad conjungendas demum subjectas sibi vocales est idilis,
alias supervacua, ut equos ac equum scribimus, cum ipsce etiant
hce vocales duce efficiant sonum, qualis apud Grcecos nuUus est, ideoqne
scribi illonim litteris non potest. Though this sound proceeds as much
from the U as from the Q, because after a G the U has the same
effect in lingua, sanguis, and others; and heretofore it had the
same after S, suavis, suadet, &c. which has still continued in verse,
as we have already observed.
This shews nevertheless the unreasonableness of some in rejecting
the Q, as of Varro according to Censorinus, and of Licinius Calvus
according to Victorious, who never would make use of it ; for it is
always of service, since its office is to unite the two following vowels
into one syllable, where the C denotes they are divided. This
makes the difierence between the nominative qui and the dative cui,
between the infinitive ieywf, taken from the yerh' sequor, and the
preterite of 5eco, secui, and a great many others. This is further
confirmed by Priscian, and by Terentianus Maurus, whom some
have placed late in the fifth century, though he must have flou-
rished in the middle of the fourth, since St. Austin quotes hira as a
dead author in books of his that were written before 'J90.
And so real is this difference between C and Q, that we find the
antient poets have put a C where we always write a Q, when they
wanted
272 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
wanted to divide the words into more syllables than they naturally
form. Thus Lucretius useth cu'iret, a trissyllable, for qiiiret.
— Confringere iit nrcta
Natures primus portanun claustra cu'iret.
And thus also he made acua a trissyllable, for aqua. And in the
same manner Piautus wanted to put relicuus, in his Cistell. act. 2.
sc. 1.
Quod dedi datum non velletn, quod relicuum non daho.
Because if we do not read it thus, the verse, which is trochaic, will
not have its full measure.
II. JVhethcr Q ought to pass for a double letter.
As we have observed that Q supplied the place of C and U, there
are grammarians who insist on its being a double letter, and among
the rest Capclla, Dinmedes, and Longus ; an opinion which Vos-
sius has also favoured. The ground they go upon is, that the
antients wrote QI, Q.M, QID, Sec. without a ti, examples of
which are still to be seen in antient inscriptions, whence it follows,
say they, that the U was included in Q, and consequently that this
is a double letter.
Nevertheless it is beyond all doubt that Q cannot be a double
letter, for otherwise the first in aqua, equus, and the like, would be
long, whereas it is short in verse.
To their arguments I shall give two answers ; the first that it was
the custom of the antients frequently to take a single letter for the
characters which formed the name of the letter : putting, for in-
stance, a K only for Ka or Ca, they wrote Krus for Karus, and
yet this did not make the K a double letter. So that they might
put likewise a q only for qu, and qis for quis, &c.
And thence it appears, to mention it only by the way, that
when in Greek writings we meet with o for «, this o stands for the .
name of the letter, as Quintilian observes ; for its name was ov,''
according to Victorinus, just as they said /aD, vD, oV; the name
of no letter whatever being formed by a simple character. Hence
the £ itself was called EI, as we find in Eustathius and Plutarch ;
so that sometimes, when they wrote only E, they pronounced Ef,
the single letter standing for the name of the letter itself. And
therefore we meet in Athenaius with AI0NY20 for Aiowaa, and in
the two Farnesian columns, which were removed from the via
Appia, TO TPITO for t2 Tfira, HEPOAO for H^u'^ov, and the like.
The second answer I make to their objection is, that when the
antients wrote qis, perhaps they pronounced it as if it was a K,
and the writing changed with the pronunciation. Fortasse etiamsicut
acribebant, ita &,• loqnehantur, says Quintilian. And this answer
seems the more exact, as in Gruterus's inscriptions we meet not
only with q, but also with c only, for qu ; Cintus for Quintus, sicis
for siquis. As on the contrary we meet with Q only for C. Qur-
tius for Curf/us, scequlnm for sceculum, mequm for mccum : and vvith
qu for C, as liquebit for licebit or liqebit ; which is proper to be
observed in order to correct a multitude of corrupt passages.
III.
t
Or LETTERS, S^c. 273
III. Of the U which always accompanies the Q.
But in the present manner of writing the Q is always accom-
panied of course by a U, which has given occasion to gram-
marians to start a thousand idle questions : as whether it be a
vowel or consonant, whether it forms position with Q for the pre-
ceding syllable, or whether it makes a diphthong with the follow-
ing vowel, &c.
To cut short, I say that this U which always accompanies the
Q is not a consonant, and therefore does not form position ; and that
it is a vowel, but a liquid vowel, which glides away so nimbly
in pronouncing it, as to be hardly perceptible, according to Beda ;
and therefore it does not form a diphthong with the following
vowel, because it loseth its whole force as a letter in verse, amittit
vim Utterce in metro, says Priscian, which made Donatus believe,
that, strictly speaking, it is neither voivel //or consonant.
Hereby we see that Alvarez, as well as Vossius, bad very little
foundation to call it a liquid consonant, because, if this was the
case, it would at least render the first common in aqua, aquilex,
aquilo ; eques, equidem, and the like, which it certainly does not.
But a stronger argument that this u is only a liquid vowel, is that
being used also after G, as in anguis, it has been omitted in several
words where it formerly took place, as red/go, extingo, for redi-
guo, extinguo, &c. And the French use it thus not only after Q
and G, as question, anguille, &c. but likewise after C, as cueillir,
&c.
IV. Relation betzceen C and G.
G is only a diminution of C, according to Quintilian ; and
therefore there is a very great affinity between them, since of
Kyfff »>)T»)y we make gubernator, of y.Kios gloria, of egi actum, of nee
otium, negotium, &c. And Quintilian observes, that in Gains,
Grteius, they did not distinguish whether it was a C or a G.
Hence it is that of centum they formed quadringenta, quingenta,
septingenta, &c. Of porricere (which is still used in regard to sa-
crifices) they mdiAe porrigere, and the like.
It is supposed that the letter G was not invented till after the
first Punic war, because we always find a C instead of G on the
column called Rostrata, which was raised at that time in
honour of Duilius the consul, and is still to be seen in the capitol
at Rome, asMAcisxRATOs, leciones, pucnando,copias Carta-
ciNiENSis. Which is impossible to account for, unless we take
the C in the same sound as K. And it is observable that Suidas,
speaking of the crescent which the senators wore upon their shoes,
calls it TO 'Pw^a^/.ov x.tx'jt'Ka,, plainly shewing thereby, that the C and
K passed for the same thing ; since indeed there was no difference
between them in the sound. For whereas at present we greatly
soften the C before E and I, pronouncing Cicero nearly as if it was
Sisero, they on the contrary pronounced it in this and in all other
words, the same as in caput and in corpus.
Vol. II. T I say
274 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
I say the same of G, which always retained the same sound.
For whereas we have greatly softened it before e and i, pro-
nouncing it in rtcris and retre, as in the French word recent and
tegir ; they on the contrary pronounced it every where as in rego.
Hence St. Austin saitli, Ciim dico lege, in his duabus syllabisy
aliud Gr(scus, (dind Lalimis intelligit ; giving us to understand,
that the Latins pronounced the g as strong iu lege, as the Greeks
in xiyt, and that these two words had in his time but one and the
same sound.
V. Relation bttzveen G and J consonant.
The soft pronunciation which we give to G, is likewise the
cause of its having a great relation to the sound with which we
pronounce J consonant, when followed by an E or an I. For we
sound regi like rejicio, and rege like pejero, and so for the rest.
But this soft pronunciation of the G is lost, when it happens to
be followed by an a, o, or ji, as regat, rego, regum, whereas we al-
ways preserve it with the J consonant, asjacio, major and mnjus,
&c.
And if we should be asked whether this J consonant had really
this same pronunciation among the antients, we refer to what has
been above mentioned, chap. 6. p. 262.
VI. Whether the antients p7'o?ioiinced Gn in the manner
the French do at present.
Another question may arise, whether the Romans pronounced
the G before n, in the same manner as the Italians do at present,
and as the French pronounce it in these words, Agnez, magnifique,
Espagnol, &c.
In all probability they did not, but pronounced the G in agnuSf
as in agger, for this other pronunciation being so particular, and
differing so greatly from the usual sound of the G, the antients
would not have failed to take notice of it.
It is moreover observable that the G is sounded so very little
in these words Agjiez and the like, that it serves only to denote
the liquid N, as the same G in Italian is a sign of the liquid L,
Jigliola, daughter. Hence it is that the Spaniards do not use the
g at all on those occasions, but are satisfied with putting a small
tittle over the n, to signify its being a liquid, and that it receives
this pronunciation, writing senor, and pronouncing segnor. And
for this reason also Ramus, in his French grammar, useth a par-
ticular mark for this liquid n in French, without putting a g, but
only a small comma under the n.
VII. That there is still a middle sound between G and N,
which is neither i7itirely one nor the other, and has
given the Greeks occasion to change Ninto T before y,
Another difficulty may here arise, to know whether the N is
changed into r on certain occasions among the Greeks, as in
«ty;«AOf,
Or LETTERS, <^x. Q75
elyftXot, oly^io-x, uyxv^x, &c. and whether the r be then pro-
nounced as an N. For it seems, says H. Stephen, to be a mistake
of the transcribers, who lengthened the v a h'ttle too much in the
ligatures of the small letters, and made a y of it. Hence in MSS;
in capitals, such as those he made use of in corapiling his The-
saurus, we find those words intire with an N, ANl EAOS, and the
like. Besides, Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius, quotes,
from au antient inscription, ANKYPA for oiyxv^x. And indeed,
addeth H. Stephen, it seems ridiculous to say tljat this N should
be changed into r, for no other end but that the r should at the
same time be pronounced like an N.
But in answer to this, we do not say it is pronounced like a
Greek N, but as a vulgar n ; or, to speak more properly, with a
middle sound between the N and the G, according to Victorinus,
contemporary with Donatus, St. Jerome's master, who acknow-
ledges this change of letters, and this pronunciation among the
Greeks. Which made Scaliger say, that if we sometimes meet
with an N, this must be rather deemed an error of the tran-
scribers, who imagined they should express this sound better by
this letter, whereas, according to Vossius, it seems rather to re-
quire a new character.
And the Latins had something like it in their language, which
Nigidius, as Gellius observeth, used to call ^ false N, as in aiiguis,
ancora, increpat, ingenuus, and others : In his enim non venim N, sed
adidterinum ponitiir, these are his words, Nam si ea litter a esset^lin-
fua palatum tangeret. For which reason Varro, according to
'risciSn, lib. 1. takes notice that Attius and the antients used to
put two gg on this occasion; like the Greeks, writing aggidus,
aggens, aggenint, and the like.
Chapter X.
Of the third class of Mutes, which are D a?7d T.
THE letter D is only a diminution of T, as G is of C,
even according to Quintilian. This seems to favour those
who in Greek do pronounce the r like a S after a v, saying ma-ttx
as if it were7r«>S«; Xe'ovto? as if it were >,'ia'»lo^\ a softening that
perhaps may be admitted, though it is not a fault to pronounce
it otherwise. But even in Latin it is very certain that there is a
great relation between those two letters, in consequence of which
they are often changed one for the other, as at for ad; which
made Quintilian laugh at those who scrupled to write them in-
differently ; set for sed, haut for havd, and others in the writings
of the antients : Quit for quid, adque for atque, &c. in inscriptions
and elsewhere.
The French write voit with a t, though it comes from videt
with a d. And whenever the d is at the end of a word, and the
T 2 next
276 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
next begins with a vowel or an h without being aspirated, they
pronounce it hke a t, and say, for example, grant esprit, grant
homme, though they write grand esprit, grand humme. Which shews
that in French we ought always to lean harder upon the final con-
sonants when the next word begins with a vowel, than in any
other place.
In every other respect the French have almost intirely preserved
the sound of those two letters, except in the T, which is in great
measure softened, when joined with an i, before another vowel,
where it is sounded almost like the s of the antients, prununtio, as
if it were pronunsio. Whereas they pronounced it in lUium, vitiuni,
&c. all the same as in ///?5, vitis ; of which nobody can entertain
the least doubt, becaase this soft sound is taken notice of by none
of the antients, and moreover because it is a constant maxim, that
no consonant hath two different sounds, either among the Latins
or among the Greeks, this privilege, as Lipsius observes, being
reserved for the vowels.
True it is that we have a fragment of one Papirius a gram-
marian, which mentions that the ti before another vowel was
pronounced like tzi, justitia like justitzia. But besides that this
■pronunciation does not intirely establish our's, this very author
excepts, among others, those words in which an i comes imme-
diately after ti, as olii, &c. Which shews that this pronunciation
was introduced only by degrees, and in proportion as the Latin
was corrupted by the mixture of foreign languages. Hence also
it is, that in the old glossaries we find eciam for etiam : and in
Festus, Murtia Deu or Murcia (the goddess of sloth) according t«
{he observations of Scaliger.
Chapter XI.
Of the Hissing Letters.
UNDER the name of hissing letters we include the S, and the
double letters which are resolved by S.
I. Of the letter S.
S is called a hissing letter, because of its sound. It has been
variously received among the antients, some having intirely re-
jected it, while others affected to introduce it every where,
Pindar calls it )clQnXoti. adulterinnin, and has avoided it in almost
all his poems. Quintilian says it is harsh, and makes a disagreeable
sound in the connexion of words. For which reason it was often in-
tirely rejected, dignu\ oninibu\ and the like in Plautus, Terence,
and elsewhere. In some Latin authors it was also changed into
T, in imitation of the Attics, as mertare, pullare, aggretus, fojr vier-
sare, pulsare, aggressus, &c.
Others, on the contrary, affected to introduce it every where,
Casmoence for Canicence, dmmosce for dumoscv, &c. And Quintilian
takes
Of letters, ^c' 277
takes notice that in Cicero's time, and afterwards, they frequently
doubled it in the middle of vvords, caussa, divissiones, &c.
Be that as it may, there is no doubt of its being harsh if it be
too hissing, or too often repeated; which obliged the French to
soften it in such a manner, that when it happens to be in the
middle of two vowels, they pronounce it like an Z, sa3'ing
mizere, and not missere. And this soft sound they have introduced
into Latin words, pronouncing miseria, like the French word
misere, though the Romans always sounded their S in the same
manner as in seria, and the like.
This letter had an affinity with R, which is the reason of there
being so many nouns in ER and IS, as vomer and vomis, ciner
and cinis, voiiicer and volucrisy saluber and salubris, pulver and
pulvis, and many others, where we must also suppose the change
of E into I, of which we have taken notice above. Others are
in OS and in OR ; labos and labor, honos and honor, &c.
The Attics were also used to put the o- for ^, ai^a-nv for ufp-nv,
masculus ; ^m^aaXios for ^xppxKios, midax, &c. Thus from rvqaK^
comes turris; from IVw (of which they made taoyLxt) era; from
v^iaov, porrum ; irom xiXm, celer, and the like. And so from jFk-
£ius, Furius ; Valesius, Valerius, Sec.
But S had likewise a relation to D, as appears even by the Z,
which includes both these letters, as we shall demonstrate in the
following numbers ; by the increase of several Greek and Latin
nouns, clarnis, clamydis, for clamis, ys ; lapis, lapidis, &c. (whereto
we may refer litis, ditis, militis, and the like, because of the
above-mentioned affinity between D and T) by the compounding
particles, assumo for adsumo ; by the Greek and Latin verbs, a'Jw,
canOyoiTu; lu do, lust, &c. and, in fine, by divers particular words,
as from edit comes est, he eats, by Syncope, for esit,
II. Of the Double Letters.
The double letters always include the S, and therefore in great
measure partake of its hissing.
The Greeks have three, Z, S, t; but the Latins have only
two, X and Z ; which is the case of most of the vulgar lan-
guages.
The X is equivalent to cs, as dux for dues, for which reason it
makes ducis in the genitive ; and likewise to gs, as rex for regs,
(notwithstanding what Vossius says) for which reason it makes
regis in the genitive. For since G and C have so great an affinity,
as we have already observed, and since they are so frequently
changed one for the other, as negligo for nee lego, there is a very
strong probability that the same double letter is also capable of
expressing them both.
This X was sometimes put with a C, as vicxit, juncxit, and
sometimes with an S, as cappadoxs, conjuxs, &c. S. Isidore
takes notice that it did not obtain before the reign of Augustus, and
Victorinus informs us that Nigidius would never make use of it.
The Z had a softer sound than X, for which reason Quintilian
calls it mollissimum 8f suavissimum. Yet this is not the same sound
278 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
as we give it at present, which is only a moiety of the S. Beside
this ft had something of the D, but with a very soft pronunciation ;
Meze)itius, as if Medsentms ; Zethiis, as if Dsethus, &c.
Hence it is that the Dorians changed this letter into SD, whe-
tlier in the beginning of a word, as clvyos for ^vyos, or in the
middle, as a-t/p/VJw for av^l^u. Not that the ^ was equivalent to
a-o, as Vossius remarks in the first book of his gramm;ir ; but by
reason of a kind of tran'«position or Metathesis; both Flaccus and
Longus observing, that as the X began with a C, in like manner
the Z outjht to bejrin with D ; so that all the double letters end
with S. Yet Erasmus and Ramus pretend the contrary, and Sex-
tus Empiricus endeavours to prpve against the torrent of gramma-
rians, that ^ was as much equivalent to o-S as to la.
Be that as it may, the /Eolians also changed the t ii>to ^, as
l^aQaXKstv for ^lacSocf^Xeiv, calumniari ; from whence they took ^uZoXoe
for diabolos, which we meet with in S. Cyprian and S. Hilary ; and
which Erasmus renders delntorem or calunnnatorem, and Budeus ad-
>versariiim, and is the usual woid by which S. Paulinys distinguishes
the evil spirit.
The Latins likewise have frequently changed this ^ into D, and
sometimes into S, taking odor, from ol^eiv, and from /:a«i^», massa ;
from zjxr^t'^u, pntrisso, &c.
The Z had also the like affinity with G. Hence it is, as Sca-
liger observeth, that when the modern Greeks would express the
month called Gimnadi, they write ^(«//.a^/, and to express a Per-
sian or a foreigner by the word Agiami, they write 'a^«/x/. This
•was even customary among the antients, as Capella observeth.
Z, says this author, a Gra'cis venit, licet etiam ipsi prima G Grceca
vtebatdur ; tmm TETTM dicebatd, nunc ZETUM dicimus. The
Latins also of ^iZyos have made jugum, of (mi^ov, niajtis, and the
like, where the ; consonant had nearly the same sound as g. The
Italians, to express the J consonant, prefix a G, and pronounce it
like dg ; they write Giacomo, but pronounce Dgiaconw for Jacomo,
James. And it is observable likewise in French, that they who
cannot pronounce the G, or the J consonant before e and i, (be-
cause these letters require to be sounded with a kind of hissing)
pronounce exactly a Z, as when they say, le zibet, du zinzembre,
dex zettons, ze ne sgai, zirai la, instead of gibet, du gingembre, des
jettons, Sec.
By all these relations we find it is no wonder that the Z, which
in Greek ought to characterise the fourth conjugation, because it
is the fourth consonant of their alphabet, is also changed into two
a- in the present ; that is, that the verbs of this conjugation ter-
minate in ^u or (7crw. We find likewise why some take now and
then a S, and others now and then a y, for the characteristic of
their second aorist. This is intirely owing to the affinity betwixt
the t, and those other two letters; which may be observed in a
single word ; for what the Latins call viridarium^ the Italians call
verzieri, andthe French un verger*
Of letters, ^c, 279
Chapter XII.
Of the aspiration H.
GRammarians ai'e in doubt whether H ought to be ranked
among the letters or not, because they say it is only an
aspiration.
We acknowledge that H is only an aspiration, but we add that
it is a real letter nevertheless, because every character instituted
by mankind, to apprize us of some change in the pronunciation,
ought to be deemed a real letter, especially where it has a place
in the alphabet among the rest, as we see that H has. And in-
deed it is very ridiculous to imagine that H is not a real letter,
because of its being only an aspiration, since we see that the
oriental languages have three or four letters which they call gut-
turals, to express only the different aspirations.
The H supplies in Latin the rough breathings and the aspirate
consonants of the Greeks ; and thus it has two general uses ; the
1. before vowels in the beginning of syllables, as in honor, hcedusy
prehendo ; the 2. after consonants, as in thronus, Rhodus, johilosophuSf
charitas,
I. Of H before Vowels.
With regard to the former use the French have greatly changed
the pronunciation of this letter in Latin words, and preserved it
onl}' in some French words. For in Latin they hardly pronounce
it at all, as in honor, homo, humor ; and in French it is entirely
lost in t)iese very words, honneur, homme, humeur ; and in inpst
words borrowed from the Latin or the Greek, pronouncing them as
if there were no H, but merely onnerir, umeur, omme, &c.
Now it 'is beyond all doubt that this was not the Roman way
of pronouncing, but that they sounded the H with as strong an
aspiration as it is sounded in words purely French, such as la har-
diessCf la halcbarde, la hauteur , &c. And perhaps they gave it even
a stronger aspiration.
This appears by two clear and irrefragable authorities. The 1.
of St. Austin, who, complaining to the Supreme Being that man-
- kind were more diligent observers of the rules of grammar than
of his divine laws, mentions that they were so exact in this pro-
nunciation ; Ut qui ilia sonorum Vetera placita teneat, ant doceat,
says he, si contra discipliyiam Grammaticam, sine aspiratiotie primd
syllabce, Ominem dixerit, magis displiceat hominibus, qumn si contra
tuaprcBcepta hominem oderit, c/im sit homo. Conf. I. c. 18.
The second authority is of Catullus, who rallies a person for
introducing the letter h into every word. For the raillery is not
because he pronounced the h in a different manner from others,
but because, as the h had something of a harsh sound, he offended
the ear by putting it where it ought not to be.
Chona-
280 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX.
Chommoda dicebat, si quando commoda vellet
Dicere, 8^- hinsidias Arrius, visidias :
jEi turn mirijice sperabat se ase locutum,
Cum quantum poterat dixernt hinsidias.
Credo, sic mater, sic liber avunculus ejus,
Sic maternus avus dixrrat atque avia.
Hoc misso in Syriam, rcquierant omnibus aures,
Audibant eadem liccc ieniter Sf leviter.
Nee sibi pod ilia metuebant talia verba :
Cum subito affertur nuntius horribilis,
luniosjluctus postquam ilhic Arrius isset.
Jam non lonios esse, sed Hionios. Carm. ^5.
Here a person may ask in what manner this H ought to be pra*
nounced, when it is before words beginning with an i aspirated
in Greek, as Hieronymus, Hierusnlem, &c. One would think that,
since I is never a consonant in the CJreek language, and that
even the Latins, as already ha»:h been observed, gave it a softer
sound than we, this I ought always to pass for a vowel, though
with the aspiration, and that we ought to say Hieronymum, Hieru-
salcm, &c. just as Arrius said Hionios, when he wanted to aspirate
the I of lonios ; and since even the modern Jews pronounce tlieir
Jod in this manner.
Yet the practice is various upon this head, some pronouncing it
as a vowel, while others give it the whole force of a J consonant,
as if it were Geronimus, just as the French always say Gerome,
Gcrusalem, &c. wherein we must conform to the custom of vulgar
languages.
II. Of H after Consonants.
In regard to H after consonants, Cicero de Oratore observes that
the antients did not make use of it, and that they only put it
after vowels, which made him inclined to say pulcros, triunipos,
Cartaginem, &c. But that at length having reserved the specu-
lation of these things to himself, he had fallen in with the custom
of the people in regard to the practical part and to pronunciation ;
however that they still continued to say Orcinos, Matones, Otones,
Ctrpiones, sepulcra, coronas, lucrymas, without H, because this gave
no offence to the ear.
Quintilian moreover affirms that the antients used frequently to
drop it before vowels, saying ccdos, ircos, &c. whereas in his time
they were fallen into the opposite excess, saying, c/ioro7ia, prcschonesp
and the like. But we must consider the language, as it was in its
purity. .
Therefore as this H after consonants was introduced into the
Latin tongue merely to supply the Greek aspirates, it seems as if
it ought to be put only after the four consonants, C, P, T, R ;
though this happens (at least in regard to the three last) only ia
Greek or foreign words.
in. Of
Of letters, ^c. 281
III. Of the pronunciation of C¥L.
CH is pronounced differently in Latin and in French. For in
Latin it is always pronounced like a K, making no difference with
the C, except before the vowels E and I, or the diphthong, ce, o?,
before which the C is pronounced like an antient S, as already
hath been observed ; whereas the CH always preserves its sound of
K ; Achilles and Achates being pronounced in the same manner.
But in French the genuine sound of CH before all vowels, is
that which obtains in char, cher, chiche, chose, chu, chou. For
which reason, though we have retained this h with the other con-
sonants in words derived from the Greek, which begin with an
aspirate, yet one would imagine it ought to be omitted with the
C, as in caractere, colere, Bacciis, and such other words, to prevent
the mistakes of the unlearned, who being unacquainted with the
derivation of those words, might pronounce cha instead of ca,
cho instead of co, and chus instead o^ cus. And this is the opinion
of Mons. de Vaugelas in his remarks on the French tongue, to
which we refer the reader.
And indeed there is the greatest probability that both the Greeks
and Romans were strangers to this pronunciation, since it is so
particular to the French tongue, that the Italians, in order to ex-
press it, write sci, as sciolere, sciaractere, &c. Though it is very
certain that the Greek X and the Ch of the Latins were pro-
nounced differently from the Greek y.airTtx and the Latin K or
C before any vowel whatever, that is, by giving it a strong aspi-
ration : for otherwise Catullus could not have censured a man for
saying chommoda instead of commoda, as we have seen in the epi-
gram above quoted.
IV. Of the pronunciation of ^H.
The same may be said in regard to Ph : for we pronounce it
like F, saying philosopkie, as if it were Jilosophie. Whereas the
antients pronounced it almost like a P with an aspiration, p-hi-
losop-hia, or rather yhilosofhia, since it partook, as it still does par-
take, of the nature of y in its aspiration, and yet had not the
same sound as it; as appears by the above quoted testimony of
Cicero, who otherwise would not have laughed at a Greek for
giving the sound of 4> to F, pronouncing Fundanius at if it were
Sundanius, that is Fhundanius.
V. Of TH and RH.
In regard to Th in theatrum, thesaurus, and Ilk in Rhodus and
the like, the H is hardly perceived in the modern pronunciation
of the Latin, though there is no doubt but it was distinguished by
the antients, and in the Greek these aspirations are to be ob-
served.
VI. From
282 NEW METHOD. Cook IX.
VI. From whence the Latins bo?Torved this aspiration H.
The Latins borrowed their H from riic Greek Ht«, as the
Greeks had borrowed it of the Phoenicians, and these of the
Syrians, who formerly said Ihia instead of Helh. Which evidently
shews that we ought to pronounce Eta in Greek, and not Ila.
But at first this H was used only as an aspiration ; for which
reason they wrote HEPOAO for '^u^ov, HOAOI for loZ, HEKATON
for £x«Tov, ceniicm ; whence it conies that the H formerly signified
a hundred, as the first letter of that word, pursuant to the observa-
tion of Longus, Scaurus, and Friscian.
They likewise used to put the II with the weak consonants, in-
stead of the aspirates, which were not invented till some time after
by Palamedes ; so that they wrote THE02 for QEOS and the like,
VII. Of' some relations between the H and the JEoUc
iliga?nma, -which at length was changed into V co?i'
sonant, and into p.
But it is further observable, according to S. Isidorus, whom
Cheke and Vossius have followed, that from the H arose the
mark of breathings ; for splitting it in two, at first they made F
for the rough bicathing, and j for the smooth, which were after-
wards rounded, in order to give to the former the following
mark <, and to the latter that of a comma. This is further con-
firmed by antient editions, and among others by Aldus's Hesy-
chius, where the different breathings of the Greek words are
marked by these two moieties of the H, namely I" and .j. And
if we examine strictly, we shall find that from the former moiety
was taken our small h, where they only lengthened tlie second
instead of a transverse line. And to this same reason it is owing,
that the C in vulgar languages was sometimes no more than a
mark of aspiration, or of a stronger sound, as we still see in Clo'
inire, which is the same as Loiaire ; in Clovis^ which is the same
as Lovis or Loiiys and the like.
But as this mark of aspiration was not rounded in the begin-
ning, perhaps it was owing to this that the digamma F, which
represented nearly the first half of an H, hath oftentimes passed
for a rough breathing, as appears in FtXtn for IaeV^j, Fe/^^h? for
iJ^^'cu, &'C. And neither this digavima, nor the Attic H made
any position in verse, as Friscian observeth ; which the Romans
have followed, their h having no power to render a syllable long by
position.
The mutual affinity between these two letters is the reason that
even in Latin they have been frequently put for one another ;y^-
dum for hccduyn,fircum for Inrciim^foriolum for hariolum, Jbsttm for
thostem, heminas forjemiuas, hebris ior febris, and the like.
But this digamma used also, though not so often, to be put for
a soft breathing, as F/XAo? for Jxxo?, strabus, squint-eyed. It was
customary likewise to insert it in the middle of words, to prevent
the hiatus or concurrence of vowels, as lYus for 'Ls, from whence
comes
Of letters, S^c. 283
comes owV, JFov for Joy, from whence ovum. Where we see also
that the V consonant has ever supphed the place of this digamma.
It is owing to all these relations that the rough breathing, the
H, the digamma, and the V consonant, are oftentimes con-
founded and interchanged for one another. For example, of
'Enrol or Ytnrol the Latins have made Hetieti or Veneti. In the
same manner from 'Er/« or Fsj-Za cometh Vesta ; from la^iis or
YnT^its, vestis ; from e^^ , l^, or F^^ , ver ; from lifii^x or Via-ni^Xy
vespera } and so for the rest. But sometimes this digamma, or
this rough breathing, is changed into &, as Passerat sheweth in
his treatise of letters ; ^p-nru^ for f-!iru^, ^^olos for folos. Which
particularly obtained among the Cretans, who said IZov or uQiov
for oxium, and the like, always putting a /3 instead of the digamma ;
whence perhaps ariseth the mistake of pronouncing fi like a V
consonant.
Now these, as well as most of the preceding variations, are
proper to be observed, not only in order to discover the origin
and derivation of words, but likewise to understand divers obscure
passages, to correct such as have been corrupted, and to decipher
the antient manuscripts. Therefore to facilitate the use of them,
I have subjoined the following table, where the most considerable
of these variations will appear immediately at a single glance;
though I did not intend to include them all, but only the most
necessary. And here you are to observe, that when I shew that
one letter may be put for another, as E for K, fociem for Jaciamf
this means that we may generally conclude vice versa, as A for
E, inars for mers, baiare for belare ; and the same may be said of
others which I mentioned above, though 1 havenot inserted them
in this table ; having been satisfied, for the sake of brevity, with
taking notice only of the most usual and most remarkable manner
of writiqg.
TABLE
Of the manner of writing of the Antients.
Id
O
c
CO
C3
W
O
o
Pi
O
PS
w
z
-95
w
K
r
e
o
(0
V0W£L,
as
5 / Consonant,
s
o
Both, a*
^^A Syllable, as
Vowel, <
Consonant,
V
In
Qua-
lity,
in the
change
of
Vowel,
as
Eidera /or idem. Le'item for litem, Ubei, &,e.
Maiia, Caiius, eiius, /ur Maia, Caius, &c.
Jous/or jus. Souo, quicuonqu ; /or suo,quiciinqj
Juus /or jus. Arbitratuu, luuit,/orarbitratu,luil.
Vicxit, juncxit, /or vixit, junxit, ice. '^
Quotiens /or quoties.
Exsigunt,exsercere. Amasso/oramaso.o/amijro.
Quips /or quis. Obstendit/or ostendit.
Stlis/or lis.
Tuad/r tua. Plebed, marid, estod.
Leibertated /or libertate.
< Postidca/or postea. Indotestato /or intestate.
Fenus /or foenus. Popli /or popoli.
Adicito,subice,reice; for Adjicito.subjice, rejice,
Osa /or ossa. Clase, jusit; for classe, jussit.
Acera/or acerra.
Telex /or pellex.
A. Faciem /or faciam, &c.
I. Leber, Menerva, praesentebos ; for praesentibus.
E. Versus, voster ; for Versus, vester.
V. Servos, volnus/or Servus. Dicont/or dicunt.
AV. Coda/or Cauda ; plostrum/or plauslrum, &c.
OEanrfOI,/orV. Coerare,/or curare. Oilier, oitiJe./or utier, utile.
&c.
Consonant,
as
E. Dicundo, faciundo, ferundo ; for dicendo,
I. Optumus, Maxumus, jestumare.
O. Adulescens, epistula ; for adolescens, ice.
Y. ^guptus, Sulla, Surius ; for iEgyptus, &c.
P. Obtimus/or optimus.
G. Cenas, lece, lecio ; for Genas, lege, legio.
L. Fidius, dingua; for Filius, lingua.
R. Fedetrius /or feretrius.
B. Af virod/or ab viro. Sifilus/or sibilus.
D. Delicat /or dedicat.
R. Conflacuit for confracuit.
C. Pequnia/or pecunia.
D. Arlabi, arfinis; for Adiabi, adfinis.
D. Assum, asveisa ; for Adsum, adverta.
R. Asa, casmen, minose; /or Ara, carmen, minorc.
J). Alexanter, Cassantra, Set for sed. Quit/or quid.
B. Vobem /or bovem.
They have also frequently preserved the final letters of prepositions in com-
pound words without changing them, Inlustris, atiectus, Conlega, &c.
5 Ausom /or aurum. Exfociont /or efifugiunt. Prodigos /or prod i-
r Adecito/or adicito. Addeictos for addictus. Continoeis for continuis. Dei-
\cundo/or dicendo. Endo/or in. Fasis /or farris. Fousiosos/or furiosus. Max-
In both < sumo /or maximo. Oloi /or illi. Poplosjfor populus. Poplei /or populi. Pra;.
I i seted /or prffsente. Proxsumos /or proximus. Sopera /or supra. Faxsitybr
^ ^fecerit. Rupsit/er ruperit. Jousit, jousus, /or Jussit, &c.
I Both, as
Of orthography. 285
Chapter XIH.
Of the genuine Orthography to be observed at present,
SUCH was the manner of writing that obtained among the
antients. But as custom has departed in many things from
that antiquity, we must see which is the genuine orthography, to
be observed at present in the use of the Latin tongue.
Orthography may be known either by reason, or by authority.
By Reason, when we consider the analogy of the language
and the origin of words : thus we have shewn in the Preterites,
vol. 1. p. 257. that sumo makes sumsi and not sumpsi. Thus we
know that gratia is written with a T, because it comes from
gratus ; and that audacia on the contrary is written with a C, be-
cause it comes from audax, acis. And we learn that delicice ought
to be writ with a C, because it comes from delicatus ; that we
ought to write vindico, and not vendico, as it is in most books, be-
cause we say vindicice, and they both come from rindex.
To reason also we ought to refer the distinction which we find
between certain words, as between ara and harny between abeo
and habeo, and the like.
By Authority, when we follow the manner of writing most
usual in good authors, as when we write caiissa, caussce, because
thus we find it in antient inscriptions, in Cicero, Virgil, and
Quintilian.
But as there are many words, concerning which the learned
are divided, and others that are written two different ways, for
instance, neglego or negligo, Jieri or here, we shall therefore subjoin
an orthographical list of the best authority.
List of some particular words, whose orthography may
be depended upon.
AF.Rius and iErHERius ought to be Arcesso is better than accerso, be-
wiitten with an i in the penul- cause it comes from arcio, compounded
tima, according to Aldus ; and the of ar for ad, and of cio, to call. For
antient copies favour it, as also the the r used to be put for d, as we shall
Greek analogy asjio?, aiSegioj. Yet see presently. This verb hath been
we may write them with an E, as already taken notice of in the Pre-
well because we find it thus written terites. There are some who dis-
in some antient copies, as because tinguish between these two words, as
they are more consonant to the Latin Charisius, Diomedes, and Agroetius,
analogy, which says, igneus, malleus, who pretend that accerso is taken for
&c. to bring or la call i and arcesso for to
Anachorita is commonly written accuse, to appeal, or to repel. But Ter.
with an i, and thus we find it in St. Scaurus and Veljus Longus reject this
Jerom and in Calepine. Yet it would distinction, affirming that whichever
be better with an E, because it does way it be written, it preserves the
not come from avayui^i^ai , recedere facio, same signification, and is never taken
but from ava;;^ajjE»), recedo. for arcere, to repel, or keep of. And
Appur.Eius, see lower down, Sail. therefore it ought to be wrote according
Apsis or Absis, see the Heteroclites. to its real derivation.
Artus
285
NEW METHOD,
Book IX.
Artus occurs in aiitient manuscripts
for Arctus, close, narrozo, though wc
cannot condemn the latter, which was
first introduced for the sake of dislin-
guishing it from arlus, a joint.
AucTOR. When it comes from cm-
geo, there is no sort of doubt but it
ought to take a 0, as audor patrimo-
nii : or auct'ir, an auctioneer (seethe
Preterites, vol* 1. p. 2^4.) But when
it is taken for the person who begins,
or is the author of a thing, then there
issomedoubt. Theantient inscriptions
and MSS. make use of C even in this
sen'^e ; which Vossius \n his Etymolo-
gist approves of. And others give also
this reas(in, that it is then, quasi Actor.
But in French we ought always to write
it without either C or H. Auteur,
AUTORITE, &C.
Bf.niV'iius occurs in antient wri-
ters for Benevolus And reason seems
to confirm it, because the E is fre-
quently changed into I in roniposition.
Benivolus, says Beda in his Orthogra-
phy, and malivolus, malificus, just as of
pace is formed pacificus.
BuciNA was said for Boccina, ac-
cording to St. Isidorus. And thus we
find it in antient MSS. and inscrip-
tions.
CfliSTiJS and Cestus, which a great
many confound, (lught to be distin-
guished, accordinir to Serviu-. For
the latter is feminine, and siirnifies the
waist of a new married wonian, or of
Venus, and comes from x^vteTV, pun-
gere, because it was marked with little
points. But the firmer is masculine,
signifying the arms of fencers, and
comes from C(E(Io.
Sin ciuilo fidit pugnattt commitlere
cfPslu, Virg.
C/ETERA, because it is said for 5
tTi^a., though we find It with a simple
e in old MSS. and inscriptions.
Cecjdi, and not CiEctoi, • with (p,
thounh it ronies from cadu, because
the a" is what is dKimrt-d into i long,
and the first syllable is only an auument.
See the Preterites, v. 1 . p 1 12.
CtBLUM, because it comes from xoTxov,
tavum.
CoEPi, to signify J A«pe 6cg«rt, from
the old verb caepio. For cpi comet h
from cnpto. See the Preterites, rule 28,
vol. 1. p. 210.
CoNviciuM ought to be written
with a C and not with a T in tlie pe-
nultima, either bi^cause it comes from
vkus, according to F«-stus, or because
it is said fur canvocium, according to
Labeo, by reason it is only a confusion
of sonn<ls and reproaches.
CuLciTA is better than Cui.citra,
according to Vossius, a mattress, a
feather bed.
DisTRiCTUs and Destrictus, are
both good. But Phrigius will have
it that the latter on>.;ht ever to be
wrote, having the authority of antient
MSS.
Edepol and not Oedepcl, as some
pretend who derive it from ab cede Pol-
lucii, but it is compounded of three
words, me, dens, Pollux, sup. adjiivet.
Therefore edepol is for medipol, in the
same manner as we still say ecnstor or
mecaslor, for me Castur, sup. udjuvet.
which are forwis of swearing in use
among the antients. "
F.pHEBiuM or Ephebeum, is the ge-
nuine writing; as in (Ireek t<fh0iav or
l<pyi8iiov, and not Epk(ehntm, or Ephe-
bcrum, as some will have it.
EpisTur.A and Adulescens ever occur
with a U in antient copies. But
epistola and adrJescens are become so
familiar at present, that it would seem
grating to the ear to pronounce thein
otherwise.
Ethtca is better than .^tiiica,
says Vossius, because it comes from
riBiKr). Yet there are many who write
it with te, for which reason one may
doubt whether we might not comply
with this custom; just as we may
write sC(znu in compliance with cus-
tom, though it comes from ewni, as we
shall presently see.
Fecunbus, Felix, Femina, Fe'nus,
Fetus, and their derivatives are better
with a simple E, than with a diphthong,
as we find them in antient inscriptions
and MSS.
Inchoo or Incoho, have been always
the subject of dispute among gramma-
rians. Yet Verrius and Servius are for
the latter.
Increbesco, Increbui, is the genuine
writing, and not incnbresco, inciebnd :
just like rubesco, and others. Yet we
say nigresco, which may favour the
other way of writing.
Internundinium. Thus we ought to
write it, accordmg to Victorious, and
not interniindi'ium.
Lachryma or Lacryma : the latter
is preferable, because it comes from
Xa the augmentative particle, and xju-
(uoc, frig'is, tears being only a cold hu-
mour that drops from the brain : hence
Festus takes notice that the antients
wrote dacrynot taking it from Jix^w-
Of orthography.
287
/A», which is the same as Jaxpuj, fri-
gttS.
Levis ought to be written with a
simple e, whether it signifies light or
smoolk, because the latter comes from
^E~«f, and the Greek diphthong « is not
changed into the Latin <c, but into i,
or e long. Thus the whole difference
is that levis, smooth, has the first sylla-
ble long by nature, and levls, light, has
the first short. But Itevus, left-handed,
unlucky, is written with aa <e, because
it comes from Xai'cf.
Marcius Narbo, or Mahtius. Vos-
«ius is for the former, because we find
that the colony was sent to Narbonne,
under the consulate of Marcius and
Porciui : but the latter occurreth in an
antient inscription of the town of Nar-
bonne, intending perhaps to allude to
the name of Mars, for the greater ho-
nour of its founder.
Ne ought to be written with a plain
e, even when it affirmeth, says Vos-
•ius, instead of nee: though Aldus is
for the latter, because it comes from
the Greek vat. But all the antients
write it with a simple e : concerning
which see Faernus, Malaspina, and
Lambinus.
NuMus or NuMMus. The former ap-
pears more natural, for it is derived
from vojwo?, lex, because money was in-
vented to serve as a law in commerce.
But the latter is also received, be-
cause consonants used frequently to be
tloub'ied.
OciOR and not Ocvon, readier, be-
cause it comes from the comparative
iijttov, and not from tlie positive «xuj.
Opperior for expecto, and not ope-
rior.
Parcimonia with a C, rather
than with an S, as well because it
comes from parco, like alimania from
ulo, as because it is favoured by antient
copies.
Patricios with a C, and not Patri-
TiCs, because it is derived « patribus
ciendis, according to Velleius, and
others. The same ought to be sahl of
^dilicius, tribunicius, ficticius, novicius,
which should be written with a c, as
Priscian proveth. And this is also the
opinion of Aldus and Vossius.
Pentecontarchus, and not Pekta-
contarchus, because it comes from
vetrnnnra., quinquaginla, and the MSS.
favour it. This observation would be
useless, if we did not see a number of
fine editions in which it is written with
an a.
Perlego is more usual at present,
though the antients said pellegn, in the
same manner as inlellfgo or inlelligo, as
appears by the testimony of Terentian,
Scaurns, and Vossius.
Poena with ce and not « contrary to
the opinion of Mar. Corradus, by rea-
son it comes from ttoivii.
P OE N I T E T notwithstanding occurs
sometimes with ce ; which may make
us i)ut up with the other, though it is
always best to write it with a, as wc
find it in exjellent MSS,
PoMCERiuM ought to be writ with ce,
since it comes ftom- pone and mcerus,
according to Varro. Yet we find pome-
rium in antient authors.
PoRcius with a C, and not PoRTn;s.
For the Porcian family at Rome, of
which Cato was descended, took their
name from the word Purcus.
Pr^dium with IE and not Proidium
with ce.
Pr^elium. Thus it is always writ ;
and yet Vossius maintains against
Frischlinus, that we ought to write it
prcelium : for since M cometh from
the AI of the antients, as our OE
from their 01, it appears that they
wrote proilium, as well by the authority
of Capella, who says, sed proilium,
Oinonem, similidque plane exoleverunt,
as by the testimony of Muretus, who
says that in Plautus it was proilium, for
prcelium, where the common editions
have put proilio.
QuATUOR and not QrjATruon, as Aldus
pretendelh ; because it is contrary to
the antient MSS. as well as to etymo-
logy, since it comes from qualer.
QuicQUiD, rather than QuioatjiD,
according to Priscian and Victorious j
and it appears by Quintilian that this
question had been started so early as
his time, and that a great many were,
for writing it with a C : ne interrogars
bis videretur, as he says ; but he him-
self pays no great regard to it; verUm,
these are his words, hcec jam inter ipsas
ineptiat evanuerunt.
Rh.-etia with M, because the Greek's
call these people paiToi: though the-
old inscriptions vary.
Rhythmus, thus we ought to
write it, and not rhytmus, with a sin-
gle aspiration. For it comes from
pvQfxi;.
RiPH-Ei, and not Rip,«i, though
it comes from pi-rraw, because the te-
nuis is changed into an aspirate, says
Vossius, and it is confirmed by antient
MSS. • - •■
Sjepes,
288
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
SiEPES, S.'EPIOS, S^PIMENTUM, which
are commonly wrote with a simple e,
occur wiih a diphthong in antient copies,
as Pierius, Giffaaius, and Vossius have
observed. And thus they ought to be
wrote.
Sallustius, and not Salusliiis. Ap-
puLKios and not Apule'ius, thou;;h it is
otherwise in books. But this is contrary
to antient inscriptions.
But we must say Lucilius and not
Lucillius, because it is authorized by
the antient copies, and likewise byana-
Jogy, for it is the same as Servilius.
ScENA or ScjENA, neither of them is
bad. The former is more agreeable to
analogy, because it comes from (rurivri :
and the second has the authority of an-
tient copies and of inscriptions, which
seems preferable. Even Varro writes
SCiENA and ScjEptrum, though he owns
that Actius wrote scena, and others
sceplrujn.
ScRiPsi, Nupsi, &c. with ps, and not
b, thouch it comes from scribo, nubo,
&c. The reason hereof may be seen
above, chap. 8. n. 1. p. 268.
Sescunx and Sexcunx, which Calepin
confounds, ought to be distinguished.
For the former, as Budeus observes in
the beginning of his book de Asse, is
an ounce and a half ; and the latter
signifieth iix ounces, as if it were sex-
unx, the c being only a letter added,
pursuant to what we have already ob-
served, chap. ] 1.
And sextinx, is of the same analogy
zs quincunx, sfptunx, and the rest.
SiDUS, which is often written with a
y, should never be wrote so, this letter
being reserved only for words derived
from the Greek, which is not at all the
case of sidus, whether we take it from
insido, according to Varro, or from
elsewhere.
SiLVA ought always to be put with
a simple ;, though it comes from tixi),
and not from Sileo. The same must be
said of !>ilvanus, JEneas Silvius, Rhea
Silvia, Which is proved by the autho-
rity of antient MSS. and even by the
Greeks, who in translating these words
write, 2iXuttvo?, Zi'xua?, 2iX0»a, as may be
seen in Strabo, Plutarch, Suidas, and
others.
SoLEMNE, rather than solenne, as
it is written by those who derive it
from s'llus and annus, Tor the antient
MSS. have solemne, and Sanctius is
strongly for this orthography, because,
as Festus observeth, it comes from
the old word soUus, which in the Os-
cian language signified totus, whence
also Cometh Sullers, according to
the same author. So that the word
solemne does not properly signify what
is done every year, as they pretend, but
what is done commonly and usually,
or principally and chiefly j with a so-
lemn and extraordinary apparatus, and
even with a particular sense of reli-
gion, as much as to say o'Xoc <re^v3f,
tolus a'iguslus d; venerandus. Hence we
find, Nuptiarum solemnia ani\ funerum
siilemnia, in Tacitus and other writers.
Cicero understood it thus, when he
said, Tantum igilur nostrum illud so-
lemne servemus, ut neque iitkiic euntem
sine Uteris dimiitamus ; our religious, or
our usual custom, ice. and Pliny, Certe
novm nuptm intranles, etinm solemne ka-
bent pastes en allingere, have this re-
ligious or usual custom. And Justin,
lib. 42. c. 4. Sed fatum ParlhicE fecit,
in qua jam quasi solemne est reges parri-
cidas habere, where it is a usual thing
to see kings that have been parricides ;
and Horace, Insanire putas solemnia me,
lib. 1. epist. 1. that is, KATA' solem-
nia, according to the custom of the
world. And lib. 4. od. 11. 3ui dies
jure solernnis mihi snncliorque pene nalali
proprio. In like manner Virgil in this
passage of the 5th Book of the ^neid.
Annua vota tamen solemncsque ordine
pompas : for solemnes means there only
prtEcellentes, which is perfectly expressed
by the French word solemnel, though
several have been led into a mistake by
this passage, because of the precedent
words, annua vota.
SoLLisTiMUM, according to all the
antient copies, and not snlistimum.
Spelsum, a den, ought to be writ-
ten, one would think, with an IS, in
the second, because it comes from o-tt^
V""' Yet in the old copies it is
written with a simple E, which is au-
thority sufficient,
Sur.FUK, and not sulphur, because
the <}> was never admitted into Latin
words, and ought to be used only in
those of Greek original.
SUBOLES is better than snbules, not
only because we find it written thus in
antient copies, but because it comes
from su bole SCO,
SuBsicivA, or SuBSECivA, and not
succissiva. For which we have the au-
thority of the best MSS. and of the
antient inscriptions ; and it is likewise
agreeable to analogy, because it does
not come from surcido, but from subseco,
according to Vossius.
T/ETEB,
Of LETTERS, ^c, 289
Tjeter, and not Uter, according to logy favours it, for in Greek we say
the antient copies. tjottaiov, though most moderns now
Thus or Tus. See the Genders, vol. write Troph«um.
i. p. 20. ViNEA and Tinea, are always written
ToFOs, and not Tophus, because it ia with an e in the penultima, though
not of Greek original. Ursinus mentions his having seen them
Trop£Um, as we find it in antient somewhere with an i.
MSS. and inscriptions : and the ana-
Chapter XIV.
Of some other Remarks on Orthography.
I. Of Words that ought to begin with Capitals.
TH E Romans had no other letters but capitals. But since
small letters have been introduced, it is proper to observe,
where the capitals ought to be placed.
Words beginning with a capital are therefore;
I. Proper names, as, Moses, Homerus, Cicero, Roma, and evea
adjectives formed of those words, as Mosaicus, Homericus, CicerO'
nianus, Romanus, &c.
Our Saviour's name is likewise wrote often in capitals out of
jespect, Jesus Christus.
II. Nouns that in some measure supply the place of a proper
name ; as Dominus for Christ. Fo'eta for Virgil. As also those
of arts and dignities, as Rhetorica, Astrologin, Rex, Dux, &c.
Those of festivals, Fnscha. In short, all those that are intended
to be any way remarkable or to make a figure in discourse. But
you must avoid using too many.
III. Words that begin a new period. Yet when the period
is very short, you may be satisfied with a small letter, as we shall
shew hereafter.
IV. The beginning of every verse ought also to be distinguished
by a capital.
II. Of those Words which the Romans expressed by a
few letters only.
The Romans generally expressed their proper names by a few
letters orily. Some by a single letter, as A for Aulus.: others by
two, as CN for Cnceus : others by three, as MAN for Manliiis^
and the like, which may be seen in the pi-eceding book of Particular
Observations, chap. 1. n. 1. p. 227.
The inverted letters signified the proper names of women, as
j^ for Marcia, 3 for Caia, as already hath been mentioned, p.
229. but 3 likewise stood for the syllable con, as ojux for conjiix,
oliberta for conliberta, &c.
F by itself made Filtus, N. Nepos, M. F. or M. N. Marci
Jilius, Marci nepos, and so for the rest. Q. sometimes stands for
Quintus, sometimes for Qmestor, and sometimes for Qtiirites, ac-
cording to Diomedes.
Vol. II. U P. C.
^90
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
P. C. makes Pafrcs Comcripti, R. P. Respublica, P. R. Pupulus
Jiomamis, S. P. Q. R. Seiiafits Popidiisque Romanus, S. C. Sctiatns
ConsuUtim, Cos. Consul. Coss. ConsuleSt H. Sestertius, a small -
sesterce. See what has been said in the preceding book of Ob-
servations, chap. 3. p. 235.
When the same letter is repeated, it frequently is a mark of
the superlative ; thus B. B. is as if it were twice beve, bene, and
for optime, or even for boni, boni, that is, optimi. In like manner
F. F. s\gn\^es Jo)tissi7m, or Jclicissimi, P. P. piissimi, L. L. ttben-
tissime ; or locus laudabilis, a lemarkable passage in a book, says
Valerius Probus, as the Greeks used to put a ;^ to signify ^^-nrov or
Xfio-'/Aov, and on the contrary a to signify things which they
thought worthy of censure or blame. M. M. merilissbno, ot maluSf
mains, that is pessiijius.
III. Of the right manner of putting Syllables together.
I. When a consonant happens to be between two vowels, it
must always be put with the last, as a-tnor, le-go, &c.
II. If the same consonant be doubled, the first shall belong to
the former syllable, and the second to the latter, as au-nus, flam-ma.
III. Consonants that cannot be joined together at the beginning
of a word, generally speaking, are not joined together in the
middle, as ar-duas, por-cus. Though there are some examples of
the contrary in Greek, as Ix^^'os, liostis.
IV. But consonants that may be joined together in the be-
ginning of a word, ought also to be joined in the middle without
parting them. And Ramus pretends that to act otherwise is com-
mitting a barbarism. Therefore we ought to join
bd. he-bdomas,^
'^bdellium.
cm. Pyra-cmon,
xyAXsO^x, tabes.
en. te-chna,
Cneus.
ct. do-ctus,
Ctesiphon.
gn. a-gnus,
gnatus.
mn. o-mnis,
JVInemosyne.
p/i^/i.na-phtha,
phthisis.
ps. scri-psi,
psittacus.
pt. a-ptus,
sb. Le-sbia,
) because tve
say (
Ptolema^us.
so. pi-scis.
scamnum.
sm. Co-smus,
smaragdus.
sp. a-sper,
spes.
sq. te-squa,
squamma.
St. pa-stor.
sto.
tl. A-tlas,
Tlepolemus.
tm. La-tmius,
Tmolus.
in. iE-tna, ^
^vni<7xw.
Exception to this Rule.
Words compounded of prepositions are an exception to this
rule, since in these we must ever separate the compounding parti-
cle, as in-erSf ab-esse, abs-triisus, ab-domenf dis-cors, &c.
And
Of punctuation. 291
And the same judgment we ought to form of other compounds,
asjuris-consultus, alter-uter, amphis-bcena, et-etiim, &.c.
IV. Of some Other paiHicular Mm^ks.
When a vowel is dropped at the end of a word, we put over
it a small comma, called apostrophe, as egon', ain*, viden*, Jiostin*^
&c. for egone, aisiie, videsne, nostine. And this figure, though rare
among the Latins, is very common in French and in Greek.
When we want to separate one vowel from another, we put
two points over them, as aeniy to show that they must not be pro-
nounced tsra ; iii a dissyllable, to show that it must not be pro-
nounced vi in one syllable, as in Ovid.
Ne temere in mediis dissoluantur aquis :
where the verse would be good for nothing, were we to read dis-
solvantiir in four syllables.
When we want to draw two words into one, we put a small line
between them, as in Virgil nnte-malorum. This is what the an-
tients called vip' h, unitio. And its figure is sometimes thus~.
Chapter XV,
Of Punctuation.
THE manner of pointing, that is, of making stops or pauses
in discourse, seeraeth arbitrary, and to differ in some mea-
sure according to the idiom in which a person writes, and evea
according to the particular turn of style which lie has formed : yet
since it has some foundatii n in reason, we shall mintion what is
most observable in regard to this subject, according to the practice
now established among n)ost of the learned.
I. Of Three Sorts of Dist'mctiois.
The distinction observed in discourse, either in speaking or
writing, is threefold.
The first is only a light breathing, or a short pause, which seems
designed only to sustain tl)e voice, and to avoid obscurity and
confusion: this is called xo/x/ixa, in Tully incisiim. that h, fragment,
or a part cut off, and is marked by a small c inverted thus ( , )
which we call comma or virgida. The Greeks give it another
name, t-Tror^y/u.*), and the Latins subdistmclio, for a reason we shall
mention hereafter.
The other is a longer pause, that takes in a greater part of the
, sentence, but still leaves the mind in suspense, and in expectation
of what follows. This is called /iae3-», media, whence comes the
French word mediation, or y.Z\ov, viembriim : and it is marked with
two points thus ( : ) Bat this pause is subdivided, as we shall show
presently, the one which is the complete member, being marked
with two points ; and the other with a point and a virgula, which
some call a semicolon.
u 2 The
292 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
The third is that which finishes and renders the sentence en-
tirely perfect ; it is called period, and is marked with a single point
at the erid of the last word, thus ( . ). The Latins call it ambitus^
or circuitus ; and the Greeks Tt>.nx r<y/x»j, perfect distinction.
True it is that the antients did not make use of all these dif-
ferent marks. For having hut the point only, if they put it at
the bottom, they made it their comma, which for this reason was
called subdistiiictio ; if they put it to the middle of the last word
they made it their c don, or media distinctio : and if they put it to
the top, it was their period or period sentence, as may be seen
in Diomedes, lib. 2. in Donatus, ed. 1. cap. ult. in St. Isidore,
lib. 1. Orig. cap. 19. And it is likewise the opinion of Alstedius,
Mncyclop. lib. 6. de Grammat. Latino, cap. 19. and of Melancthon
in his grammar. Though Gaza at the end of his grammar says,
that if they put the point to the middle, they made it their com-
plete sentence ; and if they put it to the top, it was their middle
sentence, that is, their colon or mediation. This is also the opi-
nion of Vergara, lib. (4. Gramm. Vossius in his small grammar,
p. 272, says, that if tliey put the point to the middle of the final
letter, they made it their comma : if they put it to the top, they
made it their olon ; and if they put it to the bottom, their period.
But as he quotes Donatus and St. Isidore, it is likely he meant
something else; the opinion of these authors being clearly expressed
in the above-mentioned passages.
II. OJ the Comma.
The use of commas is particularly necessary, when we are to
make several distinctions, either in nouns, as
Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes, Juven.
In like manner,
Nonjbrmosa, sed prudens.
But if there be a copulative conjunction, some are of opinion that
it will not admit of a comma, and others will have it here like-
wise ; as Vir magnus, pius & doctiis, or Vir magnus, pitis, et doctus.
If the conjoined words are synonymous, there is more reason to
take away the comma, as Doctrind Sj erudiiione clarus atque il"
iustris.
In verbs, as Hortari, orare, monere non desinit.
Feras, non culpes, quod viiari nun potest, Publ. Syr.
In adverbs, as, Serius, ocius, necesse cunctis est mori.
The comma serves also to distinguish the sense and the mem-
bers when they happen to be very short, and to have a particular
connexion, as when Horace says,
Nos numerus snmus, ^'J^'^g^s consumere nati,
Again,
Qmo semel est imbuta recens, servabit odorem
Testa diu. Id.
The comma is likewise necessary to prevent ambiguity, and to
render the sense clear and distinct ; as Summa fjuidem auctoritate
philosophi, severe, sane atque honeste, hccc tria genera corifusa, cogita-
tione distinguunt, Cic. If there had not been a comma after corifusa^
it would seem to refer to cugitatione, which is contrary to sense.
III. 0/
Of PUNCTUATION. 293
III. Of the Colon, or Two Points,
The two points denote indeed a complete construction and the
sense already perfect in itself; but which requires nevertheless
something after it to end the sentence. Thus when tiiere are two
members in a sentence, each of which has its particular verb, as
Ante omnia necesse est seipsum cestimare: quiaj'erej)lus nobis videm.us
posse, guant possimus, Senec.
Nee verbum verbo curabis reddere,Jidus
Interpres : nee desilies imitator in arctum,
Unde pedem referre pudor vetet, aut operis lex, Hor.
But if the period be long, each member is distinguished by two
points, as when Cicero speaking of people of property, useth
these words, Quce primum (res familiaris) bene part a sit, nul(6que
turpi qucestu, negue odiosn, turn (juamplunmis, modo dignis, se utilem
prcebeat : deinde augeatur ratiune, diligentia, parsimonid : nee libi'
dini potiics luxuriceqice, quam liberalitati 8^ benejipentia parent.
Offic. I.
IV. Of the Full Point or Period.
The period, as we have already taken notice, ought to com^
elude with a point, shewing that the sentence is complete. Novi?
we may observe two sorts of periods, the one short and the other
somewhat longer. The short, as
Oderunt peccare boni viriutis amore. Hor.
And then if there are many of them collected in one series, they
are distinguished, it is true, by a point ; but this point is followed
only by a small letter, as in Seneca, Non est Jides nisi in sapiente,
apud sapieniem sunt ipsa konesta, apud vulgum simulacra rerum ho-
nesturum. And if this happens in verse, as verse must necessarily
begin with a capital, you must be satisfied with putting two
points, as in the same passage of Horace, whence the above
v£rse was taken.
Tu nihil admittes in tejbrmidine pcencs :
Sit spesjallendi, miscebis sacra profanis, lib. 1. ep. 16.
Sometimes even in prose, and in long periods, we may put
either a capital after two points, or a small letter after a point
only, in order to render the sense more distinct, and to increase the
pauses, by a greater variety of punctuation.
For an example of the pointing of long periods, we shall give
the following, which is no less remarkable for the sense, than for
the expression : Si quis est paulo erectior, quamvis voluptate capiatiir,
occidtnt, 8^ dissimidat appetitum voluptatis, propter verecundiam, ex
quo intelligitur corporis voluptatem non satis esse dignam hominis prce-
stantid, eamque contemni Sf rejici oportere : sin sit quispiam qui ali-
^uid tribuat voluptati, diligenter ei tenendum esse ejusfruendce modmn.
Jtaqiie victus cultusqu£ corporis ad valetudinem refer antur, <^ ad vires,
non ad voluptatem. Atque etiam si considerare volumus, quce sk in
Tiaturd excellentia Sf dignitas : intelligemus quam sit turpe diffiuere
luxurid, 8^ delicate, ac molliter vivere : qudmque honestum parccy
continenter, severe, sobrieque, Cic. Offic. 1.
V. Of
294 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
V. Of the Se^nicolon, or Point and Comma.
To the three preceding punctuations a fourth is added, namely
the point and comma, called a semicolon ; which denotes a pause
somewhat longer than the comma, but less than the two points.
As in this example out of Cicero : Etsi ea perturbatio est omnuim
rerum, ut sua quonquefortuncc vxaxime pcenitent ; ncmoqne sit quin
ubi vis, quhm ibi, ubi est, esse malit ; tamcn mihi dubnim nan est, quin
hoc tempore, bono viro Roma esse, miserrimtim sit, Epist. ad Torq.
And in Gellius, Cogitate cum animis vcstris, si quid vos per labo-
rem rede Jeceritis ; labor ille <rJ vobis cito recedet ; benefactum h
vobis, dum vivetis, non nbscedet. Sed si qua per vohiptatem nequiter
Jeceritis, voluptas cito abibit ; nequiter factum illud apud vos semper
manebit, Cato apud Gell.
These examples exhibit all sorts of punctuations. But the
point and comma particularly takes place in things opposite or
contrary ; or when we make an enumeration of several parts, as
propria, aliena ; publico, ^nivata ; sacra, projana, &c.
VI. Of the Point of Interrogation and Admiration.
Interrogations have also the following mark by which they are
signified, thus ( i* ) Parumne igititr, inquies, gloria relivqiiemns?
Cic. shall tve then leave but little glory, you mil say? But the
Greeks make use of the point and comma for this purpose, r/
iToUts; quidjacis?
If the sentence is so far protracted, that the interrogation which
appeareth in the beginning, seems to slacken and lose its force,
then the mark of interrogation is omitted, as here, An tu putas
esse viros bonos, qui amicitias utilitate sua colunt : nihil ad humani'
iatem, nihil ad hone&tum rejerunt ; nee libenter ea curant, qua ego
nisi curnrem prater catera, prorsus me tua benevolentia, in qua mag"
namjelicitatis mea partem soleo ponere, indignum putarem.
Some make use also of a point of admiration, which is thus
formed (!) as me perditwn ! me offlictum ! O tempora ! O
mores ! &c.
[ ^95 ]
BOOK X.
OF
PROSODY.
Section I.
Of the Quantity of Syllables.
THIS treatise of quantity shows the right measure of syl-
lables, in order either to make verses, or to pronounce prose
in a proper manner, by preserving the tone and accents.
Quantity is therefore, properly speaking, the measure of eacli
syllable, and the time we ought to keep in pronouncing it, ac-
cording to which some are called short, others long, and others
common.
The short have this mark ( " ) and are equivalent only to half
a long one.
The long have this other mark ( " ) and ought to last as long a^
two short ones.
The common are those which are sometimes short, and at othei*
times long in verse. We have distinguished them here by this
mark ( " ) which partakes of the other two.
Now this measure of syllables is known either by rules, or by
the authority and reading of poets. The rules are either general
or particular, as we are going to explain them.
But we are first to observe that syllables are long or short, either
by their nature, or by accident, that is on account of the place
where they are put, and the letters that follow them, which is
called Position. Thus the first in patris is short by nature, because
it comes from pater, which first is short. But as it is followed by
two consonants, it may be also long.
On the contrary prcs is long by nature, because it is a diph-
thong ; but in compound words, if it precedes a vowel, this sort of
position renders it short, as prcuire.
Sometimes a syllable is long, both by nature and position, as
aicster.
But though it may be said that it is by position one voyfel is
short before another, just as it is long when it precedes two con-
sonants ; yet generally speaking we use this word position, only
to signify the latter sort of long syllable*.
RUI<3SS
296 NEW METHOD. Book X.
'Rules of the Quantity of Syllables.
General Rules.
Rule I.
Every syllable formed by contraction is long.
Examples.
AS often as two syllables are joined or contracted
into one, this syllable so forn^ed by contraction
is long ; as cogo for cdago or cdtuigo ; coperuisse for
cijbperidsse, Lucr. ml for ?i1,hil ; tiblcen for tibucen ; tt
for lit ; mi for imhi ; *vemens for veh^Jtiens, Hor. and
the like.
ANNOTATION.
WE place this rule the first, because it is the most general,
and may serve for an introduction and inlet to a great
many others. For example, a diphthong is properly no more
than the union and contraction of two syllables, or of two vowels
into one syllable, as 7vusce for mvsni, &c. Thus Mnesthcus a dis-
syllable for Mnesthtiis a triss)llable ; Orpheus for Orp/itus, and
the like have the last long; because these two syllables are con-
tracted into one by a Syneresis, of which we shall have occasion to
speak hereafter.
In like manner alms is long,' because it comes from almis ; am-
iapes, because it comes from ambe and ago, from whence was first
formed amOeages, and afterwards anibFiges ; blgcr, tilga', quadrlgee,
because they come from btjugce, U'ijiigce, giiadrtJuQcc, &c. bobus
or bubus, because it is instead of bovibus ; Juiaor, because it is
instead of Juvaiinr ; nonus instead of novenvs ; malo instead of tna
(or magisj volo ; i-iipeudiinn instead of.stipipendh/m ; indago because
jt comes from induago composed of indu for in and ago. And a
multitude of others ; which \\ e shall toke iu)tice of hereafter.
For we must remember what has been said in the preceding
treatise of letters, which ought to be considered as the foundation
of this of quantity ; that the antients used formerly to write the
long syllables with two vowels, as vcenit for renit long in the
preterite, instead of ren// short in the present: for which reason
the former hath twice the time or measure of the latter.
But we must distinguish between a syllable cut oft' by Syncope
and that which is joined to another by Syneresis, as for instance
smi homo for semi homo ; smt animis for senil avimis : for whatever
is cut off and taken away, can have no manner of influence on
the next syllable, which therefore remaineth always in its natural
state. This we shall make appear on sundry occasions in the
sequel.
Ru LK
Of quantity. Si^l
Rule II.
Of Diphthongs.
1. Hence all dlphthojigs are long.
2. Except that prae is shorty when it precedes
a vowel.
Examples.
1. Therefore diphthongs are always long; diS foe-
Kumy aurum, eurus ; because they are in some mea-
sure a contraction or union of two vowels into one
syllable.
2. Yet the preposition prce is short in composition,
when followed by another vowel; iisprcEest,prceustus,
prceij^e.
Jamque novi ^\2^e\^xii fasces , nova purpura fulget.
ANNOTATION.
Statius however made it long, having regard to the nature of
the diphthong, and not to the subsequent vowel.
Cum vacuus domino praeiret Arion, Th. 6.
The first in Mceotis is doubtful.
Et Moeotica teilus, Virg.
Longior miiiquis visa Moeotis fiycms, Ovid.
Which is owing to this, that some considered the nature of the
diphthong, and others the position or place it held, being before
another vowel, pursuant to the next rule. And the same may be
said of rhomphcpa, and rhomphcealis.
We find the first oi cenigma, hceresis, and sphccra, short in Pru-
dentius, as that of hcBmorrhois in Fortunatus. Also the second of
catcechumenus in the same Fortunatus, and that of solcecismus in
Ausonius. Which is by no means to be imitated, since it pro-
ceeds only from the corruption of the language, when, as we
have observed in the treatise of letters, they wrote the E simple
instead of M and (E, because they no longer pronounced the
diphthong in those words, but the E only.
Rule III.
Of a Vowel before another Vowel.
1. A vowel before another vowel is short.
2. But E between two Vs is long.
3. I i?! the tenses of ho without R, is short.
4. liis in the genitive is doubtful ;
5. But alius is long.
6. And alterius short.
Exam-
^29S NEW METHOD. Book X.
Examples.
]. A vowel followed by another vowel is short; as
justitia, diilcia, Dcus.
Q, But E is long in the genitive and dative of the
fifth declension, when it conies between two Is ; as
dieij speciei. This happens to all nouns of this de-
clension, except these three, Jidei, spci, r'ci, which have
not the E between two ii.
3. I in Jio is long in those tenses that have not an
R, namely fJo, fJam, fu'bam. Where there is an R,
the I is short; 2isJ1,erem, fiey^i.
4. I in the genitives in lus is doubtful, as umuSf
allies, ipsius, tottiis, uirius.
,5. Alius hath I Ions; in the genitive.
6. Alterius hath I short. Which gave occasion to
this verse in Alstedius.
Corripit alterius, semper producit alius.
ANNOTATION.
Solius, is always long in approved authors. AItend7-tus and Neu-
. irtus, are almost always long, though uirius be common.
The penultima is likewise long in aulai, terrai, and other antient
genitives. As also in Cai, Pompei. And 'tis for this very reason
that the nominatives in ejus, or ejaf make E long, Pompeius, Fon-
ieius ; Aquihiat elegtia : and that the genitive and dative of the
fifth have it also long. For they used to say dieii, specieii, &c. and
this they even did in regard to other nouns of tliis declension,
where the e is not between two i. Wc meet with reii in Pruden-
tius, Jideii in St. Paulinus, as well as in Fortunatus and other
Christian poets, concerning which, see also the treatise of Letters,
p. 265.
tieret hath the first long in Terence, Adelph. a. 1. sc. 2.
liijurium est, 7iam si csset, unde id fleret,
Faceremus.
Which proceeds undoubtedly from this, that heretofore, as we
have observed in the Remarks, p. 117. they used to s?iy feireni,Jeiri,
as audeircm, audeiri, and afterwards they transposed yfiV^m into
Jierem. Hence Priscian says that in Jien, there is a resolution of
one long into two short.
The first is long in theit, but doubtful in ohe ; as also in DtanOy
because this word being formed of Dca Jann (for Janus signifies
the sun, and Jana the moon, according to Macrobius and Varro)
some hiive considered it as a word formed by Syncope of two let-
ters, Deana, or D-iana, where the first is short by nature, as pre-
ceding another vowel : while others have considered it as a word
vphich at first only dropped the a, so that it remained l)eia?ia, of
which
Of quantity. 299
which was afterwards formed Diana, the diphthong ei, as may be
seen in the treatise of Letters, being frequently changed into i
long.
Before we go any further, we must say something in regard to
Greek words, becau«e they have oftentimes a great many things
that seem contrary to the foregoing rule.
OF GREEK WORDS.
Of those which are written xvith Long or Short Vowels.
In regard to Greek words, the knowledge of their quantity
ought to be derived from the language itself. For those which
have an ») or w in Greek are long, and such as have an o or an s
are short.
Thus we see that arithmelica, psalterium must have the antepe-
nultima long, . because in Greek we write (X^i9ij.-nrixri, iJ/aXnif/ov.
We see that Troes and Troades have the first long, because in
Greek they are written with an u : we see that Dtlphubus has the
first long and the penultima short, because we write Wi^oQiis.
We see likewise that in Thermodontis the second is long, because
in Greek it is an w, as we find it in Apoll. 2. Argon.
• — iirt Ss fofjua &B^(/,u^o)iTot;,
Hence in Virgil,
Quales Threicia cumjiumma Thermodontis
Ftdsanty &c.— ■■- ^n. 11.
It is a mistake to read Thermodoontis ; as Pierius hath observed,
and Vossius demonstrated, against those, who wanting to avoid
the spondaic verse have corrupted the quantity : which has hap-
pened also in other places, as we have made appear when speak-
ing of potestur, p. 116. And hereby we see likewise that there
is no necessity for admitting of what Servius saith, that TherniO'
don is a Syneresis instead of Thermodoon.
Of those which are variously writ.
When a word is variously written in Greek, the quantity also
varies in Latin verse. Thus the first is common in Eos, Eons, &c.
because in Greek we write tus, and ^w? : tuos and iiajos. Which Ser-
vius seems not to have sufficiently observed, when he attributes
the making of the first short in Eons to a pure licentia poetica.
The accusative in ea coming from nominatives in ens, have ge-
nerally the e short, as Orphta, Salmovta : but sometimes they have
it long, as Ilioyiia, Ido%nenea, which they seem to borrow of the
lonians, who write these words with an »j.
Of the Thxe Common Vowels.
In regard to the three common vowels, a, /, v, it would lead
«s into a long discourse to treat of them with any exactness. The
most general remark we can make on this head is that the nouns
ending in ais, have generally the penultima long, as NaiSf Lids.
The
300 N E W M E T H O D. Cook X.
The terminations aon or ion have also the penultima long; as
Mnchaon, Lyaion, Amphlon, Pandion, &c. as also the compounds
of Xxoi, Menelaus, Archelaus, Nicolaus, Charilaus.
But these rules are not always certain : for Phaon, Deucalion,
and a great many others, have the penultima short. The penultima
is doubtful in Orion, Gerton, and in Nereides.
Of IVords that have a Diphthong in Greek.
Diphthongs must be always long. Hence we see so many
Greek nouns that have the e or i long in Latin, because in Greek
they are written with n, as Cassiopea, Centaurea, Deiopea, Galatea,
Medea, &c. Also Basilius, Darius, Clio, Elegla, Iphigenia, Anti-
ochia, and such like.
Cause of the Deviation in Greek TVords from the fore-
going Rules*
The Latins nevertheless have frequently deviated from these
rules in regard to Greek words, and for three different reasons.
The first, because taking these words as if they had entirely lost
one vowel of the diphthong, they ceased to consider them as long,
but made them pass for short or common. Hence it comes that
chiragra hath always the first short, according to Vossius, though
in Greek we write yi\^ny^x. And hence Virgil hath:
Vos t'y Cifdopea saxa, JEn. I.
though in Greek it is Kv^XuTjaa. And for the same reason Chorea,
platea, and Malea, a proper name, and some others, have the pe-
nultima common. To these we may also join Academia, though
it is more frequently short, because in Greek it is more frequently
written with an /, than with the diphthong tt.
The second is that they oftener paid more regard (especially in
the latter ages, when the Greek was but little known) to the ac-
cent, than to the orthography in regulating the quantity. Thus
they put eremus, pocsis, idolnm, and such like with the penultima
short, though in Greek we write t^r>ixo<;, tTot-na-ts, ti^uXov, Sec. (where
the penultima is long) only because the accent is on the antepe-
nultima. This has been particularly the practice of ecclesiastic
"Writers, who neither in this respect, nor in whatever relates to
poetry, have been so exact, as to serve f»r any rule to go by.
Thus in the hymn to the Holy Ghost, the word I'aracletus hath
the penultima short, though in Greek it be written with an «,
TIoc^cckXvtos, consolator, which has been owing entirely to the ac-
cent on the antepenultima. And thence proceeds the error of
those who in the Church service have generally wrote Pajoclitus
with an ?', into which they were also led by the bad pronunciation
of those who sound »> like i, though to say the truth, this word
is neither Greek nor Latin.
The third is that the Romans have sometimes appropriated
the Greek words to themselves in such a manner, as to render
them entirely conformable to the analogy of their own language.
Thus they said crepidas, the penultima short, as it came from
crepiturrif
Of QUANTITY. 301
erepition, whereas according to Gellius it comes from x.fviTi^ac.
And in Enoius we find Hectorem long, because he looked upon it
in the same manner as pc^ore???, and the like.
But there are still some words whose quantity is disputed, which
it will be more proper to throw into a separate list at the end of
this treatise, in order to proceed to other rules.
llULE IV.
Of a Vowel long by Position.
A voivel is long, zohen followed by two consonants.
Examples.
A vowel is long, whenever it is followed by two
consonants, or by a double letter equivalent to two
consonants, which is called Position; as at plus,
Deum cole. Carmen, sapiens, &c.
Now the double letters are X, 7L, as aa:is, Gazay
ape .v.
ANNOTATION.
For a syllable to be long by position, there must be at least one
of the consonants in the very syllable lengthened. For if they
are both in the next, this does not, generally speaking, make it
long ; ■dsjrigurej'rondes ; cequora Xo'xes ; scepe stilum vertaSy &c.
Yet it sometimes happens otherwise, as
Ferte citiferrum, date tela, scandite muros, Virg.
Which Catullus and Martial seem particularly to have affected,
as it is very common in Greek.
Rule V.
Of a Mute and Liquid.]
1. Whenever a mute is followed by a liquid in
the same syllable, the preceding short vowel
becomes common in verse;
2. JBw^ remains short in prose.
Examples.
What has been hitherto said, relates to that sort
of position, which they call firm and unchangeable.
But there is still another called weak and change-
able, which is when after one of these seven letters
B, C, D, F, G. P, T, distinguished by the name of
mutes, because they have only a kind of obscure
sound, there follows one of these two, L or R, which
are called liquids or gliding letters. For in that case
the
302 NEW METHOD. Book X.
•the preceding vonfcI, which by nature is short, be-
comes common in verse; that is, it may be put either
long; or short ; as
Et primo similis yo\ucn, mo.v *vera volucris, Otuh
Nov ttnthrds prqjhrt, Fhccbusfugatinck tenebras, Id.
Omne solum Jorti patria est, mihi patria cceluyn.
The same may be said of re//o, replco, poplcs, locu-
pks, and the like.
2. But in prose this position of a mute and liquid,
never lengthens a syllable by nature short ; therefore
it would be wrong to say for example, lociiples, tene-
hrce, the accent on the penultima, when it should be
on the antepenultima.
ANNOTATION.
These liquids have also the same force in Greek words, as Cij-
clops, Pharetra. But besides L and R, this language hath the
liquids INI and N ; as Tecmessa, Ci/gnus, Progne, &c.
The position is weakened in Greek, when the vowel is followed
by vin, or qd, or pt, whence INIartial took the liberty to make the
second short in smaragdus, lib. 5. epigram. 11.
SardoiiJ/chas, smaragdos, adamantns, iaspidas uno.
But we are to take particular notice of two conditions necessary
for this weak and changeable position. The 1. the mute and liquid
must be both in the same syllable. The 2. the syllabic we want
to make common in verse, namely that immediately preceding
these letters, must be short by nature.
Hence the first syllable in ^obruo will be ever long, and not com-
mon, because the first condition is wanting, the br not being in
the same syllable, for it comes from ob and ruo j the same may
be said of obtucor, quamobrcrtiy &c.
Again, the first is ever long in acris, ntri, watr'ts, fratris, for
want of the second condition, because they come from rtt^r, nter,
mater,frater, whose first syllable is long by nature. ^We must say
the same of ambidacnim, candelabrum, dclubrum, lavacrum, simula-
crum, salubre, volutabnim, which arc long by nature, a circum-
stance that has not been always attended to by Christian poets.
Vossius further observeth that this kind of position of mute and
liquid is so weak, that we ought not easily to make use of it, for
the purpose of lengthening a syllable short by nature, without
having some antient authority ; and he adds for example, that he
would not choose to make the penultima long in gcnihix.
Now the weakness of this sort of position is owing to the in-
equality of two consonants, because the liquid gliding away much
nimbler than the mute, to which it is joined in the pronunciation,
it drags the mute in some measure along with it, or produces an
inequality, in consequence whereof the preceding syllable is not
sufficiently sustained, as it is when there happen to be two other
consonants.
Of QUANTITY. 303
consonants, for instance astra, or even two liquids, as terra ; for
•then there is no inequality in the consonants : or when the liquid
is before, as ars, alius, for in that case it is sustained by the fol-
lowing mute : or in sliort when they are in a different syllable, as
abluo, for then the liquid does not draw the mute after it with
such force. This the autionts must have perceived in the pronun-
ciation, though we are hardly sensible of it at present.
JVfietJier 1 he sometimes a Double Letter ^ and V some'
times a Liquid,
To the double letters by us mentioned, grammarians add like-
wise the I, when it happens to be between two vowels, because,
say they, it tlien makes the preceding vowel long by position, as
inajo/f rejicioy aio,. But this error hath been sufficiently refuted in
the treatise of Letters, chap. 6. num. 2. p. 26^, where we proved
that the first syllable in those words was not long by position, but
by nature, and because the antients pronounced it as a diphthong.
For otherwise, the vowel before / must be ever short, as we see in
set7iijncens,jurejurando, antejacit, bijii^us, and others.
They say likewise that the V after Q is a liquid consonant, be-
cause otherwise the first in aqua and the like words, would be
long. But we have also given an answer to this in the same treatise,
chap. 6. n. 2. p. 264-.
Hitherto we have been upon the general rules, we must novr
come to such as are particular, and first of all mention a word
concerning derivatives and compounds, because they relate to
middle syllables.
OF DERIVATIVE WORDS.
WE shall content ourselves with giving an Annotation in
regard to derivatives, because it is very difficult to lay down any
general rules about the matter. Yet we may observe that in ge-
neral they follow the nature of their primitive. Thus antmare
and animosus have the two first short, because they come from
animnx, whose two first are short also. And on the contrary the
two first in natnralis are long, because it comes from nTitura where
they are long also; and the first syllable of this word is long,
because it comes from riFitimi.
. Thus the second is short in vircnneus and sanrriiineus, because of
Its bemg short m virgini and sangiiini. The penultima is long m
aratrum, ambulacruni, volutabrum, because it is the same in arti'.umj
ambulatum, volutatum : but the first is common in Izquidu.it because
sometimes it is derived from llqueo, the first short ; and at other
times from the verb liquor, which hath its first syllable long, when
of the third conjugation. For although we say Itquatur the first
short, we likewise say liquitur the first long : but the noun liquor,
oris, liquor, hath always the first short.
Exceptmis
304 NEW METHOD. Book X.
E.vceptions to the preceding Rule.
There are a great many derivatives shout, though their pri-
mitives be long ; as dux, ducis, from duco ; dicax from dlco ; sopor
from sopio ; sagax from sagio ; ditio from dis, dilis ; Jtdes from
J'ldo, thougli Tully derives it from Jhcio, quia id Jit quod dicihir :
but there is more analogy in deriving it fromjido, just as in Greek
vi'^is comes from ttsI^u, from whence Jido is also derived according
to Vossius. Add to these molcstus from moles, and several others
which may be learnt by use.
There are other derivatives long, though they come from
short primitives; as vox, vocis, from voco ; rex, regis, and regida,
fvom rego ; tegida from tego ; scdcs i'rom sedeo ; macero from macer ;
humor from hi/mus ; humanus from homo ; secius from &ecus ; mals''
dlceidior, the third long from maledicus short, and others which
may be learnt by the use of authors.
But what is most remarkable on this head, is that the deriva-
tives do not follow their primitive, when they drop or add a con-
sonant. For as the first in rtttidit is long, because it reduplicates
the t, though it comes from rcfero the first short : so the following
have the first short, though they come from long primitives, be-
cause they lose a consonant, as disertus from dlssero, farina from
J^ arris ; ciirulis from ciirro, ofella from qffa ; mamilla from mamma ;
tigillum from lignum ; sigillum from slgnum ; and the like.
There are even some that do not follow the analogy of their
nearest primitive, but of another more distant, as y^1^«ws the first
short, which does not foWow J ari the first long, but (paw, from
whence cometh (p^j/x*, dico : as lUcerna the first short, which does
not follow the quantity of lux, but of t?)? Aux^?, whence lux itself '
is derived by contraction instead of lucis : as vadum, the first short,
which does not follow the quantity of vado, the first long, but of
^aJw, from whence comes vado as well as ^cz^ti^u : as likewise notot
which does not follow the quantity of the supine notum, the first
long, but of vow, from whence comes, voio-xw, vuo-ku, y/vwo-xw, and
from thence (rnosco or nosco. And so for the rest.
OF COMPOUND WORDS.
THE quantity of compound words is frequently known by that
of the sin)ple, and the quantity of the simple by that of the com-
pound, which boys will easily discern, provided they are accus-
tomed betimes to the right pronunciation of Latin. For it is the
same quantity in lego ^nd per lego, in legi and perlegi. As also in
pro/jus and improlms ; in scrlbo and adscribo ; in vcnioy advenio, ad'
vena : and the like.
' And this quantity is still preserved, when the vowel comes to
change as in elign, seligo, taken from lego : thus from ciido comes
iccido ; and from ccedo^ occido : from Iccdo, alltdo, coUldo : from
audio, obediu, obedis, &c.
But the following are short, though their primitive be long:
the compounds of dico ending in dicus ; as causidtcus, veridicusy
&c.
Of QUANTITY. 305
Sic. dejero ai\dpejcro, fromjuro .• cognition gnd agnitum, from ywtum,
which are shortened by the analqgy of simple polysyllables ia
itum ; as taciturn, bibitum, &c. nihilum, from ne and hihim ; innu-
ba and prouiiba, from nubo ; but the antepenultima in cunnubmm is
common. For in Virgil we find connubia, the antepenultima long :
and we likewise find it short in co7i?iubio, conniibiis, unless we chuse
to make them trisyllables.
Connuhio J ungam stabili, propriamque dicaba, 1 ^n.
The second is long in imbedUus, though baculus hath the first
short ; and the third is short in semisopitus taken from sopio, the first
long. The participle ambitus hath tlie penultima long, contrary
to the nature of the supine ambitumy as also of these verbal nouns
ambitus and ambitio. Yet Lucretius makes ambitus also short iix
the participle; for which reason Scioppius and Vossius look upon
it as common, because this word is compounded of ambe and ituSy
even according to Varro ; so that when the i is long, it comes
from the diphthong ei, ambitus for ambcitus (as we say ambages
long, from fl^o short, because it is said for ambcages) ; and when
it is short, it conforms to the nature of its supme 2tiim, as the
others aditiis, exitus, imtus, obitus, suhitus, which are always
short, because they are formed without any appearance of contrac-
tion. _ ''''•'■'■■ ■ '■■'■■■' -^
Now ambe comes from a/.vip/, of which was first formed ambi, af-
terwards ambe, the (p being changed into b, just as in ambo taken
from a/Ai^iw : as may be seen in the Treatise of Letters, p. 270.
Rule VI.
Of divers Compounding Particles.
' 1. A, DE, SE, DI, are long, when joined to
verbs or nouns.
2. Yet DI is short in disertus and diremi,
3. Re is short except in refevlfrom^ the noun res.
Examples. ' '
1. All those particles are long in composition,
amitto, deduco, erumpo^ dJripio, separo, and the like.
!2. Di is short in these, d^irimo^ diremi^ du^emptum,
disertus, dlserti, &c.
ANNOTATION.
De sometimes preserveth its long quantity before another
Towel ; as
Deest serxitio plebes hoc ignis egentis, Stat.
"Which deserves more to be remarked than followed. For in
general it is either made short. Dona dthinc auro gravia, JEn. 3. or
it is joined with the following vowel in the same syllable, Deest
Jam terrajugce, JEu. 10.
Vol. II. X 3. R^
306 NEW METHOD. Book X.
3. Re is short in composition, as redeo; refero, re-
fers ; r^Jert, rcjerre^ to tell or relate.
But rcfert, it bthuveth, it concerneth, it is useful, is
long, because it does not come from the particle ?'e,
but rather from the noun res.
PrcEterea nee jam jiiutari pahula refert. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
The poets, in order to lengthen the particle re in composition,
do sometimes reduplicate the following consonant, as retligio, ret-
tulit. Though we must not imagine that they did it always, as
some pretend, not considering that the chief rule of poetry is the
ear, which would be sometimes offended with such reduplications.
Hence in revulvo, r evert o, the consonant is never reduplicated^
because it is contrary to the nature of this V, which perhaps at
that time was not a consonant.
Nor is the consonant repeated in redeo, redoleo, and the like, be-
cause the D is only a letter that was borrowed already to prevent
the hiatus and meeting of vowels. There are also some other oc-
casions on which it is not practised.
Rule VII.
Of the other Prepositions.
1. The other prepositions arc short except pro.
2. But pro is also short in the following coni'
pounds ; profiteor, protervus, proficiscor,
procella, procus, profanus, profecto, pro-
fundus, pronepos, profari.
5. In the following, pro is doubtful, propello,
propulsOj procurro, propago.
Examples.
1. The other prepositions being short by nature,
are also short in compound words; as adimo, abesf,
aperio ; coercuit, cd?nedo, obumbrant, omitto, dnhelat, 'in-
offensus, suptresse, subeunt, peragit.
We must except /;ro, which is long ; produco, pro-
ferOj prbve/io, prdfugio, &c.
2. But in the words mentioned in the rule, pro is
short, as pi^dtervus, prhftcto, Sec. and some others
which use will shew : as likewise those words where
pro is the Greek preposition '^^^o, which signifies ante,
i as
Of QUANTITY. 507
as propheta, propontis, and the like ; though sometimes
the Greek j'j/'O is long, conforming to the Latin ana-
logy.
3. In some compounds /;7'o is common, as propello,
propubo, prupago, as, a verh; and propago, uiis^ a
noun ; procurro, procumbo, profunda^ &c.
Rule VIII.
Of Words compounded without a Preposition.
In compound words A, O, are generally long;
and E, I, U, are generally short.
But compounds formed by contraction, as also the
compounds ofdies,\\bhand ibi, have i long.
Examples.
In compound words two things may he considered,
the former and the latter part. As to the latter part
there is very little difficulty about it, because it is ge-
nerally just as it would be out of composition. Thus
the second in dedecus is short, because it comes from
decus, the first short. Abator hath the second long,
because it comes from iitor, the first long. But it is
more difficult to know the quantity of the former part
of the compound.
Nevertheless in general it may be said, that these
two vowels, A, O, are long; and that these other three
E, I, U, are commonly short. But we must inquire
into this more particularly.
A is long in the former part of the compound, as
quare, quapropter, quacunque, quatenus. Yet there are
some short, which may be learnt by use, as he.vdmeter,
catapidta.
E is short, whether in the first syllable, as nefas, tie-
fastus,nefandus,nefarius, tredecim, trecenti, netjueo, equi'
deni, neque : or in the second, as 'vatedico, madefaciOy
tremefacio, according to Virgil (though Lucretius and
Catullus make E also long in this sort of words): or
in the third, as hujuscemodi, &c.
The following are excepted, having the first long,
sedecimy nequaniy nequitiOf nequaquam^ nequicquam, ne-
X 2 quando^
308 NEW METHOD. BookX.
guando, memet, mecum, tecum, secum. As also these,
which have the second loiiii", vetiejicus, videlicet.
I is short whether in the first syllable, as Mceps, tri-
ceps, bicolor, tricolor, biviiun, trivium, siqiddem : or in
the second, as agricola, aliger, artif'ex, caussidicus,J'a'
tldicus, onmipotens, totidem, miigenitiis, wiiversus, Sec-
We must except those where the I changes in de-
clining, as quldam, qutvis, qullibet, quallcumquc, quan-'
ttvis, unlcuique, relpubliccE.
Those also which come from a contraction, as lli-
cet, scilicet, blgce, quadriga;, pi^ldie, postrldie, tiblcen for
tibiiceti, &c.
The compounds of dies, as bJduum, trlduum, merl-
dies ; but quotidie is doubtful.
The following have also I long, trlceni, trlcesimuSy
slquis, and Idem masculine. As also mmirum, ibidem,
ublque, utroblque, ubJvis : but ublcumque is commonly
the same as ubi.
O is generally long, as alidqui, introduco, quandoque,
quandbcumque, utrbbique, and others.
We must except however, hodie^ quandbquidem,
quoque.
Also the compounds of two nouns, as TimoiheuSy
sacrosanct us, &c.
U is short, whether in the first syllable, as ducenti^
diipondium ; or in the second, as quadrupes, caniujkr,
Trojugena.
But genuflectOy cornupeta, usuvenit, tisucapit, are
still doubtful among grammarians ; though the surest
way, in my opinion, is to make u long on those oc-
casions, because it is an ablative that remains iutire
in its natural state.
ANNOTATION.
Here we may be asked whether the second is long in paricida j
matricida, because we find them long in Ausonius.
Ut parlcidae regna adimat JDidio, De Sev. Imp.
Matricida Nero proprii vim pertulH ensis.
Though in regard to the latter, there are some who read matrh-
fuecida Nero, &c.
On the contrary we find that paricida is short in Horace.
Telegonijuga paricida;, Od. 29. lib. 3.
But aspQriaida is a Syncope fox parenticida, being taken not only
for
Of QUANTITY. 309
for one who kills his father, but likewise for a person that violates
the duty he owes to his parents and to his country, we may say
that Horace has made it short, merely by considering the dropping
of the syllable, and leaving the others in their natural quantity :
whereas Ausonius must have considered this word as formed by
contraction, and therefore he made it long.
— — ■■, , . 1 I. ■■■.>-■■■ .1 - ,.„ I. . _ .._ , — .- ,, „ . .■■■■I ^ ^^ ■ I H I ^1 ■ ,■ , , _ ^^
Of preterites and SUPINES.
Rule IX.
Of Preterites of Two Syllables.
. 1. Treterites of two syllables have the former
long, as egi.
2. But the following are short, bibi, fidi, tuli,
dedi, steti, scidi.
Examples.
1. Preterites of two syllables have the former long,
as egi, veni, tudi, mci.
2. Yet the preterites of the following verbs are
short; bibo, bibi; findo,j idi ; fero, tuli ; do, dMi; sto,
steti ; scindo, scidi.
ANNOTATION.
Some have been for adding lavi to the above verbs, because of
this verse in Virgil.
Luminis effossijluidum lavit inde cruorem. <
But lavit is there the present tense, as well as lavimus in Hor. lib.
1. sat. 5. coming from lavo, lavis ; hence we meet with lavere,
and in the passive Invi, to be •voashed, in Nonius.
AbscIdit is long in Lucan, lib. 6.
Ille comani Iceva morieuti abscldit ephebo*
And in Martial, lib. 4.
Abscldit vultus ensis uterque sacros.
Which sheweth that this preterite was heretofore doubtful, un-
less we choose to say that it comes then from absctdo, compounded
of abs and ccedo. But this verb being obsolete, the surest way is
to pronounce the above preterite short in prose, ab&cidit.
Now this rule of the preterites of two syllables ho'ds also good'
fbr the j)Kiral ; farjlerunt,jiarunt, norunt, and the like, have- al-
ways the former long.
But we findjMver»ji the former short, once in Catullus,
Rule X.
Of Preterites with a Reduplication.
3 , The two first syllables in preterites that have
a reduplication are short,
2, But
310 NEW xMETHOD. Book X.
2. But the second in pepedi, is long, as also in
cecidi J rom caedo.
Examples.
1. Preterites with a reduplication have the two first
syllables short, as dldici from disco; ceci/d from cano;
ictigi from tango; cecidi from cade.
2. But pedo hath the second in pepedi long, as also
ccedo in cecidi.
Qui nullum forte cecldit. Juv.
A N N O T A T 1 O N.
In regard to the other preterites, if it be a syllable that does not
depend on the increase, they follow the quantity of their present,
as colo, colui, tlie first short.
Except pomi, the first short, from pono, whose former is long.
And gcnui, which followed its old verb gtno ; as likewise j^otuif
which Cometh from polis sum.
Except also divisi, divtsum, the second long, from divido, the
second short.
But if it be a syllable that depends on the increase, the rules
thereofshall be given hereafter. Yet we may observe at present,
thfi*^^ all preterites, either of two or more syllables, ending in vi,
have ever the penultima long, as arnavi,Jlcvi, quivi, audivi, &c.
Rule XI.
Of Supines of Two Syllables.
1. All supines of two syllables are long.
2. Except those of eo, reor, sino^ do, ruo, sero,
lino.
3. The supines of queo, and sto, are short,
4. The supine of cio is long, and that of cieo
is short.
E X A M P L E S.
1. Supines of two syllables, as well as preterites,
are long ; as notum or notus from nosco ; visum, or
wlsus from video ; motum from moveo.
2. But the six following verbs have their supines
short ; eo, itum ; reor^ rdtus sum ; sino, situm ; do, da-
tum, ruo formerly had riitum, from whence comes di-
ri'itum, erutum, obriitum ; sero, sdtum ; lino, litum.
5. These two have also their supines short, queo,
qiiitum ; sto, stdtum ; but staturus, though derived
from thence, hath the former long.
4. Cio,
Of quantity. 311
4. Cio, cis, civi, cllum, cii^e, the former long. CieOj
CIS, civi, cltum, the former short.
Excltum ?'uit (id f'ortuSf c^' Uttora complent. Virg.
Bacckatur quaiis commotis excita sacris. id.
^ ANNOTATION.
Of the Supine Statum.
It appears that Statum is short by the substantive status,
hujus status ; by the adjective status^ a, urn ; and by the verbal
noun statin.
Hie status in ccelo multos vermansit in annos. Ovid.
Mnsa quid a fastis non stata sacra petis ? Id.
Catnpm, S^ apricis static gratissinia mergis. Virg.
Hence its compounds which change a into i, make this i short in
the supine, a$ prcestitum ; hence also the verb statuo, which seems
to be derived from this supine, hath the first short.
Urhem quam statuo vestra est Virg.
Yet the participle stalurus, hath the former long.
Tunc res immenso placuit statura labore. Lucan.
As also its conipounds.
Constatiiray5«V Megalensis purpura centum. Mart.
And this made Priscian believe that the former in the supine sta-
tum was also long, though what hath been above mentioned,
proves the contrary. Nevertheless we may say. I fancy, that it
was heretofore common, since we still see in the compounds, that
in those which retain the a it is long, though in such as change
the a into i, it is short.
Non praestata sibi prcestat natura, sed unus, St. Prosper.
Whence also it comes that stator is short in Prudentius, and long
in Ovid. And statim, which is derived from stando, according to
Vossius, is long in Avienus and Alcim. Avitus, but short in Ca-
tullus, whose authority is preferable in this respect.
Verum si quid ages, siatimjubebot Epigram. 33.
CyCiTUM and Scitum.
CiTUM is long when it comes from cio, because it follows the
fourth conjugation ; as it is short when it comes from cieo^ because
it follows the second. But citus signifying quick, lively^ active, is
short ; whereas for divisus, it is long : as erctum citum, erctum non
citum. See Servius on the 8th book of the -^neis.
Scitum is ever long, whether it comes from s^j^ or scisco. Sci-
tusy from sciOi signifies handsome, pretty, ivell made, graceful ; Scitus
puer, Ter. Coming from scisco, it signifies ordained and decreed^
from whence we have plebiscitum, a decree of the people. Plautus
plays with those two words in his Pseud, act. 2. sc. i:
Ps. Ecquis is homo scitus est? Ch. Plebiscitum non est scitius.
Wliere Larabinus is evidently mistaken, in saying that scitum had
the first syllable long in plebiscitum, but that every where else it
was short.
RUL£
A
312 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule XII.
Of the Supines of Polysyllables.
1. The supines of pohj syllables in UTUM arc
long.
2. As are also tJiose in ITUM, when they come
from a preterite in IVI.
3. But all others in ITUM are short.
Examples.
1. The supines of polysyllables in UTUM are
long, as solUtum from solvo, solvi ; indutum, from in-
duo, indui; argutum from argiio, argui.
2. The supines in ITUM are also long, when they
come from a preterite in IVI ; as qiuesitum from qucE-
To, qucEslvi ; cupJtum from cupio, cupivi ; yetitum from
peto, petlvi ; audltum from audio, audJvi.
3. The supines in ITUM are short, if they do not
come from a preterite in IVI : as taciturn from taceo,
tacui ; agnitum from agnosco, agnofi ; cognitum from
cognosce, cog7iovi; mouitum from monco, mouiii.
But the penultima in recensltum is long, because it
Cometh from cemio, cetisivi, and not from ctnseo, ctnsui.
Of the increase of VERBS.
Rule XIII.
The nature of the Increase of Verbs.
TVlien the verb hath more syllables in the other
tenses than in the second persan present,
this is called Increase.
Examples.
The increase of verbs is ever regulated by the se-
cond person present : so that those tenses which do not
exceed this person in syllables, have no increase; as
a?7ws, amaut ; audis, audit. But those which exceed
it by one syllable, are said to have one increase; as
amamuSf audllis ; where the second is called an in-
crease,
Of quantity. 313
crease, because the last is never counted for such.
Those which exceed it by two syllables, have two
increases ; as amubamus, docebamus. Those which
exceed it by three, have three increases, as amavefi-
tis, &c.
Even the increase of the passive is regulated by the
second person of the active ; as amaris, the second is
the increase. Amabaris, the second and third are in-
creases, measuring them by amas.
In regard to verbs common and deponents, we
must imagine the second person of the active, and
regulate them in the same manner as the rest.
Rule XIV.
Of the Increase in A.
1. The increase in A is long.
2. ^ut the verb do hath da short.
Examples.
1. A is always long in the increase of verbs, as ex-
probrare^ stabam, bibdmus, fueramus.
The verb DO makes the increase DA short through-
out ; as damns, dubwit, ddri, datum, &c.
Farthe dabis pcEuas.
Likewise in its compounds drcumdamus, circ^mdd-
hunt, circumddre, venundd?'e.
But every where else it hath A long like the other
verbs ; ddbdmus, dabatur.
■ QucE jam for tuna dabatur. Virg.
HuLE xy.
Of the Increase in E.
1. The increase in E is long,
2. Except in beris, eram, ero, erim.
3. Verbs of the third conjugation have it also
short in the first increase of the present
and preterimperfect^ where there happens
to be an ^ after E.
Examples.
1. E in the increase of verbs, is also long, generally
speaking, in all conjugations*
In
514 NEW METHOD. Book X.
In the first : aS"^ amemus, atnaremus ; amave runty
amartris vel amarere, dedissemus.
In the second, docebam, docercm, docerer, docereris.
In the third, degebrnn, legerunt vel legere, kgissemuSy
legeris vel legere, legetur, legemur.
In the foLirtlij audicris vel audiere, aiidietur ; audi-
*verunt vel audlvere, &c.
2. But it is always short in the following syllables,
beris, cram, era, erim, through every person, amaberis
vel amabere ; ducueram ; potcro, potmro ; kg'ero, lege-
ri??i, iigeris, &c.
3. It is moreover short in verbs of the third conju-
gation, in the first increase of the present and preter-
imperfect, where there happens to be an R after E ;
as legeris vel legere, in the present of the indicative
passive; legtre in the imperative passive, and the infi-
nitive active ; legcrem and legcrer, in the preterim-
perfect subjunctive, active and passive.
But it is long even in the third, when one of these
conditions is wanting ; as if it be in the second in-
crease, legereris\e\ Icgerere^ legeretur, preterimperfect
passive of the subjunctive.
If it be a preterimperfect that has not ah R after
E ; as legebmn, legebar, SiC.
Or if it be any other tense than a present or a pre-
terimperfect, were it even then to have an R after E ;
as legerunt vel legere in the preterite ; legeris vel le-
gere, legetur in the future indicative. In like manner
scjnberis, and laberis, &c. because the b then belongs
to the termination of the present, and not of the fu-
ture in bor.
Scriberis Variofortis ^ hostium. Hor.
Sic tibi cumjluclus subterlabere Sicanos. Virg.
And the like. VVlierein the third conjugation con-
forms to the general rule.
ANNOTATION.
It seems that the penultima of the third person of the preterite
in ERUNT was heretofore short, or at least common, especially
in verbs of the third conjugation, and that one might say legenmt,
as well as legerunt, legereiit, legtrint, legcro, &c. this analogy being
particularly founded on the E followed by an R. Which may be
further confirmed by the authority of Diomedes, who, lib. 1. hath
these
Of quantity. 315
these words, Fere in tertio ordine plcrumque veteres tertia persona
jinitiva temporis peifecti, numeri plundis, E mediam vncrdem corri-
piunt, quasi legerunt, enihunt, &c. And indeed Virgil does not
scruple to make it short, not only in those verbs of the third, but
likewise, in others.
Matri longa decern tv\en\ntjastidia menses. Eel. 4;.
Miscueruntqiie herbas, Sf non innoxia verba. Georg. .'}.
Obsticpid, steteruntque co^'k^, S^ voxfaiicibus hcesit. lEn. 2.
For thougn some would fain read these passages with the third
person plural in erant or erint ; yet, as Pierius observes on the
second example, the reading in erunt has been generally received.
Besides, other poets have used it in the same manner.
Nee cithara, intonscB profueruntve comce. Tibul.
AbitKTUS illuc quo priores abierunt. Phoedr.
Nee tua defuerunt verba Thakn^se mild. Mart.
We might further produce a vast number of authorities, which
shew that this is not a licentia poetica, as they call it, but the ancient
analogy of the language, and that we could not condejun a per-
son that would still chuse to follow it, though it be always better to
make those words long, were it for no other reason but that the
ear, the chief judge of poetry, is more accustomed to it at present.
Rule XVI.
Of the Increase in I.
1. The increase in I is generalli/ short,
2. But the first increase in the fourth conjuga-
tion is long :
3. As also m velim, sim, malim, nolim.
4. All the preterites in I VI are long , hut they
make IMUS short.
Examples.
1. The Increase in I, generally speaking, Is short, as
In fhe future of the first and second conjugation,
amabitis, docelntur.
In the present of the third, legimus, labttur, aggre-^
dUur,
Even in the fourth, in the 2, 3, and 4 increase,
audirnini, audiremmi, audiebamni.
But it is long in the first increase of this last con-
jugation, which is the most considerable in regard
to verse, audJre, mollltur^ sclrent, servJtum, scmus, Ibo,
abibo.
3. The following are also long, slmus, vellmus, no-
iJmus, malmus, with the other persons, sitis^ velJtis,
&c. 4. All
S16 NEW METHOD. Book X.
4. All the preterites in IVI are long, aiidJ'vi. Even
in the third, pttJvi, quceslvL
And they all make IJMUS short in the plural, quce-
six^imus. Even in the fourth, audivimus, venimus.
Observe therefore, that vemmus long is the present,
JVe are a coming ; and Tcfiimus short is the preterite,
we are come. And so for the rest.
ANNOTATION.
In regard to the terminations of the subjunctive RIMUS and
RITIS, concerning which there have been such high debates
among grammarians ; Diomedes, Probus, and Servius will have
it that they are always long in the future, which Vossius seems to
favour, though he owns that there are authorities to the contrary,
as in Ovid ;
Obscurum nisi nox cumjecerit orbem ;
Vidcritis, steilas illic uhi, &c. 2. Metara.
Again,
Ilfcc uhi dixeritis, xervet sua dona rogale.
In regard to the preterite the thing seems still more uncertain.
Diomedes and Agroetius will have it short; on the contrary Probus
pretends it is always long.
Hence it plainly appears that those syllables were takeri by the
poets sometimes one way and sometimes another, and therefore
"JVC may hold them common, since Virgil himself says in the pre-
terite,
Namque ut stipremamj^aha inter gattdia noctem
Egerinius, 7iosti, &c. JEn. 6.
For it is too weak an argument to say with Servius, that he wrote
thus through necessity, and by a poetic licence ; just as if he who
■was prince of poets, and perfect master of his native language,
could not find another word to make the foot suitable to his verse.
And, as a proof of what I say, w^e find that RIS is rather short
than long in the singular, as we shall shew hereafter when treat-
ing of the last syllables ; which ought to be a presumption for the
plural.
Rule XVII.
Of the Increase in O.
The increase in O occurs hut seldom, and is always
long.
Examples.
The increase in O occurs in the imperative only,
and is always long, as amatote, facitote.
Cumque lo(]ui poterit ; matrem hciXoie salutet. Ovid.
Ru LE
Of quantity. 317
Rule XVIII.
Of the Increase in U.
The increase in U is short ; but URUS is long,
as docturus, lecturus.
Examples.
The increase in U is short, as su??ius, volumus.
Nos numerus sun^us S^Jhtges consumere mtti. Hor.
But the participle in IIUS, and tiie future of the
infinitive in RUM which is fprmed from thence, are
long, doctUrus, kcturm, amaturus, amaturum, &c.
iO\\Vy> JHfm —
.. : r \ <
OF THE INCREASE OF NOUNS.
Rule XIX.
What is meant by the Increase of Nouns.
1. The increase of nouns is when the genitive.
hath more syllables than the nominative.
2. The increase of the genitive always regulates
the other cases.
Examples.
1. The increase of nouns is when the other caseis
have more syllables than the nominative : hence if the
genitive does not exceed the nominative in number of
syllables, there is no increase, as musa, musce; dominus^
domini : but in the plural, of mu&arum^ dominormn, the
penultima is an increase.
2. The genitive ever regulates the increase of the
other cases, as sermo, sermonis, sermom, sermouemj ser-
md?2e, scrrnoiies, sermdnum, where the d is always long.
OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
The first declension has no increase but in the plural,
which comes within the rule we shall givelowerdown,
after we have gone through the increases of the sin-
gular.
Rule
318 f^EW METHOD. Book X.
Rule XX.
Increase of the Secontl Declension.
1. The increase of the second in the singular is
short.
2. Except Iber and Celtiber.
Examples.
1. Nouns of the second declension have their in-
crease short; gener, generi; puer, pueri ; prosper, pro-
sptri ; vir, mri ; satur, satiiri.
2. Yet Iber, signifying an inhabitant of Iberia in
Asia, or of Spain, makes Iberi long.
As also its compound Celtiber.
M'lstis hie Colchus Iberis. Claud.
Gallorum Celtce, rniscenies nomen Iberis. Lucan.
Vir Celtiberis non tacende gentlbus. Mart.
ANNOTATION.
We say likewise Iberes of the third declension : but then Priscian
tlimks it is rather taken for the inhabitants of Iberia towards Col-
chis : yet from the above example it appears that Claudian did not
use it in this sense ; and the Greeks say "iQv^, "iQ-n^os, to denote
both those nations. One would think that this long increase,
which has made its way into the second declension contrary to
the analogy thereof, was taken from thence.
INCREASE OF THE THIRD DE-
CLENSION.
Rule XXI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in L.
1. ALTS neuter is long.
2. A LIS masculine is short.
3. ILIS and ULIS are short,
4. ELIS atid OLIS are long.
Examples.
1. The neuter nouns in AL make ALIS long in
the genitive, hoc animaL animalis,
^ 2. The
Of quantity. 519
2. The masculines make it short; hie Asdrubaly
Asdruhalis ; hie Amiibal, Annibalis.
. 3. The increase of nouns in IL and UL is also
short ; as vigil, vigiiis ; pugil, pugiUs ; consul, consii-
lis ; e.vul, e^vidis.
4. Nouns in EL and OL make their increase long,
Daniel, Danielis ; sol, solis.
Rule XXII.
Increase of Nouns in N and O.
The increase in 1. ANIS, 2. ENIS, and
3. ONIS, is long. v
4. INIS is short ; 5. except IN, INIS.
6. ONIS either in proper names or gentiles
varies.
Examples.
1. The increase anis is \on^; Pcean, Paanis; Ti-
tan, Titdnis.
2. The increase enis is long; ren, rents; splen,
splints ; siren, sirenis.
3. The increase o??is is long; Cicero, Ciceronis;
sermo, sermmis ; Plato, Platoitis.
4. The increase inis is short ; homo, hominis ; virgo,
virginis ; ordo, ordinis ; carmen, carmmis.
5. Except those in IN which make INIS long;
as Delphin, Delphlnis ; Salamin, Inis; Phorcyn, the
name of a man, Phorcynis.
6. Proper names in On sometimes make bnis short,
as Memnon, Memnbnis ; and sometimes they make it
long, as Helicon, Hcliconis, in which respect we must
consult the practice of authors.
Gentiles for the most part make onis short, as Ma-
cedoy dnis ; Sa.ro, Mis : Except Burgundidnes, which is
rather looked upon as long. Alvarez adds Eburdnes,
and a few others, in respect to which we must be de-
termined by custom. With regard to proper names,
there is very little certainty about them.
Rule
S20 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule XXIII.
Of the Increase in ARIS.
1. The increase ARIS in mascuUnes is shorty
2. (Add the neuters, nectaris, jubaris.)
3. But the neuters in AR make ARIS long.
Examples.
1. The increase ARIS is always short, if the noun
be masculine, as Ccesar, Ccesaris; lar, /aris; mas, ind-
ris ; par, paris ; dispar, disparts ; impar, imparls.
2. Tiiese two are also short, though neuters, iiectary
nectaris ;Jubar,Jtdmris ; with bacchar, aris, also neu-
ter, and the peuuUima short.
3. The other neuters make ARTS, long, as calcar,
calcaris ; iaguear, laqueciris; pidvinar, pidvinaris; ex-
emplar^ eicmplaris.
Rule XXIV.
Of the Increase ERIS.
1. The increase in ERIS/Vom ER is short.
% Except Iber, crater, Ser. ver, and Reciraer.
Examples.
1. Nouns in ER make the increase ERIS short, as
career, carceris; mulier, mulieris; cether, (Etherisj aery
a^ris.
2. Except the following, which make it long, Ibery
Ibdris, a native of Iberia near Colchis. And this
noun is also of the second declension. See Rule I9.
Crater, eris ; Ser, seris ; the name of a people v.'ho
manufactured silk.
Velleraque ut foliis depcciant tenuia Seres. Virg.
Ver, veris, the spring. Hecimer, eris, in Sidonius, a
proper name ; and in short all Greek nouns that have
an ri in the increase, u.s poder, nris; spinier, ri?is, &c.
Rule XXV.
Of the Increase of Nouns in OR.
1. All the mascuUnes in OR make ORIS long,
2. Except Memor.
3. The
Of quantity. 321
3. The neuters in OR, 4. as also Greek noims,
5. and arbor, make ORIS short.
Examples.
1. Nouns in OR, when of the masculine gender,
make their increase long, as timor, timdtis; lepor, le-
poris; vigor, vigoris; decor, decoris.
— Indulget nata decori. Ovid.
2. Yet memor hath memor'is short, because it is an
adjective, and heretofore they used to say membris and
hoc memore.
3. If they be neuters, they make ORIS short,
marmor, inarmbins ; ceijuor, cequbris ; hoc ador, adbris,
4. Greek nouns in OR have also a short increase.
Hector, Hectbris; Nestor, Nestbris , Castor^ oris',
rhetor, rhetbris.
5. Arbor hath also arbbris short.
Rule XXVI.
Increase of Nouns in UR.
1. The increase of nouns in UR is short.
2. Except fur, furls.
Examples.
1. Nouns in UR make their increase short ; whe-
ther jn OKV^,Si'^femur,fembris; robur, robbris; jecur,
jecbris; ebur, ebbris : or in URIS, as murmur, mur-
muris ; turtur, turturis ; vultur, vultiiris ; Ligur, Li-
guris.
2. Yet/wr makesy}?m, long ; as also trifur, trifuris,
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we must refer the Greek nouns in YR, as martyr (or
martur) martiris, or marturos ; and the like.
Rule XXVII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in AS.
1. The increase ADIS /rom AS is short,
2. Vasis yVoTTi vas is long.
3. But maris y*row mas is short.
Vol. II, . Y Exam-
S22 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Examples.
1. Nouns in AS make the increase ADIS short;
whether they be femi nines, as Pallas^ PaUddis, the
goddess Minerva; lampas, ddis, a himp; or whether
they be masculines, as Aixas, Arcddis, an Arcadian;
'vas, vddis, bail, or surety.
2. But vas, vas/s, neuter, is long, a vessel.
3. Mas, maris, is short.
Rule XXVIII.
Of the Increase ATIS.
1, The mcrease ATIS from AS is long, ex*
cept anas, anatis.
2. 3iitfrom other nouns ATIS is short.
Examples.
1. The increase ATIS is long, when it comes
from a noun in AS, as cetas, cttutis', pietas, pieiaiis;
dignitas, dignitatis,
Except anas, which hath anatis short.
2. The increase ATIS is short, when it comes
from other nouns than those in AS, for instance from
nouns in A, c£?rigma, cetiigmdtis; dogma, dogmdtis. As
also
Hepar, hepdtis or hepdtos, short.
Rule XXIX.
Of the Increase of Nouns in ES.
1. ISfotms in ES make their increase short,
2. Except merccs, quies, locuples, ha^res.
3. A7id Greek nouns which make ETIS.
Examples.
1. Nouns in ES make their increase short, as mileSt
miUtis ; Ceres, Cer^ris; pes, pedis ; interpres, interpretis;
seges, segUis. Likewise prases, prcesidis, and the other
derivatives o( sedeo.
^. These are excepted, merces, mercedis ; guies,
quietis; locuples, locuphtis ; h(sres, hcsridis,
3, And
Of QUANTITY'. 323
3. And Greek nouns which make ETIS, as lebes^
lebetis ; tapes, tapetis ; magnes, magndtis ; Dares, Dare-
tis ; and others.
ANNOTATION.
PrcBs makes also prcedis long, as likewise ces, ceris; but this it
by reason of the diphthong. And bes makes hessis long by position.
Formerly they used also to say mansuesy ctis, long ; as likewise
inquies, etis. But at present we say rather mansuetus, u, inquieiuSf ij
where the penultima still remains long, because of their original.
Rule XXX.
Of the Increase of Nouns in IS.
1. The increase of Nouns in IS is short,
2. Except Quiris, Samnis, glis, lis, Dis.
Examples.
1. The increase of nouns in IS is short, as puhiSf
pulveris; sanguis, sanguinis; C/iaris,.Charitis, usual in
the plural ; Charites, the graces.
2. In the following it is long. Quiris, Quirliis ;
Samnis, Samnltis ; glis, glJris ; lis, litis ; Dis, Dltis.
Rule XXXI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in OS.
1. The increase of nouns in OS is long.
2. Except bos, compos, and impos.
Examples.
1. The increase of nouns in OS is long, as os, oris;
dos, dotis ; cusfos, custodis ; i2epos, nepotis.
Greek nouns in OS have also a long increase, as
rhinoceros, otis ; likewise T?^os, Tj^ois ; heros, herois ;
Minos, Minois, though followed by a vowel, because
in Greek they are written with an w.
3. These are short, bos, bovis; compos, compotis ;
impos, impotis.
Rule XXXII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in US.
1. Noims in US have their increase short,
2. Except the comparatives in US.
Y 2 3. And
324 NEW METHOD. Book X.
3' And nouns that make the genitive in URIS,
UDIS, and UTIS.
4. But pccus makes pecudis shoj^t ; as intercus,
intercutis.
Examples.
1. Nouns ending in US have their increase short,
as mumis, muncris ; corpus, corporis ; lepus, leporis ;
tripus, tripod is ; decus, oris.
2. The comparatives in US make their increase
long, as melius, melioris; majus, majoris ; because they
borrow it of the masculine, as major, vi'ajdris. Sec.
3. Nouns whose genitive is in URIS, UDIS, or
UTIS, make their increase long, as jus, juris; tellus,
telluris; incus, incudis; virtus, X)irtutis ; salus, salU-
tis, &c.
4. These are excepted, pecus, pecudis, a sheep, a
flock; intercus, intercutis, a droj)sy.
ANNOTATION.
Tills shews, as we have elsewhere observed, that they come
rather ^vom pecudis, Jnijiis pecudis ; intercutis, /nijus intercutis, than
from pecus or intercus, which in all likelihood would follow the
analogy of the other nouns in us, that have utis long. See vol. i.
p. S5, 86. and p. 167. col. 2.
Ligiiris, the name of a people, is also short ; which shews that
it comes rather from Ligiir, as Verepeus has given it, than from
Ligus.
The names of places in US "of Greek original make UNTIS,
and of course are long by position, as O^jms, Onuntis, the name of
a town, and such like.
Rule XXXIII.
The Increase of Nouns ending in S with another Consonant.
1. Nouns ending in S with another consonant
make their increase short.
2. Except gryps, Cyclops, hydrops, plebs,
and Cercops.
Examples.
1. The increase of nouns ending in S, with ano-
ther consonant, is short; as ccelebs, ccelibis ; hyems,
hy^mis, Dolops, Doldpis ; inops, indpis ; auceps, auchpis ;
2. But
Of QUANTITY. 325
2. But these have their increase long; gryps, gry-
phis; Cyclops, Cyclopis \ hydrops, h yd topis, whence
comes liydrdpicus ; pkbs, plebis ; Cercops, Cercdpis, the
name of a people, who for their malice were meta-
morphosed into apes, Ovid. Mctam.
Rule XXXIV.
Of the Noun caput and its compounds.
The noun caput and its compoiinds, have a short
increase.
Examples.
Caput, and all its compounds are short in their in-
crease through every case singular and plural, capitis^
cap'ite, capita, capMbus ; sinciput, sindpitis ; occiput,
occipitis ; anceps, ancipttis ; biceps, bicipitis.
Rule XXXV.
J"
Of the Nouns in X which form their Genitive in GIS.
1. The increase in GIS is short,
2. Except frugis, legis, regis.
Examples.
• 1. Nouns in X, whose genitive is in GIS, make
their increase short, as Allobi'o.v, AUobrbgis ; C07ijuA\
conjiigis ; i^emex, remigis -, Phryx, Phrygis.
Q. The following are excepted, Jru.v,Jrugis ; re.r,
regis; as also le.v, legis; but its compounds vary ;
aquilex, aquilegis, short ; Lelex, Lel^gis, short, Uie
name of a people ; exlex, exlegis, an outlaw.
Rule XXXVI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in AX.
1. The increase ACIS from AX is long.
2. Except abax, smilax, climax, storax, fax.
Examples.
1. Nouns in AX make their increase long, as paz,
pads ; ferax, feracis ; jornax, fcrnacis.
2. These are excepted, abax, abacis ; smilax, smi-
Idcis; a yew tree ; climax j climdcis ; storax or sty rax,
styrdcis ; fax, Jdcis.
Add
306 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Atltl to these Arctophi^la.i\ acisj a heavenly constel-
lation, and a few more Greek names.
Hulk XXXVII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in EX.
1. The increase of noims in EX is shoi't.
2. Except halex, vervex, a7id fex.
Examples.
1. All nouns in EX have their increase short, as
9ie.i\ jfecis ; prei^pr'ccis ; Jrut e.v, J ruticis ; verte.v, t'ertlcis.
2. These three excepted, /mle.v, halecis ; ^'ervex-^
vertdcis ; j'ex\jech.
ANNOTATION.
To tliese some are for adding vibex. But we choose rather to say
vihix^ Icis, according as we liave marked it in the genders, vol. i.
p. 55. and then it will follow the next rule.
Rule XXXVilL
Of the Increase of Nouns in IX.
1. JSlounsi?! IX.ICIS, have their increase long;
2. Except filix, pix, vix, larix, calix. eryx,
vaiix, fornix, salix ;
S. To which add nix, nivis.
Examples.
1. Nouns in IX make their increase in ICIS longj
as rocILv, rad/cis; Jtlix,Jdlcis\ vie t rid; njicirlcis ; vibuvy
*vihlcis.
2. The following are excepted, Jilix^ fdicis ; pix,
picis 'y rix, Ticis; in the plural ttces ; larix, laiHcis ;
calix, calicis ; eryx, erycis; varix,var1,cis; Jornix,Jor-
Tiicis; salix, salicis.
3. iV/cT likewise makes nivis short.
Rule XXXIX.
Of the Increase OCIS.
1. Nouns in OX make the increase ocis long ;
2. Except praccox, and Cappadox.
Examples. .
1. The increase OCIS from nouns in OX is long;
as 'iwx, vocis ; Jerox,Jerdcis ; velox, velocis,
f Q, These
Of quantity. 327
2. These are excepted ; prcEcox^ pracHcis; Cappa-
dOiV, Cappadocis,
Rule XL.
Of the Increase UCIS.
1. The increase UCIS /row UX is short*
2. Except lux and Pollux.
Examples.
2. Nouns in UX make their increase UCIS short; as
dux, ducis ; redux, reducis ; cru.v, crucis ; ww.r, ?mcis ;
truJCy trucis.
2. The following are excepted; lux, liicis; Pollux,
Pollucis.
Talis AmiclcBi domitiis PollQcis habeiiis. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
In these latter rules, as in a great many others, we have omitted
several words, that are not only more difficult to learn, but likewise
less useful, since they occur but seldom, and it will be sufficient to
observe them in the use of authors.
Such are atrux, atax, colax, panax, Pkarnax, Syphax, which
make their increase ACIS short. Such are also cilix^ coxendix, his-
trixy natrix, onyx, sardonyx, which shorten LCIS, &c.
Of the INCREASE of the other DECLENSIONS.
The other two declensions, as well as the first, have
no increase, except in the plural. This should be re-
ferred to the following rule, which likewise includes
the second and third declensions for the increase be-
longing to this number.
Rule XLI.
Of the Increase of the Plural.
1. Ifi the plural increase, I and U are short ;
2. But A, E, O, are long.
Examples.
The plural increase is when the other cases exceed
the nominative plural (which always depends on the
genitive singular) in number of syllables.
1. And then it makes I and U short; as sermones,
sermombus; *cites, mtibus; maniiSj manimm ; portus,
portiium, portubus.
2. But
328 NEW METHOD. Book X.
2. But A, E, O, are long; as musir, miisariim-j res,
reriim, rebus; 7nc'dici, medicoriim ; Jwo, duorum.
ANNOTATION.
Here we are to observe that there is a singular increase even in
the plural ; as in this word sermonilms, the second is a singular in-
crease, and is long, because it is ruled by the genitive sermonis.
But the penultima is a plural increase, because it has more sylla-
bles than this same genitive, and therefore belongs to this rule of
plurals.
The former is long in bubiis as well as in hdbns, because it is
only a Syncope for bovibus ; which happens also to bucida for bovi-
cula.'^ True it is that Ausonius has made the former short in bubus,
considering it as in the singular increase of bos, bovis ; but the au-
thority of Horace, Ovid, and Lucretius, is preferable to his.
Paterna rum bobus exercel suis, Epod. 2.
Non pr()fecturis littora bobus aras, Ovid.
OF THE LAST SYLLABLE.
Rule XLII.
A final.
1. A at the end of words is long ;
2. Except ita, eia, quia, puta;
S. But it is sJioi't at the end of nouns;
4. Except the ablative case ;
5. And the vocative of Greek nouns in AS.
Examples.
1. A is long at the end of words, as a7?ia, pugna,
interea, ultra, meword^ triginta, and the like.
2.V There are four adverbs that have the last short;
itd, eid, (juia, puid, for videlicet.
Y\di per ipsum ;
Scaruk age. Val. Flaccus.
//ocputa )ioiijustum est, illudmale ^rectuis isiud.
Persius, sat. 4.
S. The nouns are short through all their cases end-
ing in A, except the ablative.
The No?Jim. Forma bomim fragile est. Ovid.
The Accus. Hectora donavit Priamo. Ovid.
The Vocat. Musa ??uhi caiisas memora. Virg.
The
Of quantity. 329
The Plural. Dederas promissa parenti. Virg.
4. The ablative is long.
Anchora de pior^ jacitur, Virg.
5. The vocative in A of Greek nouns in AS is also
long.
Quid miserum iEnea laceras ? Virg.
But from the other terminations it is short, as we
shall see presently.
ANNOTATION.
Of the Vocative ending in A.
The vocative of Greek nouns in ES is short when it ends in
A, as Anchisa, Thijesta, Oresta, &c. because then this case can be
only of the Latin declension. But these same nouns having E in
the vocative, make it long, because this is a Greek case, ^nd fol-
lows the Greek declension, which has an ^.
The Cohans likewise gave the termination A to a great many
nouns that were in AS in the common language, as Mida for Mi-
das, Hyla for Hylas, &c. and then their vocative may be short.
Hence it is that Virgil in the very same verse has made this last
syllable both long and short in the vocative.
Clamassent, tit littiis Hyla, Hyla omne sonaret. Eel. 6.
Unless we choose to attribute the length of one to the caesura, and
the shortness of the other to the position of the next vowel.
Of some Adverbs in A.
Antea is long in Catullus and Horace:
Petti, nihil me, sicid zniea juvat^
Scribere Versiculos. Epod. 11. _
Contra is long in Virgil. \
Contra non ulla est oleis cultura : ncqiie illce.
We find it short in Ausonius, and in Manilius, who was his con-
temporary. But in regard to the verse, which the Jesuits Alvarez
and Ricciolius quote from Valerius Flaccus to authorize this
quantity ;
Contraque Lethcsi quassare silentia rami ;
It proves nothing, because the passage is corrupted, and the right
reading is this :
Contra Tartareis Colchis spumare venenis,
Cunctaque Lethcei quassare silentia rami
PSstat.
PosTEA an adverb is long, according to G. Fabricius, in his
treatise of poetry, as Vossius observeth. Which appears likewise
by this iambic of Plautus.
Si autoritatem postea defugeris, In Pcenul. act. 1. sc. 1.
We might also prove it; to be short by this verse of Ovid, 1. Fast.
Postea mirabar cur non sine tilibus esset.
But it seems we ought to read it in two words, post ea, as Vossius
gays, because being an adverb it is long every where else.
POSTILLA
330 NEW METHOD. Book X.
PosTiLLA is also long in Enniim and in Propertius, 1. 1. EI. 15.
Hi/sipile nuilos postilla sensit amoves.
PuTA for videlicet, of which some have doubted, is short, as ap-
peareth by Servius on the 2. ^n. where observing that the adverbs
in A are reckoned long, he particularly excepts pida and ita. This
is further confirmed by the above-quoted verse out of Persius, Hoe
putTiy &c. as Priscian likewise quotes it, lib. 15. and as Casaubon
declares he found it in MSS. though some editions read ]mto.
Witli respect to the passage of Martial, which is quoted from lib. 3.
epigram. 29, Esse put a solum, &c. it is plain ihdX pula is there fof
cense or crede, and is not then an adverb.
Ultra is long in Horace ;
Ultra quam satis est virtidem si petat ipsain.
In Virgil ;
Qtios alios muros qua; jam ultra mcenia habetis f
As likewise in Juvenal, Persius, and others.
And in vain does Erythraeus quote Serenus to make it short ;
Curaque nil prodest, nee ducitur ultra cicatrix,
since the best copies have ulla.
Of the Nouns in Ginta.
The nouns in Ginta are esteemed doubtful by some, because
they are found short in the old poets, as in Lucilius, and in those
of a later date, as Ausonius, Manilius, and otiiers : but those of
the intermediate time, who flourished during the purity of the
language, always made them long.
Triginta capitumj'cetus enixajacebit. Virg.
And the surest way is to follow this quantity. For as to the passages
they quote from Martial to prove their being short, Vossius shews
that they are corrupted.
Rule XLIII.
E final.
1. '^ at the end of words is sliort ;
2. But at the end of Greek nouns it is long ;
3. And at the end of nouns of the bth declension;
4. And of ohe, feime, fere :
5. And of all adverbs formed of US.
6. But bene, male, inferne, superne, are short.
7. The imperative of the second conjugation is
long :
8. As are also these monosyllables me, ne, sg, t6.
E X A i\l P L E s.
1. E is short at the end of words, af> furiosi, utile,
partly ille,Jrat?gtre, doccr^, sine, Jtiente, panCj Achilla.
. Haud
Of quantity. 531
Hand eqwdem sine mente reor^ sine numin^ di-viim
Adsumus. Virg.
g. Greek nouns are long in whatever case they
happen to be, when they are written with an «, accord-
ing to what hath been already observed, p. 3g9, as
Lethe, Anchisey Cete, Mole, Teiiipe, &c.
ANNOTATION.
Achilla and Herculc are found sometimes short :
Quique tuas pronvusjrerait Achille domos. Propert.
But then we may say it is rather according to the Latin declen-
sion, than the analogy of the Greek. Which frequently happens
to nouns that follow the third declension in Latin.
3. E is long at the end of words of the fifth de-
clension ; as, re, die, requie ; also hodie, postridie, an(|
the like, taken from dies.
Node dieque mum gesture inpectore testem. Juven.
Tame is also long, and ought to be placed here, be-
cause it is really an ablative of the hfth declension,
which came from Jatnes, Jamei, jiisi like plebes, plebei,
in Livy and Sallust.
4. These words are long in the last syllable, yerw^?,
fere^ ohe.
Mobilis i^ varict est ferme natura malorum. Juven.
Jamque fere sicco subductce litioyx Jmppes. Virg.
Importunus amat laudcui, do?2ec o\iGJam. Hor.
5. Adverbs formed of nouns of the second declen-
sion have also E long ; as indigne, pr(2cipue, placide,
minimi, swnme, "valde (for valide) sancte, pure, sane,
&c.
6. Except beji^ and male, which are short :
Nil bene cum facias, fads attamen omnia belle. ]\fart.
Inferne and superne ought also to be excepted as
short, unless we had authority for the contrary, which
is not perhaps to be found. For thus it is in Lucre-
tius:
Terra superne tremit, magnis concussa ruin'is.
Upon which Lambinus says : Millies jam dixiultimam
syllabam advcrbii superne, brtvem esse: itaqiie eos
err are ^ui hoc loco S^^ similibus legi volant superna,
Which neither Desp^uter, nor Alvarez, nor Ricciolius
i^five observed.
7. The
332 NEW METHOD. Book X.
7. The imperatives of the second conjugation have
also E long, as mone, vide^ habe, doce.
The other imperatives are short. Fide and vale are
also sometimes short. And cave is but seldom loni;.
Vade, vale, cav^ ??e titubes, maiidataque Jrangas.
Hor.
Idgiie, guod ignoti faciunt, vale dicere saltern. Ovid,
8. Monosyllables make E long, as me^ ne, se, te,
ANNOTATION.
From this rcHe of monosyllables we must except the enclitics
que, ne, ve, and these other particles ce, te, or pte, as Uiquc, hicce,
iuapte, &c. because they are joined in such a manner to the other
words, that they form but one, and are no longer considered as
separate monosyllables.
In regard to imperatives as well of this as of the precedent rule^
we may observe with Vossius, that the reason of their being long,
is because they are formed by contraction. For ama, he says, comes
from amne ; just as the Greeks say «/xa;£, oifAx, mete. And thus
doceo should have docee, the last short, of which they have formed
by'contraction doce, the last long; just as in Greek we say Joxef,
2oKii. And though there are some imperatives of the second also
short, this is because those verbs were heretofore of the second
and third conjugation, as some of them are still ; for wc say Jlilgeo,
es, and Jtdgo, is ; tergeo, es, and tergo, is, &c. And hence it is that
we find respondc and salve short in Martial.
Si quando venict ? dicet : responde, poeta Exierat,
Lector salve. Taces, dissimidasque r Vale. Idem.
Though all these verbs are rather long or short, according to the
conjugation in which they have continued.
Rule XLIV.
I final. . ,
1. 1 at the end of words is long.
2. But niihr, tibf, cm, sibf, ubi, ibi, are
douhtjid.
4. Nibi and quasi are short ;
4. j4s are also the neuter nominatives,
5. JVith the Greek datives,
6. And Greek vocatives.
Examples.
1. I at the end of words is long, as ocull, MercurT,
class!.
Dum spectant Icesos oculi, ladwitur Ss ipsl, Ovid.
2. The
Of QUANTITYr; 333
2. The following have I either long or short, mihif
tibi, cm, sibi, ubi, ibi.
3. And these have it short, nisi, quasi.
4. As also the neuters in I or Y, ^py, Moly,
gumnii, sinapi, hydromeli, &c. To which we may join
these Greek nouns, as Mesorij Payrii, Phaoti^ Phar-
miiti, Tyhi, &c.
5. The datives of Greek nouns are also short, as
Minu'idi, Palladi, Thetidi, Paridi, Tindarid\ Pkillidi,
&c.
6. As also their vocatives, whether in I or Y ; as
Adoni, Alexi, Amarilli, Brisei, Cecropi, Chely, Daphm^
Inachh Lycaoni, Pari, PhyUi, Thai, Tyndari, whereto
we ought likev/ise to refer all the patronymics in IS,
which make IDOS.
ANNOTATION.
TJti IS long, as also velutl.
Namque videbat uti beltantes Pergama circum. Virg.
Improvisum aspris veluti qui sentibus anguem. Id.
But sicuti is short in Lucretius and elsewhere, and perhaps is not
to be found of a different quantity, though grammarians mark it
as common. Vtique is short. Ibidem, ubique and ubivis are long,
though they come from ibi and ubi common.' Some have fancied
them doubtful because of this verse of Horace.
Nan ubi vis coramve quibicslibet. In medio qui ;
But we must pronounce it in two words ubi vis, or according to
others ubi sis. Siciibl, though common, is generally long.
Nisi and quasi, which I have marked as short, are reckoned
common by some, because there are some authorities for it in tli«
latter poets, and in Lucretius, who says:
Et devicta quasi coganturferre pattque.
But the best authors constantly make them short.
Quoque sit nrmento, veri quasi nescia quccri. Ovid.
Nihil hie nisi carmina desunt. Virg.
As for the Greek nouns, we are to observe that these are some-
times found also long, as Oresti, Pijtadi, and the like datives, be-
cause this termination is then entirely Latin, those cases in Greek
being 'OffV'?, Uvhx^-n, which are of the first declension of simples.
Nor can we even shorten the datives that arise from contraction,
as Demostheni, Arj/xoo-Sf'vE/, metamorphosi, {juraiyLo^ipua'ii, because this
would be contrary to the general rule. And if we would also re-
fer Oresti io this rule of contraction, we should find more reason
to make it long, because it will come from 'Ofir"; as Sucrati from
ZuK^xTSi ; and sq for the rest.
Rule
334 NEW METHOD. Book X,
Rule XLV.
O final.
1. O at the end of words is doubtful :
2. But the datives and ablatives in O are long.
3. in these words is short : imo, duo, scio,
mode, cito. 4. In eo it is long ;
5. As also in monosifllahles,
6. And in adverbs derived from nouns.
Examples.
1. O at tlie end of words is sometimes long, and
sometimes short; as led, quando, nolo.
2. The datives and ablatives in O are lonsr, somno.
vento, oaio.
Nutritur vento, vento restinguitur ignis. Ovid.
3. O is short in the following words, im'6, duo, scid,
and its compound nescio, modo, with its compounds
quomodb, dummodd, &c. cito. To which we may add
egd, cedd, (for die) il/ico, which are more usually short.
4. Ed is long, and so are its compounds, adeo, ided,
Ibit eo, gu6 vis, zonam qui perdidit, inquit. Hon
5. MonosyUables are long, dd,std,prd.
Jam jam ejjficaci do manus scientia:. Hor.
6. Adverbs derived from nouns are long, because
properly speaking they areonly ablatives, as subitd,me-
riio, muUo, falso, primo, eo, vero. Ergo is always long,
because it comes from s^yu : but sero is doubtful.
ANNOTATION.
We find modo long in Catullus.
Hue quid putcmiis esse? qui nioclo scurra.
Sero being doubtful follows the general rule. For though it is
more frequently short, yet we meet with it also long.
Hen sero revocatur nmor, SQro(\\.\Q jnventn, Tibul.
Hereto some add sedulo, crebro, and mutuu ; but they are more
commonly long*
Profecto is iilso long, because it is derived from "pro facto, by-
changing A into E, according to what has been said, p. 252. Yet
we find it also short \x\ Terentianus Maurus.
Now the reason why O is not only sometimes long, and some-
times short, but also generally common of its nature, is because
it answers to these two Greek vowels o and u, in imitation of which
the Latins pronounced several of their words. And thence also
it
Of quantity. 53S
it comes that O In Latin is oftener long than short. For in the
first place the antients made the verbs almost always long, because
in Greek it is an «. And Corradus excepts from this rule no more
than scio and nescio^ which Victorinus asserts to have been made
short, to distinguish them from the datives and ablatives; scio from
scius, whence cometh sciulus ; and nescio from nescius. Vossius
however adds cedo for die.
Facti crimen habet. Cedo, si conata peregiL Juven.
And he shews that thought he most eminent poets make O more
usually long in the other verbs, yet those who flourished some-
what later, generally made it short: as Martial.
Nee volo boletos : ostrea nolo : tace.
Secondly, the datives and ablatives are always long for the same
reason ; Kufa>, e'fyw, &c.
Thirdly, all the other cases which in Greek end with an u, are
long in Latin, as Alecto, Echo, Sappho, hujus Atidrogeo, hunc AthOf
&c. But those which end with a v after u, are reckoned common
in Latin, as nxarwv, Flats ; ^^xKut, draco; though Corradus will
still have them to be only long, as indeed Victorinus affirms that
they were always reckoned by the antients.
Fourthly, the gerunds in DO, according to the same Corradus,
and Valerius Probus, ought always to be long. And the reason
is because they are only nouns, as we have shewn in the remarks
on Syntax, book 6. And though they may be sometimes found
short in Tibullus, Juvenal, and Ovid ; yet they are not so ia
Virgil, who constantly makes them long.
Fifthly, the interjection O is long by nature, because it is an u,
O lux DardanicB, spes dfidissima Teucrum, Virg.
And if it be ever short, it is merely by position, that is because of
the vowel that follows it.
Te Coridon 6 Alexi, Idem,
which we shall account for hereafter, when we come to speak of
the manner of scanning verse.
Rule XLVI.
U final.
Words ending in U are long, as vultu.
Examples.
V is long at the end of words, *cultu^ cornu, promp-
m, FaiithU,
Tantum ne pateas "verbis simidator in ipsis
E.ffict^ nee vultu destrue diet a tuo.
ANNOTATION.
Words ending in u are long, because this Latin u was pro-
nounced with a full sound, like the French diphthong ou, as we
have shewn in the Treatise of Letters, book 9. c. 4. n. 2. p. 255.
But those which terminate ia Y (which was pronounced like the
French
536 N E W M E T H O D. Book X.
French uj, are sliort, Moly, Tiphy, &c. Yet indii, which was used
for in, and )ie)iu for non, are short. They are both still to be seen
in Lucretius.
Rule XLVII.
B and C final.
1. B ^^ the end of words is short :
2. C is long.
3. Except nee and donee, which are short ;
4. Except also fac and hic the pronoun, which
are doubtful.
Examples.
1. B at the end of words is short, as db, bb, sub.
puppi sicfatur ab alta. Virg.
2. C is long, as dc, hlc the adverb, hdc, due, sic.
Sic oculos, sic ille manus^ sic ora ferebat. Virg.
3. These two are short, ??ec, dome :
Donee erisfelix, multos numerabis amicos. Ovid.
4. The following are doubtful ; fclcy the impera-
tive oifacioy and }nc the pronoun.
Hlc vir htc est, tibi quern promitti so'pius audis. iEn. 6,
Hic gladiofidensy hlc acer ^ arduus hast a. ]Sa\. 12.
ANNOTATION.
The adverb hie is long, because it was pronounced almost like
ei, says Vossius, whence it is that in antient marbles, we often
find it written thus, heic. But as for the pronoun hie, Voss. 2.
de arte Gram. c. 29. says it is akoai/s short by nature, and that
whenever we find it long, it is because the c had the full sound of
a double letter ; for which he has the authority of Victorinus,
Prohus, and Capella. To understand this, it must be observed,
agreeably to what Priscian says, lib. 13. that this pronoun hicy
hcec, hoc, frequently assumed the particle ce, hicce, hcECce, hocce,
and that this final e being lost by Synalepha, there remained only
two cc, hicc, hcecc, hocc, which is also confirmed by Longus in his
orthography. Be that as it may, there is no doubt but this pro-
noun is much oftener long than short. Horace constantly makes
it long; and for twice that we find it short in Virgil, Solus hic
injiexit sensiis, JEn. 4. with the other above quoted of the 6th, it
is above fifteen times long, whether he wrote it with two cc, or
otherwise. The same may be said also of hoc, which is always
long in the best authors.
But take notice that the verse which Smetius quotes on this
occasion, from JEn. 11.
fl/c nnnis gravis, atque animi vmturus Aletcs,
proves nothing, because hic is there an adverb only.
Fac
Of quantity: 337
Fac, for the imperative ofjacio, is always long by nature.
Hoc fac Armenios—— Ovid.
And if we sometimes find it short, it is because they used, for-
merly to wntejace, according to Vossius after Julius Scaliger and
Yerulen, as in the same poet.
Jane face aternos pacem, pacisque 7mnisiros,
though Giffanius is of a contrary opinion.
Rule XLVIII.
D and L final.
1. T) is sliort at the end of words ;
2. As likewise L, 3. Except nil, sol, sal ;
4. And Hebrew words, as Daniel.
Examples.
1. D is short at the end of words, as dd, sM, qidd-
gidd, is t lid.
Q. Words that terminate in L are also short, as
tribunal, jil, mel, semel, penigll, pbl, procuL
3. The following are excepted, 7i7l, sol, sal.
4. Hebrew names are also excepted, as Daniel,
Michael, Michbl, Raphael, Sec.
ANNOTATION.
Nil is long, because it is a contraction for nihil, which is short,
according to the general rule ;
De nihilo nihil, in tiihilum nil posse reverti. Persius.
The following verse of Ovid is brought against us.
Morte nihil opus est, nihil Icariotide tela.
But then the reason of the last of nihil being long in the second
foot, is because of the caesura.
Of Words ending in M.
The Greeks, as we have observed, p. 267. did not end any
word at all with this letter, but it was a common termination
with the Latins. Yet as it is always cut off in verse before a vowel,
there is no necessity for giving any rule about it. However, we
may observe that the ancients let it stand and made it short.
Vomerem atque locis avertit seminis ictum. Lucr.
And if we find it sometimes long, this is in virtue of the caesura,
as
HcBC eadem ante illam, impune S^- Lesbiajecit. Propert.
In composition it is also short.
Qiio te circumagas. Jiiven.
Concerning which see what is said in the third section of this book,
c. 3. n. 1. speaking of the Ecthlipsis.
Vol. II. Z -- Rule
^38 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule XLIX.
N Final.
1. . N is long at the end of words :
2. Except an, in, and clein ;
3. Except also nouns in EN making mis;
4. As likewise tamen and viden*.
Examples.
1. N is long at the end of words; as Dan^ lien^ en.
Also in Greek words masculine and feminine, as
Tildfi, Sj/refi, Salamtn, Phorcyn,
Likewise Acteon, Corydbn^ and the like, which
have w.
And Greek accusatives of the first declension, as
JEncan, Anch'isen^ Caliwpen.
As well as the genitives plural, as Cim7nerdn, be-
cause it is also an w.
2. In the following N is short, dn, 1,n ; likewise
Jondn ?indjvrsitdn, compounded of iin.
Also dein, proin, for dtinde, proinde.
3. Nouns in EN, that make IN IS, are also short,
as nomen, noniinis ; peeler?, ptctinis ; tibicen, tibicinis,
4. As likewise tamtn, and its compound attamSn.
Also viden', and such like ; as riOsrin\ aui, satin\
egdn\ ne7ndn\ which are said by apocope instead of
widesne, ntmbnt ^ &c.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we may add the Greek nouns in on, which are of the
second declension in Latin, as Ilion, and the like, which in Greek
have an omicron. As also the accusative of nouns whose nomi-
native is short ; as Maian, Eginan, Alexin, Thclin, litn, Scorpion^
and the datives plural in zn, as Arcasln.
Rule L.
R Final.
1. R at the end of words is short :
2. But Greek nouns in ER that increase in the
genitive f are long ;
3. Add to these cur, tur, lar, far, ver, hir, nar,
4. yilso par, and its compounds, as dispar.
Exam-
Of quantity. 359
Examples.
1. R is short at the end of words, asCcssar, calcar,
imber, differ, imter^ v^r, gladiator, robtir.
2. Greek nouns in ER are long, when they in-
crease in the genitive ; whether this increase be short,
as aeVf (Ethei\ eris ; or whether it be long, as Crater,
gazer, poder, Reamer^ ' spirit er, eris. As also Iter,
though its compound Celtiber is short, conforming
thus to the Latin analogy.
Ducit ad auriferas qudd me Salo Celtiber oras. Mart.
Despauter mentions this noun as doubtful, but with-
out authority. Its increase indeed is long, as may be
seen above, rule 20. p. 313.
The other Greek nouns that have no increase in the
genitive, are short, a.s pater, mater.
3. The following words are also long, ciir, fur,
lar,far, hir, ndr, and 'oer, which last may be ranked
among the Greek nouns, since it comes from ja^, ^f,
as we have already observed.
4. Par and its compounds are also long, compar,
dispar, impar, suppdr, &c.
Ludere par impar, equitare in arundine longd. Hor.
ANNOTATION.
Vir is oftener short. Yet we find it long in this verse of Ovid,
De grege nunc tibi vIr 4" de grege nutus habendus. Ovid.
Cor is also doubtful, according to Aldus.
Mtdle cor ad timidas sic habet ille preces. Ovid.
MoUe meum levibus cor est violahite telis. Id.
Unless the passage be corrupted ; for every where else it is short.
Greek nouns in OR are always short, though in their own lan-
guage they have an u, as Hector, Nestor, &c. But it is not the
same in regard to the termination ON, which continues always
long when it comes from «, as we have shewn in the precedent
rule. For which this reason may be given, according to Camerius,
that the termination ON is entirely Greek, and therefore retains
the analogy and quantity of the Greek, otherwise, to latinize it,
we should be obliged to change it into O, as Plato, Cicero, &c.
whereas the termination OR being also Latin, nouns borrowed
from the Greek conform to it intirely without any alteration, and
therefore are of the same nature and quantity as the Latin.
'/. 2 Rule
540 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule LI.
AS Final.
1. AS at tilt end of words is long.
2. But AS, ADIS, is short.
3. Join thereto the Greek accusative ;
4. WitJi the nominative anas.
Examples.
1. AS at the end of words is long, as (Bias, Thomas^
JEneas^j'ds.ntfas; Pallas, antis ; Adamas, ajitis.
2. Greek nouns in AS, which make the genitive in
ADIS, are short, as Areas, Arcadis ; lampus, lampadis ;
Pallas, Palladis ; I lias, Iliados.
3. Tlie Greek accusatives of nouns, which in
Latin follow the third declension, are likewise short,
as Naiadas, Troas, Delphbias, Arcadcis.
Palantes Troas agcbat. Virg.
4. The noun anas is short, as in Petronius.
Et pictis anas cnovata pennis.
And even the very analogy of the language shews it,
having a short increase in the genitive anatis. .
Rule LII.
ES Final.
1. ES at the end of words is long.
2. Except 'Esfrom Sum, with its compounds.
3. And penes.
4- Greek nouns in ES are also short.
5. As likewise Latin nouns with a short increase.
6. JEicept pes, Ceres, aries, abies, and paries.
Examples.
\. ES at the end of words is long, as nubes, artes,
Cybeles, Joannes, locuples, Anchises, decies, venies, &c.
2. The verb sum makes es short, with its com-
pounds pates, ades, &c. But es from edo is long, be-
cause it is a crasis for edis, of which they made eis, es.
3. The
Of quantity. 341
3. The preposition /;f«e^ is also short.
4. Likewise Greek nouns of the neuter gender, as
hippomanes, caco'et/ws, &c.
The plural of Greek nouns that follow the third
declension of the Latins, makes ES also short in the
nominative and vocative, as Amazones, Arcades, aspi-
des, Delphines, Erinnldes, gryph^s, heroes, Lyncts, Mi-
mallones, Naiades, JVere'ides, Or cades, Phryges, Th races,
Tigrides, Troades, Troes, &c. But the accusative in
ES of these very nouns is long, because it is entirely a
Latin case, the Greek accusative ending in AS. Thus
has Arcades is long, and /los Arcadds is short,
5. The Latin nouns in ES, whose increase is short,
have es also short in the nominative singular, as mil^s^.
onilitis', seges, segetis; pedes, pedttis. But those whose
increase is long, are long, as hceres, edis ; locuples, etis^
6. The following have ES long, notwithstanding
thatthey havea short increase, Ceres, Cereris; pes, pedis.
Hicfarta premitur angiilo Ceres omni. Mart.
Pes etiam et camuris hirtce sub cornibus aures. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we might join these three, abies, abietis ; aries, artetis ;
parie.s, parietis ; though it seems to be rather the caesura that makes
them long ; for perhaps they will not be found of this quantity in
any other situation.
With regard to what is objected against the compounds of pes,
idadii prcepts is short in Virgil,
' praepes ab Ida.
And perpes in S. Prosper,
In Christo quorum gloria perpes erit.
It is evident that neither of these nouns is compounded of pes,
perpes being the same as perpetuus, and prcepes coming from 'n^omtl-hsf
prcBVolans, which was first of all in use among the augurs.
We must own that Ausonius shortens bipts and tripes, and
Probus teacheth that alipes and sonipes are likewise short. But the
contrary appears in Virgil, Lucan, and Horace. Therefore it is
better always to make them long, like their simple.
Poets who flourished towards the decline of the Latin tongue,
have taken the liberty to shorten the last in James, lues, proles,
plebes, which is not to be imitated. Cicero likewise has made the
final short in alitts, and in pedes the plural of pes, and Ovid in ty-
grcs, as conformable to the Greek analogy.
Rule
342 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule LIII.
IS Final.
1. IS fl^ the end of words is short.
2. But the plural cases are always long,
3. As also the nominative singular of nouns that
have a lona: increase.
4. Likewise such verbs as answer in number and
tense to audis.
5. With Fis, sis, vis, and velis.
Examples.
1. IS at the end of words is short, as amaih, infjuis,
qiiiSf 1,s, pronoun ; m, preposition ; virgiriiSy vuUiSf
Sec.
Y has a great relation to I, for which reason jt is
also short, as Chelys, Capys, Libys, &c.
2. Tiie plural cases are alwa^'s long, as virls, armlSy
musis, siccJs, glebJs, nobis ; omms for omnds, or omnes ;
urbls for urbeis, or urbes ; (juels for qui bus ; 'vobis, &c.
Gratis andjorls are also long, in this respect par-
taking of the plural cases.
Dat gratis idtro dat mihi Galla, nego. Mart.
Wherein P. Melissus, in a letter to Henry Stephen,
acknowledges himself to have been heretofore mis-
taken.
3. Nouns in IS are long, when their increase hap-
pens to be long, as Simols, entis ; Pyrols, eniis ; lis, li-
tis ; dls, dltis ; SammSy Itis ; QjuirJs, itis ; Salamls, mis ;
glls, glJris ; semis, stmlssis.
But those of a short increase are also short, as san-
gms, sanguinis.
3. Verbs make IS long in the second person singular ;
whenever tlie second person plural in itis is long.
As in the present of the fourth conjugation, audJs,
nescls, se)itis, vems.
5. As J Is from //o, *7* from sum, and its com-
pounds, possls, prosls, udsls.
As 'cls from voloy and its compounds, ma'cls ; as
also quarnvlSy cuixTis.
Likewise 'cells, ?nalJs, noils.
And
Of QUANTITY. 345
And in fine according to some, asfadJs, ausJs, which
follow the same analogy.
ANNOTATION.
Some will have his^ nescis, possis, velis, and pulvis to be com-
mon ; which is not without authority. But pulvis is long in Vir-
gil by csesura ; and as for the others, it is always better to follow the
general rules.
Christian poets sometimes make IS short in the fourth^ as
— ■ non tu
Pervenis ad Christum, sed Christus pervenit ad te, Sedul.
which is not to be imitated.
Of the termination RIS in the subjunctive.
In regard to the termination RIS of the subjunctive, it is so
often long and short in verse, that some have been led thereby to
believe it was long in the future, and short in the preterite. But
this distinction is by no means satisfying ; for as we have shewn in
the remarks on Syntax, book 6. p. 107. the preterite in rim is ofteu
made to express the future, as well as the past; and therefore we
tnay say in general, that whether in the preterite, or the future,
tve may always make them short, as su£BcientIy appeareth from the
following examples.
Quas gentes Ital&m, aut gtias non oraveris urbes. Virg.
GrcBcidus esuriens in ccelum jusseris, ibit, Juven.
Dixeris, egregie, &c. Hor.
■ Dixeris astuo, sudat. Juven.
— ^-^— Namjru&tra vitiiim vitaveris illud. Hor.
Is mihi, dives eris, si cansas egeris, ingrtit. Mart.
And if we should be asked, nevertheless, whether it be true, that they
are also sometimes long in the future, it is certain there are exam-
ples thereof.
Miscuerls elixa, simul conchylia turdis. Hor.
But this may be referred to the caesura. At least 1 never tnet with
them long, except on such an occasion. Which shews that we may
abide by what Probus says, that this syllable RIS is always short,
whether in the preterite, or in the future subjunctive.
Some have also remarked that this last syllable RIS is long only
when the antepenultimais short, as we see in attHleiis, audiens, bibt*
rw, dedens, cred'idhis, fucrts^ and others ; so that the penultima
being likewise short in all those words, there is a necessity for
lengthening the last, in order to admit them into verse. Therefore
they will have this to be only a licence, which has nevertheless
become a rule ; whereas if the antepenultima is long, this last syl-
lable will be ever short according to its nature, as appears in dixeris,
egensyjeceris, junxeris, quceslveris, videris, and others. This re-
mark has some foundation, since it is generally true : but in words
where they pretend it is long hf poeti« licence, there is always a
caesura.
Rule
344 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Rule LIV.
OS Final. -
1. OS at the end of words is long.
2. Except compos, impos.
3. Also Greek nouns written with omicron,
4. A?id OS, ossis.
Examples.
1. OS at the end of words is long, as honoSy ros,
OS, oj^is, the mouth ; liros, &c.
2. Compds and impos, which Aldus supposeth to be
long, are short.
Insefjuere, &; voti postmocio compds eris. Ovid.
3. Greek nouns are short, when written in Greek
with an omicron, as Arctbs, inelds, Chaos, Argds, I/ids;
and tlie genitives in OS, as Arcados, Palladds, Tethy^s^
jBut nouns written in Greek with a.no?nega are long, as
At/ids, Herds, Aiidrogeds, &c.
Viveret Androgens utinam. Ovid.
4. These nouns are also short, 6s, ossis, a bone; exbSj
one that has no bones.
Exos <§' e.ranguis tumidos perjluctuat artus. Lucret.
Rule LV.
US Final.
1. US at the end of words is short.
2. But nouns that retai?i\J in thegenitiveare long.
3. US is also long in four cases of the fourth
declension.
4. As likewise in Tripus.
Examples.
1. US is short at the end of words, as tuiisy illiiis,
intus, sensibus, vuhws, impetiis.
2. Nouns that retain U in the genitive are always
long, whether they make it in untis, uris, utis,
UDI.S, or uis, as Opus, Opuntis, the name of a town;
tellus,telluris; rus, ruris ; jus, juris; salus, salutis; mr-
ins, virtutis ;.palm, palUdis ; grus, gruh ; sus, su'is.
' ' " ANNO*
Of QUANTITY. 345
ANNOTATION.
Paliis occurs but once in Horace,
Regis opus, sterilisque diu paliis, aptaque remis.
Which is more to be remarked than imitated, though Palerius
followed the example in his poem on the immortality of the soul.
Interciis, ulis, is also short, because the nominative was into cutis,
hujus ititercutis, of which they have made interciis by syncope.
Tellus is likewise siiort in Martianus Capella,
Interminata marmore telliis erat.
But this author often takes such liberties, in which his example
is by no means to be copied.
3. Nouns of the fourth declension are also short in
the nominative and vocative singular, as hie JructuSy
hcec manus.
Hie Dolopumm^LUus, Inescevus tendebat Aehilles.Y'wg,
But these very nouns are long in the other cases in US,
which are four ; namely, the genitive singular, the
nominative, accusative, and vocative plural; because,
as we have observed when treating of the declensions,
vol. 1. p. 123. this termination w.y comes from a con-
traction in all those cases, viz. uh in the genitive,
manu'is, manis ; and u'en, us^ for the other three, ma-'
mies, mantis, &c.
4. Tripiis, tripodis, is also long in the last of the no-^
minative. To which we may add MelampUs.
ANNOTATION. ^^
Greek nouns ending in ov/; make us long in Latin, because it
comes from the diphthong, as Amaihus, Jesus. As likewise cer-
tain genitives that come from the Greek termination oos, oli, as
^anto, Mantus; Sappho, Sapphus ; and the like. There are only
the compounds of wov? (except tripus and Melampus) that are short;
as Polipiis, CEdipus, &c. because they drop the v of the diphthong
according to the iEolians, and only change os into us, as we find
by the genitive which makes odis, and not oudis and untis.
Nouns in eus are also long by reason of the diphthong, as AtreuSf
Orpheus, Briareus.
The ancients used to cut off S at the end of the words in verse,
just as we do M ; hence they said aliu*, dignu*, montiki* ; which
lasted till Cicero's and Virgil's time.
Rule LVI.
T Final.
T at the end of zvords is short.
Exam-
346 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Examples.
T at the end of words is short, as audiity legit, ca-
put^Juglt, amaty &c.
ANNOTATION.
T final was heretofore common, as Capella witnesseth, and as
we still see in Ennius : but at present it is looked upon as short.
And if we find it sometimes long, this is owing to the caesura, as
in Martial,
Jura trium pctilt a Cccsare discipulorum.
And in Ovid,
Nox abilt, oriturqne Aurora, Palilin poscor.
We are not even allowed, as some pretend, to make it long m
the last syllable of the preterites formed by syncope; and if we
sometimes find it thus, it is always in consequence of the caesura, as
in Horace,
ut iniques mentis Asellus,
Cmn vravius dorso subilt onus.
However, if beside the syncope of the U, there is also a synere-
sis of two ii, then in virtue of this contraction of two syllables
into one, the T, like any other letter, may become long, pur-
suant to what we observed in the first rule. Thus in Virgil, ^n.
lib. 9.
"Dum trepidant, it hasta Togo per tempus utrumque.
For it is there in the preterite instead of iit. Likewise in Ovid,
1. Trist. eleg. 9.
Dnrdani&mque petit antoris nomen hahentem.
for petiit, and the like ; though, generally speaking, they 4re with
a caesura, as in the last example.
Rule LVII.
Of the Last Syllable of the verse.
The last syllable of the verse is always common.
Examples.
The last syllable of every verse is common, that is,
we may look upon it as short or long, just as we will,
without being confined to any rule; as in this verse
from Virgil :
Ge?2s inimica mihi Tyrrhenum navigat agquor.
The last of the word {Equor is short by nature,
though it passeth as long.
And in this other verse out of Martial,
^obis non licet esse tarn disertis,
the
Of quantity.
U7
the last of disertls is long by nature, though it is
here supposed to be short.
Observations on divers Syllables
whose quantity is disputed.
PHIS is all we had to mention in regard to the rules
X of quantity. The syllables not included in these rules,
ought to be learnt by the use and authority of the poets, such as
most of those in the middle of words, and all those which are
called Nature, of which we have given some hints in different
parts of the annotations.
But as there are many words whose quantity is often disputed,
and others where it is perverted by following the authority of cor-
rupt passages, or of authors no way deserving of imitation ; 1 shall
therefore give here a list of such as 1 thought the most necessary to
be observed.
List of words whose quantity is disputed.
A»s T B M I u s, the second long,
though Rutitius would faia have
it short.
Si forte in medio pesitorum abstetnius
herbit. Hor.
Affatim, the second short in a
▼erse of Accius's, which is in the 2d
Tusc,
Turn jecore opimo farta 6( satiata
affatim.
Some have insisted on its being long
because of this verse of Arator,
Suppeiit affatim exemplorum copia,
nosgue.
But besides that we might scan it per-
haps without making an elision of the
M, as was frequently practised by the
ancients, and thus make a dactyl of «/-
faiim, we must further observe that this
poet (who flourished under Justinian at
the same time with Priscian and Cassio-
dorus) is not so exact in his poetry, as
to be of any authority with us.
Anathema, when it signifies a
person excommunicated, as in St. Paul,
1. Cor. xvi. 21. is generally written in
Greek with an s, and therefore hath the
peoultima short. But when it denote^
a p4-esenl or an offering hanged up in
temples and churches, it is commonly
written with an n, as in St. Luke,
xxi. 5, and elsewhere ; and therefore it
hath the penultima long : though some-
times the orthography of it is altered j
being stiii but one and the sftme word.
compounded of Tt&i/**, ponn, which
takes either the n or the e m both sifini-
fications ; and then the quauUty will b«
also changed.
Antea. See p. 329.
Archytas bath the penultima longj
as Vnssius observes, and as appeareth
by this verse out of Propertius,
Me CI eat Archytas subelei Babgloniat
kerns.
And by this other of Horace^ lib. I.
Od. 2a.
T* maris 6C terra, numere<pt» cwr«n(is
arena
Mensorem cohibent Archyta.
And therefore it is wrong in Aratns,
S. Sidonius, and Fortunatus, to make
it long.
Areopacos, the penultima dunbt*
ful. Some derive it from p-igus, the
former long, as coming from myn^
fans : and St. Austin explains it ttcum.
Martis ; wherein he is followed by
Budeus with most of the Grefk an4
Latin dictionaries. Others derive it
from Trayof, collis, the penultima short j
which is the opinion of Vossius, Ricci.
olius, and others, founded on this,
that it appears by Euripides, Pausanias,
Hesychius, Suidas, and the Etymologist,
that this place was elevated, and ap-
peared as it were on an eminence.
AzvMOs, the second commonly sliort
in Prudentius, and in the hymu of the
first Sunday aitor Eastei.
Sinceril«iii
t
348
NEW METHOD.
Book X.
Sinceritatis azyma. Yet by right it
should be long, being a word compound-
ed of a privative and (Cfxi), fermenlum,
whereof the former is long, as appears
by I^C/jicvfxa. in Nicander, derived from
the same root, M^ fxh Jn t^vy,ot[juL koxov
;tJovj{, &C.
Candace, KavJaitt), the penultima
may be pronounced long in pruse, by
following the accent. But in v^erse it
is short, the Eame as Canace, Panace,
and the like j which is further coutirmed
by this verse of Juvenal.
Candacis JElliiopum dicunt arcana
modvsque.
CicUKAiiE is to be found no wliere
but in a very corrupt verse of Pacurius's,
quoted by Varro. Yet the two first
syllables are supposed to be short, as
well as cicurh,
Cis, a preposition, is reckoned short
by Vossius, though there is no ancient
authority for it. But the analogy
seems to require it. The same may he
said of bis, which is always short in
Ovid, though Arator has made it long.
This may be further confirmed by the
authority of its derivatives. For though
citrdque is long in Horace, by virtue of
the mute and liquid, yet cilro is short in
Sidonius, and cilimus in Fulgentius, in
bis Astronomies.
3u& citimus limes dispescit nubila
puris.
For which reason Buchanan is censured
for having made the first long in citimus
and cilerior.
Cleopatra has by nature the pe-
nultima common, because of the mute
and liquid ; for it comes from 'Ka-rn^.
So that in prose we ought to place the
accent on the antepenultima. But the
first and second being always short, the
third must needs be long in hexameter
and pentameter verses.
Cytiierea balk the antepenultima
short in Homer, writing it with an £.
tfM, as it is derived from cpo;;. But
Hesiod writes it with an i, and there-
fore makes it long. Virgil constantly
shortens it. But in Ovid we likewise
£nd it long.
Puree melu Cytherea, manenl immota
tuorum, RLn. 1.
^nntiit atqne dolts risit Cytherea re-
pertis. Rn. 4.
Mola Cytherea est leviler sua tempora
myrio. Fast. 4.
CoNOPEUM hath the penultima
long in Juvenal ; but it is short m
Horace and Propertius, though it
comes from the Greek KamnirMv, be-
cause perhaps the louians said nwi-
trtov.
Sol aspicit conopeum. Lib. Epod.
Ftrduque Tarpeio conopea iendere
iaxo. Prop. lib. 3.
CoNTriA. See p. 329.
CoNTRovEnsus ought, I think, to
have the second long, according to the
analogy of compound words, by us
observed, p. 304. And thus Ausonius
has put it, though Sidonius makes it
short.
CoitBiTA has the second long, though
it is commoidy pronounced short.
This is sufficiently, ascertained by the
authority, not only of Plautus, but of
Lucilius.
Tardiures qvam corbitae sunt in tran-
guillo mari. Lucil.
Crf.bre & Crebro have both the for-
mer long, because they are derived from
creber, which hath it long also. And
thus Horace has put it.
Est mihi purgatam crebrb qui personet
aurem.
Crocito. The second, though com-
monly made short, is long nevertheless,
according to Vossius, because he says
it comes from crocio, just as dormilo
comes from dormio. Yet we find it
short in Mapheus 13. ^n.
Dehinc perturbatus, crocitans exquirit
ft" omties.
And in the fable of Philomela :
Et crocitat corvus ; gracculus alfri-
gulat.
True it is that those authore are not
exempt from mistakes; and we have
taken notice of several.
Thus
CuciJLUS is generally short in the pe-
nultima, and every body pronounces
it thus, because of the verse of the
Philomela:
Et cuculi cuctilant, /n7mnj7 rauca «"-
cada.
Yet all classic authors, says Vossius, do
make it long.
MagnA compellans voce cucu-
lum. Hor.
Ricciolius, in proof of its being short,
quotes the following verse, as he says,
from Martial :
Sttamvis per plures cuculus caniaverit
annos.
But it is not to be found among his
works.
F.lectrum has ever the first long,
according to Vossius, being written
with an n, whether it be taken for
amber, or for silver mixed with the
third or fourth part gold; though
ErythreuE,
Of quantity.
34^
Erythreus, Ricciolius, and some others,
pretend that the n being changed into e,
this syllable may be short : this they
endeavour to prove by passages from
Virgil, which Vossius shews to be all
corrupted, as may be seen in his third
book of Anal. c. 36.
Eradico, notwithstanding what the
great Latin Thesaurus says, hath the
penultima long, as coming from radix,
ids. Nor does it signify to object this
verse of Plautus :
Eradicabam hominum aures guando
acceperam,
because the comic poets are apt to put
a spondee for an iambus in the second
foot, as appears from this same verse of
Terence,
Dii te eradicentj Ua me miseram ter-
rilas.
Erunt, the termination of the pre-
terite, like tulerunt, doubtful in the pe-
nultima. See rule 15, p. 313.
FoRTUiTus hath the penultima com-
mon. It is long in Horace,
Nee fortuitum spernere cespilem.
And in this trochaic verse of Plautus :
Si earn senex anus pragnantem. for-
iuitnf eceril.
Which happens also to Gratuitus.
But it is not true, as Duza pretends,
that the i is never short in those words;
for we find the contrary by the follow-
ing verse in Statius :
Largis gratuitum cadit rap'inis.
Frustra is marked with the last
common by Smetius and others. But
Vossius assures us it is ever long in
antient authors, and he will have it that
in this verse which is quoted from
Juvenal, to prove it short,
^^nimnte cumulus quod nudum &\
frustra rogantem,
we ought to read frusta rogantem, ac-
cording as Mancinellus says he found
it in antient copies. True it is that
-Ausonius as well as some others have
shortened it; yet the safest way is to
make it long.
FuLicA is found with the first and
second long in this verse in Gellius,
Hie fulica levis volitat super cequore
classis :
yet every where else they are short j
In sieco ludunt fulicse, notdsque palu-
des. Virg.
G«TULUS, the first and second long,
because it comes from rairuXo?.
Destruat, aut captam ducat Gastulus
larbas. Virg.
Argentum, vestes Gaetulo murice linc-
tas. Hor.
Pensnhnm Pkarium Gaetulis messibus
annum. Claud.
And therefore it is an error in an epi-
gram attributed to Martial, to read it as
Fieri us does.
Traducta est Getulis, nee cepit arena
nocentes. In spectacul. Canton,
and as it is printed in Plantin's edition
by Junius : whereas the old MSS. have
2'radita Gcctidis, 8^c. And Ricciolius is
guilty 9f the same mistake, when he is
for making it short in this verse of Ovid,
Hero. Ep. 7.
2uid dubitas vinciam Getulo me tra-
dere Hiarba ?
whereas the best editions have GcPtuh
tradere larbce.
Gesticulator is generally marked
long in the second, as coming from
gestire ; but Vossius believes it is rather
short, as coming from gesticulus. And
this is also the opinion of Ricciolius,
though there is no authority, one way
or other.
Gratuitus. See Fortoitus.
Harpago, if we believe Calepin,
who has been followed by all the com-
pilers of dictionaries since his time,
hath the penultima long : but they
produce no authority for it. Whereas
we meet ' with £ic a^nayin;, the penul-
tima short in Autotnedon's 2d book
of Epigrams. And it is also the opi-
nion of Vossius and Ricciolius, that it
hath the penultima short : so that even
in prose we ought ever to pronounce it
with the accent on the penultima, har-
pago.
HoRNOTiNUs, which comes from
homo, that is, hoc anno, hath the pen-
ultima short. See Serotinus, lower
down.
Idolothytum, E'JajXo^uTov, is some-
times pronounced according to the
Greek accent. But in regard to quan-
tity the penultima is always long in
verse, as it comes from Sua), sacri-
Jico, whence also we have ^Zfj-a, sacri-
ficium, which would not have a circum-
flex on the former, unless it was long
by nature.
Imbecillus, though it comes from
baculus, hath the second long in Lucre-
tius and in Horace.
Imbecillus, iners sim quid vis, adds
pop i no.
And therefore it is wrong in Prudentius
to make it short.
Involucrum hath the penultima
long by nature, as well as lava^rum,
because they come from the supines
lavatum and involutum. Hence it is
an
350
NEW METHOD.
Book X.
an error in Pruilent'ius to make it short
iu tliis Asdepiad verse :
CotUfntnm involucris aliirie cubilibus.
But this is further confirmed by the
foilowint; pentameter of Rutilius :
Inveslignlufonle, lavacra dcdit.
And it would be wrong to use it other-
ways, though we meot with some in-
stances to the contrary in St. Prosper.
JuDAicus hath the second short in
Juvenal.
Judaicum ediscunt if servant, ac rue-
titunt jus.
Claiidian uses it in the same manner;
whiise authority is preferable to that of
the ecclesiastic authors, who make it
long.
Latro, as, hath the former long in
Horace and Virgil.
Ne^cio quid cerii est, &> Hylax in li-
mine latrat. Eel.
True it is that not only ecclesiastic
writers, but even Phfcdrus, have made
it short.
Canem objurgabat, qui senex contra
latrans. lib. 5.
Though this <loes not deserve to be
imitated, since it is contrary to the
practice of thojc who wrote during
the purity of the lanftnage.
LoTiuM, which is marked by dic-
tionaries with the first short, ought to
have it long, as well as latum from
whence they derive it.
Hoc te amplius bibisse pradicet loli.
Catul.
Matricida. See p. 308.
Melos. The penultlma short by na-
ture.
Regina tongum Call'mpe melos, Hor.
But they aie mistaken who think it is
never otheiwise (which was the opi-
nifrti of Politian), as we can prove from
Periius.
Canlare credas Pfgise'inm melos.
Whi' h he undoubtedly dc-igned in imi-
tati<in of the fireeks, with whom the
simple liquids have the power of length-
ening a syllable, as well as the double
eonsonnnts.
0£OC 5' i/TTo /UiXc; aliiTt. Hom.
Which Ricciolius docs not seem to have
rightly understood, because he attributes
it to some dialect, in which perhap-; this
Word was written with an n instead of
an c
MiTHRA hath the former long by
nature.
Indignata seqni torqiicnten cornua Mi-
thram. Sta.
for which reason Vossiu« finds fault
with Capella, whom he likewise cen-
sures in many other respects, for mak-
ing it short.
Monus. See SvcoMontJS, lower
down.
Movsi.s in Christian poets is frequent-
ly a trissyllable, the first short, and the
second lot)g, contrary to the analogy of
the Greek a»u.
Felut ipse Moyses. Prud.
2uid ^ qitud Sf F.lium, &\ ctarum
virlere Moysen. Sedul.
NiHiLUM. The second short, con-
trary to the opinion of GiiTanius, and
some other grammarians.
Cigni
De nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse
revnl'i. Pers.
Nor must it be said that this is done
by a contraction or syneresis, because
we can produce some other authorities
that are irrefragable.
At marile, ita me juvent
Caliles, nihilominus
Pulcher es. Catul.
Novicius hath the antepenultima
long.
Jam sedel in ripd, tetrumgue novicius
hnrret. Juven.
Which is so much the more remark-
able, as all adjectives in icius, derived
fron» a noun, do shorten the penultima.
Priscian even insists that this rule is
without exception. But of those that
come either from paiticiples or verbs,
some are long, as advectilius, commen-
dalilius, suppusititius,
Hermes supposi'atius sibi ipsi. Mart.
Obedio hath the second long, be-
cause it comes from audio. This ap-
pears further by the following iambic
of Afranius,
Meo obsequar amort, obedio libens.
And Plautus,
Futiira est dido obediens, an non pa-
tri?
So that it is a mistake in the poet
Victor, who lived late in the fifth cen-
tury, to make it short in the following
verse :
Juisit adesse Decs, proprioque obedirc
tyranno.
Omitto for obmitto hath the first
short.
Pleraque diff'erat K preesens in temput
omittat. Hor.
Pa LAM hath always the former short
in antient authors.
JL'/ce palam Cftttum est igni circundare
muros. Virg.
Though S. Prosper in his poem makes
it long.
Paracletus, See p. 501.
Par.
Of quantity.
351
Parricida. See p. 308.
Patrimus A" MATRiMUS havc the
penultiiiia long, which Julius Scaliger,
and before hitii Politianus, believed
to be short. This is proved by tlie
authority of Catullus, even as the
passage is read by Joseph Scaliger him-
self.
Suare habe tibi, quicquidhoc libelli est.
Sualecumque, quod 6 patrima virgo,
Plus uno muneaf perenne seclo.
And analogy requires it thus, because
whenever the termination imus is added
quite entire in the derivation of a word,
the i is short of course, as legitimus
from lex, legh ; jinithnus from finis;
aditimus from eedes, ad s ; solislimus
from solum, soli, &,c. But when there
is only mus added for the derivation,
then the i before mus is long, primus
from pra or pris, bimus from bis, Irimus
from ireis or tris. In like manner pa-
trimus from paler, patris ; matrimus from
mater, matris.
PoLYMiTUs, when it signifies em-
broidered, or wove with threads of
divers colours, hath the penultima
short, because it comes from fj^iro;,
filum, which is so in Homer. But we
are not to confound it with w«Xu/t*»)Tc?,
learned, one who knows a vast deal, or
7r«Xu/uu9'o5, a great inventor of fables,
which have the penultima long.
PosTEA. Seep. 329.
Pn^ESTOLOK is generally pronounced
the second long. Thus- Valla has
made it, upon translating this verse of
Herodotus:
Terrenasque acies ne praestolare, sed
hosti.
Yet Buchanan has made it short in his
Psalms:
Vitee bealee praestolor.
Which Vossius approveth, so much the
more as of prcesto is formed prcpstulus,
or according to the ancients, /)r«i/oiMj,
(who is quite ready) from whence
comes praslolor,
Profuturos hath the second short,
according to the nature of its
simple.
P'tEcipue infelix pesii devota futurse,
Virg.
Wherefore Baptista Mantuanus is cen.
sured for making it long.
PsALTERiuM, the second long, be-
cause in Greek we say -^.a^Tn^m with
an :). Thus we find it in the Ciris at-
tributed to Virgil.
Non argula sonant tenui psalteria
chordA.
And therefore we must not mind the
authority of Aratus, who has made it
otherwise.
PoGiLLUs is reckoned by some to
have the first long, which they prove
by its derivative in Juven.
Aec pugillares defert in balnea raucus.
Yet in Ausonius, Prudentius, and For-
tunatus, we find it short j which may
be further confirmed by the authority
of Horace, who shortens pugil.
Vl lethargicus kic quum fit pugil, et
medicum urget.
PuLEx hath ever the former long, as
appears by Martial :
Puiice, vel si quid pulice sordidius.
And by Columella.
Parvulus aut pulex irrepens dente
lacessel.
Yet a great many modem writers
make it short; an error into which they
have been led by the poem, iotitled
Pulex, and falsely attributed to Ovid,
where we read,
Parve pulex, £? amara lues inimica
puellis.
But this poem is no more his than the
Philomela, in which we find a great
number of mistakes.
PuTA. See p. 328.
Resina hath the penultima long ;
though some insist on its being com-
mon, because of a verse in Martial,
1. 3. c. 25. which others think to be a
mistake.
Rhea, the former common, because
the Greeks write not only peij but pejn,
(both are to be found in Callimachus.)
Hence Ovid has made it short,
Siepe Rhea quetla est toties facundog
nee unquam.
And Virgil long,
Coilis Aventini silvi quern Rhea fa-
re; dos.
RuDiMENTUM hath the second long,
because it comes from the supine eru-
dilum. And so Virgil has made it,
Betlique propinqui
Dura rudimenta
And Valerius Flaccus,
Dura rudimenta Herculeo sub norfttnt
pendent.
And Statins,
Cruda rudimenta &! teneros formave-
ril annos,
Saluber, the second long by nature,'
as coming from salus, ntis. Hence it
is wrong in Buchanan to make it
short :
Nomen, qui salubri lemperie modum.
Psal 99.
For we find that Ovid did not use it thus :
Vtfaveasccpptis, PAcrie saluber ades.
SCRU-
359,
NEW METHOD.
Book X.
ScRUPULUM hath the first long, as
comins; from scnipus :
. Hui'ique paranl maiathri scrupula,
myrrha decern. Ovid.
"Whoreforc in this verse of Fannius in
his book of weiglits and measures, we
should read scriplum ; or rather icrijil-
luin, and not saupulum.
Gramma vocant, scriptlntn nostri
clixere priorfs.
Since as from y^a,<^ii>) cometh y^afx/xa,
so from scTibo, scriptum, cometh scvp-
t'jlum, and by syncope sciipllum, even
according to Cliarisius.
Sempiternus, the second long, as
Scaliger proveth against Prndentius and
modern authors, because it comes from
semper and aternus.
Spado, the former always short, as we
see in Juvenal.
Cum lener uxorem ducat spado, Ncs-
via Thuscum
Figai aprum Sat. 1.
Ut spado vincebal Capifolia nostra
Polkles.SiX.X^.
In Martial,
Tlielim viderat in togd spadonem.
A {"haleucian verse.
Again,
Nee spado, nee mceckus erit te consule
quisquam;
At plus, 6 mores, ^- Spado mceckus
erat.
So thattpc must not mind Arator, who,
among several other mistakes, hath
committed this of making it long.
Auslralem celerare viam qud spado
jiigatis
Mlkiopum pergehal equis. Lib. 1.
Astr.
Which may so much the more impose
upon persons not well versed in poetry,
as the above verse of Arator is quoted
in Smetius with the name of Virgil,
through a mistake which has crept into
all the editions that ever I saw : though
Virgil never so much as once made use
of the word spado.
Spr.cra. It is also a mistake in
Prudentius to make the former short in
this word.
Cujus ad arbUrium sphera molilis at-
que rotunda.
Tot it comes from er^ai^a. And this
may be owing to the corruption which
we observed in the treatise of letters,
when ceasing to pronounce the diph-
thongs, they began to put a simple E
for M and CE.
Sycomohus is reckoned to have the
penultima common ; for being derived
from a-vKor (ficusj and fji.i^oi (morumj
as juopov in Greek is wrote with an ©mi-
cron, it may be short. But this same
penultima may be long, because morut
in Latin hath the former long, though
Calepin makes it short.
Arduu niorus erat niveis uberrima
pomis. Ovid.
Mutua quin cllam moris commercia
Jicus. Pallad.
Whereto we may add that this word is
differently wrote, some editions having
ff-uHOjuo^ia, and others trvy.o/x'jjpitia,.
Temetum hath the penultima
long.
Pullns, ova, cadum temeti : nemfe
modo iilo. Hor.
Though JMuretus hatli maile it short,
Thymiama, the penu'tima long by
nature, because it comes from Su-
ToncuiAR, the penultima short, as
Despauter and the great Latin The-
saurus observe; which is further con-
firmed by Vossius and Ricciulius; be-
cause it comes from tarqueo, in the
same manner as specular or speculum
from spfculur, though we find it long in
Fortiinatus through necessity.
Tnicj.NTA, and the like. See p.
330.
TniTuno, the penultima long, be-
cause it comes from ttiii/ra or Iriturus,
of the same nature as pictura or piciu-
Tus, whence also cometh picturo. Some
nevertheless derive it from tritern, as
much as to say tertero, and pretend
therefore that we may make it short.
ViETUs hath the second long.
Necsupra caput rjusdem cecidisse vietam
Vestem- -Lucret.
Likewise in Prudentius,
Et turbida ab ore vieto
Nubila discussit.
Nor must we suffer ourselves to be led
into an error by this verse of Horace :
3ui sudor vietis ^ qudm malus undi'
que membris.
Because vietis is there a dissyllable by
syneresis.
ViRi;r.ENTUS, the second short, like
all nouns of this same termination,
as fraudulentus, luculentus, pulveru-
lenlus.
Ne dictat mihi luculentus Altis.
Mart.
a Phaleucian verse.
And therefore Baptista Mantnanus
is mistaken in saying,
. 2uem virulcnta Megcera.
Ultra. See p. 330.
Univehsi, the second short. But la
UNiouiuMB it is long. The reason
is
Of quantity. 353
is because in the latter, uni is declined, Utrius. Vossius in the 2d book
coming from the nommativ e untisguis- de arte Gram. chap. 13. and in his
^ue, and therefore retains the quantity smaller Grammar, p. 285. says that
Jt \TOuld have uncompounded: whereas it is never otherwise than long in the
in the former it is not declined, as it second ; yet it is more than once short
comes from universus, the nature of in Horace,
which is communicated to the other Docte sermones utriusque linguce, lib.
cases. And this analogy ought to take 3. Od. 8.
place on all the like occasions, as hath Fasl'uliret olus qui me nolat, Uirius
l)een observed, rule 7, p. 307. horum
Vomica, the first long in Serenus, Verba probes Lib. 1. ep. 17. ad
who lived about the middle of the third Scaev.
century. And therefore it may be said that i in
Vomica qitalis erit ? this noun is common, the same as in
But it is short, in Juvenal, who flourish- unius, ullius, and others of the like ter-
ed towards the close of the first, mination, of which we have taken no-
Et phthisis iSf vomicae pulres £(" dimi' tice in the third rule.
vadium crus.
Section II.
Of accents,
And the proper Manner of Pronouncing Latin.
Chapter I.
I. Of the nature of Accents, and hoxv many sorts there
are.
A
C C E N T S are nothing else but certain small marks that
were invented in order to shew the tone and several inflec-
tions of tlie voice in pronouncing.
The antients did not mark tl)ose tones, because as they were in
some measure natural to them in their own language, use alone
was sufficient to acquire them ; but they were invented in after-
times, either to fix the pronunciation, or to render it more easy to
strangers* This is true not only in regard to Greek and Latin,
but also to the Hebrew tongue, which had no points in St. Jerome's
time.
Now the inflexions of the voice can be only of three sorts ;
either that which rises, and the musicians call ol^cnv, elevation ; or
that which sinks, and they call ^hiv, positio7i or depression ; or that
which, partaking of both, rises and sinks on one and the same
syllable. And in this respect the nature of the voice is admirable,
says Cicero in his book de Oratore, since of these three inflections
it forms all the softness and harmony of speech.
On this account therefore three sorts of accents 'have been in-
vented, whereof two are simple, namely the acute and the grave ;
and the other compound, namely the circumflex.
: Vol. II. •'a a The
354 NEW METHOD. Book X.
The acute raiseth the syllable somewhat, and is marked by a
small line rising from left to right ( ' ).
The grave depresseth the syllable, and is marked on the con-
trary by a small line descending from left to right, thus { * )•
The circumflex is composed of the other two, and therefore is
marked thus (').
As accents were invented for no other purpose than to mark
the tone of the voice, they are therefore no sign of the quantity
of syllables, whether long or short; which is evidently proved,
because a word may have several long syllables, and yet it shall
have but one accent ; as on the contrary it may be composed
entirely of short ones, and yet shall have its accent, as Asia,
dominus, &c.
II. Rides of Accents and of Latin IVords.
The rules of accents may be comprised in three or four words ;
especially if wc content ourselves with the most general remarks,
and with what the grammarians have left us upon tliis subject.
For MONOSYLLABLES.
If they are long by nature, they take a circum-
flex, asfos I OS, oris ; a, L
2. It they be short, or only long by position, they
take an acute, as spes ; 6s, ossis ; fax, &c.
Tor DISSYLLABLES and POLY-
SYLLABLES.
1. In words of two or more syllables, if the last be
short, and the penultima long by nature, this penul-
tima is marked with a circumflex, as foris, Jldma,
Romdnus, &c.
2. Except the above case, dissyllables have always an
acute on the penultima, as homo, pejus, parens, &c.
Polys341ables have the same, if the penultima bfe
long, as parentes, ArLvis, Romano, &c. otherwise they
throw their accent back on the antepenultima, as
mhximus, nltimus, dominus, &c.
III. Reasons for the above Rules.
Here it is obvious that the rules of accents are founded on the
length or shortness of syllables : which has obliged us to defer
mentioning them till we had treated of Quantity.
Now the reasons of these rules are very clear and easy to com-
prehend. For accent being no more than an elevation which
gives a grace to the pronunciation, and sustains the discourse, it
could not be placed further than the antepenultima either in
Greek
Of ACCENTS. 355
Greek or Latin, because if three or four syllables were to come
after the accent (as if we should say perficerc, perficeremmj they
would be heaped, as it were, one upon another, and consequently
would form no sort of cadence in the ear, which, according to
Cicero, can hardly judge of the accent but by the three last
syllables, as it can hardly judge of the harmony of a period but
by the three last words. Therefore the farthest the accent can
be placed is on the antepenultima, as in dOminits, homines, amdve-
rant, &c.
But since the Romans in regulating the accents have had a par-
ticular regard to the penultiraa, as the Greeks to the ultima, if the
word in Latin hath the penultima long, this long syllable being
equivalent to two short ones, receives the accent, Roma, Romanus,
producing nearly the same cadence in the ear by reason of their
length, as maxlmus.
And as this length may be twofold, one by nature, and the
other only by position ; and this length by nature was formerly
marked by doubling the vowel, as we have already observed in
the treatise of Letters, book 9. p. 249. so this long penultima may
receive two sorts of accents, either the circumflex, that is the
accent composed of an acute and a grave, Romanus for Romaanns ;
or only the acute, that is, which signifieth only the elevation of the
syllable as, Araxis, parens.
But if after a penultima long by nature, the last should also be
long, as this circumflex accent and the length of the last syllable
might render the speech too drawling, they are satisfied then with
acuting the penultima, Romano, and not Romdno, Roma, and not
Roma, to prevent too slow an utterance.
After this it is easy to form a judgment of the rest. For in
regard to the dissyllables, if the}' are not capable of a circumflex,
they must needs have an acute on the penultima, be it what it will,
since they cannot throw the accent farther back : and as to mono-
syllables, the reason why those which are long by nature have a
circumflex, is the same as that above mentioned, namely, that this
long vowel is equivalent to two : Jios instead ofjioos. And the rea-
son why those that are short, or only long by position, have but an
iacute, is becanse they can have no other.
IV. S'otiie E.vceptions to these Rules of Accents.
Lipsius, and after him Vossius, are of opinion that the rules
of accents, which grammarians have left us, are very defective,
and that the antient manner of pronouncing was not confined to
those laws of grammar. Yet these rules being so natural, and so
well founded in analogy and in the surprising relation they bear
to each other, pursuant to what hath been just now observed, it
is not at all probable that the antients departed from them so
widely as those critics imagine ; and if we meet with some in-
stances to the contrary, they ought to be looked upon rather as
exceptions than a total subversion of the general rule, since even
these exceptions may be reduced to a small number, and it is easy
to shew that they are not without foundation.
The first exception is, that compound verbs used sometimes to
A S' 2 retaift
356 NEW METHOD. Book X.
retain the same accent as their simple, as calefacio, calefacis, cale-
Jikit, where the accent is on the pcnultima in the two last words>
tliough it be short, says Priscian, hb. 8. And according to him
the same may be said of calcj'w, calefis, calff it, where the accent
continues on the last syllable of the second and third persons, as it
would be in the simple, which is a very natural analogy.
The second exception is, that on the contrary compound nouns
used sometimes to draw their accent back to the antepenultima,
whether the penultima was lung or not ; as we find in the same
Priscian that they used to say orbidterrce, viriUustriSy prcefectusfa-
brum, juriscbnsultiis, inlerealoci.
The third exception is, that indeclinable particles also used to
draw back (heir accent sometimes in composition, as siquandoy
which, according to Donatus, had the accent sometimes on the
antepenultima ; and the same ought to be said of nequando, ali-
quando ; as also of cxinde, which, according to Servius, has the
accent on the antepenultima ; and this should serve as a rule for
deinde, perinde, pruinde, suhinde : likewise exadversum in Gellius,
and nffatim, to which may be added enlmvcro, duniaxaf, and per-
haps some others, which may be seen in Priscian or in Lipsius
and Vossius, who give a full list of them. Now these two ex-
ceptions of drawing back the accent in composition, are only in
imitation of the Greeks, who frequently do the same in regard to
their compounds. But we must take particular care, sa3's Vossius,
that though the accent may be on the antepenultima in dehide,
perinde, and others, we are not to conchjde that it may therefore
DC on the antepenultima in deinceps, and such like, where the last
is long, for no word can be accented on the antepenultima, either
in Greek or Latin, when the two last syllables are long; especially
as each of these long syllables having tivo times, this would throw
the accent back too far.
The fourth exception is of the vocatives of nouns in lUS, which
are accented on the penultima, though short, as Virgili, Mercuric
JEmili, Valeri, &c. the reason of wliich is because heretofore,
according to the general analogy they had their vocative in E.
Virgllie, like domine. But as this final E was too weak, and scarce
perceptible, by degrees it came to be dropped, and the original
accent, which was on the antepenultima, continuing still in its
place, came to be on the penultima.
The fifth exception may be in regard to Enclitics, which always
used to draw the accent to the next syllable, be it what it would,
ps we shall see in the next chapter.
To these we may add some extraordinary and particular words,
as vitdieris, which, according to Priscian, hath the accent on the
short penultima, and perhaps some others, though in too small a
number to pretend that this should invalidate the general rules.
Of ACCENTS. S67
Chapter II.
Particular Observations on the Practiceof the Antients.
I. In what place the Accents ought to be particularly
marked in books.
TH E rules of accents ought to be carefully observed, not
only in speaking, but likewise in writing, when we under-
take to mark them, as is generally practised in the liturgy of the
Church of Rome. Only we may observe, that instead of a circum-
flex, they have been satisfied with an acute, because the circumflex
being only a compound of the acute and the grave, what predo-
minates therein, says Quintilian, is particularly the acute, which,
as he himself observes after Cicero, ought to be naturally on every
word we pronounce.
It is for this very reason that in those books they no longer put
any accent on monosyllables, nor even on dissyllables, because
having lost this distinction of acute and circumflex, it is sufficient
for us in general to know that in dissyllables the former is always
raised.
II. In what manner we ought to mark the Accent on
Words compounded of an Enclitic.
The accent ought also to be marked on words compounded of
an enclitic, that is, one of these final particles, que, nc, ve ; and
should be always put on the penultima of these words, whatever it'
be, as Despauter after Servius and Capella informs us ; thus ar-
mdque, terraqtce, pluztne, atterve, &c. because it is the nature of
these enclitics ever to draw the accent towards it. So that it sig-
nifies nothing to say with Melissa and Ricciolius, that if this was
the case, we could not distinguish the ablative from the nominative
ofnounsin A. For considering things originally, it is very cer-
tain, as above hath been mentioned, that the antients distinguished
extremely well betwixt accent and quantity ; and therefore that
they raised the last in the nominative without lengthening it, ter-
raque, whereas in the ablative they gave it an elevation, and at
the same time they made it appear long, as if it were, terraaque ;
whence it follows that they must have also distinguished it by the
acute in the nominative, terroque, and by the circumflex in the
ablative terraqxie ; and Vossius thinks that some distinction ought
to be observed in pronouncing them.
III. That neither que nor ne are ahvays Enclitics.
But here we are to observe two things, which seem to have es-
caped the attention of Despauter. The first, that there are certain
words ending in que, v/here the que is not an enclitic, because they
are simple, and not compound words ; as idique, denique, umlique,
&c. which are therefore accented on the antepenultiraa.
The second, that 7ie is never an enclitic but when it expresseth
doubt, and not when it barely serves to interrogate ; and therefore
if the syllable before ne is short or common, we ought to put the
accent on the antepenultima, in interrogations, as tibine? hce'ccine?
siccine ? dstrane ? egone ? Pldtone ? &c. whereas in the other sense
the particle ne draws the accent to the penultima. Cicerone, Platone.
3^8 NEW METHOD. BookX.
IV. That the Accent ought to be ?narked, whenever
there is a necessity for distinguishing one word from
another.
We ought also to mark the accent in writing, according to
Terent. Scaurus, whenever it is necessarj' i'or preventing ambiguity.
For example, we should murk legit in the present with an acute, and
legit in the preterite with a circumflex. We should mark occidOf
the accent on the antepenultima, taking it from cada ; and occido
with an acute on the penultima, taking it from ccsdo.
V. IVhether xce ought to accent the last Syllable, on
account of this distinction.
But if any body should ask whether this rule of distinction ought
to be observed for the last syllable ; Donatus, Sergius, Priscian,
Longus, and .most of the antients will have that it ought, and es-
pecially in regard to indeclinable words, which they say should
be marked with an acute on the last, as circiim littora, to distinguish
it from the accusative of circus. Quintilian,'%more antient than
any of these, observes that even in his time some grammarians were
of this opinion, which was practised by several learned men, and
that for liis part he durst not condemn it.
Victorinus likewise observes the same thing, and says that pone
an adverb, for example, is acuted on the last, to prevent its being
confounded with the imperative of pono. So that one might
say the same of a great many other words, which, through an er-
roneous custom, are marked with a grave accent, as male, bene,
though we are told at the same time that in pronouncing it ought to
have the power of an acute. Which is doubtless owing to a mis-
take of the Greeks, who frequently commit the same error in re-
gard to those two accents, as if it were quite so consistent to mark
the one, when you expressly mean the other.
But the reason why we ought not to put the grave on those'final
syllables, is evident. Because as the grave denotes only the fall
of the voice, there can be no fall where there has not been a rise,
as Lipsius and Vossius have judiciously observed. For if the last,
for instance, falls in pn?ie., an adverb, the first must therefore be
comparatively raised, and then this word will no longer be distin-
guished from yjo/;r, the imperative o^ pnno, which nevertheless is
contrary to their intention. Hence Sergius, who lived before
Priscian, takes notice that in his time the grave accent was no
longer used ; sciendum, says he, quod in usu nan est hodierno accentiis
gravis. Whence it follows either that we ought not to accent the
last syllable, or if it must have an accent, then we ought to choose
another, and rather make use of an acute, according to the opinion
of some grammarians.
A second mistake some are apt to commit in regard to the last
syllable, is when in order to shew that it is long, and to distinguish
it from a short one, they put a circumflex, as musa in the ablative,
to distinguish it from the nominative musa. For the accents were
not intended to mark the quantity, but the inflection of the voice ;
§ and
Of accents. 359
'and as for the quantity, when the custom of doubling the vowels,
in order to mark the long syllables, as musaa, was altered ; they
made use of small couchant lines which they called apices, thus
musoy as we have shewn in the treatise of Letters, book 9. p. 24-9.
But since we have lost the use of those little marks, we put up
with these accents, which ought rather to be considered as signs
of quantity, than of the tone of voice ; the circumflex, according to
Quintilian, being never put at the end of a word in Latin ; though
the Greeks do sometimes circumflex the last when it happens to
be long.
VI. In what manner we ought to place the Accent in
Verse.
If the word of itself be doubtful, we should place the accent on
the penultima, when it is looked upon as long in verse, or on the
antepenultima, when it is looked upon as short. Thus we should
- Pecudes pictccque yolucres, Virg.
the accent on the penultima, as Quintilian observeth, because the
poet makes it long ; though in prose we always say, volucresy the
accent on the antepenultima.
Hence it may happen that the same word shall have two different
accents in the same verse, as in Ovid.
Et prima similis volucri, mox vera volucris.
Chapter III.
I. Of the Accents of IVords which the Latins have bor^
roxced of other Languages^ and particularly those of
Greek f Fords.
IN regard to Greek words, if they remain Greek, either altoge-
ther or in part, so as to retain at least some syllable of that lan-
guage, they are generally pronounced according to the Greek ac-
cent. Thus we put an acute on the antepenultima in eleison, and
litlwstrotos, notwithstanding that the penultima is long.
On the contrary we put it on the penultima, though it be short
in paralijwmhion, and the like.
We put the circumflex on the genitive plural in Zt, periarchwy,
and on the adverbs in us, ironicwj, and such like, where the omega
is left standing.
But words entirely latinised, ought generally to be pronounced
according to the rules of Latin. And this is the opinion of Quin-
tilian, Capella, and other antient authors ; though it is not an error
to pronounce them also according to the Greek accent.
Therefore we say with the accent on the antepenultima, Aristo-
teles, A'ntipaSy Barnabas, Boreas, Blasphemia, C6rido7J, D^meas,
Ecclesia, Traseas, &c. because the penultima is short. And on the
contrary we say with the accent on the penultima, Alexandria,
Cytheron, eremus, meteora, orthodoxiiSy Faracletus, jpleuresis, and the
like, because it is long.
Greek
360 NEW METHOD- Book X.
Greek words that have the penultima common not by figure
or licence, but by the use of" the best poets, or by reason of
some particuhir dialect, are abvays better pronounced in prose ac-
cording to the common or Attic dialect, or according to the use
of the best poets, than otherwise. Therefore it is preferable to put
the accent on the penultima, in Chorea, Connpeum, phtta, OrioniSf
and sucii like, because tlie best poets make it long.
But if these words have the penultima sometimes long and
sometimes short in those same poets, we may pronounce as we
please in prose, as Busiris, Eriphyle. But in verse we must i«)llow
the measure and cadence of the feet, pursuant to what has been
already observed.
These are, 1 think, the most general rides that can be given
upon this subject. Nevertheless we are oftentimes obliged to
comply with custom, and to accommodate ourselves to the manner
of pronouncing in use among the learned, accordi ig to the coun-
try one lives in. Thus we pronounce Anstobuliis, Basilius, i(/6Uum,
with the accent on the antepenultima, notwithstanding that the
penultima is long; only because it is the custom.
And on the contrary we pronounce Andreas, idea, Maria, &c.
the accent on the penultima though short, because it is the custom
even among the most learned.
The Italians also pronounce with the accent on the penultima,
Antonomasia, harmonla, philosophia, tJieolcgia, and the like, pursuant
to the Greek accent, because it is the practice of their country, as
Ricciolius observeth. Besides Alvarez and Gretser are of opinion
that we ought always to pronounce it thus, though the custom not
only of Germany and Spain, but likewise of all France, is against
it : and Nebrissensis approves of the latter pronunciation, where he
says that it is better to accent those M'ords on the antepenultima.
Which shews that M'hen once the antient rul(^s have been broke
through, there is very little certainty, even in practice, which is
different in different countries.
11. Of i lie Accents of Hebrew Words,
Hebrew words that borrow a Latin termination and declension,
follow the Latin rules in regard to accent : and therefore we put
it on the penultima in Adamus, Josephus, Jacobus, &c. because it
is long.
But if these words continue to have the Hebrew termination,
and are indeclinable, they may be pronounced either according to
the rules of Latin words, or according to the Greek accent, if they
liave passed through the Greek language before they were received
by the Latins, or in short according to the Hebrew accent.
But should these three circumstances concur, then one would
think there is no reason for pronouncing otherwise than according
to the received use and custom of the public, to which we are often
obliged to conform.
And therefore, pursuant to this rule, we should say .with the ac-
cent on the penultima, Afrtrhis, Bethsura, Ctihurn, Debora, Elea-
zar, Eliseus, Rebecca, Salome, Sephora, Susanna; because the pe-
•V n*ultima
Of accents. 361
laultima of these is not only long by nature, but it is likewise
accented both in Greek and Hebrew.
If these words are entirely Ht-brew, it is better to pronounce
them according to the Hebrew accent ; and therefore we should
raise the last in elot, ephda, sahaoth, and such like.
In respect to which we are however to take notice, that as most
of these words are received in the liturgy of the Church of Rome,
there is a necessity for pronouncing them according to established
custom, so much the more as they are in every body's mouth all
over the world. Hence it is that, contrary to the last rule, we
generally put the accent on the antepenultima in Elisabeth, Gol-
gotha, Melctiuedech, Mby&es^ Samuel, Solomon, Samaria, Siloe, and
some others.
Hereby it appears to be a mistake, which great numbers have
fallen into, to think with a certain person called Alexander the
Dogmatist, that not only Hebrew words, but all that are barbarous
and exotic, ought to be pronounced with the accent on the last.
Which has been learnedly refuted by Nebrissensis, and after him
by Despauter, though this has been the custom of several Churches,
in regard to some tones of the Psalms, because of the Hebreu-
accent therein predominant.
Chapter IV.
Further Observations on the Pronunciation of the
Antients.
I. That they distinguished beixveen Accent and Quantity,
and made Several differences even in Quantity.
WHAT we have been hitherto saying relates to the rules
and practice of accents, to which we ought now to con-
form. But the pronunciation of the antients was even in this
respect greatly different from ours; for they not only observed the
difference between quantity and accent, according to what hath
been said in the treatise of Letters, book 9 ; but likewise in quan-
tity they had several sorts of long and short syllables, which at
present we do not distinguish. Even the common people were so
exact, and so well accustomed to this pronunciation, that Cicero
in his book de Oratore, observes, that a comedian could not lengthen
or shorten a syllable a little more than he ought, but the people would
be offended tvith this mis-pronouncing, voithout any other rule than the
discernment (yf the ear, luhich "was accustomed to judge of long and
short syllables, as well as of the rising and sinking of the voice.
Now as the long syllables had two times, and the short ones
only one ; on the contrary, the common or doubtful were properly
those that had only a time and a half: which was the case of the
weak position, where the vowel was followed by a syllable begin-
ning with a mute and a liquid, as in patris. For the liquid being
the last, glided away too nimbly, and was too weak in compa-
rison
3()2 ' NEW METHOD. Book X.
rison to the mnte with which it was joined ; and therefore it was
owing to this incquaHty that the foregoing vowel was not so
firmly sustained as if there had been two mutes, as m jacto ; or
two liquids, as in ille ; or if the mute had been in the last syl-
lable, as martyr : or, in short, as if the mute had been at the end
of a syllable, and the liquid at the beginning of the next, as in
ahludity ablalus. In all which cases the syllable would have been
long by a firm position, and would have had txvo times : whereas
in the other, having only one time and a half, for the reasons
above mentioned, this half measure was sometimes altogether
neglected, and then the syllable was reckoned sliort ; and at other
times it was somewhat sustained and lengthened to an entire mea-
sure ; and then tlie syllable was looked upon as long in verse.
And hence it appears for what reason when the syllable was long
by nature, as in matris, the mute and liquid did not render it
common, because as it came from mater, whereof the former is
long of itself, it had its timt times already.
But even when a syllable is long by a firm and entire position,
still we are to observe that there is a great difference betweea
being thus long by position, and long by nature.
The syllable long by nature was somewhat firmer and fuller,
being a reduplication of the same vowel, pursuant to what hath
been observed in the treatise of Letters, as maalus, an apple-tree,
poopulus, a poplar tree, seedes, &c. Whereas the syllable long by
position only, had no other length than its being sustained by the
two following consonants ; just as in Greek there is a great dif-
ference between an eta and an epsilon long by position.
But as there was a difference in the pronunciation between a
syllable long by nature and a syllable barely long by position, so
there was a difference also betwixt a syllable short by nature and
a syllable short by position only, that is froVn its being placed be-
fore another vowel. For the latter always preserved somewhat of
its natural quantity, and doubtless had more time in verse than
the syllable short by nature. Thus it is that in Greek the long
vowels, or even the diphthongs were reckoned short, whenever the
following word began with another vowel or a diphthong, without
there being any necessity for cutting tliem off by synalcepha.
Thus it is likewise that in Latin prtv is short in composition before
a vowel, as pratiret, pracesse, &c. And thus it is that the Latins
have often used those syllables, as
JLt lojigiim Jbrmose vale, vale inquit lola. Virg. Eel. 3.
Insulac lonio in magno guns dira Celccno. Mn. 3.
Victor apud rapidum Siyno'enla sub Uio alto. JEu. 5.
Te Corydon o Alexi Eel. 2.
And an evident proof that these syllables still preserved at that
time something of their nature, is their being sometimes long on
tliose occasions :
• Ciim vacuus Domino praeiret Arion. Stat.
5 ego quantum egi ! quam vasta potentia nostra est ! Ovid.
IL Difficult
Of accents. 363
II. Difficult Passages of the Antients, tvhich may be
solved by those Principles.
This affords us some light towards clearing up several passages
of the antients, which appear unintelligible, unless they be re-
ferred to the above principles. As when Festus says, Inlex pro-
ducta sequenti si/llaba significat, qui leginonparet : Correptd seqiienti
inductorein ab illiciendo. For it is beyond all doubt that the last in
irilex or illex is always long in quantity, since the e precedes the .r
which is a double letter ; but one was pronounced with >j, as if it
were J'^^^| ; and in the other with an e, as if it wei'e ('xx£|. One like
the long e in the French words fete, bete, tete ; and the other like
the short e in Prophete. nette, navette, Sec. Hence the one made
illegis in the genitive, preserving its e long as coming from lex ;
and the other illicis, changing its e into i short, which it resumes
from the verb illicio uhence it is derived.
Thus when Victorinus says that IN and CON are sometimes
short in composition, as inconstans, impriidens ; and that they are
long in words where they are followed by an S or an F, as instare,
infidus ; this means that in the latter the i was long in quantity,
and short in the former, though it was always long by position ;
so that this I, thus long in quantity, partook of the nature of EI,
infidus, nearly as if it were einfidus, &c. And this helps to illus-
trate a difficult passage of Cicero de Oratore, whence the above
author seems to have extracted this rule ; Inclitus, says he, dicimns
prima brevi littera, insanus prodtictd : inhumanus brevi ; hifelix longd.
Et ne multis : in quibus verbis ece primes sunt littercB quce in Sa-
PIENTE & Felice, producte dicuntur, in cceteris breviter. Itemque
composuit, crmcrepuit, consnevit, conjecit, &c. Where by sapiens and
Jelix he marks the words beginning with an S or an F, as Gellius,
lib. 2. cap. 17- explains him ; and where by the word long, he does
not mean to speak of the accent, but of quantity, it being manifest
that the accent of irifelix ought to be upon the second, and not
upon the first ; which is still more clear in inhumdnus, where it is
altogether impossible that the accent should be upon the first.
Thus likewise are we to understand Aulus Gellius, when he
says that ob and sjib have not the power of lengthening syllables,
no more than con, except when it is followed by the same letters,
as in con-Stituit and con-Fecit : or (as he continues) when the n is
entirely dropped, as in coopertus : so that they pronounced cobpertus,
cobnexus, and cobgo, as he repeats it himself, lib. 11. c. 17 : when
he says in the same book that this rule of the following of S and
F was not observed in respect to pro, which was short in prqficiscif
prqfundere, &c. and long in proferre, projiigare^ &c. that is, they
pronounced prooferre, proojligare : when he says, lib. 11. c. '5. that
they pronounced one way pro rostris, another way pro tribunaliy
another pro condone, another pro potestate intercedere : when he says
that in objicis and objicibiis the o was short by nature, and that it
could not be lengthened but by writing those words with two ji,
the same as in ohjicio : when he says that in composuit, conjecit, con-
crepuit,
364 N E W M E T H O D. Book X.
crepuil, o was likewise short, that is, that it h d only the sound of
an omicron : \»hen he savs that in w^o the fir t was short ; whereas
in aclito and actitavi it was long : and when he says that in gtdescif
the second vvas short, perpcliiu liugucc Latince consuetudine, though
it comes from (juies where c is long.
Thus it is that Donatus and Scrvius distinguish between the
persons of sum and edo,' as e.s, est ; esset , essemus ; in this that the
first e is short when it comes from sum, and long when it comes
from 'cdo.
In fine, thus it is that Julius Scaliger proves against Erasmus,
who found fault with some feet and numbers in Cicero, that sunt
is short, because it comes from sinnus. And the whole we have
been saying is very necessary to observe, in order to comprehend
what Cicero, Quintilian, and others, have wrote concerning the
numbers and feet of a period : and to shew that when the nouns,
and even the prepositions, had different significations they were
frequently known by the pronunciation.
III. IVItctlierfrom the diffxrence they made in the Fro-
nunclation of Short and Long Vozcels, xvemai) conclude
that U was sounded like the French Diphthong OU
in Long Syllables only.
From what we have been now observing in regard to the different
pronunciation of the long and short vowels, Lipsius and Vossius
were induced to believe that the pronunciation of the Latin U,
which sounded full, like the French diphthong OU, regarded only
the long U; and that the short was sounded in the same manner
as the Greek upsilon, that is like a French U. But this opinion
we have sufficiently refuted in the same treatise, c. 4. n. 2. and
from what we have been mentioning it plainly appears, that when
two different pronunciations are observed in a vowel, one longer
or fuller, the other shorter or closer, as in ago and actifo, in iXXt)^
and ("xxtl, this does not mean that we are to take a sound of so
different a nature as lustrum and loustrum, lumen and loumen.
Therefore when Festus says that lustrum, with the former short,
signified ditches full of mud ; and with the former long, implied
the space of five years ; he meant it only in regard to quantity, and
not to a pronunciation entirely different : and all that we are to
understand by it is, that one was longer than the other by nature,
as would be tlie case of lustrum and luustriim or lustrum^ though
they are both long by position.
And this helps to explain a passage of Varro, which Lipsius
and Vossius have misunderstood. When he says that luit hath the
former short in the present, and long in the preterite. But he
means nothing more than that in the present tense U was short by
nature, and in the preterite it was long, so that they pronounced
Iniiit, according to the common rule of preterites of two syllables,
which generally have the former long : this did not hinder however
the first of liiit, even in the preterite, from being short by position;
as
Of latin POETKY. . 565
as the diphthong <r, though long of itself, is short by position in
prtsit according to what we have already observed. And there-
fore, all things considered, notwithstanding that this passage of
Varro is the strongest argument that Lipsius and V'ossius make
use of, yet it does not prove that the Romans formerly pro-
nounced their U in the same manner as the French diphthong oUf
er as it is pronounced by the modern Italians.
But an invincible argument, in my opinion, (to mention it
here only by the way) that U short and U long had but one and
the same sound, is that the word cuculus, which hath the former
short and the second long, as we have shewn, p. 348. was cer-
tainly pronounced in the same manner as the French would pro-
nounce coitcoulcus, since in French we still say un coucou, and in
both languages these words were formed by an Onomatopoeia, or
imitation of the sound, in order to express the note of this bird.
Section III.
Of latin poetry.
And the diiferent Species of Metre ; as also of the
Feet, the Figures, and Beauties to be observed in
versifying ; and of the Manner of intermixing
them in divers Sorts of Composition.
Divided iii the clearest Order and Method.
AFTER having laid down the rules to know the measure
of syllables, whether long, short, or common, in the treatise
of Quantity ; and the manner of pronouncing them properly in
prose, in the discourse upon accents ; we must now treat of Latin
poetry, and the different species of verse, though this subject is
less relative to grammar than the precedent.
Verses are composed of feet, and feet of syllables.
Chapter I.
Of Feet.
I. Of the Nature of Feet in Verse.
FEET are nothing more than a certain measure and number
of syllables, according to which the verse seems to move
with, cadence, and in which we are principally to consider the
rising »^<rn and the sinking SeV/j, of which we took notice
when
366 . N E W M E T H O D. Book X.
when treating of tlie accents. These feet are of two sorts, one
simple, and the other compound. The simple are formed of two
or three syllables, as we are now going to explain.
II. 0/ Feet of Tzco Syllables.
The feet of two syllables are four.
1. The Spondee, Spomtccus, consists of two long ones, as
Musae ; and is so called from the word cnovlit, libnlioy sacrifichim,
' from its being particularly nude use of in sacrifices, on account
of its majestic gravity.
2. The Pyruhic, Ptjrrichius, consists of two short ones; as
Deus ; and is so called, says Hesychius, from the noun mvfpty.ij,
signifying a kind of dance of armed men, in which this foot was
predominant ; and which is supposed to have been invented by
Pyrrhus, son of Achilles ; though others will have it to be the
invention of Pyrrhicus the Cydonian.
3. The Trochee, Trucluctis, consists of a long and a short, as
Mma ; and takes its name from the word r^iytiv, currere, because
it moves quicklj\ But Cicero, Quintilian, and Terentianus, call
it Choreiis, from the word choruSj because it is well adapted to
dancing and music.
4-. The Iambus, Iambus, the reverse of the Trochee, consists
of a short and a long, as Deo ; and is so denominated, not from
the verb <a/i/,€'i^w, vialedictis iiicesso, which is rather a derivative
itself from the foot Iambus, but from a young woman named
lambe, who is said to have been the author of it ; or rather from
Mi^Ui maledico, because this foot was at first made use of in invec-
tives and satyrical pieces, as we are informed by Horace.
Archilochum propria rabies armavit lambo.
III. Of Feet of Three Syllables.
We reckon eight feet of three syllables, of which no more than
three are used iu verse, viz. those immediately following the
Molossus.
1. The Molossus, Molossus, consists of three long ones, audlrl,
and takes its name from a certain people of Epirus, called Molossiy
who particularly affected to make use of it.
2. The Trierac, Tribrachys, consists of three short ones,
Priamiis ; whence its name is derived, being composed of r^tist
three, and ^^a.^vs, short. But Quintilian generally calls it Trochee.
3. The Dactyl, Dactijlus, consists of one long and two short,
Carmtnli, and derives its name from Sa)tiyXof, digitus, because the
finger is composed of three joints, the first of which is longer
than any of the rest. Cicero calls it Heroils, from its being par-
ticularly made use of in relating the exploits of great men and
heroes.
4. The AnapjEst, Anapcvstus, consists of two short and one
long, Domini, and is thus demominated from the verb avatTratw,
repercutio, because those who danced according to the cadence of
this foot, used to beat the ground in quite a different manner from
that which was observed in the Dactyl.
5. The
Of latin poetry. 367
5. The Bacchic, Bacchius, consists of one short and two
long, egestas, and is so called from its having been frequently used
in the hymns of Bacchus.
6. The Antibacchic, AntibaccJiius, consists of two long and
one short, cantate, and takes its Tiame from its opposition to the
precedent. But Victorinus says that the Antibacchic is composed
of one short and two long, as lacunas, where it is plain that he
gives the name of Antibacchius to what the others call Bacchiics.
Hephestion calls it Palimbacchius.
7. The Amphimacer or Cretic, Ampkimacer sive Creticus,
is composed of one short between two long, castitas. Both these
names are mentioned in Quintilian. The former comes from
tt.tt.(p), utrinque, and fAxx^os, longus ; and the latter is owing to the
particular liking which the people of Crete had for this foot.
Which shews that it is a mistake in Hephestion to read K^'/t/xo?,
instead of K^-nriMs, Cretan.
8. The Amphibrac, Amphibrachys, short on both sides, con-
sists of one long between two short, amar^; which plainly shews
its name. Diomedes takes notice that it was also called scoliuSf
from a kind of harp, to which it was particularly adapted.
These are the twelve simple feet, of which no more than six
are used in verse; three of two measures, namely the Spondee^
•the Dactyl, and the Anapeest ; and three of a measure and a half,
viz. the Iambus, the Trochee, and the Tribrac.
And the reason is, because a foot, in order to have its proper
cadence, ought to have two parts or half feet, by which the antients
frequently measured their verses. Now every half foot can have
no more than one measure, which is the space in pronouncing one.
long syllable, and two short ones ; for more would make an entire
foot, as a Trochee ( "" ) or an Iambus ("').
Thus the Pyrrhic, having in all but one measure, which is the
value of two short syllables, is rather half a foot than a foot.
The Molossus having three long ones, which make three mea-
sures ; and the Bacchic, Antibacchic, and Amphimacer, having
two long and one short, which make two measures and a half,
one half foot of each of those four feet would have two measures,
or a measure and a half, which is too much.
And it is the same in regard to the Amphibrac, thougJi it con-
tains in the whole but two measures, because its long syllable being
between two short, and one of the half feet being obliged to be
of two successive syllables, it must necessarily be composed of a
iong and a short, consequently it will have a measure and a half.
There remain therefore only the six above mentioned, three
of which have half feet equal, and answering to the unison, viz.
the Spondee, the Dactyl, and the Anapaest. The others have them
as one to two, which answers to the octave ; viz. the Trochee^ the
Iambus, and the Tribrac.
Therefore we must not fancy that the Amphimacer or the
Cretic, ("'"') ever enters into the composition of a comic verse,
as no such thing hath been meationed by any of the antients that
have
36S NEW METHOD. Book X.
have treated of tliis sort of metre. But if there are verses that
seem to be incapable of being measured witiiout having recourse to
this foot, as this of Terence,
Student Jhccre, in apparando consumimt diem ;
it is to be supposed that in such a case they rather made use of
a syneresis, by contracting fl/j/^nrw/zr/o into three syllables, apprundoy
according to the opinion of Vossius in his Grammar, and of Came-
rarius in his Problems.
Thus we may take it for certain that there are but six feet ne-
cessary for composing all sorts of verse, which may be compri^^ed in
the following rule.
RULE OF THE SIX NECESSARY
FEET.
All verse n^hatever is composed hut of six sorts of
feet; the Spondee ~~y the Trochee-'', the lam^
bus^~,the Tribrac''^^, the Dactyl'^ ^, and the
Anapest ''''-,
IV. Of Compound Feet.
Compound feet are formed of two of the preceding joined to-
gether ; and therefore are rather a collection of feet, according to
the observation of Cicero and Quintilian.
They are generally reckoned sixteen, the name of which it is
proper to take notice of, not only by reason there are some sorts
of verse which are denominated from thence, but because other-
wise we shall not be able to understand the remark of Cicero
and Quintilian in regard to the numerosity and cadence of
periods.
1. The double Spondee, Dispondeus, is composed of four long
ones, conclud'enttx, tliat is, of two Spondees put together.
2. The Proceleusmatic, Proceieimnaticus, consists of four short,
honiiinbiis ; and therefore it is formed of two Pyrrhics. It seems
to have taken its name from xtXtt/o-/:/.*, hortatus naidicus, because
the captain of the ship generally made use of it to hearten the
crew, being very well adapted by its celerity to sudden and unex-
pected occasions.
3. The double Iambus, Di'iambus, two Iambus's, one after an-
other, sivtritcis.
4'. The double Trochee, or double Choree; Ditrocheus, or
Dichorens ; two Trochees, one after another, comprobare.
5. The great Ionic, two long and two short, that is, a Spondee
and a Pyrrhic, cantiibinius.
6. The small Ionic, two short and two long, that is, a Pyrrhic
and a Spondee, vcnerantes.
These two feet are called Ionic, from their having been used
chiefly by the lonians. One is called Great, lonicus major, sive
^ majore, because it begins with the greatest quantity, that is,
with
Of latin poetry. S69
Tclth two long ones : an.l the other small, lonicus minor ^ or ci mi-
vore, because a minore quantitate incipity that isj with two short.
7. The Choriambus, Clwriambus, two short between two long,
hhtorzce. That is a Choree or Trochee, and an Iambus.
8. The Antispast, Antispastus, two long betwixt two short,
seciindart. And therefore it is composed of an Iambus and a
Trochee. It derives its name from uvria-TrdaQaiy in contrarium
trahi, because it passes from a short to a long, and then the reverse
from a long to a short.
9. The first Epitrit, Epitritiis primus, one short and three long,
salutantes ; and therefore is composed of an Iambus and a Spondee.
10. The second Epitrit, Epiiritus secundus, a long and a short,
and then two long, concitali ; and therefore consists of a Trochee
and a Spondee.
11. The third 'Epitrit, Epitritus tertitis, two long, then a short
and a long, communicani ; and therefore is composed of a Spondee
and an Iambus.
12. The fourth Epitrit, Epitritus quartus, three long and one
short, lucantare. And therefore it is composed of a Spondee and
a Trochee.
These four last feet derive their name from Ivl, supra, and-
r^lros, teriius, because they have three measures, and something
more, namely, a short syllable. But the first, second, third, and
fourth, are so called from the situation of the short syllable. The
second was also called Kci^iKos, the third 'Folios, and the fourth
(/.ovoyivvii, as Hephestion observeth.
13. The first Paeon, one long and three short, cdij/tcere ; and
therefore it consists of a Trochee and a Pyrrhic.
14. The second Pason, a short and a long, with two short,
resdtvhe ; and therefore it consists of an Iambus and a Pyrrhic.
15. The third Paeon, two short, a long and a short, sociarc ; and
therefore is composed of a Pyrrhic and a Trochee.
16. The fourth Paeon, three short, and one long, celcritas ; and
therefore consists of a Pyrrhic and an Iambus.
The Paeon may be also called Paean, these words differing
only in dialect. And it was so denominated from its having been
used particularly in the Hymns to Apollo, whom they called
Fa;ana.
The Paeon is opposite to the Epitrit. For whereas in the
Epitrit there is one short with three long ; on the contrary, in
the Paeon you have one long with three short; where each of the
four is named according to the order in which this long syllable
is placed. The first and last Paeon compose the verse called
Pcsonic.
These are all the simple and compound feet. But, to the end
that they may be the better retained, I shall exliibit them in the
following table, in the order above described.
Vol. IL B b
[ 370 ]
REGULAR TABLE
OF ALL THE FEET.
a
<
o
•J
O
w
o
Pi
M
a
XII.
SIMPLE,
of which no more
than six are used
in verse, which
we have marked
in capitals with
a particular cy-
pher.
XVI.
COMPOUNDS,
of two feet of two
syllables.
Of ihe two
first, one has
four long, and
the other has
four short.
The following
six have two long
and two short.
The four next!
have three long
and one short.
And the four
last, three short
and one long.
Of two
syllables,
4.
Of three
syllabtes,
8.
k
" I.
Of the
same foot
repeated,
4.
n.
Of two
contrary
feet, 4,
III.
Of two
feet not
contrary
where
the long
predomi-
nate, 4.
IV.
Of two
feet not
contrary,
where
the short
predomi-
nate, 4.
V.
{
Quantity.
S' Disposition.
Quantity.
Disposition.
Disposition.
Quantity.
Two Spondees,
Two Pyrrhics,
Two iambus's.
Two Trochees or
Chorees.
Spondee & Pyrrhic,
Pyrrhic Jc Spondee,
Choree & iambus,
iambus & Choree,
1. Spond^us,
Pyrrichius,
2. Troch«us,
sine
Choreus,
3. IAMBUS,
Molossus,
4. Tribrachvs,
5. Dactylus,
6. Anap^stl's,
Racchius,
Antibacchius,
Amphimacer,
Am()hibrachys,
Dispondajus,
Proceleusmaticus,
Diiambus,
Dichoreus,
Major jonicus,
Minor iunicus,
Choriambus,
Antispastus,
5 LegT, Prtt.
I I.Pgit, Pres.
Legit, Fret,
\
iambus & Spondee,
Trochee & Spondee,
Spondee & iambus,
Spondee & Trochee,
Trochee 5c Pyrrhic,
iambus & Pyrrhic,
Pyrrhic Sc Trocl:ee,
. Pyrrhic & iambus.
Epitritus,
t/iree long
and
one short.
Pason, vet
Paean ;
three short
and one long
\
4.
L6gunt,
J Legerunt,
I Leg6r6t.
5Leg^rat.
L^gCrejit.
< Lt'gebant.
I Leglssi^.
5 Leggrant.
i Legebat.
f MaJceniites,
J Tenuibuj!.
\ Jimoenitas.
t Permanerfi.
^ PulcherrimuS,
J Diomedes.
"^ Historias.
C. SccundarS.
\ "Voluptates.
f Concitarl.
/"Communicant.
* expectarg.
, (.4.
"J C6ncYpi5r6.
(^ Rfesolverfi.
i i&lienus.
J Temerilas.
Of latin poetry. 371
Chapter II.
Of Verse in general.
VERSE is nothing more than a certain number of feet
disposed in a regular order and cadence. The Latins call it
versus, from the verb venere, to turn, because verses being set in
lines, when you come to the end of one, you must turn your eye to
the beginning of the other, in order to read or write it.
The Greeks call it s-'xoy, order, or rank, because of the same
disposition of lines. And from this word joined with vi/.icv;, dimi-
dius, comes hemistichium, an hemistich or half verse.
Verse is called also xiXon, membrum, with regard to the entire
stanzas it composes, and to which they gave the name of metrum.
And from thence come the words SixwAov, stanzas composed of two
sorts of verse ; rqUuXoii of three sorts, &c.
In the general notion of verse, there are three things to consider:
the caesure, ccesura ; the final cadence, which they call depositio, or
clausula : and the manner of scanning or measuring.
II. Of the CcEsura and its different Species.
The word ccesura comes from ccedere, to cut ; and this name is
given in verse to the syllable that remains after a foot, at the end
of a foot, from which it seems to be cut off, to serve for a beginning
to the next word.
The Greeks for the same reason call it to/x^ or xo/^/<ia:, and Cicero,
as also Victorinus, incisio or incistim.
The caesura is commonly divided into four different species,
which take their name from the order wherein they are placed in
verse, which the antients, as hath been observed already, used
to measure by half feet. Therefore calling them all by the word
^fAia-'ji;, dmidius, and /ue^ /j? pars, they specified them by the numeral
nouns according to their order, thus,
1. Trieniimeris, from the word t^ek, three ^ that which is made
after the third half foot ; that is, in the syllable immediately next to
the first foot.
2. I'enthemimeris, from the word mivlt, quinque ; that which is
made in the fifth half foot ; viz. in the syllable which follows the
two first feet.
3. Hephthemimeris, from the v/ord 'iiflx, septem, that which is
made in the seventh half foot, viz. in the syllable which follows
next to the three first feet.
4. Enveheminieris, from the word hvkx, novem, that which is
made in the ninth half foot, viz. in the syllable next to the fourth
foot.
The three first cassuras are in this verse of Virgil.
Silvestrem tenui musam meditaris avena.
All four in this :
Ille latus niveum molli Julius hyacin^^^.
Bb2 To
572 NEW METHOD. Book X.
To these four we may add a flfili specios of csesura called,
5. Hendechemimeris, from the word t'y^jxas, undecim, because it
is formed in the eleventh half foot, that is in the syllable next to
the fifth foot, as in Virgil,
Vertitur intciea cceluin, Sf ruit occano nox.
Stertiitur, exanimuque tremens procunibit hinni bos.
But it is very rare, and ought to be used with great discretion, as
Virgil has done in these two verses, and a few others.
II. In what place the Ccesura is most graceful; and
oj the Beauty it gives to Verse.
In heroic verse or hexameter, the caesura is most graceful after
the second foot ; as
Arrtia virunique cano, &c.
Otherwise we should endeavour to place it after the first and
third foot ; as
Ille mens errare boves, &c.
But a verse that has no caesura, especially if it be an hexameter,
is very disagreeable to the ear ; as
Urbemjbrtein nuper cepit Jbrtior kosfis.
Though in Catullus's epitnalamium we meet with one that is
esteemed.
Tertia pars data patri, pars data tertia matri.
And when the caesura is not till after the third foot, the verse ia
not much more agreeable ; as in Lucretius.
Et jam center a , mortates quce suadet adire.
III. That the CcEsura has the power of lengthening short
Syllables.
Now it is observable that the caesura hath such a power, as to
lengthen a syllable that was short by nature, even when it is fol»
lowed by a vowel ; whether after the first foot, as
Pectoribiis inhians spirantia constdit exta.
Or after the second ;
Omnia vincit amor, Sf nos cedamus amori.
Or after the third ;
Dona dehinc auro gravia sectoque elephanto.
Or after the fourth ;
Graitis homo infectos linquens. profugus Hymenceos.
And the reason is extremely natural, because as the antients pro-
nounced their verse according to the cadence of the feet ; and-
the syllable which thus remaineth at the end of a word, was pre-
dominant in the next foot, whose beginning it formed ; it ought
to receive such a force in the pronunciation, as thereby to sustain
all the syllables of that very foot. Hence the caesura produces
this same effect likewise in smaller verses, as in the following
Sapphic of Ausonius.
Tertius horum mihl non magister.
And in this Phaleucian of Statins,
Quo non dignwr has subit habcnas.
And 'tis also by virtue of this same figure that the enclitic Que
i» long in Virgil and other poets ;
Limi-
Of latin poetry. 573
Liminaque, laurusgue Dei, totusque vwveri, iEn. 3.
Sideraque, veutique nocent ; avidceque volucres, Ovid.
"Without pretending that the que is common by nature, as Servius
would hava it ; or that those passages should be read in another
manner, since they are not the onlj"^ ones, as some inaagined, that
are to be found in antient authors.
It is also by this figure that Virgil seems to have made the latter
long in the nominative j^^05, in the following passage Georg. 2.
which has puzzled all the commentators.
Et ste riles platani malos gessere valentes :
Castancce fagos, ornusque incanuit albo
Flore pyri — '
For the meaning seems to be this, ya^os ( A Greek nominative
foxjagus) incanuit Jlore castanecBy S^ ornus Jiure pyri. And this is
the explication Vossius gives it, which seems to be much clearer
and more natural than any other I have seen hitherto.
IV. Of thejinal Cadence called Depositio, and of the
four Names it gives to Verse.
The Latins give the name of Depositio to the final cadence, whic'^
terminates as it were the measure of the verse. The Greeks called
it ecvodBa-iv ', but they likewise termed it nociaKt^m, that is, termi-
nationem, clausulam ; for ^.o^ocK-nynv, signifies desinere.
And thence ariseth the distinction of verse into four species,
AcATALECTic, Catalectic, Brachycatalectic, and Hyper-
CATALECTic, whicli are terms more difficult to retain than the thing
itself, and which we are obliged nevertheless to explain, in order to
render those intelligible, who make use of them, when treating of
poetry.
1. The Acatalectic or Acatalect, axalaXvjit)©*, non desinens, is
that which does not stop short, but has its full measure, having
neither too much nor too little. Hence it is by the Latins called
perfectus : as the following iambic verse of four feet.
Musce Jovis suntjilice.
2. The Catalectic or Catalecf, )c«l«^*})c^©-, is that which seems
to halt by the way, having a syllable too little to arrive at its;
journey's end : hence it is that Trapezont calls it pendulusy and
others setnimittilus, by reason it does not want an entire foot, but
only half a one. As the following :
Musce Jovem canebant.
3. The Brachycatalectic, or Brachycatalect, &§xyvy.o[la.K-n)[l®^, is
that which is still more mutilated and deficient than the former,
because it wants an entire foot ; for which reason the Latins called
it mutilus : such is this other of three feet instead of four.
Musce Jovis gnatce.
4. On the contrary, the Hypercatalectic, or Hypercatalecf,
Wt^KtzlixX'nKl'^, is that which has something more than its just
measure, or the end where it ought to terminate. Whether this
surplus be a syllable, as in the following verse :
Muses sorores sunt Minerva,
Or
374 N E W ME T H O D. Eook X.
Or whether this be an entire foot, as in the following;
Alusce sorores I'ldUuli^ lugent.
Which is also called liii^i^il^oy, excedens metrum, because the
Greeks dividing their Iambics and Trochaics into dimeters and
trimeters, that is into verses of four or six feet, and allowing two
feet to each metre, that which hath five of them, exceeding this
first sort of metres, has more than is necessary to make a full
measure. But the whole of this will be further illustrated by
what is to follow presently, where we shall shew that witliout
amusing ourselves too long about these terms, we ought to consider
the defect of a syllable sometimes in the beginning, and sometimes
at the end of a verse.
Chapter III.
Of the Measure or Manner of scanning Verse^ and of ■
the Figures used therein.
TH E manner of measuring and scanning verse consists in di-
viding it into the several feet of which it is composed.
The Latins call it (.cnnsio, because it seems as if the verse
climbed up by medns of those feet. 'Ihe (Jreeks term it oi^a-ii.
elevatinnen), and Bi^iv,pasitionc'm, which hath been observed already.
Attilius calls it mulum 6)- ingressionem carminis.
A ver>-e is scanned either by the measure of distinct feet, as
hcxameti r.i and pentameters ; or by the measure of two feet, ac-
cording to vvhat we mentioned in the preceding chapter. But in
order to scan verse, there are four principal figures to observe,
Ilclhiipsis, Si/tinlcrphn, Sz/iiLEresiSj and Dicercsis : to which we may
add Systole and Diastole.
I. Of Ecthlipsis.
The word EcthJipsis comes from £xSa.^£<v, extundere, elidere, to
break and to bruise. It is formed by cutting of the m final of
a word together witli its vowel, when the following word begins
with another vowel ; as
y>/M/tum ille & terris jacfotus, S^ alto. Virg.
O airas hommum, 6 quantum est in rebus inane. Pers.
Formerly by this figure they used also to cut off the s final, efther
the s only, in order to hinder the length of the position, when
it was followed by another consonant ; or the s and the pre-
ceding vowel, ivhen the next word began with a vowel, just as
they used to do witii the ?h .• as
Doctu' Metis, suavis homo facundu' suoque
Content' atque bcatiis, scttnsjacunda Inquensin
Xempoic, commod' cS verboium vir puucurum. Ennius.
Delphinus jacct fmud nimio histratu' decore. Cic. in Arat.
Loiige flit a primo, quisqui' iccundus eiit. Alcin.
And this is still more usual in Terence and other comic writers,
as eju for ejuSf ommlfu for omnibus^ iiignu' for aignus, &Ct Jn other
pure
Of LATIN POETRY. 375
pure writers this is rare, though some think that Virgil did not
scruple to make use of it in divers places, as in the following.
Limina teciorum, 4' vnedii' in nenetralibus hostem.
As Pierius says it was wrote in antient MSS. as Farnaby still reads
it, and as Erythreus thinks it ought to be read ; which he endea-
vours to defend not only by the authority of Lucretius, but more-
over by several other passages in Virgil. Though others read
medium instead o^mediis.
Now as the letter s was sometimes cut off before a consonant in
order to prevent the position, the same was practised also on the m
by antient writers, as
LanigercB pecudis Sf equoru' duellica proles. Lucret.
Sometimes it was left standing, as we now leave the 5, and then it
was made short, as already we have observed, when treating of
quantity.
Corporura nfficiu* est quoniam premere omniadeorsum. Lucr.
II. Of Synalcepha.
The Synalcepha is in regard to vowels and diphthongs, the same
as the Ecthlipsis in respect to m. For it is formed by cutting off
a vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, because of another
vowel or diphthong with which the next word begins, as
Conticuer^ omnes intentiqii' ora tenebant. Virg.
The Latins for this reason give it the name of collisio. But the
word Zvvx\oi(pit properly signifies counctio, coming from ccXei'(pup
ungo. So that the metaphor seems to be taken from fat or unctuous
things, the last layer of which makes the other disappear.
III. Directions in regard to the use of those two fgures,
Ecthlipsis ajid Synalcepha.
These two figures are smoother, when the vowel subsequent to
that which was cut off, happens to be long, than when it is short:
as appears from this verse of Catullus,
Troja, nefas, commune sepulchxwra. Europas, Asiceque.
This is owing to the nature of the voice, which having thus lost a
syllable at the end of a word, ought in return to be sustained at
the beginning of the next, to prevent too great a bending and
precipitancy in the cadence. And it is observable particularly in
regard to the Ecthlipsis, that Virgil generally makes it fall on a
syllable long by position ; as
Postquam iatrogressi, 8f coram data copiajandi.
Ilium expirantem transfixo pectorejiammas. And the like.
The synalcepha on the other hand seems to have a particular
smoothness, when the following word begins with the vowel
that was cut off at the end of the precedent, because then it does
not depart so much from the natural sound which we are accus-
tomed to hear in those words ; the remaining vowel having nearly
its own value, and that of the vowel suppressed in the foregoing
word, as
Ille
376 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Ille ego qui quondam gracili modulatus avena. Virg.
lirgo omuls longo solvit se Icuoia liictu. Id.
Be that as it may, we must always take cai'e that the pronunciation
arising from the.-e figures be not too harsh, or disagreeable to the
ear, which is the judge of these matters. Nor should they be too
often repeated, especially in elegiac verse, which requireth a par-
ticular softness ; whereas iu heroics they may sometimes occasion
a more extraordinary gravity, according to particular occasions ; as
in this verse of Virgil:
Pliillida aino ante alias.
Which he has designedly strewed with soft figures, extremely well
adapted to the subject. As on the contrary he intended to repre-
isent something hideoue:, when he described Polyphemus,
\. Monsti'um horrendum, itiforive, ingcns, &c.
Again :
Tela inter 'media, atque horrentes Marie Latinos.
Except in such cases, these hgures should not be seen above twice
in the same verse. Nor i-hould they readily be put in tiie begin-
ning of fi verse, though Virgil has sometimes done it with elegance,
■^s, when he says :
.,7,,|), , Si. ad vitulam species ; nihil est qii d p'Xula laitdes.
These figures are also harsh at the beginning of the sixth foot,
as in Juvenal.
,, ^ Loripedem rectus derideat, jEthio^em albus.
though we meet with them in Virgil :
Frifrida Dnphni boves adjhtniina : nulla neque Qxnnein»
And even in the middle of a pentameter, as in Propertius,
Hercnlis, Anta:i(\\XQ, Hesperidumque conies.
We mav likewise observe that they are not the most graceful at
the end of the fifth foot in heroic verse, as in this of Catullus.
Difficile est tongum subifo deponere amorem.
Though there are several instances of them in Virgil, who seems
even to have aflected them on some occa>ions, as
Juturnamque parnt fratris dimittere ab armis.
Where he might have said, dimitterefratris ab armis.
Again,
■ findit se sanguine ab vno
Where he might have said, se sanguine findit ab uno.
Thus in the 4th Georg. he expresseth Orphtus's concern in this
beautiful verse :
Ille cava solans cegrum testudine amorem.
Now thes-e figures produce very near the saime effect in the last
dactyl of the pentameter, if they are used with great discretion, as
Quadrijugo cernes scepe resistere equo.
The ecthlipsis and synaloepha are also sometimes at the end of a
verse, whose last sylh'ble is cut off by the first word of the next
•verse, which begins with another vowel ; as
jiut dulcis musti Vulcano decoquiL humorevn^
Aut foliis undam> Virg.
Omnia Mercurio similis, vnceniquCf cc^orewque,
Et crinesjlavos •• - Virg.
OfLATINPOETRY. 377
Jit ntagnos membrorum arfus, magna ossn, lacertosque
Exuit Idem.
Which led some into a mistake that an hexameter might some-
times end with a dactyl. But this opinion we shall refute more
amply, chap. 4'. n. 5.
IV. Tlie Synala'pha omitted.
The synaloepha is sometimes om'tted either regularly, or by
licence. Regularly, as in o, lieu, ah, pro, vce, vah, hei, and the
like interjection?, which sustain the voice, and retard the pro-
nunciation, because of the passion they express, which vents
itself outwardly, and thereby hinders those words from being cut
oS. As
O pater : 6 hominum, divumque teterna potestas. Virg.
Heu uhi pacta JiUes, iibi quce jnrare solehaa. Ovid.
Ah ego ne passim tarda vide/e mala ? Tibul.
The same may be said of w, since we find in Ovid,
Et bis io Arethusa, io Arethusa vocavit.
The synalcepha is omitted by licence : first when it is con-
sidered as a consonant, as the French do with their aspirated H,
saying not Chonte, but la honte.
Fosthabita coluisse Samo : hic il/ius arma. Virg.
Whence, I think, we might infer that the H may sometimes
produce a position in verse ; though it is difficult to prove it, the
authorities that are brought on that account, being generally
joined with a caesura, as when Virgil says :
Ille latiis niveum moUi fultus hyacintho.
Secondly the synalcepha is omitted without any other reason than
the will and pleasure of the poet, who takes this liberty in imita-
tion of the Greeks, as
Et siiccus pecorl et lac subducitur agnis. Virg.
W^e meet likewise with examples of this figure both before H and
before another vowel in tiie same verse.
Stunt &)juniper\ & castaneeS hirsutcv. Virg.
Clamassent, ^ littics Hila, Hiia omne sonar et. Id.
But be that as it may, this figure ought to be very rarely used,
because it produceth what we call an hiatus in verse, which we
should endeavour to avoid ; especially when the syllable is short,
though there are instances of some in Virgil, as Htla in the fourth
foot of the above-mentioned verse. Again,
Et vera incessu pattiit Dea. Ille ubi ■matrem, &c.
Where the poet thought he might stop at Dea, because the sense
ends there ; and then begins another sentence.
The long vowel, or the diphthong that is not cut off by syna-
lcepha, becomes common in verse. Therefore it is short by posi-
tion, that is because of the next vowel, in these here :
NomenSf arma locum servant : t2 amice, nequivi. Virg.
Credimusf an qui amant ipsi sibi somnia jingunt ? Id.
Te Coridon 6 vC lexi! Trahit sua quemque'voluptas. Id.
Jmplerunt mont&s f ^fierunt 'Rhodo^^ii^ arces. Id,
On
378 NEW METHOD. Cook X.
On the contrary it is long in these.
Lamentis s^emitu(jue S) foeminco uhtlntu. Id.
A)ite tibi Eoae Atlantidcs abscondtrntur. Id.
There are even instances of its being long and short in the
same verse, as
Ter sunt conail imponere PeHo Ossam. Id. 1. Georg.
And in the same book,
Glauco t^ Panopea^" &; Inoo Mdicertcc.
For o in Glauco, not being cut oft", rcmaineth long : and cr in Pn-
iiopecB (the first and second of which are short) not being cut oft" is
made short by position.
But it is proper to observe that the most antient authors did not
allow themselves this liberty, but generally put a. d io remove this
hiatus, as in the following verse of Ennius quoted by TuUy,
Nam videbar soiiuiiare med' ego esse murluum.
Where to ma]<e it a complete trochaic, wc must necessarily read
it with this d. And there is something like it in the French lan-
guage, where, to avoid the same kind of gaping, they frequently
insert a t, as a-t-iljait,jera-t-il, &c.
V. Of the Contraction of Syllables, which includes the
Synthesis and the Synecphonesis.
We have just now shewn in what manner syllables are cut off"
by synalcepha, when they meet together, one at the end of a word,
and the other at the beginning of another. But as this meeting
may likewise happen in the middle of the same word, we are
oftentimes obliged to contract them into one syllabic. And this
is what some grammarians have called episynalcepha, as much as
to say, a second species of synalcepha : others 57y«c5?"5, from the verb
(^avw subsido : others syucoresis, from the verb a-wxi^eu, una com-
plector, in unum contraho : and others synecpkonesis, from the verb
rx(pwv£iw, pronuncio, cffero. Though some make this distinction
between si/ntvresis and synecpkonesis, that in the former the two
vowels remain entire, and are only united in a diphthong ; whereas in
the latter, one of the two is cut off" and entirely lost in pronouncing;
as alvcaria of four syllables, ariete of three ; omnia of two. But
since it is very difficult, as we have observed in the treatise of
Letters, to determine on many occasions, whether in this con-
traction of syllables they formed a diphthong or not; and besides
this diversity of names and figures is puzzling to the learner: vre
have therefore comprehended all these figures under the word
contraction of syllables, after the example of Quintilian, who in-
cludes them all under the word Complexio : for which reasoa
we have mentioned in the title the words Syn.^resis and
Synecphonesis, leaving it to every body's option to apply which
of these terms he pleases, and to what passages he pleases, if thereby
he thinks'he shall render himself better understood.
Now this contraction is particularly formed by drawing E or I
into one syllable with the following vowel.
/ E and
Of latin poetry. 379
E and A ; antehac, eadem, dissyllables ; anteambulo, usqueadeo
alvearia, of four syllables.
Sen lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta. Virg.
Aiiteambulones 8^ togntidos inter. Mart.
Two ee, decsi of one syllable ; deerit, deerant, deessem, deeroy
prehendo, of two.
E and 1 ; dein, dehinc of one syllable ; deinceps, deinde, proinde,
tBrei, aureis, aideit, of two syllables; anteire of three syllables.
E and O ; eodem, alveo, seursum, deonuyn, of two syllables ;
graveoletis, of three.
E and U; eum, mens, monosyllables in comic writers; and
such like.
In like manner is formed the contraction of I and A ; omnia of
two syllables; vindemiator, seiniaiiimis, of four.
Of I and E; semiermis of three syllables.
Of two ii ; Dii, diis, ii, of one syllable ; iidem, iisdem, of two ;
denarius of three.
Ofiandoy sejK?Ao7?iO of three syllables.
Ofiandw; huic, cui, in one syllable ; semiustiis, denarium, pro-
mojitorium, of four.
Examples of all these may be easil)' found among the poets ;
for which reason 1 shall be satisfied with giving only a i'ew.
Atria, dependent lychni laquearibus aureis. Virg.
Bis patrice cecidere mauus, quin protinus omnia. Id.
AssuetiB ripis volucres S)\/iuminis alveo. Id.
Seu lento J'uerint alvearia vimine texta. Id.
Prcecipue sajius, nisi cum pltulta molesta est. Hor.
And this figure is particularly applied to nouns in eus and their
genitive in ei, as Mnesteus, Orpheus, Pantheus, dissyllables ; as
also Mnestei, Thesei, dissyllables ; Ulyssei, ActiiUei, trissyllables.
Likewise in the vocative, Pantheu, a dissyllable, and others of
the same sort.
But we are further to observe, that u being of its nature a
liquid vowel after s, as well as after q and g, according to what
we have observed in the treatise of Letters, it slides away and is
dropped in siiadeo, suesco, and suavis, with their derivatives, as
suada, suade, snasit, sunsor, suave, suetus, dissyllables ; suadela, sua-
vibiis, trissyllables, and the like ; without there being any necessity
to call this a licence ; for if at any time it occurs otherwise, this is
rather by licence, being contrary to the nature of this u, which is
a liquid vowel in those words, as well as in qua, and the like.
Turn celerarej'ugam patridque excedere suadet. Virg.
Suadet enim vesana James, manditque, trahitque. Virg.
Et metus i?r maleinadidi fames, S-; turpis egestas. Id.
Suetus kiat tantum, ceu puUus hirundinis ad quern. Juv.
Suave locus voci resonat conclusus inanes. Hor.
2'um casia afque aliis intexens suavibus herbis. Virg.
Nesciaque humanis precibus mansuescere corda. Id.
• ■ '- Adeo in teneris consuescere multum est. Id.
No7i insueta ^rav« tentabunt pabulajcetas. Id.
Arcadas imuetos acies itiferre pedestrcs. Id.
Candidus
580 NEW METHOD. Book X,
Candidas insuetum miratur limen OLijmpi, Id.
A'6'c tibi tarn prudens quisquam persuadeat mitor. Id.
At patiens operum, parvuque assucta juventus. Id.
ANNOTATION.
Sometimes a Synaloepha meets with a Synaeresis, as
Uno eodemque tiilii partii, paribusnue revinxif
Serpentum spiris. \ irg.
where we see a Synala'pha of the o, which is cut of in tino ; and
then a synarem in eodern, which is a dissyllable ; so that we must
scan the verse thus,
Un' udemque tnlil, &c. in like manner,
Uno eodemque igni, nostra sic Dnphnis amorc. Virg.
Una eademque via sanguisque, aiiimusque sequuntur. Id.
VI. Of Diuresis.
Diaeresis is contrary to the preceding figure, and is pro*
perly when two syllables are made of one, as aula'i for aulcct
viiai for vitcc, dissoluenda for dissolvenda in Tibullus.
VII. Of Systole and Diastole.
Systole is the shortening of a long syllable, and derives its
name from aviixxeiv, contrahere. Quintilian gives the following
example hereof in his first book, chap. 5.
Unius ob noxam &,• furias, Sec.
Which perhaps sheweth that in his time the second of unius was
generally long, though now we look upon it as common ; and
■Catullus, who lived before Virgil, made it also short.
Itumorcsque senum severiorum
Omnes unius cestimemus assis. Carm. 5. ,
Others for an example of Systole give stcterunt, and the like
preterites, when we find them short in the pen ultima. But we
have shewn, when treating of Quantity, rule 15. p. 311'. that
heretofore this syllable was common. So that we shall find but
very few examples of this licence in pure authors. And in regard
to the others, as in the following verse attributed to Tertullian,
where we find the first short in Ecclesia,
Sin ^- Apostolico decurrit ecclesia verba ;
we have more than once observed that the writers of the latter ages
can be no authority.
Diastole, on the contrary, is when we lengthen a syllable
short by nature. This figure takes its name from ^la^ixxtiv, didu-
cere, dislendere ; and perhaps occurs more frequently than the
other; because it seems less exceptionable to add than to take
away from a syllable. Though to tell the truth, those licences
were seldom permitted except in proper names, or extraordinary
words, as AslacUs, Priatnides, &c.
Atqiie hie Prlamidem laniatum corpore tato. Virg.
Et qnas Priamides in aquosce vallious Ida. Ovid. ^
Ecquid ibi Asiacus casuras aspicit arces ? Id,
5[ Far
Of latin poetry. 3Si
For with regard to the other examples which Ricciolius pro-
ducetli in his book, intitled Prosodia Bononiensis, there is very
little stress to be laid upon them, since they are either corrupted
or misunderstood, or taken from inaccurate writers whose exam-
ple is no rule to us. As when he says tliat it is by this licence
recido taken from cado hath the first syllable long, and in his table
he refers to this verse of Horace,
Transverso calamo signum : ambitiosa rtcidet
Ornamenta. In Arte.
Where it is obvious that recidet hath the former short by na-
ture ; besides that it comes from ccedo, and not from cado, having
the second long, and being put for amputabit, he iviU cut off.
When he says the same thing of quatiior ; whereas this word is
so far long by nature, that neither Horace nor Virgil ever used
it otherwise. Also when he mentions malitia, as having the first
long, and strives to prove it by a pentameter, out of Ovid, where
all the editions that ever I saw have militiam, and where indeed it
is nonsense to read malitia, as the entire distich will demonstrate,
Temporajure colunt Laticejecunda parentes :
Quartan vnUtiatn votaque partus habet. Fast. 3.
Quintilian likewise mentions Italians, as an example of this figure,
when Virgil says,
Italiam^to prnfugus, &c.
Which is not perhaps exempt from difficulty, since Catullus, wha
was prior to Virgil, made the first long in Italus.
Jain turn cum ausus es unus Italorum. Carm. 1.
So that there is reason to doubt whether it be not as much a
licence in Virgil to make the first short in Italics, as to lengthen it
in Italia.
VIII. Of the Caution mth which we ought to make use
of those Licences.
But here it is to be observed that we are not allowed to use
those figures and licences on every occasion, especially now that the
Latin is no longer a living language. In licentia magis iiiventis
quam inveniendis utimtir, says Servius. And it is easy to see that
the antients were very cautious in this respect, since Ovid, writing
to Tuticaniis, makes an apology for not having said any thing ia
his praise, because the word Tuticatius, which hath the second
short between two long, cannot have a place in verse.
Quod minus in nostris panaris, amice ! libellis,
Nominis efficitur conditione ttii.
Lex pedis officio, fortunaque nominis obstat,
Quaque meos adeas est via nulla mndos.
Nam pudet in geminos ita nomen scindere versus^
Desinat ut prior hoc, incipiatque minor :
Et pudeat si te qua syllaba jmrte moretur,
Arctius appetlem, Tuticanumque vocem.
Nee pates in versum Tuticani more venire^
Fiat ut e tonga syllaba prima brevis i
Auf
382 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Aut ut ditcahir, qiice nunc correptiiis exit,
Et sit porrecta longa secunda mora.
Ills ego si vitiis ausim corrumpcre nomen.
llidcar, Sf merito pectus habere neger. Lib. 4'. de Pont,
Eleg. 12.
I thought it right to give this whole passage at length, in order
to prove tliat even in proper names, where Servius pretends we
may do what we list, they were so cautious as to admit nothing
that might offend the ear, which is the judge of these as well as all
other words.
And this appears further from Martial, who makes an excuse
for not having inserted the name Earinus in verse, because it con-
sists of four short.
Nomen nobile, molle, delicatiim,
Versu dicer e non rudi volebam ;
Sed tu syUaba contumax! repugnas :
Dicunt 'Ea^ivov, tamen I'oelce,
Sed Grtpci, qitihus est nihil negatum.
El quos ■'AfE?,"AfE?, decet sonare :
Nobis non licet esse tarn disertis.
Qui musas colimus severiores. lib. 9. Epigram 12.
Whereby he shews the difficulty of Latin poetry beyond the
Greek, because Homer, in the tifth Iliad, has made the first of this
word 'Af£? both long and short in the same verse. The same he
has also done by uyi>§, Theocritus by xaAo;, and others in the like
manner.
Chapter IV.
Of the chief Species of Verse.
And first,
Of Hexameters, and such as are relative thereto,
LATIN verses may be divided into three principal spe-
cies, VIZ.
Hexameters, and such as are relative thereto, as the Pentameter,
which is generally joined with it, or makes part thereof; as the
Archilochian, and others of which we shall speak hereafter.
Iambics, which are of three sorts of measure, namely Dimeter,
that have four feet ; Trimeter that have six feet ; and Tetrameter,
that have eight feet ; not to mention those which are either defec-
tive or redundant.
Lyrics, tlie name we may give in general to all such as cannot
be referred to the two first species, because the most elegant are
used in writing odes, as Asckpiads, Sapphics, and others.
1. Of Hexameter Verse.
Hexameter verse is so denominated from the word t^, sex, and
(^hgov, mensurOf because it consists of six feet, the first four of which
Of latin poetry. 583
may be indiscriminately, either Spondees or Dactyls ; the fifth must
be a dactyl, and the sixth necessarily a Spondee.
I I 2 I 3 I 4 \ 5 \ 6
Ab Jure prlncifi-um ]\Iu-sd', J6vh omiua plena.
The intermixing of Spondees and Dactyls contributes greatly to
the beauty of" this verse.
1 I J2 1 3 I 4 I _5 I 6
Itle tti~am extin-cto 77iise-ratus Ccestire Romam,
1 I 2 1 3 i 4 I 5 I 6
Cum caput dbscu-rii niti-dum fer-rugine ted'itj
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 6 I 6
Impia-que (^ter-mm fimii-erunt sceciild noctem. Id.
1 Gcorg.
Otherwise those which have most Dactyls, are generally more
agreeable than those which have most Spondees : as
Dlscite justM-am mom-ii, et non temnere dJvos.
iEn. Virg. 6.
But the great art is in making use of Spondees (which are slow)
and of Dactyls (which are rapid) according as they are best
adapted to the things we want to express. Thus Virgil has re-
presented the great labour of blacksmiths in lifting up their heavy
hammers, in the following verse, which abounds with Spondees,
lUi Inttr sese magna vl brachia toUunt. Georg. 4.
and the gravity of an old man in the following, which is preparatory
to a speech of king Latinus,
T)Ul scdato respondU corde Latinus. JEn. 12.
and the slowness of Fabius, whereby he saved the commonwealth,
in this other :
Unus qui nobis cunctando restitiiit rem. ^^n. 6.
On the contrary he expresseth the rapid motion of a horse by the
following verse abounding with Dactyls :
Quad) upidante pCitrem sonitu guatit ungula campum. JEn. 8»
and the swift flight of a pigeon by the following,
■ Mox a'ere tapsa qiiieto
Itad'it iter liquidiim, celeres neque commovet alas. 2En. 5.
and the fury of the v.'ind and tempest by these, where he has put
two dactyls in the beginning :
Qua data porta ruunt, 8f terras turbine perjlant^
Incubiiere mari^ totumque a sedibus imis,
and by this other;
inioniiere poliy S^ crebris micat ignibus ecther. lEn. 1.
The fifth foot of this verse is sometimes a Spondee, and then it is
called a Spondaic verse ; which, to make up for the slowness of two
Spondees at the close, has generally the fourth foot a Dactyl :
Cara deurn soboles, magnum Jovis incrementum. Eel. 4.
Constitit, atque oculis Phrygia agmina circumspexit, ^n. 2.
An(?. this verse seems more agreeable, when it concludes thus
with
334 NE^y METHOD. Book X.
with a word of four syllables ; though they reckon about ten or
twelve in Virgil, that end with a tnssylluble, such as these :
I^ro moUi viola, pro purpmeo narcisao. Eel. .5.
Slant Sfjun/peri, Sf castanece hirsiitcc. Eel. 7.
There are even two in this poet, that have not the fourth foot a
Dactyl :
Aut leves ocreas lento ducunt argento. /En. 7.
Saxa per Sf scopulos, Sf depressas convalles. Georg. 3.
II. JVhether an Hexameter Verse may sometimes end
with a Dactyl.
Here a question may arise whether an Hexameter verse may
not sometimes have the sixth foot a Dactyl, as the fifth may be
a Spondee : but it is certain it cannot, thougii some authors have
believed the contrary. And the reason may be this, at least if
we can give credit to Erythreus, that those verses having been
heretofore made entirely of Spondees, as indeed there are some of
that sort in Ennius,
Olli respond/ 1 Rex Albai-Longai.
they have ever preserved their Spondee at the latter end ; just
as the Iambic having consisted at first entirely of Iambuses, the last
foot has always remained an Iambus.
And when we find some of those verses that seem to finish
otherwise, it is either by reason of a Syncdoepha, the end of the
verse being considered as joined to the beginning of the next,
according to what we have observed in the precedent chapter, or
by reason of a Synaeresis or contraction of two syllables into one,
of which we have also taken notice in the same chapter, n. 5. as
in Virgil :
Inseritur verb exjhetti nucis arbutus horri da
Et steriles platani 'Georg. 2.
Bis patria cecidere manvs, quin protinus omnia, ^n. 6.
So that we must conclude the first verse at horri, and keep da for
the next, pronouncing it thus, SrbufUs hoir'i-d' Et steriles platnnif
&c. And as to the third verse, we must make' omnia a dissyllable.
III. Division of He.vameters into Heroic and Satyric,
and Cautions to be observed in order to render them
elegant.
Hexameters may be divided into Heroic, which ought to be
grave and majestic; and Satyric, which may be n)ore neglected.
In regard to the former, we may make a lew remarks here for
rendering them elegant, over and above what has been said of tlie
intermixture of their feet.
1. These verses, except the Spondaic, ought not to conclude
with a word tl)at has more than three syllables, except it be a
proper name ; as
Amphion Dircceus in Actcen Aracyntho. Eel. 2.
Hirtacid<e ante omnes exit locus Hippocoojitis. Mn^ 5.
^ Quarum
Of LATIN POETRY. 385
Quarum (juce forma pulcherrima Deiopeiam. yEn. 1.
Or some otiier uncommon word, to express some passion.
Per connubia nostra, per incceptos HymencEOs. Mn. 4.
2. Neither ought they to conclude with a monosyllable, except
it be the word est, or some other that begins with a vowel, and
forms an elision of the precedent word, whereby it seems to be
connected and incorporated with it.
Semiputata tibi frondosd vitis in ulmo est. Eel. 2.
Quem circum jrlomerati hostes hinc cominus atque hinc. TEn. 9.
Una dolo diviun sifoemina victa duoruni est. lEn. 4-.
Or when there are two monosyllables one after another, which
produce nearly the same effect as a word of two syllables ;
I Tuus 6 regina ! quid optes
Explorare labor, mihijussa cape&serefos est. iEn. 1.
Ne qua meis esto dictis mora : Jupiter hac stat. JEn. 12.
or in fine there be some particular reason which shall render this
uncommon ending more graceful ; as in Virgil:
Sternitur, exanimisque tremens procum bit humi bos. 2En. 5.
Vertitur interea ccehim 8^ ruit oceano nox. Mn. 2.
Dot latus, insequitur cumulo prceruptus aquce moiis. Mn. 1.
Prima vel autum.ni subjrigora, cum rapidus sol. Georg. 2.
Turn pictate gravem ac meritis si forte viriim quem
Conspexere, silent JEn. 1.
And several others in the same poet, but most of which have their
particular grace and beauty, as when he says again.
Ipse ruit, dentesque Sabellicus exacuit sus. Georg. 3.
—————scepe exignus mics. Georg. 1.
In regard to which, Quintilian, hb. 8. c. 3. observeth ; At Virgilii
viiramur illud ; nam Epitheton exiguus aptum 8j proprium efficity
4' casus singularis magis decuit, S<i clausida ipsa unius syllabcB addit
gratiam. Imitatus est itaque Horatius,
Parturiunt mo7ites, nascetur ridicidus mus. In Arte.
But Horace has hkewise expressed the usual avarice of mankind
most admirably in these two verses, which terminate in the same
monosyllable,
Isne tibi melius suadet, qui ut remfoacias, rem
Si possis recte : si non quocumque modo rem '^ Lib. l.Epist. 1.
Except on such particular occasions, it is certain we ought to en-
deavour to avoid putting monosyllables at the end of hexameters,
and that Erythreus had not much reason for blaming the judg-
ment of Servius and Quintilian on this article ; since excepting
the two particular cases above mentioned of the elision and the two
monosyllables, and of those other peculiar beauties, we shall find
very few in Virgil, considering the length of his work. As for
the enclftics they ought not to be considered as monosyllables,
because they are incorporated with the word to which they join ;
for which reason they do not so much as follow the rule of mono-
syllables in regard to quantitj'. Whereto we may add, that Ser-
vius himself excepts the names of animals, as mus, sus, &c. So that
there remains but very few of those which Erythreus has thought fit
to mark, whereby we can be induced to believe that in so delicate a
Vol. II. C e point
386 NEW METHOD. Book X.
point as cadence he had a more exquisite ear than either Servius
or Quintilian, wlio without all manner of doubt must have been
better judges than we of their native language.
3. Hexameters are also, generally speaking, somewhat dls-
pleufiing, when they conclude with several words of two syllables,
as the following of Tiljullus.
Semper ut inducar blandns qffcrt mihi vultus. Lib. 1. Eleg. 6.
4. The want of caesura likewise takes off a great part of their
beauty : though Virgil made one without a caesura till after the
fourth foot, the better to express the transports of a violent passion
by those broken and unconnected feet.
Per connubia nostra, per incceptos Hynienccos, JEtk. 4<.
And Horace to express the pains and trouble he had in writing
verse amidst the hurry and noise of the town, has done it by this
verse without a caesura, which has scarce the appearance of verse ;
Prceter calera^ Romce inene po'emata censes
Scribere posse^ inter tot cures, totque labores ? Ep. 2. 1. 2.
5. On the contrary the varying of the caesura gives them a par-
ticular grace, as we have already observed, c. 2. n. 2. And espe-
cially that which is made in the fifth half foot. But this same cae-
sura is remarkably beautiful, when it finishes the sense; as
Anna virO.mque cano, &c. ^n. 1.
especially if this sense includes some remarkable sentence ; as
Omnia vimU amor, Sz nos cedamus amovi. Eel. 10.
Slat sua cuiqiie dies : breve & iri-eparabile tempus. Mn. 10.
Or at least, when the verse containing two distinct sentences, the
caesura includeth one ; as in Virgil,
Nos patricB fines, 4' dulcia liiiquimus arva. Eel. 1.
Fluminibus salices, crassisque paludibus alni. Georg. 2.
The caesura is also beautiful, when it is formed on the last syllabi©
of a word relative to that which ends the verse ; as in the same
poet;
Titijre tu patuiae recuhans sub tejimine fagr,
SUvestrem tenui musam meditaris avena. Eel. 1.
Nee tarn praesentes alibi cognoscere divos. Ibid.
Julius a magno demissum nomen liilo. iEn. 1.
6. But we must take care that this same caesura does not rhime
fully with the end of the verse, that is, it must not include the
vowel that precedes the last syllable: which are called Leonian
verses, from Leonius, a monk of the abbey of St. Victor at Paris,
who brought them into vogue towards the middle of the twelfth
century, for he lived till the year 1160. And yet some of these
are to be found even among the antient poets, as
Ora citatorum dextrd contorsit equorum. Virg.
/ nunc, Sf verbis virtutem illude superbis. Id.
Si Trojajaiis aliquid restare putatis. Ovid.
But these rhimes are not so much observed, when some word ina«
mediately follows that hinders us from resting upon them ; as
Turn caput orantis nequicquam, Sf multa parantis. Virg.
Ilium indignanii similem^ similemque minanti. Id.
And
Of latin poetry. 387
And they are still less taken notice of, where there is an elision
with them, as,
JEneamfiindantem arces, S^- tecta novantem. Id,
Cornua velatarum obvertimiis antennarwn. Id.
Ad terrain misere, ant ignibus cegra dedere. Id.
by reason that pronouncing those verses, as they did, with an eli-
sion, they did not sound them like rhime ; Jundant' arceSj vdatar*
obvertiinus ; iniser* aut ignibus, &c.
IV. Of neglected Hexameters,
Excellence of those of Horace.
Neglected hexameters are such as Horace made use of in his Sa-
tyres and Epistles, which we undervalue through ignorance, be-
cause they have not the majesty and cadence of heroics, like those
of Virgil : not knowing that Horace wrote so on purpose, to
render his versification more like to prose, and that it is a studied
negligence, which he has varied with such beauties, and such
purity of stile, as to be no less deserving of admiration in its way,
than the gravity of Virgil. This is what he has declared himself
50 elegantly in the following lines. Serin, lib. 1. sat. 4.
Primujn ego me iUoriim dederim quibns esse poet as
Excerpam numero. Neque enini concludere versum
Dixens esse satis : neque si quis scribal uti nos
Sermoni propiora ; putes hunc esse pr'etain.
But this simple, and in appearance, humble manner, is almost
beyond the reach of imitation : and they who prefer Juvenal's
satyres to those of Horace, seem to have but a very indifferent no-
tion of the fine taste in writing, and to be incapable of distinguish-
ing between real eloquence and declamation. One single fable
of Horace's has more beauties than the most elaborate passages
of Juvenal. As in the 3. sat. lib. 2.
Absentis ranee pullis vifu/i pede pressis,
XJnus ubieffugit, main denarrat, ut ingens
JBellua cognatos eliserit. Ilia rogare
Quantane ? num tandem, se infiayis, sic magna Jiilsset ?
Major diniidio. Num tanto ? cum magis atque
Se magis injlaret : nan si te ruperis, inx^nit.
Far eris. Hac a te nan multiim abiudit imago.
There is nothing so pretty as those little dialogues, which be
inserts in his discourse without inquam or inqitit, as if it were a
comedy. In this manner he writes to Maecenas, lib. 1. ep. 7.
Non quo morepi/ris vesci Calaber jubet hospes,
Tu mefecisti locupletem. Vescere so'des.
Jam satis est. At tu quantum vis tulle. Benigne.
Non invisa feres pueris munuscula pa? vis.
Tain teneor dono, quqm si dimittur onustus.
Ut libet : hcec porcis liodie comedenda relinques.
But the most admirable of all, is the picture he every where draws
Cc2 of
38» NEW METHOD. Book X.
of the humour, passions, and follies of mankind, not even sparing
himself, as when he writes to liis steward, lib. 1. ep. 14'.
Jtuie ego viventem, tu dicis in urbe beatum :
Cni placet altcrins, sua iiimintm est odio sors.
Stidtus nlerque iocum inimeritum causatur viiquef
In culpa est auimus qui se non effugit unqunm.
See also his description of a miser, hb. 2. sat. 3. beginning with
this verse, I'auper Opimius, &c. And the story of Phili[) and Ma-
nas, lib. 1. epist. 7. which is far beyond all that we can say of it. •
I hope 1 shall be indulged this short digression in favour of a
poet, whose excellence in hexameters is not sufficiently known to
a great many ; and who ought to be read constantly in schools, in
order to acquire the purity of the Latin tongue, leaving out what-
ever may be prejudicial to the purity of morals.
V. Of Pe7itameter Verse.
A pentameter is denominated from the word irivls, quinque, because
it consists of five feet, of which the two first may be either spon-
dees, or dactyls; the third always a spondee; and the two last,
anapaests; as
1 I_ 2 I 3 1 4 15
Nd?7. sblet mgeiii-ls sum-ma fibce-re (ties.
Others measure it by leaving a caesura after the two first feet, then
two dactyls and another syllable.
1 i 2 I I 3 I 4 I
Non sblet mgerii-ts summd nd-cere dtes.
Now because this middle syllable ought to make part of a spon-
dee in the first manner of measuring the verse, some have question-
ed whether this syllable could be short ; yet there is no doubt but
it may, because the caesura has the same force here as any where
else, of lengthening a syllable; and we find sufficient authority ioi'
it among the antients. ,
Perspecta est igitur, unica amicitia. Catul.
Lacteus, S^- mistus obrigidsse liquor. Tibul.
Vinceris nut vincis, hcec in amore rota est. Propert.
Qui dederit primus oscida, victor erit. Ovid.
Thcssalicamque adiit hospes Achillis humum. Id.
VI. Observations for making elegant Pentameters.
In order to make this verse agreeable and elegant, we are to
observe,
1. That there be a caesura after the second foot. Hence this
verse is intolerable, which happens to be at the end of the 50th
psalm of the Vulgate translation.
Imponent super altare tuiim vitulos.
2. That the caesura be not followed by an elision, as in tRese
trerses of Catullus.
Trnja virum, 8f virtutum omnium acerba cinis. Carra. 69.
lUam affligit odore, ille perit podagra. Carm. 72.
J. That
Of LATIN POETRY. 389
8. That the most graceful pentameters end with a dissyllable,
as generally in Ovid.
Mceniafmitimis invidiosa locis.
Noil bene ccelestes inipia dextra colit.
Tempora sifuerint nubila^ solus eris.
Sometimes they end with a word of four syllables, as in the
same poet,
NoTi duris lachrymas vidtibus aspiciant.
And of five, as in the same also,
Arguor obscceni doctor adidterii.
But they are very seldom agreeable, if they end with a trissyllable,
though there are a great many such in TibuUus, as
Sera tamen tacitis poena venit pedibus.
•r with a monosyllable, as in Catullus,
Aut facer e, hcec a te dictaque,factaque sunt,
unless there is an elision of the monosyllable, because it is then no
longer considered as a monosyllable, according to what we have
observed in regard to hexameters, as
Invitis oculis littera lecta tua est. Ovid.
4. We ought also to avoid perfect rhimes, such as this itt
Ovid.
Qucerebantjlavos per nemus omnejavos.
But when the rhime goes no farther than the last vowel, so far is
it from being a fault, that it is rather a great elegance, as
Hue ades 8^ nitidas casside solve comas.. Ovid,
Fulmineo celeres dissipat ore canes. Id.
Jordanis refugas in caput egit aquas. Buchan.
VII, Sia; lesser Verses which make part of an Hexameter,
And 1. Of three iuhichform the beginning.
Of the verses relative to an hexameter, there are three which
form the beginning of it.
The 1. is called versus Archilochius, because of its author Archi-
lochus, who gave his name to several sorts of verse : but particu-
larly to this, which rs composed of two dactyls and a caesura ;
whence it is called dactylica penthemimeris ' by the scholiast of
Aristophanes.
1 I 2 .
Pulvis et umbra su-mus. Hor. lib. 4. Od. 7.
The 2. consists of three dactyls with a caesura, and is called
AlcmaniuSj or dactylica hephthemimeris. To which we may refer
these half verses in Virgil,
1 [2 I 3 I
Munerd l^tWi-amque D^-i. Mn. 1.
Infabricata fug(B studio, &c. ^n. 4.
The 3. contains the first four feet of an hexameter ; the last of
which is always a dactyl.
Lurni"
S90 NEW METHOD. Book X.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4
Luiniin-busqut pri-or r^di-it vtgbr. Boet.
VIll. Of the other three lesser Verses^ xvhichform the
end of an Hexameter.
The first contains the four last feet, and is called heroic, or
dactylic-tetrameter. Horace makes use of it in three odes.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 _
OJor-tes pe-joraque passl.
The second is formed of the three last, the first of which
is always a spondee. And it is called Pherecratius, from Phe-
recrates, an Athenian poet, who was the inventor thereof, and
acquired a reputation by his comedies. Horace makes use of it
in seven odes.
1 I 2 J 3
Quamxns Ponticd Pinus.
But instead of the first spondee, Catullus frequently useth a
trochee, as ) .V > nis* "^'^'^N r^"r*''^ '''\ "• i.
1 ( 2 \ 3
Prode-as ndvd mptd.
And Boetius now and then puts an anapaest, as
' 1 T 2 I 3
Swiili surgit db ortu.
The third hath only the two last feet of an hexameter, and i»
called y4r/o?2?c, from' Adon, son of a king of Cyprus. Boetius has»
put several of them successively in his first book de Consol.
Gaudia pelle,
Petle timorem ;
Spemquejugato,
Nee dolor adsit.
Nubila mens est,
VmctagueJ'renzs,
Ha;c ubi regnant.
Chapter V.
Of Iambic Verses.
And first.
Of the different Species of Iambics, according to the dif'
Jerent Feet of which they are composed.
IAMBIC verse is so called, because of the foot iambus that pre-
dominates therem.
It may be conaidered either according to the difference of the
feet it receives, or according to the number of its feet, namely,
four, six, or eight. At first it consisted entirely of iambuses;
some
Of latin poetry. 391
some of that sort are still remaining, and known by the name of
pure iambics: as in Catullus the praise of a ship :
1 12 I 3 |4 I 5 I 6
Phdse-lus ll-le quern vide-tis lid-spites^
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6"
Altfws si m-*vium celer-rimus, &c. Carm. 4.
and in Horace, the iambics which he has joined to the hexameters
in his epodes, od. 16.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 16
SuiS et tp-sd Ro-md vl-rXbus imlt.
Afterwards, as well to remove this constraint, as to reridet the
Terse more grave, they put spondees in the odd places ; as
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6.
Pars sa-mta-tts xiel-le sd-narifult. Senec. Hipp.
Therefore joining the spondee and iambus together, the antients
measured them by third epitrits, as St. Austin observeth. Hence
those of six feet were called trimeters, as being composed of three
epitrits only; and those of four, dimeters, as consisting only of
two. Which seems to prove that the odd feet were also obliged to
be spondees, and the even ones iambuses.
But in process of time they took more liberty. For
1. In the odd places they put indifferently either an iambus or
a spondee, except in tragic verses in the fifth foot, where Seneca
made it a rule never to put an iambus, because two iambuses
successively at the end of the verse render it less majestic.
1 1 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6
Amor time-re ne-minem verus piitest. Sen. Med,
2. The tribrac having the same time as an iambus, because its
two short syllables are equivalent to one long; it has been put
instead thereof, except in the sixth foot, where they have indis-
pensably preserved an iambus.
1 12 I 3 14 15 16
PrbhUe-ri rati dnul-ldperUuriim potest. Sen. Hipp.
S. The dactyl and anapasst having also the same time as the
spondee, they have been put instead thereof, wherever they can be
put, that is, in all odd places.
1 I 2 1 3 I 4 15 I 6
QuJ stdtuit dli-quTd, par-te inau-dita al-tera,
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
JEquiim licet stdtiie-r^t, haud^guusjuJt. Sen. Med.
1 I 2 I 3 1 4 1 5 I 6
Ddniina-r^l tunn-dus^ spl-rttus altos gere :
'1 I 2 I 3 I 4 15 I 6
S^quitur super-bos Ul-tiir a terg^Dtm Id, Her. Fur.
4. The
.392 NEW METHOD. Book X.
4. The comic poets have gone further, and, satisfied with end-
ing the verse with an iambus, they have inserted every where else
those feet which are allowed to be put in odd places ; namely
the Iambus, the Tribrac, the Spondee, the Dactyl, and the
Anapaest.
\ \ ii \ 3 \ 4> \ 5 \ 6
Vlrtu-te amhl-re opor-tet ndnfavitd-fihus.
•1 |2|3 l4 \5 \6
Sat habet fdvito-rum sem-pcr qui recte fcicit.
1 I 2 1 3 I 4 |5 I 6
Hbmo sum, Imna-nl nViil a me dli-enilm pi'ito. Ter.
Almost all Pha?drus's fables are written in this sort of verie.
1|!2 |3 |4 \ 5 K.
Amit-tit meri'topropfi-um quiali-'enu7nap-l)6lit. I. l.f.4.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
Fudi pdren-tes bbni-tas, 7idn mces-sitds. 1. 1. f. 13.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
Inops poten-tem dum *vult wii tdrl perlt. 1. 1. f. 23.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6
Succes-siis wi-prbho-rum plu-res dl-licit. 1. 2. f. 3,
II. Of a Scazon or Claudicajit Iambic.
Another difference in the feet of an iambic hath produced a
kind of verse called Scazon, from the word cryiot^m, lawe ; because
having begun with spondees in the odd places, and with iambuses
in the even, they change the cadence of the verse, which parti-
cularly depends on the two last feet, taking for the fifth indis-
pensably an iambus, and for the sixth a spondee.
1| 2 |3|4|5 \ 6
Nlmt-rum idem dm-ries jdl-Umui\ neque est qulsqudm*
1 I 2 [ 3 I 4 I 5 16
Qiiem non in ali-qua re vide-re Suf-fenum
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6
Pdssls. Sms cuJque dt-tribu-tus est error.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
Sed non nide-miis mdn-ticce quod m tergo est. Catul.
III. Of Iambics according to the Number of their Feet ^
Of these there are three sorts ; of four feet, called Dimeters,
because the Greeks used to measure them two feet to two feet,
for the reason above given ; of six feet, called Trimeters ; and
of eight feet, called Tetrameters.
1. Of
Of LATIN POETRY. 393
'[. Of Dimeters, or Four Feet.
Most of the hymns of the Latin Church are in this sort of verse.
But when the quantity is not observed, as in that of the Ascension,
80 beautiful in regard to the sentiments :
1 1 2 1 3 I 4
Jesu nostra redem-tw,
Amor K^ desiderium, &c.
it is a certain proof that they are falsely attributed to St. Ambrose,
who had a very good knack at writing these verses, and generally
ended them with a trissyllable, which is their best cadence, as
1 I 2 I 3 I 4
Jesil cdrd-?m vlr-ginUm,
Quern mater ilia concipit,
Quce sola virgo parturit !
Hcec vota clemens accipe.
The antients seldom or ever used this sort of verse by itself, but
they generally joined it to trimeters, or hexameters.
2. Of Trimeter Sy or Iambics of Six Feet.
These are the most agreeable Iambics, being the verse in which
tragedies are written. They are most graceful, when they termi-
nate with a word of two syllables,
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
Qulcum-que re-gnofJ-dit, et magna pMens
Dominatur aula, nee leves metuit DeoSy
A?ii??iumque rebus credulum Icetis dedit. Sen,
or with a trissyllable, beginning with a vowel, that makes an
elision of the last syllable of the precedent word.
Juvenile vitium estregere non posse impetum. Sen.
Generally speaking, there ought to be a caesura after the two first
feet; yet there is sometimes a peculiar beauty in sentences that
have not the caesura till after the third foot.
Qui nihil potest sperare, desperet nihil. Sen. Med,
Qui non vetat peccare, cum possit,jubet. Sen. Troad.
Minimum decet Ucere cui multum licet. Sen. Ibid.
Quod non potest vult posse qui nimium potest. Sen. Hipp.
Cures leves loguuntur, ingentes stupent. Sen. Hipp.
But it is likewise to be observed that in all the above verses we
are not to pause till after the caesura which follows the third foot.
3. Of Tetrameters, or Iambics of Eight Feet.
We meet with this kind of verse no where but in comic poets; as
in Terence.
1 1 S I 3 I 4 [ 5 \ 6 I 7 I
Fecu-niam m loco neglige-re, ma-awmm m-terdum est
8
lucrum, Ter.
Omnes
394 NEW METHOD. Book X.
J I 2 I 3 |4 I 5 16 I 7
Omnes quihii res sunt mim' secun-da magi sunt nes-cid
I 8-
quo modo.
1 |2 |3 I 4 1 5 16 I 7 I 8
Susplci-osi, ad cdn-tinne-liam ovi-iiia ac-cijnu7it magis:
!■ I 2 I 3 |4 I 5 I ^ [7 I 8.
Propter siiam im-puteH'tiam se sem-per cre-drntneg- lig'i,
Ter.
IV. Of lamhics either Defective or Redundant, xvhereto
ive must liefer those zvhich are commonly called Tro-
CHAICS.
Besides these three sorts of Iambics, which have exactly the syl-
lables of their four, six, or eight feet; there are some that have
more or less than one or two syllables. And grammarians not
considering this redundancy or defect till the end of the verse,
have called them, as already hath been observed, p. 375. Kara-
T^yiKToif fi^xyyKo.ra.'kyiKToi, vm^ycxrccKmroi. But' here we may make
two observations.
The first is, that the syllable may be wanting as well in the
first foot, as in the last. So that what they call Trochaic verses,
that is which have Trochees or Chorees in odd places, are no-
thing more than Iambics, that want a syllable in the first foot.
Thus this verse of Horace,
1 I 2 I 3 [4
Non ebur^ 7ieque au-reum,
is a dimeter that wants a syllable in the beginning.
And the long verses of fifteen half fctt, which we more parti-
cularly distinguish by the name of Trochaics, are nothing more
than tetrameter iambics or of eight feet, the first of which wants
a syllable ; as there are others where it is wanting at the end.
1 M I 3 I 4 I 5\ 6 \ 7 \
Pro pecca-to ma-gnOf pau-lUm sup-plicu satis est
8
Pdtrl. Ter.
'"-^Paliidifauces Averni, ^vosqueTanareispecus. Sen.
And this is what grammarians do partly acknowledge, when they
say that these verses are only, Trimeters, to which a Cretic or
Amphimacer (-v) was added in the beginning. For this Cretic
making an iambus (v) of those two last syllables, no more is
wanting than one with the first to make the two first feet of the
Tetrameter.
Hence it follows that if you take away, this Amphimacer or
Cretic from one of those verses which they call Trochaic, you
make an larabic of six feet ; as in the second above quoted, be-
ginning
Of latin poetry. 395
ginning to scan it from the word fauces ; and, on the contrary,
adding this foot to an Iambic Trimeter, you make a Trochaic of it.
As if in this,
8ids Sf ipsa Roma viribiis rtiit. Hor.
you were to put prccpotens in the beginning.
The second observation is, that Iambics, which are a syllable
short at the latter end, have always an Iambus before the syllable
that remains alone, though this be an odd foot : and therefore
they may pass for defective Scazons, as well as for Iambics.
1 I 2 I 31
HahH om-nis hoc mlup-tas. Boet.
1 I 2 M t^ I 5 I
Niivce-que per-gunt m-ten-fd luncB. Hor.
1 I 2 1 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 1^71
l^am si rdmt-tmt qulp-piam PhVu-mtnam do Id-res,
Ter.
1. Of Imp^rfeqt Dimeters
Imperfect Dimeters are either defective or redundant. Defec-
tives either want a whole foot at the latter end ;
1 I 2 I 3^ I
Mus(B JbviS nata
or a syllable, which may be wanting either in the beginning, and
these in Horace consist entirely of Iambuses;
1 1 2 I 3 I 4
Tru-ditur dies die,
or at the end, so that before the last syllable there Is always an
Iambus ; and then the verse is called Anacreonteus, as
.1 IS I 3 I
Jides Pater supre-mey
Quern nemo vidit unquam. Prud.
Habet omnis hoc, voluptas,
Stimulis agit furentes. Boet.
Dimeters in which a syllable i^ redundant at the latter end, are
like those which form the third verse of an Alcaic ode, which
Horace most frequently useth, as Motum ex Metello, &c. lib, 2.
Od. 1.
^1 I 2 I 3 1 4 1,
Et cun-cta ter-7'drUm suba-cta.
2. Of Imperfect Trimeters.
There is but one sort, namely such as want a syllable at the
latter end, which have always an Iambus before the last syllable.
Horace has made use of them, lib. 2. Od. 18. where he joins them.
to the first sort of defective Dimeters :
Non
59(5 NEW METHOD. Book X.
N^on ehiir neque aureum
1 - I 2 I 3 I 4 1 5 1 6
Meu rtnl-det In dumd lucu-nar
But we shall take notice of the defective Archilochian hereafter.
3. Of Imperfect Tetrameters.
Of these there are two sorts of defectives. One such as want
a syllable in the beginning, and which we have observed to be
erroneously called Trochaics. The hymn on our Saviour's pas-
sion, Pangc lingua, is of this kind, each verse of which is divided,
as it were, into two ; so that the stanzas which appear to be of six
verses, are in reality no more than three.
112 13 I 41 5 _! 6 I 7 I ^8
— Pan-ge iJn-gua glo-rib-si prct-tmn certa-rninls :
— Et super Crucis tropha^.um die triumphum nohilem:
— Qualiter Redcmptor orbis immolatus vicerit.
The other sort of defectives are those that want a syllable at the
latter end, where the foot preceding the last syllable, though in the
odd place, is ever an Iambus. There are some in Catullus that are
pure Iambics,
1 |2i3|4l5|. 6I7|^
Remlt-te pcil-Uum milu meUm qu6d m-vdla-sti —
Chapter VI.
Of Lyric Verses, and those any way relative to Lyrics.
UNDER the word Lyrics I comprehend all verses that can-
not be referred to the two species above mentioned ; be-
cause the chief of them are made use of in odes and in tragic
choruses, though we meet with some that are not used in thos«
Eieces, as the Phaleucian ; and others that are used there, though
elonging to the two first species.
We may therefore divide them into three sorts: 1. Choriambics:
2. Verses of eleven syllables : 3. Anapaestics, and a few others
less usual.
I. Of four sorts of Choriambics.
The antients gave the name of Choriambics to verses which
they measured by a Choriambus, that is, by a foot composed of
a Choree and an Iambus ( ) though they may be measured
likewise by simple feet. There are four sorts.
The first and smallest is called a Glyconic, which consists of a
Spondee, a Choriambus, and an Iambus. Or more simply of a
Spondee and two Dactyls. There are two entire Choruses of
this verse in Seneca.
lilt
Of latin poetry. 597
1_ I 2 I 3
llll mors gravis Incuhat,
Qui notus nimis omnibuSy
Ignotus moritiir sibi.
But Horace never uses them without the Asclepiad verse.
The second is the Asclepiad, consisting of a Spondee, t\ro
Choriambuses, and an Iambus ; or of a Spondee, a Dactyl, ^
Caesura, and two Dactyls.
M(Ece-nas utd-'vts edite regibus. Hor.
The third is longer than an Asclepiad by a Choriambus, or by a
Dactyl and a long syllable, as lib. 1. Od. 11,
1 I 2 I I 3 I I 4 I 5
Seu plu-res hye-mes seu tribu-it Jupiter ultunam.
The fourth is like the first, except that it finishes with a Spoa-
dee.
Heu quam prcEcipi-fi mersa pro-Jundo. Boet.
^1 I 2 1 I 3 |4
O quam glortfi-ca luce cb-ruscas.
Therefore we must not read at the latter end of this hymn to the
'^Virgin,
Qui tecum nitido vivit in eethere.
as some would fain alter it : but
Qui tecum nitida vivit in cethra.
as it is in the antient editions, and as George Cassander reads it
in his collection of hymns : the word cBthra, which is necessary
for the measure of the verse, being not only in Virgil more thaa
once, as we have elsewhere observed, but likewise in Cicero,
Aerem complexa summa pars cceli, quce athra dicitur. 2. de Nat.
II. Of Verses of eleven syllables, Sapphic, Phaleucian,
and Alcaic.
I join these three sorts of verses together, because (except the
fourth sort of Choriambics, which are very little used) none but
these are always and indispensably composed of eleven syllables.
Yet the name of Hendecasyllabic is particularjy appropriated
to the Phaleucian.
I. Of Phaleucian Verse.
The Phaleucian verse is so called from a poet of the name of
^otXetiKos. They consist of five feet ; a Spondee, a Dactyl, and
three Chorees or Trochees. Catullus makes likewise the first
foot an Iambus or a Trochee. They may be extremely elegant
without a caesura. There is hardly a Latin verse that sounds
more agreeably in Epigram than this, if it be well wrote. Ca-
tullus excels in it, but it is pity that he has mixed such a number
of things ofl"ensive to chaste ears. We shall give here an ex-
ample
398 NEW METHOD. Book X.
ample of this verse from the 1 ith epigram of the first book to
Licinius Calvus.
1 I 2 \3 !4 I 5
NJ te plus iicu-l7s 7)ie-Js a-?}iarem,
Jucundi^sivie Cake! munere into,
Odissem te odio Vatiniano.
Nam, quid J eel ego, guidve sum locutus^
Cwr w/e tol male perderes Poeiis ?
Dii magai, hoii'ibilem S^' saerum libelium,
Qiicm tu scilicet ad tuum Catullum
Misti, co)itinud ut die periret,
Saiumalibus, optimo dierum.
Non, non hoc tibi, saise, sic abibit.
Na?n si ItLverit, ad librariorum
Curram scrinia, Ccesios, AquijioSj
-Suffhmm, Omnia colligarn venena,
Ac te //is suppliciis remuneraboi\
Vos hinc intertd valtte, a bite
Itluc, unde maluiii pedem tulisiis,
ScecU incommoda, pessimi Po'etcs.
2. Of Sapphic Verse.
Sapphic verse was invented by Sappho, from vvhom it derives
its name. It' has the same feet as the Phaleucian, but differently
disposed, viz. a Choree, a Spondee, a Dactyl, and two Chorees.
, 1 J 2 1 3 I 4 I _ 5
Crescit ihdul gens sib1, dlrus hydrops. Hor.
After three Sapphics they generally put an Adonic. Yet there
are choruses where you find a longer series of Sapphics.
They are harsh to the ear, unless they have a caesura after the
two first feet ; though there are several in Horace that have it not.
Qiiam jocus circiimvulat Sf Ctipido. lib. 1. Od. 2.
l^licebe si har unique potejis Diana. In Carm. Seoul.
Lents Ilithija tiiere matres :
Sive tu Lucina probas vocari,
Seu Genitalis.
Sapphics and Phaleucians may be easily changed into one an-
other ; thus this Sapphic verse in Horace,
Non e^et Mauri Jnculis nee arcu,
may be changed into a Phaleucian only by transposing the words :
Non Mauri jacidis eget, nee arcu.
And this Phaleucian in Martial
Nijnipharum pater, amniumque Rhene,
becomes a Sapphic, by transposing it thus :
I{ke7ie nymvharum pater, amnmnaue* ^
3.0/
f
Of latin poetry. 399
3. Of Alcaic Verse,
Alcaic verse derives its name from the poet Alcaeus. It hath
two feet and a half of an Iambic (which they call Penthemimerim
lambicam) and two Dactyls. Hence in the first foot it may have
an Iambus.
. 1 I 2 I I 3 i 4
Vides lit al-ta stet mve candidum. Hor.
Though generally it has a Spondee.
• 1 I 2 I 13 I 4
Aiidt-rS ma-gnosjam "vidt-or duces,
1 I 2 I I 3 I 4
Ndnm-decd-7'o puhere sordidos. Lib. 2. Od. I.
This verse is never put by itself, but after two of them it is
customary to subjoin, as a third, an Iambic of four feet, with a
long syllable redundant.
Et cuncin terrarum suhacta. Hot.
4. Of the lesser Alcaic.
The lesser Alcaic consists of two Dactyls and two Trochees.
I have placed it here, though it consists but of ten syllables, be-
cause it has a relation to the great Alcaic.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4
PrcEter d-trdcem cuii-mum Ca-toms. Hor.
IIL Of Anapcestic Verse.
All verses of the third species have the number of their sylla-
bles determined, except these. The Anapaestic is so called, be-
cause it was originally composed of four Anapaests. But as they
afterwards took the liberty to put, instead of the Anapaest, a
Spondee or Dactyl which have the same quantity, namely four
times ; thence it comes that this verse, though called Anapaestic,
has not sometimes, so muc'", as one Anapaest. The chorus of tra-
gedies is frequently composed of this sort of verse ; which requires
no caesura.
1 I 2 1 3 I 4
Qiiantl casus huma-na rot ant ,
Minus in parvis fortunafurit,
Le'oiiisque ferit leviora Deus. Sen. in Hipp.
Of this sort of verse there are some that have only two feet, and
which now and then are joined to the others, though Seneca on
the death of Claudius has put them by themselves.
Deflete virum^
Quo non alius
Potuii citiiis /\
Discere causas, '
Una tantum
Parte auditdy
Scepe 8( neutra.
IV. Of
400 NEW METHOD. Book X.
IV. Of Ardidodiian Verse, and others less frequently
used.
We have already made mention of" the Archilochian verse,
called Dactylica Penthemimeris, p. 391. where we observed that
there were several sorts of this name. We shall here take notice
of two more.
The first are called Heptameter Archilochian^ which have the
four first feet of an Hexameter, whereof the last is always a dactyl ;
and three Chorees or Trochees, as
1 I 213 |4 \ 5 \ 6 \7
Solvitur acr1.s hy-ems grd-ta vice verbis et Fd-voni.
The second are Iambic- Archilochian, as they are called by Dio-
medes, comprehending the Iambic Penthemimeris, as well as the
above-mentioned Alcaic, and then three Chorees, as
1 I 2 I I 3 I 4 I 5
Trdhfmt-que sJc-cas ma-chi-ncE ca-rlnds.
Horace has joined these two verses together, and formed thereof
the fourth ode of his first book. But the latter may be measured
another way, by leaving a syllable at the end.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 6 I
Ti^dhunt-que slc-cas ma-chince cafi-nas — .
So that these verses are nothing more than Iambics that want a
syllable, but always require fheir third foot to be a Spondee^;
whereas the others, of which we have made mention above,
p. 397, suffer it to be an Iambus. Thus they may be changed
into perfect Trimeters, only by aoding a syllable ; for instance,
if we were to put in the precedent verse carinulns for carinas.
I shall take no notice of other sorts of verse that are very sel-
dom used, but proceed to say a word or two concerning compo-
sitions in verse, and the mixture that is made of different sorts of
metre.
Chapter VII.
Of Compositions in Verse, and the Mixture of different
Sorts of Metre,
AFTER having explained the nature of verse and its va-
rious species, it now remains that we treat of compositions
in verse, which the Latins comprehended under the word
Carmen, whether it be an epigram, an ode, an epistle, a poem,
or
Of latin poetry. 401
©r other work. Hence it is that CatuUus's epigrams are called
Carmen 1, Carmen 2, &c. that the odes of Horace are intitled,
Carminum tibri ; and that Lucretius stiles his first book Carmen.
Quod in prima guoque carmine claret.
Hence a single verse cannot be called Carmen^ unless it be per-
haps an intire epigram or inscription, comprized in one verse; as
Virgil calls the following verse Carmen.
jEneas hccc de Dana'is victoribus arma.
I. Compositions of one sort of Metre only.
Compositions in verse may be considered, either according to
the matter, or to the versification.
According to the matter they are divided into Epic Poem, Satyre,
Tragedy, Comedy, Ode, Epigram, &c.
According to the versification, which is the only point we con-
sider here, they are divided into verse of one sort only, or into
verse of different sorts. The former is called carmen ^ovok«Xo»,
and the other carmen moXvy-uXov.
The verses most frequently used in composing entire pieces
are Hexameter, Iambic-Trimeter, Scazon, what they call Tro-
chaic, Asclepiad, Phaleucian, and Anapaestic.
Those less frequently used in single pieces are Iambic-Dimeter,
Glyconic, Sapphic, and Archilochian in Prudentius.
Those used very rarely are Pentameter, in Ausonius; and
Adonic in Boetius.
II. Compositions of different Metre, and their division
into Stanzas, called Stkophes.
Compositions of different metre are, generally speaking, but
two or three sorts. But these are again divided according to the
number of verses contained in the stanza, (by the Greeks called
ffoip^j which being finished, they return to the first sort of verse
•with which they began. With this difference from the French,
that the latter generally conclude the sense in one stanza ;
whereas the antients seldom observed this rule except in elegiac
verse, where the distich ought to end with a full point, or at least
a colon : for Horace does not scruple to complete a sense, begun
in one stanza, with the two first words of the next, especially in
stanzas of two verses : as
Eradenda cupidinis
Pravi sunt eletnenta : Sf tenerce nirfiis
Mentes asperioribus
FormandcB studiis. Nescit equo rudis
Hcerere ingenuus puer, &c. lib. 3. od. 24.
And even in stanzas of four verses, where it does not sound s«
well,
Districtus ensis cui super impid
Cervice pendet : non Siculce dopes
Dulcem elaborabunt soporem ;
Non avium dtharceque cantiis
Somnum reducmt. lib. 3. od. 1.
Vol. II. D d III. Com^
402 NEW METHOD. Book X.
III. Compositio)is of two sorts of Metre. And first of
those in xvhich the Stanza has but txvo Verses^ and
which ay^e called ^ixuXoi/ 3if^o(pov.
The Latin stiinzas consist only of two, three, or four sorts of
verse ; Catullus alone havin<r made one of five. And 38 to corji-
positions of two sorts of verse, there are none rejjular except
stanzas of two or of four verses, but not of three. The former is
callt'd Dicolon-Uiatrvphon, and the latter Dicolou-telrastidplun).
There are a vast number of the, former sort. I shall take
notice only of nine that are most frequent, and of which (except
the elegiac) there are examples iu Horace., It will be easy to
judge of the rest, which are to be found in Boetius, Prudentius, yr
Ausonius, by what we have said concerning the different species of
verse.
1.
The first sort Is the Elegiac, consisting of Hexameter and Pen-
tameter. It is so cilled, because it was made use of in funerals,
from tlie Greek word tXiyoi weeping, aws tS e e ^j'ye/y, as those do
that weep. Which made Ovid say,
Flehitis indignos Elegeia solve capillos,
lieu uimis ex veto nunc libi nomen erit.
2.
The second, an Hexameter, and a lesser Archilochian. Horace.
Dijfugtre nives : redeunt jam gramina camjns
Arboribusque coma.
■Quis scit an adjiciant kodiernce crastina summce
Tentpora Di sitperi ?
3.
The third, an Hexameter, and the verse which contains the four
last feet of an Hexameter. Horace.
Dant alio,'^ Juries torvo spectacula Marti :
Exitio est avidis mare nautis :
JSlista senum acjuve/ium densanttirjiinerai nullum
Steva caput Froserpiina fugit.
4."
The fourth, an Hexameter and an Iambic Dimeter. Horace.
Nox e/at, S)- ccelo fulgebat Luna serc.no
Inter minora sidera.
5.
The fifth, an Hexameter, and a Trimeter of pure Iambic?.
Horace.
Altera jam teriiur bellis civUibus cctas,
Suis Sf ipsa Roma viriOus rtdt.
6.
The sixth, an Iambic Trimeter followed by a Dimeter. Horace.
Beatus die, qui procut negotiis^
Ut prised gens mortalium,
Palerna rura bubus exercct Siiis,
Solulus omni fcenore.
'^ The
Of latin poetry. 40
c»
The seventh, is an Iambic Dimeter that wants a syllable of the
first foot, and a Trimeter that wants a syllable at the latter end.
Horace, lib. 2. od. 18.
Trudihir dies die,
Novceque pcrgunt interire Luna :
2\i secanda marmura
Locas sub ipsian funus, S,- sepulchri
~ Lnmemor, struts domos, Sic.
8.
The eighth, a Glyconic and an Asclepiad. Horace.
quisquis volet impias
Cades, <!y rabiem toltere civicarrty
Si quccrat pater urbium
Subscribi statuis ; indomitam audeat
Hefrdnare licentiam,
Clarus jwstgenitis : quatenus, heu nefas,
Virtutem incolumem odimus,
Sublafam ex oculis qucerimus invidi.
9.
Tlie ninth is composed of an Heptameter, and an Archilochian
Trimeter, of which we have made mention above, p. 402.
Horace has wrote the 4th ode of the 1st book in this metre.
Pallida mors aqua pidsat pede pauperum tabernas,
Regumqiie turres, 6 beate Sexti ! Lib. 1. od. 4.
IV. Compositions of two sorts of Metre in Stanzas of
Jour Vei^ses. IF/iich are called SUuXov rfipf^roo(pov.
Of these there are two species in Horace.
1.
Three Asclepiads and a Glyconic.
Lucern redde iitce, dux hone, patria : c
Instar veris enim vultus uhi tuus "
Affulsit popido, gratior it diesy
Et soles melius nitent.
Tliree Sapphics and an Adonic.
Auream quisquis mediocrifatem
Diligit, tutus caret obsoleti
Sordibus tecti : caret invidendd
S^brius aula.
D d 2 V. Com'
404 NEW METHOD. Book X.
V. Compositions of three sorts of Metre, in Sta??zas of
three Vtrses. IVhich are called t^UuXov r^trpoipov.
There is but one species of them in Horace, consisting of a
Trimeter, an Arciiilochian, and a Dimeter ; and some of the
antients believed that the two last made only one great Archilo-
chiun.
Petti ! nihil me stent antea juvut
Scribere versiculos
Amore percufsicni gravi.
Prudentius also made the preface to his book of Hymns, of the
three first species of Choriambics, beginning with the smallest, and
ascending to the greatest.
Dicendum niihi, guisquis es,
Miindum quern coluit mens tua perdidit,
Nan stent ilia Dei qua studuit, cujus habeheris ?
VI. Compositions of three sorts of Metre, and Stanzas
of four Verses. Which are called t^UuXov rslparf ofoy .
Of these there are also but two species in Horace.
1.
The first consists of two Asclepiads, a Pherecratian, and a
Glyconic.
navis referent in mare te novi
Fluclus. O quid a gis? Jbr titer occupa
Portuttiy nonne vides tit
Nudum remigio latus? Lib. 1. od. 14.
2.
The second is the most agreeable and the most common of all
Horace's odes, among which there are no less than thirty-seven
of this sort.
We have already taken notice of the three species of verse that
are used in thcs>e odes, chap. 6. n. 3. p. 401.
Damnosa quid non imminuit dies ?
jEtas parciitum pejur avis, tidit
Nos nequiores, mox daturas
Progetiiem vitiosiorem. Hor. h 3. od. 6.
The above are the principal species of metre, and composi-
tions in verse. But as it will be of use to be able to consider
them at one view, 1 have thought proper to exhibit tliem in the
two following tables ; which suppose a person to be acquainted
with the six necessary feet, of which I shall at the same time give
a. small table, to the end they may be known in the large one by
the initial letter of their name. Where it must be observed that
I <;all the foot containing a long and a short ("") a Choree rather
than Trochee, to give it the C, and to let the Tribrac have T.
The long caesuras 1 have distinguished by the same mark as the
quantity ( ~ ).
^ ^ ' ^ * TwE
[ 405 ]
F E H T.
1.
Spondee
S.
<2.
limbiis <"-
I.
3,
Choree -"
C.
4.
Tribrac "•">
T.
0.
Dictyl -""
D.
n.
AnapiEst «'""
A.
The first TABLE:
OF DIFFERENT SPECIES OF VERSE
reduced to Three.
tii
O
in
w
O
H
Q
Q
n
Pi
W
>
Entire.
Parts.
11.
Iam-
bics,
accord-
ins to
The qua-
lity of
their feet.
The
number
of their
feet.
r Hexame-
1 tors.
I Pentame-
L ters.
Begin-
l nin?:.
.End.
'Pure Iam-
bics.
Mixed
with I. or
T. with S..
or D. and
-A.
rOf 4 feet!
called Di-
meters.
Of 6 feet
Trimeters.
< Ordinary. 4. S. or I). | the 5. D. | the 6. S, . . .1
I Spundaics. Ending with two S 2
\. . . . 2 S. or D. I the 3. S. I the 5. and 6, A. . 3
1. Archilochian. 2. D. and a syilab'e 4
2. Alcmanian. 3. D. and a syllable 5
3 3. S. or D. I the 4. D 6
The four last feet 7
S. I D
■ 1. Dact. Tetram.
2. Pherecratian.
3. Adonic,
] That is, all Iambuses.
|S.
D.
. 8
, 9
10
'Ordinary,
ending
with an I.
More exact,
having in the
even feet. viz.
2. and 4. I or T.
In the uneven also
S or D. or A.
.Scazon.
Defective
}
11
I Neglected, having in even feet,
what the exact ones have only in V '2
.the uneven.
Ending with an S. after an I. . . 13
-Perfect 14
Of a foot 15
C In the beginning. 1 6
syllable, ■< At the end. Aaacre-
Konlics. 17
Redundant
Perfect. .
Defective
r Of a
■J Of a I
) Of a syllable at the end 18
Of a syllable.
{Perfect
Defective of ( In the beginning called Trochaics.
a syllable ^ At the end
*
19
20
21
22
V
ters.
III.
Lyrics.
'Choriambic
i
Of eleven syl- *
lables. S
Glyconic.
Asclepiad.
Alcaics.
Alcmanian
Phaleucian
Sapphic. .
Alcaic.
Small Alcaic.
1. S. I 2. D.
D.
D.
_
D.
D.
-
D.
D.
-
D.
D
C.
C.
S.
D.
C.
r I.
I.
-
|D.
C.
C.
s.
c.
c.
D
. . . 23
. . . 24
D. I D. 25
. . . 26
. . . 27
. . . 28
D. . 29
. . . 30
{Anapaestic
Hepiameter Archilochian.
Trimeter defect. Archiloc.
4. A. 67- D. or S 31
4. feet, one Hexameter and 3 C. 32
I. or S. I I. I - I 3. C. . . . 33
EXAMPLES
t 405 ]
EXAMPLES
OF THK
DIFFERENT SPECIES OF VERSE
Contained in the foregoing Table, according to the
correspondent Figures.
1. Ab Jove principium, Musae ! Jovis omnia plena. Virg.
2. Cara Deum sol>oles, magnum Jovis iacrementum. Id.
S. Non solet ingeniis summa nocere dies. Ovid.
4. Pnlvi'? & nmbra snmus. Hor.
5. Munera lifititiamque Dei. Virg.
6. Luminibusque prior rediit vigor. Bdeih.
7. O fortes ppjoraqne passi. Hor.
S. Qtiamvis P'jntica piiius. Id.
9. Gaudia pelle. Buelli.
10. Phaselus ille quem videtis hospiles. Catul.
I i. Pars sanitatis velle sanari fuit. Sen.
12. Homo sum, hutnani nihil ^ me alienum puto. Ter.
13. Sed non yidemus manticac quod in tergo ebt. Calul.
14. Fortiina;nou mutat genus. Hor.
15. Musas Jovis natse.
16. Trudilur dies (lie. Hor. ^
17. Ades Pater supreme. Prud.
18. Et cuncta terrarum subacta. Hor.
*. Pars sanitatis velle sanari fuit. Sen.
19. Kovaqiie pergunt interire LnnJE. Hor.
20. Pecuniam in loco negligere, maximum Interdum est lucrum. Ter.
21. Vos precor vulgus silcntum, vosque ferales Deos. Sen.
22. Nam si remittent quippiam Philumenam dolores. Ter.
23. Ignotiis raoritur sibi. Sen.
24. Mfficcnas atavis edite regibus. Hor.
2.5. Sou plures hyemes, seu tribuit Jupiter ultimam. Id.
26. O quim gloriGca luce coruscas !
27. Ni te plus oculis meis amarem. Catul.
93. Crescit indiiigens sibi dirus hydrops. Hor.
29. Audire magnos jam videor duces. Id.
50. Praeter atrocem animuui Catonis. Id.
31 . Quanti casus hunniia rotant. Sen,
3%. Pallida mors aequo pulsat pede pauperum taberaas,
9?c hcgumque turres; 6 beate Sexti. IJor.
THE
[ 407 ]
The second TABLE:
OF THE
MIXTURE OF LATIN VERSE
^ IN COMPOSITIO.V.
With the Figures referring to the precedent Table, to point out the Examples.
C Of
CIS
"-1 fc
<a j=
o w
._ lU
w a;
>• %-
<U (0
one sovt,(
MONOKiiAON,
Frequently
Less frequently
Very seldom
1. Hexameters.
II. 12. Iambic Trimeters.
1 3. Scazons.
21. Trochaics.
I 24. Asolepiads.
27. Phaloucians.
.31. Anapfpstics.
14. Iambic Dimeters.
23. Glyoonics.
28. Sapphics.
4. Archil(jchians.
3. Pentameters.
4. Adonics.
1. Hexam.
s
S '^
S
o
Of several
sorts, >
nOAYKi2AON.^
. Of two
sorts,
VMwKm,
\
Of
three
sorts,
In
two verses,
J'lVpo<))OV.
In
four verses,
In
three verses,
seldom used.
In
four verses,
2.
2.
\
Examples of this mixture
7th
of verses may he
Chapter, art. 34,
3 Pentameter.
4 Archiloohian.
\ 7. Dactyl. Tetram,
C 10. Tii meter pure.
11. Trimeter. 14. Dimeter.
16. Dim. def. 19. Tritn. defect.
23. Glyconic. 24. Asclepiad.
23. Heptam. 33. 1 rim. Archil.
24. Three Asclepiads.
And one Glyconic.
Three Sapphics.
And one Adonic.
Trimeter.
Archilochian.
Dimeter perfect.
Giyco. ic.
Asclepiad.
Great Choriambic.
Asclepiad.
24. Asclepiad.
8. Pherecratian.
23. Glyconic.
29. ■)
29. (
18.
30.
seen more particularly in the
5f and 6.
23.
28.
9.
11.
24.
.25.
■24.
<>
Alcaic ode.
Vol. II.
END Off THE GRAMMAR.
Ee
INDEX
INDEX
INDEX OF WORDS
TREATED UPON IN THIS WORK.
A, the letter, i. 8. 22.
A, preposition, ii. 38. 40.
50. 66, 67. 72. 181
Aala, ii. 249
Ab, ii. 38.40.49.66,67,
68. 72. 181
Abacus, i. 146
Abadir, i. 33
Abalienare, i. 179
Abax, i. 52. 146. ii. 325
Abdere, i. 232. ii. 200
Abdicare, i. 180. 220.
229. ii. 200
Abducere, i. 221. ii. 200
Aberrare, ii. 200
Abesse, ii. 200. 306
Abhinc, ii. 54. 148
Abhorrere, ii. 99. 200
Abiens, i. 88. 310
Abies, i. 78. ii. 341
Abigere, i. 246
Abjicere, i. 207. ii. 200
Abire, i. 283. ii. 43. 200
Abjudicare, ii. 200
Abjungere, i. 241
Abludere, i. 235
Abluere, i. 213.
Abnuere, i. 217. ii. 200
Abolere, i. 195. ii. 99
Abolescere, i. 195
Abominor, ii. 102
Aborior, i. 302, bis
Aborsus, i. 303.
Abrado, i. 236
Abraham, as, i. 164
Abripio, i. 211
Abrogare, ii. 200
Abrumpo, i. 264
Abs, ii. 38. 40. 49, 50
Abscedo, i. 238
Abscido, i. 253. ii. 309
Abscindo, i. 234. 240
Abscondo, i. 232
Absconse, sio, sor, i. 233
Absens, ii. 116
Absente nobis, ii. 152
Ahsida, i. 138
Absinthites, i. 37
Absisto, i. 279
Absolvere, i. 280. ii. 61
Absorbeo, i. 198
Absporto, ii. 268
Absque, ii. 39, 40
Abstemius, ii. 347
Abstentus, i. 190
Absterge, i. 249
Abstinere, i. 189. ii. 99.
200
Abstraho, i. 251
Abstrudere, i. 236
Absiimo, i. 257
Absynthium, us, i. 144
Abundare, ii. 62
Abusio, sus, i. 140
Abuti, i. 299. ii. 71. 104.
200. 307
Abydon, dos, i. 17
Abyssus, i. 44. 48
Ac, ii. 158, 159. 175. 336
Academia, ii. 300
Accedere, i. 238. 240. ii.
201
Accedit quod, i. 238
Accelerare, ii. 99
Acceiido, i. 227
Accerso, i. 273. ii. 285
Accidens, i. 7
Accidere, i. 237, 238. ii.
201
Acciugo, i. 240
Accino, i. 318
Accio, i. 200
Ee2
Accipere, i. 210. ii. 67.
201
Accipiter, i. 5C. 76. ii.
255
Accolo, i. 252
Accresco, i. 195. 223
Accubatio, i. 187
Accubitio, i. 187.
Accubo, i. 183
Accumbo, i. 184. 219.
318
Accurro, i. 269, 270
Accu&are, ii. 61
Aceo, i. 310
Acer, i. 19. 75. 103. 142.
ii. 86
Accra, ii. 284
Acetabula, lum, i. 136
Acetum, i. 135
Achoetnenis, i. 64
Ackates, i. 8. 62. 121
Acheron, i. 13
Achilles, i. 120, 143
Achilleus, i. 120. 143
Acies, ii. 150
Acinaces, i. 36
Acina, num, nus, i. 139.
144
Acquiescere, i. 223. ii.
201
Acquire, i. 266
Acre, i. 103
Acris, ii. 302
Acrocerannia, i. 163
Acrus, i. 142
Acteon, ii. 333
Actio, i. 106. ii. 177
Actito, i. 312
Actum, us, i. 144
Acua, ii. 272
Acui, i. 310
Acuo,
Index of Words.
Acuo, i. 213. 310
Acus. i. 44, 45. 48. 83.
124. 143
All, ii. 35, 50. 53, 54.
181. :336, 337
Ad iru lias redactus, ii.
178
Ada;qimrc, ii. '201
Adagio, giiira, i. 140
Ad im, as, i. 164
A'iamas, i. 55. 78. ii.
340
Adamo, i. 178
Adamussim, ii. 150
Adaperio, i. '290
Adaugeo, i. 204
AdaxUit, ii. 121
Addeictos, ii. 284
Addicere, i, 220. ii. 201
Addisco, i. 175. 224
Addo, i. 232
Addor, ii. 120
Addiico, i. 221
Adecito, ii. 284
Adeo, ii. 334
Adeodatus, i. 61
.Adeor, ii. 118
Adeps, i. 50. 70.87. 143.
150
Adeptus, ii, 138
Adesse, ii. 27. 118. 201.
Adfeclus, ii. 284
Adfei-o, i. 267
Adhoerere, i. 203. ii. 201
Adhibere, i. 177. 188. ii.
201
Adhuc, ii. 149
Adicilo, ii. 284
Adiens, i. 88
Adigerc, i. 173. 177. 246.
ii. 201.
Adjicio, i, 203
Adimo, i, 257, 324. ii.
506
Adimpleo, i. 199
Adipiecor, i. 300. ii. 102
Adire, i. 178, 283. ii. 43,
201
Aditus, ii. 305
Adjungo, i, 241, ii, 201.
Adjuvo, i. 182, ii, 181
Admiror, ii. 102
Admiscere, i. 190. ii, 201
Admitto, i. 275.
Admodum, ii. 149
Admodumquam, ii. 158
Admoii(;o, i. 187. ii. 44
Admonitio, i. 140. 144
Admonitus, turn, i, 140,
144
Admorceo, i. 201
Adnitor, i, 298
Adoleo, i. 195
Adolescens, i. 1.110.115.
195. ii. 81. 88. 177.
286
Adoifscentulus, ii. 89
Adolescere, i. 195. 201
Adoni, idi, i. 120
Adoptare, ii, 201
Ador, i. 34. 142. 150,
152, ii. 321
Adoi-ea, i. 152
Adorior, i. 302. ii. 102
Adoitus, ii. 138
Adpromitto, i. 276
Adque, ii. 275
Adria, i. 25
Adscisco, i. 223
Adsci-ibere, i. 218. ii. 201,
304
Adspiclo, ii. 181
Adstringo, i. 244
Adstriio, i. 215
Adveho, i. 251
Advena, i. 3. ii. 80. 270.
304
Advenio, i. 286, 312. ii,
304
Adventus, ii, 144
Adversari, ii. 201
Adversnm, sus, ii. 35. 38
Advertere, i. 273. ii. 201
Adulter, i. 67
Advoco, i. 180
Advoh'o, i. 281
Advorsum, ii. 255
Adulescens, ii. 2S4. 286
Adulo, ii. 105.201
Adulor, ii. 102, 105, 201
Adultiis, ii. 141
Adnro, i. 270
Adus, i, 34. 142
.ff.depol, see Edepol
/Edes, i, 157, ii. 51. 176.
351
.flLddicius, ii. 287
^.dilis, i. 103
.(Editimus, ii. 351
JEdon, i. 56
yEdos, ii, 280
jEetes, i, 147
.Slgresco, i. 311, Us
.ffiguptus, ii. 284
iEgyptus, i. 14. ii. 284
jEmuIari, ii. 201
yEnea, i. 62. 122
iEneas, i. 62. 64, 122.
338. 340
iEneis, i. 119
.iEni^ma, i. 25, bis, 71.
!06. ii. 297. 322
jEpy, i. 15
jEqiie ac, ii. 159
jEqui, ii. 65.
JEqiiiparare, ii. 252
^qniperare, ii. 252
/Etiuipollfrc, i. 191
iEquom, i. 65
yEquor, i. 34. ii. 321
Act, i. 32. 74. 119, 150,
151. ii. 320. 339
/Era, i. 1 1 3. 149, ii. 245
Mraz, ii. 245
Aerarius, um, i, 144
JEerium, i. 1 14
Aerius, ii. 285
.ffirum, i. 114
iEs, i. 56. 80, 114, 149,
150. ii. 176. 259. 323
JEstas, i. 35.
/Estimare, ii. 66, 201
jEstiva, i. 160
.Slstumare, ii. 234
iEtas, i.35. 77, ii. 259.
322. 340
jEtatium, i, 110
jEther, i. 74, 76. 137.
150. ii. 320. 339
.ffitherius, ii. 285.
.a^thica, ii, 236
^thiops, pus, i. 14S
^thna, i. 14
.(Ethra, i. 137
jEvum, i. 154
Af. ii. 284
Affatim, i. 226, ii, 18.
.147
Aflfectio, tus, i, 140
Aftecto, ii. 101
Adector, ii. 101
Aff.;ro, i. 2G7
Afficio, i. 207
Affieior, i, 307, ii. 70
Afligo, i. 242
Affingo, i. 244
Affinis, i. 103. ii, 81
Affinitati, i. 98
Affinitatium, i. 1 10
Affirmo, ii. 113
Aflligo, i. 241
Affliiere, i. 215. ii. 62
AlTrico, i. 186
Affiilgeo, i. 205
Africus, i. 13
Againemno, nou, i. 140
Age, ii. 144
Ager, i. 32. 65
Agere, i, 173, 176. 246.
ii, 202
Aggens,
Index of \7oiids.
Aggens, ii. 275
Aggero, i. 268
Aggredi, i. 301. ii. 102.
'i02
Aggressus, ii. 138. 276
Aggretus, ii. 276
Agguliis, ii. 275
Agilissime, ii. 87
Agilissimus, llitaus, ii. 87
Agito, i. 312, ii. 202
Agna, ii. 82
Agnati, ii. 228
Agnitum, ii. 305. 312
Agnomen, ii. 228
Agnosco, i. 224, 225. 317
Agnoturus, tiis. i. 225
Agnus, 1. 68. ii. 82
Agon, i. 30
Agonale, i. 1 1 8. lia, ii. 177
Agragas, i. 16. 78
Agricoia, ii. BO. 308
Agro, Agroi, i. 125
Aiiala, ii. 249
Ajax, i. 121
Ain, ii. 338
Aio, i. 291. ii. 120.265
Aixi, i. 15
Ala, ii. 249
Alabaster, trum, i. 141
Aliicer, i. 75. ii. 86
Albedo, i. 28
Albena, ii. 270
Albico, i. 311
Albin, i. 92
Albinum, nus, i. 10
Albor, i. 28
Album, ii. 270
Alcedo, i. 56
Alcyoiij i. 55. 57
Alecto, ii. 335
Ales, i. 36. 57. 116. ii. 340
Aletrinati, i. 94
Alex, i. 89
Alexandrea, eia, ii. 261
Alexandria, ii. 261. 359
Alexandrias, i. 134
Alexant.er, ii. 284
Alexin, ii, 338
Algeo, i. 205, 206. 231
Algor, gus, i. 142
Aliae, i. 68
Alienigena, ii. 80
Alieno, i. 179
Alienus, ii. 63
Aliger, ii. 308
Alimodi, i. 165
Alimonia, nium, i. 136
Alioqui, ii. 308
Alipes, i. 107. ii. 341
Aliquanto, ii. 17b
Aliquid, ii. 179
Aliquis, ii. 91
Aliquot, i. 164
Aliud, i. 67. ii. 67
Alius, i. 67. ii. 90, 91.
296,297
Allatrare, ii. 202
Allego, i. 180. 248. ii.
202
Allia, i. 13. 25. 154
Allicio. i. 208, 209. 320
Allido, i. 235. ii. 304
Allino, i. 262
Allium, i. 154
Aliobrox, i. 89. ii. 325
Alloquor, i. 297
AlUuio, i. 235
Alluo, i. 213
Alluvies, i. 140
Alluvio, i. 27. 140
Alluvium, i. 140
Allux, ii. 252
Almus, ii. 87, 88
Alo, i. 172. 252. 318. ii.
140
Alpeis, i.'104. es, is, 157
Alpha, i. 164
Alsiosus, i. 206
Altar, re, rium, i. 139
Alter, i. 6S. ii. 91. 297
Alterco, or, ii. 105
Alternis, ii. 145
Alteruter, i. 60. 62. ii. 293
Altum, i. 7. 154. ii. 178
Alvena, ii, 270
Alvear, re. i. 3 39
Alvus, i. 43, 44, 45. 151
Am, i. 250
Amabo, ii. 121. 145
Amandus, ii. 88
Amans, i. 5. 93. 102.
105, 106. ii. 21. 134
Amaracus, cum, i. 144
Amare, i. 171. 173. 177,
178. ii. 130. 310
Amaryllida, i. 121
Amaso, sso, ii. 284
Amathus, i. 17. 86. ii. 345
Amazo, i. 140. ii, 341
Ambage, i. 157. 165
Ambages, ii. 296. 305
Ambe, bes, ii. 255. 305
Ambedo, i. 228. 229
Ambiens, i. 88. 310
Ambigo, i. 247. 250
Ambio, i. 284. ii. 118
Ambior, ii. 118
Ambitus, ii. 305
Ambo, i, 64. 69. ii, 49.
84. 90. 176
Ambulacrum, ii. 302, 303
Aaibulare, i. 178. ii. 26'^
Ames, i. 37
Amet, ii. 181
Amicio, i. 287. 313
Amicus, ii. 177
.^milcar, i. 96
Amitto, ii. 305
Amnis, i. 39, 40. 98.106,
ii. 177
Amor, i. 34
Amovere, ii, 43
Amphibrachys, ii. 367
Amphimacer, ii. 367
Amphioi), ii. 300
Amplecto, ii. 105
Amplector, i. 277. 295. ii.
102. 105
Amplexo, ii. 105
Amplexor, i. 312. ii. IQS
Amplexus, i. 277
Amplius, ii. 18. 59
Amussis, i. 91
Amygdala, lum, i. 136
An, ii"! 154. 165. 338
Anachorlta, ii. 235
Anapajstus, ii. 366
Anas, i. 56. ii. 322. 340
Anathema, ii. 347
Anceps, i. 70. 88. ii. 325
Anchises, i. 62, 63. ii. 83.
331. 338.340
Anciliorum, i. 118
Ancipes, i. 70
Ancon, i. 16
Ancti, i. 250
Andes, ii. 96
Androgeos, i. 66, ii. 335.
344
Anethum, i. 150
Anfractus, turn, i. 144
Ango, or, i. 250. dis. ii.
22
Angiportus, turn, i. 164.
148
Anguis, i. 57. 99
AngustijE, i. 157
Aniielare, ii. 202. 306
Anien, i. 140
Animabus, i. 64
Animadverto, i. 279. ii.
202
Animal, i. 29. 70. 73. 95,
96. 105. 116. ii. 318
Animare, ii. 303
Animi, ii. 177
Animis, i. 64
Animosus, ii. 303
Animus, ii, 3"3
Anio, i. 72. 140
Annalis,
Index' of Wouds.
Annalis, ;. 40. 103. Ijj.
ii. 178
Anneoto, i. 274
Aniiibal, i. 96. ii. 319
Annularis, i. 6
Annuo, i. 217. ii. 202
Anquiro, i. 2G6. ii. 202
Antac, i. 157
Ante, ii. 35. 54. 61. 182
Antea, ii. 329
Antecedens, i. 7
Antecedere, ii. 202
Antecello, i. 253, bis.3\5.
ii. 27, 202
Antecessus, ii. 141
Anteferre, ii, 27
Antegressus, ii. 138
Anteliac, ii. 149
Anteire, ii. 202
Anterior, ii. 88
Antes, i, 155
Antestare, ii. 202
Antestor, ii. 102
Antevenire, ii. 202
Antevertere, ii. 202
Autisc, i. 157
Antibacchius, ii. 567
Antica, ii. 179
Antidotum, tus, i. 47.
144
Antiochia, ii. 300
Antipater, i. 147
Anlipho, on, i. 140
Antistes, tistita, ii. 81
Antoniaster, ii. 90
Antonius, i. 68
Anuis, i. 123
Anxietas, i. 250
Anxius, i. 250
Anxur, i. 16
Aperio, i. 171. 212. 290,
318. ii. 306
Apes, i. 110. 115. 142.
ii. 90
Apex, i. 52
Apiaster, tnim, ii. 90
Apinae, i. 160
Apiscor, i. 300
Aplustre, trum, i. 105
Apogaji, i. 13
Apoliinaris, i. 104
Apollo, i. 71. 72. 140
Apotlipca, i. 10
Appareo, i. 193
Appelio. i. 180. 254,255.
309. ii. 202
Appendeo, i. 202
Appendix, i. 52
Appendo, i. 230
Appelo, i, 276
Appia, ii. 180
Appingo, i. 243
Appius, ii. 227
Appiaudo, i. 25G
Applico, i. 185
Appono, i. 259
Apprelienilo, i. 227
Apprime, ii. 61
Appropinquare, ii. 202
Appulcius, ii. 288
Appiilit, ii. 178
Apricus, ii. 88
Aprilis, i. G
A|)sens, ii. 268
Aptus, ii. 34
Apud, ii. 35
Apus, i. 49
Apyi, i. 97
Aqualis, i. 39, 92
Aquiia, i. 5. 56
Aquileia, ii. 298
Aquilex, i. 89. ii. 325
Aqnilo, i. 12
Aquonsu^, ii. 249
Ara, i. 25. ii. 285
Arabs, i. 86. 146
Arabus, i. 146
Aranea, um, us, i. 139
Arar, i. 91. 97. 142
Aratrum, ii. 303
Arbilla, ii. 270
Arbitratus, ii. 138
Arbitror, ii. 102
Arbor, i. 18.34. 142. ii.
321
Arbos, i. 43. 142
Arbustum, i. 21
Arbutiini, tus, i. 21
Arcades, ii. 341
Arcados, if. 344
Arcanum, ii. 177
Areas, ii. 322. 340
Arcasin, ii. 338
Arceo, i. 118 196
Arcesso, i. 272, 273. ii.
61.285
Archelaus, ii. 300
Archilecto, tor, tus, i.
140
Archytas, ii. 347
Arcio, i. 273
Arctopliilax, i. 53. ii. 326
Arctos, i. 43. ii. 344
Arctus, ii. 286
Arcus, i. 123. 148
Ardea, i. 15
Ardeo, i. 203. 321. ii.
203
Ardesco, i. 226. 311
Arduius, ii. 89
Arefacio, i. 206
Arena, i. 152
Areopagus, ii. 347
Aresteis, i. 104
Arfinis, ii. 284
Argeiitum, i. 135
Argi, i. 1.30
Argo, i. 14
Argos, i. 17. 130. ii. 344
Argos-hippium, i. 130
Arguo, i. 171, 172. 213.
324. ii. 312
Arguor, i. 297
Argus, i. 130
Argutia, i. 157
Argutioia, i. 157
Argutum, ii. 312
Argyrippa, i. 130
Arida, i. 7
Aries, i. 5. 37. 76. ii. 341
Arjetat, ii. 264
Ariobarzani, i. 120
Aristoteles, i. 120
Aristophanes, i. 121
Arithmetica, ii. 299
Arlabi, ii. 284
Arma, i. 23. 155. ii. 203
Armiger, i. 67. ii. 88
Aromatites, i. 37
Arpinas, i. 94. 109, 110
Arrado, i. 236
Arrhabo, i. 28
Arrideo, i. 202. ii. 203
Arrideri, ii. 203
Arrigo, i. 241
Arripio, i. 177
Ars, i. 49. 111. ii. 177
Arteria, um, i. 136
Artcs, i. 70
Artifex, i. 108, 109. ii.
308
Artocrcas, i. 55
Artns, i. 123, 140. 156.
ii. 286
Arva, vum, i. 136. ii. 177
Arvilia, ii. 270
Arvina, ii. 270
Arundo, i. 27
Arx, i. 51
As, i. 11. 35. 78. Ill
Asa, ii. 284
Ascendo, i. 228. 323, 324
Ascisco, i. 223
Asdrubal, ii. 319
Asinabus, i. 64
Asper, i. 67
Aspergo, i. 249, ii. 203
Aspernari, i. 312. ii. 102
Aspicio, i. 208. 320
i^pides, ii. 341
Aspirare,
Index of Words.
Aspirare, ii. 203
Asporto, i. 231
Assecia, i. 3. ii. 80
Assector, ii. 102
Assensus, ii. 138
Assentio, i, 288. ii. 105.
203
Assentior, i. 312. ii. 105
Assequor, i. 298. ii. 103
Assero, i. 271. 317, 318.
ii. 203
Asservare, ii. 203
Assideo, i. 200. 232
Assiduus, ii. 89
Assilio, i. 289
Assim, ii. 121
Assis, ii. 65
Assisto, i. 279
Assoiio, i. 183
Assuefacio, i. 206. ii. 203
Assuesco, i, 224. ii. 99.
203
Assum, ii. 284
Assumo, i. 256
Assuo, i, 214
Assurgo, i. 243. ii. 203
Asterias, i. 35
Asto, i. 181. ii. 203
Astruo, i. 315
Astus, i. 164, 165
Astyanax, i. 90
Asversa, ii. 284
At, ii. 275
Atavos, i. 63
Atax, ii. 327
Athenas, i. 15. 24, bis.
134. 160
Athos, i. 66. ii. 335. 344
Atinate, i. 94
Atomus, i. 44. 47, 48
Atque, ii. 158. 175
Atramentarium, ii. 180
Atrax, ii. 327
Atri, ii. 302
Atriplex, xum, i. 54
Atrox, i. 1 16
Attagen, i. 56. 137
Attendo, i. 229. ii. 203
Attentus, i. 190
Attero, i. 265, 266
Attexo, i. 282
Atticisso, i. 311
Attineo, i. 190. ii. 203
Attineri, ii. 203
Attinet, ii. 43
Attingo, i. 175.245
Attollo, i. 255, bis
Attraho, i. 25 1
Attribuo, i. 214
Atys, i. 97
Avaritia, i. 138. 152
Auceps, i. 87. ii. 324
Auctio, i. 294
Auctionarius, i. 294
Auctionor, i. 293
Auctor, i. 294. ii. 81.286
Auctoramentum, i. ISO
Auctoratus, i. ISO, 294
Auctoritas, i. 294
Auctoro, i. 180
Auctrix, ii. 81
Auciipo, or, i. 294. ii.
105
Audacia, ii. 285
Audeo, i. 304. ii. 107.
143. 284
Audio, i. 171. 173. 282.
ii. 67. 118. 304. 310.
312
Audit bonus, ii. 181
Auditio, tus, i. 140
Auditum, ii. 312
Avellana, ii. 179
Avello, i. 255
Avenae, i. 150
Aveo, i. 198. ii. 269
Averna, nus, i. 127
Averto, or, i. 278. ii. 101
Aufero, i. 267. ii. 269
Aus:eo, i. 204. 294. ii.
Too
Augmen, turn, i. 141
Augur, ii. 81
Anguro, or, ii. 103. 105
Augusta Veromanduo-
rum, i. 24
Augustodunum, i. 24
Avia, i. 161
Avis, i. 92. 99. 106
Avius, i. 161
Aulai, i. 63. 327. ii. 298
Aulus, ii. 227
Avos, i. 43. 65
Aureiia, ii. ISO
Aureus, ii. 88.
Aurioularis, i. 6
Auriga, ii, 80
Aurufex, ii. 258
Aurum, i. 29. 135. ii. 297
Auscultate, ii. 203
Ausim, ii. 108. 121
Ausom, ii. 284
Auspice, or, ii. 105
Auster, i. 12, 13
Ausus, ii. 139
Autor, ii. 81
Autumnal, i. 96. 139
Autumnus, i. 144. 151
Auxi, i. 320
Auxiliari, ii. 27
Auxiliaris, rius, i. 143
Auxiliatus, ii. 139
Axim, ii. 121
Axis, i. 39. 116
Axitiosi, ii. 121
Axo, ii. 108. 121 ;
Azymus, ii. 347
B.
B, the letter, i. 22
Bacchanalia, i. 113. 163.
ii. 177
Bacchar, ris, i. 31, 32.
96. 142. ii. 320
Bacchius, ii. 367
Bacchus, i. 69
Baciilum, i. 144
Bactra, i. 15. 23. 163
Baculus, uva, i. 144. ii>
305
Balanus, i. 47
Balare, ii. 252
Balbus, ii. 87, 83
BaJineuni, i. 132
BalnejB, i. 131. 157
Balneator, ii. 81
Balneum, i. 131. 132
Balsamum, i. 20
Bdlteus, i. 144
Baptisma, i. 139
Barathrum, i. 154
Barba, i. 152. 157
Barbaria, es, i. 138
Baro, i. 130
Bavbytus, i. 47. 144
Base, ii. 269
Basilica, ii. 177
Basilius, ii. 300
B-»tualia, i. 161, 162
Batuo, i. 217
Beatitas, tudo, i. 140
Bejugje, ii. 296
Bella're, ii. 203
Belli, ii. 144
Bellicum canere, ii. 179
Belligero, i. 312
Bellor, ii. 101
Bellus, ii. 88
Bene, ii. 331
Bencdicere, ii. 219
Benefacio, i. 206. 312
Benemane, ii. 150
Benevolus, ii. 286
Benivolns, ii. 286
Beo, i. 178
Berylius, i. 47
Bes, i. 12. 80. 114. ii.
323
Beta, i. 164
Bibitum,
*?
Index of Words.
Ribitum, ii. 305
Bibhis, i. 47
Bibo, i. '217. 323. ii. 309
Bibracte, i. 06
l!il)rax, i. 90
Biceps, i. 88. ii. 308. 325
Bicolor, ii. 508
Bicorpor, i. )()6
Biclens, i. 7. 50, ii. 179
Biduiim, ii. 308
Bgse, ii. 1.57
Biis, ii. '296
Biis, i. 152
Bilix, i. 168
Bimestre, i. 104
Bimus, ii. 351
Bini, i. 64
Bipennis, i. 7. 40. 103
Bipes, i. 60. 80. 113. ii.
341
Bis, ii. 348
^Biturix, i. 89
Bivium, ii. 308
Blandior, i. '/tiS. 296. ii.
10 >
Blanditia, ef, i. 133. 157
Bianditiis, ii. 139
Blitiis, uin, i. 144
loetis I. 92. 98
Bc.^i.d, I. 72
Bnmbix, i. 52. 57
Bona, i. 161
Bona?, ii, 177
Buui, ii. 65
Bonitas, i. 77
Bonus, i. 6. 69
Borea-, i. 12. 13
Bos i. 5. 82, 83. 133. ii.
81. 296.323. 328
.Brevia, i. 161. ii. 179
Brevis, ii. 179
Briareus, i». 345
Bruges, ii. 270
Bryaxis, J. 90. 92. 119
Bubo, i. 57
Bubula. ii. 177
Bubns, ii. 323
Baccina, uni, i. 136
Biuiiia, ii. 286
Bi.rolica, ii. 179
Bdciila, ii. 328
Bura. ris, i. 91. 138
Burgimdinnes, ii. 319
Butyrum, i. 135. 153
Buxuin.i. 20,21. 141.144
Buxus, i. 141. 144. ii. 268
C.
Cachinno, or, ii. 99. 105
Cacoethps, ii. 341
Cadaver, i. 32
Cadeiilum, iuin, i. 115
Cado, i. 174. 237. 240. ii.
203. 304. 310
Caducus, I. 237
CjECutio, i. 285
Capdo, i. 172. 174. 237.
2 lO. ii. 286. 301. 309,
310
Casdu-n, iiim, i. 1 16
Calare, ii. 203
Cailebs, i. 86. ii. 324
Cerpiones, ii. 280
Caeie, i. 96
Caesa, ii. 177
Ciesar, ii. 320. 339
Ca's.'ironiaL;ns. i 24
Ca,>stus, i, 151. ii 286
Caetera, ii. 46. 182. 286
Cains, ii. 2:1. 206. 284,
298
Calamister, trum, i. 141
Calamistum, tus, i. 144
Calamitatium, i. 1 10
Calcaneus, imp, i. 1 41'
Calcar, i. 31. 74. 95.
113. 139. ii. 320. 339
Calcfo, i. 178
Cairhas, i. 122. 147
Calefacio, i. 206. 312
Caleo, i. 193. 311. ii. 204
Calpxco, i. 226. 311
Cajigo, i. 72
Calix, i. 52. ii. 326
Calliopen, ii. 338
Cailis, i. 39, 40
Callum, i. 144. 154. ii,
204
Callus, i, 144
Calor, i, 34
Caipar, i. J59
Calveo, vesco, i. 311
Calvo, i. 281. 317. 324
Calx, i. 53, 54
Cambio, i. 990
Cameliis, i. 56, 57. ii. 80
Campester, i. 76
Campso, i. 290
Campuin, ii. 177
Canalicula, i. 40
Caiialis, i. 40. 97
Canceili, i. 23. 156. ii. 267
Cancer, i. 32, 33. 67.
147. ii. 267
Candace, ii. 34S
Caiuklahfr, brum, brus,
i. 141 144, ii. 302
Caiideiiti, i. 102
Candico, i. 311
Candn, i. 227
Cani, i. 99. 15G
Canimeii, ii. 267
Caiiis, i. 5. 9;'. 109. ii.81
Canister, trum, i. 141
Canitia, es, i. 138
Cannabis, i 92. 150
Cano, i. 37. 174. 259.
260. 32 1. ii. 181. 204,
267. 3i()
Canon, i. 30
Canorus, ii. 87, 88
Canus, 88
Capenas. ii. 87
Capenate, i. 94
Capero, ii. 100
C:ipesso, i 273, bis.
Capillus, lum, i. 144
Capio, i. 209, 210. 273.
324. li. 286
Capistrum, i. 131
Capital, i. 139
Capo, pus, i. 140
Ca|!pud(.cus, dox, i. 145.
ii. 326, 327
Cappar, i. 96
Ciptivei, i. 65
Capto, i. 312
Captiis, ii. 62
Capulum, ii. 258
Caput, i. 29. 88. 105. ii.
69. 270. 325
Capvs, i. 97. ii. 342
Cacbasus, i. 44, 45. 128.
144
Career, i. 74. 1 18. 151.
15il. ii. 177. 320
Cardo, i. 27. 72
Carduos, i. 150
Careo, i. 188. 190. 192.
ii. 204
Carpx, i. 53
Caritas, i, 152
Carmen, i. 141. if. 267.
319,400
Cainientvmi, i. 141
Cainifex, i. 108, 109
Cunufex, ii. 308
Carn, i. 'J7. 70. 72. 114.
115. 140. ii. 177
Carpn, i. 172, 173. 263.
319. 320. ii. 270
Carrum, rns, i. 144
Cartaginem, ii. 230
CartacinicDses, ii. 273
Caseum, us, i. 144
Casinate, i. 94
Casnii n, ii. 284
Casmrerioe, ii. 276
Cassaiitra, ii. 384
Index of Words.
Cassiopea, ii. 300
Cassis, i. 38. 40. 156.
188
Cassis, idis, i. 81. 138
Cassus, i. 188, ii. 62
Castanea, i. 21. ii. 179
Castellum, i. 161
Castor, ii. 321
Castra, i. 23, 137. 161.
ii. 177
Castriiin, i. 157. 161
Catalvigon, i. 66
Catapulta, ii, 307
Gate, i. 1 98
Calzech II menus, ii. 297
Catilioa, i. 10
Calillam, lus, i. 144
Catinura, nus, i. 144
Catulus, ii. 82
Catus, i. 198
Caudex, i. 52. 54
Cave, ii. 176. 181
Cave cadas, ii. 176
Cave sentiant, ii. 54
Caveo, i. 197
Caveo tibi, ii. 178
Cavere, i. 171, 197. 317.
ii. 67. 504
Cavere inalo, ii. 67. 173
Cavillor, ii. 103
Cavilio, i. 198
Caulae, i. 157
Caulis, i, 39
Caurus, i. '54
Causd, ii. 173. 177
Cadsarius, i. 294
Causidicus, ii. 304. 308
Caiisor, i. 294
Caus.sa, ii. 277
Cecidi, ii. 286. 310
Cecini, i. 324. ii. 310
Cedo, i. 237. 238. 240.
321, 322. ii. 121. 204.
334, 335
Celeber, i. 75. 103
Celebre, i. 103. ii. 268
Celer, i. 107. 118. 142.
ii. 86. 277
Ceierare, ii. 99
Celere, ii. 268
Celeres, i. 1 18
Celerissiiniis, ii. 86
Celes, i. 79
Celeste, i. 104
Cello, i. 253, lis
Celo, ii. 45
Celtiber, i.67.ii. 318. 339
Cenas, ii. 284
Cenchiis, i. 57
Ceasco, i. 190, ii*
Censeor, ii. 101
Censio, i. 190
CiMisit.r, i. 190
Ceiisudi, us, i. 144
Centaiirea, ii. 300
Centaurus, i. 14
C<'ntt-iia, ii. 177
Centies, ii. 236
Centimaiius, i. 148
Centum, ii. 273
Centum, unus, ii. 85
Ct-ntussis, i. 11.91
Cepa, pe, i. 136
Cepet, ii. 252
Cepi, i. 324. ii. 286
Ceiffi, i. 150
Cerasus, i. 18, 144
Cercops, ii. 325
Cerealia, i. 163
Cerealis, i. 104
Ceremooiae, i. 157
Ceres, i. 79, ii. 322. 341
Cerliere erat, ii. 177
Cerno, i. 261, 262. 310
Certo, ii. 178. 204
Cervicium, i, 1 15
Cervix, i. 52. 152
Cespes, i. 36
Cessatur, ii, 141
Cessatus, ii. 141
Cessores, ii. 267
Cestus, i. 151. ii. 286
Cete, tus, i. 23, 24. 161,
164. ii. 331
Cette, ii. 121
Ceveo, i. 198
Ceu vero, ii. 154
Chalybs, i. 50
Cliam, i. 164
Chaos, i. 22, 23. ii. 344
Character, i. 76
Charilaus, ii. 500
Charites, i. 81. ii. 323
Charta, i. 26
Chelys, i. 18. 59. ii. 342
Cherubim, i. 22, 23
Chiragra, ii. 300
Chirographus, i. 144
Chlamys, i. 18. 39. 81,
121. 139
Chcenix, i. 52
Chorea, ii, .300
Choridon, ii. 338
Chorona, ii. 280
Chorus, i. 68
Chremes, i. 63. 79. 120.
122
Chrysolithus, i. 47
Chrysoprasius, i. 47
Chytrapus, i. 49
Cibica, ii. 269
Cibus, i. 148
Cicatrix, i. 52
Cicer, i. 32
Cieero, i. 71. ii. 319
Cichorea, um, i. 137
Cicurare, ii. 348
Cicur, ii. 88
Cicuris, ii. 548
Cieo, i. 199
Cilix, ii. 327
Cimex. i. 53
Cimmericon, i. 66
Cimmeron, ii. 338
Ciner, i. 70. ii. 277
Cingo, i. 240. 320
Cingulum, us, i. 144
Cinis, i. 39, 40. 81, 100.
ii. 277
Cinnamomum, i, 21
Cintus, ii. 272
Cio, i. 200
Circa, ii. 35. 182
Circa, ce, i. 136 ,
Circenses, ii. 178
Circiter, ii. 37, bis. 54
Circuitus, ii. 141
Circum, ii. 35. 152. 35S
Circumcido, i. 238
Circumcurro, i. 269
Circumeo, ii. 118
Circumequitare, ii. 43
Circumflecto, i. 274
Circumpango, i. 245
Circumplicatus, i. 186
Circumsecus, ii. 152
Circumscribo, i. 218
Circumsepio, i. 289
Circmnspicio, i. 208
Circumvenio, i. 286
Circundare, i. 181, ii.
204
Circunduco, i. 221
Circus, ii. 152.358
Cis, ii. 36. 342. 348
Cistella, ii. 90
Cistellula, ii. 90
Cistula, ii. 90
Citimus, ii. 348
Cite, ii. 3S4
Citra, ii. 36
Citraque, ii. 348
CitresB, ii. 179
Citro, ii. 348
Citum, ii. 31 1, bis
Civica, ii. 177
Civis, i.4. 93. ii. «1
Civitas, i. 18. 24. 119,
111
OJUK, ii. 289
Clades,
*■
Index of Words.
Clades, i. 78. 109
Clam, ii.39. 42
Clamare, ii. 99
Clainilo, i, 312
Clanculum, ii. 39
Clango, i. 250, bis
Clareo, i. 191
Clase, ii. 264
Classiciim, ii. 1'79
Classis, i. 81. 99
Claiido, i. 234. 321
Claudus, ii. 87, 88
Ciavicula, lus, i.l39
Clavis, i. 92. 96
Claustrum, i. 131
Cleopatra, ii. 348
Olepo, i. 263
Oliberta, ii. 289
Cliens, ii. 80
Clienta, ii. 80
Climax, ii. 325
Clio, ii. 300
Clitella3, i. 158. ii. 177
Clivum, vus, i. 144
Cludo, i. 235
Clunis, i. 39, 40. ils
Cluo, i. 217
Clypeus, j. 144. 217
Cneiis, ii. 227
Coago, ii, 296
Coaiitus, i. 193
Coccyx, i. 57
Cochlea, i, 26
Cochlear, i. 139. 141
Codes, ii. 80
Coda, ii. 284
Codex, i. 52. 54
Caido, ii. ."304
Ccelicola, i. 64. ii. 80
CoRlites, i, 116, 117
Coelitus, i. 156
Ccehim, lus, i. 117. 129.
144. 154. 156. ii. 177.
286
Coementa, turn, i. 156
Coenatiir, ii. 143
Ccenatiirio, i. 291.312
Coenatns, ii. 143
Coenum, i. 154. 231
Coeo, i. 284. ii. 99. 204
CoFjpio, i. 210. ii. 119.
181. 286
Coeptus, ii. 119. 141
Coeravit, ii. 261. 284
Coerceo, i. IBS. 196. ii.
306
Copiiare, ii. 204
Cognitnm, ii, 305. 312
Cognomen, i. 104. ii. 228
Cognosce, i. 224, 225
Copo, i. 173. 247. ii. 296
Cohaerco, i. 203
Cohibeo, i. J 88
Cohors, i. 114, 115
Cohortor, ii. 103
Coiravit, ii. 261
Colax, ii. 327
Colchis, OS, us, i. 16
Coiis, i. 39
Collido, i. 235. ii. 304
Colligo, i, 248
Coilis, i, 39. 109
Colloqiior, i. 297. ii, 204
Colliiceo, i. -205
Collum, us, i. 144
Colluvies, vio, i. 140
Colo, i. 252. 309, 318.
ii. 310
Color, los, i. 43
Colossus, i. 47
Colostra, irum, i. 137
Colpam, ii, 255
Columba, hus, ii. 82
Colus, i. 43, 44, 45, 143
Coiustra, truni, i, 137
Combibo, i, 218
Comburo, i. 270
Comedo, i. 228. ii. 81.
306
Cometa, tos, i, 25, 26.
57, 138. ii, 178
Cominus, ii. 149
Comitatus, ii. 139
Comitia, i, 161
Comito, or, ii. 102, 105
Commeatus, i, 179
Commentarium, us, i.
144
Commentatus, ii. 139.
141
Commeo, i. 179
Commcntum, ii, 119
Comminjscor, i, 300, bis.
ii, 119
Commisceo, i, 190
Commisi resco, ii. 105
Committo, i. 275, ii. 204
Conimodare, ii. 204
Commodum, ii. 180 '
Commoncfacio, i, 206,. ii.
46
Commoneo, i, 188. ii. 44.
46
Commorior, i. 302
Cominunicor, ii. 102
Como, i. 256. 319, 320
Compages, go, i, 140
Compar, i. 93. ii, 339
Comparco, i. 222
Compareo, i. 193
Compcdio, i. 313
Compediom, i. 115
Conipello, i. 254
Comperio, or, i. 290, 313.,
JI8. ii. 102
Compertus, i. 291
Compes, i. 60. 80. 158
Compesco, i, 224, 225.
318
Competo, i. 276
Compingo, i. 245, 247.
324
Compita, i, 161
Compitalia, i. 1 18
Compitum, us, 144. 161
CotHplaceo, i, 192
Complaudo, i. 236
Complector, i, 277. 296.
ii. 103
Compleo, i. 199. ii. 65,
204
Complexus, }. 277. ii. 139
Complico, i, 185
Complutus, i, 216
Conipono, i. 259. ii, 205
Compos, i. 43, 82. 107,
ii, 62. 323, 34'4
Compoto, i. 182
Comprehendo, i, 227
Comprimo, i. 258
Compromissum, i. 276
Compromitto, i, 276
Compungo, i. 248
Conago, ii. 296
Conatus, ii, 139
Coucanui, i. 260
Concedo, i. 258. ii, 205
Concido, i. 237, 238, 240
Conciliarc, ii. 205
Concinnitudo, tus, i, 140
Concino, i. 174. 259,260.
318
Concio, i, 27
Coiicionari, ii, 99
Concipio, i. 210
Conclave, vis, vium, i.
139
Concludere, ii. 205
Coiicoquo, i. 265
Concors, i, 70. 88. 143
Concrepo, i. 1 84
Concresco, i. 223. 225
Concretns, i. 225. ii, 141
Concurro, i, 269, ii, 205
Concutio, i, 212
Condamnare, ii. 252
Condeuinare, ri, ii. 62.
205. 252
Condepso, i. 273
Condico, i. 220. ii. 205
Coadia
Index of Words.
Condio, i. 283
Condo, i. 232
Condoceo, i. 189
Cundoleo, i. 193
Conduco, i. 221. ii. 205
Confectus, ii. 62
Confercio, i. 288
Confero, i. 267. ii. 205.
C'onfessior, ii. 89
Confessus, ii. \39
Conficio, i. 207
Confid.), i. 305. li. 205
Configo, i. 242
Confmgo, i. 244
Confiteor, i. 177.297. ii.
205
ConHacuit, ii. 284
Conflictare, ri, ii. 205
Confligo, i. 241
Confluens, i. 6. ii. 177
Confluo, i. 215
Confodio, i. 209 '
Confringo, i. 246
Confundo, i. 234
Congener, i. 107
Congero, i. 268, ii. 205
Consfredior, i. 301. ii.
205
Congrego, i. 89
C(jngruo, i. 216. ii. 205
Conia, i. 327
Conjicio, i. 203
Conjuiigo, i. 241. ii. 197.
205
Coniux, i. 3. 70. 89. ii.
81. 180.525
Conlega, ii. 234
Connecto, i. 275
Connitor, i. 299
Conniveo, i. 198.317
Connubium, i. 219. ii.
305
Connubo, i. Q19
Conopeuna, ii. 348
Conqueror, i. 298. ii. 205
Couquiescere, ii. 205
Conquiuisci), i. 225, bis
Conquiro, i. 266
Conscendo, i. 228. ii. 18.
178
Conscindo, i. 234. 240
Conscio, i. 283
Conscisco, i. 224
Conscribo, i. 218
Consectus, ii. 103
Consecutus, ii. 139
Consentio, i. 288. ii. 203.
205
Consepio, i. 289
ConsequenSj i. 7
Consequor, i. 298. ii.
103. 205
Consero, i. 271, bis. 272.
317. ii. 205
Consideo, i. 200. ii. 206
Consido, i. 233.240.313
Consilior, ii. 102
Consilium, ii. 177
Consisto, i. 260. 279. 310
Consol, ii. 255
Consolatos, ii. 139
Consolor, ii. 103
Consonans, i. 7
Consono, i. 183
Censors i. 107. 109
Consortio, um, i. 109. 140
Conspergo, i. 249
Consnexi, i. 320
Conspicor, i. 209. ii. 103
Conspiratiis, ii. 142
Constare, i. 181. 310. ii.
99. 206
Consterno, i. 261, 262
Consternor, i. 299
Constituo, i, 214
Constrepo, i. 264'
Constringo, i. 244
Construo, i. 215
Consiiescere, ii. 206
Consul, i. 37. ii. 319
Consulii, i. 253. ii. 206
Cousulo tibi, ii. 180
Consultus, ii. 88
Consumo, i. 257
Consuo, i. 214
Consurgo, i. 243
Contages, io, ium, i. 27.
140, 141. 152
Conteinno, i. 260
Contendo, i. 229. ii, 206
Contentus, ii. 63
Contero, i. 266
Contestatum, i. 294
Contestor, i. 294
Contexo, i. 282
Conticeo, i. 196
Conticesco, i. 312
Continens, i. 7. 102. ii.
180
Contineo, i. 189
Contingo, i. 177. 245. ii.
206
Continoeis, ii. 284
Contono, i. 184
Contorqueo, i. 204
Contra, ii. 36. 329
Contraho, i. 25 1
Contribuo, i. 214
Controversus, ii. 348
Cootundo, i. 230
Contuor, i. 297. 309
Conturbare, ii. 179
Couvaleo, i. 192
Conveho, i. 251
Convena, ae, ii. 80
Convenio, i. 286. ii. 20G
Converritorem, i, 270
Converto, i. 278. ii. 101
Convicium, ii. 286
Conviva, ii. 81
Convivo, i. 280
Convoivo, i. 281
Coo[jeru'sse, ii. 296
Copia, i. 158. ii. 177
Copiosus, ii. 63
Cop a lor, ii. 102
Co<ino, i. 265
Cor, i. 34 76. SB, 112,
ii. 339
Coram, ii. 39
Corax, i. 56. 58
Corbis, i. 40
Corbita, ii. 343
Corculunn, i. 10
Corinthus, i. 14. 17
Coriolaus, i. 17
Corium, us, i. 144
Cornipes, i. 80
Comix, i. 5^6
Cornu, i. 22. 141. 144,
164
Cornupeta, ii. 308
Cornus, i. 141. 144. 148
Corona, ii. 177. 280
Corpus, i. 93. 105. if,
324
Corrado, i. 236
Corripio, i. 211
Corrodo, i. 236
Corrumpo, i. 264
Corruo, i. 215
Cortex, i. 53, 54
Corus, i. 54
Corydon, ii. 338
Corymbus, i. 47
Cos, i. 42, 112
Costum, us, i. 47. 144
Cotys, i. 97
Coxendix, ii. 327
Crater, i. 76. 119. 138, ii.
339
Crates, i. 158. 165
Craticula, i. 165
Cratim, i. 92
Creber, ii. 348
Crebre, bro, ii. 348
Creditum, i. 232
Credo, i. 232
Creduim, ii. 108
Creduo, i. 233
Oreo,
Index or WoUds.
Creo, i. 178
Crepidas, ii. 300
Crepo, i. 18-i. 318
Cre{iuiidm, i. 161
Ci-ei-co, i. 223. 225. 31CL
317
Creticus, i. 50
Crelio, i. 261, 262
Cretiiin, i. 2'25. 261, ft62.
510
Cretus, i. 225
Crevi, i. 261. 310
Crimen,!. 177. 263
Criminor, ii. 103
Crinis, i, 38.-40.263
Cris;ius, ii. 83
Ciocito, ii. 348
Crocum, cus, i. 45. 144.
154
Croton, i. 16
Crucio, Ii. 100
Cruor, i. 151
Crus, i. 113
Crux, i. 51. 55. 113. ii.
327
Crystal lina, ii. ISO
Crvstallum, lus, i. 44.47.
144
Ctesipho, i. 74
Cubile, i. 93. 116
Cubitale, i. 139
Cubitum, us, i. 144
Cubo, i. 183. 187. 220.
318
Cuculus, ii. S48. 365
Cucumer, mis, i. 33. 39.
70. 81. 92
Cudo, i. 227,228
Cnjate, ii. 87
Caicuimodi, i. 165
Ciiimodl, i. 1 65
Ciiiici, ii. 272
Cuivis, ii. 342
Cujusmodi, i. 165
Culcita, tra, ii. 286
Culeum, us, i. 144
Culex, i. 53
Culpa, i. 152
Cum. ii. 33. 70. 72. 94.
149. 153. 182. 166.
271
Cumbo, i. 220.318
Cuiiabiila, i. 158. 161
Cuu.nB, i. 158
Cunctatus, ii. 139
C'inicto, or, ii. 105
Cunlic, i. 225
Cupiditas, do, i. 28. 72.
140
Cupid us, ii. 34
Cupio, i. 211. ii. 27. 34.
139. 206
Cupitutn, ii. 312
Cupressus, i. 19, 20. 148
Cur, ii. 149. 178. 33?
Cura, i. 231
(nrapalatii, i. 9
Curatiorum, ii. IS
Cure, ii. 149
Curo, ii. 9. 66. 139
Curro, i. 175. 269, 270.
323. ii. 304
Currum, us, i. 123. 144.
ii. 129
Cursum est, ii. 141
Curulis, i. 7. ii. 304
Cuspis, i. 81
Custodiae, i. 9
Gustos, i. S2. ii. 81. 323
Cutis, i. 92. 152
Cybeles, ii, 340
Cyclops, ii. 300. 502. 325
Cygnus, ii. 302
Cynips, i. 87
Cynthius, i. 68
Cyprus, i. 15
Cyrenas, en, i. 160
Cyrus, i. 65
Cytliera, i. 163
Cytherea, ii. 348
Cytheron, ii. 359
Cytisus, i. 47
D.
Da, ii. 181
Dactykis, i. 22. ii. 366
Dama, i. 57. ii. 83
Damnare, ii. 62. 206
Damiias, i, 165
Dammim, ii. 69. 268
Dainpnuin, ii. 26S
Dan, ii. 338
Daniel, i. 37. ii. 338
Dapes, i. 158
Daphnis, i. 97
Daphiius, i. 17
Daps, i. 158. 166 '
Dardanida;, nis, i. 64
Dare obiivioni, ii 206
Dares, i.79. ii. 323
Darius, ii. 300
Datum, ii. 177. 310
David, i. 72
De, ii. 39. 70, 71, 72.
182
Dea, Deabus, i. 64
Deana, ii. 252
Debaccor, i. 294
Debco, i. 188, ii. 207
Debil, i. 141
Decedo, i. 2.1!?. ii. 207
Decern, ii. 85. 2.37
Df cember, i. 75. ii. 242
Decerno, i. 261. ii. 207
Decerpo, i. 263
Decessus, ii 142
Decet, ii. 26.31,32, 122,
123, 124
Decido, i. 253. li. 207
Decies, ii. 236. 340
Decima, i. 158. ii. 179
Decitnns, ii. 85. 88. 227
Decipio, i. 210
Decipula, urn, i. 137
Deciinaic, ii. 207
Decoctor, ii. 179
Decoquo, i. 265. ii. 100.
179
Decor, i. 34. 74. 83, 84.
142. ii. .321
Decresco, i. 223. 225
Decretus, i. 225. ii. 142
Decubo, i. 183
Decunx, i. 12
Decurro, i. 175. 269
Decursus, ii. 142
Decus, i. 84. 142. ii. 307.
324
Decussis, i. 11.91
Decutio, i. 212
Dedecui, ii. 124
Dedecus, i. 84. ii. 307
Dedere, ii. 207
Dedisco, i. 224
Dedititius, i. 232
Dedo, i. 232
Dedoceo, i. 189
Deduco, i. 221. ii. 305
Deesse, ii. 27. 305
Dofectus, ii. 62
Defendo, i. 227. ii. 207
Defensor Muli6r, i. 34
Defero, i. 268. ii. 207
Deferveo, i. 193
Defessus, i. 226. 301
Defetigari, ii. 252
Defetiscdr, i. 2;!6. 301
Dcficio, i. 207. ii, 207
Defieri, ii, 120
Defigo, i. 242
Definire, ii. 207
Dofit, ii. 120
Dcflagratus, ii. 142
Dfflecto, i. 274. ii. 207
Dcflco, i. 199
Defluo, i. 215
Defodio, i. 209
Defrico, i. 136
Defriiiffo, i, 246
Defrutum,
Index of Words.
Defrutnm, i. 299
Defugio, i. '209
Defunjror, i. 29G
Degener, i. 1)3. 107. ii.
88
Degenerare, ii. 207
Degliibo, i. 218
Dego, i. 2t7. 1)24,
Dehiiic, ii. 305
Dehisco, i. 226
Deico, ii. 2fil
Deicundo, ii. 284
Dejero, ii. 252. 305
Dejicio. i. 208
Dein, ii. 149. 333
Deiiiceps, ii. 149
Deinde, ii. U9. 338
Deinpostea, ii. 157
Deiopea, ii. 300
Deiphobus, ii. 299
Belabor, i. 299
Delectat, ii. 31
Delector, ii. 71
Deleo, i. 199
Deleor, i. 263
Delicat, ii. 234
Delicia, ae, es, um, i. 131.
137, 138. 158. ii. 285
Deligo, i. 249
Delineo, i. 179
Delino, i. 262
Delinquo, i. 265. il. 207
Deliqueo, i. 191
Delirare, ii, 99
Deliteo, i. 193
Delius, i. 68
Delos, i, 15. 31. 66
Delphi, i. 15. 31. 134
Delphin, phis, i. 30. 57.
73. 82. 141. ii. 319.
340
Delubrum, ii. 302
Deludo, i. 235
Demerge, i. 249
Demeto, i. 275
Deminuo, ii. 252
Deinipho, i. 74. 140
Demitto, i. 275
Demo, i. 256. 320
Deraolio, or, ii. 103. 105
Demuto, ii. 101
Denarium, us, i. 144. ii.
179
Dens, i. 50. Ill
Denser), so, i. 309
Depango, i. 245
Depasco, or, i. 224. Ii.
105
Depastus, ii. 139
Depecto, i. 274
Depeliere, ii. 207
Dependeo, i. 202
Dependo, i. 230
Deperire, ii. 207
Depescui, i, 318
Depingo, i. 243
Dcplorare, ii. 207
Depono, i. 259, 260. ii.
207
Deposco, i. 175. 224
Deprecatus, ii. 139
Deprecor, i. 294. ii, 20S
Deprehendo, i. 227
Deprimo, i. 258
Depromo, i. 256
Depso, i. 273
Der, i. 181
Derelinquo, i. 265
Derideo, i, 202
Derogare, ii. 203
Descendo, i. 228
Descisco, i. 224
Describo, i. 218
Deseco, i. 186
Desero, i. 272
Deservio, i. 283
Deses, i. 80
Desideo, i. 200
Desidia, es, i. 39
Desido, i. 233
Desilio, i. 289
Desino, i, 262, ii. 99.
208
Desipio, i. 211. ii, 22
Desisto, i. 279. ii. 208
Desitus, ii. 142
Desperate, ii. 99. 203
Desperno, i. 261
Despicatus, ii. 139
Despicio, i. 209
Despondeo, i. 176.202.
ii. 208
Desterno, i. 261
Desterto, i. 278
Destituo, i. 214
Destitutus, ii. 62
Destrictus, ii. 286
Destringo, i. 244
Destruo, i. 215
Desuesco, i. 224
Desumo, i. 256
Detendo, i. 229
Deter, ii. 83
Detergeo, i. 203
Deterge, i. 250
Deterior, ii. 88
Detero, i. 266
Deterreo, i. 188
Deterrimus, ii. 88
Detestatus, ii, 139
Detestor, ii. 1 03
Detexo, i. 282
Detineo, i. 169
Detondeo, i. 174. 176.
201
Detorqueo, i. 2;U
Detraho, i. 251. ii. 208
Detrudo, i. 2^6
Detnrbari, ii. 208
Deucalion, ii. 300
Devento, i. 2S6
Devergo, i. 250
Devia, i. 161
Devincio, i. 2S7
DeurAr, i. 12
Devolve, i. 281
Dovoveo, i. 197
Deus, i. 4. 68, 69. ii. 598
Dextans, i. 12
Dexter, i. 67. ii. 83
De.xterior, i. 67
Dextimus, ii. 88
Di, i. 69
Diacon, nus, i. 141
Diadema, i. 25. 118,
119
Dialectica, ii. 177
Diameter, i. 43
Diana, ii. 298
Diaria, i. 161
Dica, i. 166
Dicax, ii.304
Dicem, ii. 252
Dici, ii. 13
Dicis, i. 166
Dice, i. 172. 179. 220.
299. 308, 309. ii. 113.
181.304
Dicont, ii. 284
Dictamnus, um, i. 144
Dictamus, i. 144
Dicto, ito, i. 312
Dicundo, ii. 284
Didici, ii. 310
Dido, i. 59. 72. 122, 232
Dies, i. 36. 33. 124, 125.
ii. 177. 298
Dies lustrici, ii. 226
Diespiter, i. 143. 167
Differ, ii. 339
Differcio, i. 283
Differe, i. 267. ii. 203
Difficul, lis, i. 141
Diffido, i. 304
Diffindo, i. 234
Diffiteor, i. 297. 303
Diffiuo, i. 215. ii. 62
Diffugio, i. 209
Digero, i. 268
Digesta, ii. 173
Digno,
Index of Words.
Digno, or, ii. 70. 103. 105
Digredior, i. 301
DignatUf^, ii. 13i)
Dignitas, ii. 322
Diiimis, ii. 34. 63
T)ii, i. 1'24. iL 177
Dlbbor, i. 299
Dilargitus, ii. 139
Dilisente, i. 101
Diligo, i. 249. 320
Diluceo, i. 205
Diliio, i. 213
Diluvies, vium, i. 141
Dimetior, i. 302
Dimicaie, i. ) S4. ii. 208
Diminiio, i. 213
Dimitlo, i. 275
Dinacium, i. 3. 10
Dingua, ii. 284
Diphtongus, i. 7. 44. 66
Diraj, i. 158
Dirigo, i. 242
Dirimo, i 257. ii. 305
Diripio, i. 211. ii. 305
Dirumpo, i. 264
Diruo, i. 216
Dis, i. 69
Dis, i. 81. 111. 117. ii.
323. 342
Discedo, i. 239. ii. 34
Disceptare, ii. 208
Disceino, i. 262
Discerpo, i. 173. 263
Disco, i. 175. 224. 225.
311. ii. 67
Discors, i. 88. 143
Djscrepo, i. 184. ii. 208
Discrucior, ii. 22. 208
Discumbo, i. 219
Discurro, i. 269
Discutio, 1.212
Disertus, ii. 304, 305
Disjungo, i. 241. ii. 67
Dispaiido, i. 228
Dispar, i. 94. ii. 88. 339
Dispendo, i. 228
Dispergo, i. 249
Dispesco, i. 224, 225
Dispicio, i. 209
Displicritus, i. 186
Displiceo, i. 192
Dispono, i. 259
Dispuiigo, i. 248
Dispiilare, ii. 99. 208
Disquiro, i. 266
Disrumpo, i. 264
Di«enlio, i. 283. ii. 208
Dissppio, i. 289
Dissero, i. 186. 271,272.
317
Dissideo, i. 200. ii. 208
Dissolve, i. 281
Dissono, i. 183
Dissuadco, i. 203
Dissuo, i. 214
DisU-iirto, i. 229
Distiiico, i. 189
Distingue, i. 242
Di>to, i. 181. ii. 67
Distorqueo, i. 204
Distraho, i. 251, ii. 67.
113
Distriluio, i. 214
Districtus, ii. 286
Distriiigo, i. 244
Diu, ii. 144. 252
Dives, ii. 86
Divissiones, ii. 277
Diviti.-E, i. 158
Divitior, ii. 88
Do, i. 176. 180.232. ii.
29. 67. 120. 206. 309.
313. 334
Doceo, i. 189. ii. 45. 66.
208
Docilissime, ii. 87
Docilissimus. li. 87
Doctius, ii. 144
Dodrans, i. 12
Dogma, J. 25. 119, 147.
ii. 322
Doleo, i. 193. 312. ii. 208
Dulops, ii. 324
Dolor, los,i. 34. 43
Dolus, i. 43
Doinatio, i. 187
Domi, ii. 144
Doiiiinabus, i. 64
Doniinor, i. 294. ii. 103.
203
Dominus, i. 65, 66, 68,
69
Domo, i. 171. 184. 187.
313
Domus, i. 44. 123. 133.
ii. 47. 144. 177. 209
Donare, ii. 71.208
Donaria, urn, i. I6l
Doneo, ii. 154. 356
Dor, i. 181. ii. 120
Dormieiidus, ii. 141
Dorniisco, i. 311
Dormito, i..312
Dormiturio, i. 291
Dorsum, sus, i. 144
Dos, i. 42. 82. 112. ii. 323
Draco, ii. 335
Dryasin, dlbus, i. 122
Du"bitare, ii. 99. 208
Ducenti, i. 64, ii. 308
Diicere uxorem, ii. 177
Ducis, i. 70. 89. 91. ii.
304. 357
Duco, i. 89. 221. 308.
520. ii. 29. 66. 209.
.'304. 336
Dudum, ii. 150
Duellum, i. 69
Duernio, i. 27
Duim, ii. 108
Dulcedo, i, 27
Dulcis, i. 81. 103. XP5,
106. ii. 298
Dum, ii. 154
Dummodo, ii. 334
Diimus, i. 19
Duo, i. 64. 69. ii. 49. 84.
90. 334
Duodetriginta, ii. 85
Duodeviginti, ii. 85
Duplex, i. 90. ii. 88
Duplices, ii. 179
Duplico, i. 185
Dupondium, ii. 308
Durantia, i. 13
Durare, ii. 99
Duria, i. 13
Duritia, es, i. 138
Dusmosae, ii. 276
Duum, i. 69
Dux, i. 89. 91. ii. 81,
304. 327
Dyndimus, i. 127
E.
E, i. 8. ii. 39. 50. 69.
182
Ea, ii. 92. 180
Ebenum, i. 20, 21
Ebibo, i. 218
Ebianditus, ii. 139
Eborete, ii. 179
Ebur, i. 31. 77. ii, 321
Eburones, ii. 519
Ecastor, ii. 286
Ecbataiia, i. 15
Ecca, ii. 95
Ecce, ii. 73. 95. 157. 181
Eccillum, ii. 95
Eccistum, ii. 95
Eccos, ii. 95
Eccum, ii. 95
Echo, i. 2». ii. 335
Eciam, ii. 276
Ecqui, ii. 92
Edepol, ii. 150. 181. 285
Edico, i. 221
Edim, ii. 1 17
Edisco, i. 224
Edo,
Index of Words.
E«!o, i. 228. 232. ii. 116,
117. 364
Edomo, i. 1S4
Ediico, i. 221
Effatus, ii. 139
EfFectum, tiis, i. 143, 144
Ettero, i. 267. ii. 209
Efficio, i. 207
Effi-ia. es.i. 133
Effingo, i. 244
Effleo, i. 199
EfBigi, ii. 252
Effl-o, i. 215
Effodio, i. 209
Effor, ii. 120
EflFringo, i. 176. 246
Effugio, i. 209
Effulgeo, i. 205
Effundo, 1. 234
Egenus, ii. 62, 87, 88
Egeo, ii. 63. 209
Egero, i. 269
Egi, i. 324
Eginan', ii. 338
Ego, ii. 92. 334
Egon', ii. 338
Egredior, i. 301. ii. 209
Egregius, ii. 89
Eheu, ii. 298
Eia, ii. 328
Eidem, ii. 284
Eii, ii. 266. 298
Eiius, ii. 265. 284
Ejicio, i. 208. ii. 210
Ejulo, lor, ii. 99. 105
Ejusmodi, i. 165
Elabor, i, 299, ii. 209
Elaborare, ii. 209
Electrum, i. 149. ii. 348
Elegantia, i. 152
Eiegeia, ii. 298
Elegia, ii. 300
Elephantus, i. 142
Elephas, i. 35. 56. 78.
142. ii. 82, 83
Eleusis, i. 82
Elicio, i. 208, 318
Eligo, i. 248. ii. S04
Ellos, lum, ii. 95
EIoco, ii. 150
Eloqsientia, i. 152
Eloquor, i. 298
Elpis Vectius, i. H)
Eluceo, i. 205
Elucubro, or, ii. 105
Ekido, i. 235
Elugeo, i. 204
Eluo,i. 213
EJysii, siuni, i. 129, 130
Einentior^ i. 296
Emereo, or, i. 1 92
Emergo, ii. 99. 209
Emeritus, ii. 142
Emersus, ii. 142
Etnicatio, i. 187
Emico, i. 184. 137
Emineo, i. 191. 193. ii.
209
Euiitto, i. 275
Emo, i. 257. 324. ii. 66
Enjolo, i. 252
Emorior, i. 302
Emoveo, i. 197
Emturio, i. 291
Emulgeo, i. 203
Emungo, i. 241. ii. 209
En, ii. 73. 95. 157. 131.
338
Endo, ii. 284
Eneco, i. 186
Enitor, i. 298. ii. 103
Ens, ii. 116
Eosiculus, i. 8
Ensis, i. 8.39. 109
Enubo, i. 219
Enucleo, i. 179
Enuntiare, iL 209
Eo, i. 88. 283. 306, ii.
US. 181, 182. 214
Eo, ii. 18. 94. 145. 178,
180. 334
Eor, ii. 133
Eos, i. 43. ii. 299
Eous, ii. 299
Ephebeum, ii. 236
Ephesus, i. 17
Epidaurnm, rus, i. 16
Epigrammaton, i. 122
Epirota, tes, i. 1 38
Epistola, ii. 284. 286
Epistula, ii. 284. 286
Epitoma, me, mes, i. 25.
63. 136. ii. 83
Epodus, i. 43
Epol, ii. 150. 181
Epos, i. 42
Epoto, i. 182
Epula, Ice, lum, i, 131.
158
Equa, i. 5. 64
Eques, i. 80. ii. 80
Equidcm, ii. 307
Equuleus, ii. 90
Equulus, ii. 90
Equus, i. 5. ii. 90
Eradico, ii. 349
Erado, i. 236
Eremus, i. 7. 44, 48. ii,
300. 359
Erga, iL 36 ,
Ergo, ii. 18. 334
Ergo igitur, ii. 157
Erigo, i. 242
Eritiiiis, i. 92. 122. ii. 341
Eripere, ii. 209
Eris, i. 97
Ero, ii. 277
Errabundus, ii. 88
Erratur, ii. 141
Erratus, ii. 141
Erubesco, i. 226. ii. 209
Eructare, ii. 99
Erudio, ii. 45
Erumpo, i. 264, ii. 99.
102.209. 305
Erumpor, ii. 102
Erunt, ii. 549
Eruo, i. 216
Erynnis, i. 92. 122. ii,
341
Erysipelas, i. 35
Eryx, i. 13. ii. 326
Es, ii. 115. 181. 340.364
Esc it, ii. 115
Ejcunt, ii. 115
Esquiliae, i. 158
Esse, ii. 13. 23. 27. 29.
35. 115. 137. 181. 364
Essenius, ii. 364
Esset, ii. 364
Est, ii. 13. 23. 181. 277.
364
Esto, ii. 175. 181
Estod, ii. 284
Estur, ii. 117
Esum, ii. 115
Esurio, i. 291. 312
Etesiaj, i. 12, 13
Ethesin, i. 123
Ethica, ii. 286
Etiam, ii. 1 50
Etiamsi, ii. 153
Etsi, ii. 153
Etsiquamvjs, ii. 157
Evado, i. 236. ii. 209
Evander, drus, i. 142
Evandrius, ii. 38
Evasti, i. 178
Evasus, ii. 142
Eveho, i. 251
Evello, i. 255
Evenio, i. 286
Eventum, tus, i. 143, 144
Evergere, ii. 100
Eugenius, ii. 300
Evigilatus, ii. 142
Eumenides, i. 158
Eunuchus sua, i. 7
Evolvo, i. 281
Euphrates, i. 12, 147
Euripides,
I^JDEX OF Words.
Euripiiios, i. 147
Kurus, i. 1'-'. ii. 297
Eustocbium, i. .3. 10
Ex, ii. 3»,39. 50. 69. 182
Exacuo, i. 213
Examussim, ii. 150
Exaiiguis, i. GO. 70
Exante, ii. 152
Exarileo, i, 203. ii. 209
Exardest-Hve, ii. 209
Exauctoratus, i. 180
Exaudio, i. 173. 282
Ex(al|)o, i. 264
Exce.lo, i. 239. ii 43
Excelleiiti, i. 101
Excelk-o, lo, i. 253. 509.
SI 8. ii. 27
Excelsus, i. 253
Excerpo, i. 263
Excido, i. 237,233
Excipio, i. 210
Excliido, i. 235
Exclusissimus, ii. 89
Excolo, i. 252
Excoquo, i. 265
Excors, i. 88
lyicresco, i. 223. 225
Excietus, i. 225. ii. 1 42
Excubiae, i. 9. 153. 183
Excudo, i. 227, 228
I-lxcuipo, i. 264
Excurro, i. 175. 269
Excusaie, ii. 209, 210
Excusum, ssum, i. 228
Excutio, i. 212
Execratus, ii. 139
Execror, i. 312
E\ecutiis, ii. 139
Exedo, i. 228
Exemet, ii. 252
Exemplar, re, riiim, i.
118. 139. ii. 320
Exeo, i, 234. ii. 99
Exeqiiae, i. 158
Exequor, i. 298
Exerceo, i. 188. 196
Exercituis, i. 123
Exero, i. 272
Exfociont, iL 284
Exhalare, ii. 99
Exhaurio, i. 289. ii. 63
Exhibeo, i. 1 38
Exiens, i. 88
Exigo, i. '247. ii. 210
Exiguius, ii. 89
Exilia, ii. 69
Exilio, i. 239
Eximo, i. 257, ii.67. 210
Existo, i. 279.310
Exitus, ii. 305
Ex!cx, i. 52. 89. ii. 325
Exodus, i. 44
Exoleo, i. J 95, bis
Exoletus, il. 142
Exoraro, ii. 210
Exordior, i. 502
Exorior, i. 302
Exorsiis, ii. 139
Exo^, i. 43. 57. ii. 344
Exosiis, ii. 119
Expando, i. 228
Expars, ii. 252
Expicfo, ii. 67. 210
Exiipdid, i. 312. ii. 100,
210
Exppllo, i, 254. ii. 43.
210
Expendo, i, 230
Expevgisco, or, i. 300,
501. ii. 105
Experior.i. 301.310.312.
ii. 103
Expers, i. 87. ii, 63. 252
Expertoe, ii. 252
Expertus, ii. 139
Expes, i. 1 64
Expetere, ii. 210
Expingo, i. 243
Explaudo, i. 236
Expleo, i. 199. ii. 210
Explico, i. 185. ii. 210
Expono, i. 259
Exporrectus, ii. <155
Exposco, i. 224. ii. 210
Expostulare, ii. 210
Exprimo, i. 258. ii, 210
Exprobrare, ii. 210
Expromitto, i. 276
Expromo, i, 256
Expungo, i. 248
Expao, i. 217
E„quilitB, i. 158
Exquiro, i. 266
Excendo, i. 228
Exscribo, i. 218
Exsercere, ii. 284
Exsigunt, ii. 2S4
Exsorbeo, i, 198
Exsto, i, 310
Fjcsurgo, i, 243
Exta, i. 161. ii. 177
Extemplo, ii. 150
Extempln simul, ii. 157
Extendo, i. 230
Exter, rus, i. 67. 142
Exterininare, ii. 210
Extero, i. 266
Exterreo, i. 188
Extinguo, i. 242
Extinxem, i, 17S
Exli'ixi, i. 178
Exto, i. 281
Extollo, i. 255. 325
Extra, ii. 36
Extrudo, i 236. ii, 210
Extuli, i, 325
Extiirbarf, ii. 210
Exudo, ii. 1 00
Exul, ii. 80. 319
Exulo, i. 306. ii, 210
Exuiido, i. 179
Exiinguo, i. 324
Exiu., i. 158. 213. 313.
ii. 43. 210
Exurgo, i, 243
Exuro, i. 270
Exuvi%, i. 153
F.
Faba;, i. 150
Faber, i. 67
Fabrxa, ii. 177. 180
Fabricatos, ii. 139
Fabrico, or, ii. 102. 105
Fac, ii, 175, 181.336
Fac sciaiii, ii, 34
Fac ut, ii, 181
Faces, i 143
Facesso, i. 273, bis
Facetia3, i, 158
Faciem. ii. 252 284
Facies, i, 125. ii. 284
Facio, i. 176. 206. 273.
303. 310, 323. ii. 66,
67. 181. 210. 252
Facior, i 307
Faciundo, ii. 284
Facul.i. I4i.ii. 258
Facuiias, i. Ill, ii. 177
Fsedum, ii. 282
Fax, i, 51. 89. 113
Fat;us,i. 148
Fate, i, 158
Falanx, ii. 268
Faleia;, i. 158. ii. 263
Fa'ernum, ii. 180
Fallacia.,esi. 138
Falli.ii. 22
Fallit, ii. 31
Fallo, i. 176. 255, 324
Falso, ii 1 78. 334
FalsDS, ii. 83
Falx, i, 51
Faina, i. 25. 152
Fames, i. 59. 148. 152.
ii, 341
Familia, ii. 228
Famdiaris, i. 103, ii. 177
Famul, lug, i, 141
Famulabus,
Index of Words.
Famulabiis, I. 64
Fans, li. 120
Far, i, 74. 95, 96. ii. 339
Farclmen, i. 2'2S
Farcio, i. 228
Farcitus i. 228
Fari, ii. 103. 120. 304
Farina, ii. 304
Fariolum, ii. 232
Farra, i. 164
Farsi, i. 321
Fas, i. 22. 154. 164. ii. 340
Fascinum, i. 154. ii. 270
Fascis, i. 39. 156. 153
Faselus, i. 45
Fasis, ii. 284
Fastidire, ii. 22. 210
Fastus, i. 14S
Fateor, i, 177. 296. ii.
103. 210
Fatidicus, ii. 3QS
Fatigo, i. 226
Fatim, i. 226
Fatisco, or, i. 220
Fatuus, ii. 304
Faventum, i. 115
Faveo, i. 197. 317. ii. 27
Fau?i, i. 112. 158
Fax, 1.51. 113. 143. ii.
325
Faxim, ii. 103. 121
Faxis, ii. 176
■Faxo, ii. lOS. 121
Faxsit, ii. 284
Febris, i. 92
Fecundo, i. 179
Fecflndus, ii. 286 •
Fedetrins, ii. 234
Feelix, ii. 252
Fefelli, i. 324
Fel,i.73. 113. 155. ii. 337
Feles, lis, i. 142. ii. 82
Feles ptillaria, i. 142
Feles virginaria, i. 142
Felix, i. 5. 89. 93. 105.
1 1 6. ii. 286. 326
Felle, J. 70
Femen, i. 166
Femina, ii. 82. 180. 286
Femur, i. 77. ii. 321
Fendo, i. 227. 313
Feniis, ii. 234. 286
Ferax.ii. 325
Fere, ii. 330
Feria, i. 152
Ferife, i. 158
Ferina, ii. 177
I'erio, i. 291
Ferita, i. 292
Ferme, ii. 331
Vol. U.
Fero, i. 67. 267. 308. 325.
ii. 88. 117. 309
Ferox, ii. 326
Ferveo, vo, i. 198. 299
Ferundo, ii. 284
Fessus, i. 188.226. 301
Festa, ii. 177
Festinare, ii. 99
Festinatus, ii. 142
Festuca, ii. 180
Fetus, ii. 286
Fex, ii. 326
Fi, ii. 117
Ficticius, ii, 287
Fictilia, ii. 180
Ficus, i. 44, 45, 124.
148
Fidenatinm, i. 110
Fidejiibeo, i. 203
Fidei, ii. 298, l>is
Fides, i. 36. 124. 152. ii.
304
Fides, i. 152. 158
Fidicen, i. 73
Fido, i. 304. ii. 143. 210.
270. 304. 309
Fidius, ii. 284
Fidus, ii. 88
Fieri, ii. 13, 14. 293
Fiet, ii. 72
Fi^o, i. 242. 243. ii. 270
Fi'i.ii. 117
Fill, i. CS
Filia, i. 6k ii. 173
Filiolus, ii. 89
Filius, i. 68
Filix, i. 89. ii. 32G
Filosofia, ii. 263
Filium, us, i. 131. 145
Finuiin, us, i. 46. 145.
151
Findo, i. 234
Fines, i. 156
Finjro, i. 244
Finio, i. 283
Finis, i. 2. 40. 99. ii. 177.
351
Finitimns, ii. .?51
Fio, i. 304, 305,306, r07.
ii. 116. 117. 143. 298
Firc-iim, ii. 282
Firi, ii. 117
Fi'e, ii. 117
Flabra, nm, i. 161
Fliijrito, ii. 44. 67
Flagrare, ii. 203
Flam^n, i. 30. Ins, 73
Flaveo, i. 198
Flavos, i. 43
Flecto,i. 172.274. 52,1
F f
Fleo, i. 171. 199. n. 99.
309 ,
Fiictns, i. 241
Fligo, i. 241
Flocci, ii. 65
Floralia, i. 118
Floreo, i. 191.318
Fios, i. 42. 82. 113
Flocculus, ii. 89
Fluctuor, ii. 102
Flumen, i. 30. 73
Flno, i. 215, 21G. 322
Fluvius, i. 68. ii. 177
Foci, i. I5G
Fodico, i. 311
Fodio, i. 209. 309. 323
Facundus, ii. 62. 285
Foedus, i. 83
Foena, i. 150
Fceneris, i. 84
Foenero, or, i. 84. ii. 210
Foenum, i. 150. 297
Foenus, i. 83
Fostus, ii. 28G
Follis, i. 59
Fomes, i. 36. 80
Fons, i. 50. 99. Ill
Fonteius, ii. 289
For, ii. 120
Forceps, i. 49, 50. 53. 86
Fore, ii. 111. 116. 122.
181
Fore at, ii. 1 13
Forem. ii. 116. 122
Fores, i. 158
Forfex, i. 53
Fores, ris, i. US
Fori, i. l56
Foris, ii. 342
Formidare, ii. 211
Forinido, i. 27
Formonsus, ii. 249
Fomacuin, ium, i. 1 15
Fornax, i. 53. 115. ii.
325
Fornix, ii. 326
Fors, i. 1 66
Forsan, ii, 338
Forsitan, ii. 333
Forte, i. 166. ii. 145 .
Foite », trs. i. 104
Forlior, i. 93. 107, 108
Foitis, i. 103
Fortius,! 93. 107, 103
Fortuito. ii. 145
Fortuitus, ii. 349
'Fori una, nfe, i 158
Foiiup, riiN, i. 145
Fosuni, ii. 282
loveo, i. 197. 317
Fovit,
Index of Words.
Fovit, ii. 256
Fousiosos, ii. 284
Framum, i. 131. 156
Fraga, uni, i. 150. 161
Franc igeiium, i. 64
Frango, i. 176. 246
Frater, i. 10. 76. ii. 302.
Fraudo.ii. 71. 211
Fraus, i. 49.85. 113
Fremo, i. 256 i. 270
Frendo, i. 233
Freni, num, i. 156
Fretum, tus, i. 145
Fietus, i. '299
Fretus, ii. 134
Fricatio, i. 187
Frico, i. 186, 1S7. ii.
269
Frictio, i. 187
Frigco, i. 205. 310. 320
Frigida, i. 7
Frigo, i. 242,245.310
Frigus, i. 84
Frit, i. 22. 164
Frixi, i. 310
Frons, i. 49. 87
Fructus, i. 17. 44. 123.
148. ii. 345
Fruges, i. 158. ii. 177
Frugi, i. 59. 166. ii. 177
Frugifer, ii. 88
Fruiscor, i. 311
Frumenta, i. 150. ii. 177
Frumentor, i. 311
Fruor, i. 299. bis, ii. 70
Frusinati, i. 94
Frustra, ii. 349
Frustro, or, ii. 103. 105
Frutex, i. 53. ii. 326
Frutico, or, ii. 105
Frux, i. 59. 89. 113. 166.
ii. 325
Fuga, i. 152
Fwgio, i. 172. 209. ii. 31,
211
Fugitivus, ii. 88
Fugito, i. 312
Fuisse, ii. 181
Fulcio, i. 288. 310
Fu%eo, i. 65. 205. 309,
310. ii. 332
Fulginate, i. 94
Fiilgurat, ii. 169
Ftilica, ii. 163. 349
Fuligo, i. 27
Fulmen, i. 141
Fulmenta, urn, i. 137
Fulsi, i. 310. 321
Fumus, i. 151
Fundo, i. 171. 233. 309
Fundum, ii. 270
Fuiiebres, ii. 178
Fuiiera, ii. 177
Fungor, i. 296. ii. 71.21 1
Funiculus, i. 8. 41
Funis, i. 8. 59. 41
Funus, i. S3
Fuo, ii. 112 116
Fur, i. 74 113, bis. ii.
80. 321. 339
Furentum, i. 1 15
Fiirere furoicni, ii. 184
Furfur, i. 31.74.99. 118.
156
Furiose, ii. 330
Furius, ii. 277
Furo, i 270
Fiisins, ii 277
Fastis, i. 39. 99
Futurum fuis.se, ii. 113
Futurus, ii. 350
Gabriel, i. 3
Gadir, i. 16
Gaesa, um, i. 1 16
Gajtulus, ii. 349
Galatea, ii. 300
Galeatus, ii. 134
Galerum, rus, i. 145
Galla, i. 152
Gain, ii. 177
Gallia, i. 14, 15
Ganea, um, i. 137
Ganges, i. 12. 147
Gararnas, i. 156
Gargarop, on, i. 146
Garrire, ii. 99
Garumna, i. 13
Gaudenti, i. 102
Gaudeo, i. 304. ii. 71.
143. 211
Gauderegaudium, ii. 30.
184
Gaudium, i. 155
Gausapa, pe, pum, i. 95.
105. 156
Gaza, i. 152
Gazer, ii. 339
Gelu, i. 155
Gemini, i. 156
Gemo, i. 256. ii. 99
Genae, i. 158
Genesis,!. 92. 119. 122
Genimen, ii. 267
Genitrix, ii. 302
Genius, i. 68. 151
Geno, i. 261. 319. ii. 310
Gens, i. Ill, 301. ii. 228
Gentiles, li. 228
Gentilitia, ii. 228
Genu, i. 124
Genva, ii. 264
Geiiuflecto, ii. .308
Gejuii, i. 319. ii. 310
Genus, i. 83
Geometra, tres, i. 138
Geor;;ip3, ii. 179
Germani, ii. 177
Gerinen, ii. 267
Ger.., i. 67. 268. 321,
.322. ii. 88
Gerroe, i. 158
Geryon, ties, i. 63. ii. 300.
Gesa, um, i. 161
Gessi, i. 321, 322
Gestioulator, ii. 349
Gt-sticulatiis, ii. 349
Gestio, i. 285. ii. 71. 34S»
Gesto, ii. 100
Geta, te.s, i. 138
Gibber, bus, i. 67. 147.
Gigas, i. 35. 78
Gigno, i. 260. 319. ii.
211. 310
Gingivae, i. 158
Git. i. 22. 164
Glaciare, ii. 2 1 1
Gladiator, ii. 339
Gladiuni, us, 145
Glaris, i. 87. 143
Glaucoma, i, 147
GlJs, i. 57. 70. 81. 111.
ii. 323. 342
Glisco, i. 177
Globus, ii. 270
Glomus, i. 83. 147. ii.
270
Gloria, i. 152. 273
Gloriari, ii. 72. 103. 211
Glos, i. 113. 164. 166
Glubo, i. 213. 220. 324
Gluten, i. .30. 73. 155
Glycerium, i. 10
Gnavus, i. 327
Gobio, bius, i. 140
Gorge, i. 72
Gorion, ii. 300
Gortys, i. 18
Oraciilimus, ii. 87
Gradior. i. 301
Graoce, ii. 81
Grrecor, i, 311
Grammatica, ce, i. 13€
Grando, i. 27. 72 '"
Graphis, i. 181
Grates, i, 135. 158
Gratia, ii. 285
Gratis, ii. 342
Gratitudo,
Index of Wokd<?.
Gialitiulo, i. 28
Gratnitus, ii. 349
GiaUiIor, i. '294. ii. 27.
211
Gravare, ri, ii. CI 1
Grex, i. 52. 70 S9 bis
Grossi, i. I5S
Grossiis, i. 45, 46
Grumi, i. \5C>
Griinnitus, i. 229
GriKS, j. 57. 85. 113. 143.
ii. 344
Gryphus, i. III. 146
Gryps, i. 57. W7. HI.
146. ii. 325. 341
Gubernator, ii. 273
Gummi, is, i. 22, 23. 92.*
140. 164
Giirges, i. 36
Guttur, i. 31, 32
Gymuasion, i. 29
H.
Habena, i, 158
Habso, i. 177. 188. ii.
23. 29. 67. 101. 139.
211.285
Haberi, ii. 13 liis
Habilior, ii. §8
Hac, ii. 180
Hactenus, ii. 149. 177
H3D, ii. 92
Hjec, i. 1. ii. 92
Hascce, ii. 92
HEeccine, ii. 92
Haemorrbois, ii. 297
Hasreo, i. 205, 321 bis.W.
211
Hajres, i. 80. ii. 81. 322.
341
Hocreseon, i. 122
Hieresis, ii. 297
HEsito, i. 312
Hala, ii. 249
Haiec, i. 29 bis. 72. 153
Halex, i. 29. 57. 72, 89,
90. 153. ii. 326
Haliartus, i. 17
Hallus, lux, i. 53
Hara, i. 153, ii. 285
Harpago, i. 27. 71. ii,
349
Harpax, i. 89
Haud scio an, ii. 165
Haurio, i. 289 bis
Haiit, ii. 275
Hebdoma, mas, i. 122
Hebenum, nus, i. 145
Hebes, i. 79. 86
Hebesco, J. 226
Hebris, ii. 282
Hecoba, ii. 255
Hector, i. 119. 121. ii.
301.321.33?
Hei, ii. 74
Heic, ii. 261.336
Ilelena, no, i. 136
Helice, i, 15
Helicon, ii. 319
Helleboium, rus, i. 145
Heminas, ii. 282
Hemo, ii. 255
Hepar, pas, i. 70. 74. 95,
96
Heraclides, i. 147
Heibesco, i. '226
Herc-.ile, i. 122
Hereditatium, i. 1 1 1
Heres, i. 80, ii. 81. 322.
341
Herodes, i. 147
Heros, i. 82. ii. 323. 341.
344
Herpix, i. 52
Hems, i. 68
Hesternus, ii. 88
Hen, li. 74
Hexameter, ii. 307
Hiacintiius, i. 44. 47
Hie, i. 1. ii. 75. 91. 261,
336
Hicce, ii. 92
Hidrops, i. 50
Hiemaie, ii. 99
Hiiaris, rus, i. 143
Hilax, i. 90
Hilum, i. 155
Hinc, ii. 149
Hippo, i, 15
Hippomanes, i. 37
Hipponax, i. 90
Hir, i. 33. 164. ii. 339
Hirpix, i. 52
Hisco, i. 226. 311, 312
Hispai, i. 15
Hissopum, us, i. 47. 145.
150
Hoc, i. 1. ii. 145. 149.
178.255. 536
Hodia, ii. 308. 331
Homicida, ii. 80
Hominium, i. 115, 116
Homo, i. 2. 71. ii. 79.
177. ?04. 319
Homunciiliis, ii. 89
Honor, nos, i. 43. 74.
142. ii. 277. 344
Hordca, i. 150
HorisoD, i. 74
Ff2
Homo, ii. .349
Hornotinus, ii, 349
Honca, uni, i. 137
florresco, i. 226. ii. 211
Horli, i. 156
Hortur, ii. 103
Hortus, i. 150
Hospes, pita, i. 101. ii. 80
Hospilium, i. 102
Hoslis, ii, 81
Hue, i. 18. ii. 145
Hujns, ii. 65
Hujusce modi, ii. 307
Hujus modi, ii. 165
Humanus, ii. 304
Humor, ii. 304
Humus, i. 43. 148. ii.
179. 304
Hvberna, i. 160. ii. 177,
178
Hydropicus, ii. 325
Hydrops, ii. 325
Hydrus, i. 17.48
Hyesnare, ii. 99
Hyems, i. 49. 86, 87. ii.
324
Hymen, i. 51-
Hymettos, i. 48
Hyssopus, i. 47. 145. 150
r.
lader, i. 14
Iambus, ii. 366
lanthis, i. 120
lapix, i. 13. 89
lapygia, us, i. 13
Iber, rus, i. 67. ii. 318,
320. 339
Ibi, ii. 333
Ibidem, ii. 308. 333
Ibus, ii. 92
loo, i. 172. 222. 292.
S23
Icon, i. 30, 31
Id, i-. 179
Ida, i. 14
Idem, ii. 96. 177. 303
Ideo, ii. 145. 334
Ido'.otbytum, ii. 349
Idomeaca, ii. 299
IdoUmi, i, C5. ii. 300
Idoneus, ii. 89
Iduare, ii. 241
Idus, i. 44. 158. ii. 241
lens, i, 88. 310
Ictgerunt, ii. 275
Ignis, i. 39. 98, 99
Ignominia, ii. 69
Ignoscilurus, i. 225
Ignosco,
Index of Words.
Ignosco, i. 225
Iguotiirus, i. '225
lie, i. 161
Ilia, i. 23. 117. lol
liias, ii. 340
Ilicet, ii. 152. 308
llico, ii. 150
liion, OS, urn, i. 16. 141.
143. ii. 533. 344
Uionea, ii. «99
Illabor. i. 29'.). ii. 211
lilac, ii. 180
lilacrymo, ii. 216
Illaqiieo, i. 179
lile, i. 0. 67, ii. 75. 91,
9-2
Illecebra, i. 158
lilex, ii. 363
Illexi, i.320
Iliic, ii. 91
Illicio, i. 208, 209. 320
lllico, ii. 150. 334
lilido, i. 236
Iliinio, i. 282
lllino, i. 262
Illiricum, i. 29
Iliiturgi, i. 15
Illius, ii. 293
Illo, ii. 94. 130
Illoc, ii. 255
Uluc, ii. 187.255
Illiiceo, i. 20.5
Illucesceie, ii. 99
lliudo, i. 235. fl. 211
Im, ii. 92
Imago, i. 27
Imbarbis, ii. 252
Imbeciilinuis, ii. S8
Imhecillus, ii. 305. 349
Imber, i. 32. 75. 98, 99.
106. ii. 339
Imbibe, i. 218
Imbrex, i. 53
Imbuo, i. 213
Imito, or, ii. 103. 105
Jmmanis, i. 117. 156. ii.
150
Immcir.or, i. 107
Immergo, i. 249
Immerit", ii. 178
Imniineo, i. 191. ii, 211
Immitto, i. 275
Immolior, ii. 103
Inimorior, i. 302
Imiiiunis, ii. 63 its
Ihio, ii. 334
Iiiipar, i. 94. ii. 339
Iinpedio, i. 312
Impei;i, i. 324
iuipellu, i. 254
Impendeo, do, i. 174.
202. 2:30. it. 2] 2
Impen, ii. 27
Impertio, or, ii. 105. 212
Impescui, i. 3l8
Iinjietc, i. 166
Impeto, i. 277
Imprtns, ii. 344
Impiugo, i. 245. 247
Iruplecto, i. 275
Impleo, i. 199. ii. 212
Implico, or, i. 135. ii.
212
Imploro, ii. 181
Impono, i. 260. ii. 177.
212
Impos, i. 43. 82. 107. ii.
323. 344
Impotente, i. 101
Imprimis, ii. 153
Imprimi), i. 258. ii. 212
Imprpbis, bus, i. 143. ii.
304
Impnber, bes, i. 142
Impubes, bis, i. 80. 142
Impuritia, i. 153
In, ii. 41 bis: 50.53.70.
72. 181, 182. 338
Inanis, ii. 62
Inante, ii. 152
Inardeo, i. 203
Inars, ii. 252. 283
Inaudio, i. 232
luansus, ii. 139
Incaleo, i. 193
Incalesco, i. 311
Inctdo, i. 'iZ9
Incemlo, i. 227
Iiicesso, i. 273, ii. 212
Iiicestum, tiis, i. 145
Inchoo, ii. 286
lucido, i. 237, 238. ii.
212
Incino, i. 259
Incipio, i. 210, 211. ii.
99
lucircum, ii. 152
Incita, as, i. 166. ii. 173
■ ■• Ad incitas } .
jvdactus, J
Iiiciti, ii. 178
luciius, i. 166
Iiiclamare, ii. 99
Incliiiare, ii. 212
Incliidere, i. 235. ii. 212
Inclytns, ii. 88
Incoho, ii. 236
Ini:o'o, i. 252
Increbesco, ii. 286
Increpo, i. 184
ii. 178
Inciibatio, 5. 187
Incubitio, i. 187
Incubo, i. 183. ii. 21?
Iiioudo, i. 227
Iiiculpo, i. 264
Inciimbo, i. 219. 312. ii.
212
Incurro, i. 269
Incursare, ii. 212
Incus, i. 48. 85. ii. 324
Incusimi, ssum, i. 228
Incutio, i. 212
Indago, ii. 296
Inde, ii. 149
Indecor, i. 142
Index, i. 6, 90. ii. 80
Indico, i. 90. 221. 309.
ii, 212
Indictio, ii. 243
Indigene, ii, 80
Indigere, ii. 63
Indiges, i. 79. 156
Indign^, ii. 331
Indignus, ii. 63
Indipiscor, i. 300 bis
Tndo, i. 232
Indoleo, i. 193
Indoles, i. 110
Indotestato, ii. 284
Indu, ii. 296. 336
Induce, i, 158. 221. ii,
212
Indukeo, i, 204. 321. ii.
213"
Induo, i, 213. 313. ii. 45.
213
Industrius, ii, 89
Indutum, ii. 312
Ineo, i. 284. ii. 213
Ineor, ii. 118
IneptisB, i. 159
Ineptio, i. 285
Inertia, i. 153
Infamia, i. 153
Iufans,i. 110. 115. ii. 81,
179
Infarcio, i. 288
Infera, ii. 178
Infer, rus, i. 142
Inferi, ii. 177
Inferiae, i. 159
Inferne, ii. 33 1
Infernos, i. 127
Infero, i, 268. ii. 213
Iiificias, i. 166
Inficio, i. 207
Infigo. i. 242
Infinitior, ii. 88
Infit, ii. 121
luflecto, i, 274
lufligs,
Index of Words.
Infligo, i. 241
Infra, ii. 36
Infremo, i. 256
Infrico, i. 186
Infringo, i. 246
Infundo, i. 234. ii. 213
Ingemo, i. 256
Ingemino, ii. 101
Ingenia, i. 155
Ingcnium, i. 155. ii. 177
Ingens, ii. 88
Ingero, i. 269. ii. 213
Ingratiis, i. 166
Ingratitudo, i. 28
Ingravesco, i. 226
Ingredior, i. 301. ii. 213
Ingruo, i. 217
Inguen, i. 30
Ingurgitare, ii. 213
Iiihsereo, i. 203
Inhiare, ii. 213
Inhibeo, i. 188
Iniens, i. 284
Injexo, ii. 121
Injicio, i. 20S
Inimicitia, i. 153. 159
Initus, ii. 305
Injuugo, i.241
Injurius, ii. 89
Inlex, ii. 363
lulustris, ii. 284
Innecto, i. 275
lunitor, i. 299
lauoxius, ii. 89
Innubo, i. 217. 219. ii.
305
Inoffensus, ii. 306
Inoleo, i. 195. ii. 99
loops, i. 93. 107. 167. ii.
63. 324
Inquam, ii. 120
Inquies, i, 79. 149. ii.
323
Inquietus, ii. 323
Inquinare, i. 225
Inquire, i. 266
Insania, i. 153. ii. 99
Insanire, ii. 213
Insanus, i. 60
Inscendere, ii. 213
Incribo, i. 218
Insector, i. 294
Insequor, i. 298
Insero, i. 271. 317
Inserpo, i. 264
Inservire, ii. 213
Inservitus, ii. 142
Insessus, ii. 142
Insideo, i. 200
lusidiae, i. 159
Tnsidio, or, ii. 103. 105
Insido, i. 253
Insilio, i. 289. ii. 213
Insinuo, ii. 101
Insisto, i. 279. 310. ii.
213
Insomnia, um, i. 137
Insono, i. 183
Inspergo, i. 249
Inspicio, i. 209. 320
Inspuo, i. 217
Insputare, ii. 215
Instar, i. 164. 167. ii. IS
Instaurare, i. 167
Jnsternere, ii. 213
Institio, ii. 213
Instituo, i. 214
Institutuui, ii. 177
Insto, i. 181. 310. ii. 99.
213
Instruo, i. 215
Insuber, i. 75
Insuescere, ii. 99
Insultare, ii. 213
Insumo, i. 257
Insuper, ii. 152
Insuperhabere, ii. 152
Insurgo, i. 243
Intelligo, i. 249. 320
Intendo, i. 230. ii. 213
Inter, ii. 36. 78
Intercede, i. 239
Intercludere, ii. 213
Intercus, i. 86. ii. 324.
345
Interdico, i. 221. ii. 45.
213
Interea, ii. 145.323
Interesse, ii. 214
Interest, ii. 25. 65
Interficio, i. 207
Interfor, i. 294
Interjacere, ii. 214
Interjiclo, i. 208
Interimo, i. 257
Interitus, ii. 142
Inteihio, i. 213
Interrnico, i. 184
Intermisceo, i. 190
Intermitto, i. 275
Interneco, i. ISG
Internosco, i. 223
Internundinium, ii. 286
Intero, i. 266
luterpono, i. 260
Interpres, i. 79. ii. 80.
322
Interpretatus, ii. 139
Interpreter, ii. 103
loterseco, i. 186
Intersero, i. 271. 573.
317
Intestinnm, nas, i. 143
liitexo, i. 282
Iiitingo, i. 241
Iiitono, i. 184. 187
Intra, ii. 56
Introduce, ii. 308
Intrude, i. 236
Iiitubuin, bus, i. 46. 145
Intueor, tuor, i. 297. 309.
ii. 214
Inlus, ii. 139. 344
Invado, i. 236. ii. 31. 214
Invaleo, i. 192
Invebo, i. 251. ii. 214
Invenio, i. 286. ii. 181
Invergere, ii. 100
Inverto, i. 278
Inveteratus, ii. 142
Invia, i. 161
Invict'js, ii. 88
Invidee, i. 200. ii. 2S.
214
Inviso, i. 273
Invisus, ii. 88
Invitare, ij. 214
In\'itus, ii. 88
Inultus, ii. 139
Inundo, i. 179
Inungo, i. 242
Invucare, ii. 214
Involucrum, ii, 349
Involve,!. 281.
Inure, i. 270
Inuus, i. 161
.'lo, i. 146
Iphigenia, ii. 300
Ipbiti, ii. 243
Ipse, ii. 75. 92. 96
Ipsissimus, ii. 89. 96
Ipsius, ii. 298
Ipsus, ii. 92
Irx, i. 153
Irasoor, i. 296
Iratus, ii. 134
Ircos, ii. 280
Ire, i. 283. 306. ii. 34.
118. 180, ISl. 214
Iri, i. 306. ii. 133
Iris, i. 92. 97
Irraucio, i. 288
Irrepo, i. 264
Irrideo, i. 202
Irrumpo, i. 264
Irruo, i. 216
Is, ii. 75. 91, 92, 93
Isis, i. 120. 122
Ismarus, i. 127
Istac, ii. 130
Ikte,
Index of Words.
Istc, ii. 91
Ister, ru>, i, 142
Istliinus, i. 47
Istic, ii. 91.95
Istuc, ii. 93
Istud, ii. r^37
It, ii. '296
Ita, ii. 328. 330
Italia, i. 15
Itaque ergo, ii. 15"
Iter, i, 32. 70. 76. ii.
- 182
Itin, ii. 338
-< Itiner, i, 70
Ituin, ii. 310
Itur, ii. 118
J.
Jaceo, i. 193 liis
Jacet humi, ii. 180
Jacio, i. 176. 207. 324
Jactare, ii. 211
Jacto, ito, i. 3 1 2
Jamdiu, ii. 150
Jamdudum, ii. 150. 154
Jam oiim, ii. 154
Jampridem, ii. 150. 154
Jana, ii. 298
Januarius, ii. 173
Janus, ii. 29S
Jason, i. 74
Jaxo, ii. 121
Jeci, i. 324
Jecinor, i. 34
Jecor, i. 54. 70
Jecur, i. 34. 77. 134. ii.
321
Jesus, ii. 345
Joannes, ii. 340
Jocuiaris, rius, i. 143
Jocum, cus, i. 127. 145
Jovis, i. 3. 31. 70. 76,
134. 167
Jous, ii. 284
Jousir, ii. 284
Jousus, ii. 284
Jubar, i. 31 bis. 95, 96,
151. 155. ii. 320
Jubeo, i, 203. 321, 322.
ii. 9. 27
Jndae, i. 15
Judffius, i. 15
Judaicns, ii. 350
Judex, i. 90. ii. 81. 178
Judicio, ii. 178
Judicium, i. 1 15
Judioo, i. 90
Juger, rum, i. 132. 141.
161
Juglans, i. 87. ii. 179
Juguluin, lus, i. l-tS
Juj^uin, ii. 278
Juc;us, i. 161
Juliomagus, i. 24
Junexit, ii. 284
Jun-o, i. 172. 220. 241.
319. ii. 214
Junior, ii. 296
Juno, i. 3
Jupiter, i. 3. 31. 70.76.
134. 167
Jurabere, ii. 142
Jurandus, ii. 141, 142
Juratur, ii. 141, 142
Juratus, ii. 142
Juratus sum, ii. 102
Jure, ii. 178
Jureconsultus, i. 61
Jurgo, or, ii. 105
Jurisconsultus, i. 61
Juro, i. 304. ii. 99. 214.
305
Jus, i. 85. 113. ii. 324.
344
Jusjuranduin, i. GO, 62
Jusit, ii. 284
Jussi, i. 321, 322
Jussum, sus, i. 143. 145
Justa, i. 161
Justa persolvere, ii. 177
Justitia, i. 153. ii. 298
Justitium, i. 155
Juvat, ii. 31. 122
Juvatio, i. 187
Juvenaie, i. 104
Juvenilis, i. 104
Juveuior, ii. 88. 296
Juvenis, i, 109. ii. 80.88.
177
Juventa, tus, i. 159
Juventus, i. 48. 86. 155.
139
Juverint, ii. 309
Juvo, i. 171. 1S2. 317. ii.
27
Juxta, ii. 36
Kjpso, ii. 227
Kalendae, i. 159
Krus, ii. 272
Labasco, i. 226. 311
Labefacio, i. 206
Labes, i. 99. 153
Labia, um, i. 137
Labo, i. 177. 311
Labor, i. 91. 299'. ii. 277
Laboratus, ii. 142
Laboro, ii. 9. 215
Labos, ii. 277
Labrusca, um, i. 137
Lac, i. 29, 30. 70. 72.
153. 159
Lacer, i. 67
Lacertum, us, i. 145
Lace«;so, i. 272, 273
Laches, i. 63
Lacio, i. 208. 273. 313
Lacryma, ii. 280. 286
Lacrymo, or, ii. 105
Lactes, i. 159
Lacunar, i. 31. 139
I.acus, i. 124
Laado, i. T72. 235. 320,
321. ii. 304
Laertius, i. 68
La;ti>, ii. 105
Laetor, i. 293. ii, 22. 71.
99. 105
Laevus, ii. 287
Lagopus, i. 49. 57
Lailaps, i. 13
Lais, i. 119. 121. ii. 299
Lambio, bo, i. 219. 324
Lamenta, turn, i. l6l
Lamentatus, ii. 139
Larapas, i. 35, 77. 138. ii,
322. 340
Lanea, i. 137
Langueo, i. 197. 317.
323
Lania, nicia, Hicium, i.
137
Laniana, ii. 180
Lanio, nius, i. 140
Lanista, ii. SO
Lanx, i. 51
Lapidesco, i. 226
Lapis, i. 39. 41. 99. 226.
178
Laquear, i. 31, 96. 106.
139. ii. 320
Lar, i. 74. 112, 113. 156.
ii. 320, 339
Largio, or, i. 293. ii. 105
Larissa, i. 15
Larix, ii. 326
Lars, i. 74
Laser, i. 32
Lassus, i. 188. 226. 301
Latebra;, i. 159
Lateo, i. 193. ii. 2l5
Later, i. 76
Lateranense, i. 103
Latet, ii. 31. 197
Latex,
Index of Words.
Latex, i. 5i
Latin^, ii. 181
Latito, i. 193
Latro, ii. SO. 350
Latum, ii. 118
Latus, i. 48. 83
Layaci lira. ii. 302. 349
Laver, i 3'>, 33
Lavit, ii. 309
Lavo, i. 182. 309. ii. 101.
309
Laupheius apolheca, i. 10
LaureatiB, ii. 179
Laurus, i. 148
Laus, i. 49. 85. 113. ii.
178
Lautia, i. 161
Lautitiae, i. 182
Leajiia, i. 5
Leander, drus, i. 65
Leber, ii. 252. 261. 284
Lebes, i. 36. 79. ii. 523
Lecca, i. 10
Lece, ii. 284
Lecio, ii. 284
Leciones, ii. 273
Lectio, i. 27
Lector, trix, ii. 81
Lectuai, u', i. 145. 143
Lege, ii. 144
Legio, i. 27
Legitimus, ii. 88. 351
Lego, i. 180. ii.215
Lego, i. 89. 171. 248.
325. ii. 304
Leiber, ii. 261
Leibertaded, ii. 284
Leitem, ii. 284
Lelex, ii. 325
Lemur, i. 118. 156
Lendes, i. 156
Lenio, ii. lOl
Lens, i. 49. 87. 92. 156
Leo, i. 5. 312. ii. 334
Leopardus, i. 62
Lepor, pos, pus, i. 57.
84. ii. 321.324
Lesbos, i. 17
Letale, i. 104
Lethe, ii. 331
Lethum, i. 155
Letum, i. 263
Levare, ii. 215
Levir, i. 33
Levis, ii. 287
Lex, i. 89 bis. ii. 325
Lexivia, um, i. 137
Libanus, i. 20
Libbys, ii. 342
LibenS; ii. 145
Liber, i. 66, 67. ii. 178
Liber, ii. 62
Libeiare, ii. 67. 215
Liber.itus, ii. 61
Liberi, i. 156. ii. 82
Libertabus, i. 64
Liberum, i. 69
Libet, i. 307. ii. 26. 122
Libitum, ii. 141
Libra, i. 12
Librae, ii. 178
Libripens, i. 87
Libum, us, i. 145
Licebit, ii. 155. 272
Licentior, ii. 88
Liceo, or, i. 193. 305. ii.
121
Licet, i. 307. ii. 26. 122.
155
Licet, ii. 153
Licia, um, i. 161
Licitum, ii. 141
Liciturum, ii. 141
Liciiit, ii. 155
Lien, i. 30. 73 bis, ii.
338
Lignor, i. 31 1
Lignum, i. 69
Ugo, i. 27. 72
Ligon, i. 70
Ligur, gus, i. 85. 142,
143. ii. 321. 324
Ligurio, i. 312
Ligustrum, i. 20. 29
Limax, i. 56, 57
Limen, i. 141
Limentum, i. 141
Limes, i. 36
Limus, i. 151
Lineas, ii. 178
Linio, no, i. 262, 263.
282.309. 315. 324. ii.
72. 310
Linquo, i. 265
Linter, i. 32, 33. 76. 114.
ii. 339
Liqebit, ii. 272
Liquebit, ii. 272
Liquefacio, i. 207
Liqueo, i. 191.313.323
Liquet, i. 308
Liqui, i. 323, 324
Liquidus, ii. 303
Liquor, i. 303. ii. 303
Lis, i. 81. 111. 117. ii.
323. 342
Liters, i. 159
Literas, ii. 17S
Littus, i. 84
Litum, ii. 310
Liveo, I. 198
Liviscor, i. 31Q
Lixa, ii. 80
Lixivia, um, i. 137
Loca, ii. 145. 178
Loci, i. 128. 156
Loculi. i 156
Locum, i. 145. ii. 145
Locuples, i. 79. 93. IIG.
ii. 62. 322. 340. 341
Locui, i. 126, 127, 128.
145. 156. ii. 145. 178
Lodix, i. 52
Lon.'ie, ii. 18. 61
Loquentium, turn, i. 115
bis
Loquor, i. 297. ii. 281.
215
Lotium, i. 182. ii. 350
Loumen, ii. 255. 364
Lubet, i. 307. ii. 258
Lucar, i. 32. 96
Luceo, i. 89. 205. 310.
320. ii. 99
Lucer, i. 118
Lucerna, ii. 304
Lucescit, ii. 169
Luci, i. lOD
Lucifer, i. 3. 67
Luciiius, ii. 288
Lucipor, ii. 229
Lucius, ii. 227
Lucrum, us, i. 145
Luctus, i. 204
Lucu, ii. 252
Lucuientias, i. 153
Ludere ludum, ii. 30
Ludi, i. 156. ii. 178
Ludifico, or, ii. 105
Ludo, i. 235. 321. ii.
215
Lues, i. 153. ii. 341
Lugdunum, i. 16. 29
Lugeo, i. 204. 310. 320
Lumbi, i. 156
Lumen, i. 30. 73. 162. ii.
364
Luna, i. 151
Luo, i. 213.216,217.11.
215
Lupa, i. 5
Lupanarium, i. 139
Lupinus, i. 145. 150
Lupum, pus, i. 5. 145
Lusi, i. 321
Lustra, um, i. 162
Lustrate, i. 1 62
Lustrum, ii. 243. 364
Lutetia, i. 14. 134
Lutum, i. 155
Lux,
Index of Words.
Lux.i. 51.55. S9. 99. 113.
153. ii. 227. 504. 327
Luxi, i. 310. 520 his
Luxuria, es, i. 138
Luxurio, or, ii. 105
Lvcaon, ii. 500
Lyrnphor, i. 138
Lynces, ii. 341
Lynx, 1. 57. 112, bis
M.
Macedo, i. 71. ii. 319
Macella, lum, i. 137. 155
Macer, ii. 304
Mactrja, es, i. iSS
Macero, ii. 304
Macliaon, ii. 300
Machinatus, ii. 139
Machinor, ii. 103
Macistratos, ii. 273
Madefacio, ii. 307
Mapander, cirus, i. 142
Maenahis, i. 127
Magalia, i. 1 G2
Mage, ii. 145
Magester, ii. 252
Magis, ii. 34.50,57.145,
175
Magnanimiis, ii. 83
Magnates, ii. 177. 180
Magnes, i. 36. 79. ii. 323
Magui, ii. 65. 144
Magnopere, ii. 1 50
Maialis, i. 6
Maian, ii. 338
Mailaiir, ii. 265. 284
Major, i. 84. 107, 103
Majoragius, i. 10
Majures, i. 156. ii. 180
Majus, i. 84. ii. 278. 324
Male, ii. 331
Male audit, ii. 181
Maledicentior, ii. 304
Maltdicere, ii. 215
Maledicns, ii. 304
Malifjcus, ii. 286
Malivolus, ii. 286
Malo, i. 253. ii. 118. 296
Milvas, i. l.'iO
Malum, ii. 178
Mains, i. 19
MamercHS, ii. 228
Mam ilia, ii. 304
Manimona, i. 3, 4
Maiiaie, ii. 215
Manwps, i. 87. 167
Manripium, i. 9. 29. 167
Mandare oblivioni, ii.206
Mandatuin, tus, i. 143
Mandlbula, lum, i. 137
Mando. i. 227. 309, 310
Mane,i. 167. ii. 150. 252
Maneo, i. 203. 300. 310.
319, 320. ii. 13. 99.215
Manes, i. 117. 156. ii.
150. 177. 227. 258
Manis, i. 117. 156. ii,
150. 177. 227. 258
Manna, i. 22. 25
Mansi, i, 319, 320
Mansues, i. 79. ii. 323
Mansyetus, i. 79. ii. 323
Mansum, i. 310
Mantile, i. 7 1
Manlus, ii. 345
Manubiaj, i. 159
Mannmitto, i. 275
Maniv>, i. 17. 44. 123. ii.
345
Mapalia, i. 162
Marcipor, ii. 229
Marcins, ii. 287
Marcus, ii. 227
Mare, i. 25. 95, 96. 105.
114. 116. 155. ii. 178
Margarita, turn, i. 26.
137
Margo, i. 28. 72
Maria, i. 3. 10. 155
Marid, ii. 284
Mariscus, ii. 90
Marita, i. 20
Maritus, i. 20. ii. 180
Marmor, i. 34. ii. 321
Mars, i. 3. 31
Marspiter, i. 61. 77. 148.
167
Martiu.s, i. 6. ii. 287
Martvr, i. 74. ii. 81. 321
Mas, i. 55. 78. 111. 114.
ii. 320. 322
Masculus, ii. 82
Massn, ii. 278
Massicum, ii. 180
Mater, i. 3. 76. ii. 302.
359
Materfamilias, i. 63
Materia, es, i. 138 bis.
149
Matricida, ii. 308. 350
Matrimus, ii. 351
Matrona, i. 12, 13
Matniesco, i. 31 1
Mavelis, ii, 118
Mavelleui, ii, 1 18
Maxillaris, i. 6
Maxim*', ii. 61
Maxinii, ii. fi5
Maxsunio, ii, 284
Maxnmne, ii, 258. 284
Me, ii. 83. 249. 252. 532
Mca rcfert, ii. 24
Mecastor. ii. 181. 286
Mocum, ii. 190. 249
Medea, ii. 300
Medeor, i. 503. ii. 27.
2)5
Medicina, i. 137. ii, 177.
180
Medico, or, ii. 105. 215
Medimnuni, nus, i. 145
Mediocris, ii. 88
Meditor, i. 294. ii. 103.
215
Medius fidiiis, ii, 181
Megalesii, ii, 178
Mehe, ii. 249
Meliecum, ii. 249
Mehercule, ii. 181
Mel, ii. 97
Meio, i. 252
Mel, i. 29. 70. 73. 99.
113. 150. 164. ii. 327
Mclatnpus, ii, 345
Melanium, i. 10
Meie, i. 164
Melior, i, 84
Melius, i. 84. ii. 144. 524
Mella,i. 150 bis 164
Melle, i. 70
Melo, ](is, lus, i. 22, 23.
143. ii 344.350
Memet, ii. 308
Memineiis, ii. 119
Memini, i. 300. ii. 33.
119. 215
Memnon, i. 73. ii. 319
Memor, i. 104. 107. 142,
ii. 86. 88.321.
Memordi, i, 175
Memnror, ii. 215
Menda, dum, i, 137
Ment laon, i. 66
Menelaus, ii. 500
Meneo, i. 300
Menerva, ii. 252, 284
Meninx, i, 52
Meniscor, i. 300. 119
Mcno, ii. 119 his
Mens, i. 116. 143. 300
Mensis, i. 39. ii. 178
Mensus, i. 303. ii. 139
Mentio, i. .100. ii. Il9
Mentis, i. 49
Mentitiis, ii. 139
Mentus, i. 300
Mentuni, ii. 119
Meo, i. 179
Mequm, ii. 272
Mercatura^
Index of Words.
Mercatura, tus, i. 139
Mercatus, ii. 139
Merc,es, i. 36. 80. 116. ii.
322
Merco, or, ii 67. 103
Mercuri, rie, i. 69
Mereo, or, i. 192. ii. 105.
215
Mereto, ii. 252
Meretricium, i. 115
Merges, i. 37
Mergo, i. 249. ii. 2)5
Meridies, i. 36. ii. 151.
308
Meritissimum, ii. 89
Merito, ii. 1 78. 334
Meritus, ii. 88, 139
Merops, i. 57
Mertare, ii. 276
Merum, ii. 180
Merx, 1. 1 U
Messi, i. 99
Messim, i. 92
Messui, i. 319
Metatns, ii. 139
Meteora, ii. 359
ATethodus, i. 44
Metier, i. 302, 303. ii.
103
Meto, or, ii. 105
Meto, i. 275. 319 •
Metreta, i. 26
Metuo, i. 216. ii. 215
Metus.i. 123. 125. 151
Mens, i. 68. ii. 94, 95.
127
Mi, i. 68. ii. 95. 296
Michael, i. 3. ii. 337
Michel, ii. 337
Mico, i. 184. 187. 319
Micturio, i. 291
Mihi, ii. 296
Miles, i. SO. ii. 81. 322.
341
Miletus, i. 17
Militiae, ii. 144
Mille, i. 22. ii. 85. 178.
■ 236
Mille & unus, ii. 85
Millia frumenti, ii. 178
Milliare, i. 118
Mimallones, ii. 341
Mina, ae, i. 159. 194
Mineo, i. 191. 193
Mingo, i. 252. 320
Minime, ii. 331
Minimi, ii. 65
Miniscor, i. 300
Ministrare, ii. 215
Minoris, ii. 65
Minos, i. 82. ii. 323
Minose, ii. 284
Miniio, i. 213
Minus, ii. 59
Miniitia;, i. 159
Minxi, i. 320
Mirari, ii. 216
Minis, ii. 88
Mis, ii. 92
Misceo, i. 190. ii. 216
Miser, i. 67
Miser, sum, ii. 177
Miserere fratris, ii. 22
Miserere nobis, ii. 28
Misereo, or, i. 297. ii.
105. 216
Misero, or, ii. 22. 105
Miserescit, i. 311
Miseresco, ii. 32. 105.
216
Miseret, i. 307. ii. 32
Miserete, ii. 1 24
Misertum, ii. 141
Miserus, i. 67
Missa, sio, i. 136
Mitesco, i. 226
Mithra, ii. 350
Mithradates, i. 147
Mithrldates, i. 147
Mitto, i. 275. 321. iL 178
Mitylene, i. 15
Mius, ii. 94
Mna, i. 159
Mnesteus, ii. 296
Modero, or, i. 295. ii.
103. 105 216
Modia, ii. 178
Modium, us, i. 145
Modo, ii. 178. 334 bis
Modulor, ii. 103
Moenera, ii. 261
Mcenia, i. 117. 162
Moenus, ii. 261
Moeotis, i. 119. 122. ii.
297
Moereo, i, 192. 304. ii.
215
Mosrus, ii. 261
Moestitia, i. 153
Moestus, i. 153
Moisi, ii. 361
Molaris, i. 6. ii. 178
Mole, ii. 331
Moles, ii. 304
Molestus, ii. 304
Molio, or, ii. 103. 105
Mollicia, es, i. 133
Molo, i. 252
Molossus, ii, 366
MoJy.i. 15.28
Momen, i. 141
Momentum, i. 141
Momordi, i. 174. 324
Mcnentum, i. 115
Moneo, i, 171, 172. 187.
319. ii. 44. 46. 119.
181. 216
Moneor, i. 297
Monetas, i. 63
Moiiimenfum, ii. 258
Mouitiiin, ii. 312
Monoceros, i. 56. 82
Mons, i. 50. 87. 99.
Ill
Monteis, i. 116
Moratus. ii. 139
Mo.deo, i. 172. 174, 175.
201. 324
Morem, ii. 177
M rem gerere, ii. 26
Morior, i. 302. 309
Moror, i. 295. ii. 100.
216
Mors, i. 100. 301. ii. 69.
178
Mortalis, i 6. ii. 177
Mos i. 42, 82. 1 13
MoselU. i 13
Motiim, ii 310
M veo, i. 197. 317. ii.
101 916
M X demde, ii. 157
Moyses, i. 120. ii. 350.
361
Mucro, i 27. 71
Mugil, i. 57. 99. 141
Miila. i. 64
Mulciber, i 147
Mulctra, trum, i. 137.
205
Mulctrale, i. 205
Mulcpo, i. 20 >. 310
Mul-eo, i. 203, 204,205.
310. 320. 321
Mulier, i. 3. ii. 320
Mulsa, i 150
Mulsi, i. 310. 321
Multi, ii. 65
Multiplex, ii. 88
Muliiplio, i 185
Multo, ii, 61. 178 334
Miilta mane, ii. 150
Multor, ii. 102
Miilruin, ii. 145, 146
Mulx^, i.320
Muiidltia. es, i. 1 18
Munduin, dus, i. 145
Mundus, i. 151
Munero, or, ii. 102. 105
MuDgO, i. 241
Municeps,
Index of Words.
Municeps, i. 87. 108. ii.
81
Muiiio, i 28.3
IMumis, i. 48. 83. ii. 324
Miirali.s, ii. 177
Jill rex, i 52
Murmur, i. 31, 32. 155.
ii. 321
Murmuror, ii. 102
Murtia Dea, ii. 27G
Mus, i. 57. 85. 112, 113
Musa, i. 63, 64. 125. ii,
83
Muscus, i. 151
Musica, ii. 177
Musice, i. 25
Mussit.tie, ii. 100
Musta,t'im, i. 150. ii, 180
Muta, ii 101. 2J6
Mutsa, i 150
Mutiior, i. 295. ii. 67.
216
Mycenae, i. 15. It^O
Myrteta, turn, i. 137
Mybtax, i. 52
N.
NaenijT, i. 159
Naiades, ii. 540
Nais, ii. ■.:!99
Nam cur, ii. 157
Naiici>cor, i. 300. ii 103
Nar, i. 14. 159. ii. 339
Narbo, i. 15 136, 137
Naibona, i. 137
Nardiim, dus i. 47, 145
Naros, i. 159
Narrare ii 216
:^ascor, i. 2'.'6. 302
Nasiim, sus, i. 145
Na'a, i. 64
Natalis, i. 41. 103. 156.
ii. 177
NatanUim, i. 115
Nato, i. 312
Natrix, ii. 327
Natiua, ii. 303
Naturalis, ii. 303
Nauci, i. 167. ii. 65
Navel.iis, i. 92. 96. 99.
ii. 178
Naiiseo, i. 179
Ne, ii. 154, 15.5. IGO.
176. 287.-3.32.357
Neapolis, i. 14
Nee, ii 155.336
Necatus, i. 186. 187
Necessajius, ii. 89
Necesse, i, 167, ii 64
Necessitas, tiido, i. 1-iO
Necessum. i. 167
Nee lego. ii. 277
Neco, i. 1S6. 313.319
Nee otiura, ii. 273
Nectar, i. 95, 96. ii. 320
Neclo, i. 172. 274. 321,
322
Npctus, i. 167
Nefas, i. 22. 154. 164. ii.
307. 340
Nefrcns, i. 6. 57. 87
Negli-o, i. 249. 320. ii.
277
Nep:otium, i. 7. ii. 3.
145. 170. 178. 236.
273
Nemo, i. 7 2. 151,ii. 80
Nemon', ii. 33S
Nempf, ii. 176
Nt mu.-, i. 84
Neim, ii. 336
N'O. i 199
Ni penihes, i. 37
Nfpel, i. 18
Nepite, i. 96
Nepos i. 46, 82. ii. 323
Ntptl, i. 99
Nccpiam, i 164. ii. 307
Nequc, ii 155. 307
Nequeor, ii. 117
Nequiens, i. 88
Nequitia, es, i. 138
Nc-ieides, ii. 300. 341
Nericn, i. 140
Ntrio, i. 72. 140
Neronior, ii. 87
Nescio, i. 283. ii. 334,
335
Nescis, ii. 34. 342
Ne=cius, ii. 34. 335
Nestor, ii. 321. 339
Nevis, ii. 118
Neuter, i. 67
Neutri, i. 67
Neutrius, i. 67, ii. 298
Nevult, ii. 118
Nex, i, 51. 113. 167. u.
326
Nexi, i. 274. 321, 322
Nexo, i. 281. 299. 311.
319
Nexui, i. 319
Nicolaus, ii. 300
Niger, i. 6. 67
Niijredo, i. 28
Nigritics, i. 28
Nigritude, i. 28
N'gror, i. 28
Niliil, i. 167. ii. 296
Nihiii, ii. 65
Nihilominus, ii- 350
Nihiliim, i. 155. ii. 306.
350
Nil, ii. 296. 337
Nimio, ii. 178
Nimiruni, ii. 150, 3.0S
Nimis, ii. 145
Niniium, ii. 145
Ningit, ii. 169
Ningo, i. 250
Ninus, i. 17
Nissii. 156. 332, 333
Nitor, .'298.ii. 71. 216
Nitrum, i. 155
Nivis i. 70. 90
Nix. i. 9. 112. ii. 326
Noceo, i. 193, 194. ii. 26.
100.216
Nuche, i. 1 16
Noe, i. 164
Nolo, i. 253. ii. 118.334,
335
Noinades, i. 156
Nomen, i. 73. ii. 228.
338
Nominari. ii. 13
Nun, ii. 176
Non modo, ii. 155. 176
Non solum, ii. 176
Non tantum, ii. 176
Non est meum, ii. 179
Non vereor ne, ii. 164
Non vereorneuon, ii. 164
Non vereor ut, ii. 1 64
Non vereor ut ne, ii. 164
Nonse, i. 159
Nonus, ii. 296
Norunt, i. 178
Noscito, i. 225
Nosco, i. 178. 223, 225.
317, ii. 119. 304
Noster, ii. 97. 127
Nostin', ii. 338
Nostras,!. 109, 110. ii, 87
Nostrate, ii. 87
Nostri, ii. 97
Notitia, es, i. 138
Nolrix, ii. ^55
Notum, ii. 304.310
Novale, lis, ii. 177
November, i. 75
Novemdeeiin, ii. 85
Novenus, ii. 296
Novi, i. 225, 317. ii. 119
Novicius, ii. 287. 350
Novissimus, ii. 88
Nountios, ii. 255
No''US, ii. 88
Nox, i, 90. 112.116
Nubet,
Index of Words.
Nubes, i. 78
Niibo, i. 219. 30R. 319,
320. ii. 30. 21(5. 28S
Nuceris, i. 143
Nucis, i. 143
Nudare, ii. 63
Nimoe, L 135. 159
Nuili, i. 68
Niiilus, i. 68. ii. 80
Niim, ii. 134
Xumerius, ii. 227
Nuinerus, ii. 179
Numus, i. 11. 69. ii. 179.
236. 287
Nuncnpo, ii. 181
Nuiidinae, i. 159
Nuntia, i. 179
Nuntium, us, i. 145. ii.
179
Nuo, i. 217
Kuper, ii. 88
Niiperrinnis, ii. 88
Nupsi, i. 319, 320. ii.
288
Niiptiae, i. 159
Nuplunus, ii. 252
Niipturio, i. 291
Nuptus, ii. 142. 216
Nurum, i. 123
Nusquam, ii. 18
Nutiicor, ii. 102
Nutritia, i. 162
Nux, L 21. 113. 143. ii.
179. 327
Nycticorax, i. 58
O.
O, ii. 74. 334
Ob, ii. 36. 182. 336
Obambulo, i. 178. ii. 217
Obduco, i. 221
Obedio, i. 235. ii. 26.
304. 350
Obeo, i. 284
Obequitare, ii. 217
Obex, i. 53, 54. 167. ii.
363
Obiens, i. 88
Objicio, i. 208, ii. 217
Obiit, ii. 178
Obitus, ii. 142. 305
Oblecio, or, ii. 71
Oblino, i. 262. 312
Oblitus, ii.33. 139
Oblivia, i. 162
Oblivio, um, us, i. 140.
153. 162. 312
Obliviscor, i. 300. 312.
ii. 103. 217
Obmordeo, i. 201
Obnilor, i. 299
Obiiixe, i. 299
Obiuibo, i. 219
Oboleo, i. 194
Oborior, i. 302
Obrcpo, i. 264. ii. 217
Obruo, i. 216. ii. 217.
302
ObsciBnus, i. 231
Obscurus, i. 231
Obsecro, ii. 181
Obsequor, i. 298
Obsero, i. 271. .T 09. 317
Obses i. 80. ii. SO
Obsideo, i. 200
Obsidioiiaiis, ii. 177
OI)sido, i. 233
Obsisto, i. 279
Obsoleo, i. 195
Obsoletus, ii. 141, 142
Obstendit, ii. 268. 284
Obstentui, ii. 268
Obsto, i. 181. ii. 26
Obstrepo, i. 264. ii. 217
Obstringo, i. 244
Obstruo, i. 215
Obtero, i. 266
Obtestor, i. 295
Obticeo, i, 196
Obtimus, ii. 268. 284
Obtineo, i. 189
Obtingit, tigit, i. 245
Obtrectare, ii. 217
Obtuiido, i. 231
Obtuor, ear, i. 297, 309
Obversari, ii. 217
Obveito, i 278. ii. 217
Obviam mitteie, ii. 179
Obumbrare, ii. 217, 306
Obvolvo, i. 281
Occario, i. 260
Occasus, ii. 141, 142
Occidens, i, 6
Occido, i, 174. 237, 233.
240. ii. 304
Occino, i. 259
Occipio, i. 210,211
Occipitium, i. 141
Occiput, i. 88. 99. iL 325
Occubo, i. 183
Occulo, i. 252
Occulto, i. 252
Occultus, i. 252
Oecnmbo, i. 2 1 9. ii. 217
Occupare, ii. 217
Occiirro, i. 269. ii. 27
Ocimum, mus, i. 145
Ocior, ii. 88. 287
Ocissimiis, ii. 83
October,!. 75. 103
Octodeciti), ii. 85
Oculus, i. 44
Odi.i. 305, ii. 119
Odio, or, ii 119
Odor, i, 83. ii. 278
CEdipus, ii. 345
CEstruiT), us, i. 145
CEsum, ii 261
(Eta, i. 14
Ofella, ii .304
Offtndo, i. 227. ii, 100.
217
Oftero, i. 267
Officio, i. 207, ii, 2$
Offieium, ii. 179
Ott'uudo, i. 234
Ohe, ii. 298. 331
Oisum, ii. 261
Oilier, ii 284
Oitile, ii. 284
Oleaster, i, 19. 21
Oleo, i. 193, 194. 217
Olerisalri, i. 62
Oleum, i 135. 153
Oii;n, ii 150
Olim jam, ii. 154
Oliin (|u;iiid"Hm, ii. 157
Olimpia, i. 162
Olivetnm, i. 20
Olivitas, i. 153
Olli, i. 323. ii. 92
Oloi, ii. 284
Olus, i. 83
Olnsatrum, i. 62
Olyiupa, ii. 243
Omitto, i. 276. ii. 308.
350
Omne, i. 6
Omneis, 1. 116. 140. ii.
261
Oranipofens, i. 61. ii. 308
Omnis, i. 6. 116. ii. 90,
91. 261
Onerare, ii. 62
Onix, i. 53. 90. ii. 327
Onus, i. 83
Opaiiis, i. 47
Opera, ii. 179
Opera;, i. 159
Operio, ii. 290. 313
Operior, i. 295
Opes, i, 160
Opifex, i. 108. ii. 80
Opitnus, ii, 87, 88
Opinatn.s. ii, 139
Opino, or, ii. 105
Opis, i. 160
0|)itnlo, or, ii. 27. 105
Oportebant, ii. 124
Oportent,
Index of Words.
Oporteiit, ii. 124
OporUt, ii. 1-24. 139
Oportfto, ii. 124
Oportuerit, ii. 1'24
Oppando, i. '22S
Oppedo, i. 230
Opperior, i. 290, 302 bis.
ii. 2S1
Oppeto, i. 277
Oppidoperquam, ii. 153
Oppido<]uam, ii. 158
O(>pignero, i. 84
Oppleo, i. 199 ,
Oppono, i. 260. ii. 217
Opprimo, i. 253
Oppucnare, ii. 217
Ops, i. 117. 167
Optimati's, i. liO. 118.
ii. 177. 180
Optio, i. 9. 27
Optumus, ii. 258. 284
Opulens, ienlps, i. 143
Opus, i. 17. 84. 8G. ii.
64. 179. 344
Or, i, 70
Oratio, i. 27. ii. 179
Orbis i. 39, 100
Orcades, ii. 341
Orcinos, ii. 280
Ordior, i. 302. ii. 67. 103
Ordo, i. 27. 72. ii. 319
Oigia, i. 102
Orichalcha, i. 150
Oriens, i. 6
Orion, i. 73. ii. 300
Orior, i. 302. 309, 310
Ornatus, i. 148
Ornavit, ii. 252
Ornithise, i. 13
Oro ut, ii. 181
Oiontesi. 120. 147
Orpheus, i. 65. 120. ii.
296. 299. 345
Ortiis, i. 150
Orvx, i. 58
Os, i. 43.70. 83. 112. ii.
323. 344
Osa, ii. 284
Oscen, i. 141
Oscillum, ii. 89
Osciilo, or, ii. 103. 105
Ossa, i. 13, 14
O-tendo, i. 175. 230, 251
Ostenlare, i. 231
Osfentum, tiis, i. 231
04ium, ii. 179
Ostrea, um, i. 137
Osus, ii. 119
Otliryx, i. 13, 14
Otones, ii. 280
Ovis, i. 5. 92. 100. ii. 179
P.
Paciscor, i. 246. 300. ii.
104
Paco, i. 246
Pactus, ii. 139
Paean, i. 30. ii. 319
Pageila, ii. 89
Pago, i. 246
Pagum, giis, i. 145
Palam, ii. 39. 350
Palaria, i. 162
Palatum, tus, i. 145
Palea, i. 160
Paiemo, nioii, i. 140
Pales, i. 4
Paliados, ii. 344
Pallas, i. 3. 77. 119. ii.
322. 340 bii
Palleo, i. 191. ii. 217
Pallor, i. 151
Palmari?, rius, i. 143
Palmes, i. 3G. 80
Palpebra, brum, i. 137
Palpo, or, ii. 105. 217
Palumbes, i. 58
Palus, i. 48. 85. 114.
145. 1&2. ii. 344
Pampinus, i. 46
Panax, ii. 327
PandectjB, i. 24. ii. 178
Pandion, ii. 300
Pando, i. 228, 229. 309,
310
Pango, i. 324
Panis, i. 38. 109, 110
Panis acerosus, i. 83
Pannum, nus, i. 145. 148
Panther, a, i. 58. 62. 76.
138
Papae, ii. 268
Papyrus, i. 44. 47. 136.
145
Par, i. 93. 112. ii. 28.
320. 339
Paracletus, ii. 300
Paradisus, i. 44
Paralipomenon, ii. 359
Parapherna, i. 162
Parasilaster, ii. 90
Parcimonia, ii. 287
Parco, i. 222. 322. ii. 217
Pardus, i. 58. 62
Parens, i. 4. 111. 115. ii.
81
Parentalia, i. 162
Parentalis, i. 162
Pareo, i. 193
Paries, i. 36. 79. ii. 341
Par'ietibus, ii. 264
Pario, i. 17G 212. 290.
323, 324. ii. 26
Parif, i. 112. 121
Purisii, i. 15. 23,24. 134
Parissimns, ii. 89
Paro, ii. 181
Parricida, ii. 80. 303
Pars, j. 92. 100. 160. ii.
179
Parsi, i. 222. 322
Parsitas, i. 222
Parsurus, i. 222
Particeps, i. 87
Participare, ii. 215
Partim, ii. 150
Partio, or, ii. 105
Partis, i. 92. 100. 160
Partitus, ii. 139
Parturio, i. 291. 512
Partus, i. 124
Parvi, ii. 65
Parum, ii. 150
Parum multi, ii. 150
Parum sape, ii. 150
Parvum, ii. 150
Pascha, i. 25. 155
Pasco, i. 224. 310,311.
ii. 100, 101.218.268
Pascor, ii, 101. 918
Pascua, i. 162
Passum, i. 310
Passus, i. 123. ii. 179
Pateo, i. 191. 194
Pater, i. 76. 93. 104.
106. 116. 118. ii. 339
Pater familias, i. 61. 63
Patibulum, lus, i. 145
Patio, ii. 105
Patior, i. 301. 310. ii. 105
Petria, i. 6. ii. 180
Patricius, ii. 287
Patrimus, ii. 351
Patrisso, i. 31 1. ii. 278
Patrius, ii. 83
Patruelis, i. 103. ii. 81
Pauca, ii. 180
Paveo, i. 197. 310. 317
bis
Paves, ne, ii. 161
Paves uf , ii. 161
Pavi, i. BIO. 317
Paulo, ii. 178
Paulum, ii. 150
Pavo, vus, i. 140, ii. 82
Pauper, i. 101. ii. 86
Paupera, ii. 86
Pauperia, es, tas, i. 135
Paupertates, i. 153
Pax,
Index of Words.
Pax, i. 51. 113. 153. ii.
325
Pean, i. 30. ii. 319
Peccare peccata, ii. 30
Peccatum, tus, i. 145
Pecten, i. 30. 73. ii. 338 i
Pectita teli\is, i. 277
Pectitae lana?, i. 277
Pecto, i. 274. 277. 322
Pectus, i. 84
Pecus, i. 2. 83. 85 bis.
167. ii. 80. 324
Peda, i. 155
Pedes, ii. 80. 341
Pedetentim, ii, 150
Peditus, i. 231
Pedio, i. 312
Pedo, i. 230, 231. ii. 268.
310
Pegi, i. 324
Pegniuni, i. 10
Pegunia, ii. 284
Pejero, ii, 305
Peiius, ii. 265
Pejor.jus, i. 84
Pelagus, i. 45. 155
Pelea, ii. 284
Peliego, i. 320. ii. 287
Pellicio, i. 208, 209. 320
Pellis, i. 38
Pello, i. 172. 254. 324.
ii. 218
Pelvis, i, 91
Pandas, ii. C6
Pendeo, do, i. 172. 174,
230, 235. 324. ii. 22.
218
Penes, ii. 36. 341
Penetral, i, 139
Penetrare, ii. 100. 218
Pensare, ii. 213
Pensuui, ii. 151
Pentecontarchus, i. 287
Penum, us, i. 2. 44. 46.
84. 145. 148 />fj. 155
Pepedi, ii. 310
Pependi, i. 324
Peperi, i, 176. 323, 324
' Pepis;i, i. 246
Pepuli, i. 324
Per, ii. 36. 49. 58. 158.
182
Peragit, ii. 30G
PeraiO, i. 247
Peragror, ii. 102
Pf rcello, i. 253. 234
PtTcoiitari, ii. 44. 104
Percunctari, ii. 218
Percuiro, i. 175. 269
Percutio, i. 212
Perdepso, i. 273
Perdix, i. 58
Perdo, i. 232
Perilomo, i. l84
Perduco, i. 221
Perduellio, i. 23
Perduiai, ii. 108. 117
Perduo, i. 233
Peregre, ii. 150
Perendie, ii. 150
Pereo, i. 284
Perfero, i. 268
Perficio, i. 176, 207. 303
Perficior, i. 307
Perfidia, i. 153
Perfluo, i. 215
Perfodio, i, 209
Perfrictio, i, 206
Perfrigeo, i. 205, 206
Perfringo, i. 246
Perfruor, i. 299
Perfugio, i. 209
Perfiindo, i. 234
Perfiingor, i. 296
Pergama, i. 128, 129
Pergamenum, i. 129
Pergamon, mus, i. 128,
129. 145
Pergo, i. 243. 320, ii.
100.218
Perhibpo, i. 183
Periclei, i. 120
Periclitor, i. 295, ii, 104
Peiiens, i. 88
Perimo, i. 257
Perinde, ii, 150. 154
Perinde ac si, ii. 154
Perindus, i. 44
Perlego, ii. 287.304
Perlinor, ii. 102
Peilucidior, ii. 53
Pertnaneo, i. 203
Permisceo, i. 190
Peimitto, i. 276. ii. 218
Pt-rniulcea, i. 202
Permuletus, i. 205
Pernicies, i. 124. 148.
153
Pernicii, i. 124. 148. 153
Pprnitor, i. 299
Pernix, i. 299
Peroleo, i. 1 94
Pero«iis, ii. 1 19
Pei-pello, i. 254
Perpendo, i. 230
Perpenna, i. U)
p. rpes, i. 79. ii. 341
Pe.priiior, i. 301
Perpeluo, ii, 178
Perpetuus, ii, 89
Perplicatus, i. 186
Perpoto, i. 182
Perquam, ii. 60. 158
Perquiro, i. 266
Perquisitius, ii. 58
Perrexi, i. 320
Perruinpor, ii. 102
Perscribo, i. 218
Persequor, i. 298. ii. 218
Perses, sens, i. 65. 143.
147
Perseverare, ii. 100
Persica, ii. 179
Pers'sto, i. 279
Persolvo, i. 280
Persoiio, i. 183. 187
Perstrepo, i. 265
Perstringo, i. 244
Persiiadeo, i. 203
Persuasus, ii, 88
Pertasdere, ii. 218
Pertajdet, i, 307
Pertaeduissent, ii. 124
Pertssiim, ii. 141
Perteudo, i. 230
Perterrpo, i, 1 38
Pertineo, i, 189, 190
Pertinet, ii. 43
Pertingo, i, 245
Pervadn, i. 236. ii. 21$
Pervagatior, ii. 58
Pervagor, i. 295
Perveho, i. 251
Pervenio, i. 286
Perverto, or, i. 278, 279
Pervicax, i. 222
Pervigil, ii. 337
Pervigilium, i. 137
Perungo, i. 242
Pes, i. 36. 60. 80. 107.
113. ii. 80, 522.341
Pessimus, i, 17. 48
Pe«sum, i. 286, 287. ii.
151
Pessundare, i. 181.236
Pestes, i. 153
Pestifer, rus, i. 142
Pestilentias, i. 153
Petitnm, ii. ol2
Peto, i. 171. 177. 276. ii.
44. 67. 218
Petrus, i. 3. 154
Pexi, i. 322
Phaeton, i. 74
PhalaiLX, i. 52. 89
Phaleias, i. 158
Piiion, ii. 300
Pharetra, ii. 302
Piiarias. i. 35
Pharnax^ ii. 327
Pharus,
Index of Words.
Pharus, i. 48
Phasclus, i. 45
Philippi. i. 15
Philosopha^tor, ii. 90
]'lilius, i. 17
Phorcyii, ii. 319. 358
Phryges, i. 89. ii. 341
Pl.ryx, i. 89. 112. ii. 325
Phyllida, i. 1-21
Pices, i. 1 50
Pictiiro, ii. 352
Pio, i, 68
Pietas, i. 35. 7*7. ii, 322
Pigendum, ii. 141
Pig's, ii. 124
Piget, i. 307. ii. 32
Pigneris, i. 84
Pigncro, or, i. 84. ii. 102.
218
Pignus, i. 84
Pigritia, i. 138. 153
Pigror, i. 1 38
Pilealus, ii. 134
Pileoium, i. 145
Pileutn, us, i. 145
Pili, ii. 65
Pinaster, i. 19
Pincerna, ii. SO
Pinca, ii. 179
Pin,!io, i. 243
Pinguitia, cs, i. 13S
Pins-), i. 137. 273. 319
Finns, i. 19. 21. 14S
Piper, i. 32. 150
Piraster, i. 19
Pirois, ii. 342
Pirus, i. 19
Piscicnli, ii. 90
Pi>o. i. 273
Pistiilnm, lus, i. 145
Pistrina, nnm, i. 137. ii.
177
Pistris, i. 327
Pilhia, i. 162
Pitiiiate, i. 94
Pituita, i. 153
Pins, i. 68. ii. 89
Pix, i. 51. 113.ji. 326
Pixis, i. 81
Pla^eo, i. 192
Placet, i. 307. ii. 26
• Placide, ii. 331
Placitiis, ii. 142
Piaga;, i. 160
Planeta, tes, i. 25, 26. ii.
173
Plango, i. 241
Planiiia, es, i. 138
Platanus, i. 19,20. 148
Platea, ii. 300
Plato, ton, i. 3. 70. 140.
ii. 319. 335
Piaudo, i. 236. 322. ii.
100. 213
Plaustrutn, i. 54
Plebed, ii 284
Plebes, i. 70. 124. 143.
148. ii. 341
Plebiscitum, ii. 311
Pitbs, i. 86. 113. 143.
148. 153. ii. 2r)8. .325
Plectrt, or, i. 275. 277.
322
Pleo, i. 199 313
Pleps, ii. 268
Plerique, i. 156
Plerus, i. l56
Pleuresis, ii. 359
Pleuron, i. 16
Plexi, i. 322
Plico, i. 90. 185. 319
Plostrnm, i. 54. ii. 284
Pluit, ii. 169
PIuo, i. 215, 216
riurimi, ii. 65
Plurimiim, ii. 145
rinris, ii. 65
Plus, i. 85. 93. 106 bis.
168. ii. 58. 145
Pluveo, i. 216
Pobiiciim, ii. 255
Puder, ii. 320. 339 -
Poema, i 1 19
Poena, ii. 69. 287
Poenior, ii. 87
Pocnitendus, ii. 141
Pccnltens, ii. 141
Pffinitere, ii. 124
Poenitet, ii. 32, 33. 124.
141.287
Posniturum, ii. 141
Poesis, i. 120. ii. 300
Pocta>iter, ii. 90
Pol, ii. 537
Pollen, i. 41. 70. 82
Polleo, i. 177. 191. ii.
218
Pollet, ii. 71
Pollex, i. 53
Polliceo, ii. 105
Poliiceor, i, 293. 295. ii.
104, 105
Pollicitus, ii. 139
Pollis, i. 39. 41.82
Polluceo, i. 205.320
Polluc.e.s i. 143
Polluctum, r. 206
Polluo, i. 21.3. ii. 270
Pollux, i. 143. ii. 327
Polluxi, i. 320
Polymitus, ii. 351
Polypus, i. 49. ii. 34.5
Poma;ria, ii. 178
Pomrrrinm, ii. 261. 287
Pompa, ii. 150
Pompeius, i. 68. ii. 265.
293
Poninm, i. 21. 29
Pomus, i. 19. 21
Pondo, i. 12. 22, 23.168.
ii. 178
Pondus, i. 83
Pone, ii. 36. 181. 358
Pono, i. 2.59, 260. 319.
ii. 101. 218.310. 35S
Pons, i. 50
PonUis, i. 17
Poplei, ii. 284
Poples, i. 3((
Popli, ii. 284
Poplicus, ii. 268
Poplos, ii. 284
Poposci, ii. 44
Popularis, i. l03
Populo, or, ii. 104, 105
Populus, i. 20. 68
Porcius, ii. 287
Porrecta, ii. 177
Porricere, i. 203. ii. 273
Porrigo, i. 242
Porrum, ii. 277
Portendo, i. 230
Portions, i. 44
Portio, i, 27
Portum, tus, i. 124. 145
Posco, i. 175. 224, 225.
ii. 44. 219
Posivi, i. 260
Possideo, i. 173
Possis, ii. 343
Possum, ii. 116. SlO
Post, ii. 36. 54
Post ante, ii. 152
Post fero, i. 268
Post lioc dein. ii. 157
Post pono, i. 260
Postea, ii. 145. 329
Postica, cum, i. 137, ii.«
179
Postidca, ii. 284
Postilla, ii. 330
Postis, i. 39.100. 155
Postretno, ii. 145
Postridie, ii. 19. 57 508.
331
Postulatir), latum, i. 140
Postulo, ii. 67
Posui, i. 319.ii. 310
Pole, ii. 86. 116. 145
Potens, ii. 116
PotesseiD,
Index of Words.
Potessem, ii. 116
Potesfas, ii. 177
Potcstur, ii. 116
Potior, i. 309, 310. ii. 71.
88. 104
Potiri, i 309, 310. ii. 71.
104. 219
Potis. ii. 34. 86.88. 116.
145
Potissimus, ii. 83
Potius, ii. 175
Poto, i. 18'2. ii. 142
Potui, ii. 310
Potus, ii. 142
Prse, ii. 39. 56. 153. 182.
297
Prabeo, i. 193. ii. 219
Praebia, i. 162
Prabitor, i. 193
Prffibitunis, i. 193
Praebitiis, i. 193. ii. 142
Pia;cavere, ii. 219
Pracedo, i. 239. ii. 219
Praecello, i. 255 bis. ii.
219
Praecelsus, i. 253
Prsecep?, i. 70
Pi-aschone^, ii. 230
Prjficido, i. 238
Praecingo, i. 241
Praecino, i. 259
Prsecipem, pps, i. 70
Frcecipio, i. 210, ii. 27
Prascipis, i. 70
FrjECipito, ii. 1 01
Praecipue, ii. 531
Praeclndo, i. 235
Praecordia, dium, i. 162
Praecox, ii. 327
Prsecurro, i. 175. 269. ii.
219
Praedico, i. 221. 309
Praeditus, ii. 62. 134
Prsedium, ii. 179. 237
Praedor, ii. 104
Praeeo, i. 284. ii. 219
Prreesse, ii, 27
Praefero, i. 263
Prsefinio, i. 283
Prjegnans, i. ". ii. 134
Prcelego, i. 248
Praelio, or, ii. 105
Praelium, ii. 287
Pragmetun, i. 216
Prfemiiieo, i. 191
Praemitto, i. 276
Prsemotnordi, i. 176
Prffimunio, i. 2 'S
Prsneste, turn, tus, i. 2,
15. 96
Prjenomen, ii. 226
Praenosco, i. 2?3
Piacpedio, i. 312
■Prajpe?, i. 79- ii. Z^\
Praepi>ilere, i. 191
Prsepono, i. 260
Praiqiiam, ii. 158
Praes i, 80. li. 323
Praescribo, i. 218. ii. 27
Praescns, i. 7. ii. 116
Pr£Esentebus, ii. 152. 284
Praesente testibus, ii. 152
Prssentio, i. 283
Praesepe, pis, i. 92. 96
Praeses, i. 80. ii. 322
Prffiseted, ii. 284
Prae=id€0, i. 200. ii. 27
Pra2stat, ii. 27
Prastigiae, i. ICO
PrcEStingno, i. 242
Prae?tj,"i. ISl. 137. ii.-
121. 219
Pi-aistolor, ii. 219. 351
Piasstu, ii. 255
Praesloius, tiilns, ii. 351
Prasul, ii. 80
Prcesiimo, i. 257
Piaetendo, i. 250
Praeter, ii. 36
Piffitereo, i. 284
Praeteriam, ii. 118
Prasteriit, ii. 31
Prstextum, tus, i. 145
PrKtexo, i. 282
Praevaleo, i. 192
Praevenio, i. 286
Praeverto, tor, i. 278.
303. ii. 102.219
Praevideo, i. 200
Praeut, ii. 158
Praiideo, i, 200. 324
PrandiuDi, ii. 191
Pransus, ii. 142
Precaatum, i. 115
Preces, i. 160
Precis, i. 168
Precor, ii. 104
Precor ut, ii. 181
Preher.do, i. 227
Premi, i. 260
Premo, i. 258. 321, 322
Prendo, i. 227
Presbyter, i. 67
Presepe, pis, pium, j.
139, 140
Pressi, i. 321, 322.
Prex, i. 113. l60. ii,
326
Pridie, ii. 19. 57. 308
Primates, ii. 180
Pr-mitise, {.160
Primo, ii. 145. 178. 334
Piimor, i. 107. 108
Primores, i. 156
Priinn=, ii. 58: 88. 35l
Princeps i. 87, 108, 109.
ii. 80
Prior, ii. 58. S8
Privernas, ii. 87
Pro, ii. 39. 56. 182. 334
Pro avos, i. G5
Pro virili, ii. 179
Probus, ii. 304
Procedo, i. 239. ii. 219
Procella, i. 254. ii. 306
Procello, i. 254
Procer, i. 118. 168
Proceres, i. 118, 157.
1C8
Procubo, i. 183
Procul, ii. 37. 3.97
Procumbo, i. 219. ii. 219.
307
Prociirro, i. 175. 270. ii.
307
f*rocus, ii. 306
Prodegi, i. 324
Prodeo, i. 284
Prodere, ii. 219
Pj-odigo, i. 247
Prodigos, ii. 284
Piodigas, ii. 62
Prodo, i. 232
Produco, i. 222. ii. 306
Profana, ii. 306
Profari, ii. 306
Profecto, ii. 306. 334
Profero, i. 268, ii. 306
Professio, i. 297
Proffcssus, ii 139
Proficio, i. 207
Pr'.ficiscor, i. 300. ii. 305
Prcfiteor, i. 297. ii. 306
Profluer.s, i. 6. ii. 177
Profugio, ii. 506
Profunda, ii. 506
Profundo, i. 234 ii. 307 •
ProfundiHn, i. 7. ii. 178
Profuturus, ii. 351
Progenies, i. 125
Progigno, i. 260
Progne, ii, 302
Progredior, i. 301
Prch, ii. 74
Prohibeo, i. 188. ii. 67.
219
Prohibia, i. 162
Projicio, i. 208
Proilium, ii. 28T
ProJn, ii. 338
Prolej,
IiyfDEX OF Words.
Proles, i, no. 195. ii. 341
Prolis, i. 153
Proloquor, i. 298
Prolui;eo, i. 204
Prolnvies, vio, vium, i.
140. 143
Promereo, or, i. 192
Promico, i. 184
Promineo, i. 191
Promitto, i. 276
Promo, i. 256. 320
Promoveo, ii. 101
Promsi, i. 320
Promtus, i. 256
Pronepos, ii. 306
Pronis, nus, i. 143
Pronuba, ii. 305
Pronuntio, i. 119
Propages, go, i. 140. ii.
30T
Propando, i. 228
Prope, ii. 37
Propello, i. '254. ii. 507
Properare, ii. 100. 220
Properatus, ii. 142
Propheta, les, i. 138. ii.
307
Propior, pius, ii. 37
Propono, i. 260
Propontis, ii. 307
ProposituiTi, ii. 177
PiopUr, ii. 36. 182
Propterea quod, ii. 186
Propugnare, ii. 220
Propulso, ii. 307
Proquam, ii. 158
Pro rata, ii. 179
Proripio, i. 211 ,
Prorsus, ii. 179
Proruo, i. 216
Prosa, ii. 179
Prosapia, es, i. 133. 153
Proscribo, i. 218
Proseqiior, i. 298
Pro-;icia, es, lun, i. 137
Prosper, rus. i. 67. 142
Prospicio, ii. 26. 188.
220 •
Prosterno, i. 261
Prostibula, luni, i. 9 bis.
137
Prostituo, i. 214
Prostrasse, i. 178
Prosiim, ii 1)6
Pr..teii'lo, i. 230
Protero, i. '266
Proterviis, ii, 306
Proiiiius, ii. 151
PrctrRbo, i '251
Provebo, i. 251.ii. 206
Provenio, i. 286
Provideo, i. 200. ii. 26.
220
Proviiicia, es, i. 138
Provolvo, i. 281
Prout, ii. 153
Proxime, ii. 37
Proximiis, ii. 37
Proxsumus, ii. 284
Psallo, i. 255. 323, 324
Psalterium, ii. 299. 351
Puber, i. 70. SO. 107
Pubertas, i. SO
Pubes, i. 80. 101
Publius, ii. 227
Pucnando, ii. 273
Piidebunt, ii. 124
Pudendum, ii. 141
Pudens, ii. 141
Pudent, ii. 31. 33. 124
Pudeo, ii, 124
Pudet, i. 307. ii. 32, 33.
I'23. 141
Puditunini, ii. 141
Puella, ii. 179
Puellulus, ii. 90
Puer, i. 66. 69. ii. 82. 90.
179
Pueritia, i. 135
Puerpera, rium, i. 61
Puertia, i. 327
Puerulus, ii. 90
Puerus, i. 67
Pugil, i. 107. ii. 80. 319.
351
Pugillar, i. 139. 157
Pugiilares, i. 157, ii. 178
Pugilhis, ii.351
Pugio, i. 28 •
Pugnarc, ii. 220
Pugnaturo e.^t, ii. 141
Pulchrior, us, i. 105
Pulex, i. 53. ii. 351
Pullus, ii. 89
Puis, i. 49. 87
Pulso, i. 311
Pultare, ii. 276
Pulvinsir, ii. 3'20
Pulvis, i. 39. 41.91. 151.
ii. 323. 343
Pumcx, i. 53
Puiictum, tus, i. 145
Puntro, i. 175. 248. 324
Ptini, ii. 261
Punio, i. 285
Punior, ii 102
Puppis, 1. 92. 104. 142
Pupuiii i. 175. 324
Pure, ii. 531
Purgare, ii, 220
Purum, il. 177
Pus, i. 85. 113. 155. 168
Pusio, ii. 90
Puta, ii. 323. 330
Puteal, i. 139
Puteus, um, i. 145. ii. 26S
Putisco, i. 311
Puto, ii.29. 66. 113.220.
328. 330
Pyrites, i. 37
Pyrois, i. 82
Pyrrii'hius, ii. 366
Pyrum, i. 21
Python, i. 31
Pyxis, L 119
Q.
Qae, Qi, Qid, Qis, ii. 272
Qua. ii. 47. 49. 93, 94.
180
Qua de re, iL 190
Quacunque, ii. 307
Quadrans, i. 12. ii. 179
Quadrantal, i. 139
Quadrare, ii. 220
Quadrigae, i. 157. 160. ii.
296
Quadrijugae, ii. 296
Quadrupes,i. 107. ii. 30$
Quadruplico, i. 185
Quae, ii. 4. 92
Quaerito, i. 312
Quscro, i. 266. 31 5. ii.
220
Quaesitutn, ii. 312
QuKSO, i. 315. ii. 122
Qualicunque, ii. 308
Quails, ii. 7. 90
Quam, ii. 56. 58. 145.
157
Quamdiu, ii. 53
Quamdudum, ii. 53
Quamobrem, ii. 152. 190
Quanipotius, ii. 190
Quamprius, ii. 190
Quainvis, ii. 153. 157.
175.342
Quamvis licet, ii. 157
Quando, ii. 53, 54. 153.
354
Quandocumque, ii. 151.
303
Quandoque, ii. 151
Quandoquidem, ii. 153.
308
QuanquaiD, ii. 153. 157
Qnanti, ii. 65. l-i4
Quanticunque, ii. 05
Quantivis, ii. 308
Quail to,
h
NBEX OF
M'
ORDS.
Quantd, li. 173
Quantum, ii. 145, 146.
157
Quautumvi?, ii. 157
Quaiitns, ii. 7. 90
Quapropter, ii. 94. 152,
307
Quare, ii. 49. 149. 307
Quartans, i. 7
Quarto ii. 146
Quartum, ii. 146
Quasp, ii. 252
Quasi, ii. 154. 333
Quasillum, lus, i. 145
Quassi, i. 321,322
Quasso, i. 212. ii. 101
Quas'uiii, i. 189
Quateniis, ii. 177. 307
Qiiaterni, i. 64
Quaternio, i. 27, 28
Quatio, i. 189.212. 321,
322
Quatuor. iL 287
Que, ii. 332. 357
Queatur, ii. 117
Queo, ii. 117
Quercetum, i. 21
Quercus, i. 19. 124. 143
Queror, i. 293. ii. 100.
220
Ques, ii. 94-
Queuutnr, ii. 117
Qui, i. 67. ii. 4. 91, 92
Qui, ii. 93. 151. 178. 181
Quia, ii. 328
Quia enim, ii. 157
Quia nam, ii. 157
Quibo, ii, 117
Quibu>cum, ii. 94
Qiiicounque, ii. 284
Quicquid. ii. 287
Quid, ii. 93. 179
Quifiam, ii. 91. 308
Quidem <'erte, ii. 157
Quidqui'l, ii. 337
Quieus, i. 88
Quies, i. 79, 80. 124,
1 49. ii. 522
Quiesco, i. 223. 317. ii.
220
Quiete.s, i. 154
Quilibet, ii. 303
Quia, ii. 151. '^38
Quin:im, ii. 179
Quincunx, i. 11, 12.114.
ii. 179
Quindecim, ii. 85
Quinqualria, i. 167
Quiuquatru-i, i. 157
Quinquennio, i. 27, 28
Vol. II.
Quintilis, i. 6. 103
Quiutus, ii. 2i1
Quippequia, ii. 157
Quips, ii. 284
Quiiem, ii. 117
Quiris, i. 81. 114. 117.
157. ii.323. 342
Quiiite."--, i. 157
Quiritor, ii. 102
Qui.s, ii 91, 92, 93. 342
Quisquam, ii. 93
Quisqiie, ii. 58. 77. 91
Qulsquiliae, i. 160
Quit, ii. 275. 284
Quitum, ii. 310
Quitus, ii. 117
Quivi, ii. 310
Quivis, ii. 308
Quo, ii.47.49. 145
Quo. ii. 93, 94. 151. 179,
180, 181
Quo pergis, ii. 177
Qu5 tendis, ii. 177
Quoad, ii. 49. 151. 172
Quocirca, ii. 49. 94. 152
Quod, ii. 4. 146. 153.
182
Quoi, ii. 93
Quoius, ii. 93
Quoni, ii. 93
Quomodo, ii. 145. 334
Quoniam, ii. 150
Quoque, ii. 271. 308
Quor, ii. 149
Quot, i. 164. ii. 7
Quotcunque, i. 164
Quo'idias. ii. 303
Quoiiens, ii. 249. 284
Quotquot, i. 104,
Quriusque. ii. 49. 94
Qurtius, ii. 272
Quuiu, ii. 93. 149. 271
E.
Rabies, i. 154
Rabula. ii. 80
Eadicium, i. 115
Radix, ii. 326
Rado, i. 236. 522
Rainetita, turn, i. 157
Ramex, i. 53
Ramus ursula, i. 10
Rripa, i)um, i. 157
Rapacia, i. 162
Raphael, ii. '537
Rai>icia, i. 162
Rapio. i. 171. 177. 211.
319
Rasi, i. 522
Gg
Raster, trum, i. 131. 145.
ii. 179
Ratim, i. 92
Ratio, ii. 179
Ratione, ii. 173
Ratus, ii. 310
Rauceo, i. 191. 28S. 322
Raucesco, i 233
R.iucio, i. 288. 32Z
Ravis, i. 91
Rausi, i. 322
Reate, i. 15. 96
Rebeliio, i. 27
Recah aster, ii. 90
Recedo, i. 239
Recello, i. 253
Recens, ii. 145
Recenseo, i. 190
Recensire, i. 190
Recensitus, i. 190
Recido, i. 174. 176. 237,
238
Recitner, ii 320. 339
Recino, i. 259. 318
Recipio, i. 210. ii. 220
Reciproco, or, ii. 105
Recludo, i. 235
Recognosco, i. 224
Recoio, i. 252
Recordari, ii. 220
Recreo, i. 179
Recrepo, i. 184
Recta, ii. 180
Recubo, i. i 83
Recudo, i. 227
Recumbo, i. 219
Recurro, i. 270
RfCusautuin, i. 1 15
Redamo, i. 173, 178
Redarguo, i. 213
Reddere, i. 312. ii. 221
Redder, ii. 1 20
Redeo, i. 284. ii. 13
Redhibeo. i. 13S
Rediens, i. 88
Redigo, i 247
Redimo, i. 257. ii. 66,
67
Reditio domum, ii. 18
Redoieo, esco, i. 194, 195
Redundatu<, ii. 142
RediHido, i. 179
Redux, ii. 327
Refelli, i. 255. 524
Refercu), i. 288
Refero, i. 268. ii. 221.
304. 306
Refert, ii. 23. 26. 66.
306
Refertus, ii. 63
Reficio,
Index of Words.
Keficio, 1. y07
Kefigo, i. 242
Reflecto, i. 274
Refrico, i. 186, 13T
Kefrictus, i. 20ti
Refiigeo, i. '205 '
Refrigesco, i. 226
Refulgeo. i. 205
llegero, i. 269
Regia, ii. 177
Regis, i. 70. 143. ii. 304
Regnandus, ii. 141
Regnante, i. 101
Regnatur, ii. 141
Regnatus, ii. J 42
Rego, i. 39. 241. ii. 304.
Regredior, i. 301
Regnla, ii. 304
Rei, i. 124. ii. 293
Reioe, ii. 284
Rejicio, or, i. 176
Reipublicae, ii. 308
Relangueo, i. 197
R«lavo, i. 182
Relego, i, 248
Releo, i. 2r)3
Relicuus, ii. 272
Religio, i, 27
Relino, i. 262, 263
Relinquo, i. 265. ii. 29
Reliquiae, i. 160
Rem familiarem, ii. 179
Remeo, i. 179
Renietior, i. 302
Reinex, i. 00. ii. 325
Remigo, i. 90
Reminisco, ii. 105
Reminiscor, i. 303, 304,
ij. 105. 119
Remissa, ssio, i. 136
Remilto, i. 276. ii. 100
Remordeo, i. 174. 201
Reiimneror, ii. J02
Ren, i.30. 73. 113. ii. 519
Renitor, i. 299
Rennntiaie, ii. 221
Reniio, i. 217
Reor, i. 297
Repango, i. 245
Repello, i. 254
Rcpendo, i. 230
Rcpente, ii. 145
Repeicutio, i. 212
Rcpeiaie, ii. 252
Reperio, i. 290. 318
Repeto, i. 277
Repetunda, i. 168
Repleo, i. 199
Replico, i. 185
Repo, i. 264
Repoao, i. 260. ii. 221
Reposco, i. 224. ii. 221
Repotia, i. 162
Reprimo, i. 258
Re|)roniitto, i. 276
Repuerasco, i. 311
Repugnare, ii. 25. 221
Repungo, i. 175. 248
Requies, i. 79. 124. 149
Requiescere, ii. 100. 221
Requifitus, ii. 142
Requii'o, i. 267
Res, i. 80. 125. ii. 46.
63. 170. 236
Res cibi, ii. 19
Resarcio, i. 283
Rescindo, i. 234
Rcscio, i. 283
Rescribo, i. 213. ii. 221
Rtseco, i. 1 80
Reses, i. 80
Resideo, i. 200. ii. 221
Reside, i. 233
Resilio, i. 289
Resina, ii. 351
Resipio, i. 21 1
RfSisto, i. 279
Resolvo, i. 280
Resono, i. 1 83
Resoi beo, i. 1 98
Respicere, ii. 221
Respondeo, i. 174. 202.
ii. 221
Respublica, i. 60, 61
Respuo, i. 217
Restinguo, i. 242
Restipulor, i. 295
Restis, i. 92. 97
Reslituo, i. 214. ii. 221
ReMo, i. 181
Resultare, ii. 100
Resunu), i. 257
Resuo, i. 214
Resurgo, i. 243
Rete, i. 41. 96. 140. 160
Retexa, i. 282
Reticeo, i. 196. 313
Reticulum, lus, i. 41. 145
Retineo, i. 190
Retis, i. 41. 96
Retoiqiieo, i. 204
Retraho, i. 251
Rutundo, i. 175. 231
Revello, i. 255
Reveriio, i. 286
Reverto, tor, i. 278, 279.
ii. 105
Revincio, i.287
Reviso, i. 273
Revive, i, 280
Revocasti, i. 178
Revolvo, i. 281
Rex, i, 3. 22.8'9. 145
Rhaetia, ii. 287
Rhamnus, i. 13
Rliae, ii. 35 1
Rhetor, i. 119. ii. 321
Rhetorica, ii. 177. 179
Rhodanus, i. 8. 134
Rhodus, i. 17
RlioiiipliKa, ii. 297
Rhythmus, ii. 287
Rictiim, tus, i. 145. 244
Rideo, i. 202. 322. ii. 100.
221
Ringo, gor, i. 244. 303
Rinoceros, ii. 323
Riphaei, ii. 287
Risi, i. 322
Rivalis, i. 103
Rixo, or, ii. 105
Robur, i. 19. 77. ii. 321.
359
Rodo, i. 236. 322
Rogo, ii. 44
Roma, i. 15
Ro:tianus, ii. 88
Romphaa, ii. 270
Rorare, ii. 22 1
Ros, i. 42. 61. 82. 113.
151. ii. 344
Rosaria, ii. 178
Rosi, i. 32i
Rosmarinum, nus, i. 61
Rostra, i. 162
Rnbus, i. 19, 20
Rudem accipere, ii. 180
Rude donatus, ii. 180
Rudens, i. 110. 115
Rudimentum, ii. 351
Radio, i. 229
Rudis, i. 10.3. ii. 180
Ruditus, i. 229
Rudo, i. 228
Rudus, i. 83
Rngo, ii. 101
Rumex, i. 53
Rumino, nor, ii. 102. 105
Rumpo, i. 172. 264.323,
324. 284
Ruo, i. 171. 215. ii. 100.
222
Rupes, i. 36
Rupi, i. 323, 324
Rupsit, ii. 284
Ruri, i. 100. ii. 52
Ruricola, ii. 80
Rus, i. 85. 98. 113. ii.
47,48.52.344
Rusticor, i. 311
Ruta,
In"dex of Wokds.
Rut.i, i. 150
Rutilare, ii. 100
Hutuin, ii. 310
Sacer, i. 142. u. 88. 219
Sacerdos, i. 82 •
Sacoma, i. 147
. Sacrificor, ii. 102
Sacrosanctus, ii. 308
Seeculurn, ii. 178
SEpes, ii. 'JS3
Saepimei)tiim, ii. 288
Saepios, ii. 238
Saequlum, ii. 272
SoEvitia, es, i. 138
Sagax, ii. 304
Sagio, ii. 304
Sagum, gns, i. 146
Saguntos, turn, tus, i. 16.
145
Sal, i. 29 bis. 73. 95. 139.
- 151. 155. ii. 337
Sdlamis, i. 82. ii, 5! 9.
. 338. 342
Salar, i. 53
Salebrae, i. 160
Sales, i. 157
Salictum, i. 21
Salina, ii. 180
Salinae, i. 160
Salinum, i. 160. ii. 180
Salio. i. •^155. 289, 290.
309. 319
Sali.'c, ii. 326
Salli, i. 324
Sallo, i. 255. 309. 324
Sallustias, ii. 288
Salmon&i, ii. 299
Saltare, ii. 222
Saluber, i. 75. ii. 86. 277.
• 351
Salubre, ii. 302
Salubris, ii. 277
Salubritates, i. 154
Saltii, i. 319
Salum, Ills, i. 146
Sahi-s i. 48. 86. ii. 324.
344
Salutari, ii. 13
Salutes, i. 154
Salvus sum, ii. 177
Sam, ii. 95
Samnis, i. 81. 114. 1 17.
ii: 323. 342
Sancio, i. 172.287.320
Sancte, ii. 331
Sanctio, i. 287
Sanctioreis, i. 116
Sanctitas, i. 154
Sandix, i. 53. 55
Sane, ii. 331
Saiiequam, ii. 158
Sanguen, i. 41. 70. 82.
141. ii. 267
Sanguineus, ii. 303
Sanguis, i. 39. 41. 60.
70. 82. 151. ii. 267.
323. 342
Sanies, i. 154
Sanus, i. 60
Sanxi, i. 172.287. 320
Sapiens, ii. 134. 270
Sapieiitia, i. 154
Sapo, i. 211.319. ii. 100.
222
Sappliiru?, i. 8. 47
Sappho, phus, ii. 335.
345
Sapui, i. 319
Sarcina;, i. 160
Sarcio, i. 288. 322
Sardeis, dis, i. 104
Sardonix, ii. 327
Sarsi, i. 322
Sas, ii. 95
Sat, ii. 54
Sata, ii. 177
Satago, i. 247. 324
Sate, ii. 145
Satiari, ii. 62
Satias, i. 168
Satin', ii. 338
Satis, ii. 34. 61. 144, 145
Satis capio, i. 210
Satis do, i. 181
Satis exigo, i. 247
Satisfacio, i. 207. ii. 222
Satraps, i. 143
Saturn, ii. 310
Satur, i. 65. ii. 88
Satura, i. 65
Saturare, ii. 222
Saturnale, i. 1 IS
Saturnalia, i. 118. ii. 177
Saturor, ii. 102
Saturus, i. 65
Saxo, ii. 319
Scabo, i. 219. 324
Scabiitia, es, i. 138
Scalfe, i. 160
Scalpo, i, 264
Scamnum, ii. 268
Scampnum, ii. 268
Scando, i. 223 '
Scatere, ii. 222
Scaturio, i, 312
Scelus, i. 83
Scena, ii. 288
Gg2
Sceptrum, ii. 283
Schema, i. 119. 147
Scientia, ii. 177
Scilicet, li. 152. 308
Scindo, i. 176. 234. 240.
316. ii. 309
Scio, i. 283. 317. ii. 33-f,
335
Sciolus, ii. 335
Scipio, i. 27
Scire tuum, i. 22
Sciscidi, i. 176
Sciscitari, ii. 44
Scisco, i. 223
Scit fidibus, ii, 183
Scitus, ii. 31 1
Scivi, i. 317
Scius, ii. 335
Scobis, i. 38. 41. 49. 143
Scolius, ii. 367
Scopje, i. 160
Scopera, i. 160
Scopula, i. 160
Scorpio, i. 56. 140
Scorpion, ii. 333
Scorpios, i.-43
Scorpius, i. 140
Scortum, i, 9 bis
Scribo, i. 172. 218. ii,
288. 304
Scriplum, ii, 352
Scripsi, i. 172. 320. ii.
2SS
Sciiptlum, ii. 352
Scriptulum, ii. 352
Scrobs, bi.s, i. 40, 41. 50,
51. J 43
Scrupulum, i. 155. ii.
352
Sculpo, i. 264
Scutum, tus, i. 145
Se, ii. 75. 33'>
Sebe, ii. 252
Secatio, i. 187
Secedo, i. 239
Secerno, i. 262
Secius, ii. 33. 304
Seco, i. 186, 187
Secors, i. 76. 88
Sectio, i. 187
Sector, ii. 104
Secubo, i. 183
Secum, ii. 308
Secundo, ii. 145
Secundum, ii. 37. 152
Securis, i. 91
Secus, i. 46. ii. 37, 38.
144.304
Sed, ii. 156. 337
Sedeciin, ii. 85. 507
Index of Words.
Sedeo, i. 80. ns. 200.
3'J3. 324. ii. 22'2. SO-l
Sea. s, i. 80. ii. 304.
Scdile, i.'71
Sedo, ii. 101
Sr-duco, i 222
Seedes., ii. 252
Seses, i. 79, 80. 100. ii.
322. 341
Segnitia, es, i. 138, 154
Sejcrr;.;are, ii. (37
St-jungo, i. 241
Seligo, i. 248. ii. .304
SHtnel, ii. 337
Semeritem, tiiii, li>, i. 92
Semipatfir, i. 148
Semis, i. 41. ii. 342
Seinisopitus, ii. 305
Seoiissis, i. 11, 12. 41. ii.
342
Scmpiterniis, ii. 352
Senator, ii. 81
Senatoies, i. 3
SeiiatMS-consuItum, i. ill
Seiiecio, ii. 90
.Senccta, i. 227
Seneclus, i. 48. 86. 143.
227. ii. 142
Seneo, i. 311
•Senesco, i. 227. 311
Senex, i. 90. 100, 101.
143. 311. ii. 80, 88
Senio, i. 8. 28
Senium, i. 135. 155
Sensi, i. 172. 287. 320.
322
.Stiisuiii, siis, i. 146
Seiitio, i. 172. 287. 320.
322
Sentes, i. 157
Sentis, i. 59. 41. 92
Separo, ii. 305
. Sepelio. i. 285, 286
Sepes, ii. 2^8
Sepio, i. 289, 290
Seplasia, siiim, i. 157
Seplasiarius, i. lS7
Sepono, i. 260
Scps, i. 50. 86. 143
Septeiiiber, i. 6. 75. 103
Se[)teinflecim, ii. 85
Septemplicis, i. 168
Septiinx, i. 12
Sepulcra, ii. 280
Sequana, i. 8. 12
Sequenti, i. 102
Sequeiituni, i. 1 15
Sequester, i. 147
Seqiior, i. 298. ii, -22'1
Ssr, ii. 520
Seraphim, i. 22
S?rapis, i. 120, 122
Serenum, ii. 177
Series, i. 272
Sermo, i. 27. 71. 91. ii.
179. 319
Sero, i. 271, 272. 317. ii.
150. 3.34
Serpens, i. 58. ii. 134
Serpo, i. 264. ii. 222
Sena, i. 162. 272. ii.
177
Sertos, i. 162
Sertum, i. 162. ii. 177
Servabus, i. 64
Servilius, ii. 288
Servio, i. 283. ii. 2G.
222
SerX'ire servitutero, ii. 30.
184
Servitium, ii. 186
Seivitus, i. 48. 86
Servitutium, i. 115
Servius, ii. 228
Servom, ii. 255
Servos, ii. 284
Servus, ii. 173, 179
Sesaiiia, um, i. 137
Sesciinx, i, 12. ii. 288
Seuqiiidie?, i. 36
Se.-teitium, us, i. 69. 146.
ii. \19 bit. 235, 236
Sestos, i. 17
Set, ii. 275. 284
S&vi, i. 317
Sexciiux, ii. 288
Sextans, i. 11, 12. 114
Sextilis, i, I(j3
Sextus, ii. 228
Sexiim, xiis, i, 46. 146
Si, ii. 175
Sibe, ii. 269
Sibikun, lus, i. 146. M8
Sic, ii. 336
Sicis, ii. 272
Sicubi, ii. 333
Sie-uti, ii. 333
Sido, i. 232. 240. 313
Sidus, i. 83. ii. 288
Sieni, ii. 116
Sifilare, ii. 270
Sifiius, ii. 284
Sigillum, ii. 89. 304
Signuni, ii. 179
Silentuin, i. 1 15
Sileo, i. 192
Slier, i. 19. 155
Silex, i. 151
Siligo, i. 150
Silva, ii. 28cJ
Silvaniis, ii. 238
S.lvesler, i. 76. ii. 5»
Silvia, Li. 288
Silvius, ii. 288
Similax, i. 51
Similis, ii. 28
Simo, on, i. 140
Sinnois, i. 82. ii. 243
Simplex, i. 90. ii. 8S '
Simul, ii. 175
Simnlacbrum, ii. 302
Sin, ii. 338
Sinapi, pis, i. 22, 23.
140. 155. 164
Sinciput, i. 88. ii. 325
Sindon, i. .30
Sine, ii. 39. 330
Singularis, rius, i. i43
Singoli, i. 157. ii. 179
Singultio, i. 285, 286
Sinister, ii. 88
Siuistinius, ii. 88
Sino.i. 262, 2G3. 317
Sinum, nus, i. 146. 143
Siquidem, ii. 145. SOS
Siquis, ii. 272. 30S
Siremps, i. 168
Siren, a, enis, i. 137. ii.
319. 338
Sirmio, i. 15
Sis, ii. 95
Siser, i. 32, 33. 185
Sisto, i. 278, 279. ii. 100
Sitire, ii. 222
Sitis, i. 91. 96. 154
Situm, ii. 510
Situs, i. 151
S;vi, i. 317
SHiaragdus, i. 47. ii. 202
Sniianimis, ii, 296
Smilioino, ii. 296
Smilax, i. 51. ii. 325
Soboles, i. 1 10. 154. ii.
195. 28,5
Socer, i. 46, 67
Sociabus, i. 64
Socordia, i. 83. 154
Socrates, i, 63. 122. 131
St)crus, i. 46
Sodalis, i. 103
Sol, i. 29. 73. 113. 151.
ii. 319.337
Soledas, ii. 252
Solemme, ii. 288
Solens, ii. 134
Soleo, i. 304. ii. 143
Soles, i. 151
Solia, i. 155
Solius, ii. 288. 293
SoUers, ii. 288
Soliistinaum,
Index of Words.
Sollistitnum, ii. 288
Sollistimus, ii. 35!
Sol Ins, ii. '288
Soloccismu'!. ii. 297
Solvit, ii. 178
Solvo, i. 171. 280. 517.
324 bis. ii. 222
Solum, i. 155. ii. 179
Solus, i. 68. 169
Solutum, ii. 512
Somnus, i. 148. ii. 270
Sonipes, i. 80. ii- 341
Sono, i. 183. IS". 309. ii.
100
Sonus, i. 148
Sopera, ii. 284
Sophroiiiiim, i. 10
Sopio, ii. 304, 305
Sopor, i. 151. ii. 304
Soracte, i. 96
Sorbeo, i. 198
Sorbitio, i. 199
Sorbo, i. 198
Sordis, i. 100. 169
Sorex, i. 53. 56
Sorites, i. 37
Sors, i. 100. 154
Sortior, i, 296
Sos, ii. 95
Sosipater, i. 147
Sospes, i. 101. ii. 86
Sotularis, i. 42
Souo, om, ii. 256. 284
Spadix, i. 52
Spado, ii. 352
Spargo, i. 249. 322
Spartiata, ii. 88
Sparum, rus, i. 146
Species, i. 1 25. ii. 298
Specie, i. 208. 313
Spectaculum, la, i. 162
Spectare, ii. 222
Spectat, i. 43
Spectatio, rei, ii. 18
Specter, ii. 102
Specus, i. 44. 46. 124.
148 bis
SpelsEum, ii. 288
Spepondi, i. 175
Spemo, i. 26 1 . 317
Spero, ii. 67. 113
Spes,i. 125. 154. ii. 298
Sphaera, ii. 297. 352
Sphinx, i. 89. 112
Spica, cum, cus, i. 146
Spinter, i. 32. ii. 320.
339
Spinus, i. 1 9, 20
, Spirare, ii. 100
Spiritus, i. 137
Spissigradissimus. ii. 89
Splen, i. GO. ii. 319
Spiendeo, i. 192
Spolium, lia, i. 162
SpondjEiun, ii. 366
Spondeo, i. 174,175.202.
325
Pponsa, ii. 134
Sponsalioriim, Hum, i.
118
Sponte, i. 1C9. ii. 145
Spupondi, i 325
Spijo, i. 2 1 7
.•^puriiis, ii. 227
Squaliiudo, s.jualor, i.
140
Stadium, us, i. 146
Stanna, i. 150
Stare, ii. 222
Stater, i. 76. 138
Slatim, ii. 311
Stativa, i. 160. ii. 177,
178
Stater Jupiter, i. 280. ii.
311
Statuere, ii. 223
Statum,ii. 210, 311
Status, i. 214
Stemma, i. 93
Stercus, i. 84. 100
Sterilitates, i. 154
Sterne, i. 261. 317. ii.
71
Sterto, i. 278,279. 319
Steti, ii. 309
Stigo, i. 312
Stinguo, i. 242
Stipendium, ii. 296
Stipes, i. 36
Slips, i. 86. 143
Stipulatus, ii. 139
Stipulo, ii. 105
Stipulor, i. 295. ii. 104,
105
Stirps, i. 2. 49, 50, 51.
86. 1 1 1
Stiti, i. 325
Stlis, ii. 284
Ste, i. 176. 181. 325. ii.
222. 309, 310
Stemachor, i. 295
Sterax, i. 52. ii. 325
Strabo, i. 140
Strabus, i. 140. ii. 282
Stravi, i. 317
Strenuus, ii, 89
Strepo.i. 264. 319
Stria, i. 141
Strideo, do, i. 201. 229.
309. 325
Strigil, lis, i. 02. 97. 109.
141
Strigo, i. 141
Strit'Osu-;, i. 141
Stringo, i. 244
Strix, i. 89
Struo, i. 214. 322. ii. 923
Studeo, i. 192. ii, 271
223
Stultitia, i. 154
Stupefaiio, i. 207
Stupendium, ii. 255
Stupere, ii. 523
Styrax, i. 52. ii. 325
Styx, i. 51. 89
Suadeo, i. 203. 322. ii.
223
Suavium, i. 10
Sub, ii. 40. 70. 72. 182.
336
Subduco, i. 222
Subductarius funis, i. 222
Subeo, i. 284. ii. 223
Subeor, ii. 118
Suber, i. 1 9, 20. 32
Subeunt, ii. 306
Subice, ii. 284
Subigo, i. 247
Subjicio, j. 208. ii. 223
Subsolanus, i. 13
Subito, ii. 334
Subitus, ii. 305
Sublabor, i. 299
Sublimen, turn, i. 141
Sublinio, i. 282
Subluceo, i. 205
Submergo, i. 249
Submitto, i. 276. ii. 270
Subnitor, i. 299 '
Suboleo, i. 195 his
Snboles, ii. 283
Suborior, i. 302
Subrepo, i. 264
Subscribe, i, 219
Subscus, i. 48, 85
Sabseciva, ii. 288
Subsellia, i. 162
Subsequor, i. 298
Subsiciva, ii. 288
Subsideo, do, i. 201. 233
Subsiste, i. 279. ii. 100
Substerno, i. 261
Subste, i. 181
Subser, ii. 41, 42
Subtil, lis, i. 141
Subtraho, 1. 251
Subvenire, ii. 27
Subverto, i. 278
Suburbanum, L 7. ii., 179
Succedo, i. 239. ii. 223
Succend*,
Index of Wouds.
Succendo, i. 227. 310
Snccenseo, i. 190. 310.
ij. '225
Siiccensunii, i. 310
Successus, ii. 142
Succido, i. 238
ouccurro, i. 270. ii, 27
Succus, i. 1 IS
Suctus, i. 230
Sudare, ii. 223
Sudastur, ii. 90
Suesco, i. 22-i. 317
Suflfei-o. i. 267
Sufiicio, i. 207. 308. ii.
100. 223
Suffuici ., i. 283
Suggeio, i. 269
Suggestum, tu», i. l-i3.
146
Sugo, i. 250
Sui, ii. 75.91. 97
Suilla, ii. 177
Sulfur, ii. 288
Sulla, ii. 234
Sulmo, i. 15
Sum, ii. 13, 23. 26. 29.
35. 115. 138. 181
Summatium, turn,). 118
Summe, ii. 33!
Sunimito, ii 270
Sumo, i. 256. 520. ii. 67
Suo, i. 172. 21-i
Super, i. 65. ii. 40, 41,
42
Supera, ii. 178
Superare, ii. 100
Supercubo, i. 183
Siiperesse, ii. 223. 306
Superi, ii. 177
Superiie, ii. 331
Supcrsedeo, i. 201. ii.
100
Superus, i. 65
Siipiiiior, ii. S3
Supiuus, ii. 88
Suppar. ii. 339
Siipparum, rus, i. 146
Suppeditare, ii, 100
Suppeditor, ii. 102
Suppellex, i. 51. 70. 90.
98. 100, 12S, 143
Suppetise, i. IGO, 169
Suppetit, i. 277
Suppeto, i. 277
Snppingo, i. 245. 247
Suppleo, i. 199
Supplex, i. 90. 107. 109
Supplicatio, i. 140
Supplicium, i. 140. ii.
69
Snpplico, i. 90. 185
Supra, ii. 37
Sura, ii. 256
Surdaiter, ii. 90
Surpo, i. 243 bit. 320
Suria, ii. 256
Siiriie, i. 160
Surius, ii. 284
Surnxe, i. 173
Surrexi, i. 320
Sus, i. 85. 113, 160, ii.
81. 344
Siisa, i. 1 63
Sustfip'o, i. 210
Suvpeiulo, i. 230. ii. 223
Suspicio, i. 209
Suspicor, i 209. ii. 113
Siialineo, i. 190
Sustollo. i 255. 325
Su-urni.s, i. 148
Siithui, i. 15
Siitriiia, i. 137. ii. 180
Suus, ii. 75 95. 97. 137
Syconiorus, ii. 052
Sylla. i. 10
Syllattirio, i. 312
Svinbola, lum. Ins, i. 146
Syiii:iaplia, um, us, i.
139
Sypliix, ii. 3'27
Svrinx, i. 39
Syrisciis, ii. 9u
Syr^eis, i. 104
Syrtis, i. 92
Tabellae, ii. 179
Tabeliarius, i. 68
Taberna, ii. 180
Tabe.s, bo '.bum, i. 141.
154. 169
Tubulis, li. 180
Tacco, i. 196. 313. ii.
223
Tacitius, ii. 89
Taciturn, ii. 305. 312
Ta;.lct, i. 307. ii. 32
Taenaios, i. 48
Taenarus, i. 127
Tajter, ii. 239
Talio, i, 27, 23
Taliones, i. 154
Talis, ii. 7
Talpa, i. 58, ii, 83
Tarn, ii. 60, 61. 145
Tamdiu, ii, 150
Tamen, ii. 159
Tametsi, ii. 153
Tandem denique, ii. 167
Tandem itaque, ii. 157
Tango, i. 175, 176, 177.
245. ii. 310
Tanquam, ii. 154. 157
Tanqiiamsi, ii, 154
Tanti, ii. 65. 144
Tantidem, ii. 65
Tanto, ii. 178
THntum, ii, 145, 146.
157
Tautumdem, i. 169
Tantus, ii. 7
Tapes, i, 36.79.139. Wl,
143. ii. 323
Taras, i. 17
Taidare, ii. 100
Ta.iar.i, ni.-i, i, 127.
14i)
Taurus, i. 5
Taygetus, i, 127
T. , ii. 84. 332
Ttomes-sa, ii. 302
Tecum, ii "09
Teges, i 79, 80
Tego, ii 304
Teg u la, ii. 304
Te'hire.-^, i. 154
Tfllus i. 18. 49. 85. ii.
324. .344
Temetuin. ii, 352
Temno, i. 260. 321
TeiTipe, i. 23, 24. 164.
169. ii. 331
Temperare, ii. 224
Templum, i. 2P. ii. ISO
Tempora, i. 162
Tempus, i. 48. 100. 162.
ii. 149. 180
Temsl, i. .391
Temtor, i. 261
Tenoo, i. 175, 2'29. 231.
310. li 224
T<'nel)rK, i. 24. 160
Teneo, i. 189. 3l0. 313
Tener, rus, i. 67
Teneri, ii. 62
Teneritas, tiido, i. 140
Tentum, i. 310
Tenuis, ii. 89. 264
Tenus, ii. 39
Tepefacio, i. 207
Teres, i. 79. ii, 86
Tergeo, go, i. 203. 249.
309. 322. ii. 332
Tergum, gus, i. 83. 146
Termes, i. 36, 80
Terminalia, i, 118
Ternio, i, 8, 27, 88
Tero, i. 187. ^65, 266.
317
Terra,
Index of Words.
Terra, i. 6.' 18. 63. 154.
ii. 50. 158. 180. 298
Tet^rai, ii. 298
Terrefacio, i. 207
Terreo, i. 183
Terricula, lum, i. 137
Tersi, i. 322
Tertiana, i. 7
Tertio, ii. 146
Tertiiim, ii. 1-16
Tertius decimus, ii. S5
Tenincii, ii. 65
Testa, turn, i. 137
Testatus, ii. 139
Testis, ii. 81
Testor, ii. 104
Tetigi, ii. 310
Tetiiyos, ii. 344
Teucris, ii. 170
Texo, i. 281. 319
Textrina, i. 137. ii. 180
Textum, tus, i. 143
Thebas, ben, i. 160
Thema, i. 71. 119
Theologaster, ii. 90
Theophani.i. 120
Thermodontis, ii. 299
Thesaurus, i, 146
Tlieseu, i. 66
Thetis, i. 120. ii. 338
Thiaras, i. 35
Thomas, ii. 340
Thomix, i. 54
Thorax, i. 5'2
Tlios, i. 82
Thraces, ii. 341
Thrax, i. 112
Thucydides, i. 147
Thus, i. 20. 85. 113. ii.
289
Thymiama, ii. 352
Tiara, as, i. 35. 138
Tiberis, i. 91
Tiberius, ii. 227
Tibicen, i. 73. ii. 296.
338
Tibur, i. 16
Tiburs, i. 143
Tigillum, ii. 304
Tigimm, niis, i. 146. ii.
304
Tigranes, i. 147
TigrideSj ii. 341
Tigris, i. 12. 91
Timachides, i. 147
Timeo, i. 192. ii. 181.
224
Timor, i. 151. ii. 321
Timotheus, ii. 303
Tinea, ii. 28»
Tingo, i. 241
Tinnire, ii. lOO
Tis, ii. 92
Titan, i. 73. 141. ii. 319.
33 S
Titio, i. 27
Titubatus, ii. 142
Titus, ii. 227
Tofus, ii. 289
Tolo, i. 255. ii. 118
Tollo, i. 176. 255 l/is. ii.
118
Tomus, i. 44
Tonat, ii. 169
Tondeo, i. 174. 201.325.
ii. 101
Tonitru, i. 141
Tonix, 1. 52
Tono, i. 184. 319
Tonstrina, i. 137. ii. 180
Topascus, i. 47
Tophus, ii. 289
Tdial, i. 139
T'Tcular, ii. 352
Toiqueo, i. 204. 321,
322
Torques, quis, i. 40. 42.
142
Torrens, -i. C. 110. ii.
177
Torreo, i, 190. 321, 322
Torris, i. j9
Torsi, i. 321, 322
Tot, i. 164. ii. 7
Totae, i. 68
Totidem, i. 164. ii. 308
Totiens, ii. 249
Totius, ii. 298
Totondi, i. 325 ,.
Totus, i. 67. ii. 90
Trabes, i. 70 143
Trabs, i. 143
Tracto, i. 312
Traditio alter!, ii. 18
Trado, i. 232. ii. 224
Traduco, i. 222
Tradux, i. 53
Traheae, i. 327
Traho, i. 251. 322
Trajicio, i. 208
Tralleis, i. 104
Trames, i. 36
Tranquilium, ii. 173
Trans, ii. 57
Transcribe, i. 219
Transdnco, i. 222
Transeo, i. 285
Transfigere, ii. 224
Transgredior, i. 301
Transciam, ii. 118
Transigo, i. 247
TransmitterP, ii. 100
Tran^pono, i. 260
Transvelio, i. 251
'iVansvona, ii. 80
Trapezus, i. 17. 86
Traxi, i. 322
Tredecim, ii. 307
Tremefacio, ii. 307
Tremi.-co, i. 311
Tremo, i. 256
Trepidare, ii. 100
Trts, i. in
Tribractys, ii. 366
Tribula, lum, i. 137
Tribunal, ii. 337
Tribunus-plebis, i. 61
Tiibuo, i. 2i4. ii. 29
T.ibus, i. 44. 124
Tributum, tus, i. 143.
146
Tricae, i. 160
Triceni, ii. 308
Triceps, i. 88. ii. 508
Tricolor, ii. 308
Tricorpor, rus, i. 106.
108
Tricuspide, i. 104
Tiidens, i. 50. 99. ii. 179
Triduum, ii. 308
Triens, i. 12
Trifur, ii. 321
TrigsD, i. 157. ii. 296
Triginta, ii.-328. 330
Tiijugffi. ii. 296
Trilix, i. 168
Trimus, ii. 351
Tiipes, ii. 341
Triplices, i. 168
Tiiplico, i. 185
Tripus, i, 49. 85. ii. 324.
345
Triremis, i. 103
Triste li.pns, i. 7
Tristor, ii. 7 1
Tritero, ii. 352
Trilicum, i. 135
Tritino,ii. 352
Trivi, i. 317
Trivluin, ii. 308
Triumphatus, ii. 142
Triumpos, li. 280
Troades, ii. 299. 341
Troas, ii. 340
Trochajus, ii. 366
Troes, ii. 299. 341
Trojugena, ii. 308
Tropaei, i. 13
Tropasum, ii. 289
Trophaeum, ii. 270. 289
Tros,
Index of Words.
Tros, i. 8-2. Iiy. ii. 323
Tiiides. i. 37
Trii I.,, i. '236. 322
Trux, ii. 327
Tiiul, ji. 284
Tuber, i. 32
Tuberculiim, i. 33
TudtT, i. 16
Tiules, i. 37. 231
Tuilito. i. 231
Tudo, i. 231
Tiicor, i. 297. 309. ii. 10+
Till, ii. 97. 127
Ti.li, i. 325. ii. .309
Tiillianiim, ii. 177
Tuniuiti, i. 123
Tunc, ii. 18
TiiDdo, i. 174. 177. 230
bs. 313
Tuor, i. 207 309. ii. 104
Tiirba, ii. 185
Tiuben, bo, i. 70. 72.
140. li. 101
Turgeo. i. 205. 322
Tnrris, i. 92. ii. 268. 277
Tiirsi, i. 322
TiiTUir, i. 56. 58. 142. ii,
521
Tus, ii. 289
Tusculanum, ii. 179
Tusses, i. 154
Tiissis, i. 91
Tutari, i. 297
Tims, ii. 97. 127, 34*
Tygris, ii. 341
Tympano.s i. 14('>
Typhoei, eos, i. 65
Tyrannis, i. 38. 81
TyrinUiius, i. 68
Tyrus, i. 17
U.
Ubei, ii. 284
Uber, i. 6. 32. 74, 93.
107. ii. 86
Ubi, ii. 18. 46, 47, 48,
50. 333
Ubicunique, ii. 308
Ubiqiie, ii. 308. 353
Ubivis, ii. 308. 333
Ulcis<or, i. 300, ii, 104
Ulcus, i. 83
Ullins, ii. ,353
inius, i. 67
Ulmiic, i. 19, 20
Ulter, ii. 88
Ulterior, ii. 88
Ultimus, ii. 88
Ultra, ii. 37, 528.330
Ultiis, ii. 139
Miilarp, it, 225
Ulvsses, i. 78. 120 oil.
"l43
Uiicia, i. 11, 12
rnde, ii. 47, 48. 49
Un;leqiia<lra_s;iiita, ii. 85
l^iidequiiiquagesmuis, ii.
85
Uiidevisririti, ii. 85
Undo, i. 179
Unedo, i. 71
Unguen, i. 30 73
Unguis, 1. 39. 98. 100
Uneuo, go, i. 242
Unic-niqiie, ii. 308. 352
lliiicii.-;, ii. 88
Uiiigt-nitiis, li. .308
Unio, i 8. 27, 28
Uuiversi, ii. .352
Universus, ii. 308
Un^us. ii. 298. 353
Unus. i. (17. 152
Unu.« & viginti, ii. S5
Urbes, bis, i. 1 16
Urbs i. 17. 49. 111. ii.
180
Urbs Roma, ii. 15
Urgeo, i. 205. 322
Urino, or, ii. 106
Uro, i, 270. 321. ii. 100
Urpix, i. 52
Ursi, i. 322
Ursula Ramus, i. 10
Urticas, i. 150
Usque, ii. 37, 38
Us.si, i. 321
Usura, sus, i. 139
U.surpor, ii. 102
Usuvenit, ii. 308
Usu«, ii. 64
Ut, ii. 9. 154. 160. 175.
194
Utensilia, i. 163
Uter, i. 114
Uter,i. 67. 142. ii. 90, 91
Utcrque, ii. 91
Uterus, i. 142. 146
Uti, ii. 533
Utile, ii. 180. 330
Utilitas, i. 109
Utilitatium, i. 110
Utinam, ii. 175
Utor, i. 299. ii. 71, 104.
140, 307
Utrius, ii. 298. 353
Utrobiqiie, ii. 308 bi:
Utrum, ii. 91
Uxor, i. .■i4. ii. 173. 180
Uxoretn duceie, ii, 177
V.
V.icare, ii. 62, 63. 224
Vacuus, ii. 62, 63. 89
Vada, i. 162. ii. ISO
Vadis, i. 78 111
Vado, i, 2T'. bis. ii. 304
Vador, i. 295
Va''um. dus, i. 146. 188.
ii. 304
Vae. ii. 74
Vag.^, gor, ii. 105. 224
Vilde, ii. 331
Valdoqiiatn. ii. 158
V.nli trist", i. 22
V;ile dico, ii. 307
Valen, i. 192, 193, ii.
224
Valerius, ii. 277
Valesius, ii, 277
Valftudine. i. 154 i/i
Valide, ii. 331
Valles, lis, i. 142
Vallum, lus, i. 146
V;.lvae, i, 160
Vannus, i, 4 4
Vapulo, i. 305, 306. ii.
68
Variare, ii. 100, 101
Varix, i. 52.54 ii. 326
Vas, i. 35.78. 111. 126.
133. ii, 180. 322
V.isa, ii. 180
Vasi.i. 126. .322
Vasis, i. 35. 78, 133. ii.
. 322
Vasum, i. 126
Vates, i. 78. 109. ii, 81
Ve, ii. 332. 357
Veam, ii. 252
Vccordia, i, 154
Vecors, i. 88
Vectigale, i, 70. 118
Vectis, i. 39. 100
Vectius elpis, i. 10
Vehemens, ii. 296
Vehillam, ii. 261
Veho, i. 251. 322. ii.
101.224
Veillam, ii. 261
Veles, i. 80
Velis, ii. 342
Vollam, ii. 261
Velle, ii. 27. 224
,Velle tuum, i, 22
Vellifacio, or, ii. 106
Velio, i. 254, 255. 321,
322
Veil us, i. 83
Velocitas, i, 154
Velox,
Velox, ii. 326
■Vnluti, ii. 333
Vemens, i. 3'27. ii. 296
Vcnatio, turn, tus, i. 139
Vendicare. ii. '22-i
Vpiitio, i. 232
Vene6ciiim, ii. 2fi8
Veneo, i. 28 1, 286. 305.
310. ii. 68
Veneio, or, ii. 104. 106
V(ni(»ntum, i. 115
Veninius, ii. 316
Venio, i. 111. 286 his.
3! 2. ii. 13. 224. 304
Venter, i. 1 14
Ventito, i. 312
Ventus, i. 44. 148
Vennm, i. 286. ii. 152
Venuiid ., i. 181
Venus, i. 3, 4. 83, S4
Veper, i . 42
Vepre, i. 135. 157
Veprecula, i 42
Vepres, pris, i. 37. 39.
42. 135. 157
Ver, i. 32. 155. 171. ii.
339
Verlia, ii. 180
Verber, i. 33
Verbera, i. 162. ii. 69
Verberabilissiinus, ii. 89
Vereor, i. 293. 295. ii.
22 104
Vereor ne, ii. 159. 162
Verpor ne non, ii. 164
Vereor ut, ii, 159. 162
Vereor ut ne, ii. 159. 162
Vereor ut non, ii. 162
Vergo, i. 250 bis. ii. 100
Veridicus, ii. 304
Veiitiim, ii. 141
Vermen, i. 141
Vermes, mis, i. 58. 109.
141. ii. 269
Verminare, i. 141
Vero, ii. 334
Veronensium, sum, i. 116
Verres, i. 37. 78. 120. ii.
179
Verri, i. 120. 325
Verro, i. 270 bis
Verso, i. 312
Versum, ii. 38
Versus, i. 148
Versus, ii. 37, 38
Vertex, i. 53. ii. 326
Verto, i. 277. 279. 324,
325. ii. 29. 100, 101.
224
Veru, i. 22. 124. 164
Index of Words.
Vervecina, ii. 177
Vervex, i. 89, 90. ii. 326
Vescor, i. 303. ii. 71. 140
Vesper, ra, ri, rus, i. 100.
138
Vesperascit, i. 311
Vespertiiio, i. 56
Vester, ii. 97. 127
Vestia.>, ii. 269
Ve<tibuia, lum, i. 137
Vestio, ii. 101
Vestis, i. 38
Vestras, i. 109
Vfstrarc, ii. 87
Vestri, ii. 97. 127
Vetatio, i. 187
Veto, i. 184, 319
Vetulus, ii. 88
Vetus, i. S3, 84. 93. 105.
107, 108
Vexi. i. 322
Via, ii. 180
Vias, i. 63
Vlbex, i. 89
Vibix, i. 52. 55. ii. 326
Viceni singuli, ii. 85
Vicensimus, ii. 249
Vicesimus primus, ii. 85
Vicies semel, ii. 85
Vicis, i. 169
Vico, i. 222
Victor, i. 6. 94
Viclrix. i. 6. 94. ii. 526
Victu, j. 123
V ictus, ii. ,352
Vicxit, ii. 277. 284
Vide, ii. 181
Videlicet, ii. 152
Viden', ii. 333
Video, i.200. 325. ii. 131
Viduare, ii. 63
Vieo, i. 199
Vietus, ii. 352
Vigil, i. 73. 98. 108. ii,
319
Vigilandus, ii. 141
Vigilare, ii. 225
Vigilatus, ii. 141, 142
Vigilia, lium, i. 137
Vigiliae, i. 9
Viginti-unus, ii, 85
Viginti-duo, ii. 85
Vigor, i. 72. 152. ii. 321
Vma, i. 150
Vinacea, i. 163
Vinaceum, us, i. 146
Vincio, i. 172, 287
Vinco, i. 222. 310
Vincuia, ii. 69
Vindex, ii. 81
Vindicari, ii. 180
Vindico, ii. 225. 285
Vindicta, ii. ISO
Vinea, ii. 289
Vinum, i. 150. ii. 180
Violens, tus, i. 143
Vir, I. 3. 33. 65, 66. ii.
80. 180. 339 bis
Vira, i. 65
Vires, i, 150
Virea, ii. 180
Virgilius, i. 68, 69
Virgineu-!, ii. 303
Virgo, i. 72. ii. 319
Viris, i. 111. 134
Virod, ii. 284
Virtus, i, 48. 86. 106.
115, ii. 324. 344
Virulentus, ii. 552
Virum, i. 69
Virus, i. 65
Virus, i, 45. 155. 169
Vis, i. 91. 96. 111. 133.
154. 160. 169. ii. 263
VisceVa, i. 163. 169
Viscum, ens, i. 83. 146.
152. 155. 169
Viso, i. 273, 274. 311.
3 24, 325
Visum, ii. 310
Vita, i. i54
Vitalis, i. 104
Vitrea, ii. 180
Vitrum, i. 155
Vivere vitam, ii. 30. 134
Viviradix, i. 52
Vivo, i. 280. 310. 322. ji
30.71. 184
Vix, i. 169.322. ii. 326
Vobem, ii. 269. 284
Vocalis, i. 7
Vocari, ii. 13
Vocifero, or, ii. 100. 106
Vocis, i. 70. ii. 304
Voco, i.70. 180. ii. 304
Volente, i. 101
Volitare, ii. 258
Volnus, ii. 284
Volo, i. 253. ii. 9. 118,
139
Volt, ii. 118
Voltis, ii, 118
Volucer, i. 75. ii. 277
Voiucris, i. 38. 58. 103.
109. ii. 277
Volvo, i. 281. 317. 325.
ii. 101
Volvos, i. 58
Volutabrum, ii. 302, 305
Voluto, ii. 101
Vomer,
m
Index of Wokds.
Vomer, i. 32. 42. 74. ii. Vulgaris, rius, i. 143
277
Vomica, ii. 353
Vomis, i. 4'J. ii. 277
Vomui, i. 319
Versus, ii. 284
Vortex, i. 53. ii. 255
Voster, ii. 284
Voveo, i. 179
Vuljrus, i. 1, 2.45. 148.
155
Vulnus, i. 83. ii. 344
Vulpes, i. 5. 56. ii. 82
Vulpinor, i. 311
Vulsi, i. 521,322
Vulltir, i. 58. 142. ii.
321
Vox, i. 51. 70.ii. 304. 326 Vulturius, i. 58
X.
XanthuF, i. 14
Xeno, nori, i. 140
Xeno])hon, i. 74
Z.
Zephiriis, i. 12
Zeugma, i. 15
Zizania, i. 165
TABLE OF MATTERS.
^-j, observation upon this letter, ii.
250 ; replaced by E, ii. 252 ;
what name it signifies when alone,
ii. 227 ; its use as a French par-
ticle, ii. 50
a, termination of the Greek accusative,
i. 121
at, final, of what gender, i. 25 j its de-
clension, i. 62. 71 J its quantity,
ii.327
a, its quantity in composition, ii. 305,
306. 309 ; its increase to the
plural, ii. 327 j to that of the
verbs, ii. 312
ah, its quantity in composition, ii. 306
abbrevialions, of the ancients, ii. 289
ablatives, of the second conjugation, i.
69 ; of the third, i. 93 j in E and
1, i. 98
ablatives, ahso]uie, ii. 72. 181, 182
ablatives, remarks on the, ii. 83 ; whnt
governs them, ii. 2; governed by
nouns, ii". 61. 69 ; by verbs, ii. 61.
66. ^0; by prepositions, ii. 38,
.39; even when understood, ii. 19,
20
absinthe, of two genders, i. 2
absolving, verbs of j their government,
ii. 61
Acaialectic verses ; particulars of, ii.
373
accents, of their nature, and number of
them, ii. 353 ; their use, ii. 354 j
in verse, ii. 359
accent, acwXe, its use, ii. 354; errors in
the use of it, ii. 358
accent, circumflc x, its use, ii. 354 ;
errors in the use of it, ii. 358 ; re-
placed by the acute, ii. 357
accent, grave, its use, ii. 354. 358
accents, Greek, preserved in Latin, ii.
359
accents, Hebrew, preserved in Latin, ii.
360
acctisalive, of the third conjugation, i.
91. 116
accusative, what it denotes, and what
governs it, U. 2 ; governed by
verbs, ii. 29. 33. 43. 70; by neu-
ter verbs, ii. 95. 196; by preposi-
tions, ii. 31. 35.40. 43. 175. 193;
by adjectives, ii. 20. 34; by nouns,
ii. 18. 132
acciisalivef
Table of Matters.
accusative, of the person, governed by
the verb, ii. 31
accusative, understood after the verb,
ii, 169
accusative, the, of the actix-e verbs, be-
comes the nominative of the pas-
sive, ii. 169
accusaiivfs, two, governed by a single
verb, ii. 43
acti^oe, expression, affecied in French,
ii. 123. See verbs active.
accusing, verbs of, their government, ii.
61
od, its quantity in compositinn, ii. 306
adjectivfs, their motion and variation,
ii. 86 ; of how many sorts, i. 5 ;
their genders, i6irf. ; agree with tl)eir
substantive, ii. 3 ; sometimes un-
derstood, iiirf. ii. nO; whatought
to be supplied when they are neu-
ter, i. n. ii. 3. 170. 236 ; what is
understood, when taken sub»tan-
tively, ii. 173; w,th what substan-
tive they aj;ree wlien there are
two, ii. 9. 14; several joined with
the same substantive, li. 4
adjectives, which want the positive de-
gree, ii. 88 J the comparative,
ibid. ; the j-uperiative, ibid.
adjeclivs, taken substantively, i. 6. ii.
21. J 77
adjectives, derived from verbs ; their
government, ii. 20. 34
adjectives, understood, which govern the
dative, ii 26
adjectives, followed by a genitive, ii. 16.
20, 21. 172! See verbs used ad-
jectively.
admiration, verbs of, their government,
ii. 22
Adonic verses, particulars of, ii. 590
adverbs, if to be marked with an accent,
ii. 358 ; admit of comparison, but
not of number, ii 144; several
words improperly taken for ad-
verbs, ib d.
orffer6j, governing the genitive, ii. 18
adverbs, relative, without antecedent,
ii. 187
adverbs, of number, ii. 85
<e, the pronunciation of this diphthong,
ii. 297
affective verbs, how the que is rendered
*hich follows them, ii. 9; their
government, ii. 21
affirmative, an, in Latin, ought to be
translated by a negative, and vice
versd, ii. 159, &c.
c^e, what space of time it includes, ii.
245
*i, the pronunciation of.this diphthong,
ii. 259 ; termination of some cases
of the 6r~t conjugation, i. 63
assisting or helpins, verbs of, their go-
venim' nt, ii. 27
ais, the qunntity of nouns of this termi-
nation, ii. 299
alcai' ver-e, particulars of, ii. 399
atcmani's verves, li. 389
amp/iilirac, of the feet of verses so call-
ed, ii. 367
amphimacer, or Crelic, of the feet of
verses so called, li. 367
an, its quantity in composition, ii.
306
anncnltiihon, an explanation of this
figure, ii. 192
annpfPit, of the feet of verses so called,
ii. 366 j of anapaestic verse, ii.
599
anastropkc, of the figure so called, ii.
152. 190
angels, of the genders of their names,
i. 3
ams. quantity of that increase, ii. 319
antecedent, understood, ii. 4. 172. See
Re I alive.
aniibdcchic, particulars of this foot, ii.
367
antiploiis and ennllage, particulars of
these two words, and what gram-
marians understand by them, ii.
195, &c.
antispasl feet, of verse, particulars of,
ii. 369
antit/tesib, of this figure, i. 328
aon, quaniity of this termination, ii.
300
A. P., what Roman name these letters
stand for, ii. 227
apheresis, of this figure, i. 327
a/)ocupe, of this figure, i. 327
opos/roptte, final, how used, ii. 291, 374
appellative, nouns, their gender, i. 3.
9, 10
apposittoii, what it is, ii. 15. 168; whe-
ther it tak(s place in the genitive
of the question ubi, ii. 51, 52
ar, of the gender of nouns ofthis ter-
mination, i. 31
Archilocliian verse, observations on,
ii. 389. 400
arts, the quantity of this increase, ii.
320
arum, the genitive plural in, its origin,
i.63
As, a Roman coin, its value, &c. ii.
235
as, genitive of the first conjugation, i.
u3
as.
4^>,
Table of Matters.
cj, the names of countries terminating
in, their ycndcr, ii. S7
as, final, its declension, i. 62, C3. 77 j
its gender, i. '35 ; its quantity, ii.
340 ; the quantity of its increase,
ii. 321
asking, verbs of, their government, ii.
44.67
asler, what this termination indicates, i.
19. ii. 90
attraction, to be distingnislied from go-
veTiititent, ii. 192, 193
au, of the pronunciation of this di|.h-
thong, ii. 'ij9
aubain, or nubenc, a forfie^ner, the root
of these words, ii. 270
avi, by what to know tiiat it is the pre-
terite of the first conjugation, i.
317
aus, quantity of the Greek words witli
tiiis tcrniination, ii. 300
«.T, the gender of words terminating in,
i. 52
B.
B, its affinity with P, ii, 268. 284;
with V, ii. 269 ; with M, ii. 270;
substituted for the digamma, ii.
283; added to sonic words, ii. 284
b, final, its quantity, ii. 336
bb, what these letters indicate, ii, 290
hacchic, of this foot, ii. 367
ber, final, its declension, i, 75
heris, increase of verbs, its quantity, ii.
313
bi, preterite, manner of finding its pre-
sent, i. 323
bissextile year, observations on, ii. 242
blante, nouns implying, in what case to
be put, ii. 19
bo, final, of the third conjuijation ; its
preterite and supine, i. 217
ho, ancient termination of the third and
fourth conjugation, ii. 106
boxirg, a French word ; from whence de-
rived, ii. 263
brachijcalalei tic verse, observations
upon, ii. 373
breathings of Greek words, marks for
the, ii. 282
bs, nouns in ; how their genitive formed,
i. 86
iundtis, termination of noims derived
from verbs; their government, ii. 12
C.
C, was sometimes but an aspiration in
the vulvar tongues, ii. 282
C, its affinity with G, ii. 273 ; with Q,
ii. 270; added, ii. 284
C, wh.it Roman name it stands for, ii.
227 ; what it signifies when in-
vertedji. 289
c, nouns ending in, their declension and
gender, i. 29 ; their genitive, i. 72 ;
its (piantity, ii. .'336
calends, of the Romans ; observations
on, ii, 241
calendar, the, both ancient and modern,
ii. 242
Cases, what constitutes their difference,
i. 100
cases, wanting in certain nouns, i. 165
cases, Greek, of the third declension, i.
119
catalectic verse, particulars of, ii. 373
cause, nouns expressing the cause or
motive of a thing; in what case
they are put, ii. 69. 181, 182
Ci?r, final, its genitive, i. 75
ceasing, verbs of, their government, ii.
22
cicsura, of its different species, ii. 37 1 ;
its power to lengthen short sylla-
bles, ii. 372
ck, of its pronunciation, ii, 281
charge. See State. i
Cbansius,.at what time he wrote, i. 153
ci, preterite ; method for finding its
present, i. .'j23
children, of the names of those ado[iteJ
by the Romans, ii, 229
Cicero, not always correct in his criti-
cism on language, ii. 136, 137
cities, their gender, i. 14,24; how go-
verned in the questions of place, ii.
46
cJothhig, verbs of, their regiriaen, ii, 44
Cn, what Homau name these letters
stand for, ii. 227
CO, final, its preterite and supine, i,
220
colon, the, observations on, ii. 293
rom, its quantity in composition, ii. 506
comhaiing, or fghting, verbs of, their
government, ii. 203
comma, observations on the, ii. 292
commandmg, verbs of, their government,
ii. 27; how the que which follows
them is rendered, ii. 9
common, gender, i. 1, 3
compat alive, the, agrees with adjectives,
ii. 87 ; not with all, ibid. ; signifies
sometimes more than the superla-
tive, ii. 59, 60 ; its government,
ii. 55, 56, 57, 182, 194; declen-
sion, i. 105 ; without the positive,
ii. 88
Comjiarative .
Table of Mattkrj.
comparative in or, of what gender, i. 34.
ii. 86
compound words, preserse tlie qnatility
of their simple, ii. D04 ; did not
heretofore change the vowel of tiit?
simple in verbs, i. '260 ; in the
names of places, they follow the
rules of their primitives, ii. 52.
See Verts.
condemnins, verbs of, their government,
ii. 6'i
cortdition. See State.
f.njui-alions, of, i. 171 ; rules for the
(jrst, i. nSj second,!. 187 ; third,
i. 206 ; f lurth, i. '282
ton junctions, whether thej' have always
the same thing before as after
them, ii. 153; of the same degree
of comparison, i/»'f/.,- wliich require
the indicative, and which the sub-
junctive, ibid.
sonjtinctions, of the same import, joined
together, ii. 157
ccnjunclions, copulative, used to form
comparison, ii. 158
conjunclio/is, negative, remarks concern-
ing, ii. 155
eunsoiiants, observations concerning
them, ii. 2C2 to '267
contesting, verbs of, their government,
ii. '203
shoTiambus, compound feet of verses,
ii. 369
COS and coss, what these letters signify,
ii. 290
countries, adjectives of, are not com-
pared, ii. 88
erases, of the figure so called, i. 327
Crelick, feet of verse ; particulars of,
ii. 367
fycle, the solar; particulars of, ii. 244
D.
n, its affinity with T, ii. 273 ; with L
and R, ii. 284 ; added to some
words, ibid. ; its quantity in com-
position, ii. 305
i), what Roman name it signifies, ii. 227
d, final, its gender, i. 30 ; its declen-
sion, i. 72 ; its ([uantity, ii. 337
dactyl, of the foot so called, ii. 366
e/alives, plural of the first declension, i.
64; of the second, i 67. 69; of
the third, i. 118; of the fourth, i.
123
datives, remarks on the, ii. 83 ; the
same as ablatives, ii. 83. 196,
197 ; what they denote, ii, 2. 25 ;
in the place of genitives, ii. 28;
of accusatives or ablatives, ii. 23.
196; governed by adjoi-tives un-
derstood, ii. '26 ; by nouns, ii. 25 j
by verbs, ii. 25; by passive verbs,
ii. 28. 68 ; whether governed by
tiio ijuestion vbi, ii. 52
duiis, of the ancients ; particulars of,
ii. 239
dec'ensioiis, their distinction, i. 59 ; the
first, i. 62 ; the second, i. 65 ; the
third, i. 70; the fourth, i. 123;
the fifth, i. 124
declensions, difierent, of the same noun,
i. 147
delivering, verbs oT, their government
ii. <22. 67 ;'
denvr, Roman, its value, ii. 235
denominative verbs, i. 31 1
debouerlls, verbs. See Vtrhs.
derivalii-is, whether they prt='serve the
quantity of tiieir ptimitives, ii.
303. See Vabs.
desideralives, or verbs of desire, i 312 ;
how the que is rendered which fol-
lows them, ii, 9 ; their govern-
ment, ii. 22
di, its quantity in composition, ii. 305
di, preterite ; how to find its present, i.
323
Devil, the root of this word, ii. 278
diastole, particulars of this figure, ii.
380,381
dieresis, particulars of this figure, i.
3'28. ii. 380
difference, nouns signifying difference j
their government, ii, 67
digamma, particulsrs of, and its proi
nunciation, ii. 269, 282
dignity. See Ulate.
dimeters, verses, particulars of, ii. 293
diminutives, their gender, i. 8 ; their
termination, ii. 89. See Verbs,
diphthongs, particulars of, ii, 259, 260,
261 ; their quantity, ii. 297
disiiositiciii. See Order,
d stance, of the questions of distance;
their government, ii 53. 181, 182.
distance, verbs of, their government, ii.
67. 181
(7o, final, its declea^ion, i. 71 ; its con-
jugation, i. 227
doubtful gender, i. 1 , 2
das, adjectives of this termination do
not admit of comparison, ii. 88
das, participles in, the tense ivhich it in-
dicates, ii. 137 ; its signiQcation ac-
tively, or passively, ii. 140; when
it agrees with the substantive,
ibid. ; its government, ibid. ; put
in the ablative absolute, itiid.
E.
•■ *•
Table of Matters.
E, observations on this letter, ii. 250 j
used instead of I, ii, 25'Z
e, Greek tla, its pronuncialioii, ii. 251
e, epsilon, for «, ii. '272
e, its quantity in composition, ii. 505.
307; in tiie inciease of verbs, ii.
313 ; of nouns, ii. 327
€, ending of tlie vocative of the second
declension, i. (53 j of the dative
of the fiftli, i. 1 25 ; of the genitive,
ibid.
e, wlietlier the genitive of this ending is
used in the question uhi, ii. 51
e, final, its g( n'lf r, i. 25 ; its declen-
sion, i. C2. 71 J its quantity, ii.
330
eclhlipsis, particulars of, ii. 3"4
ei, nearly the same as the long I, i.
104. 116. ii. 118. 253; ending of
the plural of the second declcnsiou,
i. 65
ei, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii.
260
e/j, instead of «, i. 104. 116
elegiac verses, particulars of, ii. 402
ellipsis, of the figure so called, i. 11, ii.
168
en, a French particle; its use, ii. 50
en, final, its genitive, i. 73
enallage, particulars concerning, ii. 195
endiiicks, draw the accent upon the
precediiit; syll'ibh', ii. 357
eo, termination nf verbs uf the second
conjusaiioii, i. 206
epenthesis, wliat it is, i. 327 ; that of the
genitives plural of the third de-
clension, i. 1 16
epicene nouns, particulars of them, i.
5. bb. ii 82
epilrite, 1st, 2.1. 3d, 4th, of the feet of
verses sn called, ii. 569
epoclis, the most remarkable, ii. 245
er, nouns in ; iheir gi nder, i. 32
er, adjectives in ; their ablatives, i, 103
er, termination of the second declension,
i. 65. 67
eram, increase of verbs ; its quantity,
ii. 314
erim, increase of verbs; its quantity,
ii. 314
«;«, increase of nouns ; its qnantitv, ii.
320
ero, increase of verbs ; its quantity, ii.
314
erunt, increase of verbs; its quantity,
ii, 314
es, nouns in ; their gender, i. 36 ; de-
clension, i, 62, 78. 120 ; quantity,
ii. 340 ; quantity of its increase,
ii. 322
eu, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii,
259
evtnl, verbs denoting some event ; how
to render the que which follows
them, ii. 9
eus, terminatiun of the second declen-
sion, i. G5 ; of diminutives, ii. 90
ex, of the Greeks, imitated by the La-
tins, ii. 193
ex, final, of what gender, i. 52
excelling, verbs of, their government, i.
27
F, mistaken fur E, ii. 95 ; its affinity
with V, ii. 268; with P, ii. 270;
with B, 284 ; what it signifies
when alone, ii, 289
feel, of veises; particulars of, ii, 365
to 370
ff, whatthf-y signify, ii. 290
fearincr, verbs of; how to render the que
which follows them, ii. 9
feminine gender, i. 1. 3 ; see Ge7ider.
festivals, names of, their declension, i.
118
fcrgetling, verbs of; their regimen, ii.
33
freedmcn, observations on their names,
ii. 229
fruits, names of, their gender, i. 21
future, expressed by the subjunctive, ii.
107; taken for the imperative, ii.
109; manner of expressing the
future of the infinitive, ii, 112;
ancient tertnination of the future
of the third and fourth conjugations,
ii. 107
G, its relation with C, ii. 273. 284;
with ,1, ii. 274
garde, of two genders, i. 9
gender, how known; i. 1. 10; their
disuilies with each other, ii. 9, 10,
11
gender, of the termination, changed
into that of the signification, or
vice versa, i. 7. 9
gender, different in the adjective and in
the substantive, ii. 188, 189
genders, when several, with which the
adjective must agree, ii. 10
genitive, what it is formed of, i. 59 ; of
the
Table of Matters.
the first, i. 63 ; of the second, i.
66; of the third declension, i. TO,
71. 106
ger:ilke, what it denotts, and what go-
verns it, ii. 1 ; governed by parti-
cles, ii. 13; by prepositions, ii.
172 J by adjectives, ii. 16. 20,21.
173; by verbs, ii. 22, &c. 173;
by those of remembering and for-
getting, ii. 53 ; by substantives, ii.
52 ; why some are found in the
question ubl, ii. 51 ; after the
comparative, ii. 57. 194; its go-
vernment, ii. 15, &c. ; has the
same force as the possessive, ii. 52
genitive, of the thing, governed by the
verb, ii. 32
genitive, plural, whose adjective is in
another case; how to understand
it, ii. 173
genitive, common with the Greeks, ii.
22 ; borrowed by the Latins, ii.
63; how it snay be resolved, ii.
193
gerunds, remarks upon, ii. 125; their
government, ii. 18. 125, 126;
what they add to the signification
of the verb, ii, 126; supplied by
nouns proceeding from verbs, ii.
12S ; whether taken actively or
passively, ibid. ; their declension,
ii. 1 29
gerunds, of the third and of ^the fourth
conjugation, take u instead of e, i,
310
gi, preterite; how to find its present,
i. 323
ginta, nouns in ; quantity of, ii. 350
gladiator, mark or token of his liberty,
ii. 180
glyconic verse ; particulars of, ii. 396
gn, bow pronounced by the ancients,
ii. 274
go, final, its declension, i. 72 ; its con-
jugation, i. 240
goddesses, names of; their gender, i.
3,4
gods, names of; their gender, i. 3
government, distinction between it and
attraction, ii. 192, 193
governments, resolved by the preposi-
tions, ii. 42
gi/j, preterite ; howtolind its present,
1. 32j
H.
H, its value, use, &c., ii. 279 ; its ori-
gin and relation with the digamma,
ii. 289
h, what number it signified, ii. 2S2
Hellenism, or Greek phrase, ii. 192
helping, verbs of; their government, ii.
27
he ndecfisy liable verse j particulars of,
ii. 397
herbs, their gender, ii. ISO
heroic verse; particulars of, ii. 590
heteroclites, or irregular nouns; parti-
culars of, i. 126
hours, how the ancients reckoned them,
ii. 239
hours, canonical, ii. 240
hixameler verse ; particulars of, Ii.
3S2, &c. ; of neglected hexame-
ters, ii. 387
ho, verbs in ; their conjugation, i. 251
Horace, praise nf hia satires, ii. 387
hs, what they signify, ii. 235. 290
hurting, verbs of; their government, il,
26
hyperbaton, of the figure so called, ii.
190
hypercataleciic verse ; particulars of,
ii. 373
hypallage, concerning this figure, ii.
191
/, used for E, il. 252 ; why and how
lengthened, ii. 253; whether it be
sometimes a double letter, ii. 303 ;
put fore/, i. 105. 1 16 ; suppressed,
ii. 284
i, termination of different cases of the
second declension, i. 65. 68
i, plural; its gender, i. 23; its quan-
tity, ii. 332 ; in composition, ii.
508 ; in increase, ii. 315. 327
iambk verse and feet; particulars of,
ii. 366. 368. 390
ides, concerning them, ii. 241
imitation, verbs of, i. 311
imperfect of the subjunctive; its va-
rious significations, ii. 107
imperative, taken for the future, ii. 1 09 ;
for the passive verb, ii. 109; ob-
servations on the imperatives, i.
308 ; its quantity, ii. 328. 332
impersonal verbs. See Verbs.
imus, ending of adjectives not com-
pared, ii. 88 J their quantity, ii.
351
in, its quantity in composition, ii. 306
incheativc verbs. See Verbs.
increase, of nouns; their quantity, ii,
319; of verbs, ii. 312
increase, in the singular; preserved in
the plural, ii, 327
inde-
Table of Matters.
indtclinahle nouns; their {render, i. '22;
obseivati ns on, i 16V
ind'tcaiivc, used for llie siibjunctiTC, ii.
I OS
indictinn, what it is, ii. 243
injinilivc, of the, ii. 109 ; how called by
the; ancients, ii. 113, 114; in<l<-fi-
Yiile ill regard to tenses, ii. 110.
113; its use, ii. 148; the v<rb
which f illows aiioliXT must alw.iys
be in this niooil, ii 114; how
found aftir verbs of niulion, ii. 114
vifirMve, its gender, i. 2'2 ; considered
as a noun derived froiu a verb, ii.
8. .'31. 34, 3.T. 113 1G9, 170, 18'2 ;
sii|i»)lied by the supine, ii. 34;
subjlituted for the cerund, ii. 128;
in the ["artlcipl-', ii. 140
injinilwr, may agree with a noininaiive,
ii. 8. 1C9 ; what case should pre-
cede it, ii. 8
»»?/?».i/ re, after a noun, ii. 194
injiniiv, when alone, the verb that go-
verns it is understood, ii. I TO; the
same of a preposition, ii. 114
inis, an increase of noun ; its quantity,
ii. 319
instrumi-nl, noun? signlfyiofr the, in what
are put, ii. 70. 181, 1S2
interjeclir.ns, their soverninent, ii. 74
inlransttive. See ]'rrhs.
inversion of words, ii. 190
m, verbal nouns in, used for the gerund,
ii. 127
io, a diminulive termination, ii. 90
I'inian, long and short, verFes, ii. 368
ir, nouns in ; <if "bat gender, i. 33
ir, termination of the second declension,
i. fi5
is, nnun? in, their gender, i. 38, 39 ; its
quantity, ii. 'i4'2 ; quantity of its
increase, ii. 323; its declension, i.
80. 103. 121
is, ending of the dative and ablative
plural of the second declension, i.
69
i^cus, a dimiuntive termination, ii. 90
islands, their gender, i 14
•Hum, terminatiim of the supine ; its
quantity, ii. 312
ium, genitive plural, i. 109
ins, genitive (f the second declension, i.
V)7 ; doul)tfnl, ii. 298
ji)i/i, termination of adjectives that are
not compared, ii. 88
J, whi ther it was a consonant witli
the ancients, ii. 262. 274 ; a dou-
ble consonant, ii, 265 ; reprcseu1e(i
by the diphthong //, ii. 26.>
Jubilee, years of; concerning, ii. 245
K.
ft', its properties, ii. 271
K, the Roinan i\ame it stands for, ii.
227
lata, of the Greeks, imitated by tlie
Latins., ii. 193
kingdoms, hov/ governed in the ques-
tions of place, ii. 47
L, changed into T>, ii. 266. 284; into
D, ii 284 ; suppressed in some
words, iln:l.
I, preceded by a consonant, makes the
preceding vowel doubtful, ii. .';02
/, final ; its sender, i. 29; il.- declen-
sion, i. 73; its quantity, ii .';"37
I, nouns \u ; the tMiaiitity of their in-
crease, ii. 318
L, the Roman name it stands fur, ii.
227
U, what they signify, ii. 290
Leonian verses; particular.s of, ii. 386
letters, their number, order, and divi-
sion, ii. 247; their gender, i.
8. 22; alterations made in them
by the ancients-, ii. 249. 284 ;
taken for the characters which
formed their name, ii. 272
letters, ilominical, ii. 244
letters, double, ii. 277 ; lengthen the
precedmg vowel, ii. 301
letters, capital ; their use, ii. 289
letters, reversed ; their signification, ii.
289
/.'//e;«, repeated ; their signification, ii.
290
letters, hissing, ii. 276; liquids, ii. 266.
301, 302 ; mute, ii. 267. :'01
letters, the directiqus or superscriptions
of, among the Latins, ii. 12
/i, preterite ; the inolhod of finc'ing- it.s
present, i. 323
liberty, huw the Romans gave it, ii.
180
limus. a superlative termination, ii. 87
liijiiids, letters, ii. 266. 301, 302
liquors, whether used in the plural, i.
LiO. 153
lo, final; its preterite and supine, i.
2.52
long, syllables, by their nature, ii. 295 ;
by position, ii. 295. 301; how
marked by the ancients, ii 267.
295.
Table of Matters.
255. 358 ; how to pronounce them,
ii. 295. 357
i«s, la, lum, a diminutive termination,
ii. 89
iMslre, what it is, ii. 243
M.
M, its pronunciation, ii. 266 ; its rela-
tions with B and P, ii. 270 ^ its
elision in verses, ii. 374
m, final ; its "render, i. 29; its quan-<
tity, ii. '^31
M, what Roman name it signifies, ii.
227 ; witii an accent, M' ibid,
intt, final ; its declension, i. 119
MAM. what these letters signify, ii.
228
manner, of a thing; in what case to be
put, ii. 70. 182
masculine, gender. See Gender
matter, adjectives of; that are not
compared, ii 83
matter, of whirh any thing is composed;
in what case to be put, ii. 69
measure, questions concerning ; their
government, ii. 53, 54. 182
meditative, verbs. See Verbs
men, names <.f ; of what gender, i. 3
metaplaim, of the figure of speech so
called, i. 327
metathesis, of the figure so called, i.
327
metals, names of; whether they have a
plural, i. 149
M. F., for what used by the Romans, ii.
289
mi, preterite ; how to find its present,
i. 323
minor, a termination of the imperative
out of use, ii. 109
M. M., for what used by the Rmafios,
ii. 290
M. N., for what used by the Romans, ii.
289 ;
mo, final of the third con'iugation ; its
preterite and supine, ii. 256
mode, potential ; how resolved, ii. 176
modes, of how many sorts, ii. 106
mohsse, feet of verse; particulars of,
ii. 366
months, of the Romans ; particulars of,
ii. 240
monosyllables, their quantity, ii. 332
motion, verbs of. See Verbs
mountains, their gender, i. 12. 14
mute, consonants j particulars of, ii.
267, &c.
Vw., II.
N.
N, its pronunciation, ii. 266, 267;
changed into L, ibid. ; into R and
S, ii. 267 ; in t, ii. 275 ; how pro-
nounced with C and G, ibid. ;
added, ii. 284
N, what name it indicates, ii. 227. 289
w, final ; its gender, i. 30 ; its declen-
sion, i. 73 ; its quantity, ii. 338 ;
quantity of the increase of nouns
in, ii. 319
names, of the Romans ; particulars of,
ii. 226, &c.
7iature, verbs expressing any eflfect of.
See Verbs
negative, the in Latin destroys that
which follows it, ii. 164, 165
negatives, whether two of them have the
value of an affirmative, ii. 155
neglecting, verbs of; their government,
ii. 22
neuter, gender. See Gender^ significa-
tion of the word, ii. 171 ; its rank
among the other genders, ibid, ;
bow adjectives of that gender are
to be imderstood which are joined
to other genders, ibid. ; the plural
of neuter nouns, i. 105
neuter, verbs. See Verbs
n?, preterite; how to find its present,
i. 323
night, its watches among the ancients,
ii. 240
720, termination of verbs of the third
conjugation; its preterite and su-
pine, i. 259
nominative, plural of the third declen-
sion, i. 104
nominative, with the Attics ; the same
as the vocative, ii. 83. 194 ; before
an infinitive, ii. 194; understood,
ii. 169. 174; in the first and se-
cond person, ii. 8
nominatives, of various terminations* i.
136
nones, of the ancients ; particulars con-
cerning, ii. 239
nmins, governing the genitive, ii. 51 ;
the dative, ii. 25 ; the ablative, ii.
61. 69
nouns, understood in Latin, ii. 176, 177
nouns, common to two genders, i. 1.
ii.79
nowwj, compound ; their declension, i. 60
nouns, correlative, understood, iL 173
nouns, doubtful, i. 1, 2. ii. 81
nouns, epicene, i. 55. ii. 82
nouns, of place ; in the genitive with a
prepositioQ, ii. 173
Hh
nouns.
Table of Matters.
nilhoiit plural, i. 13-i,
government, ii.
differ from the
Sec Words, Sub-
nouni, proper
135
nouns, verbal J their
IS. 21. 132;
participle, ii. 21.
slanlives
ns, ending of the third declension, i. ST
ns, participle in; what tcuse it indi-
cates, ii. 1 34
nlo, plural »jf the imperative, ii. 109
7mmljer,\.hc Golden; particulars of, ii.
243
number, ordinal, ii. S5
number, adjectives of; which are not
compared, ii. 88
number, nouns of; remarks upon, ii.
84, 85
numbers, of the Romans ; particulars
concerning, ii. 233
O.
0, observations on this letter, iii 254 ;
its affinity with A, E, and U, ii.
255, 256. 234 j put for au, ii. 284;
added, ibid. ; suppressed, ibid.
0, final; its gender, i. 26; its declen-
sion, i. 71 ; its cfuantity, ii. 334;
in increase, ii 316. 319. 324; in
composition, ii. 308
o, omicron, for ou, ii. 272
o, pure and impure, i. 319
ob, its quantity in composition, ii. 306
obeying, verbs of; their government, ii,
26
ce, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii.
261 ; put for u, ii. 284
vi, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii.
261 ; put for v, ii. 284
olympiads, of the Greeks; particulars
of, ii. 243
cm, in ancient writers used for um, i. 65
vmne, called the gender of adjectives,
i. 6
ou, tiie French; how used, ii. 123;
how rendered in Latin and Greek,
ibid.
on, termination of the second declen-
sion, i. 65 ; its quantity, ii. 338,
339
r.nis, increase in ; its quantity, ii. 319
Onomutcpcia , what it is, ii. 365
or, nouns in ; their quantity, ii. 339 ;
quantity of their increase, ii. 320;
their gender, i. 34. ii. 86
orcZ^r, nouns denoting; why in the ab-
lative, ii. 182
ortftography, to be observed ia Latin,
ii. 285
05, final; lis gender, i. 42; its dtclca-
sion, i. 65 ; its quantity, ii. 344
OS, ending of the genitive of the third
declension, i. 120
OS, nouns in; quantity of their increase,
i. 120. ii. 323
OS, in ancient writers used for us, i. 65
OS, pure ; what it means, i. 120
SlTi, a Greek preposition imitated iu
Latin, li. 194
P, its affinity with B, ii. 268 ; with M,
and F, or PH, ii. 270; added to
some words, ii. 284 ; corruptly, i.
257. ii. 268
P, what Roman name it indicates, ii.
227
paragoge, a figure of speech, i. 327
paienlkesis, a figure of speech, ii. 191
pari, nouns expressing a, in the accusa-
tive, ii. 182 ; of what case, ii. 69.
182
participle, in what it differs from the ver-
bal noun, ii, 21 ; the time it indi-
cates, ii. 134; whether it takes
the tenses of the verb sum to wliich
it is joined, ii. 137; in what it
differs from the adjective, ii. 13i
ijarticiple, what it becomes by composi-
tion and by com|)arison, ii. 134
participle, signification of the, in verbs
common and deponents, ii. 138;
of impersonal verbs, ii. 141
participles, in us, whose verbs are rare
or unusual, ii. 141. See dus, rus
partaking, verbs of; their government,
ii. 22
pa! tides, their quantity in composition,
ii. 305
particles, understood, ii. 175
particles, that require a genitive, ii. 18 ;
which govern different cases, ii. 73
Jiarliiive, noun; its government, ii. 55,
59
passions, between two opposite terms, ii.
160, 161
passive, verbs. See Veibs
passvje, expression; affected in Latin,
ii, 123
P. C, what they signify, ii 290
pentameter, verse; particulars of, ii-
388
peon, first, second, third, and fourth
kind of feet, ii. 569
increases the comparison, ii. 58.
158
peffect
per.
Table of Matters.
perfecl, in rim ; is taken for the future,
ii. 107
ntp;, of the Greeks imitated by the
Latins, ii. 193
period, or full point, particulars of, ii.
293
period, Julian, concerning the, ii. 245
periode, in French, of two genders, i. 2
person, tiie name of the, uoverned in
the accusative by the verb, ii. 31
persons, of their difference in dignitj'',
ii. 9. to 12
pit, ils |ironunciation, ii. 281
phiileucian, verse ; particulars of, ii.
397
pherecral\us, verse; particulars of, ii.
390
pi, preterite ; how to find its present,
i. 3'23
pieces, of poetry ; their gender, i. 1
pio, termination of the third conjuga-
tion ; its preterite and supine, i.
209
plenty, nouns denoting ; their govern-
ment, ii. 62
pleonasm, of the figure of speech so
called, ii. 184
pleXf ending of adjectives that are not
compared, ii. 88
pluperfect, of the subjunctive, partakes
of the future, ii, 108
plural, of nouns which want the, i. 149
plural, nouns, their gender, i. 23
plurals, of the third declension, i. 104 ;
of neuters, i. 105
plurals, quantity of their increase, ii.
327
po, termination of the third conjuga-
tion ; its preterites and supine, i.
263
point, of interrogation and admiration,
ii. 294
positive, with the government of the
comparative, ii. 55. 148, 149
possessive, adjectives ,• are not com-
pared, ii. 88
possessive, pronouns; their construction,
ii. 97 ; of the ambiguity of their
genitive with a substantive, ii. 97.
126 ; do not receive adjectives,
ibid. ; have the force of the geni-
tive, ii. 52 : joined to a substan-
tive, may govern the genitive, ii.
17
poverty, nouns expressing ; their go-
vernment, ii. 62. IS'i
P. P., what they signify, ii. 2'j>0
praise, nouns of; in what case they are
put, ii. 19
prepusUions, French ; indicate those
which are understood in Latin, ii.
19
prepositions, their quantity in composi-
tion, ii. 305 ; joined in composi-
tion, ii. 152; to two verbs, il/'d. ;
derived frjm nouns, ibid.
prepositions, which govern the infinitive,
ii. 114; have always a case, ii.
152; resolve almost all govern-
ments, ii. 42. 48 ; of the accusa-
tive, ii. 31. 35. 40. 44. 173. 193;
of the ablative, ii. 33,39,40; of
the genitive, ii. 173 ; preserve their
government when coinpounded
with verbs, ii. 43; understood in
discourse, ii. 19, 20. 174. 181,
182 ; the cause of singular govern-
ments, ii. 193, 194
present, used for the past, ii. 136
present, of the subjunctive, partaketh of
the future, ii. 107
preterite, its conjugation, i. 171 ; from
what it is formed, ibid. ; when
wanting, the supine is also wanted,
i. -177; bow to find its present,
i. 3 1 4 ; of verbs in the preterite
with the characteristic of the pre-
sent, i. 323 ; which retains the
vowel of the present, i. 315. ii.
120; its analogy, i. 309. 314;
often admits of a syncope, i. 315 j
its irregularities, ilnd.
preterites, which proceed from different
verbs, i, 310
preterites, formed by the participle, ii.
143
preterites, which redouble the first sylla-
ble, i. 173; their quantity, ii. 309
preterites, their quantity, ii. 309 ; those
of two syllables, ibitl.
preterites, of verbs passive ; how form-
ed, i. 177
price, nouns of; their governmen-t, ii.
65. 182
privation, nouns of; their government,
ii. 62. 182
pro, its quantity in composition, ii. 306
pruceleusmalic, feet of verse; particulars
of, ii. SC8
pronouns, remarks upon, Ii. 90, 91 ;
difference in their signification,
ibid. ; their cases and declensions,
ii. 92; their construction, ii. 96,
97 ; may govern the genitive, ii.
16, See Possessive and Relative
pronouns, reciprocal ; to what they
refer, ii. 75 ; in what case" the re-
latives have the same eflect, ibl/.
pronouns, improperly taken for pleo-
nasms, ii. 1S5
H h 2 proram-
Table of Matters.
pronunciation, of the Latin, i, IIG. ii.
353. 361
proper, names; their gender, i. 3. 10
property, nouns implying; in what case
to be put, ii. 19
prolhesis, what it is, i. 327
provinces, names of; their gender, i.
14 ; how governed in the questions
of place, ii. 46. 181
ps, termination of the third declension ;
its genitive, i. 86
punctuation, treatise of, ii. 291, &c.
pi/rrfuc, feet of verse; particulars of,
ii.366
Q.
3, its affinity with C, ii. 270. 284 ; its
use, ii. 271 ; whether it should
pass for a double letter, ii. 272
2, what Roman name it signifies, ii.
227
quantity, hovf it was marked by the
ancients, ii. 249 ; how it is now
marked, ii. 295
quarrelling, verbs of; their government,
ii. 203
questions, of place, ii. 25 ; their go-
vernment, ii. 182; government of
those concerning time, measure,
and distance, ii. 53
qui, preterite ; how to find the present,
i. 323
quo, termination of the third conjuga-
tion ; its preterite and supine, i.
263
remembering, verbs of; their gOTremv
ment, ii. 33
repelling, verbs of ; their government,
ii. 22
resisting, verbs of; their government,
ii. 26. 203
rk, its pronunciation, ii. 281
Rhone, why of the masculine gender^
i. 8
ri, preterite ; how to find the present, i.
323
rim, perfect in ; taken for the future,
ii. 107
rimus, termination of the future ; its
quantity, ii. 316
rip, of the third conjugation ; its prete-
rite and supine, ii. 211
ris, termination of the subjunctive ; its
quantity, ii. 343
ritis, termination of the future ; its
quantity, ii. 316
rivers, of what gender, i. 12, 13
TO, of the third conjugation ; its prete-
rite and supine, i. '■ZQS
Romans, particular observations on their
names, &c., ii. 226, &c.; on their
pronunciation of the Latin, i. 116.
ii. 353. 361 ; of their arithmetical
characters and mode of reckoning,
ii. 233
rs, termination of the third declension ;
its genitive, i. 87
rus, particij)les in ; the tense they ex-
press, ii. 112. 137; their agree-
ment with the substantive, ii. 112
R.
R, changed into L, D, S, ii. 266 ; into
S, ii. 176; into D, ii. 284; omit-
ted in words, ii. 284
r, preceded by a consonant, renders the
preceding vowel doubtful, ii. 301
r, final ; its declension, i. 74; its quan-
tity, ii. 338
re, its quantity in composition, ii. 305
reason, the, of a thing; in what case it
is put, ii. 70
receiving, verbs of; their government,
ii. (i7
lelative, its natnre, ii. 92; how itagrces
with the substantive, ii. 4; with
the antecedent understood, ii. 172.
186; jdins the preposition to which
it belongs, ii. 148; put for a reci-
procal pronoun, ii. 75
relatives, of quantity or quality; their
agreement with the substantive,
ii. 7
S, its pronunciation, ii. 276; its affinity
with T, ii. 270; with R, ii. 271.
284; with D, ihid. ; added, iZiirf. ;
suppresseil in some words, ibid,;
formerly an elision, ii. 345. 375 ;
taken for/, ii. 95
J, final; its quantity, ii 338; its gen-
der with another consonant, i. 49;
quantity of its increase, ii. 324
Sapphic, verse ; particulars of, ii. 398
S. C, what they signified with the Ro-
mans, ii. 290
scazon, verse; particulars of, ii. 393
SCO, of the third conjugation; its pre-
terite and .<upine, i. 223
se, its quantity in composition, ii. 305
Seine, its gender, i. 8
semicolon, its use, ii. 294
SER, what name it signified with the
Romans, ii. 228
sesterces, of the Romans; particulars
of, ii. 235
SEX
§
Table of Matters.
S^EX, what name it signified, ii. 228
shame, nouns expressincc j their case, ii,
19
ships, names o(; their gender, i. 15
«", preterite, how to find its present, I.
321 to 324.
fi^er, root of this French word, ii. 270
singular, nouns which want the, i. 155
slaves, observations on the names given
them by the Romans, ii. 229
so, termination of the third conjugation^
its preterite and supine, i. 272
& P., what name it signified with the
Romans, ii. 227
space, of time ; its government, ii. 53
spondaic verse, particulars of, ii. 383
spondee, feet of verse; particulars of,
ii.366. 368
S. P. S. R., what they signified with
the Romans, ii. 290
ssi, preterite, how to find its present,
i. 321, 322, 323
st, added to some words, ii. 284
siale, nouns of j why in the ablative, ii.
182
tier, what this termination indicates,
i. 21
stones, precious ; their gender, i. 8
stop, a full ; observations upon, ii. 293 1
strophes, stanzas so called ; particulars
of, ii. 401
sui, its quantity in composition, ii. 306
subject, nouns which indicate the ; why
in the ablative, ii. 1S2
subjunctive, what it expresseth, ii. 107 ;
supplied by the indicative, ii. 108
substantive, supplied by the infinitive,
ii. 113
substantives, their gender, i. 3; some-
times vary their gender and be-
come adjectives, ii. 87. See Verbs,
Words, hiouns. Antecedent,
substantives, two, of the same significa-
tion in the same case, ii. 15 ; of
different significations, the second
in the genitive, ibid. ; how the ad-
jective agrees with them, ibid,
super, its quantity in composition, ii.
306
superlative, its government, ii. 55. 59,
60 ; if used in comparisons, ii. 61.
88 i sometimes less than the com-
parative, ii. 61
supines, particulars of, ii. 129; their
declension, ibid. ; how governed,
ii. 131, 132, 133; admit of an
adjective, ibid. ,• whether active or
passive, ibid. ; whether they de-
note any tense, ibid. ; how form-
ed, i. 171. 274; do not form the
verb, ibid. ; used for the infinitive,'
ii. 35; for the gerund, ii. 127;
its government, ii. 18 ; their quan-
tity, ii. 310
supines proceeding from various verbs,
i. 310; how to find their present,
i. 325
supines, verbs which have none, i. 177.
191
syllable, the last of verse ; its quantity,
ii. 34G
syllables, rules for putting them toge-
ther, ii. 290 •, their quantity, ir-
295. 300 ; divided into two, ii.
380; composed of two, ii. 380
syllables, the quantity of which are dis-
puted, ii. 347
syllepsis, figure of speech ; how used,
ii. 11. 185; simple, ii. 185; re-
lative, ii. 186; with a zeugma,
ii. 188; with an ellipsis, ii. 189j
with an hyperbaton, ii. 190
synalcephu, particulars of, ii. 375. 377
syncope, what it is, i. 327 ; of the verbs,
i. 177 ; of the nouns, i, 115, 116
synecdoche, what it is, ii. 45
synecphonesis, what it is, ii. 378
syntEresis, what it is, ii. 265. 296, 378
syntax, general distribution of, ii. 1 ;
rules of, ii. 3, &c.
syntax, figurative; concerning, ii. 167
synthesis, figure of speech ; particulars
of, ii. 1 67
systole, what it is, ii. 380
T, its affinity with D, ii. 275. 2S4;
sounded like S, ii. 276
i final, its gender, i. 29 ; its quantity,
ii. 345
T, what Roman name it indicates, ii.
227
taking care, verbs of; their govern-
ment, ii. 22
ieaclwig, verbs of ; their goi^iffinent,
ii. 45
tenses, remarks on the, ii. 106
ter, ending of the third declension; its
genitive, i. 7G
Tei entianus-Maurus, at what period he
flourished, ii. 271
termination, different in the nominative,
i. 136
tetrameter verse, particulars of, ii. 393 ;
imperfect, ii. 595
th, how pronounced, ii. 281
that, the particle ; how rendered after
verbs, ii. 8
theriaque,
Table of Matters.
ihenaque, of two genders, i. 2
things, inanimate j in what gender
their adjective to be put, ii, 1 0,
11
TI, what Roman name is indicated by
these letters, ii. 2'27
ii, preterite ; how to find its present,
i. 324
time, its division according to the an-
cients, ii. 239, &c.
time, adjectives of, that are not com-
pared, ii. 88
time, questions ufj their government,
ii. 53. 181, 182
lio, ending of the third conjugation ; its
preterite and supine, i. 21 1
tmesis, what it is, ii. 190
toga virilis, at what age taken by the
Romans, ii. 226
tor, nouns in ; form their feminine in
trix, ii. 81
trees, gender of their names, i. 18, 19.
ii. 180
iribrac, feet of verse j particulars of, ii.
566
trimeter \erse, particulars of, ii. 393;
imperfect, ii. 395
triphthongs, whether there are any, ii.
263
trix, the feminine of nouns in tor, ii.
81
trochaic verse, particulars of, ii. 394
trochee, feet of verse ; particulars of,
ii. 366. 368
trompeile, in French, of two genders,
i. 9
trope, a figure of rhetoric, ii. 191
trouble — punishment, nouns implying;
in what ease to be put, ii. 69. 181
iuwj, termination of trees; what it de-
notes, i. 21
U.
U, its pronunciation, ii. 255. 364;
doubled, ii. 284; put for e, i, o,
y, ii. 284; its quantity, ii. 335;
in composition, ii. 308; in in-
crease, ii. 317. 32"; accompanies
the Q, ii. 273
tibHS, dative plural of the fourth de-
clension, i. 123
udis, increase, its quantity, ii. 324
ni, preterite , how to lind its present,
i. 318.324
um, ending of the second declension, i.
65; of names of trees what it im-
plies, i. 20, 21
vm, genitive plural, i. 106, &c.
union and connexion of words (verbs
*
which denote the) their govern-
ment, ii. 13
uo, the termination of the third conju-
gation ; its preterite and supine,
i. 213
7<7- final, its gender, i. 31 ; its declen-
sion, i. 65. 77 ; quantity of the
increase of nouns in, ii. 321. 324
us final, its gender, i. 43. 43 ; its de-
clension, i, 65. 83 ; its quantity,
ii. 344 ; quantity of its increase, ii.
323, 324
vs, adjectives in ; without comparative,
ii. 89
us, participle, what time it indicates,
ii. 135
us, deponents, whose participle in, is
taken passively, ii. 138
us, nouns in ; whose verbs are rare, ii;
141
ut, different uses of this particle, ii,
160
7i.lis, increase; its quantity, ii. 324
utum, supine ; its quantity, ii. 312
V.
V, its pronunciation, ii. 268 ; its affi-
nity with V,, ii. 269. 284; whether
a consonant with the ancients, ii.
262 ; whether one now, ii. 303
vahiing, verbs of, their government, ii.
65
veo, its preterite and supine, i. 197
ufrAaZ nouns, their government, ii. 18.
21. 132; how differ from the par-
ticiple, ii. 21
verbs, of their nature and signification,
ii. 98; of the case they require
before them, ii. 7 ; with which
they agree when with two substan-
tives, ii. 15; which govern the
genitive, ii. 21. 172; the dative,
ii. 25, 26; two datives, ii. 29;
the accusative, ii. 29. 33. 43. 70 ;
the ablative, ii. 61. 70 ; of different
governments, ii. 43, 44 ; a list of,
ii. 200, &c. ; which make their
preterite by the participle, ii. 141;
when two- come together, the se-
cond put in the infinitive, ii. 34;
of the same termination, but which
vary in the conjugation, or signifi-
cation, ii. 168 ; understood, ii.
168. 170. 173. 181
verbs absolute and active, or intransi-
tive and transitive; a list of, ii. 99
verbs active, their government, ii. 29,
30 ; which are taken in an abso-
lute sense, ii. 100
verbs
Table of Matters.
verbs adjective, what they are, ii. 9S
verbs corapound, i. 312 ; their conjuga-
tion, i. 173 ; their govewiment, ii.
43
verbs defective, particulars of, ii. 1 1 8,
&c.
verbs denominative, particulars of, i.
311
verbs deponent, their conjugation, i.
293 ; their participle, ii. 1 38 ;
taken passively, a list of, ii. 102;
ending in o, or in or, a list of, ii.
105
verbs derivative, i, 310
verbs diminutive, i. 312
verbs frequentative, i. 31 1
rer6j impersonal, their nature, ii. 122 j
whether wanting the persons and
moods we imagine, ii. 123, 124 ;
of their participle, ii. 141 j their
conjugation, i. 307; their govern-
ment, ii. 26. 31. 43; their nomi-
native, ii. 33
verii inceptive, i. 311; their conjuga-
tion, i. '226
verbs intransitive, ii. 99
verbs transitive, ii. 99
verbs desiderative, i. 312 ; their conju-
gation, i. 291
laerhs of motion, followed by the supine
rather tliau the infinitive, ii. 35 ;
government of those compounded
with z/z, ii. 31 ; why followed by
the infinitive, ii. 114
<oerbs, expressive of a natural effect, as
rain, thunder, &c., ii. 169
' verbs neuter, what they are, i. 191 ; if
without the supine, i. 192; two
sorts of, ii. 99 ; their dovernraent,
ii. 13. 28. 30. 95. 196; which
seem to have a passive significa-
tion, i. 305
verbs neutro-passive, their conjugation,
i. 304 ; their government, ii. 68
verbs passive, govern nothing of them-
selves, ii. 67 ; taken actively, a
list of, ii. 101 ; their imperative,
ii. 109; their government, ii. 66;
followed by a dative, ii. 28. 68
verbs substantive, what, ii. 98; under-
stood, ii. 35 ; origin and irregu-
larity, ii. 115; take the tense of
the participles to which they are
joined, ii. 138
verses, Latin ; quantity of their last
syllable, ii, 346 ; particulars of,
ii, 371 ; manner of scanning them
I and of the figures used therein, ii.
i374; of the chief species of, ii.
3S2i of compositions in, ii. 400;
of one sort of metre, ii. 401 ; of
different metres and their division,
ii.401
■cerses. Lyric, and those relative to
them; particulars of, ii, 396
vi, preterites, how to find their pre-
sents, i. 316, 324; their quantity,
ii. 310
Virgil, name of the village he was born
in, ii. 69
vo, of the third conjugation ; its pre-
terite and supine, i. 2S0
vocative, remarks on the, ii. 83 ; that of
the second declension, i. 68 ; never
governed by any thing, ii. 2
vOTxels, long and short, ii. 248; their
elision in verse, ii. 375 ; some-
times omitted, ii. 377. See Syria-
l^pha.
cote e/j, of their union, ii, 378; how to
distinguish them from diphthongs,
ii. 291 ; their quantity when be-
fore other vowels, ii. 297
W.
Wailing, or expecting, verbs of ; govern-
ment of, ii. 67
■weeks, of the ancients, ii. 240
winds, of what gender, i. 12
women, their names v/ith the Romans,
ii. 229 ; signified by inverted
letters, ii. 289 ; their gender,
i. 3
-juord, cut in two, ii. 190. See Tmesii.
word, understood, as expressed before,
ii. 183; or otherwise, ibid.; in
the enumeration of parts, ibid.
See Adjective, Noun, Substantive,
Vei bs.
words, which change in their gender and
number, ii. 185. See Syllepsis.
■words, Greek, their quantity, ii. 299,
300
X, its value, i. 316. 320. ii, 277 ;
lengthen the preceding vowel, ii.
301
X final, its gender, i, 51; its declen-
sion, ii. 89; quantity of its in-
crease, ii. 325
xi, preterite ; how to find its present, .
319, 320. 322
xo, of the third conjugation; its prete-
rite and supine, i. 281
Y.
Table of Matters.
ii. 342; its declension, i. 121,
Y. 122
1', its pronunciation, ii. 256, 257, 258 Z.
y final, its gender, i. 22 j its quantity,
ii. 533. 335 Z, its value, ii. 278 ; its affinity with
year, the Roman, ii. 242 ; actual, ii. G, ibid. ; lengthens the preceding
243; sahbatic, ii. 245 vowel, ii. 301
yr, nouns in j quantity of their increase, zeugma, what it is, ii. 1 1 j particulars
ii. 321 of, ii. 168. 183 ; joined to the syN
ys final, its gender, i. 39 j its quantity, lepsis, ii. 188
\^
\
THE END.
Printed by T. C. HANSARD, Peterborough Court, Fleet Street, London.
I
mm'
f^ _^ jOf-S^
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA . •"■>
university of Camornia
WON-pNEWABLE
DUE 2 WKS FROM DATE kcEIVED
Fori
^K
^. i«i^^^^
i'fcl'-snB'
•.,^MO(r^..
fVr-^-
\im^S9 I
u